Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference

NN43001-311
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Document status: Standard
Document version: 01.04
Document date: 23 May 2008

Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks

All Rights Reserved.

Sourced in Canada

LEGAL NOTICE

While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed
to in writing NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY
KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject
to change without notice.

Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian 1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 3

Contents
New in this release 13
Other 13
Revision History 13
New circuit cards for CS 1000 Release 5 14
How to get help 15
Getting help from the Nortel web site 15
Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center 15
Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code 15
Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller 16
Overview 17
Contents 17
Line cards 18
Trunk cards 44
Installation 46
Operation 47
Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55
Circuit card installation 61
Contents 61
Card slots - Large System 61
Circuit and installation 62
Precautions 64
Installing a circuit card 66
Acceptance tests 71
Contents 71
Introduction 71
Conference cards 71
Digitone receiver cards 74
Line cards 75
Multifrequency sender cards 75
Multifrequency signaling cards 76
Network cards 77
Trunk cards 77
Tone and digit switch cards 79

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 4 Contents

Option settings 81
Contents 81
Circuit card grid 82
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 83
NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 84
NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC 89
NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card 92
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 93
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 95
NT8D17 Conference/TDS card 96
NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC 96
NT8D22 System Monitor 97
NT8D22 jumper settings 101
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 101
QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card 104
QPC71 E and M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards 105
QPC414 Network card 105
QPC441 3-Port Extender cards 106
QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards 108
QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards 109
QPC471 Clock Controller card 110
QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card 111
QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card 111
QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card 113
QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards 114
QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards 114
QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card 115
QPC775 Clock Controller card 115
QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card 116
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card 119
Contents 119
Introduction 119
Physical description 121
Functional description 124
Electrical specifications 135
Operation 138
Connector pin assignments 142
Configuring the OPS analog line card 144
Application 147
NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card 161
Contents 161
Introduction 161

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents 5

Physical description 161

Functional description 164
Front panel connector pin assignments 165
NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards 169
Contents 169
Introduction 169
Physical description 170
Functional description 176
Electrical specifications 185
Installation and configuration 188
Clocking Requirement 223
Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable 223
Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 225
Applications 256
NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards 263
Contents 263
Introduction 263
Physical description 264
Functional description 268
Electrical specifications 272
Installation and Configuration 274
Installation 280
Clocking Requirement 290
Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable 290
Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 292
Applications 314
NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC) 317
Contents 317
Introduction 317
Physical description 318
Functional description 318
Electrical specifications 322
Configuration 323
NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card 325
Contents 325
Introduction 325
Physical description 326
Functional description 340
Architecture 350
Operation 355
NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card 363
Contents 363

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 6 Contents

Introduction 363
Applications 363
NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card 365
Contents 365
Introduction 365
MFC signaling 365
MFE signaling 367
Sender and receiver mode 368
Physical specifications 370
NT6D70 SILC Line card 373
Contents 373
Introduction 373
Physical description 375
Functional description 375
NT6D71 UILC line card 383
Contents 383
Introduction 383
Physical description 384
Functional description 384
NT6D80 MSDL card 389
Contents 389
Introduction 389
Physical description 390
Functional description 391
Engineering guidelines 396
Installation 401
Maintenance 408
Replacing MSDL cards 414
Symptoms and actions 415
System disabled actions 415
NT7D16 Data Access card 419
Content list 419
Introduction 420
Features 420
Controls and indicators 421
Dialing operations 422
Operating modes 426
Keyboard dialing 453
Hayes dialing 462
Specifications 472
System database requirements 475
Power supply 478

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents 7

Installing the Data Access card 479

Port configuration 481
Cabling 482
Backplane pinout and signaling 487
Configuring the Data Access card 490
Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC 494
Upgrading systems 494
NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards 499
Contents 499
Introduction 499
Physical description 501
Functional description 506
Electrical specifications 519
Digital line interface specifications 519
Connector pin assignments 524
Configuration 527
NT8D03 Analog Line card 533
Overview 533
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card 535
Contents 535
Introduction 535
Physical description 538
Functional description 541
Connector pin assignments 556
Configuration 558
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 567
Contents 567
Introduction 567
Physical description 571
Functional description 576
Operation 585
Electrical specifications 676
Connector pin assignments 686
Configuration 690
Applications 710
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 715
Contents 715
Introduction 715
Physical description 719
Functional description 723
Operation 747
Electrical specifications 772

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 8 Contents

Connector pin assignments 776

Configuration 784
Applications 795
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 801
Contents 801
Introduction 801
Physical description 802
Functional description 803
Connector pin assignments 805
Configuring the SDI paddle board 805
Applications 809
NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 821
Contents 821
Introduction 821
Physical description 822
Functional description 822
Connector pin assignments 824
Configuring the QSDI paddle board 825
Applications 828
NTAG26 XMFR card 841
Contents 841
Physical specifications 844
Introduction 844
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 849
Contents 849
Introduction 849
NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 849
NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card 859
Contents 859
Introduction 859
Physical description 860
Functional description 867
Architecture 869
NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card 879
Contents 879
Introduction 879
Physical description 880
Functional description 883
Architecture 885
NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard 903
Contents 903
Introduction 903

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents 9

Physical description 909

Functional description 910
NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card 923
Contents 923
Introduction 923
Physical description 924
Functional description 932
Architecture 933
NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard 953
Contents 953
Introduction 953
Physical description 955
Functional description 956
NTBK22 MISP card 961
Contents 961
Introduction 961
Physical description 961
Functional description 962
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card 967
Contents 967
Introduction 967
Physical description 968
Functional description 973
Architecture 975
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard 989
Contents 989
Introduction 989
Physical description 990
Functional description 992
Download operation 996
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards 1001
Contents 1001
Introduction 1001
Physical description 1002
Functional description 1003
Operation 1003
Electrical specifications 1005
Connector pin assignments 1006
Configuration 1006
Applications 1013
NTDK20 Small System Controller card 1017
Contents 1017

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 10 Contents

Introduction 1017
Memory 1019
100BaseT IP daughterboards 1020
PC card interface 1023
Security device 1023
SDI ports 1024
Conferencing 1025
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment 1025
NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card 1029
Contents 1029
Introduction 1029
Processor 1032
Ethernet ports 1032
External connections 1032
Internal connections 1032
Expansion daughterboards 1032
Backplane interface 1032
Serial data interface ports 1033
TTY default settings 1033
MGC serial port configuration change 1033
Faceplate LED display 1033
Faceplate LED display 1034
NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile
Card 1035
Contents 1035
Introduction 1035
Cabinet/chassis support 1038
Media storage 1039
Fixed media drive 1039
Removable media drive 1039
Hard disk drive 1039
Memory 1039
Ethernet interfaces 1039
ELAN 1039
HSP 1039
TLAN 1040
Serial data interface ports 1040
TTY parameters 1040
USB 2.0 port 1040
Security device 1040
Faceplate 1041
Faceplate buttons 1043
Reset 1043

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Contents 11

Init 1043
DIP switch 1043
LED indicators 1043
Status LED 1043
Active CPU LED 1043
Ethernet LEDs 1044
Removable and fixed media drive LEDs 1044
NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller
Daughterboards 1045
Contents 1045
Introduction 1045
Media Gateway Controller card 1045
Daughterboard configurations 1047
NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card 1049
Contents 1049
Introduction 1049
Ethernet ports 1050
External connections 1050
Internal connections 1050
Backplane interfaces 1050
Serial data interface ports 1051
TTY settings 1051
Faceplate LED display 1051
NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card 1053
Contents 1053
Introduction 1053
Physical description 1055
Functional description 1063
Software description 1065
Hardware description 1065
Architecture 1067
NTVQ01xx Media Card 1079
Contents 1079
Physical description 1079
Hardware architecture 1080
Functional description 1083
Survivability 1083
NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card 1085
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card 1089
Contents 1089
Introduction 1089
Physical description 1090

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 12 Contents

Functional description 1091

Connector pin assignments 1095
Configuring the ESDI card 1097
Applications 1101
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card 1103
Contents 1103
Introduction 1103
Physical description 1104
Functional description 1105
Connector pin assignments 1107
Configuring the QSDI card 1109
Applications 1113
The TDS/DTR card 1117
Contents 1117
Introduction 1117
Features 1117
Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol 1129
Contents 1129
Introduction 1129
Operation 1129
Frame structure 1130
LAPB balanced class of procedure 1131
Commands and responses 1131
Description of procedure 1132

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 13

New in this release

This technical document provides information about circuit cards for the
CS 1000 Release 5.5. Non-supported circuit cards have been deleted
from the document.

Other
Revision History

June 2008 Standard 01.04. This document has been up-issued to include information in
the "Jumper and switch settings" (page 528) section.
February 2008 Standard 01.03. This document has been up-issued to reflect changes in
technical content for CR Q01396373-01.
December 2007 Standard 02.05. This document has been up-issued to support
Communication Server Release 5.5.
June 2007 Standard 01.02. This document has been up-issued to reflect changes in
technical content for CoreNet shelf supporting CP PII and CP PIV function.
May 2007 Standard 01.01. This document is up-issued to support Nortel
Communication Server 1000 Release 5.0. This document contains
information previously contained in the following legacy document, now
retired, Circuit Card (553-3001-211).
August 2005 Standard 3.00. This document is up-issued to support Nortel Communication
Server 1000 Release 4.5.
September 2004 Standard 2.00. This document is up-issued for Nortel Communication Server
1000 Release 4.0.
October 2003 Standard 1.00. This is a new technical document for Succession 3.0. It
was created to support a restructuring of the Documentation Library, which
resulted in the merging of multiple legacy technical documents. This new
document consolidates information previously contained in the following
legacy documents, now retired:
• Line Cards: Description (553-3001-105)
• Trunk Cards: Description (553-3001-106)
• Serial Data Interface Cards: Description (553-3001-107)
• NT7D16 Data Access Card: Description and operation (553-3001-191)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 14 New in this release

• Multi-purpose Serial Data Link: Description (553-3001-195)

• Circuit Cards: Installation and Testing (553-3001-211)
• Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference Guide (553-3011-100)
(Content from Option 11C and 11C mini Technical Reference
Guide (553-3011-100) also appears in Telephones and Consoles
Fundamentals (NN43001-567)
• Circuit Card Reference (553-3023-211)

New circuit cards for CS 1000 Release 5

CS 1000 5.5 introduces the following new circuit cards:
• NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card The NTDW60 Media
Gateway Controller (MGC) card provides a gateway controller for
MG 1000E IP Media Gateways in a CS 1000E system. The MGC
only functions as a gateway controller under control of a CS 1000E
Call Server. For further information, see "NTDW60 Media Gateway
Controller Card" (page 1029)
• NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Call
Server Card The NTDW61 Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP
PM) card delivers Call Server functionality, stores system and customer
data and provides various 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet interfaces.
Gateway functionality and shelf container functionality are delivered
by the Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card and its Digital Signal
Processor (DSP) daughterboard. For further information, see "NTDW61
and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card" (page 1035)
• NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards
The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card has two PCI
Telephony Mezzanine Card (PMTC) form factor expansion sites. Place
daughterboards (DB) in the expansion sites to provide Digital Signal
Processor (DSP) resources for connecting IP and TDM devices. For
further information, see "NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway
Controller Daughterboards" (page 1045)
• NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card The NTDW65 Voice Gateway
Media Card provides 32 IP-TDM gateway ports between an IP device
and a TDM device in a CS1000 network. The Voice Gateway Media card
comes in an IPE form factor. The card can be used in the MG 1000E,
MG 1000B, CS 1000E, and CS 1000M systems. For more information
see "NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card" (page 1049).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 15

How to get help

This chapter explains how to get help for Nortel products and services.

Getting help from the Nortel web site

The best way to get technical support for Nortel products is from the Nortel
Technical Support web site:
www.nortel.com/support
This site provides quick access to software, documentation, bulletins, and
tools to address issues with Nortel products. From this site, you can:
• download software, documentation, and product bulletins
• search the Technical Support Web site and the Nortel Knowledge Base
for answers to technical issues
• sign up for automatic notification of new software and documentation
for Nortel equipment
• open and manage technical support cases

Getting help over the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center

If you do not find the information you require on the Nortel Technical Support
web site, and you have a Nortel support contract, you can also get help over
the telephone from a Nortel Solutions Center.

In North America, call 1-800-4NORTEL (1-800-466-7835).

Outside North America, go to the following web site to obtain the telephone
number for your region:www.nortel.com/callus

Getting help from a specialist by using an Express Routing Code

To access some Nortel Technical Solutions Centers, you can use an
Express Routing Code (ERC) to quickly route your call to a specialist in your
Nortel product or service. To locate the ERC for your product or service, go
to:www.nortel.com/erc

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 16 How to get help

Getting help through a Nortel distributor or reseller

If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel product from a distributor
or authorized reseller, contact the technical support staff for that distributor
or reseller.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 17

Overview
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Line cards" (page 18)

"Installation" (page 19)
"Operation" (page 21)
"Analog line interface units" (page 26)
"Digital line interface units" (page 28)
"Analog line call operation" (page 30)
"Digital line call operation" (page 34)
"Lineside T1 and E1 call operation" (page 34)
"Voice frequency audio level" (page 42)
"Off-premise line protection" (page 43)
"Line protectors" (page 43)
"Line protection grounding" (page 44)
"Line and telephone components" (page 44)
"Trunk cards" (page 44)
"Host interface bus" (page 48)
"Trunk interface unit" (page 53)
"Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards" (page 55)
"Uses" (page 56)
"Features" (page 56)
"Specifications" (page 57)
"Installation" (page 58)
"Maintenance" (page 59)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 18 Overview

Line cards
The following line cards are designed using the Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment (IPE) architecture and are recommended for use in all new
system designs.

Each of the line cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Table 1
"Line card characteristics" (page 18) lists the line card characteristics.

Table 1
Line card characteristics
Supervised
Part Line Message Analog
Number Description Lines Type Waiting Lines Architecture
NT1R20 Off-premise 8 Analog Interrupted dial Yes IPE
station analog tone
line card
NT5D11 Lineside T1 24 T1 None Yes IPE
Interface card
NT5D33/3 Lineside E1 30 E1 None Yes IPE
4 Interface card
NT8D02 Digital Line 16 Digital Message No IPE
card (16 waiting signal
voice/16 data) forwarded to
digital phone
for display
NT8D09 Analog 16 Analog Lamp No IPE
Message
Waiting Line
card

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line card is an intelligent
eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog
terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones and analog
modems. Each line has integral hazardous and surge voltage protection
to protect the system from damage due to lightning strikes and accidental
power line connections. This card is normally used whenever the phone
lines leave the building in which the switch is installed. The OPS line card
supports message waiting notification by interrupting the dial tone when
the receiver is first picked up. It also provides battery reversal answer and
disconnect analog line supervision and hook flash disconnect analog line
supervision features.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 19

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface card

The NT5D11/14 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel
digital line card that is used to connect the switch to T1-compatible terminal
equipment on the lineside. The T1-compatible terminal equipment includes
voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems
such as the Nortel Norstar. The Lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1
cards in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hook-flash,
transfer, hold, and conference. It emulates an analog line card to the system
software.

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card

The NT5D33/34 Lineside E1 Interface card is an intelligent 30-channel
digital line card that is used to connect the switch to E1-compatible terminal
equipment on the lineside. The E1-compatible terminal equipment includes
voice mail systems. The lineside E1 card emulates an analog line card to
the system software.

NT8D02 Digital Line card

The NT8D02 Digital Line card is an intelligent 16-channel digital line card
that provides voice and data communication links between a CS 1000E, CS
1000M, and Meridian 1 switch and modular digital telephones. Each of the
16 channels support voice-only or simultaneous voice and data service over
a single twisted pair of standard telephone wire.

NT8D09 analog message waiting line card

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an intelligent 16-channel
analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire terminal equipment such
as analog (500/2500-type) telephones, modems, and key systems. This
card can also provide a high-voltage, low-current signal on the Tip and Ring
pair of each line to light the message waiting lamp on phones equipped
with that feature.

Installation
This section provides a high-level description of how to install and test line
cards.
IPE line cards can be installed in any slot of the NT8D37 IPE module.
Figure 1 "IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module" (page
20) shows where an IPE line card can be installed in an NT8D37 IPE
module.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 20 Overview

Figure 1
IPE line cards shown installed in an NT8D37 IPE module

When installing line cards, follow these general procedures:

Step Action

1 Configure the jumpers and switches on the line card (if any) to meet
system needs.
2 Install the line card into the selected slot.

3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE
module to the module I/O panel.
4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the
Main Distribution Frame (MDF).

5 Connect the line card output to the selected terminal equipment

at the MDF.
6 Configure the individual line interface unit using the Analog
(500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10 for analog
line interface units and Multi-line Telephone Administration program
LD 11 for digital line interface units.

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 21

Once these steps are complete, the terminal equipment is ready for use.

Operation
This section describes how line cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and
Meridian 1 architecture, the busses that carry signals to and from the line
cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. These differences are
summarized in Table 2 "IPE module architecture" (page 21).

Host interface bus

Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller. The IPE
microcontroller is used to do the following:
• perform local diagnostics (self-test)
• configure the card according to instructions issued by the system
• report back to the system information such as card identification
(type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and programmed
configuration status)

Table 2
IPE module architecture
Parameter IPE
Card Dimensions 31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm (12.5 x10.0 x 0.875
in.).
Network Interface DS-30X Loops
Communication Interface card LAN Link
Microcontroller 8031/8051 Family
Peripheral Interface card NT8D01 Controller card
Network Interface card NT8D04 Superloop Network card
Modules NT8D37 IPE module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

IPE line cards all share a similar architecture. Figure 2 "Typical IPE analog
line card architecture" (page 23) shows a typical IPE line card architecture.
The various line cards differ only in the number and types of line interface
units.
The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces.
Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops, and
maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication
link called the card LAN link.
Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the
telephone line. Some examples of signaling commands include:
• off-hook/on-hook

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 22 Overview

• ringing signal on/off

• message waiting lamp on/off

Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of

the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some examples of
maintenance data include:
• polling
• reporting of self-test status
• CP initiated card reset
• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)
• reporting of firmware version
• downloading line interface unit parameters
• reporting of line interface unit configuration
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop bus
• reporting of card status or T1 link status

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 23

Figure 2
Typical IPE analog line card architecture

DS-30X loops The line interfaces provided by the line cards connect to
conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line cards convert
the incoming analog voice and signaling information to digital form and
route it to the Call Server over DS-30X network loops. Conversely, digital
voice and signaling information from the Call Server is sent over DS-30X
network loops to the analog line cards where it is converted to analog form
and applied to the line facility.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 24 Overview

IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal
as 512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line
card converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop and
transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from
the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and
transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility.

A separate dedicated DS-30X network loop is extended between each IPE

line/trunk card and the controller cards within an IPE module. A DS-30X
network loop is composed of two synchronous serial data buses. One bus
transports in the Transmit (Tx) direction towards the line facility and the
other in the Receive (Rx) direction towards the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and
Meridian 1.

Each bus has 32 channels for Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) voice data.
Each channel consists of a 10-bit word. See Figure 3 "DS-30X loop data
format" (page 25). Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call
signaling bit, and the last bit is a data valid bit. The eight-bit PCM portion of
a channel is called a timeslot. The DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps
(one-half the 5.12 MHz clock frequency supplied by the controller card).
The timeslot repetition rate for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller
card also supplies a locally generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel
synchronization.

Signaling data is transmitted to and from the line cards using the call
signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a
condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling
word. This word is shifted out on the signaling bit for the associated channel
one bit at a time during 24 successive DS-30X frames. Conversely, when
the switch sends signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word
divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 25

Figure 3
DS-30X loop data format

DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop

network cards in the Common Equipment (CE). They function in a manner
similar to DS-30X loops. See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit block
diagram" (page 29).

A DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X loop. Four
DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128 channels
(120 usable timeslots). See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian
1 Large System Planning and Engineering (NN43021-220) for more
information on superloops.

Card LAN link Maintenance communication is the exchange of control

and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the Call Server by way
of the NT8D01 Controller card. Maintenance data is transported through
the card LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses
(called the Async card LAN link in Figure 2 "Typical IPE analog line card
architecture" (page 23)). The output bus is used by the system controller for
output of control data to the line card. The input bus is used by the system
controller for input of line card status data.

A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an
IPE module. This bus is arranged in a master/slave configuration where the
controller card is the master and all other cards are slaves. The module
backplane provides each line/trunk card slot with a unique hardwired slot
address. This slot address enables a slave card to respond when addressed
by the controller card. The controller card communicates with only one
slave at a time.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 26 Overview

In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the
slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and
operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the
input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In its reply, the
slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place.
The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information. Slaves
only respond when prompted by the controller; they do not initiate exchange
of control or status data on their own.

When an IPE line card is first plugged into the backplane, it runs a self-test.
When the self-test is completed, a properly functioning card responds to
the next controller card poll with the self-test status. The controller then
queries for card identification and other status information. The controller
then downloads all applicable configuration data to the line card, initializes
it, and puts it into an operational mode.

Analog line interface units

Once the 8-bit digital voice signal has been received by the analog line card,
it must be converted back into an analog signal, filtered, converted from a
4-wire transmission path to a 2-wire transmission path, and driven onto
the analog telephone line.

Figure 4 "Typical analog line interface unit block diagram" (page 27) shows
a typical example of the logic that performs these functions. Each part of
the analog line interface unit is discussed in the following section.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 27

Figure 4
Typical analog line interface unit block diagram

Coder/Decoder circuit
The Coder/Decoder (CODEC) performs Analog to Digital (A/D) and Digital
to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog voiceband signal to and from
a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded and decoded using either
the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm.

On some analog line cards, the decoding algorithm depends of the type of
CODEC installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected
using a software overlay.

Variable gain filters

Audio signals received from the analog phone line are passed through a
low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency spread of the input
signal to a nominal 200 to 3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio signal is then
applied to the input of the CODEC. Audio signals coming from the CODEC
are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that integrates the
amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and then filters and

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 28 Overview

amplifies the result. On some of the line cards, the gain of these filters can
be programmed by the system controller. This allows the system to make
up for line losses according to the loss plan.

Balancing network
Depending on the card type, the balancing network provides a 600 3/4, 900
3
/4, 3COM or 3CM2 impedance matching network. It also converts the 2-wire
transmission path (tip and ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground
and Tx/ground). The balancing network is usually a transformer/analog
(hybrid) circuit combination, but can also be a monolithic Subscriber Line
Interface Circuit (SLIC) on the newer line cards.

Line interface and foreign voltage protection

The line interface unit connects the balancing network to the telephone
tip and ring pairs. The off-premise line card (NT1R20) has circuitry that
protects the line card from foreign voltage surges caused by accidental
power line connections and lightning surges. This protection is necessary if
the telephone line leaves the building where the switch is installed.

The line interface unit has a relay that applies the ringing voltage onto the
phone line. See Figure 4 "Typical analog line interface unit block diagram"
(page 27). The RSYNC signal from the 20 Hz (nominal) ringing voltage
power supply is used to prevent switching of the relay during the current
peak. This eliminates switching glitches and extends the life of the switching
relay.

The off-hook detection circuit monitors the current draw on the phone line.
When the current draw exceeds a preset value, the circuit generates an
off-hook signal that is transmitted back to the system controller.

The message waiting circuit on message waiting line cards monitors the
status of the message waiting signal and applies –150 V dc power to the
tip lead when activated. This voltage is used to light the message waiting
lamps on phones that are equipped with that feature. The high voltage
supply is automatically disconnected when the phone goes off-hook. Newer
line cards can sense when the message waiting lamp is not working and
can report that information back to the system controller.

Digital line interface units

The NT8D02 Digital Line card provides voice and data communication
links between a switch and modular digital telephones. These lines
carry multiplexed PCM voice, data and signaling information as Time
Compression Multiplexed (TCM) loops. Each TCM loop can be connected
to a Nortel "Meridian Modular Digital" telephone.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 29

The digital line interface card contains one or more digital line interface units.
See Figure 5 "Digital line interface unit block diagram" (page 29). Each
digital line interface unit contains a Digital Line Interface Circuit (DLIC). The
purpose of each DLIC is to demultiplex data from the DS-30X Tx channel
into integrated voice and data bitstreams and transmit those bitstreams
as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to
the TCM loop. It also does the opposite: receives BPRZ-AMI bitstreams
from the TCM loop and multiplexes the integrated voice and data bitstream
onto the DS-30X Rx channel.

The 4-wire to 2-wire conversion circuit converts the 2-wire tip and ring leads
into a 4-wire (Tx and ground and RX and ground) signal that is compatible
with the digital line interface circuit.

TCM loop interfaces

Each digital phone line terminates on the digital line card at a TCM loop
interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign
voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface
circuit. It also provides power for the digital telephone.

Figure 5
Digital line interface unit block diagram

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop
interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the
system controller can remove the ±15 V dc power supply from the TCM loop
interface. This happens when either the card gets a command from the
NT8D01 Controller card to shut down the channel, or when the digital line
card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization signal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 30 Overview

Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length
when using 24 gauge wire. The circuit allows for a maximum ac signal loss
of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Signaling
The digital line interface units also contain signaling and control circuits
that establish, monitor, and take down call connections. These circuits
work with the system controller to operate the digital line interface circuits
during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the
controller and return incoming call status information to the controller over
the DS-30X network loop.

Analog line call operation

The applications, features, and signalling arrangements for each line
interface unit are configured in software and implemented on the card
through software download messages. When an analog line interface unit is
idle, it provides a voltage near ground on the tip lead and a voltage near
–48 V dc on the ring lead to the near-end station. (The near-end station is
the telephone or device that is connected to the analog line card by the tip
and ring leads.) An on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward
the line interface unit on the card.

Incoming calls
Incoming calls to a telephone that is connected to an analog line card can
originate either from stations that are local (served by the PBX), or remote
(served through the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)). The
alerting signal to a telephone is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming
call is answered by the near-end station going off-hook, a low-resistance dc
loop is placed across the tip and ring leads (towards the analog line card)
and ringing is tripped. See Figure 6 "Call connection sequence - near-end
station receiving call" (page 31).

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls from the near-end station, a line interface unit is seized
when the station goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip
and ring leads towards the analog line card. See Figure 7 "Call connection
sequence - near-end originating call" (page 32). When the card detects
the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the system is
ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is
then applied from the near-end station in the form of loop (interrupting)
dial pulses or DTMF tones.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 31

Figure 6
Call connection sequence - near-end station receiving call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 32 Overview

Figure 7
Call connection sequence - near-end originating call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 33

Message waiting
Line cards that are equipped with the message waiting feature receive
notification that a message is waiting across the Card LAN link (IPE
cards). On cards that drive a message waiting light, the light is turned on
by connecting the ring side of the telephone line to the –150 V dc power
supply. When the line card senses that the telephone has gone off-hook,
it removes the –150 V dc voltage until the telephone goes back on-hook.
Line cards that use an interrupted dial tone to indicate message waiting do
nothing until the receiver is picked up. The line card then interrupts the dial
tone at a regular interval to indicate that a message is waiting.

In both cases, the message waiting indication continues until the user
checks his or her messages. At that time, the system cancels the message
waiting indication by sending another message across the Card LAN link
or network loop.

Analog line supervision

Analog line supervision features are used to extend the answer supervision
and disconnect supervision signals when the line card is connected to an
intelligent terminal device (Key system or intelligent pay phone). Two types
of analog line supervision are provided:
• battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision
• hook flash disconnect supervision

Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision Battery reversal

answer and disconnect supervision is only used for calls that originate from
the terminal device. It provides both far-end answer supervision and far-end
disconnect supervision signals to the terminal device. In an intelligent
pay phone application, these signals provide the information necessary
to accurately compute toll charges.

In the idle state, and during dialing and ringing at the far end, the line card
provides a ground signal on the tip lead and battery on the ring lead. See
Figure 8 "Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence"
(page 35). When the far-end answers, these polarities are reversed. The
reversed battery connection is maintained as long as the call is established.
When the far-end disconnects, the system sends a message that causes
the line card to revert the battery and ground signals to the normal state
to signal that the call is complete.

Hook Flash disconnect supervision Hook flash disconnect supervision

is only used for incoming calls that terminate at the terminal device (typically
a Key system). See Figure 9 "Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence"
(page 36). The disconnect signal is indicated by the removal of the ground
connection to the tip lead for a specific length of time. The length of time

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 34 Overview

is programmed in LD10, and ranges from a minimum of 10 milliseconds to

a maximum of 2.55 seconds. See Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611) for more information.

Digital line call operation

Digital line call operation is controlled entirely by use of messages between
the digital telephone and the system. These messages are carried across
the TCM loop interface. There is no call connection sequence similar to the
one used for analog telephone line operation.

Lineside T1 and E1 call operation

The lineside T1/E1 card’s call operation is performed differently depending
on whether the T1/E1 link is configured to process calls in loop start mode or
ground start mode. Configuration is performed through dip switch settings
on the lineside T1/E1 card.
The lineside T1/E1 card performs calls processing separately on each of its
24 channels. Signaling is performed using the "A/B robbed bit" signaling
standard for T1/E1 communication.
A/B robbed bit signaling simulates standard analog signaling by sending a
meaningful combination of ones and zeros across the line that correlates to
the electrical impulses that standard analog signaling sends. For example,
to represent that an analog line interface unit is idle, the analog line card
provides a ground on the tip lead and –48Vdc on the ring lead. The
lineside T1/E1 card accomplishes the same result by sending its A bit as 0
(translated as ground on the tip lead) and its B bit as 1 (translated as –48V
dc on the ring lead). However, measuring the voltage of the ring lead on the
T1/E1 line would not return –48V dc, since actual electrical impulses are
not being sent.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 35

Figure 8
Battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision sequence

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 36 Overview

Figure 9
Hook flash disconnect supervision sequence

Call operation is described by categorizing the operation into the following

main states:
• Idle (on-hook)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 37

• Incoming calls
• Outgoing calls
• Calls disconnected by the CO
• Calls disconnected by the telephone

Loop Start Mode

In Loop Start mode, the A and B bits meaning is:
• Transmit from LTI:A bit = 0 (tip ground on); B bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off)
• Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = 1 (no ring
ground)

When a T1 channel is idle, the Lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the

tip lead and –48Vdc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting its
transmit A bit to 0 and transmit B bit to 1. Accordingly, an on-hook channel
on the terminal equipment simulates an open loop toward the Lineside T1
card, causing the Lineside T1 card’s receive bits to be set to A = 0 and
receive B = 1.

Incoming calls Incoming calls to terminal equipment attached to the

Lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served
by the PBX), or remote (served through the PSTN). To provide the ringing
signal to a telephone the Lineside T1 card simulates an additional 90V on
the ring lead to the terminal equipment by alternating the transmit B bit
between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on, 1 during ring off). When an incoming
call is answered by the terminal equipment going off-hook, the terminal
equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing, causing
the Lineside T1 card’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1.

Outgoing calls During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment,

a channel is seized when the station goes off-hook. This simulates a
low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the Lineside T1
card, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to be changed from 0 to 1. This
bit change prepares the Lineside T1 to receive digits. Outward address
signaling is then applied from the terminal equipment in the form of DTMF
tones or loop (interrupting) dial pulses that are signaled by the receive A
bit pulsing between 1 and 0.

Call disconnect from far end PSTN, private network or local

Station When a call is in process, the central office may disconnect the
call from the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. If the Lineside T1
port has been configured with the supervised analog line (SAL) feature,
the Lineside T1 card responds to the distant end disconnect message by
momentarily changing its transmit A bit to 1 and then returning it to 0. The
duration of time that the transmit A bit remains at 1 before returning to 0

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 38 Overview

depends upon the setting that was configured using the SAL. If the terminal
equipment is capable of detecting distant end disconnect, it responds by
changing the Lineside T1 card’s receive A bit to 0 (open loop).The call is
now terminated and the interface is in the idle (on-hook) state.
For the Lineside T1 card to support distant end disconnect in loop start
mode, the following configuration parameters must exist:
• The Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature must be configured for each
Lineside T1 port.
Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in
loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments.

• For outgoing trunk calls, the trunk facility must provide far end disconnect
supervision.
• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the
Lineside T1 card, the battery reversal feature within the SAL software
must be enabled. Enabling the battery reversal feature does not provide
battery reversal indication but only provides a momentary interruption of
the tip ground by asserting the A bit to 1 for the specified duration.
• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the
Lineside T1 card, the hook flash feature within the SAL software must
be enabled.
• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and
terminating on the Lineside T1 card, both the battery reversal and hook
flash features must be enabled within the SAL software.

Call disconnect from Lineside T1 terminal equipment Alternatively,

while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going
on-hook. The terminal equipment detects no loop current and sends
signaling to the Lineside T1 card that causes its receive A bit to change
from 1 to 0. The call is now released.

Table 3 "Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings" (page 38) outlines the
lineside T1’s A and B bit settings in each state of call processing.

Table 3
Loop Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings
Transmit Receive
State A B A B
Idle 0 1 0 1
Incoming Calls:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 39

Transmit Receive
State A B A B
• Idle 0 1 0 1
• Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card 0 1/0 0 1
• Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1/0 1 1
• Lineside T1 card stops ringing 0 1 1 1
Outgoing Calls:
• Idle 0 1 0 1
• Terminal equipment goes off-hook 0 1 1 1
Call Disconnect from far end:
• Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1
• Far end disconnects by dropping loop current and Lineside T1 1 1 1 1
card changes Transmit A bit to 1 momentarily.
• Terminal equipment responds causing Receive A bit to change 1 1 0 1
to 0.
• Lineside T1 responds by changing its Transmit A bit to 0. Call is 0 1 0 1
terminated and set to idle state.
Call disconnect from terminal equipment:
• Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1
• Terminal equipment goes on-hook causing the Receive A bit to 0 1 0 1
change to 0. Call is terminated and set to idle state.

Ground Start Mode

In Ground Start mode, the A and B bits meaning is:
• Transmit from LTI:A bit = Tip ground (0=grounded, 1=not grounded); B
bit = Ringing (0=on, 1=off)
• Receive to LTI: A bit = Loop (0=open, 1=closed); B bit = Ring ground
(0=grounded, 1=not grounded)

When a T1 channel is idle, the Lineside T1 card simulates a ground on the

tip lead and -48V dc on the ring lead to the terminal equipment by setting
the transmit A bit to 1 and transmit B bit to 1. Accordingly, an on-hook
telephone simulates an open loop toward the Lineside T1 card, causing the
Lineside T1 card’s receive bits to be set to A = 0 and B = 1.

Incoming Calls Incoming calls to terminal equipment that is connected to

the Lineside T1 card can originate either from stations that are local (served
by the PBX), or remote (served through the public switched telephone
network). To provide the ringing signal to the terminal equipment the
Lineside T1 card simulates the 90V ring signal on the ring lead by alternating

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 40 Overview

the transmit B bit between 0 and 1 (0 during ring on, 1 during ring off), and
ground on the tip lead by setting the transmit A bit to 0. When an incoming
call is answered (by the terminal equipment going off-hook), the terminal
equipment simulates tripping the ringing and shutting off ringing by causing
the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change from 0 to 1. The Lineside T1
card responds to this message by simulating loop closure by holding the
transmit B bit constant at 1.

Outgoing Calls During outgoing calls from the terminal equipment, a

channel is seized when the terminal equipment goes off-hook, simulating a
ground to the ring lead toward the Lineside T1 card by causing the lineside
T1’s receive B bit to change from 1 to 0. In turn, the Lineside T1 card
simulates grounding its tip lead by changing the transmit A bit to 0. The
terminal equipment responds to this message by removing the ring ground
(lineside T1’s receive B bit is changed to 1) and simulating open loop at the
terminal equipment (lineside T1’s receive A bit is changed to 0).

Call disconnect from far end PSTN, private network or local

station While a call is in process, the far end might disconnect the call.
If the Lineside T1 port has been configured with the Supervised Analog
Line (SAL) feature, the Lineside T1 responds to the distant end disconnect
message by opening tip ground. This causes the Lineside T1 card to
change the transmit A bit to 1. When the terminal equipment sees the
transmit A bit go to 1, it responds by simulating open loop causing the
lineside T1’s receive A bit to change to 0. The call is terminated and the
interface is once again in the idle condition.
For the Lineside T1 card to support distant end disconnect in ground start
mode, the following configuration parameters must exist:
• The Supervised Analog Line (SAL) feature must be configured for each
Lineside T1 port.
Note: By default, the SAL feature opens the tip side for 750 m/s in
loop start operation. This is configurable in 10 m/s increments.

• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating on the

Lineside T1 card, the "battery reversal" feature within the SAL software
must be enabled. Enabling the battery reversal feature does not provide
battery reversal indication when a call is answered; it only provides
battery reversal indication when a call is disconnected.
• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls terminating on the
Lineside T1 card, the "hook flash" feature within the SAL software must
be enabled.
• In order to detect distant end disconnect for calls originating and
terminating on the Lineside T1 card, both the "battery reversal" and
"hook flash" features within the SAL software must be enabled.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 41

Call disconnect from Lineside T1 terminal equipment Alternatively,

while a call is in process, the terminal equipment may disconnect by going
on-hook, causing the lineside T1’s receive A bit to change to 0. The Lineside
T1 card responds to this message by simulating the removal of ground from
the tip by changing its transmit A bit to 1. The call is now terminated and
the interface is once again in the idle condition.

Table 4 "Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings" (page 41) outlines
the lineside T1’s A and B bit settings in each state of call processing.

Table 4
Ground Start Call Processing A/B Bit Settings
Transmit Receive
State A B A B
Idle 1 1 0 1
Incoming Calls (to terminal equipment):
• Idle 1 1 0 1
• Ringing is applied from Lineside T1 card by simulating ground on 0 0/1 0 1
tip lead and ringing on ring lead.
• Terminal equipment goes off-hook by simulating ground on tip 0 0/1 1 1
lead and ringing on ring lead.
Outgoing Calls (from terminal equipment):
• Idle 1 1 0 1
• Terminal equipment goes off-hook. 1 1 0 0
• The Lineside T1 simulates grounding its tip lead 0 1 0 0
• Terminal equipment opens ring ground and closes loop 0 1 1 1
Call Disconnect from far end:
• Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1
• The Lineside T1 ungrounds tip 1 1 1 1
• Terminal equipment opens loop current 1 1 0 1
Call disconnect from terminal equipment:
• Steady state (call in progress) 0 1 1 1
• Terminal equipment goes open loop current 0 1 0 1
• Lineside T1 card opens tip ground 1 1 0 1

Ground Start Restrictions

If the Lineside T1 card is used in ground start mode, certain restrictions
should be considered. Because the system treats the Lineside T1 card as
a standard loop start analog line card, the ground start operation of the

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 42 Overview

Lineside T1 card has operational limitations compared to typical ground

start interface equipment relating to start of dialing, distant end disconnect
and glare potential.

Distant end disconnect restrictions If the SAL feature is not available

in the CS 1000 software, the Lineside T1 card is not capable of indicating
to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) when a call is terminated by
the distant end. In this case, the Lineside T1 card continues to provide
a grounded tip indication (A=0) to the CPE until it detects an open loop
indication (A=0) from the CPE, at which time it provides an open tip
indication (A=1). Therefore, without SAL software, the Lineside T1 card is
not capable of initiating the termination of a call to the CPE.

With the SAL software configured for each Lineside T1 line, the Lineside
T1 card provides an open tip indication to the CPE when it receives an
indication of supervised analog line from the system. This provides normal
ground start protocol call termination.

Glare restrictions In telephone lines or trunks, glare occurs when a call

origination attempt results in the answering of a terminating call that is being
presented by the far end simultaneously with the call origination attempt
by the near end.

The Lineside T1 detects presentation of a terminating call (outgoing to

Lineside T1 terminal equipment) by detecting ringing voltage. If application
of the ringing voltage is delayed due to traffic volume and ringing generator
capacity overload, the Lineside T1 ground start operation cannot connect
the tip side to ground to indicate the line has been seized by the system.

In ground start mode, glare conditions need to be considered if both

incoming and outgoing calls to the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) are
going to be encountered. If the system and the CPE simultaneously attempt
to use a Lineside T1 line, the system completes the call termination. It
does not back down and allow the CPE to complete the call origination,
as in normal ground start operation.

If both incoming and outgoing calls are to be handled through the Lineside
T1 interface, separate channels should be configured in the system and
the CPE for each call direction. This eliminates the possibility of glare
conditions on call origination.

Voice frequency audio level

The digital pad for Lineside T1 card audio level is fixed for all types of
call connection (0 dB insertion loss in both directions), and differs from
the analog line. Audio level adjustments, if required, must be made in the
Lineside T1 terminal equipment.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Line cards 43

Off-premise line protection

Off-premise applications are installations where the telephone lines are
extended outside the building where the PBX system is housed, but the lines
are not connected to public access facilities. This application is commonly
referred to as a "campus installation."

In off-premise applications, special protection devices and grounding are

required to protect PBX and telephone components from any abnormal
conditions, such as lightning strikes and power line crosses.

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card has built-in protection against
lightning strikes and power line crosses. These should be the preferred
cards for an off-premise application. Other cards can be used when external
line protectors are installed.

When using the Lineside T1 card for an off-premise or network application,

external line protectors must be installed. Install an isolated type Channel
Service Unit (CSU) as part of the terminal equipment, to provide the
necessary isolation and outside line protection. The CSU should be an
FCC part 68 or CSA certified unit.

Line protectors
Line protectors are voltage-absorbing devices that are installed at the
cross-connect terminals at both the main building and the remote building.
The use of line protectors ensure that system and telephone components
are not damaged from accidental voltages that are within the limit of the
capacity of the protection device. Absolute protection from lightning strikes
and other stray voltages cannot be guaranteed, but the use of line protection
devices significantly reduces the possibility of damage.

Nortel has tested line protection devices from three manufacturers. See
Table 5 "Line protection device ordering information" (page 43). Each
manufacturer offers devices for protection of digital as well as analog
telephone lines.

Table 5
Line protection device ordering information
Device order code
Analog Line Digital Line Manufacturer
UP2S-235 UP2S-75 ITW Linx Communication
201 Scott Street
Elk Grove Village, IL 60007
(708) 952-8844 or (800) 336-5469

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 44 Overview

Device order code

Analog Line Digital Line Manufacturer
6AP 6DP Oneac Corporation
27944 North Bradley Road
Libertyville, IL 60048-9700
(800) 553-7166 or (800) 327-8801 x555
ESP-200 ESP-050 EDCO Inc. of Florida
1805 N.E. 19th Avenue
P.O. Box 1778
Ocala, FL 34478
(904) 732-3029 or (800) 648-4076

These devices are compatible with 66 type M1-50 split blocks or equivalent.
Consult the device manufacturer if more specific compatibility information
is required.

Line protection grounding

In conjunction with line protectors, proper system (PBX) grounding is
essential to minimize equipment damage. Nortel recommends following the
grounding connection requirements as described in Communication Server
1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Commissioning. This
requirement includes connecting the ground for the protection devices to
the approved building earth ground reference. Any variances to these
grounding requirements could limit the functionality of the protection device.

Line and telephone components

Because testing of the line protectors was limited to the line cards and
telephones shown below, only these components should be used for
off-premise installations.

Telephones
• Meridian Modular Telephones (digital)
• Meridian Digital Telephones
• Standard analog (500/2500-type) telephones

Line cards
• NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Line card
• NT8D02 Digital Line card

Trunk cards
The following trunk cards are designed using the IPE architecture, and are
recommended for use in all new system designs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trunk cards 45

Each of the trunk cards was designed to fit a specific system need. Use
Table 6 "Trunk card characteristics" (page 45) to select the trunk card that
meets system needs.

Table 6
Trunk card characteristics
Part Trun Architect
Number Description ks Trunk Types ure
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 8 CO/FX/WATS trunks*, IPE
direct inward dial trunks,
TIE trunks,
Loop Dial Repeating trunks
Recorded Announcement
trunks,
Paging trunks
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 4 2-wire E and M Trunks, IPE
4-wire E and M Trunks,
4-wire DX trunks,
Paging trunks
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk 8 CO trunks IPE
card
* Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone Service (WATS) trunks.

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card
that is designed to be used in a variety of applications. It supports the
following five trunk types:
• Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area Telephone
Service (WATS) trunks
• Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
• TIE trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop
Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)
• Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks
• Paging (PAG) trunks

The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card is an intelligent four-channel trunk card
that is designed to be used when connecting to the following types of trunks:
• 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 46 Overview

• 4-wire E and M Trunks with:

— Type I or Type II signaling
— Duplex (DX) signaling

• Paging (PAG) trunks

The trunk type and function can be configured on a per port basis. Dialing
outpulsing is provided on the card. Make and break ratios are defined in
software and downloaded by software commands.

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card

The NTCK16 generic central office trunk cards support up to eight analog
central office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot that supports IPE.
The cards are available with or without the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)
feature. The cards are also available in numerous countries.

Installation
This section provides a high-level description of how to install and test
trunk cards.
IPE trunk cards can be installed in any IPE slot of the NT8D37 IPE module.
Figure 10 "IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module" (page
47) shows where an IPE trunk card can be installed in an NT8D37 IPE
module.
When installing trunk cards, these general procedures should be used:

Procedure 1
Installing a trunk card
Step Action

1 Configure the jumpers and switches on the trunk card (if any) to
meet the system needs.

2 Install the trunk card into the selected slot.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 47

Figure 10
IPE trunk cards installed in an NT8D37 IPE module

3 Install the cable that connects the backplane connector on the IPE
module to the module I/O panel.

4 Connect a 25-pair cable from the module I/O panel connector to the
Main Distribution Frame (MDF).

5 Connect the trunk card output to the selected terminal equipment

at the MDF.

6 Configure the individual trunk interface unit using the Trunk

Administration program (LD 14) and the Trunk Route Administration
program (LD 16).

—End—

Once these steps are complete, the trunk card is ready for use.

Operation
This section describes how trunk cards fit into the CS 1000E, CS 1000M,
and Meridian 1 architecture, the buses that carry signals to and from the
trunk cards, and how they connect to terminal equipment. See Table 7
"Differences between IPE parameters" (page 48) for IPE parameters.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 48 Overview

Host interface bus

Cards based on the IPE bus use a built-in microcontroller. The IPE
microcontroller is used for the following:
• to perform local diagnostics (self-test)
• to configure the card according to instructions issued by the system
processor
• to report back to the system processor information such as card
identification (type, vintage, and serial number), firmware version, and
programmed configuration status.

Table 7
Differences between IPE parameters
Parameter IPE
Card Dimensions 31.75 x 25.4 x 2.2 cm. (12.5 x10.0 x 0.875 in.)
Network Interface DS-30X Loops
Communication Interface card LAN Link
Microcontroller 8031
Peripheral Interface card NT8D01 Controller card
Network Interface card NT8D04 Superloop Network card
Modules NT8D37 IPE module

Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

IPE trunk cards all share a similar architecture. Figure 11 "Typical IPE trunk
card architecture" (page 49) shows a typical IPE trunk card architecture.
The various trunk cards differ only in the number and types of trunk interface
units.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 49

Figure 11
Typical IPE trunk card architecture

The switch communicates with IPE modules over two separate interfaces.
Voice and signaling data are sent and received over DS-30X loops and
maintenance data is sent over a separate asynchronous communication
link called the card LAN link.
Signaling data is information directly related to the operation of the
telephone line. Some examples of signaling commands are as follows:
• off hook/on hook
• ringing signal on/off
• message waiting lamp on/off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 50 Overview

Maintenance data is data relating to the configuration and operation of

the IPE card, and is carried on the card LAN link. Some examples of
maintenance data are as follows:
• polling
• reporting of self-test status
• CPU initiated card reset
• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)
• reporting of firmware version
• downloading trunk interface unit configuration
• reporting of trunk interface unit configuration
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop bus
• reporting of card status

DS-30X loops The interfaces provided by the line and trunk cards connect
to conventional 2-wire (tip and ring) line facilities. IPE analog line and
trunk cards convert the incoming analog voice and signaling information to
digital form, and route it to the Common Equipment (CE) CPU over DS-30X
network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the
CPU is sent over DS-30X network loops to the analog line and trunk cards
where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line or trunk facility.

IPE digital line cards receive the data from the digital phone terminal as
512 kHz Time Compressed Multiplexed (TCM) data. The digital line card
converts that data to a format compatible with the DS-30X loop, and
transmits it in the next available timeslot. When a word is received from
the DS-30X loop, the digital line card converts it to the TCM format and
transmits it to the digital phone terminal over the digital line facility.

A separate dedicated DS-30X network loop is extended between each

IPE line/trunk card and the controller cards within an IPE module (or the
controller circuits on a network/DTR card in a CE module). A DS-30X
network loop is composed of two synchronous serial data buses. One bus
transports in the transmit (Tx) direction toward the line facility and the other
in the receive (Rx) direction toward the common equipment.

Each bus has 32 channels for pulse code modulated (PCM) voice data.
Each channel consists of a 10-bit word. See Figure 12 "DS-30X loop data
format" (page 51).

Eight of the 10 bits are for PCM data, one bit is the call signaling bit, and
the last bit is a data valid bit. The 8-bit PCM portion of a channel is called a
timeslot . The DS-30X loop is clocked at 2.56 Mbps (one-half the 5.12 MHz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 51

clock frequency supplied by the controller card). The timeslot repetition rate
for a single channel is 8 kHz. The controller card also supplies a locally
generated 1 kHz frame sync signal for channel synchronization.

Signaling data is transmitted to and from the line cards using the call
signaling bit within the 10-bit channel. When the line card detects a
condition that the switch needs to know about, it creates a 24-bit signaling
word. This word is shifted out on the signaling bit for the associated channel
one bit at a time during 24 successive DS-30X frames. Conversely, when
the switch sends signaling data to the line card, it is sent as a 24-bit word
divided among 24 successive DS-30X frames.

Figure 12
DS-30X loop data format

DS-30Y network loops extend between controller cards and superloop

network cards in the common equipment, and function in a manner similar
to DS-30X loops. See Figure 13 "Network connections to IPE modules"
(page 52).

Essentially, a DS-30Y loop carries the PCM timeslot traffic of a DS-30X

loop. Four DS-30Y network loops form a superloop with a capacity of 128
channels (120 usable timeslots).

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Planning

and Engineering (NN43021-220) for more information on superloops.

Card LAN link Maintenance communication is the exchange of control

and status data between IPE line or trunk cards and the CE CPU by way of
the NT8D01 Controller Card. Maintenance data is transported via the card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 52 Overview

LAN link. This link is composed of two asynchronous serial buses (called
the Async card LAN link in Figure 11 "Typical IPE trunk card architecture"
(page 49)). The output bus is used by the controller for output of control
data to the trunk card.The input bus is used by the controller for input of
trunk card status data.

Figure 13
Network connections to IPE modules

A card LAN link bus is common to all of the line/trunk card slots within an
IPE module (or IPE section of a CE module). This bus is arranged in a
master/slave configuration where the controller card is the master and all

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 53

other cards are slaves. The module backplane provides each line/trunk card
slot with a unique hardwired slot address. This slot address enables a slave
card to respond when addressed by the controller card. The controller card
communicates with only one slave at a time.

In normal operation, the controller card continually scans (polls) all of the
slave cards connected to the card LAN to monitor their presence and
operational status. The slave card sends replies to the controller on the
input bus along with its card slot address for identification. In this reply, the
slave informs the controller if any change in card status has taken place.
The controller can then prompt the slave for specific information. Slaves
only respond when prompted by the controller; they do not initiate exchange
of control or status data on their own.

When an IPE line or trunk card is first plugged into the backplane, it runs
a self-test. When the self test is completed, a properly functioning card
responds to the next controller card poll with the self-test status. The
controller then queries for card identification and other status information.
The controller then downloads all applicable configuration data to the
line/trunk card, initializes it, and puts it into an operational mode.

The network card regularly polls the IPE cards during TS0 to see if any
of them has a message to be sent. When an IPE card has a message
waiting it responds to the poll by sending a series of 1s during the next five
successive timeslot 0s. The network card responds by sending a "message
send enable" message (all 1s). The IPE card replies by sending 1, 1, 1, 0,
and then the message in successive timeslot 0s.

Trunk interface unit

Once the 8-bit digital voice signal has been received by the trunk card, it
must be converted back into an analog signal, filtered, and driven onto the
analog trunk line through an impedance matching and balance network.
The trunk interface also includes the logic necessary to place outgoing call
signaling onto the trunk, or the logic to connect to special services such as
recorded announcement and paging equipment.

Figure 14 "Typical trunk interface unit block diagram" (page 54) shows a
typical example of the logic that performs these functions. Each part of the
trunk interface unit is discussed in the following section.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 54 Overview

Figure 14
Typical trunk interface unit block diagram

Coder/Decoder circuit The coder/decoder (codec) performs Analog

to Digital (A/D) and Digital to Analog (D/A) conversion of the line analog
voiceband signal to and from a digital PCM signal. This signal can be coded
and decoded using either the A-Law or the µ-Law companding algorithm.
On some trunk cards the decoding algorithm depends of the type of codec
installed when the board is built. On others, it is an option selected using a
software overlay.

Variable gain filters Audio signals received from the analog phone trunk
are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that limits the frequency
spread of the input signal to a nominal 200–3400 Hz bandwidth. The audio
signal is then applied to the input of the codec. Audio signals coming
from the CODEC are passed through a low-pass A/D monolithic filter that
integrates the amplitude modulated pulses coming from the CODEC, and
then filters and amplifies the result.

On some of the trunk cards, the gain of these filters can be programmed
by the system controller. This allows the system to make up for line losses
according to the loss plan.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 55

Balancing network Depending on the card type, the balancing network is

capable of providing either a 600 ohm or a 900 ohm (or both) impedance
matching network. It also converts the 2-wire transmission path (tip and
ring) to a 4-wire transmission path (Rx/ground and Tx/ground). The
balancing network is a transformer/analog (hybrid) circuit combination.

Signaling circuits Signaling circuits are relays that place outgoing call
signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor the incoming
call signaling.

Control signals Control signals and logic are provided when the trunk is
going to be connected to special services such as recorded announcement
and paging equipment.

Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards

The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board provides four bidirectional
asynchronous serial ports for the system processor, and the QPC841 QSDI
card also provides four. Any device that conforms to the RS-232-C serial
communication standard can be connected to these serial ports.

The QPC513 ESDI card provides two fully synchronous serial ports for the
system processor. The ESDI card communicates using the Link Access
Procedure Balanced (LAP-B) synchronous communication protocol.

The electrical interface uses either standard RS-232-C signals or a special

high-speed interface that combines the high-speed differential interface
of the RS-422-A standard with the handshake signals of the RS-232-C
standard.

The RS-232-C interface is normally used when data rates are less than 19.2
Kbps, and the cable length is less than 15.24 m (50 ft). The high-speed
interface is used when the signal rates are greater than 19.2 kbps (up to 64
kbps) and/or when the cable length is greater than 15.24 m (50 ft).

Table 8 "Serial data interface cards" (page 55) shows compatibility between
the three SDI cards and the various switch options.

Table 8
Serial data interface cards
Compatible System Options
Card Ports Port types 51C, 61C 81C
NT8D41BA 4 RS-232-C asynchronous X X
*See the section on the QPC513 card in this manual for details on the high-speed interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 56 Overview

Compatible System Options

Card Ports Port types 51C, 61C 81C
QPC841 4 RS-232-C asynchronous X X
QPC513 2 RS-232-C synchronous or X X
high-speed synchronous*
*See the section on the QPC513 card in this manual for details on the high-speed interface

The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board does not use a front panel. It mounts to
the rear of the backplane in the NT5D21 Core/Network module, and does
not consume a module slot. The RS-232-C connections are brought out
through special cables to the backplane I/O panel.

The QPC841 Quad SDI card mounts in standard backplane slots and its
serial interface connectors are located on the card front panels. A list of the
modules that can be mounted in is given in the section on the individual card.

Uses
Examples of asynchronous devices that can be connected to the system
processor using the NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board and the QPC841 Quad
SDI card are:
• an administration and maintenance terminal
• a background terminal for use in a hotel/motel
• the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature
• the Call Detail Recording (CDR) feature

Examples of synchronous devices that can be connected to the system

processor using the QPC513 Enhanced SDI card are:
• a host computer (DEC, Tandem, for example) using the Meridian Link
communication program

Features
The NT8D41 QSDI paddle board and the QPC841 QSDI card provide the
following features:
• asynchronous serial data interface ports, each supporting
— RS-232-C interface
— 8–bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit
— Asynchronous, start-stop operation
— Data rates of 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, and 9600 baud
— Data terminal equipment (DTE) emulation mode

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 57

— Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode

• enable/disable switch and LED

• input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.

The QPC513 ESDI card provides these features:

• fully synchronous serial data interface ports, each supporting
— RS-232-C or modified RS-422-A interface
— LAPB subset of the HDLC synchronous protocol
— Data rates of 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 48000, 56000, and
64000 baud
— Data terminal equipment (DTE) emulation mode
— Data communication equipment (DCE) emulation mode

• enable/disable switch and LED

• input/output (I/O) device address selectable by on-board switches.

Specifications
This section lists the specifications shared by all of the SDI cards. See
the appropriate section in this document for information specific to any
particular card.

Power consumption
The SDI cards obtain their power directly from the module backplane. Power
consumption for each of the cards is shown in Table 9 "Power consumption"
(page 57).

Table 9
Power consumption
Maximum power consumption
Voltage NT8D41BA QPC841
+5 VDC ±5% 1.0 Amp 1.5 Amp
+12 VDC ±5% 100 mA 100 mA
–12 VDC ±5% 100 mA 100 mA

Environmental
The SDI cards operate without degradation under the conditions listed in
Table 10 "Environmental specifications" (page 58).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 58 Overview

Table 10
Environmental specifications
Specification Operation Storage
Ambient temperature 0 to 50C; –55 to +70C;
(32 to 122F) (–58 to 158F)
Relative humidity 5% to 95% 0% to 95%
(non-condensing)
Altitude 3500m; 15000m;
(11000 ft) (50000 ft)

Electrostatic discharge
The SDI cards meet the requirements of the IEC 801-2, clause 8.0
procedure. They can withstand a direct discharge of ±5 to ±20 kV without
being damaged.

Electromagnetic interference
The CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems meet the requirements
of FCC Part 15 and CSA C108.8 electromagnetic interference (EMI)
standards as a class "A" computing device. To accomplish this, the SDI
cables must exit the module through EMI filters on the I/O panel.

Reliability
The Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) for all SDI cards is 55 years at
40¡C and 29 years at 55¡C.

Installation
To use a serial data interface card in a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, or Meridian 1
system, first install the card in the system, and then configure the system
software to recognize it. These steps are discussed in the following sections.

Instructions for cabling the serial data interface cards to the various system
consoles and peripherals are found in Communication Server 1000M and
Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310).

Configuring the system software

Once an SDI card has been installed in the system, the system software
needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done using the Configuration
Record program LD 17. Instructions for the Configuration Record
program are found in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Serial Data Interface (SDI) cards 59

Maintenance
The following maintenance programs are used to maintain individual SDI
asynchronous ports. The program used depends on the application of the
port.
• LD 37 Input/Output Diagnostics – Used for system terminal, printer,
background terminal ports, and system monitor status.
• LD 42 Call Detail Recording (CDR) Diagnostic – For checking CDR
links and CDR system terminals.

The following maintenance program is used to maintain individual SDI

synchronous ports.
• LD 48 Link Diagnostic – For checking Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
and Meridian Link ports.

Instructions for running the various maintenance programs are found in

Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611). System
messages are interpreted in Software Input/Output Reference — System
Messages (NN43001-712).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 60 Overview

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 61

Circuit card installation

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Card slots - Large System" (page 61)

"Circuit and installation" (page 62)

"Precautions" (page 64)

"Installing a circuit card" (page 66)

Card slots - Large System

The following table in this chapter identifies card slot compatibility in the
following modules:
• NT4N41 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M
MG, Meridian 1 PBX 61C Call Processor (CP) PII, CP PIV, and Meridian
1 PBX 81C
• NT4N46 Core/Network module required for CS 1000M MG and Option
81C CP PII, CP PIV
• NT6D60 Core/Network module required for the CS 1000M MG and
Option 81C only
• NT8D35 Network module required for CS 1000M MG and Meridian
1 PBX 81C
• NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) module required for CS
1000M HG, CS 1000M SG, CS 1000M MG, Meridian 1 Option 51,
Meridian 1 PBX 61C, and Meridian 1 PBX 81C

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 62 Circuit card installation

Circuit and installation

Table 11
Large System card slots
Component Large System
A0786611 Call Processor Pentium II® card 81C Core/Net: "CP"
A0810486 Call Processor Pentium II 81C Core/Net: "CP"
NT1P61 Fiber Superloop Network card Core/Net: 0–7
NT1P62 Fiber Peripheral Controller card IPE: "Contr"
NT1R52 Remote Carrier Interface IPE: "Contr"
NT1R20 Off-Premise Station IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT4D18 Hybrid Bus Terminator Core/Net: between 11 and 12
NT4D19 and NT423 Hybrid Bus Terminator Core/Net: between 0 and 1
NT4D20 and NT422 Hybrid Bus Terminator Core/Net: between 1 and 2
NT4N43 Multi-Medium DIsk Unit 81C Core/Net:
NT4N64 Call Processor Pentium II card 61C Core/Net: CP PII
NT4N64 Call Processor Pentium II card 81C Core/Net: CP PII
NT4N39 Call Processor Pentium IV card 61C Core/Net: CP PIV
NT4N39 Call Processor Pentium IV card 81C Core/Net: CP PIV
® 81C Core/Net: c9–c12
NT4N65 cPCI Core to Network Interface card
NT4N66 cPCI Core to Network Interface 81C Core/Net cPCI Core backplane: 9–12
Transition card
NT4N67 System Utility card 81C Core/Net: c15
NT4N68 System Utility Transition card 81C Core/Net cPCI Core backplane:
NT5D11 and IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5D14 Line side T1 Line card
NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI card Core/Net: 0–7
NT5D61 Input/Output Disk Unit with CD-ROM 61C Core/Net: 17, 18 and 19
(MMDU)
NT5K02 Analog Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K07 Universal Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K17 Direct Dial Inward Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K18 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K19 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K35 D-channel Handler Interface Core/Net: 0-7
Net: 5-12

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Circuit and installation 63

Component Large System

NT5K36 Direct Inward/Direct Outward Dial Trunk IPE: any slot but "Contr"
card
NT5K70 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K71 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K72 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K82 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K83 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K84 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K90 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K93 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K96 Analog Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K99 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT5K20 Extended Tone Detector IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT6D65 Core to Network Interface 61C Core/Net: 12
NT6D66 Call Processor card 61C Core/Net: 15 and 16
NT6D70 IPE: any slot but "Contr"
S/T Interface Line card
NT6D71 IPE: any slot but "Contr"
U Interface Line card
NT6D72 Basic Rate Signal Concentrator card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT6D73 Core/Net: 0–7
Multi-purpose ISDN Signaling Processor card
NT6D80 MSDL Core/Net: 0–7
NT7D16 Data Access card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT7R51 Local Carrier Interface Core/Net: 0–7
NT8D01 Controller card IPE: "Contr"
NT8D02 Digital Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT8D04 Superloop Network card Core/Net: 0–7
Net: 5-12
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT8D16 Digitone Receiver card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NT8D17 Conference/TDS card Core/Net: 0–7
NT8D41 Dual Port Serial Data Interface card Serial Port back of Core/Net module

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 64 Circuit card installation

Component Large System

NT9D19 Call Processor card 61C Core/Net: 15 and 16
NTAG03 Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NTAG04 Central Office/Direct Inward Dial Trunk IPE: any slot but "Contr"
card
NTAG36 Nortel Integrated Recorded Announcer IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Connects to DDP card
daughterboard
NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
NTCK43AA Primary Rate Interface card Core/Net: 0-7
Net: 5-11, 13-14
NTRB33 FIber Junctor Interface card For 81C: Core/Net: 8 and 9, Net module: 2 and 3
NTRE39 Optical Cable Management card For 81C: Net module: the slot to the right side of
14, the slot to the left of the 3PE in slot 1
QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card Core/Net: 10
Net: 4
QPC71 E&M/DX Trunk card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
QPC414 Network card Core/Net: 0–7
Net: 5-12
QPC441 3-Port Extender card Core/Net: 11
Net: 1
QPC471 Clock Controller card 61C Core/Net: 9
Net: 5 -12
For 81C, use NT8D35 Net slot 13; in QSD39
shelf, use Net slot 2; in QSD40 shelf, use slot 13
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card Core/Net: 9, 13
QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line card IPE: any slot but "Contr"
QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card IPE: "DLB"
QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card Core/Net: 0–7
Net: 5–11, 13–14
QPC775 Clock Controller 61C Core/Net: slot 14.
For 81C use NT8D35 Net slot 13; in QSD39
shelf, use Net slot 2; in QSD40 shelf, use slot 13.
QPC789 16-Port 500/2500 Message Waiting IPE: any slot but "Contr"
Line card
QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card Core/Net: 0-7

Precautions
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, review the following
guidelines before handling system equipment.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Precautions 65

WARNING
Module covers are not hinged; do not let go of the covers. Lift
covers away from the module and set them out of your work area.

WARNING
Circuit cards may contain a lithium battery. There is a danger of
explosion if the battery is incorrectly replaced. Do not replace
components on any circuit card; you must replace the entire card.
Dispose of circuit cards according to the manufacturer’s
instructions.

To avoid damage to circuit cards from static discharge, wear a properly

connected antistatic wrist strap when you work on system equipment. If a
wrist strap is not available, regularly touch one of the bare metal strips in
a module to discharge static. Figure 15 "Static discharge points" (page
66) shows the recommended connection points for the wrist strap and the
bare metal strips you should touch.
Handle circuit cards as follows:
• Unpack or handle cards away from electric motors, transformers, or
similar machinery.
• Handle cards by the edges only. Do not touch the contacts or
components.
• Set cards on a protective antistatic bag. If an antistatic bag is not
available, hand-hold the card, or set it in a card cage unseated from
the connectors.
• Store cards in protective packing. Do not stack cards on top of each
other unless they are packaged.
• Keep cards installed in the system as much as possible to avoid dirty
contacts and unnecessary wear.
• Store cards in a cool, dry, dust-free area.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 66 Circuit card installation

Figure 15
Static discharge points

During repair and maintenance procedures do the following:

• Turn off the circuit breaker or switch for a module power supply before
the power supply is removed or inserted.
• In AC-powered systems, capacitors in the power supply must discharge.
Wait five full minutes between turning off the circuit breaker and
removing the power supply from the module.
• Software disable cards, if applicable, before they are removed or
inserted.
• Hardware disable cards, whenever there is an enable/disable switch,
before they are removed or inserted.
• Return defective or heavily contaminated cards to a repair center. Do
not try to repair or clean them.

Installing a circuit card

This procedure provides detailed installation instructions for circuit cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing a circuit card 67

DANGER
To avoid personal injury and equipment damage, read all of the
guidelines in "Circuit and installation" (page 62) before you begin
installation and follow all guidelines throughout the procedure.

Procedure 2
Installing a circuit card
Step Action

1 Open the protective carton and remove the circuit card from the
antistatic bag. Return the antistatic bag to the carton and store it
for future use.

2 Inspect the card components, faceplate, locking devices, and

connectors for damage. If damaged, tag the card with a description
of the problem and package it for return to a repair center.
3 Refer to the work order to determine the module and slot location
for the card.

4 If there is an enable/disable (Enb/Dis) switch on the faceplate, set it

to Dis.
5 If there are option switches or jumpers on the card, set them
according to the work order (see "Option settings" (page 81)).

CAUTION
System Failure
Incorrectly set switches on common equipment circuit
cards may cause a system failure.

6 Squeeze the ends of the locking devices on the card and pull
the tabs away from the latch posts and faceplate (see Figure 16
"Installing the circuit card in the card cage" (page 68)).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 68 Circuit card installation

Figure 16
Installing the circuit card in the card cage

7 Insert the card into the card aligning guides in the card cage. Gently
push the card into the slot until you feel resistance. The tip of the
locking device must be behind the edge of the card cage (see Figure
16 "Installing the circuit card in the card cage" (page 68)).

8 Lock the card into position by simultaneously pushing the ends of

the locking devices against the faceplate.
Note: When IPE cards are installed, the red LED on the
faceplate remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs.
If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED flashes three
times and remains lit until the card is configured and enabled
in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED does not follow
the pattern described or operates in any other manner (such as
continually flashing or remaining weakly lit), replace the card.

9 If there is an enable/disable switch, set it to Enb.

Note: Do not enable the switch on an NT8D04 Superloop
Network card or QPC414 Network card until network loop cables
are installed.

10 If you are adding a voice, conference, or tone and digit loop, press the
manual initialize (Man Int) button on the NT5D03 or the NT5D10 Call
Processor if the card is associated with the active Call Processor:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing a circuit card 69

Note: An initialization causes a momentary interruption in call

processing.

11 If you are installing the card in a working system, refer to the work
order and the technical document, Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611) to add the required office data to
the system memory.
12 Go to the appropriate test procedure in "Acceptance tests" (page 71).

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 70 Circuit card installation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 71

Acceptance tests
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 71)

"Conference cards" (page 71)

"Digitone receiver cards" (page 74)

"Line cards" (page 75)

"Multifrequency sender cards" (page 75)

"Multifrequency signaling cards" (page 76)

"Network cards" (page 77)

"Trunk cards" (page 77)

"Tone and digit switch cards" (page 79)

Introduction
Test procedures for most circuit cards require that internal and external
cabling be installed. See the appropriate installation document for your
system and Telephones and Consoles Fundamentals (NN43001-567) for
cabling procedures.

Conference cards
Procedure 3
Testing conference cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a conference card or to test the conference
function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 72 Acceptance tests

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2 Request the status of a loop on the conference card:

LD 38
STAT loop
Conference status is formatted as follows:
CNFC n DSBL n BUSY
"n" represents the number of conference groups disabled and busy
CHAN n DSBL n BUSY
"n" represents the number of channels disabled and busy
UNEQ
card is not equipped in the system
DSBL card is disabled in software

3 If the conference card loop is disabled, enable it.

For an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:
ENLX loop
(the conference loop is the odd loop of the conference/TDS loop pair)
Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically
when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command
ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address
even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the
loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware
for the card.

For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:

ENLL loop
(the conference loop must be an even loop for cards other than the
NT8D17)
If the system response is other than OK, seeSoftware Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.
4 Test the conference loop for channel, group, and switching faults:
CNFC loop
If the conference loop passes the tests, the output is OK.
If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.
5 Prepare the system for a manual conference call on a specified loop:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Conference cards 73

CNFC MAN loop c

Where "c" is the manual conference group (1-15)
A manual conference test is performed by stepping through
conference channels and groups, listening for noise that indicates a
faulty card.
The manual conference test can be performed through a system
terminal or BCS maintenance telephone. If commands are entered
from a maintenance telephone, this telephone automatically
becomes part of the manual conference call.
Only one manual conference call is allowed at one time. A manual
conference consists of only two telephones, where one telephone
acts as a signal source while the other acts as a listening monitor.
After you enter the CNFC command, any two telephones (one may
already be the maintenance telephone) dialing the special service
prefix code (SPRE) and the digits 93 enters the manual conference
call. The prime directory number (PDN) indicator, if equipped, lights
on each telephone.
Going on-hook takes the telephone out of the manual conference
call, and the test must be restarted.
See LD 38 in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611)
for more detailed information on using this command.
6 Test various channels and conference groups audibly with the
command
CNFC STEP
When stepping through channels and groups, a clicking followed by
silence is normal. Any distortion or other noises indicates a faulty
card.
Once the CNFC STEP command has been entered, entering C on
the system terminal or maintenance telephone steps through the
conference channels. Entering G steps through the conference
groups. There are 15 channels per group and 15 groups per
conference card.
Entering an asterisk (*) and END stops the test.
Again, see "LD 38" in the Software Input/Output Reference —
Maintenance (NN43001-711) for detailed information on using this
command.
7 End the session in LD 38:
****

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 74 Acceptance tests

—End—

Digitone receiver cards

Note: The DTR daughterboard connected to a QPC659 Dual Loop
Peripheral Buffer card cannot be assigned when the IPE shelf is used
in single loop mode.

Procedure 4
Testing digitone receiver cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a Digitone receiver (DTR) card, a DTR
daughterboard, or the DTR function on the NT8D18 Network/DTR card.

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2 See if the Digitone receiver to be tested is disabled: LD 34

STAT
The system responds with the terminal number (TN), or numbers, of
any disabled Digitone receivers.

3 If the Digitone receiver is disabled, enable it:

ENLR l s c uloop, shelf, card, and unit numbers
4 Test the Digitone receiver:
DTR l s c uloop, shelf, card, and unit numbers
If the system response is other than OK, seeSoftware Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.
5 End the session in LD 34:
****

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Multifrequency sender cards 75

Line cards
Procedure 5
Testing line cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a line card.

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test on

a specific loop and shelf:
LD 30
SHLF l sloop and shelf numbers
If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.

3 For a line card on a superloop, perform a signaling test on a specific

card or unit:
UNTT l s c loop, shelf, and card numbers
For the NT8D02 Digital Line card, enter:
UNTT l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers
If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.
4 End the session in LD 30:
****

—End—

Multifrequency sender cards

Procedure 6
Testing multifrequency sender cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a multifrequency sender (MFS) card or the MFS
function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 76 Acceptance tests

2 Test and enable an MFS loop:

LD 46
MFS loop
(on the NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, the TDS/MFS loop is the
even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair)
Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically
when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command
ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address
even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the
loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware
for the card.

If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output

Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.
3 Access the system from a maintenance telephone; then enter:
LD 46
Give the system approximately 20 seconds to load the program.
See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details on accessing
the system from a maintenance telephone.
4 Obtain 10-second bursts of digits 1 to 9, 0, and 11 to 15 (in that
order) for all digits on the specified loop: TONE loop ALL
Each burst should sound different. If the bursts do not sound
different, replace the card.
5 End the session in LD 46:
****

—End—

Multifrequency signaling cards

Procedure 7
Testing multifrequency signaling cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a multifrequency signaling card.

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2 Test and enable the specified unit:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Trunk cards 77

LD 54
ATST l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers
If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.

3 End the session in LD 54:

****

—End—

Network cards
Procedure 8
Testing network cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a network card.

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2 Perform a network memory test, continuity test, and signaling test:

LD 30
LOOP loop can be a specific loop number or ALL
If ALL is specified, all enabled loops (except attendant console
loops) and all shelves on each loop are tested.
If only one loop is being tested and it is disabled, enter ENLL loop
to enable and test a network card associated with the specified loop.
(This command cannot enable network cards disabled by LD 32.)
If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.
3 End the session in LD 30:
****

—End—

Trunk cards
Use the following procedures to test a trunk card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 78 Acceptance tests

Procedure 9
Testing a trunk card using a maintenance telephone
Step Action

1 Access the system from a maintenance telephone.

See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in the Software
Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details
on accessing the system from a maintenance telephone.

2 Test the trunk unit:

LD 36
TRK l s c u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers
3 If the maintenance telephone is hooked up to a monitor and the
system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.

—End—

Procedure 10
Testing a trunk card using a system terminal
Step Action

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)
2 Enter:
LD 36

3 To test a trunk from a remote test center, seize a central office (CO)
monitor trunk:
CALL
or
CALL l s c u
Seize the automatic number identification (ANI) trunk: TRK l s c
u loop, shelf, card, and unit numbers
When you see the DN? prompt, enter the directory number (DN) you
want the system to dial.
If the system response is other than OK, see the Software
Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze
the messages.

4 End the session in LD 36:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Tone and digit switch cards 79

****

5 Test an automatically identified outward dialing (AIOD) trunk card:

LD 41
AIOD l s c loop, shelf, and card numbers
If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.

6 End the session in LD 41:

****

—End—

Tone and digit switch cards

Procedure 11
Testing tone and digit switch cards
Step Action
Use this procedure to test a tone and digit switch (TDS) card or to test the
TDS function of an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card.

1 Log into the system:

LOGI (password)

2 Obtain a list of terminal numbers (TNs) for disabled TDS cards:

LD 34
STAD
3 If the TDS loop to be tested is disabled, enable it.
For an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter:
ENLX loop
(the TDS/MFS loop is the even loop of the conference/TDS loop pair)
Note: The conference/TDS card is not enabled automatically
when it is inserted. You must enable the card with the command
ENLX. (This command is used in LD 34 and LD 46 to address
even loops and in LD 38 to address odd loops.) Enabling the
loops with the command ENLL does not enable the hardware
for the card.

For other than an NT8D17 Conference/TDS card, enter: ENLL loop

4 Test the TDS loop:

TDS loop

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 80 Acceptance tests

If the system response is other than OK, see Software Input/Output

Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to analyze the
messages.

5 End the session in LD 34:

****
6 Using a maintenance telephone, log into the system.
See "Communicating with the Meridian 1" in the Software
Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details
on accessing the system using a maintenance telephone.

7 From the maintenance telephone, enter:

LD#34##
To test outpulsers and channels for the TDS loop, see Table 12 "TDS
tone tests" (page 80) for a sample of the input commands used with
the maintenance telephone. See Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611) for all tones that can be tested.

8 Exit LD 34 from the maintenance telephone:

****

—End—

Table 12
TDS tone tests
Dial pad
Input command equivalent Description
BSY#loop## 279#loop## Provides busy tone from TDS loop specified.
C## 2## Removes any active tone.
DIA#loop## 342#loop## Provides dial tone from TDS loop specified.
OVF#loop## 683#loop## Provides overflow tone from TDS loop specified.
RBK#loop## 725#loop## Provides ringback tone from TDS loop specified.
RNG#loop## 764#loop## Provides ring tone from TDS loop specified.
**** Exits TDS test program.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 81

Option settings
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Circuit card grid" (page 82)

"NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card" (page 83)

Table 14 "General purpose switch settings" (page 85)

"NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC" (page 89)

"NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane" (page 91)

"NT6D68 Core module backplane" (page 92)

"NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card" (page 92)

"NT8D14 Universal Trunk card" (page 93)

"NT8D15 E and M Trunk card" (page 95)

"NT8D17 Conference/TDS card" (page 96)

"NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC" (page 96)

"NT8D22 System Monitor" (page 97)

"NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board" (page 101)

"NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card" (page 103)

"QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104)

"QPC71 E and M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards" (page 105)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 82 Option settings

"QPC414 Network card" (page 105)

"QPC441 3-Port Extender cards" (page 106)

"QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards" (page 108)

"QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards" (page 109)

"QPC471 Clock Controller card" (page 110)

"QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card" (page 111)

"QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card" (page 111)

"QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card" (page 113)

"QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards" (page 114)

"QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards" (page 114)

"QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card" (page 115)

"QPC775 Clock Controller card" (page 115)

"QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card" (page 116)

Circuit card grid

Some circuit cards contain option switches or jumpers, or both, that define
specific functions. A switch or jumper can be identified by an alphanumeric
coordinate (such as D29) that indicates a location on the card, or by a switch
number (such as SW2) printed on the circuit board (see Figure 17 "Circuit
card grid" (page 83)). Positions on a switch (for example, positions 1, 2, 3,
and 4 on SW2) are labeled on the switch block.
On a circuit card:
• ON may be indicated by the word "on," the word "up," the word "closed,"
the number "1," an arrow pointing up, or a solid dot (•).
• OFF may be indicated by the word "down," the word "open," the number
"0," or an arrow pointing down.

Throughout this document, if neither ON nor OFF is given (there is a blank

space) for a position on a switch, that position may be set to either ON or
OFF because it has no function for the option described.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card 83

Figure 17
Circuit card grid

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station card

Table 13 "OPS analog line card configuration" (page 83) lists option settings
for the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station analog card.

Table 13
OPS analog line card configuration
Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS)
Class of Service
ONP OPX
(CLS) (Note 1)
Loop resistance
0–460 0–2300 (Note 2)
(ohms)
Jumper strap Both JX.0 and JX.1 Both JX.0 and JX.1 Both JX.0 and JX.1
setting (Note 6) off off on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 84 Option settings

Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS)

Class of Service
ONP OPX
(CLS) (Note 1)
Loop loss (dB)
0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15
(Note 3)
TIMP 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
(Notes 1, 4) ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms
Class of Service
ONP OPX
(CLS) (Note 1)
BIMP 600 600
3COM1 3COM2 3COM1 3COM2 3COM2
(Notes 1, 4) ohms ohms
Gain treatment
No Yes
(Note 5)
Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10).
Note 2: The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms.
Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to
loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire.
Note 4: Default software impedance settings are:
ONP CLS OPX CLS
TIMP: 600 ohms 600 ohms
BIMP: 600 ohms 3COM2
Note 1: Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS
loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15
dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohms on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.
Note 2: Jumper strap settings JX.0 and JX.1 apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number,
0–7. "Off" indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store
unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below:

NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card

Switch setting tables for this card are listed in subsections according to their
function. Bold font designates factory (default) settings.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 85

General purpose switches

Use switch set SW9 for Trunk 0; use switch set SW15 for Trunk 1 (see Table
14 "General purpose switch settings" (page 85)).

Table 14
General purpose switch settings
SW9/SW15
Switch Description switch setting
1 Framing Mode off - ESF

on - SF
2 Yellow Alarm Method off - FDL

on - Digit2
3 Zero Code Suppression Mode off - B8ZS

on - AMI
4 Unused off

Trunk interface switches

A switch provides selection of T1 transmission. Use switch SW4 for Trunk 0;
use switch SW10 for Trunk 1 (see Table 15 "Trunk interface transmission
mode switch settings" (page 85)).

Table 15
Trunk interface transmission mode switch settings
Description SW4/SW10 switch setting
For future use off
T1 on

A set of three switches provides selection of dB values. Use SW5, SW6,

and SW7 for Trunk 0; use SW11, SW12, and SW13 for Trunk 1 (see Table
16 "Trunk interface line build out switch settings" (page 85)).

Table 16
Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Switch Setting
Description SW5/SW11 SW6/SW12 SW7/SW13
0 dB off off off
7.5 dB on on off
15 dB on off on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 86 Option settings

A set of four DIP switches provides selection among three values for
receiver impedance. Use SW8 for Trunk 0; use SW14 for Trunk 1 (see Table
17 "Trunk interface impedance switch settings" (page 86)).

Table 17
Trunk interface impedance switch settings
Description SW8/SW14 Switch Settings
75 off off on off
100 on off off on
120 off off off on

Ring ground switches

A set of four DIP switches selects which Ring lines are connected to ground
(see Table 18 "Ring ground switch settings" (page 86)).

Table 18
Ring ground switch settings
Switch Description S2 switch setting
off - Ring line is not grounded
1 Trunk 0 Transmit
on- Ring line is grounded
off - Ring line is not grounded
2 Trunk 0 Receive
on - Ring line is grounded
off - Ring line is not grounded
3 Trunk 1 Transmit
on - Ring line is grounded
off - Ring line is not grounded
4 Trunk 1 Receive
on - Ring line is grounded

DCH mode and address select switches

One switch selects an on-board NTBK51AA D-Channel daughterboard
and an external MSDL/DCHI card. Four other switches provide the
daughterboard address (see Table 19 "DCH mode and address select
switch settings" (page 87)).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT5D12 Dual DTI/PRI (DDP) card 87

Table 19
DCH mode and address select switch settings
Swit
Description S3 Switch Setting
ch
1-4 D-Channel daughterboard Address See the next table.
5-7 For future use off
8 External DCH or Onboard DDCH off - MSDL or DCHI card

on - Onboard DDCH
daughterboard

Table 20
NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings
Device Address1 Switch Setting
02 off off off off
1 on off off off
2 off on off off
3 on on off off
4 off off on off
5 on off on off
6 off on on off
7 on on on off
8 off off off on
9 on off off on
10 off on off on
11 on on off on
12 off off on on
13 on off on on
14 off on on on
15 on on on on
Note 1: The maximum number of DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices in the system is 16.
The Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations. For programming
information on the MSDL, refer to technical document Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611)guide.
Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System Monitor.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 88 Option settings

Illustrations of switch locations and settings

Figure 18 "Switch functions and areas" (page 88) displays functional areas
for switches on the NT5D12 DDP card.

Figure 18
Switch functions and areas

Figure 19 "Switch default settings" (page 89) displays default settings for
switches on the NT5D12 DDP card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC 89

Figure 19
Switch default settings

NT6D42 Ringing Generator DC

Table 21 "NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British
Telecom" (page 90) through Table 26 "NT6D42CC SW2" (page 91) list
option settings for the NT6D42 Ringing Generator.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 90 Option settings

Table 21
NT6D42 recommended options for North American and British Telecom
Ringing Ringing
Application frequency voltage Jumper locations Ringing output
North America 20 Hz 86 V ac P5 Low impedance

High voltage

message waiting
British Telecom 25 Hz 80 V ac P4 Low impedance

No high voltage

message waiting

Table 22
NT6D42 jumper locations P4 and P5
High voltage message waiting Pin location
Disable Jumper in P4
Enable Jumper in P5
Note: One jumper must be installed.

Table 23
NT6D42 jumper location J7
Ringing output Jumper location J7
Low impedance (normal) Connect pins 1 and 2
High impedance (Australia) Connect pins 2 and 3

Table 24
NT6D42 SW1
Ringing frequency (Hz) Position SW1
20 1
25 2
50 3

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane 91

Table 25
NT6D42CB SW2
SW2
Ringing Message waiting
voltage voltage 1 2 3 4
86 V ac –120 V dc off off off off
86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on
80 V ac –120 V dc on off off off
80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on
75 V ac –120 V dc off on off off
75 V ac –150 V dc off on off on
70 V ac –120 V dc off off on off
70 V ac –150 V dc off off on on

Table 26
NT6D42CC SW2
SW2
Ringing Message waiting
voltage voltage 1 2 3 4
86 V ac –100 V dc off off off off
86 V ac –150 V dc off off off on
80 V ac –100 V dc on off off off
80 V ac –150 V dc on off off on
75 V ac –100 V dc off on off off
75 V ac –150 V dc off on off on
70 V ac –100 V dc off off on off
70 V ac –150 V dc off off on on

NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane

Table 27
NT5D2101/NT9D1102 Core/Network module backplane
Location
Jumper (between slots) Core/Network 1 Core/Network 0
Note: Berg jumper is located at the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This is inside the
card cage assembly.)
JB1 14/15 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 92 Option settings

NT6D68 Core module backplane

Table 28
NT6D68 Core module backplane
Location
Jumper (between slots) Core 1 Core 0
Note: Berg jumpers are located along the bottom of the primary side of the backplane. (This
is inside the card cage assembly.)
JB4 9 / 10 Jumper plug not installed Plug installed
JB3 10 / 11 Plug installed Plug installed
JB2 11 / 12 Plug installed Plug installed
JB1 12 / 13 Plug installed Plug installed

NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card

Table 29
NT6D80 Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card
Port 0—SW4 Port 0—SW8
RS-232-D DTE or DCE* all off all off
RS-422-A DTE (terminal) all off all on
RS-422-A DCE (modem) all on all off
Port 1—SW3 Port 1—SW7
RS-232-D DTE or DCE* all off all off
RS-422-A DTE all off all on
RS-422-A DCE all on all off
Port 2—SW2 Port 2—SW6
RS-232-D DTE or DCE* all off all off
RS-422-A DTE all off all on
RS-422-A DCE all on all off
Port 3—SW1 Port 3—SW5
RS-232-D DTE or DCE* all off all off
RS-422-A DTE all off all on
RS-422-A DCE all on all off
* RS-232-D DTE and DCE modes are software configured. RS-422-A DTE and DEC modes are
switch configured.
Note: The device number for the MSDL card is configured in LD17 at the prompt DNUM. You must
also set the device number, using switches S9 and S10, on the MSDL card. S9 designates ones
and S10 designates tens. To set the device number as 14, for example, set S10 to 1 and S9 to 4.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card 93

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 30 "NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings" (page 93) through
Table 34 "NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss" (page
95) list option settings for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.

Table 30
NT8D14 vintage AA jumper strap settings
Modes Location Jumper strap
Central Office (CO) J1, J2 off
2-way tie trunk (loop dial repeat) J1, J2 off
2-way tie trunk (outgoing/incoming dial) J1, J2 off
Recorded announcement (RAN) J1, J2 off
Paging trunk J1, J2 off
Japan CO/DID operation J1, J2 off
DID operation: loop length > = 2000 3/4 J1, J2 on
DID operation: loop length < 2000 3/4 J1, J2 off
Note 1: off = no strap present.
Note 2: Locations (J1, J2) apply to all eight units.

Table 31
NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings-factory standard
Jumper strap settings
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X
CO/FX/WATS Zero–1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 1–2
2-way tie (LDR)
2-way tie (OAID)
DID Zero–600 ohms
RAN: continuous Not applicable: RAN and
operation mode paging trunks should not
leave the building.
Paging
Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit
number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused straps
on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 94 Option settings

Table 32
NT8D14 vintages BA/BB jumper strap settings-extended range
Jumper strap settings
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X J4.X
CO/FX/WATS > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3
2-way tie (LDR)
2-way tie (OAID)
DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3
RAN: pulse start or level Not applicable: RAN Off Off 2–3 1–2
start modes trunks should not leave the
building.
Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit
number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.

Table 33
NT8D14 vintages BA/BB trunk types-termination impedance and balance network
Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)
Terminating
impedance Zero–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (zero–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2
2-way tie (LDR) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2
2-way tie (OAID) 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2
DID (loop < 600 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms 3COM1 3COM2
ohms)
DID (loop Š 600 600 or 900 ohms 600 ohms N/A 3COM2
ohms)
RAN: continuous 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A
operation mode
Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or 900
ohms or 3COM and is jumper selectable between 3COM1 and 3COM2.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card 95

Table 34
NT8D14 vintages BA/BB cable loop resistance and loss
Cable loop loss (dB)
Cable loop resistance (ohms) (non-loaded at 1kHz)
Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG
915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5
1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5
2225 m (7300 ft) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7
3566 m (11700 ft) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0
5639 m (18500 ft) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.4

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 35
NT8D15 E and M Trunk card
Mode of operation (Note 2)
2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk
DX tip & ring pair
Jumper M—rcv E—rcv
(Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II M—xmt M—xmt
J1.X off off off off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3
J2.X on on on on off off
(Note 3)
J3.X off off off off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J4.X off off off off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2
J5.X off off off off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J6.X off off off off on on
J7.X off off off off on on
J8.X off off off off on on
J9.X Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 Pins 1–2
Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all 4 units; "X" indicates the unit number,
0–3.
Note: Off indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable.
Note: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance exceeds 2500 ohms.
Note: Dot next to the jumper block indicates pin 1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 96 Option settings

NT8D17 Conference/TDS card

Switch and jumper settings are used to select the companding law and to
change the conference attenuation PAD levels. These PAD levels are used
if prompt CPAD = 1 in LD97. The J1 connector on the faceplate is reserved
for future use.

You can enable or disable a warning tone for conference calls. When the
option is enabled, the tone lets callers know they are entering a conference
call. The switch for this option is preset to disable the warning tone.

Companding law Jumper at J3

µ-law (North America), A-law connect pins 2 and 3
Special cases connect pins 1 and 2
SW2 (see Note)
Attenuation levels 1 2 3
10.2 db on on on
8.5 db on off on
6 db off on on
6 db off off on
4.5 db on on off
3 db on off off
0 db off on off
0 db off off off
Note: Set position 4 to ON to disable the warning tone option. When the warning tone is enabled,
select the warning tone level as shown below.
Level Jumper at J2
24 db connect pins 1 and 2
30 db connect pins 2 and 3

NT8D21 Ringing Generator AC

Settings
Frequency Amplitude P1 P2 P3
20 Hz 86 V ac open open 2–5
8–11
25 Hz 70 V ac open 1–4 open
7–10
25 Hz 80 V ac open 3–6 open
9–12

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT8D22 System Monitor 97

Settings
Frequency Amplitude P1 P2 P3
25 Hz 86 V ac open 2–5 open
8–11
50 Hz 70 V ac 1–4 open open
7–10
50 Hz 80 V ac 3–6 open open
9–12

NT8D22 System Monitor

The master system monitor, located in the column with CP 0, must be
numbered 0. Slave system monitors are numbered from 1 to 63.

For examples of system monitor option settings in basic configurations, see

"Sample settings for NT8D22 System Monitors."

Configure the system monitor in Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)

columns as slaves. There is no serial connection between RPE columns.

Table 36
NT8D22 SW1
Position
SW1 function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Not used on
Meridian 1 columns only off
Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1
columns only) off
Not used off
Position 1 is ON, master column on
contains CP:master off
slaves
DC-powered system on
AC-powered system off
PFTU is activated by this column
due to over-temperature on
PFTU is not activated by this off
column
Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1
off
columns only)
on
Not used
off
Not used

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 98 Option settings

Position
SW1 function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Position 1 is OFF (Meridian 1
off
columns only)
on
Not used
off
Not used
Not used on on
Not used on off
Not used off on
Meridian 1 columns only off off

Table 37
NT8D22 SW2
Position
SW2 indication 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Master system monitor on
Slave system monitor off
on
Not used
Always
All other operation
off
Configure 3–8 according to the Table
For master, indicates total number
39 "NT8D22 settings for total number of
of slaves
slaves-SW2 on master" (page 99).
Configure 3–8 according to the Table
For each slave, indicates the slave
40 "NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave
address
address-SW2 on slave" (page 100).

Table 38
NT8D22 SW3
Position
SW3 indication 1 2 3 4
master on
CTA
slave off
master on
CTR
slave off
master on
FAIL
slave off
master on
MAJOR
slave off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT8D22 System Monitor 99

Table 39
NT8D22 settings for total number of slaves-SW2 on master

How many Switch position How many Switch position

slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8 slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 on on on on on on 32 off on on on on on
1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off
2 on on on on off on 34 off on on on off on
3 on on on on off off 35 off on on on off off
4 on on on off on on 36 off on on off on on
5 on on on off on off 37 off on on off on off
6 on on on off off on 38 off on on off off on
7 on on on off off off 39 off on on off off off
8 on on off on on on 40 off on off on on on
9 on on off on on off 41 off on off on on off
10 on on off on off on 42 off on off on off on
11 on on off on off off 43 off on off on off off
12 on on off off on on 44 off on off off on on
13 on on off off on off 45 off on off off on off
14 on on off off off on 46 off on off off off on
15 on on off off off off 47 off on off off off off
16 on off on on on on 48 off off on on on on
17 on off on on on off 49 off off on on on off
18 on off on on off on 50 off off on on off on
19 on off on on off off 51 off off on on off off
20 on off on off on on 52 off off on off on on
21 on off on off on off 53 off off on off on off
22 on off on off off on 54 off off on off off on
23 on off on off off off 55 off off on off off off
24 on off off on on on 56 off off off on on on
25 on off off on on off 57 off off off on on off
26 on off off on off on 58 off off off on off on
27 on off off on off off 59 off off off on off off
28 on off off off on on 60 off off off off on on
29 on off off off on off 61 off off off off on off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 100 Option settings

How many Switch position How many Switch position

slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8 slave units 3 4 5 6 7 8
30 on off off off off on 62 off off off off off on
31 on off off off off off 63 off off off off off off

Table 40
NT8D22AD/NT8D22ADE5 slave address-SW2 on slave

Slave unit Position Slave unit Position

address 3 4 5 6 7 8 address 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 on on on on on off 33 off on on on on off
2 on on on on off on 34 off on on on off on
3 on on on on off off 35 off on on on off off
4 on on on off on on 36 off on on off on on
5 on on on off on off 37 off on on off on off
6 on on on off off on 38 off on on off off on
7 on on on off off off 39 off on on off off off
8 on on off on on on 40 off on off on on on
9 on on off on on off 41 off on off on on off
10 on on off on off on 42 off on off on off on
11 on on off on off off 43 off on off on off off
12 on on off off on on 44 off on off off on on
13 on on off off on off 45 off on off off on off
14 on on off off off on 46 off on off off off on
15 on on off off off off 47 off on off off off off
16 on off on on on on 48 off off on on on on
17 on off on on on off 49 off off on on on off
18 on off on on off on 50 off off on on off on
19 on off on on off off 51 off off on on off off
20 on off on off on on 52 off off on off on on
21 on off on off on off 53 off off on off on off
22 on off on off off on 54 off off on off off on
23 on off on off off off 55 off off on off off off
24 on off off on on on 56 off off off on on on
25 on off off on on off 57 off off off on on off
26 on off off on off on 58 off off off on off on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board 101

Slave unit Position Slave unit Position

address 3 4 5 6 7 8 address 3 4 5 6 7 8
27 on off off on off off 59 off off off on off off
28 on off off off on on 60 off off off off on on
29 on off off off on off 61 off off off off on off
30 on off off off off on 62 off off off off off on
31 on off off off off off 63 off off off off off off
32 off on on on on on

NT8D22 jumper settings

EA-GND short (Pins 2 and 3 short) Accessing External EPROM.
EA-VCC short (Pins 2 and 1 short) Accessing Internal EPROM.

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Baud rate
Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports
1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the configuration for these switches in Table
317 "SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings" (page 816).

Table 41
QSDI paddle board baud rate switch settings
SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2),
SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4)
Baud Baud Clock
rate (kHz) 1 2 3 4
150 2.40 on off on on
300 4.80 on on off on
600 9.60 on off off on
1,200 19.20 on on on off
2,400 38.40 on off on off
4,800 76.80 on on off off
9,600 153.60 on off off off
19,200* 307.20 on on on on
* For future use.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 102 Option settings

Address
Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four
UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The
configurations for both switches are shown in Table 42 "QSDI paddle board
address switch settings" (page 102). To avoid system problems, switches
SW15 and SW16 must not be configured identically.

Table 42
QSDI paddle board address switch settings
SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings
SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 E X off off off off off off
2 3 E X off off off off off on
4 5 E X off off off off on off
Device 6 7 E X off off off off on on
pair
addresses 8 9 E X off off off on off off
10 11 E X off off off on off on
12 13 E X off off off on on off
14 15 E X off off off on on on
* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1
to ON.
+ For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

DTE/DCE mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE equipment)
or a modem (DCE equipment). Instructions for configuring the DTE/DCE
switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6, SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in
Table 43 "QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings" (page 103).

Example: Port 1 is changed from DTE to DCE by reversing every switch

position on SW3 and SW2; that is, switches that were off for DTE are turned
on for DCE, and switches that were on for DTE are turned off for DCE.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card 103

Table 43
QSDI paddle board DTE/DCE mode switch settings
Port 1 - SW 3 Port 1 -SW 2
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off
Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off
Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3— SW 6
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off
Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off

NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card

The NT8D72 Primary Rate Interface card allows the configuration of
interface impedance by way of DIP switches.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 104 Option settings

Figure 20
NT8D72 DIP switch settings

QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card

Options (minimum vintage N) Plug location
NT5D21 Core/Network module F13
NT8D35 Network module

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC414 Network card 105

QPC71 E and M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk cards

Applicati Unit 0 E35 switch Unit 1 E5 switch
on 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
E and M off off off on off off on off off off off on off off on off
Paging off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off
DX 2-wir on on off off off on off on on on off off off on off on
e (condu
ctor loop
< 2.5 K
3
/4)
DX 2-wir on on on on off on off on on on on on off on off on
e (condu
ctor loop
> 2.5 K
3
/4)
DX 4-wir off off off off on on off on off off off off on on off on
e (condu
ctor loop
< 2.5 K
3
/4)
DX 4-wir off off on on on on off on off off on on on on off on
e (condu
ctor loop
> 2.5 K
3
/4)
Note: DX trunks must be balanced correctly. If the loop is <2.5 K 3/4, far-end balancing is standard.
If the loop is >2.5 K 3/4, far end balancing requires standard plus 2.5 K 3/4. To connect PBX to PBX,
switches should be arranged for loops to be >2.5 K 3/4 at one end and <2.5 K 3/4 at the other. Apply
similar treatment when connecting to Pulse QPJ69 trunks.

QPC414 Network card

Pin connection
Application J3/S2 and J4/S1
T-1 facilities (including PRI/DTI),* channel service unit connect pins 1 and 2
(pin 1 is next to the white dot)
Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage B (for different styles/series):
J3—E11 or H11
J4—H17 or E7

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 106 Option settings

S1 and S2—E33
Note: Possible jumper locations for vintage A (for different styles/series). These cards can only be
used in the option A setting:
J3—H5 or E11
J4—H17 or E7
S1 and S2—E33
Note: Connectors and loop relations:
Even loop: J1 faceplate connector, jumper at J4 or S1
Odd loop: J2 faceplate connector, jumper at J3 or S2

QPC441 3-Port Extender cards

For CS 1000M SG and MG systems, QPC441 vintage F or later must be
used in all modules.

Table 44
QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT4N41CP PII Core Net modules
Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A".
Switch Settings
Module D20 switch position
NT4N41 CP Core/Net modules only 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Group 0 off on on off on on on on
Group 1 off on on off on on off on
Group 2 off on on off on off on on
Core/Net 0
Group 3 off on on off on off off on
Group 4 off on on off off on on on
(Shelf 0)
Group 5 off on on off off on off on
Group 6 off on on off off off on on
Group 7 off on on off off off off on
Group 0 off on on off on on on off
Group 1 off on on off on on off off
Group 2 off on on off on off on off
Core/Net 1
Group 3 off on on off on off off off
Group 4 off on on off off on on off
(Shelf 1)
Group 5 off on on off off on off off
Group 6 off on on off off off on off
Group 7 off on on off off off off off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC441 3-Port Extender cards 107

Table 45
QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT5D21 modules
Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A".
Switch Settings
Module D20 switch position
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
NT5D21 (Option 61C)
Core/Network 0 off on on off on on on on
Core/Network 1 off on on off on on on off
NT5D21 (Option 81C)
Group 0 off on on off on on on on
Group 1 off on on off on on off on
Group 2 off on on off on off on on
Core/Net 0 Group 3 off on on off on off off on
(Shelf 0) Group 4 off on on off off on on on
Group 5 off on on off off on off on
Group 6 off on on off off off on on
Group 7 off on on off off off off on
Group 0 off on on off on on on off
Group 1 off on on off on on off off
Group 2 off on on off on off on off
Core/Net 1
Group 3 off on on off on off off off
Group 4 off on on off off on on off
(Shelf 1)
Group 5 off on on off off on off off
Group 6 off on on off off off on off
Group 7 off on on off off off off off

Table 46
QPC441 3PE card installed in the NT8D35 module
Jumper Settings: Set Jumper RN27 at E35 to "A".
Switch Settings
D20 switch position
Modules 1 2 3 4
Option 81, 81C (Note 1) off on on on
Shelf Group 5 6 7 8

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 108 Option settings

0 on on on on
1 on on off on
0 2 on off on on
3 on off off on
4 off on on on
5 off on off on
6 off off on on
7 off off off on
0 on on on off
1 on on off off
1 2 on off on off
3 on off off off
4 off on on off
5 off on off off
6 off off on off
7 off off off off

QPC559, QPC560 Loop Signaling Trunk cards

Table 47 "QPC559, QPC560 single density" (page 108) and Table 48
"QPC559, QPC560 double density" (page 109) list option settings for loop
signaling trunk cards.

Table 47
QPC559, QPC560 single density
Single density—Unit 0/1
F30/F8 switch
Application 1 2 3 4 5 6
Outgoing ANI only:
loop pulsing off off off off off off
battery and ground pulsing off off off off on off
Other than outgoing ANI on off on off on off
Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3
600 3/4 resistive impedance connect pins 1 and 2
3-component complex impedance connect pins 2 and 3

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards 109

Table 48
QPC559, QPC560 double density
Double density—Unit 0/1/2/3
H17/H3/A17/A3 switch
Application 1 2 3 4 5 6
Outgoing ANI only:
loop pulsing off off off off off off
battery and ground pulsing off off off off on off
Other than outgoing ANI on off on off on off
Jumpers (QPC560) Units 0/1/2/3
600 3/4 resistive impedance connect pins 1 and 2
3-component complex impedance connect pins 2 and 3

QPC528 CO/FX/WATS Trunk cards

Table 49 "QPC528 Trunk cards switch and jumper settings" (page 109) lists
switch and jumper settings for options available.

Table 49
QPC528 Trunk cards switch and jumper settings
Switch Settings
Switch S1 (location A23)
Switch position: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
on off on off on off on off
Unit 0, Switch S2 (Location E29)
Unit 1, Switch S3 (Location E9)
Unit 2, Switch S4 (Location A28)
Unit 3, Switch S5 (Location A10)
Switch position: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Trunk type:
Loop start off on off off on off off off
Ground start off on on on on off off off
Metering:
Second pair (M, MM) or off off
Third wire, battery on M or off on
Third wire, ground on M on off
Jumper Settings

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 110 Option settings

Unit 0 jumper (Location E27)

Unit 1 jumper (Location E11)
Unit 2 jumper (Location D29)
Unit 3 jumper (Location D9)
Jumper: Unit 0 Unit 1 Unit 2 Unit 3
Jumper Jumper Jumper Jumper
600 3/4 resistive impedance Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2 Pin 1 to 2
3-component complex impedance Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3 Pin 2 to 3

QPC471 Clock Controller card

Table 50 "QPC471 vintage H" (page 110) lists option settings for the
QPC471 Clock Controller card.

Table 50
QPC471 vintage H
SW1 SW2 SW4
System 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
61C on on on on off off off off off on * *
81 off off off off off off off off off on * *
81C on off off off off off off off ** on * *
81C with Fiber Network on off off off off off off off ** on * *
*Cable length between the J3
faceplate connectors:
0–4.3 m (0–14 ft) off off
4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft) off on
6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft) on off
10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft) on on
*If there is only one Clock Controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two Clock Controller
cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable can exceed 25
ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The maximum total
(combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.

**Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.

Note: FNF based-systems the total clock path length is equal to the length of the NTRC49 cable
used to connect between the two clock controller cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card 111

QPC525, QPC526, QPC527, QPC777 CO Trunk card

Switches at E29/E9/A29/A11 Units 0/1/2/3
Application 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Zero ohm outpulsing on off off
Standard outpulsing off on off
Ground start on on off
Loop start off off off
Loop start, automatic guard detection off on off
PPM daughterboard not installed on off
PPM daughterboard installed off off
Battery on M operation off on off
Ground on M operation on off off
Second pair M&MM off off off

Note 1: There is no ground start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards.

Always select loop start signalling for QPC777 CO trunk cards.
Note 2: On QPC777 CO trunk cards, the pads are in for short line
lengths and the pads are out for long line lengths.

QPC550 Direct Inward Dial Trunk card

Table 51 "QPC550 vintages A and B-real/complex balance impedance
selection" (page 111) through Table 55 "QPC550 vintage B-software control
for 2dB pad" (page 113) give the option settings for the QPC550 DID Trunk
card.

Table 51
QPC550 vintages A and B-real/complex balance impedance selection
Impedance type
Device Device Switch Unit
location designation number number Real Complex
F31 S4.0 1 0 on off
F24 S4.1 1 1 on off
F16 S4.2 1 2 on off
F11 S4.3 1 3 on off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 112 Option settings

Table 52
QPC550 vintage A-600/900 Ohm impedance selection
Switch number
Device Device Unit Impedance
location designation number (ohms) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
G29(a) S3.0 0 600 off on on off off on on off
900 on off off on on off off on
G29(b) S3.1 1 600 off on on off off on on off
900 on off off on on off off on
G8(a) S3.2 2 600 off on on off off on on off
900 on off off on on off off on
G8(b) S3.3 3 600 off on on off off on on off
900 on off off on on off off on

Table 53
QPC550 vintage A-software/hardware control for 2dB pad
2 dB pad control
H/W
Device Device Unit Switch
location designation number number S/W (pad in) (pad out)
F38 S1 0 1 off off on
2 on off off
1 3 on off off
4 off off on
F1 S2 0 1 off off on
2 on off off
1 3 on off off
4 off off on

Table 54
QPC550 vintage B-attenuation level control
Switch number
Device Device Unit 2 dB
location designation number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 option
D39 S2.0/1 0 on on on on on
1 off off off off off
D1 S2.2/3 2 on on on on on
3 off off off off off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card 113

Table 55
QPC550 vintage B-software control for 2dB pad
2 dB pad control
H/W
Device Device Unit Switch
location designation number number (pad in) (pad out)
F38 S1.0/1 1 1 on off
2 off off
0 3 off off
4 on off
F1 S1.2/3 3 1 on off
2 off off
2 3 off off
4 on off

QPC551 Radio Paging Trunk card

Signal duration on the 18-pair faceplate S1 (F33)
1 2 3 4 5 6
Binary value (.1 second) 1 2 4 8 16 32
Note: This switch determines the length of time a signal stays on the 18-pair data bus. The time is
set in binary to the nearest tenth second. For example, to keep data on the bus for 5 seconds, the
switch settings total 50 by closing S1.2, S1.5, and S1.6.
Signal duration and pause time S2 (G33)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Binary value (.1 second) 1 2 4 8 16 32 64
Note: This switch determines the time data must stay on the 18-pair data bus plus the pause time
between the removal of data and the reappearance of subsequent data. The time is set in binary to
the nearest tenth second. For example, to keep data on the bus for 5 seconds with a pause time of
3.2 seconds, the switch settings should total 82 by closing S2.2, S2.5, and S2.7.
Application S3 (E2) S4 (F2)
Unit 0, Unit 1
1 2 Address 3 4 5 6 Address 3 4 5 6
Paging 0 off off off off 8 off off off on
single on 1 on off off off 9 on off off on
multiple off 2 off on off off 10 off on off on
3 on on off off 11 on on off on
Timer* 4 on off on off 12 on off on on
enabled on 5 on on on off 13 on off on on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 114 Option settings

disabled off 6 off on on off 14 off on on on

7 on on on off 15 on on on on
*When enabled, this switch prevents a signal from being sent from a paging unit until 5 seconds
elapsed time since the beginning of the previous signal on that same unit.
S5 (E38) S6 (D1)
Unit 0 Unit 1
Impedance termination 1
Real on
Complex off

QPC595 Digitone Receiver cards

Location Connection
12 DTMF tones E9 Center to E3
16 DTMF tones E9 Center to E2

QPC577, QPC596 Digitone Receiver daughterboards

16/12 tone options jumper Jumper at P1
16 tone (4 x 4) connect pins 1 and 2
12 tone (3 x 4) connect pins 2 and 3
Note: When a DTR daughterboard is installed, check YES on the faceplate of the QPC659 Dual
Loop Peripheral Buffer.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC775 Clock Controller card 115

QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card

Table 56
QPC720 Primary Rate Interface card
Switch S2 settings To repeater facility To cross-connect point
5 on 0–45 m 0–30 m
(0–150 ft) (0–100 ft)
2, 4, 6 on 46–135 m 31–100 m
(151–450 ft) (101–355 ft)
1, 3, 7 on 136–225 m 101–200 m
(451–750 ft) (356–655 ft)
Switch 3 option for DTI with ESF
SW3-1 on = extended superframe format (ESF)

off = superframe format (SF)

Note: All positions on S2 (location B22) are OFF except as shown under the column labeled
"Switch S2 settings."
Note: Framing format, line encoding, and method of yellow alarm are selectable for both DTI and
PRI in LD17 with the DLOP, LCMT, and YALM prompts. All SW3 switch positions should be OFF.

QPC775 Clock Controller card

Table 57 "QPC775 (before vintage E) switch settings" (page 115) and Table
58 "QPC775 vintage E switch settings" (page 116) give option settings for
the QPC775 Clock Controller card.

Table 57
QPC775 (before vintage E) switch settings
System SW2 SW3 SW4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CS 1000M MG off off off off off off off off on on on on
CS 1000M SG on on on on off off off off on on on on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 116 Option settings

Table 58
QPC775 vintage E switch settings
SW1 SW2 SW4
System 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
CS 1000M SG on on on on off off off off off on * *
CS 1000M MG on off off off off off off off ** on * *
*Cable length between the J3
faceplate connectors:
0–4.3 m (0–14 ft) off off
4.6–6.1 m (15–20 ft) off on
6.4–10.1 m (21–33 ft) on off
10.4–15.2 m (34–50 ft) on on
*If there is only one Clock Controller card in the system, set to OFF. If there are two Clock Controller
cards, determine the total cable length between the J3 connectors (no single cable can exceed 25
ft.) and set these two switch positions for this cable length, as shown above. The maximum total
(combined) length is 50 ft. Set the switches on both cards to the same settings.

**Set to ON for clock controller 0. Set to OFF for clock controller 1.

QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card

Table 59 "QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection" (page 116) through
Table 61 "QPC841 DTE or DCE selection" (page 118) list option settings for
the QPC841 4-Port SDI card.

Table 59
QPC841 port 1 and 2 address selection
Device number SW14
Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 off off off off off on on on
2 3 off off off off off on on off
4 5 off off off off off on off on
6 7 off off off off off on off off
8 9 off off off off off off on on
10 11 off off off off off off on off
Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF.
Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings.
Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 QPC841 4-Port Serial Data Interface card 117

Device number SW14

Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 13 off off off off off off off on
14 15 off off off off off off off off
Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF.
Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings.
Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON.

Device number SW15

Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 off off off off off on on on
2 3 off off off off off on on off
4 5 off off off off off on off on
6 7 off off off off off on off off
8 9 off off off off off off on on
10 11 off off off off off off on off
12 13 off off off off off off off on
14 15 off off off off off off off off
Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF.
Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never show identical settings.
Note 3: To disable ports 3 and 4, set SW15 position 1 to ON.

Table 60
QPC841 baud rate
Port 1 SW10 Port 2 SW11 Port 3 SW12 Port 4 SW13
Baud
rate 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
150 off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on
300 off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on
600 off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on
1200 off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off
2400 off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off
4800 off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off
9600 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 118 Option settings

Table 61
QPC841 DTE or DCE selection
Mode Port 1—SW8 Port 1—SW9
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
NT1P61 (Fiber) on off off on off off on off off off on on
Port 2—SW6 Port 2—SW7
DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on
NT1P61 (Fiber) on off off on off off on off off off on on
Port 3—SW4 Port 3—SW5
DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on
Port 4—SW2 Port 4—SW3
DTE on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE off off off off off off on on on on on on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 119

NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog

Line card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 119)

"Physical description" (page 121)

"Functional description" (page 124)

"Electrical specifications" (page 135)

"Operation" (page 138)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 142)

"Configuring the OPS analog line card" (page 144)

"Application" (page 147)

Introduction
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card is an intelligent
eight-channel analog line card designed to be used with 2-wire analog
terminal equipment such as analog (500/2500-type) telephones and analog
modems.
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) analog line card provides eight
full-duplex analog telephone line interfaces. Each line has integral
hazardous and surge voltage protection to protect the system from damage
due to lightning strikes and accidental power line connections. This card is
normally used whenever the phone lines must leave the building in which
the switch is installed.
The NT1R20 OPS analog line card provides:
• line supervision

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 120 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

• hookflash
• battery reversal

Each unit is independently configured by software control in the Analog

(500/2500 type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.
You can install this card in any IPE slot.
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card provides eight full
duplex analog telephone line interfaces. Each interface provides the external
line connection with secondary hazard and surge (lightning) protection.
Each line interface is independently configured by software control in the
Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.
The NT1R20 card provides:
• line supervision
• hookflash
• battery reversal

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card is an intelligent

peripheral equipment (IPE) device that can be installed in any IPE slot in
the main or expansion cabinets. The OPS analog line card connects eight
analog telephone lines to the Option 11C with secondary hazard and surge
protection.
Each unit is independently configured in software in the Single-line
Telephone Administration program (LD 10).
The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card provides eight
full-duplex analog telephone line interfaces to connect off-premise terminals
to the CS 1000 system. Each interface provides the external line connection
with secondary hazard and surge (lightning) protection.
A maximum of four analog line cards can be installed in each Media
Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.
The NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and
4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway
Expansion.
The NT1R20BA OPS Analog Line Card provides the following:
• line supervision
• hookflash
• battery reversal

Each unit is independently configured in software in the analog (500/2500

type) telephone Administration program LD 10.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 121

Physical description
The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75
cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The OPS analog line card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin
connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol connector below the card is cabled to
the cross connect terminal (also called the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)).
Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog
line card at the cross connect using a wiring plan similar to trunk cards.

The OPS card measures 31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in.) It connects to

the IPE backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A 25-pair amphenol
connector below the card is cabled to the cross connect terminal. Telephone
lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card
at the cross connect using a wiring plan similar to trunk cards. (See
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation
and Configuration (NN43021-310) for cross connect terminations).

The NT1R20 Analog Line Card measures 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 by

10 in.). It connects to the backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. A
25-pair amphenol connector below the card is cabled to the cross-connect
terminal. Telephone lines from station equipment cross-connect to the
NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card at the cross-connect using a wiring plan
similar to trunk cards.

The OPS analog line card mounts in any IPE slot. The line interface and
common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5
in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The OPS analog line card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin
connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the input/output (I/O) panel
on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. Telephone lines from station equipment
cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan
similar to that of trunk cards. See Communication Server 1000M and
Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for
termination and cross-connect information.

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. See Figure 21 "OPS
analog line card - faceplate" (page 123). When an OPS analog line card
is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while the self-test
runs. If the self-test is completed successfully, the LED flashes three times
and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software;
then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains weakly
lit, replace the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 122 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Self Test
The faceplate of the NT1R20 OPS analog line card is equipped with a red
LED. When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for
two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is completed
successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card
is configured and enabled in software; then the LED goes out. If the LED
continues to flash or remains weakly lit, replace the card. See Figure 21
"OPS analog line card - faceplate" (page 123).

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red, light-emitting diode

(LED). When an OPS analog line card is installed, the LED remains lit for
two to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is completed
successfully, the LED flashes (off/on) three times and remains lit until the
card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 123

Figure 21
OPS analog line card - faceplate

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an NT1R20
OPS Analog Line Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five
seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the
LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and
enabled in software, the LED goes out.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 124 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Functional description
This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS)
analog line card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s
control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description
of how the card itself functions. See Figure 22 "OPS analog line card -
block diagram" (page 124).

Figure 22
OPS analog line card - block diagram

This functional description of the NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS)

Analog Line Card is divided into two parts. First, a description of the card’s
control, signaling, and power interfaces is given, followed by a description of
how the card itself functions.

The following information describes the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 125

Figure 22 "OPS analog line card - block diagram" (page 124) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the OPS analog line card.
Each of these functions are described on the following pages.

Card interfaces
The OPS analog line card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X
loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. See "Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment" (page 48) for more details.

Voice and signaling interfaces

The eight line interfaces provided by the NT1R20 OPS analog line card
connect to conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming
analog voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by
the OPS analog line card to digital form and routed to the CPU over DS-30
network loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the
CPU is sent over DS-30 network loops to the OPS analog line card where it
is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.

The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 available timeslots for
its eight line interfaces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in
software to format PCM data in the µ-law or A-law conventions.

Voice and signaling interfaces

The eight line interfaces provided by the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card
connect to conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming
analog voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the
NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card to digital form and routed to the CS 1000
CPU over DS-30 network loops. Digital voice and signaling information from
the CPU is sent over DS-30 network loops to the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line
Card where it is converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.

The NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card uses only eight of the 30 available
timeslots for its eight line interfaces. The NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card
can be configured in software to format PCM data in the Mu-Law or A-Law
conventions.

Voice and signaling interfaces

The eight line interfaces provided by the OPS analog line card connect to
conventional, 2-wire (tip and ring), analog line facilities. Incoming analog
voice and signaling information from a line facility is converted by the OPS
analog line card to digital form and routed to the CPU over DS-30 network
loops. Conversely, digital voice and signaling information from the CPU
is sent over DS-30 network loops to the OPS analog line card where it is
converted to analog form and applied to the line facility.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 126 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

The OPS analog line card uses only eight of the 30 available timeslots for
its eight line interfaces. The OPS analog line card can be configured in
software to format PCM data in the µ-law or A-law conventions.

Maintenance communication
Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data
between line or trunk cards and the CPU. Maintenance data is transported
through the card LAN link.
The card LAN link supports the following functions on the NT1R20 OPS
analog line card:
• polling
• reporting of self-test status
• CPU initiated card reset
• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)
• reporting of firmware version
• reporting of line interface unit configuration
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy
• reporting of card status

Maintenance communications
Maintenance communications is the exchange of control and status data
between line or trunk cards and the CPU. Maintenance data is transported
via the card LAN link.
The card LAN link supports the following functions on the OPS analog line
card:
• polling
• reporting of self-test status
• CPU initiated card reset
• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)
• reporting of firmware version
• reporting of line interface unit configuration
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy
• reporting of card status

Maintenance communication
Maintenance communication is the exchange of control and status data
between line or trunk cards and the CS 1000 CPU. Maintenance data is
transported through the card LAN link.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 127

The card LAN link supports the following functions on the NT1R20 OPS
Analog Line Card:
• polling
• reporting of self-test status
• CPU initiated card reset
• reporting of card ID (card type and hardware vintage)
• reporting of firmware version
• reporting of line interface unit configuration
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X network loop busy
• reporting of card status

Power interface
Power is provided to the NT1R20 OPS analog line card by the NTAK78
ac/dc or NTAK72 DC power supply.Power is provided to the OPS circuit card
by the NTAK78 AC/DC or NTAK72 DC power supply.
Power is provided to the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card by the NTAK78
ac/dc or NTAK72 dc power supply.
The following card functions are described in this section:
• Line interface units
• Card control functions
• Circuit power
• Software service changes
• Port-to-port loss configuration

The following card functions are described in this section:

• Line interface units
• Card control functions
• Circuit power
• Software service changes
• Port-to-port loss configuration

Line interface units

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains eight independently
configurable interface units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply
ringing onto the line. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 128 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

signaling. Two codecs are provided for performing Analog/Digital (A/D)

and Digital/Analog (D/A) conversion of analog voiceband signals to digital
PCM signals.
Each codec supports four interface units and contains switchable pads
for control of transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following features
are common to all units on the card:
• OPS or ONS service configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per unit basis
• standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms, 3COM1 or
3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis
• loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic
purposes

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the Common Equipment CPU over a
dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card
LAN link is described in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page
21).

The OPS analog line card has the capability of providing an interrupted dial
tone to indicate that a message is waiting or that call forwarding is enabled.
The line card (optionally) receives messages stating that these conditions
exist over the Card LAN Interface and interrupts the dial tone when either of
these conditions are detected.

Signaling and control

This portion of the card provides circuits that establish, supervise, and take
down call connections. These circuits work with the CPU to operate line
interface circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling
messages from the CPU and return incoming call status information over
the DS-30X network loop.
The OPS analog line card contains eight identical and independently
configurable interface units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing
onto the line. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling.
Two CODECs are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of line
analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
Each CODEC supports four line interface units and contains switchable
pads for control of transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following
features are common to all units on the card:
• OPS or ONS (On-Premise Station) service configurable on a per unit
basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohm) selectable on a per unit basis

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 129

• standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm or 3COM1 or

3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis
• loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic
purposes

The OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable

units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line.
Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling. Two codecs
are provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of analog voiceband
signals to digital PCM signals.
Each codec supports four units and contains switchable pads for control of
transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following features are common to
all units on the card:
• OPS or ONS service configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohm) selectable on a per unit basis
• standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm, 3COM1 or
3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis
• loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic
purposes

The OPS analog line card contains eight independently configurable

units. Relays are provided in each unit to apply ringing onto the line.
Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook signaling. Two codecs
are provided for performing Analog/Digital (A/D) and Digital/Analog (D/A)
conversion of analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
Each Codec supports four units and contains switchable pads for control of
transmission loss on a per unit basis. The following features are common to
all units on the card:
• OPS or ONS service configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per unit basis
• standard or complex balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms, 3COM1 or
3COM2) selectable on a per unit basis
• loopback of PCM signals over DS-30X network loop for diagnostic
purposes

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,
and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,

and signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 130 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,

and signaling and control circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a Card LAN link, and

signaling and control circuits on the OPS analog line card.

Microcontroller-
The NT1R20 OPS analog line card contains a microcontroller that controls
the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the
controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CPU through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of line interface unit operationenabling/disabling of an
interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission loss levels

Microcontroller – The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting the following to the CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— of the Codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of line interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 131

— transmission loss levels

Microcontroller—The microcontroller controls the following:

• reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— of the codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of line interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission loss levels

Microcontroller
The OPS analog line card contains a microcontroller that controls the
internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller
card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the CODECs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of line interface unit operation
— enabling/disabling of an interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission loss levels

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 132 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated
asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card LAN link is
described in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21).

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card has the capability of providing an
interrupted dial tone to indicate that a message is waiting or that call
forwarding is enabled. The line card (optionally) receives messages stating
that these conditions exist over the Card LAN Interface and interrupts the
dial tone when either of these conditions are detected.

The OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power
cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous and
surge voltage limits.

The NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card meets UL-1489 and CS03 overvoltage
(power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous
and surge voltage limits.

The OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power
cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous and
surge voltage limits.

Software service changes

Individual line interface units on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card are
configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or On-premises Station
(ONS) (for ONS application) Class of Service (CLS) in the Analog
(500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. See Table 62
"OPS analog line card configuration" (page 133).

LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance

network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively.

The message waiting interrupted dial tone and call forward reminder tone
features are enabled by entering data into the customer data block using
LD 15.

See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611)

for LD 10 service change instructions.Individual line interface units on the
OPS analog line card are configured to either OPX (for OPS application)
or ONP (for ONS application) Class-of-Service (CLS) using the Analog
(500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. See Table 71
"OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 144).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 133

LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network

impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. The message
waiting interrupted dial tone and call forward reminder tone features are
enabled by entering data into the customer data block using LD 15.

See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for

LD 10 and LD 15 service change instructions.

Table 62
OPS analog line card configuration
Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS)
Class of ONS OPS
service
Loop resist 0 - 460 ohm 0 - 2300 ohm
ance
Jumper strap Both JX. 0 and JX 1 off Both JX. 0 and JX. Both JX. 0 and JX.
settingb 1 off 1 on
Loop loss dBc 0-1.5 >1.5-2.5 >2.5-3.0 0-1.5 >1.5-2.5 >2.5-4.5 >4.5-15
TIMP 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
ohm ohm ohm ohm ohm ohm ohm
BIMP 600 3COM 3CM2 600 3COM 3CM2 3CM2
ohm ohm
Gain treatm No Yes
ent e
a. Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program (LD 10).
b. Jumper strap settings JX 0 and JX. 1 apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 0-7.
"OFF" indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store unused
straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper pin.
c. Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to loop
resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire.
d. Default software impedance settings are:
ONS CLSOPS CLS
TIMP:600 ohm600 ohm
BIMP:600 ohm3COM2
e. Gain treatment, such as a voice frequency repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual OPS loop
loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater than 15dB
(equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohm on 26 AWG wire) is not recommended.

Individual line interface units on the OPS analog line card are configured
to either OPS (for OPS application) or ONS (for ONS application) Class of
Service (CLS) in the Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10)
(see Table 62 "OPS analog line card configuration" (page 133)). LD10
is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance network

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 134 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. See Software

Input/Output Reference — Maintenance (NN43001-711) for LD 10 service
change instructions.

Individual line interface units on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card are
configured to either OPS (for OPS application) or On-premises Station
(ONS) (for ONS application) Class of Service (CLS) in the Single-line
Telephone Administration program LD 10.

LD 10 is also used to select unit terminating impedance and balance

network impedance at the TIMP and BIMP prompts, respectively. See
Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD
10 service change instructions.

Port-to-port loss configuration

The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS analog line card determines port-to-port
loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other
ports.

The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the OPS
or ONS class of service assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone
Administration program LD 10.

The OPS analog line card provides transmission loss switching for control of
end-to-end connection loss. Control of loss is a major element in controlling
transmission performance parameters such as received volume, echo,
noise, and crosstalk. The loss plan for the OPS analog line card determines
port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port)
and other IPE ports. LD 97 is used to configure systems for port-to-port loss.

See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for

LD 97 service change instructions.

The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the

OPX or ONP class-of-service assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type)
Telephone Administration program (LD 10). A complete loss plan is given in
Transmission Parameters Reference (NN43001-282) where the appropriate
port-to-port electrical loss may be determined for connections between any
two Meridian 1 ports (lines, analog trunks, or digital trunks).

Table 63
OPS analog line card - cable loop resistance and loss
Cable loop loss (dB)
(non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable loop resistance (ohms)
Cable length 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG
847 m (2800 ft) 1.5 1.2 0.9 231.4 144.2 90

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 135

Cable loop loss (dB)

(non-loaded at 1kHz) Cable loop resistance (ohms)
Cable length 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG 26 AWG 24 AWG 22 AWG
1411 m (4600 ft) 2.5 2 1.6 385.6 240.3 150
1694 m (5600 ft) 3 2.4 1.9 462.8 288.3 180
2541 m (8300 ft) 4.5 3.7 2.8 694.2 432.5 270
8469 m (27800 15 12.2 9.4 2313.9 1441.7 900
ft)

The loss plan for the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card determines
port-to-port loss for connections between an OPS analog line card unit
(port) and other ports.

The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the OPS
or ONS class-of-service assigned in the analog 500/2500-type telephone
administration program LD 10.

The loss plan for the OPS analog line card determines port-to-port loss
for connections between an OPS analog line card unit (port) and other
Meridian 1 PE or IPE ports.

The transmission properties of each line unit are characterized by the

OPS or ONS class-of-service assigned in the Single-line Telephone
Administration program (LD10).

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT1R20 OPS analog
line card.

The signaling and control portion of the card provides circuits that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the
system CPU to operate the line interface circuits during calls. The circuits
receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming
call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Signaling and control—This portion of the card provides circuits that

establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The
circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return
incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 136 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Signaling and control – This portion of the card provides circuits that
establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system CPU to operate line interface circuits during calls. The
circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return
incoming call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Circuit power
The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic
circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits.

The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the analog circuits. The
+5 V dc from the module power supply is used for the analog hybrid. The
–48.0 V dc input is for the telephone battery. Ringing power for telephones
is 86 Vrms ac at 20 Hz on –48 V dc. The Rsync signal is used to switch
the 20 Hz ringing on and off at the zero cross-over point to lengthen the
life of the switching circuits.

This section lists the electrical characteristics of the OPS analog line card.

Analog line interface

Table 64 "OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics" (page 136) lists
the electrical characteristics of NT1R20 OPS analog line card line interface
units.

Table 64
OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics
Characteristic Specification
Terminal impedance (TIMP) 600 or 900 ohms
Balance impedance (BIMP) 600 or 900 ohms, 3COM, or 3CM2
DC signaling loop length (max) 2300 ohm loop (including resistance of
telephone) with nominal battery of –48 V dc
Battery supply voltage –42 to –52.5 V dc
Minimum detected loop current 16 mA
Ground potential difference ±3V
Line leakage ≥ 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground,
ring-to-ground
AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, tip-to-ground,
ring-to-ground

Table 64 "OPS analog line card - electrical characteristics" (page 136) lists
the electrical characteristics of OPS analog line card line interface units.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 137

Power requirements
Table 65 "OPS analog line card - power requirements" (page 137) shows
the maximum power consumed by the card from each system power supply.

Table 65
OPS analog line card - power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Current (max.)
±15.0 V dc ± 5% 150 mA
+8.5 V dc ± 2% 200 mA
+5.0 V dc ± 5% 100 mA
–48.0 V dc ± 5% 350 mA

The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic
circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits.

The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to + 5 V dc for use by the digital logic
circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits.

The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic
circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits. The
±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power the analog circuits. The +5
V dc from the module power supply is used for the analog hybrid. The

–48.0 V dc input is for the telephone battery. Ringing power for telephones
is 86 Vrms ac at 20 Hz on –48 V dc. The Rsync signal is used to switch
the 20 Hz ringing on and off at the zero cross-over point to lengthen the
life of the switching circuits.

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The NT1R20 OPS analog line card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage
(power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements for hazardous
and surge voltage limits.Table 65 "OPS analog line card - power
requirements" (page 137) shows the maximum power consumed by the
card from each system power supply.

Ringer limitations
The OPS line card supports up to three NE-C4A (3 REN) ringers on each
line for either ONS or OPS applications. See Table 66 "OPS analog line
card - ringer limitations" (page 138).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 138 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Table 66
OPS analog line card - ringer limitations
Maximum Number of
ONS Loop Range Ringers (REN)
0–10 ohms 3
> 10–460 ohms 2
0 – 10 ohms 3
> 10 – 900 ohms 2
> 900 – 2300 ohms 1

The OPS line card supports up to three NE-C4A (3 REN) ringers on each
line for either ONS or OPS applications. See Table 66 "OPS analog line
card - ringer limitations" (page 138).

Environmental specifications
Table 67 "OPS analog line card - environmental specifications" (page
138) shows the environmental specifications of the OPS analog line
card.Table 67 "OPS analog line card - environmental specifications" (page
138) shows the environmental specifications of the card.

Table 67
OPS analog line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F)

Operation
The applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on the
NT1R20 OPS analog line card are assigned through LD 10 and/or jumper
strap settings on the card.

The operation of each unit is configured in software and implemented in the

card through software download messages. When the NT1R20 OPS analog
line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and –48 V dc on
the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward
the line interface unit on the card.

The applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on

the OPS analog line card are assigned through the Single-line Telephone
Administration program (LD10) and/or jumper strap settings on the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 139

The operation of each unit is configured in software and is implemented in

the card through software download messages. When the OPS analog
line card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and – 48 V dc on
the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance toward
the line interface unit on the card.

The applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit on

the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card are assigned through the Single-line
Telephone Administration program LD 10 and/or jumper strap settings on
the card.

The operation of each unit is configured in software and implemented in

the card through software download messages. When the NT1R20 OPS
Analog Line Card unit is idle, it provides a ground on the tip lead and –48
V dc on the ring lead. The on-hook telephone presents a high impedance
toward the line interface unit on the card.

Incoming calls
Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS analog line
card originate from stations that can be local (served by the PBX) or remote
(served through the public switched telephone network). The alerting
signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming call
is answered, ringing is tripped as the telephone goes off-hook, placing
a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the OPS
analog line card. (see Table 68 "Call connection sequence-near-end station
receiving call" (page 139)).

Table 68
Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call
Signal / Direction
State Far-end / Near-end Remarks
Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High No battery current drawn.
resistance loop
Far-end station goes off-hook and
addresses (dials-up) the near-end station.
The system receives the incoming call on a
trunk and determine the TN.
Incoming call Ringing The system applies 20 Hz ringing to ring
lead.

Near-end station Low resistance loop

off-hook

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 140 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Signal / Direction
State Far-end / Near-end Remarks
Two-way voice The system detects increase in loop current,
connection tips ringing, and put call through to near-end
station.
Near end station High-resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line
hangs up first card detects the drop in loop current.

Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High Line card unit is ready for the next call.
resistance loop
Far end station High resistance loop If the far-end hangs-up first, the system
hangs up first detects disconnect signalling from the trunk.
The person at the near-end recognizes the
end of the call and hangs-up.
Line card unit idle Ground on tip/battery on ring Line card unit is ready for the next call.
High resistance loop

Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line

Card originate from stations that can be local (served by the CS 1000)
or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The
alerting signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming
call is answered, ringing is tripped as the telephone goes off-hook, placing
a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the OPS
analog line card.

Incoming calls to a telephone connected to the OPS analog line card

originate from stations that can be local (served by the Meridian 1 PBX)
or remote (served through the public switched telephone network). The
alerting signal to telephones is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing. When an incoming
call is answered, ringing is tripped as the telephone goes off-hook, placing
a low-resistance DC loop across the tip and ring leads towards the OPS
analog line card (see Table 68 "Call connection sequence-near-end station
receiving call" (page 139)).

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone
goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads
towards the NT1R20 OPS analog line card (see Table 69 "Call connection
sequence-near-end station receiving call" (page 141)). When the card
detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the
system is ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address
signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting)
dial pulses or DTMF tones.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 141

Table 69
Call connection sequence-near-end station receiving call
Signal / Direction
State Far-end / Near-end Remarks
Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High No battery current drawn.
resistance loop
Call request Low resistance loop Near-end station goes off-hook. Battery
current is drawn, causing detection of
off-hook state.

Dial Tone Dial tone is applied to the near end station

from the system.

Outpulsing Addressing signals Near-end station dials number (loop pulsing

or DTMF tones).

The system detects start of dialing and

remove dial tone.
Ringback (or busy) The system decodes addressing, route
calls, and supply ringback tone to near-end
station if far-end is on-hook. (Busy tone is
supplied if far-end is off-hook).
Two-way voice When call is answered, ringback tone is
connection removed, and call is put through to far-end
station.
Near-end station High resistance loop If near end station hangs-up first, the line
hangs-up first card detects the drop in loop current.

Line card unit idle Group on tip, battery on ring High Line card unit is ready for the next call.
resistance loop
Far end station High resistance loop If the far-end hangs-up first, the system
hangs up first detects disconnect signalling from the trunk.
The person at the near-end recognizes the
end of the call and hangs-up.
Line card unit idle Ground on tip/battery on ring Line card unit is ready for the next call.
High resistance loop

For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone
goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads
towards the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card. When the card detects the
low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the CS 1000 is

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 142 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is

then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses
or DTMF tones.

For outgoing calls from a telephone, a line unit is seized when the telephone
goes off-hook, placing a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring
leads towards the OPS analog line card (see Table 69 "Call connection
sequence-near-end station receiving call" (page 141)). When the card
detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits. When the
Meridian 1 is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address
signaling is then applied from the telephone in the form of loop (interrupting)
dial pulses or DTMF tones.

Connector pin assignments

The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE
backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled
to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then
connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog
line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk
cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 23 "OPS analog
line card - typical cross connection example" (page 143), and a list of the
connections to the analog line card is shown in Table 70 "OPS analog line
card - backplane pinouts" (page 142). See Communication Server 1000M
and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310)
for more detailed I/O panel connector information and wire assignments
for each tip/ring pair.

Table 70
OPS analog line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Backplane
Connector Connector
Pin Signal Pin Signal
12A Unit 0, Ring 12B Unit 0, Tip
13A Unit 1, Ring 13B Unit 1, Tip
14A Unit 2, Ring 14B Unit 2, Tip
15A Unit 3, Ring 15B Unit 3, Tip
16A Unit 4, Ring 16B Unit 4, Tip
17A Unit 5, Ring 17B Unit 5, Tip
18A Unit 6, Ring 18B Unit 6, Tip
19A Unit 7, Ring 19B Unit 7, Tip

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 143

The OPS analog line card brings the eight analog telephone lines to the IPE
backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled
to the input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then
connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Figure 23
OPS analog line card - typical cross connection example

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog
line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for trunk
cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 23 "OPS analog
line card - typical cross connection example" (page 143), and a list of the
connections to the analog line card is shown in Table 70 "OPS analog line
card - backplane pinouts" (page 142). See Communication Server 1000M

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 144 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310)

for more detailed I/O panel connector information and wire assignments
for each tip/ring pair.

Configuring the OPS analog line card

The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for
each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the
system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

The line type, terminating impedance, and balance network configuration for
each unit on the card is selected by software service change entries at the
system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

Jumper strap settings

Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that
are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length. See
Table 71 "OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 144).

For units connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper blocks must
be installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less, jumper blocks are not
installed. Figure 24 "OPS analog line card - jumper block locations" (page
146) shows the location of the jumper blocks on the OPS analog line card.

Table 71
OPS analog line card - configuration
Application On-premise station (ONS) Off-premise station (OPS)
Class of Service ONP OPX
(CLS) (Note 1)
Loop resistance 0–460 0–2300 (Note 2)
(ohms)
Jumper strap Both JX.0 and JX.1 Both JX.0 and JX.1 Both JX.0 and JX.1
setting (Note 6) off off on
Loop loss (dB) 0–1.5 >0–3.0 >2.5–3.0 0–1.5 >1.5–2.5 >2.5–4.5 >4.5–15
(Note 3)
TIMP 600 600 600 600 600 600 600
(Notes 1, 4) ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms ohms
BIMP 600 3COM 3CM2 600 3COM 3CM2 3CM2
(Notes 1, 4) ohms ohms
Gain treatment No Yes
(Note 5)
Note 1: Configured in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.
Note 2: The maximum signaling range supported by the OPS analog line card is 2300 ohms.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the OPS analog line card 145

Note 3: Loss of untreated (no gain devices) metallic line facility. Upper loss limits correspond to
loop resistance ranges for 26 AWG wire.
Note 4: The following are the default software impedance settings:
ONP CLS OPX CLS
Termination Impedance (TIMP): 600 ohms 600 ohms
Balanced Impedance (BIMP): 600 ohms 3CM2
Note 1: Gain treatment, such as a Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR) is required to limit the actual
OPS loop loss to 4.5 dB, maximum. VFR treatment of metallic loops having untreated loss greater
than 15 dB (equivalent to a maximum signaling range of 2300 ohms on 26 AWG wire) is not
recommended.
Note 2: Jumper strap settings JX.0 and JX.1 apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the unit number, 0
– 7. "Off" indicates that a jumper strap is not installed across both pins on a jumper block. Store
unused straps on the OPS analog line card by installing them on a single jumper. pin.

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length
between the near-end and the far-end station must be known. To assist in
determining loop length, "Port-to-port loss" (page 152) describes some
typical resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths for
comparison with values obtained from actual measurements.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 146 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Figure 24
OPS analog line card - jumper block locations

Each line interface unit on the card is equipped with two jumper blocks that
are used to select the proper loop current depending upon loop length.
See Table 71 "OPS analog line card - configuration" (page 144). For units
connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper blocks must be
installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less, jumper blocks are not
installed. Figure 77 "Test parameters screen" (page 312) shows the location
of the jumper blocks on the OPS analog line card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 147

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length
between the near-end (Meridian 1) and the far-end station must be known.
To assist in determining loop length, Table 63 "OPS analog line card - cable
loop resistance and loss" (page 134) shows some typical resistance and
loss values for the most common cable lengths for comparison with values
obtained from actual measurements.

Set the jumpers on the NT1R20 OPS card.

Each line interface unit on the card has two jumper blocks that are used to
select the proper loop current, depending on loop length. See Figure 90
"NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD" (page 337).

For units connected to loops of 460 to 2300 ohms, both jumper straps
must be installed. For loops that are 460 ohms or less, jumper straps are
not installed.

Insert the OPS card in its assigned slot. Cross-connect off-premise

telephones.

Application
Off-premise station application
The NT1R20 OPS analog line card is designed primarily to provide an
interface for off-premise station lines. An OPS line serves a terminal –
usually a telephone – remote from the PBX either within the same serving
area as the local office, or through a distant office. The line is not switched
at these offices; however, depending on the facilities used, the local office
serving the OPS station can provide line functions such as battery and
ringing. Facilities are generally provided by the local exchange carrier
(usually, OPS pairs are in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The
traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 25 "Traditional
OPS application configuration" (page 149).

Note: Do not confuse OPS service with Off-Premise Extension (OPX)

service. OPX service is the provision of an extension to a main
subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. Do not
confuse CLS OPS (assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone
Administration program LD 10) with OPX, which denotes Off-Premise
Extension service.

The NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card is designed primarily to provide an

interface for Meridian 1 off-premise station lines. An OPS line serves a
terminal – usually a telephone – remote from the PBX either within the
same serving area as the local office or through a distant office. The line
is not switched at these offices; however, depending on the facilities used,
the local office serving the OPS station may provide line functions such as

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 148 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

battery and ringing. Facilities are generally provided by the local exchange
carrier (OPS pairs are usually in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks).
The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 25 "Traditional
OPS application configuration" (page 149).

Note: OPS service should not be confused with Off-Premise EXtension

(OPX) service. OPX service is the provision of an extension to a main
subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. (OPX
as used to denote off-premise extension service should not be confused
with the OPX class-of-service assigned in the Analog (500/2500-type)
Telephone Administration program LD 10.)

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card is designed

primarily to provide an interface for off-premise station lines. An OPS line
serves a terminal – usually, but not exclusively, a telephone set – remote
from the PBX either within the same serving area as the local office, or
through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices; however,
depending on the facilities used, the local office serving the OPS station can
provide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are generally
provided by the local exchange carrier (usually, OPS pairs are in the same
cable as the PBX-CO trunks).

The traditional OPS scenario configuration is shown in Figure 91

"NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD" (page 338).

The NT1R20 Off-Premise Station (OPS) Analog Line Card is designed

primarily to provide an interface for Meridian 1 off-premise station lines.
An OPS line serves a terminal—typically, but not exclusively, a telephone
set—remote from the PBX either within the same serving area as the local
office or through a distant office. The line is not switched at these offices;
however, depending on the facilities used, the local office serving the OPS
station may provide line functions such as battery and ringing. Facilities are
generally provided by the local exchange carrier (usually, OPS pairs are
in the same cable as the PBX-CO trunks). The traditional OPS scenario
configuration is shown in "QPC430 and QPC723 interfaces" (page 472).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 149

Figure 25
Traditional OPS application configuration

Note 1: OPS service should not be confused with off-premise extension

(OPS) service. OPS service is the provision of an extension to a
main subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX.
Additionally, OPS as used to denote off-premise extension service
should not be confused with the OPS class-of-service assigned in the
Single-line Telephone Administration program (LD10).
Note 2: Do not confuse OPS service with Off-Premise Extension
(OPX) service. OPX service is the provision of an extension to a main
subscriber loop bridged onto the loop at the serving CO or PBX. Do not
confuse CLS OPS (assigned in the analog (500/2500-type) telephone
administration program LD 10) with OPX, which denotes Off-Premise
Extension service.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 150 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Other applications
The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS
analog line card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the
traditional configuration shown in Figure 25 "Traditional OPS application
configuration" (page 149). Examples of such applications are:
• a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the
vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be
privately owned. Protection could be required.
• termination to other than a telephone, such as to a fax machine or
a key telephone system.
• individual circuits on the NT1R20 OPS analog line card can also be
configured as On-Premise Station (ONS) ports in LD 10:
— ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not
available on other analog line cards)
— to use otherwise idle NT1R20 OPS analog line card ports

The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the OPS analog line
card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the traditional
configuration shown in "QPC430 and QPC723 interfaces" (page 472).
Examples of such applications are:
• a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the
vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be
privately owned. Protection may or may not be a requirement.
• Termination to other than a telephone set, such as to a key telephone
system.
• Individual circuits on the OPS analog line card may also be configured
as ONS ports in LD10:
— ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not
available on other Meridian 1 analog line cards).
— to use otherwise idle OPS analog line card ports.

The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the NT1R20 OPS
Analog Line Card make it suitable for applications which are variants on the
traditional configuration shown in Figure 91 "NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD" (page
338). Examples of such applications are:
• a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the
vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be
privately owned. Protection could be required

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 151

• termination to other than a telephone set, such as to a fax machine

• individual circuits on the NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card can also be
configured as On-Premise Station (ONS) ports in LD 10:
— ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not
available on other analog line cards)
— to use otherwise idle NT1R20 OPS Analog Line Card ports

The operating range and built-in protection provisions of the OPS analog
line card make it suitable for applications that are variants on the traditional
configuration shown in Figure 25 "Traditional OPS application configuration"
(page 149). Examples of such applications include:
• a PBX in a central building serving stations in other buildings in the
vicinity, such as in an industrial park, often called a campus environment.
Facilities can be provided by the local exchange carrier or can be
privately owned. Protection could be required.
• termination to other than a telephone, such as a fax machine
• individual circuits on the OPS analog line card can also be configured as
ONS ports in LD 10:
— ONS service with hazardous and surge voltage protection (not
available on other Meridian 1 analog line cards)
— to use otherwise idle OPS analog line card ports

Transmission considerations
The transmission performance of OPS lines depends on the following
factors:
• the port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports and other ports
• the transmission parameters of the facilities between the OPS port and
the off-premise station or termination
• the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination

These factors must be considered when planning applications using the

NT1R20 OPS analog line card. They are important when considering
configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in
Figure 25 "Traditional OPS application configuration" (page 149). The
following provides basic transmission planning guidelines for various OPS
applications.
The transmission performance of OPS lines depends on the following
factors:
• the Meridian 1 port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports
and other Meridian 1 ports

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 152 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

• the transmission parameters of the facilities between the Meridian 1

OPS port and the off-premise station or termination
• the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination

These factors must be considered when planning applications using the

OPS analog line card. They are important if considering configurations
other than the traditional OPS application shown in Figure 25 "Traditional
OPS application configuration" (page 149).
The following information provides basic transmission planning guidelines
for various OPS applications.
The transmission performance of OPS lines is dependent on a number of
factors.
• The Meridian 1 port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports
and other Meridian 1 ports.
• The transmission parameters of the facilities between the Meridian 1
OPS port and the off-premise station or termination.
• The electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the
termination.

These factors must be considered when planning applications using the

OPS analog line card. They are of particular importance when considering
configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in
"QPC430 and QPC723 interfaces" (page 472). The discussion which
follows is intended to provide basic transmission planning guidelines for
various OPS applications.
The transmission performance of OPS lines depends on the following
factors:
• the port-to-port loss for connections between OPS ports and other ports
• the transmission parameters of the facilities between the OPS port and
the off-premise station or termination
• the electrical and acoustic transmission characteristics of the termination

These factors must be considered when planning applications using

the OPS analog line card. They are important when considering
configurations other than the traditional OPS application as shown in Figure
91 "NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD" (page 338). The following provides basic
transmission planning guidelines for various OPS applications.

Port-to-port loss
Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other ports in
accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss
for each call.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 153

When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS
analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS, an
OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls.
The loss in the other port involved in the call can vary on a call-by-call basis
to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan.
For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections
between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended
that facilities conform to the following:
• Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should
not exceed 7.0 dB. The total loss in the facility between the PBX and
the terminal must not exceed 4.5 dB. See Figure 25 "Traditional OPS
application configuration" (page 149).
The following requirements are based on historic Inserted Connection
Loss (ICL) objectives:
— PBX – CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0 – 4.0 dB without gain
— OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0 – 4.5 dB without gain. In recent times
economic and technological considerations led to modifications of
these historic objectives. But since the loss provisions in the PBX for
OPS are constrained by regulatory requirements as well as industry
standards, they are not designed to compensate for modified ICL
designs in the connecting facilities.

• Nortel recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency response)

of the OPS facility be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from
300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200
to 3200 Hz.
• The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port be
approximately that of 600 ohms cable.

If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15
dB, line treatment using a switched-gain Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR)
extends the voice range.
The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the
signaling range (2300 ohms loop including telephone resistance). The
signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment;so gain treatment can be
used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For
example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds
to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR)
with 10.5 dB of gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5
dB while extending the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 154 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

15.0 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range)

– 4.5 dB (OPS service loss objective)
= 10.5 dB (required gain treatment)

The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line
cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.
Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other Meridian
1 ports in accordance with the Meridian 1 loss plan. This plan determines
the port-to-port loss for each call.
When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed into the OPS
analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for CLS ONS, an
OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls.
The loss in the other port involved in the call can vary on a call-by-call basis
to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan. Transmission Parameters
Reference (NN43001-282) shows the specific loss for each possible
port-to-port combination.
For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections
between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended
that facilities conform to the following:
• Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should
not exceed 7.0 dB. Of that total, the loss in the facility between the PBX
and the terminal should not exceed 4.5 dB. See Figure 25 "Traditional
OPS application configuration" (page 149).
The following requirements are based on historic Inserted Connection
Loss (ICL) objectives:
— PBX – CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0–4.0 dB without gain
— OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0–4.5 dB without gain

In recent times economic and technological considerations led to

modifications of these historic objectives. However, the loss provisions
in the PBX for OPS are constrained by regulatory requirements as well
as industry standards; they are not designed to compensate for modified
ICL designs in the connecting facilities.
• Nortel Networks recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency
response) of the OPS facility be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency
range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend
from 200 to 3200 Hz.
• The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port should
approximate that of 600 ohms cable.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 155

If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15
dB, line treatment using a switched-gain Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR)
extends the voice range.
The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the
signaling range (2300 ohm loop including telephone resistance). Signaling
range is unaffected by gain treatment; so gain treatment can be used to
extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For example,
on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds to an
untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR) with
10.5 dB of gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5 dB
while extending the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range:

15.0 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range)

– 4.5 dB (OPS service loss objective)
= 10.5 dB (required gain treatment)

The use of dial long line units to extend the signaling range of OPS analog
line cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.
Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other Meridian
1 ports in accordance with the Meridian 1 loss plan. This plan determines
the port-to-port loss for each call. When a port is configured for OPS
class-of-service, loss is programmed into the OPS analog line card on a
call-by-call basis. When configured for ONS class-of-service, an OPS
analog line card port is programmed to a value that is fixed for all calls,
although the loss in the other port involved in the call may vary on a
call-by-call basis to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan.
For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections
between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended
that facilities conform to the following:
• Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should
not exceed 7.0 dB. Of that total, the loss in the facility between the PBX
and the terminal should not exceed 4.5 dB (see "QPC430 and QPC723
interfaces" (page 472)).
The following requirements are based on historic inserted connection
loss (ICL) objectives:
— PBX–CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0–4.0 dB without gain
— OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0–4.5 dB without gain
In recent times, economic and technological consideration has
led to modifications of these historic objectives. However, the
loss provisions in the PBX for OPS are constrained by regulatory
requirements as well as industry standards; so, they are not designed
to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting facilities.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 156 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

• The attenuation distortion (frequency response) of the OPS facility

should be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency range from 300 to 3000 Hz.
It is desirable that this bandwidth extend from 200 to 3200 Hz.
• The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port should
approximate that of 600 ohm cable.

If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15
dB, line treatment using a switched-gain voice frequency repeater (VFR)
extends the voice range.
The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the
signaling range (2300 ohm loop including telephone set resistance).
Signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; so gain treatment can
be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For
example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds
to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR)
with 10.5 dB of gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5
dB while extending the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range:
• 15 dB (loss corresponding to the maximum signaling range)
• – 4.5 dB (OPS service loss objective)
• = 10.5 dB (required gain treatment)

The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line
cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.
Loss is inserted between OPS analog line card ports and other ports in
accordance with the loss plan. This plan determines the port-to-port loss
for each call. When a port is configured for CLS OPS, loss is programmed
into the OPS analog line card on a call-by-call basis. When configured for
CLS ONS, an OPS analog line card port is programmed to a value that is
fixed for all calls. The loss in the other port involved in the call can vary on a
call-by-call basis to achieve the total loss scheduled by the plan.
For satisfactory transmission performance, particularly on connections
between the public network and an OPS termination, it is recommended
that facilities conform to the following:
• Total 1 kHz loss from the local serving CO to the OPS terminal should
not exceed 7.0 dB. The total loss in the facility between the PBX and the
terminal must not exceed 4.5 dB. See Figure 91 "NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD"
(page 338). The following requirements are based on historic inserted
connection loss (ICL) objectives:
— PBX – CO trunk: 5 dB with gain; 0 – 4.0 dB without gain
— OPS line: 4.0 dB with gain; 0 – 4.5 dB without gain Economic and
technological changes led to modifications of these objectives. But
since the loss provisions in the PBX for OPS are constrained by

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 157

regulatory requirements as well as industry standards, they are not

designed to compensate for modified ICL designs in the connecting
facilities.

• Nortel Networks recommends that the attenuation distortion (frequency

response) of the OPS facility be within ±3.0 dB over the frequency
range from 300 to 3000 Hz. It is desirable that this bandwidth extend
from 200 to 3200 Hz.
• The terminating impedance of the facility at the OPS port be
approximately that of 600 ohms cable.

If the OPS line facility loss is greater than 4.5 dB but does not exceed 15
dB, line treatment using a switched-gain Voice Frequency Repeater (VFR)
extends the voice range.

The overall range achievable on an OPS line facility is limited by the

signaling range (2300 ohms loop including telephone set resistance). The
signaling range is unaffected by gain treatment; so gain treatment can
be used to extend the voice range to the limit of the signaling range. For
example, on 26 AWG wire, the signaling range of 2300 ohms corresponds
to an untreated metallic loop loss of 15 dB. Gain treatment (such as a VFR)
with 10.5 dB of gain would maintain the OPS service loss objective of 4.5
dB while extending the voice range to the full limit of the signaling range.

15 dB
–4.5 dB
= 10.5 dB

The use of dial long line units to extend signaling range of OPS analog line
cards beyond 15 dB is not recommended.

Termination transmission characteristics

The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an
OPS termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when the
OPS termination is a standard telephone. The listener volume at the distant
end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics;
the volume at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination
receive loudness characteristics.
A feature of many (though not all) standard telephones is that the loudness
increases with decreased current. So as the line (PBX to OPS termination)
facility gets longer and loss increases, the increased loudness of the
telephone somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct
current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge.
However, this compensation is not available when:
• the termination is a non-compensating telephone

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 158 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

• the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding

bridge
• the OPS termination is to telephones behind a local switch providing
local current feed, such as a fax machine or a key telephone system

OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other

applications can also impact transmission performance. For example,
wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to
switching systems for wireless communication systems; if used in an OPS
arrangement without consideration for these characteristics, the result could
be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performanceThe loss
plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an OPS
termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when the OPS
termination is a standard telephone set. The listener volume at the distant
end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics;
that at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination
receive loudness characteristics. With standard telephone sets, these
characteristics are such that satisfactory—if not optimum—performance is
achievable within the above noted objectives for connecting facilities.
A feature of many (though not all) standard telephone sets is that the
loudness increases with decreased current. So as the line (Meridian 1 to
OPS termination) facility gets longer and loss increases, the increased
loudness of the set somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming
direct current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge.
However, this compensation is not available when:
• the termination is a non-compensating telephone set
• the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding
bridge
• the OPS termination is to telephone sets behind a local switch providing
local current feed, such as a key telephone system

OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other

applications may also impact transmission performance. For example,
wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to
switching systems for wireless communication systems; if deployed in an
OPS arrangement without due consideration for these characteristics, the
result could be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performance.
The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with an
OPS termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when the
OPS termination is a standard telephone. The listener volume at the distant
end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness characteristics;
the volume at the OPS termination end depends on the OPS termination
receive loudness characteristics.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Application 159

A feature of many (though not all) standard telephones is that the loudness
increases with decreased current. So as the line (Meridian 1 to OPS
termination) facility gets longer and lossier, the increased loudness of the
telephone somewhat compensates for the higher loss, assuming direct
current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the feeding bridge.
However, this compensation is not available when:
• the termination is a non-compensating telephone
• the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current feeding
bridge
• the OPS termination is to telephones behind a local switch providing
local current feed, such as a fax machine

OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other

applications can also impact transmission performance. For example,
wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to
switching systems for wireless communication systems; if used in an OPS
arrangement without consideration for these characteristics, the result could
be a significant deviation from optimum loudness performance.
The loss plan for OPS connections is designed so that a connection with
an OPS termination provides satisfactory end-to-end listener volume when
the OPS termination is a standard telephone set. The listener volume
at the distant end depends on the OPS termination transmit loudness
characteristics; the volume at the OPS termination end depends on the
OPS termination receive loudness characteristics.
On some standard telephone sets, the loudness increases with decreased
current. As the line (PBX to OPS termination) facility gets longer and loss
increases, the increased loudness of the set compensates for the higher
loss, assuming direct current feed from the PBX with constant voltage at the
feeding bridge. This compensation is not available in the following situations:
• when the termination is a non-compensating telephone set
• when the OPS port is served by a line card using a constant-current
feeding bridge
• when the OPS termination is to telephone sets behind a local switch
providing local current feed, such as a key telephone system

OPS line terminations with loudness characteristics designed for other

applications can also impact transmission performance. For example,
wireless portables loudness characteristics are selected for connections to
switching systems for wireless communication systems; if deployed in an
OPS arrangement without due consideration for these characteristics, the
result could deviate significantly from optimum loudness performance.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 160 NT1R20 Off-Premise Station Analog Line card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 161

NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 161)

"Physical description" (page 161)

"Functional description" (page 164)

"Front panel connector pin assignments" (page 165)

Introduction
The NT4N39AA Call Processor Pentium IV (CP PIV) Large System
processor card was introduced in CS 1000 Release 4.5. It features the
following:
• a PCI-based design that is compatible with current CP PII architecture
• an Intel Pentium processor
• two CompactFlash (CF) sockets (one on-board and one hot-swappable
on the faceplate). The on-board CF is referred to as the Fixed Media
Disk (FMD), and the faceplate CF is referred to as the Removable Media
Disk (RMD). See Figure 26 "CP PIV card (front)" (page 163) and Figure
27 "CP PIV card (side)" (page 164).
• 512 MBytes of Double Data Rate (DDR) memory

Physical description
The NT4N39AA card measures 23 cm by 16 cm (9,2 in. by 6.3 in.). See
Figure 26 "CP PIV card (front)" (page 163) and Figure 27 "CP PIV card
(side)" (page 164).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 162 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

The CP PIV front panel is equipped with an EMC gasket and two
ejector/injector handles. A reset button and two double LED packages
(four LEDs in total) are placed at the front panel as well. The front panel
features the following:
• stacked dual standard DB9 Serial ports
• USB Connector
• stacked dual RJ-45 Ethernet ports with LEDs
• power good LED
• LEDs indication for activity on CompactFlashes and secondary IDE
interface
• reset Switch
• INI switch
• front panel handle part# 3688785, 3688784 (replacement for customer
suggested parts 3686134, 3686135 which are now obsolete)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 163

Figure 26
CP PIV card (front)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 164 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Figure 27
CP PIV card (side)

Functional description
The card employs an Intel Pentium Processor as the central processing unit.
The internal core clock frequency reaches from 600MHz to1.1GHz. The
processor is manufactured in 0.09 um process technology and provides 32
KB of on die data and instruction cache as well as 1 MB of on die L2 cache
running at core clock frequency. The processor is a mobile processor with a
478 pin FCBGA package with a maximum junction temperature of 100 ûC.
Processor power dissipation must not exceed 12 W.

The front side bus runs at 400 MHz and uses an AGTL+ signaling
technology. The quad pumped data interface (data running at 4*100 MHz
= 400 MHz) is 64 bit wide providing a total bandwidth of 3.2 GBytes/s.
The double pumped address bus (addresses running at 2*100 MHz = 200
MHz) is 32 bit wide supporting an address range of up to 4 GBytes. The
processor voltage specification is compliant with IMVP IV specification.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Front panel connector pin assignments 165

Memory
CP PIV memory uses DDR SDRAM technology. The CP PIV provides
a maximum of two GBytes using two verticall DIMM sockets to install
off-the-shelf DIMM modules. CP PIV only supports DDR SDRAM DIMM
memory with a supply voltage of +2.5V.

are supportedThe memory data path is 72-bit wide. The Intel 855GME Host
Bridge supports 64 Mbit, 128 MByte, 256 MByte and 512 Mbyte SDRAM
technologies with a maximum ROW page size of 16 Kbytes and CAS
latency of 2 or 2.5. The maximum height of the DIMM modules possible
on CP PIV is one inch or 25.4 mm.

The DDR interface runs at 100 MHz synchronously to the front side bus
frequency. The SPD (Serial Presents Detect) -SROM available on DIMM
modules provide all necessary information (speed, size, and type) to the
boot-up software. The SPD-SROM can be read via SMBUS connected to
the Intel Hance Rapids South Bridge.

Front panel connector pin assignments

COM1 and COM2 ports
The physical interface for the COM1 and COM2 ports to the front panel is
through a stacked dual Male DB9 Connector. The corresponding pin details
are shown in Table 72 "COM1 and COM2 pin assignments" (page 165).

Table 72
COM1 and COM2 pin assignments
Pin number Pin name
1 DCD
2 RXD
3 TXD
4 DTR
5 GND
6 DSR
7 RTS
8 CTS
9 RI

USB port
The physical interface for thetwo USB ports to the front panel is through a
standard USB connector. The corresponding Pin details are shown in Table
73 "USB connector pin outs" (page 166).Table 27. USB Connector Pin Outs

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 166 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Table 29. ITP CONNECTOR Pin Outs

Table 73
USB connector pin outs
Pin number Pin name
1 USB VCC
2 USB-
3 USB+
4 USB GND

10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports

The physical interface for the two 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet ports to the
front panel is through a stacked dual RJ 45 connector with magnetics and
LEDs. The corresponding pin details are shown in Table 74 "Ethernet
connector pin outs" (page 166).

Table 74
Ethernet connector pin outs
Pin number Pin name
1 AX+
2 AX-
3 BX+
4 CX+
5 CX-
6 BX-
7 DX+
8 DX-

Front panel LED indicators

The CP PIV card has a total of five fourLEDS on the front panel which, two
of these LEDs are 15 KkV ESD protected and can be controlled via CPLD.
Table 75 "Front panel LED functionality" (page 166) explains the function
of each LED.

Table 75
Front panel LED functionality
LED Color Functionality Default
LED1 Green Power ON LED Off
LED2 Green Secondary IDE HD activity Off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Front panel connector pin assignments 167

LED Color Functionality Default

LED3 Green CompactFlash activity -Off
LED4 Green CompactFlash activity -Off

ITP connector (25 PIN, Debug Only)

Table 76
ITP connector pin outs
Pin Signal Name Pin Signal Name
P1 GND P2 GND
P3 BPM0N P4 NC
P5 BPM1N P6 RESETN
P7 BPM2N P8 GND
P9 BPM3N P10 TDI
P11 BPM4N P12 TMS
P13 BPM5N P14 TRSTN
P15 ITP_CPURSTN P16 TCK
P17 TCK P18 NC
P19 CLK P20 GND
P21 CLKN P22 PWR
P23 BPM5N P24 TDO
P25 GND

Post 80 Debug LEDs (Optional)

CP PIV has post 80 debug LEDs to assist in debugging the board and
solving boot related problems. Using a GPCS from Super I/O X-bus, data
lines are latched using latch 74F374. These help identify Post 80 codes.
This feature is available only in debug boards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 168 NT4N39AA CP Pentium IV Card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 169

NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1

Interface cards
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 169)

"Physical description" (page 170)

"Functional description" (page 176)

"Electrical specifications" (page 185)

"Installation and configuration" (page 188)

"QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104)

"Applications" (page 256)

Introduction
This section describes the two Lineside T1 interface cards:
• NT5D11 – applicable for Large Systems only
• NT5D14 – applicable for Small Systems only
Note: Unless otherwise stated, the information in this section
applies to both the NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 interface cards.

The NT5D11 Lineside T1 Interface card is an intelligent 24-channel digital

line card that is used to connect the switch to T1-compatible terminal
equipment on the lineside. The T1-compatible terminal equipment includes
voice mail systems, channel banks containing FXS cards, and key systems
such as the Nortel Norstar. The Lineside T1 card differs from trunk T1 cards
in that it supports terminal equipment features such as hookflash, transfer,
hold, and conference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 170 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The
Lineside T1 card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the
expansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can
be installed in the Cabinet system).

The Lineside T1 card emulates an analog line card to the system software;
therefore, each channel is independently configurable by software control
in LD 10. The Lineside T1 card also comes equipped with a Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) maintenance program. This feature provides diagnostic
information regarding the status of the T1 link.

The NT5D11 Lineside T1 interface card is an IPE line card that can be
installed in the NT8D37 IPE module. Up to eight cards can be installed.

The Lineside T1 card interfaces one T1 line, carrying 24 channels, to the

Meridian 1 switch. This card occupies two card slots in the IPE shelf,
utilizing 16 channels on slot 1 and 8 channels on slot 2. The Lineside T1
card emulates an analog line card to the Meridian 1 software; therefore,
each channel is independently configured by software control in the Analog
(500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10. The Lineside T1
card is equipped with a Man-Machine Interface (MMI) maintenance program
that provides diagnostic information regarding the status of the T1 link.

The Lineside T1 card is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) line

card that interfaces one T1 line, carrying 24 channels to the Option 11C.
This card occupies two card slots in the main or expansion cabinets. The
Lineside T1 card can be installed in the system’s main cabinet or one of the
expansion cabinets (there are no limitations on the number of cards that can
be installed in the Option 11C system).

The Lineside T1 card emulates an analog line card to the Option 11C
system software; therefore, each channel is independently configurable
by software control in the Single-line Telephone Administration program
(LD 10). The Lineside T1 card also comes equipped with a Man-Machine
Interface (MMI) maintenance program. This feature provides diagnostic
information regarding the status of the T1 link.

Physical description
The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card
consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitry
is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed
circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by
6.0 in) printed circuit board and mounts to the motherboard on six standoffs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 171

The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The card
consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard. The motherboard circuitry
is contained on a standard 31.75 by 25.40 cm. (12.5 by 10.0 in) printed
circuit board. The daughterboard is contained on a 5.08 by 15.24 cm (2.0 by
6.0 in) printed circuit board and mounts to the motherboard on six standoffs.

The Lineside T1 card mounts into any two consecutive IPE slots. The
card consists of a motherboard and a daughterboard; both are printed on
standard circuit board.

In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table.

Table 77
NT5D14AA Lineside T1 Faceplate LEDs
LED State Definition
STATUS On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet
been configured in software.
Off The card is in an active state
RED On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link. (This
includes, but is not limited to: not receiving a signal, the
signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip
thresholds.)
Off No red alarm exists.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected from the terminal
equipment side of the T1 link. If the terminal equipment
detects a red alarm condition, it may send a yellow alarm
signal to the Lineside T1 card (this depends on whether or
not your terminal equipment supports this feature).
Off No yellow alarm.
MAINT On (Red) The card detects whether tests are being run or that alarms
are disabled through the Man-Machine Interface. The LED
remains lit until these conditions are no longer detected.
Off The Lineside T1 card is fully operational

Card connections
The Lineside T1 card uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect
from the IPE backplane to the 25-pair amphenol connector on the IPE I/O
input/output (I/O) panel. The I/O panel connector then connects directly
to a T1 line, external alarm, and an MMI terminal or modem using the
NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable available from Nortel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 172 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Faceplate
The faceplate of the card is twice as wide as the other standard analog and
digital line cards, and occupies two card slots. It comes equipped with four
LED indicators. See Figure 29 "Lineside T1 card - faceplate" (page 175).
Figure 28
Lineside T1 card faceplate

In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 78 "NT5D14AA Lineside T1

faceplate LEDs" (page 173).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 173

Table 78
NT5D14AA Lineside T1 faceplate LEDs
LED State Definition
STATUS On (Red) The NT5D14AA card either failed its self-test or it hasn’t yet
been configured in software.
Off The card is in an active state.
RED On (Red) A red alarm has been detected from the T1 link. (This
includes, but is not limited to: not receiving a signal, the
signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip
thresholds.)
Off No red alarm exists.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected from the terminal
equipment side of the T1 link. If the terminal equipment
detects a red alarm condition, it may send a yellow alarm
signal to the Lineside T1 card (this depends on whether or
not your terminal equipment supports this feature).
Off No yellow alarm.
MAINT On (Red) The card detects whether tests are being run or that alarms
are disabled through the Man-Machine Interface. The LED
remains lit until these conditions are no longer detected.
Off The Lineside T1 card is fully operational.

The STATUS LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has successfully
passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED
remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test
completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When
the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the
LED flashes continuously, or remains weakly lit, replace the card.
Note: The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both
card slots of the Lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable
the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be
enabled. The STATUS LED turns off as soon as either one of the
Lineside T1 card slots are enabled. No LED operation is observed when
the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card
slots must be disabled. The LED does not turn on until both card slots
are disabled.

The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected
an alarm condition from the T1 link. Alarm conditions can include such
conditions as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error
thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card"
(page 104) for information on T1 link maintenance.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 174 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

If one of these alarm conditions is detected, the red LED lights. Yellow
alarm indication is sent to the far-end as long as the near-end remains in a
red alarm condition. Depending on how the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) is
configured, this LED remains lit until the following actions occur:
• If the "Self-Clearing" function has been enabled in the MMI, the LED
clears the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is
the factory default.
• If the "Self-Clearing" function hasnot been enabled or it has been
subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED stays lit until the command
"Clear Alarm" has been typed in the MMI, even though the carrier
automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was no
longer detected.

The YELLOW ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected
a yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the T1 link. See
the "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104) for information on T1 link
maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, such
as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or
frame slip thresholds, it can send a yellow alarm signal to the Lineside T1
card, depending on whether or not the terminal equipment supports this
feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, the LED lights.
The MAINT LED indicates if the Lineside T1 card is fully operational
because of certain maintenance commands being issued through the MMI.
See "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104) for information on T1
link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms
are disabled through the MMI, the LED lights and remains lit until these
conditions are no longer detected, then it turns off.
The faceplate of the card is twice as wide as the other standard analog
and digital line cards, and occupies two card slots. It comes equipped with
four LED indicators. See Figure 30 "Lineside T1 card - block diagram"
(page 177).
The LEDs provide status indications on the operations as described in Table
79 "Lineside T1 card LED operation" (page 174).

Table 79
Lineside T1 card LED operation
LED OPERATION
STATUS Line card
RED ALARM T1 near end
YELLOW ALARM T1 far end
MAINT Maintenance

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 175

The STATUS LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has successfully
passed its self test, and is functional. When the card is installed, this LED
remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test
completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When
the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the
LED flashes continuously, or remains weakly lit, replace the card.
Figure 29
Lineside T1 card - faceplate

Note: The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both

card slots of the Lineside T1 card simultaneously. To properly enable
the card, both the motherboard and the daughterboard slots must be
enabled. The STATUS LED turns off as soon as either one of the

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 176 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Lineside T1 card slots are enabled. No LED operation is observed when

the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the card, both card
slots must be disabled. The LED does not turn on until both card slots
are disabled.

The RED ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has detected
an alarm condition from the T1 link. Alarm conditions can include such
conditions as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error
thresholds or frame slip thresholds. See "Functional description" (page
391) for information on T1 link maintenance.
If one of these alarm conditions is detected, this red LED light. Yellow alarm
indication is sent to the far-end as long as the near-end remains in a red
alarm condition. Depending on how the Man-Machine Interface (MMI) is
configured, this LED remains lit until the following actions occur:
• If the "Self-Clearing" function has been enabled in the MMI, the LED
clears the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is
the factory default.
• If the "Self-Clearing" function has not been enabled or it has been
subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED stays lit until the command
"Clear Alarm" has been typed in the MMI, even though the carrier
automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was no
longer detected.

The YELLOW ALARM LED indicates that the Lineside T1 card has
detected a yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the T1
link. See the "Functional description" (page 391) for information on T1 link
maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a red alarm condition, such
as not receiving a signal or the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or
frame slip thresholds, it can send a yellow alarm signal to the Lineside T1
card, depending on whether or not the terminal equipment supports this
feature. If a yellow alarm signal is detected, the LED lights.

The MAINT LED indicates if the Lineside T1 card is fully operational

because of certain maintenance commands being issued through the
MMI. See "Functional description" (page 391) for information on T1 link
maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being run or that alarms
are disabled through the MMI, the LED lights and remains lit until these
conditions are no longer detected, then it turns off.

Functional description
Figure 31 "Lineside T1 card - block diagram" (page 178) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the Lineside T1 card. Each of
these functions is described on the following pages.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 177

Figure 30
Lineside T1 card - block diagram

The NT5D14AA provides the following features and functions:

• Card interfaces
• T1 interface circuit
• Signaling and control
• Card control functions
• Microcontroller
• Card LAN interface
• Sanity Timer
• Man-Machine Interface (MMI)

Figure 32 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page

191) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the Lineside
T1 card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.
The Lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective
all-digital connection between T1-compatible terminal equipment (such
as voice mail systems, voice response units, and trading turrets) and

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 178 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog

(500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash,
SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch. Usually, the
Lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment
normally placed between the switch and the terminal equipment. This
provides a more robust and reliable end-to-end connection. The Lineside
T1 card supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start
protocols. It can also be used in an off-premise arrangement where analog
(500/2500-type) telephones are extended over T1 with the use of channel
bank equipment.
The Lineside T1 interface offers significant improvement over the previous
alternatives. For example, if a digital trunk connection were used, such
as with the DTI/PRI interface card, lineside functionality would not be
supported. Previously, the only way to achieve the lineside functionality
was to use analog ports and channel bank equipment. No channel bank
equipment is required, resulting in a more robust and reliable connection.
Figure 31
Lineside T1 card - block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 179

The Lineside T1 interface offers a number of benefits when used to connect

to third-party applications equipment:
• It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates
the need for expensive channel bank equipment.
• The Lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic
capability.
• Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because the
T1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the analog-port
alternatives.

The Lineside T1 card is compatible with all IPE based systems and standard
public or private DSX-1 type carrier facilities. Using A/B robbed bit signaling,
it supports D4 or ESF channel framing formats as well as AMI or B8ZS
coding. Because it uses standard PCM in standard T1 timeslots, existing
T1 test equipment remains compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation
purposes.
The Lineside T1 card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective
all-digital connection between T1-compatible terminal equipment (such
as voice mail systems, voice response units, and trading turrets) and
the system. The terminal equipment is assured access to analog
(500/2500-type) telephone type line functionality such as hook flash,
SPRE codes and ringback tones generated from the switch. Usually, the
Lineside T1 card eliminates the need for channel bank type equipment
normally placed between the Meridian 1 and the terminal equipment. This
provides a more robust and reliable end-to-end connection. The Lineside
T1 card supports line supervision features such as loop and ground start
protocols. It can also be used in an off-premise arrangement where analog
(500/2500-type) telephones are extended over T1 with the use of channel
bank equipment.
The Lineside T1 interface offers significant improvement over the previous
alternatives. For example, if a digital trunk connection were used, such
as with the DTI/PRI interface card, lineside functionality would not be
supported. Previously, the only way to achieve the lineside functionality was
to use analog ports and channel bank equipment. With the Lineside T1
interface, a direct connection is provided between the Meridian 1 and the
peripheral equipment. No channel bank equipment is required, resulting in
a more robust and reliable connection.
The Lineside T1 interface offers a number of benefits when used to connect
a Meridian 1 to third-party applications equipment:
• It is a more cost-effective alternative for connection because it eliminates
the need for expensive channel bank equipment.
• The Lineside T1 supports powerful T1 monitoring and diagnostic
capability.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 180 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

• Overall costs for customer applications can also be reduced because

the T1-compatible peripheral equipment is often more attractively priced
than the analog-port alternatives.

The Lineside T1 card is compatible with all IPE based systems and standard
public or private DSX-1 type carrier facilities. Using A/B robbed bit signaling,
it supports D4 or ESF channel framing formats as well as AMI or B8ZS
coding. Because it uses standard PCM in standard T1 timeslots, existing
T1 test equipment remains compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation
purposes.

Card interfaces
The Lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops
through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card
LAN link.

The Lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops
through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card
LAN link. These interfaces are discussed in detail in "Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment" (page 21).

The Lineside T1 card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops
through the DS-30X Interfaces circuits and maintenance data over the card
LAN link.

T1 interface circuit
The Lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit which provides
24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different
time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling
bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz
T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite,
receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx
signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
The T1 interface circuit performs the following:
• Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 ft./200 meters) interface.
• Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit
signaling protocol.
• Provides switch-selectable transmission and reception of T1 signaling
messages over a T1 link in either loop or ground start mode.

The Lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit that provides
24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different
time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling
bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 181

T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite,

receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx
signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
The line interface circuit performs the following:
• Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 feet) interface.
• Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit
signaling protocol.
• Provides switch-selectable transmission and reception of T1 signaling
messages over a T1 link in either loop or ground start mode.

The Lineside T1 card contains one T1 line interface circuit which provides
24 individually configurable voice interfaces to one T1 link in 24 different
time slots. The circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X Tx signaling
bitstreams from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 1.544 mHz
T1 Tx signaling bitstreams onto the T1 link. It also does the opposite,
receiving Rx signaling bitstreams from the T1 link and transmitting Rx
signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
The T1 interface circuit performs the following:
• Provides an industry standard DSX-1 (0 to 655 ft/200 meters) interface.
• Converts DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A and B robbed bit
signaling protocol.
• Provides switch-selectable transmission and reception of T1 signaling
messages over a T1 link in either loop or ground start mode.

Signaling and control

The Lineside T1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that
establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system controller to operate the T1 line interface circuit during calls.
The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller
and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X
network loop.

The Lineside T1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that
establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system controller to operate the T1 line interface circuit during calls.
The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller
and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X
network loop.

The Lineside T1 card also contains signaling and control circuits that
establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work
with the system controller to operate the T1 line interface circuit during calls.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 182 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller
and return incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X
network loop.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on
the Lineside T1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the
card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on

the Lineside T1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the
card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on

the Lineside T1 card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the
card if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontrollers
The Lineside T1 card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The
microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test results
— programmed unit parameter status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— control of the T1 line interface
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
channel operation
— maintenance diagnostics

• interface with the line card circuit:

— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X
loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data
stream, using robbed bit signaling.

• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions
from the NT8D01 controller card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 183

The Lineside T1 card contains two microcontrollers that control the internal
operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The
microcontrollers control the following:
• reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test results
— programmed unit parameter status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— control of the T1 line interfaces
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
channel operation
— maintenance diagnostics

• interface with the line card circuit:

— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X
loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data
stream, using robbed bit signaling.

• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions
from the NT8D01 controller card.

Microcontroller
The Lineside T1 card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The
microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test results
— programmed unit parameter status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— control of the T1 line interface
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 184 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of

channel operation
— maintenance diagnostics

• interface with the line card circuit:

— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X
loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the T1 data
stream, using robbed bit signaling.

• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions
from the NT8D01 controller card.

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated
asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Maintenance data is exchanged with the Common Equipment CPU over a

dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card
LAN link is described in "Card LAN link" (page 25).

Maintenance data is exchanged with the CPU over a dedicated

asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Sanity timer
The Lineside T1 card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. The microcontroller
must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly
serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

The Lineside T1 card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. If the timer is
not properly serviced by the microcontroller, it times out and causes the
microcontroller to be hardware reset. If the microcontroller loses control and
fails to service the sanity timer at least once per second, the sanity timer
automatically resets the microcontroller, restoring program control.

The Lineside T1 card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller in the event of a loss of program control. The microcontroller
must service the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly
serviced, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 185

Man-Machine Interface
The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI)
that is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem
diagnosis. The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance
reporting and fault isolation testing. The interface is accessed through
connections from the I/O panel to a terminal or modem.

The MMI is an optional feature since all T1 configuration settings are

performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default
settings.

The Lineside T1 card provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that

is primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis.
The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault
isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the
I/O panel to a terminal or modem. Multiple cards (up to 64) can be served
through one MMI terminal or modem by cabling the cards together.

The MMI is an optional feature since all T1 configuration settings are

performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default
settings. The man-machine interface is discussed fully in "Functional
description" (page 391).

The Lineside T1 card provides an optional man-machine interface that is

primarily used for T1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis.
The MMI provides alarm notification, T1 link performance reporting and fault
isolation testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the
I/O panel to a terminal or modem.

The MMI is an optional feature since all T1 configuration settings are

performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default
settings.

Electrical specifications
T1 channel specifications
Table 80 "Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics"
(page 185) provides specifications for the 24 T1channels. Each
characteristic is configured by dip switches.

Table 80
Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Framing ESF or D4
Coding AMI or B8ZS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 186 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Characteristics Description
Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit
Distance to Customer Premise 0-199.6 meters (0–655 feet)
Equipment (CPE) or Channel Service
Unit

Table 81 "Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics"

(page 186) provides a technical summary of the T1 line interfaces, and
Table 83 "Lineside T1 card - power required" (page 187) lists the maximum
power consumed by the card.

T1 channel specifications
Table 81 "Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics"
(page 186) provides specifications for the 24 T1channels. Each
characteristic is set by dip switches. See "Installation and configuration"
(page 188) for the corresponding dip switch settings.

Table 81
Lineside T1 card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Framing ESF or D4
Coding AMI or B8ZS
Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit
Distance to Customer Premise 0-199.6 meters (0–655 feet)
Equipment (CPE) or Channel Service
Unit

Power requirements
The Lineside T1 card requires +15 V, –15 V, and +5 V from the backplane.
One NT8D06 IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Power Supply DC can
supply power to a maximum of eight Lineside T1 cards. See Table 82
"Lineside T1 card - power required" (page 186).

Table 82
Lineside T1 card - power required
Voltage Current (max.)
+ 5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
+15.0 V dc 150 mA.
–15.0 V dc 150 mA.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 187

The Lineside T1 card requires +15 V, –15 V, and +5 V from the backplane.
One NT8D06 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply ac or NT6D40 Peripheral
Equipment Power Supply dc can supply power to a maximum of eight
Lineside T1 cards.

Table 83
Lineside T1 card - power required
Voltage Current (max.)
+ 5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
+15.0 V dc 150 mA.
–15.0 V dc 150 mA.

The Lineside T1 card obtains its power from the Option 11C’s backplane.

Table 84
Lineside T1 card: power required
Voltage Current (max.)
5.0 V dc 150 mA.
+15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
-15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided
on the Lineside T1 card. It does protect against accidental shorts to –52 V
dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through

the public telephone network, install a Channel Service Unit (CSU) as part
of the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the Lineside T1 card. It does protect against accidental shorts to –52 V
dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through

the public telephone network, install a Channel Service Unit (CSU) as part
of the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.

Environmental specifications
Table 85 "Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications" (page 188) lists
the environmental specifications of the Lineside T1 card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 188 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Table 85
Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature-normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86F), ambient
Operating temperature-short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113F), ambient
Operating humidity-normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing)
Operating humidity-short term 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –50 to +70 C (–58 to 158F), ambient
Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Table 86 "Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications" (page 188) lists

the environmental specifications of the Lineside T1 card.

Table 86
Lineside T1 card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature-normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86F), ambient
Operating temperature-short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113F), ambient
Operating humidity-normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing)
Operating humidity-short term 20% to 80% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –50 to +70 C (–58 to 158F), ambient
Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Installation and configuration

Installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card consists of six basic
steps:

Step Action

1 Configure the dip switches on the Lineside T1 card for the

environment.

2 Install the Lineside T1 card into the selected card slots in the IPE
shelf.
3 Cable from the I/O panel to the Customer Premise Equipment
(CPE) or CSU, MMI terminal or modem (optional), external alarm
(optional), and other Lineside T1 cards for daisy chaining use of
MMI terminal (optional).

4 Configure the MMI terminal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 189

5 Configure the Lineside T1 card through the system software and

verify self-test results.

6 Verify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional).

—End—

Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in "QPC43

Peripheral Signaling card" (page 104).
Installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card consists of six basic
steps:

Step Action

1 Configure the dip switches on the Lineside T1 card for the

environment.

2 Install the Lineside T1 card into the selected card slots in the IPE
shelf.

3 Cable from the I/O panel to the Customer Premise Equipment

(CPE) or CSU, MMI terminal or modem (optional), external alarm
(optional), and other Lineside T1 cards for daisy chaining use of
MMI terminal (optional).

4 Configure the MMI terminal.

5 Configure the Lineside T1 card through the Meridian 1 software
and verify self-test results.

6 Verify initial T1 operation and configure MMI (optional).

—End—

Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in "Functional

description" (page 391).

Dip switch settings

Begin the installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card by selecting
the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The Lineside T1 card
contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are
located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown
in Figure 32 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page
191). The configuration for these switches are shown in Table 87 "Lineside

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 190 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings" (page 192) through Table 90
"Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2,
positions 3 - 5)" (page 194).

When the line-side T1 card is oriented as shown in Figure 32 "Lineside T1

card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 191), the dip switches are ON
when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings
configure the card for the following parameters:

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or
modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

As described in "Power requirements" (page 323), the Lineside T1 card is
capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes.
Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line
signaling the CPE equipment supports.

Address of Lineside T1 card to the MMI

The address of the Lineside T1 card to the MMI is made up of two
components:
• The address of the card within the shelf
• The address of the shelf in which the card resides

These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the
card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card
firmware; however the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch.

The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 – 15. 16 is the maximum number
of Lineside T1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 Lineside T1 cards) capable of
daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that
this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller
identifier in LD 97 for type: XPE. This is not possible because the dip switch
is limited to 16; however, this is not mandatory.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 191

Figure 32
Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations

T1 framing
The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment
either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch
position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

T1 coding
The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment
using either AMI or B8ZS coding. Make the selection for this dip switch
position based on what type of coding the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 192 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

DSX-1 length
Estimate the distance between the Lineside T1 card and the hardwired
local CPE, or the Telco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the
Lineside T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection for this dip switch
position based on this distance.

Line supervision on T1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card
appears to the CS 1000M, CS 1000E and Meridian 1 in case of T1 failure.
Ports can appear as either in the on-hook or off-hook states on T1 failure.

Note: All idle Lineside T1 lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone

Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on T1 failure. This
may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the Lineside
T1 lines time-out and release the DTRs.

Daisy-chaining to MMI
If two or more Lineside T1 cards are installed and the MMI is used,
daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem, See
Figure 36 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI"
(page 211). Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how
many Lineside T1 cards are installed.

MMI master or slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or
modem. This setting determines whether this card is a master or a slave in
the MMI daisy-chain. Select the master setting if this card is the card that is
cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if
this card is cabled to another Lineside T1 card in a daisy chain.

Table 87 "Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings" (page

192) through Table 90 "Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip
switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)" (page 194) describes the
proper dip switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card has been
installed, the MMI displays the DIP switch settings the command Display
Configuration is used. See "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page
104) for details on how to invoke this command.

Table 87
Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings
Dip Switch
Number Characteristic Selection
1 MMI port speed selection On = 1200 baud
Off = 2400 baud
2 T1 signaling On = Ground start
Off = Loop start

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 193

Dip Switch
Number Characteristic Selection
3–6 XPEC Address for the Lineside T1 card See Table 88 "Lineside T1
card - XPEC address dip
switch settings (Switch S1,
positions 3 - 6)" (page 193)
7 Not Used Leave Off
8 Reserved for SL-100 use Leave Off

Table 88
Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 - 6)
XPEC S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch
Address Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 Position 6
00 Off Off Off Off
01 Off Off Off On
02 Off Off On Off
03 Off Off On On
04 Off On Off Off
05 Off On Off On
06 Off On On Off
07 Off On On On
08 On Off Off Off
09 On Off Off On
10 On Off On Off
11 On Off On On
12 On On Off Off
13 On On Off On
14 On On On Off
15 On On On On

Table 89
Lineside T1 card - T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings
Dip Switch
Number Characteristic Selection
1 T1 framing On = D4
Off = ESF
2 T1 Coding On = AMI
Off = B8ZS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 194 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Dip Switch
Number Characteristic Selection
3–5 CPE or CSU distance See Table 90 "Lineside T1 card -
CPE or CSU distance dip switch
settings (Switch S2, positions 3
- 5)" (page 194)
6 Line processing on T1 link failure On = On-hook
Off = Off-hook
7 Daisy-chaining to MMI On = Yes
Off = No
8 MMI Master or Slave On = Master
Off = Slave

Table 90
Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)
S2 Switch S2 Switch S2 Switch
Distance Position 3 Position 4 Position 5
0–133 On Off Off
134–266 Off On On
267–399 Off On Off
400–533 Off Off On
534–655 Off Off Off

Begin the installation and configuration of the Lineside T1 card by selecting

the proper dip switch settings for the environment. The Lineside T1 card
contains two dip switches, each containing eight switch positions. They are
located in the upper right corner of the motherboard circuit card as shown
in Figure 33 "Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page
195). The settings for these switches are shown in Table 91 "Lineside T1
card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings" (page 197) through Table 94
"Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2,
positions 3 - 5)" (page 198).

When the Lineside T1 card is oriented as shown in Figure 33 "Lineside T1

card - T1 protocol dip switch locations" (page 195), the dip switches are ON
when they are up, and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings
configure the card for the following parameters:

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or
modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 195

Figure 33
Lineside T1 card - T1 protocol dip switch locations

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

As described in "Power requirements" (page 323), the Lineside T1 card is
capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing modes.
Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of line
signaling the CPE equipment supports.

Address of Lineside T1 card to the MMI

The address of the Lineside T1 card to the MMI is made up of two
components:
• The address of the card within the shelf

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 196 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

• The address of the shelf in which the card resides

These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the
card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card
firmware; however the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch.

The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 – 15. 16 is the maximum number
of Lineside T1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 Lineside T1 cards) capable of
daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that
this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller
identifier in LD 97 for type: XPE. This is not possible because the dip switch
is limited to 16; however, this is not mandatory.

T1 framing
The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment
either in D4 or ESF framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch
position based on what type of framing the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

T1 Coding
The Lineside T1 card is capable of interfacing with CPE or CSU equipment
using either AMI or B8ZS coding. Make the selection for this dip switch
position based on what type of coding the CPE or CSU equipment supports.

DSX-1 length
Estimate the distance between the Lineside T1 card and the hardwired
local CPE, or the Telco demarc RJ48, for the carrier facility connecting the
Lineside T1 and the remote CPE. Make the selection for this dip switch
position based on this distance.

Line supervision on T1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 24 ports of the Lineside T1 card
appears to the Meridian 1 in case of T1 failure. Ports can appear to the
Meridian 1 as either in the on-hook or off-hook states on T1 failure.

Note: All idle Lineside T1 lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone

Receiver when the off-hook line processing is invoked on T1 failure. This
may prevent DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the Lineside
T1 lines time-out and release the DTRs.

Daisy-Chaining to MMI
If two or more Lineside T1 cards are installed and the MMI is used,
daisy-chain the cards together to use one MMI terminal or modem, See
Figure 38 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI"
(page 218). Make the selection for this dip switch position based on how
many Lineside T1 cards are installed.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 197

MMI Master or Slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or
modem. This setting determines whether this card is a master or a slave in
the MMI daisy-chain. Select the master setting if this card is the card that is
cabled directly into the MMI terminal or modem; select the slave setting if
this card is cabled to another Lineside T1 card in a daisy chain.

Table 91 "Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings" (page

197) through Table 94 "Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch
settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)" (page 198) describe the proper dip
switch settings for each type of T1 link. After the card has been installed, the
MMI displays the DIP switch settings the command Display Configuration
is used. See "Functional description" (page 391) for details on how to
invoke this command.

Table 91
Lineside T1 card-T1 Switch 1 (S1) dip switch settings
Dip Switch
Number Characteristic Selection
1 MMI port speed selection On = 1200 baud
Off = 2400 baud
2 T1 signaling On = Ground start
Off = Loop start
3–6 XPEC Address for the Lineside T1 card See Table 92 "Lineside
T1 card - XPEC address
dip switch settings (Switch
S1, positions 3 - 6)" (page
197).
7 Not Used Leave Off
8 Reserved for SL-100 use Leave Off

Table 92
Lineside T1 card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3 - 6)
XPEC S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch
Address Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 Position 6
00 Off Off Off Off
01 Off Off Off On
02 Off Off On Off
03 Off Off On On
04 Off On Off Off
05 Off On Off On
06 Off On On Off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 198 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

XPEC S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch

Address Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 Position 6
07 Off On On On
08 On Off Off Off
09 On Off Off On
10 On Off On Off
11 On Off On On
12 On On Off Off
13 On On Off On
14 On On On Off
15 On On On On

Table 93
Lineside T1 card - T1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings
Dip Switch
Number Characteristic Selection
1 T1 framing On = D4
Off = ESF
2 T1 Coding On = AMI
Off = B8ZS
3–5 CPE or CSU distance See Table 94 "Lineside T1 card -
CPE or CSU distance dip switch
settings (Switch S2, positions 3
- 5)" (page 198)
6 Line processing on T1 link failure On = On-hook
Off = Off-hook
7 Daisy-chaining to MMI On = Yes
Off = No
8 MMI Master or Slave On = Master
Off = Slave

Table 94
Lineside T1 card - CPE or CSU distance dip switch settings (Switch S2, positions 3 - 5)
S2 Switch S2 Switch S2 Switch
Distance Position 3 Position 4 Position 5
0–133 On Off Off
134–266 Off On On
267–399 Off On Off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 199

S2 Switch S2 Switch S2 Switch

Distance Position 3 Position 4 Position 5
400–533 Off Off On
534–655 Off Off Off

Installation
This section describes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card.

When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be
installed into an NT8D37 IPE module.

When installing the Lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, determine
the vintage level module. If the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially split
between adjacent IPE card slots, the Lineside T1 card works only in card
slots where Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appears on the first pair
of the 25-pair I/O connector.

Certain vintage levels carry dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for card
slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16 pairs
of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O
connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels cable
each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on the I/O
panel. In these vintage levels, the Lineside T1 card can be installed in any
available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower number of wire
pairs cabled to the I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only certain card
slots are available to the Lineside T1 card.

See Table 95 "Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port
cabling" (page 199) for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE
modules.

Table 95
Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling
Number of ports
Vintage Level cabled to I/O panel
NT8D37AA 16 ports
NT8D37BA 24 ports
NT8D37DC 16 ports
NT8D37DE 16 ports
NT8D37EC 24 ports

This section describes how to install and test the Lineside T1 card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 200 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

When installed, the Lineside T1 card occupies two card slots. It can be
installed into an NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module.

When installing the Lineside T1 card into NT8D37 IPE module, determine
the vintage level module. If the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially split
between adjacent IPE card slots, the Lineside T1 card works only in card
slots where Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appears on the first pair
of the 25-pair I/O connector.

Certain vintage levels possess dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only for
card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16
pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair
I/O connectors are split between adjacent card slots. Other vintage levels
cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique, 24-pair connector on
the I/O panel. In these vintage levels, the Lineside T1 card can be installed
in any available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower number
of wire pairs cabled to the I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only certain
card slots are available to the Lineside T1 card.

See Table 96 "Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE Module vintage level port
cabling" (page 200) for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE
modules.

Table 96
Lineside T1 card - NT8D37 IPE Module vintage level port cabling
Number of ports
Vintage Level cabled to I/O panel
NT8D37AA 16 ports
NT8D37BA 24 ports
NT8D37DC 16 ports
NT8D37DE 16 ports
NT8D37EC 24 ports

Available and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE Module

If the Lineside T1 card is installed in an NT8D37 IPE Module, the available

card slots depend on the vintage level module.

Vintage levels cabling 24 ports For modules with vintage levels that
cabled 24 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed in
any pair of card slots 015.

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 24 ports to the I/O panel, the
Lineside T1 card can be installed in any pair of card slots 015.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 201

Vintage levels cabling 16 ports For modules with vintage levels that
cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the Lineside T1 card can be installed into
the following card slot pairs:

Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard
0 and 1
1 and 2
4 and 5
7 and 8
8 and 9
9 and 10
12 and 13
13 and 14

The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard
2 and 3
3 and 4
6 and 7
10 and 11
11 and 12
14 and 15

If the Lineside T1 card must be installed into one of the restricted card slot
pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an
additional NT8D81 cable from the Lineside T1 card motherboard slot to
the I/O panel. Re-arrange the three backplane connectors for the affected
card slots. This permits the connection of the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 card
carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE module I/O panel
connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted.

Also, all Lineside T1 card connections can be made at the main distribution
frame instead of connecting the NT5D13 Lineside T1 card external I/O cable
at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slots restrictions.

For modules with vintage levels that cabled 16 ports to the I/O panel, the
Lineside T1 card can be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 202 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard
0 and 1
1 and 2
4 and 5
7 and 8
8 and 9
9 and 10
12 and 13
13 and 14

The Lineside T1 card cannot be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard
2 and 3
3 and 4
6 and 7
10 and 11
11 and 12
14 and 15

If the Lineside T1 card must be installed into one of the restricted card slot
pairs, rewire the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an
additional NT8D81 cable from the Lineside T1 card motherboard slot to
the I/O panel. Re-arrange the three backplane connectors for the affected
card slots. This permits the connection of the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 card
carrier and maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE module I/O panel
connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted.

Also, all Lineside T1 card connections can be made at the main distribution
frame instead of connecting the NT5D13 Lineside T1 card external I/O cable
at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slots restrictions.

Cabling the Lineside T1 card

After configuring the dip switches and installing the Lineside T1 card into the
selected card slots, the Lineside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE
or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI terminal or
modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other Lineside T1 cards
for daisy-chain use of the MMI terminal (optional).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 203

The Lineside T1 card is cabled from its backplane connector through

connections from the motherboard circuit card only (no cable connections
are made from the daughterboard circuit card) to the input/output (I/O)
panel on the rear of the IPE module. The connections from the Lineside
T1 card to the I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables
provided with the IPE module.

After setting the dip switches and installing the Lineside T1 card into the
selected card slots, the Lineside T1 card is ready to be cabled to the CPE
or CSU equipment. Connections can also be made to the MMI terminal or
modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other Lineside T1 cards
for daisy-chain use of the MMI terminal (optional).

The Lineside T1 card is cabled from its backplane connector through

connections from the motherboard circuit card only (no cable connections
are made from the daughterboard circuit card) to the input/output (I/O)
panel on the rear of the IPE module. The connections from the Lineside
T1 card to the I/O panel are made with the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables
provided with the IPE module.

Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O
cable
Usually, the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other external devices
through the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable. See Figure 34 "Lineside T1
card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable" (page 205). This
cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which
plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors:

Step Action

1 a DB15 male connector (P2) which plugs into the T1 line

2 a DB9 male connector (P3) which plugs into an external alarm

system
3 a second DB9 male connector (P5) which connects to an MMI
terminal or modem

4 a DB9 female connector (P4) that connects to the next Lineside T1

card’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 204 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Usually, the I/O panel is connected to the T1 link and other external devices
through the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable. See Figure 36 "Lineside T1
card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 211). This cable
consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which plugs into
the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors:

Step Action

1 a DB15 male connector (P2) which plugs into the T1 line

2 a DB9 male connector (P3) which plugs into an external alarm
system

3 a second DB9 male connector (P5) which connects to an MMI

terminal or modem
4 a DB9 female connector (P4) that connects to the next Lineside T1
card’s P4 connector for MMI daisy chaining

—End—

Cabling from the I/O panel at the Main Distribution Frame

All Lineside T1 connections can be made at the main distribution frame
(MDF) if it is preferred to not use the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable
at the I/O panel.

Procedure 12
Connecting to the MDF
Step Action
To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure:

1 Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair

female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip
and ring pair of the Lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the
cross-connect side of the MDF terminals.
2 Plug the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable into this 25-pair
cross-connect tail at the MDF, regardless of the card slot restrictions
that exist from the vintage level of IPE or CE module used. This
connection can also be made at the MDF without using the NT5D13
Lineside T1 I/O cable, by cross-connecting according to the pinouts
in Table 97 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 207).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 205

Figure 34
Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 206 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 35
Lineside T1 card - connection using the NTSD13AA Lineside T1 cable

3 Turn over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for
hardwiring the Lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 terminal equipment.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 207

—End—

The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of

pins. Table 97 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 207) shows the
I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol
connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel
only use 14 of the available 50-pins, the remaining pins are reserved and
cannot be used for other signaling transmissions.

The information in Table 97 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page

207) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, since
the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Table 97
Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts
Backplane I/O Panel
Connector Pin Connector Pin Signal
12A 1 T1 Tip, Receive Data
12B 26 T1 Ring, Receive Data
13A 2 T1 Tip, Transmit Data
13B 27 T1 Ring, Transmit Data
14A 3 Alarm out, Normally open
14B 28 Alarm out, Common
15A 4 Alarm out, Normally closed
15B 29 No Connection
16A 5 No Connection
16B 30 Away from MMI terminal, Receive Data
17A 6 Away from MMI terminal, Transmit Data
17B 31 Towards MMI terminal, Transmit Data
18A 7 Towards MMI terminal, Receive Data
18B 32 Daisy-chain Control 2
19A 8 Daisy-chain Control 1
19B 33 Ground

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 208 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Table 98 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts" (page

208) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1
I/O cable.

Table 98
Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector pinouts
NT5D13AA
I/O pane Lineside
connec T1 I/O Lineside T1 cable
tor connector connector to external
pin Lead designations pin equipment
1 T1 Tip Receive Data 11 DB15 male to T1 (P2) Lineside T1
card is CPE transmit to network and
26 T1 Ring Receive Data 3
receive from network
2 T1 Tip Transmit Data 1
27 T1 Ring Transmit Data 9
3 Alarm out common 1 DB9 male to external alarm (P3)
28 Alarm out (normally open) 2
4 Alarm out (normally closed) 3
7 Towards MMI terminal Receive 2 DB9 male towards MMI (P5)
Data Wired as DCE
Data is transmitted on pin 2 (RXD)
31 Towards MMI terminal Transmit 3
Data
33 Ground 5 and received on pin 3 (TXD)

8 Control 1 7
32 Control 2 9
33 Ground 5 DB9 female away from MMI (P4)
7 Wired as DTE
8 Control 1
Data is transmitted on pin 2 (TXD)
32 Control 2 9 and received on pin 3 (RXD)
30 Away from MMI terminal Transmit 3
Data
6 Away from MMI terminal Receive 2
Data

T1 connections
T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3,
9, and 11 as shown in Table 98 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA connector
pinouts" (page 208). Plug the DB15 male connector labeled "P2" into the
T1 link. T1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the
Lineside T1 card and CPE equipment that is hardwired without carrier
facilities. If the Lineside T1 card is connected through T1 carrier facilities,
the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 209

at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE
equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the
RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

External alarm connections

P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm
hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled "P3" into the external
alarm. These connections are optional, and the functionality of the Lineside
T1 card is not affected if they are not made.

The MMI (described in detail in "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card" (page

104)) monitors the T1 link for specified performance criteria and reports
on problems detected.

One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm
connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates
the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has
classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See "QPC43 Peripheral Signaling card"
(page 104) for a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If
an alarm level 1 or 2 is detected by MMI, the Lineside T1 card closes the
contact that is normally open, and opens the contact that is normally closed.
The MMI command Clear Alarm returns the alarm contacts to their normal
state.

MMI connections
P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the Lineside T1
card to the MMI terminal and daisy chain Lineside T1 cards together for
access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a Lineside T1 card,
"control 2" is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not
to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins
labeled "control 1" are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm
connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards,
located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal
using the daisy chaining approach.
If only one Lineside T1 card is being installed, cable from the DB9 female
connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports
on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a
modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the
DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).
If two or more Lineside T1 cards are being installed into the system, the
MMI port connections can be daisy-chained together so that only one
MMI terminal is required for up to 128 Lineside T1 cards. See Figure 36
"Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 211).
Cards can be located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves. Any card slot in the
IPE shelf can be connected to any other card slot; the card slots connected
together do not need to be consecutive.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 210 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Procedure 13
Connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the MMI terminal
Step Action
Follow this procedure for connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the
MMI terminal:

1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal)
to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a
terminal emulation program, or a modem.
2 Make the connection from the first card to the second card by
plugging the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI
terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the
second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal).

3 Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards.

4 When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection
to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).

—End—

If two Lineside T1 cards are located too far apart to connect the "P4" and
"P5" connectors together, connect them together with an off-the-shelf DB-9
female to DB-9 male straight-through extension cable, available at any
PC supply store. All Lineside T1 connections can be made at the main
distribution frame (MDF) if it is preferred to not use the NT5D13AA Lineside
T1 I/O cable at the I/O panel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 211

Figure 36
Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI

To make the connections at the MDF, follow this procedure:

Step Action

1 Punch down the first eight pairs of a standard telco 25-pair

female-connectorized cross-connect tail starting with the first tip
and ring pair of the Lineside T1 motherboard card slot on the
cross-connect side of the MDF terminals.

2 Plug the NT5D13AA Lineside T1 I/O cable into this 25-pair

cross-connect tail at the MDF, regardless of the card slot restrictions
that exist from the vintage level of IPE or CE/PE module used. This
connection can also be made at the MDF without using the NT5D13
Lineside T1 I/O cable, by cross-connecting according to the pinouts
in Table 99 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 212).
3 Turn over the T1 transmit and receive pairs, where required for
hardwiring the Lineside T1 card to local CPE T1 terminal equipment.

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 212 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

The backplane connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of

pins. Table 99 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page 212) shows the
I/O pin designations for the backplane connector and the 25-pair Amphenol
connector from the I/O panel. Although the connections from the I/O panel
only use 14 of the available 50-pins, the remaining pins are reserved and
cannot be used for other signaling transmissions.

The information in Table 99 "Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts" (page

212) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, since
the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Table 99
Lineside T1 card - backplane pinouts
Backplane I/O Panel
Connector Pin Connector Pin Signal
12A 1 T1 Tip, Receive Data
12B 26 T1 Ring, Receive Data
13A 2 T1 Tip, Transmit Data
13B 27 T1 Ring, Transmit Data
14A 3 Alarm out, Normally open
14B 28 Alarm out, Common
15A 4 Alarm out, Normally closed
15B 29 No Connection
16A 5 No Connection
16B 30 Away from MMI terminal,
Receive Data
17A 6 Away from MMI terminal,
Transmit Data
17B 31 Towards MMI terminal,
Transmit Data
18A 7 Towards MMI terminal,
Receive Data
18B 32 Daisy-chain Control 2
19A 8 Daisy-chain Control 1
19B 33 Ground

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 213

Table 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts" (page

213) shows the pin assignments when using the NT5D13AA Lineside T1
I/O cable.

Table 100
Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector pinouts
NT5D13
AA
Lineside
T1 I/O
I/O Panel Connec Lineside T1 cable
Connector tor connector to external
Pin Lead Designations Pin equipment
1 T1 Tip Receive Data 11 DB15 male to T1 (P2)
26 3 Lineside T1 card is CPE
T1 Ring Receive Data
transmit to network and
2 T1 Tip Transmit Data 1 receive from network
27 T1 Ring Transmit Data 9
3 Alarm out common 1 DB9 male to external alarm
(P3)
28 Alarm out (normally open) 2
4 Alarm out (normally closed) 3
7 Towards MMI terminal 2 DB9 male towards MMI (P5)
Receive Data Wired as DCE
Data is transmitted on pin 2
31 Towards MMI terminal 3
(RXD) and received on pin
Transmit Data
3 (TXD)
33 Ground 5
8 Control 1 7
32 Control 2 9
33 Ground 5 DB9 female away from MMI
7 (P4)
8 Control 1
Wired as DTE
32 Control 2 9 Data is transmitted on pin 2
(TXD)and received on pin 3
(RXD)
30 Away from MMI terminal 3
Transmit Data
6 Away from MMI terminal 2
Receive Data

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 214 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

T1 connections
T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3,
9, and 11 as shown in Table 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector
pinouts" (page 213). Plug the DB15 male connector labeled "P2" into the
T1 link. T1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the
Lineside T1 card and CPE equipment that is hardwired without carrier
facilities. If the Lineside T1 card is connected through T1 carrier facilities,
the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48
at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE
equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the
RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

T1 signaling for all 24 channels is transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3,

9, and 11 as shown in Table 100 "Lineside T1 card - NT5D13AA Connector
pinouts" (page 213). Plug the DB15 male connector labeled "P2" into the
T1 link. T1 transmit and receive pairs must be turned over between the
Lineside T1 card and CPE equipment that is hardwired without carrier
facilities. If the Lineside T1 card is connected through T1 carrier facilities,
the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48
at the Telco demarc, the CSU, or other T1 carrier equipment. The T1 CPE
equipment at the far end has transmit and receive wired straight from the
RJ48 demarc at the far end of the carrier facility.

External alarm connections

P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm
hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled "P3" into the external
alarm. These connections are optional, and the functionality of the Lineside
T1 card is not affected if they are not made.

The MMI (described in detail in "Functional description" (page 391))

monitors the T1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on
problems detected.

One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm
connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates
the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has
classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See "Functional description" (page 391) for
a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If an alarm level
1 or 2 is detected by MMI, the Lineside T1 card closes the contact that is
normally open, and opens the contact that is normally closed. The MMI
command Clear Alarm returns the alarm contacts to their normal state.

P3 connector pins 3, 4, and 28 can be plugged into any external alarm

hardware. Plug the male DB9 connector labeled "P3" into the external
alarm. These connections are optional, and the functionality of the Lineside
T1 card is not affected if they are not made.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 215

The MMI (described in detail in "Functional description" (page 391))

monitors the T1 link for specified performance criteria and reports on
problems detected.

One of the ways it can report information is through this external alarm
connection. If connected, the Lineside T1 card’s microprocessor activates
the external alarm hardware if it detects certain T1 link problems that it has
classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See "Functional description" (page 391) for
a detailed description of alarm levels and configuration. If an alarm level
1 or 2 is detected by MMI, the Lineside T1 card closes the contact that is
normally open, and opens the contact that is normally closed. The MMI
command Clear Alarm returns the alarm contacts to their normal state.

MMI connections
P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the Lineside T1
card to the MMI terminal and daisy chain Lineside T1 cards together for
access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a Lineside T1 card,
"control 2" is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not
to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins
labeled "control 1" are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm
connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards,
located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal
using the daisy chaining approach.
If only one Lineside T1 card is being installed, cable from the DB9 female
connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports
on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a
modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the
DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).
If two or more Lineside T1 cards are being installed into the system, the
MMI port connections can be daisy-chained together so that only one
MMI terminal is required for up to 128 Lineside T1 cards. See Figure 38
"Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI" (page 218).
Cards can be located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves. Any card slot in the
IPE shelf can be connected to any other card slot; the card slots connected
together do not need to be consecutive.
Follow this procedure for connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the
MMI terminal:

Step Action

1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal)
to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a
terminal emulation program, or a modem.
2 Make the connection from the first card to the second card by
plugging the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 216 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the
second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal).

3 Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards.

4 When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection
to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).

5 If two Lineside T1 cards are located too far apart to connect the
"P4" and "P5" connectors together, connect them together with an
off-the-shelf DB-9 female to DB-9 male straight-through extension
cable, available at any PC supply store.
Figure 37
Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI

—End—

P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the Lineside T1

card to the MMI terminal and daisy chain Lineside T1 cards together for
access to a shared MMI terminal. When logging into a Lineside T1 card,
"control 2" is asserted by that card, which informs all of the other cards not

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 217

to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the data straight through. The pins
labeled "control 1" are reserved for future use. As with the external alarm
connections, MMI connections are optional. Up to 128 Lineside T1 cards,
located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, can be linked to one MMI terminal
using the daisy chaining approach.
If only one Lineside T1 card is being installed, cable from the DB9 female
connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports
on the back of any TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation program, or a
modem. For installations of only one card, no connection is made to the
DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).
If two or more Lineside T1 cards are being installed into the Meridian 1
system, the MMI port connections can be daisy-chained together so that
only one MMI terminal is required for up to 128 Lineside T1 cards. See
Figure 38 "Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI"
(page 218). Cards can be located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves. Any
card slot in the IPE shelf can be connected to any other card slot; the card
slots connected together do not need to be consecutive.
Follow this procedure for connecting two or more Lineside T1 cards to the
MMI terminal:

Step Action

1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal)
to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a
terminal emulation program, or a modem.

2 Make the connection from the first card to the second card by
plugging the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI
terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the
second card labeled "P5" (towards MMI terminal).

3 Repeat Step 2 for the remaining cards.

4 When the last card in the daisy chain is reached, make no connection
to the DB9 male connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).

5 If two Lineside T1 cards are located too far apart to connect the
"P4" and "P5" connectors together, connect them together with an
off-the-shelf DB-9 female to DB-9 male straight-through extension
cable, available at any PC supply store.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 218 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 38
Lineside T1 card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI

—End—

Terminal configuration
For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the
interface characteristics must be configured to the following:
• Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1
of Switch 1
• Character width – 8 bits
• Parity bit – none
• Stop bits – one
• Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 219

For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the Lineside T1 card, the
interface characteristics must be set to the following:
• Speed – 1200 or 2400 bps, depending on the setting of switch position 1
of Switch 1
• Character width – 8 bits
• Parity bit – none
• Stop bits – one
• Software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off

Software configuration
Although much of the architecture and many of the features of the Lineside
T1 card differ from the analog line card, the Lineside T1 card has been
designed to emulate an analog line card to the CS 1000 software. Because
of this, the Lineside T1 card software configuration is performed the same
as two adjacent analog line cards.

All 24 T1 channels carried by the Lineside T1 card are individually

configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration
program LD 10. Use Table 101 "DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping" (page
219) to determine the correct unit number and the technical document
Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD
10 service change instructions.

The Lineside T1 card circuitry routes 16 units (0-15) on the motherboard and
eight (0-7) units on the daughterboard to 24 T1 channels. The motherboard
circuit card is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card
is located in right card slot. For example, if the Lineside T1 card is installed
into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the
daughterboard would reside in card slot 1. In order to configure the terminal
equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be
cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is
shown in Table 101 "DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping" (page 219).

Table 101
DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping
Item TN T1 Channel Number
Motherboard 0 1
Motherboard 1 2
Motherboard 2 3
Motherboard 3 4
Motherboard 4 5

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 220 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Item TN T1 Channel Number

Motherboard 5 6
Motherboard 6 7
Motherboard 7 8
Motherboard 8 9
Motherboard 9 10
Motherboard 10 11
Motherboard 11 12
Motherboard 12 13
Motherboard 13 14
Motherboard 14 15
Motherboard 15 16
Daughterboard 0 17
Daughterboard 1 18
Daughterboard 2 19
Daughterboard 3 20
Daughterboard 4 21
Daughterboard 5 22
Daughterboard 6 23
Daughterboard 7 24

Although much of the architecture and many of the features of the Lineside
T1 card differ from the analog line card, the Lineside T1 card has been
designed to emulate an analog line card to the Meridian 1 software.
Because of this, the Lineside T1 card software configuration is performed
the same as two adjacent analog line cards.

All 24 T1 channels carried by the Lineside T1 card are individually

configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration
program LD 10. Use Table 102 "DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping" (page
221) to determine the correct unit number and the technical document
Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD
10 service change instructions.

The Lineside T1 card circuitry routes 16 units (0-15) on the motherboard and
eight (0-7) units on the daughterboard to 24 T1 channels. The motherboard
circuit card is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card
is located in right card slot. For example, if the Lineside T1 card is installed
into card slots 0 and 1, the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the
daughterboard would reside in card slot 1. In order to configure the terminal

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and configuration 221

equipment through the switch software, the T1 channel number must be

cross-referenced to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is
shown in Table 102 "DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping" (page 221).

Table 102
DX-30 to T1 time slot mapping
TN T1 Channel Number
Motherboard 0 1
Motherboard 1 2
Motherboard 2 3
Motherboard 3 4
Motherboard 4 5
Motherboard 5 6
Motherboard 6 7
Motherboard 7 8
Motherboard 8 9
Motherboard 9 10
Motherboard 10 11
Motherboard 11 12
Motherboard 12 13
Motherboard 13 14
Motherboard 14 15
Motherboard 15 16
Daughterboard 0 17
Daughterboard 1 18
Daughterboard 2 19
Daughterboard 3 20
Daughterboard 4 21
Daughterboard 5 22
Daughterboard 6 23
Daughterboard 7 24

Disconnect supervision
The Lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening
the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the system’s detecting a
disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised
Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each Lineside T1
port. At the prompt FTR, respond:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 222 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

OSP <CR>

and against FTR respond:

ISP <CR>

The Lineside T1 card treats OSP and ISP for both originating and
terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off
disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment.
Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The Lineside T1
card does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision
on originating calls.
After the software is configured, power up the card and verify the self test
results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the
Lineside T1 card has passed its self test, and is functional. When the card
is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs.
If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and
remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED
goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is
enabled by the software. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly
lit, replace the card.
The Lineside T1 card supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening
the tip side toward the terminal equipment upon the Meridian 1 system’s
detecting a disconnect signal from the far-end on an established call. The
Supervised Analog Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each
Lineside T1 port. At the prompt FTR, respond
OSP <CR>

and against FTR respond

ISP <CR>

The Lineside T1 card treats OSP and ISP for both originating and
terminating calls as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off
disconnect. Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment.
Terminating calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The Lineside T1
card does not support battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision
on originating calls.

After the software is configured, power up the card and verify the self test
results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the
Lineside T1 card has passed its self test, and is functional. When the card
is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs.
If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and
remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software, the LED

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clocking Requirement 223

goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or daughterboard is
enabled by the software. If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly
lit, replace the card.

Clocking Requirement
The clocking for NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface card in CS1000 Rls 5.0
system is as follows:
• Lineside T1 cards are clock master of their T1 link, which has a clock
accuracy requirement of +/-50ppm
• MGC does not provide a backplane clock with +/-50ppm accuracy at
freerun
• An accurate clock source is needed for Lineside T1 application

The following are the two methods to bring an accurate clock source to MCG:
• Configure a digital trunk card with Clock Controller within the same
cabinet/chassis as Lineside T1 cards.
With Clock Controller enabled, in both freerun or locked state, an
accurate clock will be provided to MGC.
• Use an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to bring
a clock source from other CS1000 cabinet/chassis that has a Central
Office Link.
With accurate clock source available, MGC will lock to the reference and
provide an backplane clock as accurate as the clock source.

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

The following sections elaborate on how to connect an MGC DECT Clock
Reference Cable.

Pre requisites
The pre requisites for connecting an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable
are the following:
• MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable --- NTDW67AAE5.
Figure 39 "MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable" (page 224) shows the
MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable. It is used to provide clock reference
between CS1000 Media Gateway Cabinet/chassis.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 224 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 39
MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

Step Action

1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of
the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 40 "MG1000 chassis" (page
224) shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis.
Figure 40
MG1000 chassis

2 In the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis,

connect to 15-pin DSUB connector on the back panel formerly
used for the 10Base-T AUI connection. Figure 41 "Option 11C
Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis" (page 225) shows
the 10Base-T AUI connection of the Option 11C Mini chassis or
Succession 1.0 MG chassis.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 225

Figure 41
Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis

3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5)

• Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0
• Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5)
to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 42
"Option 11C Cabinet" (page 225) shows the Option 11C Cabinet.
Figure 42
Option 11C Cabinet

—End—

Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software

Description
The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) supplies a maintenance interface to a
terminal that provides T1 link diagnostics and historical information. See
"Installation and configuration" (page 188) for instructions on how to install
the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 226 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to configure
and use the MMI firmware.
The MMI provides the following maintenance features:
• default and reconfigurable alarm parameters
• notification of T1 link problems by activating alarms
• Reports on current and historical T1 link performance
• T1 tests for T1 verification and fault isolation to Lineside T1 card, T1 link,
or CPE equipment

The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) supplies a maintenance interface to a

terminal that provides T1 link diagnostics and historical information. See
"Installation and configuration" (page 188) for instructions on how to install
the cabling and configure the terminal for the MMI.
This section describes the features of MMI and explains how to set-up,
configure and use the MMI firmware.
The MMI provides the following maintenance features:
• default and reconfigurable alarm parameters
• notification of T1 link problems by activating alarms
• Reports on current and historical T1 link performance
• T1 tests for T1 verification and fault isolation to Lineside T1 card, T1 link,
or CPE equipment

Alarms
MMI activates alarms for the following T1 link conditions:
• excessive bit error rate
• frame slip errors
• out of frame condition
• loss of signal condition
• blue alarm condition

The alarms are activated in response to pre-set thresholds and error

durations. Descriptions of each of these T1 link alarm conditions,
instructions on how to configure alarm parameters, and access alarm
reporting can be found in "Alarm operation and reporting" (page 243).
Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors. For
these conditions, two different threshold and duration configurations are
established.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 227

When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI does
the following:
• activates the external alarm hardware
• lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or
YELLOW ALARM)
• displays an alarm message on the MMI terminal
• creates entry in the alarm log

When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI
performs all of the same functions as alarm level 1, and in addition, forces
the Lineside T1 card to enter trunk processing mode. In this mode, the
terminal equipment sends either "on-hook" or "off-hook" signals for all 24
ports to the CS 1000M, and Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for
trunk processing was set (dip switch #2, position #6).
If the MMI detects T1 link failures for any of the remainder of the conditions
monitored (out of frame condition, loss of signal condition, and blue alarm
condition), the Lineside T1 card automatically performs all alarm level 2
functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the distant end CPE or
CSU.
Alarms can be configured to self-clear or not self-clear when the alarm
condition is no longer detected.
All alarms activated produce a record in an alarm log. The alarm log
maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms and can be displayed,
printed and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms listing
the most recent first in descending chronological order. The alarms are
stamped with the date and time they occurred.
MMI activates alarms for the following T1 link conditions:
• excessive bit error rate
• frame slip errors
• out of frame condition
• loss of signal condition
• blue alarm condition

The alarms are activated in response to pre-set thresholds and error

durations. Descriptions of each of these T1 link alarm conditions,
instructions on how to set alarm parameters, and access alarm reporting
can be found in "Alarm operation and reporting" (page 243).
Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors and frame slip errors.
For these conditions, two different threshold and duration settings are
established.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 228 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI does
the following:
• activates the external alarm hardware
• lights the appropriate LED on the faceplate (either RED ALARM or
YELLOW ALARM)
• displays an alarm message on the MMI terminal
• creates entry in the alarm log

When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI
performs all of the same functions as alarm level 1, and in addition, forces
the Lineside T1 card to enter trunk processing mode. In this mode, the
terminal equipment sends either "on-hook" or "off-hook" signals for all
24 ports to the Meridian 1, depending on how the dip switch for trunk
processing was set (dip switch #2, position #6).

If the MMI detects T1 link failures for any of the remainder of the conditions
monitored (out of frame condition, loss of signal condition, and blue alarm
condition), the Lineside T1 card automatically performs all alarm level 2
functions. The MMI also sends a yellow alarm to the distant end CPE or
CSU.

Alarms can be set up to self-clear or not self-clear when the alarm condition
is no longer detected.

All alarms activated produce a record in an alarm log. The alarm log
maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms and can be displayed,
printed and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms listing
the most recent first in descending chronological order. The alarms are
stamped with the date and time they occurred.

T1 performance counters and reports

The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following T1
conditions:
• errored seconds
• bursty seconds
• unavailable seconds
• framer slip seconds
• loss of frame seconds

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 229

It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each
hour for the previous 24 hours. Descriptions of each of these performance
error counters, and instructions on how to report on them and clear them
can be found in "Performance counters and reporting" (page 248).
The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following T1
conditions:
• errored seconds
• bursty seconds
• unavailable seconds
• framer slip seconds
• loss of frame seconds

It retains the T1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for each
hour for the previous 24 hours. Descriptions of each of these performance
error counters, and instructions on how to report on them and clear them
can be found in "Performance counters and reporting" (page 248).

T1 verification and fault isolation testing

The MMI performs various tests to verify that the T1 is working adequately,
or help to isolate a problem to the Lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE
equipment. Descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to run
them can be found in "Testing" (page 251).

The MMI performs various tests to verify that the T1 is working adequately,
or help to isolate a problem to the Lineside T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE
equipment. Descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to run
them can be found in "Testing" (page 251).

Login and password

The MMI can be accessed through a TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation
program, or a modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card cables,
the MMI firmware can be accessed.
For single card installations, log in by entering:
L<CR>

For multiple card installations connected in a daisy-chain, log in by entering:

L <address>

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 230 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as
set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as
opposed to the address set in the CS 1000 software), plus the two-digit
address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies. For example, to
login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type:
L 13 4 <CR>

A space is inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address,
and the card slot address.
The MMI then prompts for a password. The password is "LTILINK", and it
must be typed all in capital letters.
After logging in, the prompt looks like the following:
• LTI:::> for single-card installations
• LTI:ss cc> for multi-card installations, where ss represents the
two-digit address, and cc represents the two-digit card slot address

The MMI can be accessed through a TTY, a PC running a terminal emulation

program, or a modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card cables,
the MMI firmware can be accessed.
For single card installations, it is accessed by entering
L<CR>

to login.
For multiple card installations connected in a daisy-chain, it is accessed
by entering
L <address>

where the four-digit address is the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as
set by dip switch positions (dip switch #1, positions 3-6) on the card (as
opposed to the address set in the Meridian 1 software), plus the two-digit
address of the card slot that the motherboard occupies. For example, to
login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type:
L 13 4 <CR>

A space is inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address, and
the card slot address
The MMI then prompts for a password. The password is "LTILINK", and it
must be typed all in capital letters.
After logging in, the prompt looks like the following:
• LTI:::> for single-card installations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 231

• LTI:ss cc> for multi-card installations, where ss represents the

two-digit address, and cc represents the two-digit card slot address

Basic commands
MMI commands can now be executed. There are seven basic commands
that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are:
• Alarm
• Clear
• Display
• Set
• Test
• Help
• Quit

If ?<CR> is typed, the MMI lists the above commands along with an
explanation of their usage. A screen similar to the following appears. The
help screen also appears by typing H<CR>, or HELP<CR>.
ALARM USAGE: Alarm [Enable | Disable]
CLEAR USAGE: Clear [Alarm] | [Error counter] [Log]
DISPLAY USAGE: Display [Alarm | Status | Perform |
History] [Pause]
HELP USAGE: Help | ?
SET USAGE: Set [Time | Date | Alarm | Clearing |
Name | Memory]
TEST USAGE: Test [Carrier All]
QUIT USAGE: Quit

Notation Used:
CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - | - Either/
Optional Or

Each of these commands can be executed by typing the first letter of the
command or by typing the entire command. Command sets are entered
by typing the first letter of the first command, a space, and the first letter
of the second command or by typing the entire command. Table 103 "MMI
commands and command sets" (page 231) shows all the possible command
sets, listed in alphabetical order. These commands are described by subject
later in this section.

Table 103
MMI commands and command sets
Command Description
A D Alarm Disable
Disables all alarms.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 232 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Command Description
A E Alarm Enable
Enables all alarms.
C A Clear Alarm
Clears all alarms, terminates line processing, and resets the T1 bit error rate
and frame slip counters.
C A L Clear Alarm Log
Clears the alarm log.
C E Clear Error
Clears the error counter for the T1.
D A [P] Display Alarms [Pause]
Displays the alarm log – a list of the most recent 100 alarms along with time
and date stamps.
D C Display Configuration
Displays the configuration settings for the cards including:
• the serial number of the card
• MMI firmware version
• date and time
• alarm enable/disable setting
• self-clearing enable/disable setting
• settings entered in Set Configuration
• dip switch settings
D H [P] Display History [Pause]
Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours.
D P Display Performance
Displays performance counters for the current hour.
D S [P] Display Status [Pause]
Displays carrier status, including whether the card is in the alarm state, and
what alarm level is currently active.
H or ? Help
Displays the help screen.
L Login
Logs into the MMI terminal when the system has one Lineside T1 card.
Q Quit
Logs the terminal user out. If multiple Lineside T1 cards share a single terminal,
logout after using the MMI. Because of the shared daisy-chained link, if a
Lineside T1 card is logged in, it occupies the bus and no other Lineside T1
cards are able to notify the MMI of alarms.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 233

Command Description
S A Set Alarm parameters
Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and
alarm duration.
S C Set Clearing
Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable.
S D Set Date
Sets date or verifies current date.
S T Set time
Sets time or verifies current time.
T x Test
Initiates the T1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in process, enter the
STOP TEST (S) command at any time.

MMI commands can now be executed. There are seven basic commands
that can be combined together to form a total of 19 command sets. They are:
• Alarm
• Clear
• Display
• Set
• Test
• Help
• Quit

If ?<CR> is typed, the MMI lists the above commands along with an
explanation of their usage. A screen similar to the following appears. The
help screen also appears by typing H<CR>, or HELP<CR>.

ALARM USAGE: Alarm [Enable | Disable]

CLEAR USAGE: Clear [Alarm] | [Error counter] [Log]
DISPLA USAGE: Display [Alarm | Status | Perform | History] [Pause]
Y
HELP USAGE: Help | ?
SET USAGE: Set [Time | Date | Alarm | Clearing | Name | Memory]
TEST USAGE: Test [Carrier All]
QUIT USAGE: Quit

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 234 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Notation Used:
CAPS - Required Letters [ ] - Optional | - Either/Or

Each of these commands can be executed by typing the first letter of the
command or by typing the entire command. Command sets are entered
by typing the first letter of the first command, a space, and the first letter
of the second command or by typing the entire command. Table 104 "MMI
commands and command sets" (page 234) shows all the possible command
sets, listed in alphabetical order. These commands are described by subject
later in this section.

Table 104
MMI commands and command sets
Command Description
AD Alarm Disable
Disables all alarms
AE Alarm Enable
Enables all alarms
CA Clear Alarm
Clears all alarms, terminates line processing, and resets the T1 bit error rate and
frame slip counters
CAL Clear Alarm Log
Clears the alarm log
CE Clear Error
Clears the error counter for the T1
D A [P] Display Alarms [Pause]
Displays the alarm log – a list of the most recent 100 alarms along with time and
date stamps
DC Display Configuration
Displays the configuration settings for the cards including:
• the serial number of the card
• MMI firmware version
• date and time
• alarm enable/disable setting
• self-clearing enable/disable setting
• settings entered in Set Configuration
• dip switch settings
D H [P] Display History [Pause]
Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 235

Command Description
DP Display Performance
Displays performance counters for the current hour.
D S [P] Display Status [Pause]
Displays carrier status, including whether the card is in the alarm state, and what
alarm level is currently active.
H or ? Help
Displays the help screen
L Login
Logs into the MMI terminal when the system has one Lineside T1 card
Q Quit
Logs the terminal user out. If multiple Lineside T1 cards share a single terminal,
logout after using the MMI. Because of the shared daisy-chained link, if a Lineside
T1 card is logged in, it occupies the bus and no other Lineside T1 cards are able to
notify the MMI of alarms.
SA Set Alarm parameters
Alarm parameters include the allowable bit errors per second threshold and alarm
duration
SC Set Clearing
Sets the alarm self-clearing function to either enable or disable
SD Set Date
Sets date or verifies current date
ST Set time
Sets time or verifies current time
Tx Test
Initiates the T1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in process, enter the STOP
TEST (S) command at any time.

Configuring parameters
The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is
necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment.

Set Time
Before configuring the MMI, login to the system and enter the current time.
Do this by typing in the Set Time (S T) command set. The MMI then displays
the time it has registered. Enter a new time or press "Enter" to leave it
unchanged. The time is entered in the "hh:mm:ss" military time format.

Set Date
The current date must be set. Do this by typing in the Set Date (S D)
command set. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a
new date or press "Enter" to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in
the "mm/dd/yy" format.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 236 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Alarm parameters
The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the parameters by which an
alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alarm activation levels:
• Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below
the AL1 setting. This is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated.
• Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above
the AL1 setting but below AL2 setting. This is a minor unsatisfactory
condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated
by closing the normally open contact. The RED ALARM LED on the
faceplate lights and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and
the MMI terminal.
• Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above
the AL2 setting. This is an unsatisfactory condition. In this situation,
the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open
contact. The RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights, an alarm
message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal. The Lineside
T1 card enters line processing mode and a yellow alarm message is
sent to the CPE/CSU. The Line processing sends the CS 1000E, CS
1000M, and Meridian 1 either all "on-hook" or all "off-hook" signals
depending on the dip switch setting of the card.

When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to configure the
threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2.
The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second
that is necessary to activate the alarm. The T1 link processes at a rate of
approximately 1.5 mb/s. The threshold value can be set between 3 and 9
and can be different for each alarm level. Any other value entered causes
the software to display a "Parameter Invalid" message. The threshold
number entered represents the respective power of 10 as shown in Table
105 "T1 bit error rate threshold settings" (page 236).
Note: The error rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a
smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm.

Table 105
T1 bit error rate threshold settings
Alarm threshold
bit errors per second Threshold Allowable
in power of 10 to set alarm duration periods
10–3 1,500/second 1–21 seconds
10–4 150/second 1–218 seconds
10–5 15/second 1–2148 seconds
10–6 1.5/second 1–3600 seconds

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 237

Alarm threshold
bit errors per second Threshold Allowable
in power of 10 to set alarm duration periods
10–7 1.5/10 seconds 10–3600 seconds
10–8 1.5/100 seconds 100–3600 seconds
10–9 1.5/1000 seconds 1000–3600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 seconds
(1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm lasts. Low bit
error rates (10-7 through 10-9) are restricted to longer durations since it
takes more than one second to detect an alarm condition above 10-6.
Higher bit error rates are restricted to shorter durations because the MMI
error counter fills at 65,000 errors.
If the Set Clearing (S C) "Enable Self Clearing" option is set, the alarm
indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) clear automatically after the
duration period expires. Otherwise, the alarm continues until the command
set Clear Alarm (C A) is entered.
When an alarm is cleared, the following activity caused by the alarm is
cleared:
• the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open
is reopened)
• the LED light turns off
• an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time when the alarm
clears
• carrier fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only)

If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier fail line supervision

terminates when the alarm condition ceases, but the alarm contact and
faceplate LED remain active until the alarm is cleared.

Note: A heavy bit error rate can cause 150 bit errors to occur in less
than 100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be activated sooner.

An alarm is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the
respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period.
For example, if an AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10–6) and a duration
period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more than 150
bit errors occur in any 100 second period (1.5 seconds X 100 seconds
= 150/100 seconds). As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter
is reset to 0. If the next 100 seconds pass, and less than 150 bit errors
are detected, then the alarm clears after the duration period. However, if
more than 150 bit errors are detected in the next 100 seconds, the alarm

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 238 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

continues for the designated duration period. The alarm finally clears when
the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated duration period
either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm
(C A) command set is entered.

In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function configures parameters for
detecting frame slip errors, by establishing a threshold necessary to activate
an alarm. If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm is activated.
The frame slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time
period. The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours.

When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI scrolls through the
previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed
along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the
current value. Table 106 "Set alarm options" (page 238) outlines the options
available in the Set Alarm function.

Table 106
Set alarm options
Option Description
AL1 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 1 is
activated. Factory default is 10–6.
AL1 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 1 is
activated. Factory default is 10 seconds.
AL2 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2 is
activated. Factory default is 10-5.
AL2 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 2 is
activated. Factory default is 10 seconds.
Frame Slip Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm level
Threshold 2 is activated. Factory default is 5.
Frame Slip Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted. After
Duration this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period is set too long, the Lineside T1 card can be
slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer
experiencing any errors. The Clear Alarm command must be entered
manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, the duration period
should normally be set to 10 seconds.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 239

Set Clearing
Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disable alarm
self-clearing. Answer Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clearing? (YES
or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the factory default condition),
the system automatically clears alarms after the alarm condition is no longer
detected for the corresponding duration period.

The "Disable Self-Clearing" option causes the system to continue the

alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line
processing and the yellow alarm indication to the CPE is terminated as soon
as the alarm condition clears, even if "Disable Self-Clearing" is set.

Display Configuration
The Display Configuration (D C) command set displays the various
configuration settings established for the Lineside T1 card. Entering the
Display Configuration (D C) command set causes a screen similar to the
following to appear:
LTI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50
Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES
Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration
(in seconds): 10
Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration
(in seconds): 1
Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration
(in hours): 2
Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off
Off Off On
Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..S8) On Off On Off Off
Off On Off

The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is
necessary. However, it can be configured to suit a specific environment.

Set Time
Before configuring the MMI, login to the system and enter the current time.
Do this by typing in the Set Time (S T) command set. The MMI then displays
the time it has registered. Enter a new time or press "Enter" to leave it
unchanged. The time is entered in the "hh:mm:ss" military time format.

Set Date
The current date must be set. Do this by typing in the Set Date (S D)
command set. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a
new date or press "Enter" to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in
the "mm/dd/yy" format.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 240 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Alarm parameters
The Set Alarm (S A) command set establishes the parameters by which an
alarm is activated, and its duration. There are three alarm activation levels:
• Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below
the AL1 setting. This is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated.
• Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above
the AL1 setting but below AL2 setting. This is a minor unsatisfactory
condition. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated
by closing the normally open contact. The RED ALARM LED on the
faceplate lights and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and
the MMI terminal.
• Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above
the AL2 setting. This is an unsatisfactory condition. In this situation,
the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally open
contact. The RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights and an alarm
message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal. The Lineside
T1 card enters line processing mode and a yellow alarm message is
sent to the CPE/CSU. Line processing sends the Meridian 1 either all
"on-hook" or all "off-hook" signals depending on the dip switch setting
of the card.

When the Set Alarm command is used, a prompt appears to set the
threshold level and duration period for alarm levels 1 and 2.
The threshold value indicates the number of bit errors detected per second
that is necessary to activate the alarm. The T1 link processes at a rate of
approximately 1.5 mb/s. The threshold value can be set between 3 and 9
and can be different for each alarm level. Any other value entered causes
the software to display a "Parameter Invalid" message. The threshold
number entered represents the respective power of 10 as shown in Table
107 "T1 bit error rate threshold settings" (page 240).
Note: The error rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a
smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm.

Table 107
T1 bit error rate threshold settings
Alarm Threshold
bit errors per second Threshold Allowable
in Power of 10 to set alarm Duration Periods
10–3 1,500/second 1–21 seconds
10–4 150/second 1–218 seconds
10–5 15/second 1–2148 seconds
10–6 1.5/second 1–3600 seconds

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 241

Alarm Threshold
bit errors per second Threshold Allowable
in Power of 10 to set alarm Duration Periods
10–7 1.5/10 seconds 10–3600 seconds
10–8 1.5/100 seconds 100–3600 seconds
10–9 1.5/1000 seconds 1000–3600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3600 seconds
(1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm lasts. Low bit
error rates (10-7 through 10-9) are restricted to longer durations since it
takes more than one second to detect an alarm condition above 10-6.
Higher bit error rates are restricted to shorter durations because the MMI
error counter fills at 65,000 errors.
If the Set Clearing (S C) "Enable Self Clearing" option is set, the alarm
indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) clear automatically after the
duration period expires. Otherwise, the alarm continues until the command
set Clear Alarm (C A) is entered.
When an alarm is cleared, the following activity caused by the alarm is
cleared:
• the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open
is reopened)
• the LED light turns off
• an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time when the alarm is
cleared
• carrier fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only)

If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier fail line supervision

terminates when the alarm condition is ceased, but the alarm contact and
faceplate LED remains active until the alarm is cleared.

Note: A heavy bit error rate can cause 150 bit errors to occur in less
than 100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be activated sooner.

An alarm is not automatically cleared until the system no longer detects the
respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration period.
For example, if an AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10–6) and a duration
period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more than 150
bit errors occur in any 100 second period (1.5 seconds X 100 seconds
= 150/100 seconds). As soon as the alarm is activated, the bit counter
is reset to 0. If the next 100 seconds pass, and less than 150 bit errors
are detected, then the alarm clears after the duration period. However, if
more than 150 bit errors are detected in the next 100 seconds, the alarm

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 242 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

continues for the designated duration period. The alarm finally clears when
the alarm condition is no longer detected for the designated duration period
either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or when the Clear Alarm
(C A) command set is entered.

In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function sets parameters for detecting
frame slip errors, by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm.
If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm is activated. The frame
slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time period.
The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours.

When entering the Set Alarm command set, the MMI scrolls through the
previously described series of alarm options. These options are displayed
along with their current value. Enter a new value or press Enter to retain the
current value. Table 108 "Set alarm options" (page 242) outlines the options
available in the Set Alarm function.

Table 108
Set alarm options
Option Description
AL1 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 1
is activated. Factory default is 10–6.
AL1 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 1 is
activated. Factory default is 10 seconds.
AL2 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before alarm level 2
is activated. Factory default is 10-5
AL2 Duration .Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that alarm level 2 is
activated. Factory default is 10 seconds
Frame Slip Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255) before alarm
Threshold level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5.
Frame Slip Duration Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips are counted.
After this time period, the counter is reset to 0. Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period is set too long, the Lineside T1 card can be
slow to return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer
experiencing any errors. The Clear Alarm command must be entered
manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, the duration period
should normally be set to 10 seconds.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 243

Set Clearing
Use the Set Clearing (S C) command set to enable or disable alarm
self-clearing. Answer Y or N to the question: "Enable Self Clearing? (YES
or NO)". If "Enable Self-Clearing" is chosen (the factory default condition),
the system automatically clears alarms after the alarm condition is no longer
detected for the corresponding duration period.

The "Disable Self-Clearing" option causes the system to continue the

alarm condition until the Clear Alarm (C A) command set is entered. Line
processing and the yellow alarm indication to the CPE is terminated as soon
as the alarm condition clears, even if "Disable Self-Clearing" is set.

Display Configuration
The Display Configuration (D C) command set displays the various
configuration settings established for the Lineside T1 card. Entering the
Display Configuration (D C) command set causes a screen similar to the
following to appear:

LTI S/N 1103 Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50

Alarms Enabled: YES Self Clearing Enabled: YES

Alarm Level 1 threshold value: E-7 Threshold duration (in seconds): 10

Alarm Level 2 threshold value: E-5 Threshold duration (in seconds): 1

Frame slips alarm level threshold: 5 Threshold duration (in hours): 2

Current dip switch S1 settings (S1..S8) On Off Off On Off Off Off On

Current dip switch S2 settings (S1..S8) On Off On Off Off Off On Off

Alarm operation and reporting

The MMI monitors the T1 link according to the parameters established
through the Set Alarm command set for the following conditions:
• Excessive bit error rate
• Frame slip errors
• Out of frame condition
• Loss of signal condition
• Blue alarm (AIS) condition

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 244 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions
can be found in "Configuring parameters" (page 235). Bit errors may
activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when
detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm.

An out of frame condition is declared if two out of four frame bits are in error.
If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe.
During the reframe time, the T1 link is declared out of frame, and silence is
sent on all receive timeslots.

A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (192 bits) of consecutive

zeros has been detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the
T1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the distant end. If this
condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared and
silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two
seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm
condition occurs.

If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an

unframed all 1’s signal to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This
condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an
AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and
silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two
seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm
condition occurs.

Alarm Disable
The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts.
When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message "Alarms
Disabled" and the MAINT LED turns on. In this mode, no yellow alarms are
sent and the Lineside T1 card does not enter line processing mode. Alarm
messages are still sent to the MMI terminal and the LED light continues
to indicate alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable
The Alarm Enable (A E) command set does the opposite of the Alarm
Disable command set. It enables the external alarm contacts. When this
command set is typed in, the MMI displays the message "Alarms Enabled."
In this mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the Lineside T1 card can enter
line processing mode.

Clear Alarm
The Clear Alarm (C A) command set clears all activity initiated by an alarm:
the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is
reopened), the LED light goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of
the date and time when the alarm clears, and line processing ceases (for

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 245

alarm level 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the MMI displays
the message "Alarm acknowledged." If the alarm condition still exists, the
alarm is declared again.

Display Alarms
A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps
can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set into
the MMI. Entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set causes a screen
similar to the following to appear:
Alarm Log
3/03/95 1:48 Yellow alarm on T1 carrier
3/03/95 1:50 Initialized Memory
3/03/95 2:33 T1 carrier level 1 alarm
3/03/95 3:47 T1 carrier level 2 alarm
3/03/95 4:43 T1 carrier performance within thresholds
3/03/95 15:01 Log Cleared

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time by

entering D A P.

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing in the Clear Alarm Log (C A
L) command set.

Display Status
The Display Status (D S) command set displays the current alarm condition
of the T1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 24
ports of the Lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command
set causes a screen similar to the following to appear:
LTI S/N Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50
In alarm state: NO
T1 link at alarm level 0
Port 0 off hook, Port 1 on hook, Port 2 on hook,
Port 3 on hook,
Port 4 on hook, Port 5 on hook, Port 6 off hook,
Port 7 off hook,
Port 8 off hook, Port 9 on hook, Port 10 on hook,
Port 11 on hook,
Port 12 off hook, Port 13 on hook, Port 14 on hook,
Port 15 on hook,
Port 16 on hook, Port 17 on hook, Port 18 off hook,
Port 19 off hook,
Port 20 off hook, Port 21 on hook, Port 22 on hook,
Port 23 on hook

The MMI monitors the T1 link according to the parameters established

through the Set Alarm command set for the following conditions:
• Excessive bit error rate

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 246 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

• Frame slip errors

• Out of frame condition
• Loss of signal condition
• Blue alarm (AIS) condition

Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions
can be found in "Configuring parameters" (page 235). Bit errors may
activate either a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when
detected, always cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm.

An out of frame condition is declared if two out of four frame bits are in error.
If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe.
During the reframe time, the T1 link is declared out of frame and silence is
sent on all receive timeslots.

A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (192 bits) of consecutive

zeros has been detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the
T1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the distant end. If this
condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared and
silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two
seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm
condition occurs.

If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an

unframed all 1’s signal to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition. This
condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If an
AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and
silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two
seconds, neither a loss of signal, out of frame condition, nor blue alarm
condition occurs.

Alarm Disable
The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm contacts.
When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message "Alarms
Disabled" and the MAINT LED turns on. In this mode, no yellow alarms are
sent and the Lineside T1 card does not enter line processing mode. Alarm
messages are still sent to the MMI terminal and the LED light continues
to indicate alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable
The Alarm Enable (A E) command set does the opposite of the Alarm
Disable command set. It enables the external alarm contacts. When this
command set is typed in, the MMI displays the message "Alarms Enabled."
In this mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the Lineside T1 card can enter
line processing mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 247

Clear Alarm
The Clear Alarm (C A) command set clears all activity initiated by an alarm:
the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open is
reopened), the LED light goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log of the
date and time when the alarm is cleared, and line processing ceases (for
alarm level 2 only). When this command set is typed in, the MMIl displays
the message "Alarm acknowledged." If the alarm condition still exists, the
alarm is declared again.

Display Alarms
A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps
can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set into
the MMI. Entering the Display Alarms (D A) command set causes a screen
similar to the following to appear:
Alarm Log
3/03/95 1:48 Yellow alarm on T1 carrier
3/03/95 1:50 Initialized Memory
3/03/95 2:33 T1 carrier level 1 alarm
3/03/95 3:47 T1 carrier level 2 alarm
3/03/95 4:43 T1 carrier performance within thresholds
3/03/95 15:01 Log Cleared

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time by

entering D A P.

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing in the Clear Alarm Log (C A
L) command set.

Display Status
The Display Status (D S) command set displays the current alarm condition
of the T1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of the 24
ports of the Lineside T1 card. Entering the Display Status (D S) command
set causes a screen similar to the following to appear:
LTI S/N Software Version 1.01 3/03/95 1:50
In alarm state: NO
T1 link at alarm level 0
Port 0 off hook, Port 1 on hook, Port 2 on hook, Port 3 on
hook,
Port 4 on hook, Port 5 on hook, Port 6 off hook, Port 7 off
hook,
Port 8 off hook, Port 9 on hook, Port 10 on hook, Port 11 on
hook,
Port 12 off hook, Port 13 on hook, Port 14 on hook, Port 15
on hook,
Port 16 on hook, Port 17 on hook, Port 18 off hook, Port 19
off hook,

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 248 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Port 20 off hook, Port 21 on hook, Port 22 on hook, Port 23

on hook

Performance counters and reporting

The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link according to several
performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss of frame
and frame slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by
reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts
are accumulated for an hour, and then they are reset to 0. Previous hour
count results are maintained for each hour for the previous 24 hours.
Performance counts are maintained for the following:
• Errored seconds – one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of
frame errors in a second.
• Bursty seconds – more than one and less than 320 CRC-6 errors in a
second.
• Unavailable seconds – unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive
severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive severely errored
seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds). Severely
errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or
more out of frames in a second.
• Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three
consecutive seconds.
• Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame slips in a second.

The MMI also maintains an overall error counter that is a sum of all the
errors counted for the five performance criteria listed above. The error
counter can only be cleared by entering the "Clear Error" command. It
stops counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method to
determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Simply clear the error
counter, wait a few minutes, and display performance to see if any errors
occurred since the counter was cleared.

Display the reports on these performance counters by entering the Display

Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) command sets into the MMI.

Display Performance
Enter the Display Performance (D P) command set to display performance
counters for the past hour. A screen similar to the following appears:
LTI T1 Interface Performance Log
3/03/95 1:37
Data for the past 37 Minutes
Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss Frame Error
ble Frame Slip

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 249

Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds

Seconds Counter
2263 0 2263 2263 352 321

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in
the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. When these
counters are reset to zero, the performance counter values are put into the
history log. The error counter indicates the number of errors that occurred
since the error counter was cleared.

Display History
Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance
counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the
following appears:
LTI T1 Interface History Performance Log
3/03/95 1:35
Hour Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss
Frame Error
Frame Slip
Ending Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds
Seconds Counter
20:00 139 0 129 139
23 162
19.00 0 0 0 0 0 0
18.00 0 0 0 0 0 0
17.00 0 0 0 0 0 0
16.00 0 0 0 0 0 0

Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P.

Clear Error
Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command
set. The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the T1
link is performing without errors since it can be cleared and examined at
any time.
The MMI monitors the performance of the T1 link according to several
performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss of frame
and frame slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by
reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts
are accumulated for an hour, and then they are reset to 0. Previous hour
count results are maintained for each hour for the previous 24 hours.
Performance counts are maintained for the following:
• Errored seconds – one or more CRC-6 errors, or one or more out of
frame errors in a second
• Bursty seconds – more than one and less than 320 CRC-6 errors in a
second

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 250 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

• Unavailable seconds – unavailable state starts with 10 consecutive

severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive severely errored
seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely errored seconds). Severely
errored seconds are defined as more than 320 CRC-6 errors, or one or
more out of frames in a second.
• Loss of frame seconds – loss of frame or loss of signal for three
consecutive seconds
• Framer slip seconds – one ore more frame slips in a second

The MMI also maintains an overall error counter that is a sum of all the
errors counted for the five performance criteria listed above. The error
counter can only be cleared by entering the "Clear Error" command. It
stops counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method to
determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Simply clear the error
counter, wait a few minutes, and display performance to see if any errors
occurred since the counter was cleared.

Display the reports on these performance counters by entering the Display

Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H) command sets into the MMI.

Display Performance
Enter the Display Performance (D P) command set to display performance
counters for the past hour. A screen similar to the following appears:
LTI T1 Interface Performance Log
3/03/95 1:37
Data for the past 37 Minutes
Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss Frame
Frame Slip Error
Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds
Seconds Counter
2263 0 2263 2263
352 321

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in
the current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. When these
counters are reset to zero, the performance counter values are put into the
history log. The error counter indicates the number of errors that occurred
since the error counter was cleared.

Display History
Enter the Display History (D H) command set to display performance
counters for each hour for the past 24 hours. A screen similar to the
following appears:
LTI T1 Interface History Performance Log
3/03/95 1:35
Hour Errored Bursty Unavailable Loss Frame
Frame Slip Error

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 251

Ending Seconds Seconds Seconds Seconds

Seconds Counter
20:00 139 0 129 139
23 162
19.00 0 0 0 0
0 0
18.00 0 0 0 0
0 0
17.00 0 0 0 0
0 0
16.00 0 0 0 0
0 0

Use the pause command to display a full screen at a time by entering D H P.

Clear Error
Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command
set. The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the T1
link is performing without errors since it can be cleared and examined at
any time.

Testing
The Test Carrier (T C) command set enables tests to be run on the Lineside
T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE device. These three tests provide the
capability to isolate faulty conditions in any one of these three sources.
See Table 109 "MMI Tests" (page 252) for additional information on these
three test types.

After entering the T C command set, select which test to start. The prompt
appears, similar to the following:
Test 1: Local Loopback Test
Test 2: External Loopback Test
Test 3: Network Loopback Test
(1,2,3 or S to cancel):

Tests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously

(selected by entering 99 minutes) until a "Stop Test" command is entered.
Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and
terminate at the end of the time period or when a "Stop Test" command is
issued. Only a "Stop Test" command stops a test with a duration selection
of 99. After entering the test number selection, a prompt similar to the
following appears:
Enter Duration of Test (1-98 Mins, 0 = Once, 99 = Forever)
Verify DS-30A Links are disabled.
Hit Q to quit or any Key to Continue

Before a test is run, verify that DS-30A links are disabled because the tests
interfere with calls currently in process.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 252 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

During a test, if an invalid word is received, a failure peg counter is

incremented. The peg counter saturates at 65,000 counts. At the end of the
test, the Test Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred
during the test.

Table 109 "MMI Tests" (page 252) shows which test to run for the associated
equipment.

Table 109
MMI Tests
Test number Equipment tested Test description
1 Lineside T1 card Local loopback
2 T1 link, Lineside T1 card External loopback
and T1 network
3 CPE device and T1 Network loopback
network

Test 1, local loopback, loops the T1 link signaling toward itself at the
backplane connector, and test data is generated and received on all
timeslots. If this test fails, it indicates that the Lineside T1 card is defective.
Figure 43 "MMI local loopback test" (page 252) demonstrates how the
signaling is looped back toward itself.

Figure 43
MMI local loopback test

Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the

T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the Lineside T1 card on all
timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the T1 link is
defective between the Lineside T1 card and the external loopback location.
If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the T1 link or the Lineside T1 card could
be defective. To isolate the failure to the T1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in
tandem. Figure 44 "MMI external loopback test" (page 253) demonstrates
how an external loopback is applied to the T1 link.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 253

Figure 44
MMI external loopback test

Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE
equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If
test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If
test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be
defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run
in tandem. Figure 45 "MMI network loopback test" (page 253) demonstrates
how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE equipment.

Figure 45
MMI network loopback test

The Test Carrier (T C) command set enables tests to be run on the Lineside
T1 card, the T1 link, or the CPE device. These three tests provide the
capability to isolate faulty conditions in any one of these three sources.
See Table 110 "MMI Tests" (page 254) for additional information on these
three test types.

After entering the T C command set, select which test to start. The prompt
appears, similar to the following:
Test 1: Local Loopback Test
Test 2: External Loopback Test
Test 3: Network Loopback Test
(1,2,3 or S to cancel):

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 254 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Tests can be performed once (for 1 through 98 minutes), or continuously

(selected by entering 99 minutes) until a "Stop Test" command is entered.
Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and
terminate at the end of the time period or when a "Stop Test" command is
issued. Only a "Stop Test" command stops a test with a duration selection
of 99. After entering the test number selection, a prompt similar to the
following appears:
Enter Duration of Test (1-98 Mins, 0 = Once, 99 = Forever)
Verify DS-30A Links are disabled.
Hit Q to quit or any Key to Continue

Before a test is run, verify that DS-30A links are disabled because the tests
interfere with calls currently in process.

During a test, if an invalid word is received, a failure peg counter is

incremented. The peg counter saturates at 65,000 counts. At the end of the
test, the Test Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred
during the test.

Table 110 "MMI Tests" (page 254) shows which test to run for the associated
equipment.

Table 110
MMI Tests
Test Number Equipment Tested Test Description
1 Lineside T1 card Local loopback
2 T1 link, Lineside T1 card External loopback
and T1 network
3 CPE device and T1 Network loopback
network

Test 1, local loopback, loops the T1 link signaling toward itself at the
backplane connector, and test data is generated and received on all
timeslots. If this test fails, it indicates that the Lineside T1 card is defective.
Figure 46 "MMI Local loopback test" (page 255) demonstrates how the
signaling is looped back toward itself.

Test 2, external loopback, assumes an external loopback is applied to the

T1 link. Test data is generated and received by the Lineside T1 card on all
timeslots. If test 1 passes but test 2 fails, it indicates that the T1 link is
defective between the Lineside T1 card and the external loopback location.
If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the T1 link or the Lineside T1 card could
be defective. To isolate the failure to the T1 link, tests 1 and 2 must be run in
tandem. Figure 47 "MMI External loopback test" (page 255) demonstrates
how an external loopback is applied to the T1 link.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine T1 maintenance interface software 255

Figure 46
MMI Local loopback test

Figure 47
MMI External loopback test

Test 3, network loopback, loops the received T1 data back toward the CPE
equipment. No test data is generated or received by the Lineside T1 card. If
test 2 passes but test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If
test 2 was not run and test 3 fails, the T1 link or the CPE device could be
defective. To isolate the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run
in tandem. Figure 48 "MMI Network loopback test" (page 255) demonstrates
how the signaling is looped back toward the CPE equipment.

Figure 48
MMI Network loopback test

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 256 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Applications
The Lineside T1 interface is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective
connection between T1-compatible IPE and a system or off-premise
extensions over long distances.
Some examples of applications where a Lineside T1 card can be interfaced
to a T1 link are:
• T1-compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU) equipment
• T1-compatible turret systems
• T1-compatible wireless systems
• Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through T1 to a channel
bank
• Remote Norstar sites behind CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1
over T1

The Lineside T1 card is appropriate for any application where both

T1 connectivity and "lineside" functionality is required. This includes
connections to T1-compatible voice response units, voice messaging and
trading turret (used in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 49
"Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE" (page 257).
For example, the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the system to a
T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel Open
IVR system. In this way, the system can send a call to the VRU. Because
the Lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type) telephones, the VRU
is able to send the call back to the system for further handling.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 257

Figure 49
Lineside T1 interface connection to IPE

The Lineside T1 card can also be used to provide off-premise extensions

to remote locations (up to 500 miles from the system). In this application,
the analog telephone functionality is extended over T1 facilities, providing a
telephone at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone
lines. See Figure 50 "Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application" (page
258). An audible message-waiting indicator can be provided as well.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 258 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 50
Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application

Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the

system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 51 "Lineside T1 interface
connection to Norstar system" (page 259). In this case, channel banks
would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1 interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 259

Figure 51
Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system

The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when determining the
appropriateness of an application.The Lineside T1 interface is an Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment (IPE) line card that provides cost-effective connection
between T1-compatible peripheral equipment and a Meridian 1 system or
off-premise extensions over long distances.
Some examples of applications where a Lineside T1 card can be interfaced
to a T1 link are:
• T1-compatible Voice Response Unit (VRU) equipment
• T1-compatible turret systems
• T1-compatible wireless systems
• Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through T1 to a channel
bank
• Remote Norstar sites behind Meridian 1 over T1

The Lineside T1 card is appropriate for any application where both

T1 connectivity and "lineside" functionality is required. This includes
connections to T1-compatible voice response units, voice messaging and
trading turret (used in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 52
"Lineside T1 interface connection to peripheral equipment" (page 260).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 260 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 52
Lineside T1 interface connection to peripheral equipment

For example, the Lineside T1 card can be used to connect the Meridian 1
to a T1-compatible VRU. An example of this type of equipment is Nortel
Networks Open IVR system. In this way, the Meridian 1 can send a call to
the VRU. Because the Lineside T1 card supports analog (500/2500-type)
telephones, the VRU is able to send the call back to the Meridian 1 for
further handling.

The Lineside T1 card can also be used to provide off-premise extensions

to remote locations (up to 500 miles from the Meridian 1 system). In
this application, the analog telephone functionality is extended over T1
facilities, providing a telephone at a remote site with access to analog
(500/2500-type) telephone lines. See Figure 53 "Lineside T1 interface in
off-premise application" (page 261). An audible message-waiting indicator
can be provided as well.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 261

Figure 53
Lineside T1 interface in off-premise application

Similarly, the Lineside T1 can be used to provide a connection between the

Meridian 1 system and a remote Norstar system. See Figure 54 "Lineside
T1 interface connection to Norstar system" (page 262). In this case, channel
banks would not be required if the Norstar system is equipped with a T1
interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 262 NT5D11 and NT5D14 Lineside T1 Interface cards

Figure 54
Lineside T1 interface connection to Norstar system

Note: The Lineside T1 card audio levels must be considered when

determining the appropriateness of an application.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 263

NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1

Interface cards
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 263)

"Physical description" (page 264)

"Functional description" (page 268)

"Electrical specifications" (page 272)

"Installation and Configuration" (page 274)

"Installation" (page 280)

"Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page 292)

"Applications" (page 314)

Introduction
Two vintages of NT5D33 and NT5D34 cards are supported:
• NT5D33AB/NT5D34AB – standard Lineside E1 Interface (LEI) cards
The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides an all-digital connection
between E1–compatible terminal equipment (such as a voice mail
system) and CS 1000E, CS 1000M, or Meridian 1.
The LEI interfaces one E1 line, carrying 30 channels, to the CS 1000E,
CS 1000M, or Meridian 1, and emulates an analog line card to the
system software. Each channel is independently configured by software
control in the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program
LD 10. The LEI also comes equipped with a Man-Machine Interface
(MMI) maintenance program, which provides diagnostic information
regarding the status of the E1 link.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 264 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

• NT5D33AC/NT5D34AC – Enhanced Lineside E1 Interface (ELEI) cards

The ELEI card is similar to an LEI card, but has been enhanced to allow
the capability of transporting caller information using the proprietary
signaling interface Channel Associated Signaling (CAS+).
ELEI cards can operate in one of two modes: LEI mode, or enhanced
(ELEI) mode. In LEI mode, this card is fully compatible with, and
provides the same functionality as, the standard LEI card. In ELEI
mode, this card can be connected to any CAS+ compliant systems. This
includes wireless server hosting Digital Enhanced Cordless Telephones
(DECTs), voice response units, voice messaging systems, and trading
turret systems (used in stock market applications). More information
regarding CAS+ can be obtained through Nortel Development Partner
program.
Note: As the ELEI cards provide identical functionality to LEI cards,
references to LEI cards in this chapter also apply to ELEI cards
unless specified otherwise.

Install the NT5D33 version of the LEI/ELEI card in the NT8D37 IPE module.
Install the NT5D34 version of the LEI/ELEI card in:
• the NTAK11 Cabinet
• the NTAK12 Expansion Cabinet
• the NT1P70 Small Remote IPE Main Cabinet
• the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet

Physical description
The LEI mounts in two consecutive card slots in the IPE shelf. It uses 16
channels on the first slot and 14 channels on the second. The LEI includes
a motherboard (31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in) and a daughterboard
(5.08 by 15.24 cm (2 by 6 in).

Card connections
The LEI uses the NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable to connect from the IPE
backplane to the 25-pair Amphenol connector on the IPE Input/Output (I/O)
panel. The I/O panel connector connects to a E1 line, external alarm and
an MMI terminal or modem, using the NT5D35 or NT5D36 lineside I/O
cable available from Nortel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 265

Faceplate
The LEI faceplate is twice as wide as the other standard analog and digital
line cards. It occupies two card slots. The LE1 faceplate has four LEDs.
SeeFigure 43 "MMI local loopback test" (page 252) Figure 55 "NT5D33AB
LEI card - faceplate" (page 265) (IPE version), and Figure 56 "NT5D34AB
LEI card - faceplate" (page 266) (Cabinet system).
Figure 55
NT5D33AB LEI card - faceplate

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 266 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 56
NT5D34AB LEI card - faceplate

The LEDs give status indications on the operations as described in Table

111 "LEI card LED operation" (page 267).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 267

Table 111
LEI card LED operation
LED Operation
Status Line card
Red alarm E1 near end
Yellow alarm E1 far end
Maint Maintenance

The STATUS LED indicates if the LEI has successfully passed its self test,
and therefore, if it is functional. When the card is installed, this LED remains
lit for two to five seconds as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes
successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card
is configured and enabled in software, the LED goes out. If the LED
continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.
The STATUS LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of both card slots of
the LEI simultaneously. To properly enable the card, both the motherboard
and the daughterboard slots must be enabled. The STATUS LED turns
off as soon as either one of the LEI slots are enabled. No LED operation
is observed when the second card slot is enabled. To properly disable the
card, both card slots must be disabled. The LED does not turn on until
both card slots are disabled.
The RED ALARM LED indicates if the LEI has detected an alarm condition
from the E1 link. Alarm conditions can include such conditions as not
receiving a signal, the signal has exceeded bit error thresholds or frame slip
thresholds. See "Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page
292) for information on E1 link maintenance.
If one of these alarm conditions is detected, this LED turns on. Yellow alarm
indication is sent to the far end as long as the near end remains in a red
alarm condition. Depending on how the Man Machine Interface (MMI) is
configured, this LED remains lit until one of the following actions occur:
• If the "Self-Clearing" function is enabled in the MMI, the LED clears
the alarm when the alarm condition is no longer detected. This is the
factory default configuration.
• If the "Self-Clearing" function has not been enabled or it has been
subsequently disabled in the MMI, the LED alarm indication stays lit
until the command "Clear Alarm" is typed in the MMI, even though the
carrier automatically returned to service when the alarm condition was
no longer detected.

The YELLOW ALARM LED indicates that the LEI has detected a
yellow alarm signal from the terminal equipment side of the E1 link.
See "Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page 292) for

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 268 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

information on E1 link maintenance. If the terminal equipment detects a

red alarm condition such as not receiving a signal, or the signal exceeds
bit-error thresholds or frame-slip thresholds, a yellow alarm signal is sent to
the LEI, if the terminal equipment supports this feature. If a yellow alarm
signal is detected, the LED turns on.

The MAINT LED indicates if LEI is fully operational because of

certain maintenance commands that are issued through the MMI. See
"Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page 292) for
information on E1 link maintenance. If the card detects that tests are being
run or that alarms are disabled through the MMI, the LED lights and remains
lit until these conditions are no longer detected, then it turns off.

Functional description
Figure 57 "LEI card - block diagram" (page 268) shows a block diagram of
the major functions contained on the LEI card. Each of these functions is
described on the following pages.

Figure 57
LEI card - block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 269

Overview
The LEI card is an IPE line card that provides a cost-effective, all-digital
connection between E1-compatible terminal equipment (such as voice mail
systems, voice response units, trading turrets, etc.) and the system. In
this application, the terminal equipment can be assured access to analog
(500/2500-type) telephone line functionality such as hook flash, SPRE
codes and ringback tones. The LEI supports line supervision features such
as loop and ground start protocols. It can also be used in an off-premise
arrangement where analog (500/2500-type) telephones are extended over
twisted-pair or coaxial E1 with the use of channel bank equipment.

The LEI offers significant improvement over the previous alternatives. For
example, if a digital "trunk-side" connection were used, such as with the
DTI/PRI interface card, "lineside" functionality would not be supported.
Previously, the only way to achieve lineside functionality was to use analog
ports and channel bank equipment. With the LEI, a direct connection is
provided to the IPE. No channel bank equipment is required, resulting in a
more robust and reliable connection.

When used for connecting to third-party applications equipment, the LEI

offers a number of benefits. It is a more cost-effective alternative for
connection because it eliminates the need for expensive channel bank
equipment. The LEI card supports powerful E1 monitoring, and diagnostic
capability. Overall costs for customer applications may also be reduced
because the E1-compatible IPE is often more attractively priced than the
analog-port alternatives.

The LEI is compatible with all IPE-based systems and with standard
public or private CEPT-type carrier facilities. It supports CRC-4- or FAS
only framing formats as well as AMI or HDB3 coding. Because it uses
standard PCM in standard E1 timeslots, existing E1 test equipment remains
compatible for diagnostic and fault isolation purposes. A/B Bit signaling
may be customized according to the user’s system, including the Australian
P2 signaling scheme.

Card interfaces
The LEI passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X loops through the
DS-30X Interface circuits and maintenance data over the card LAN link.

E1 interface circuit
The LEI contains one E1 line-interface circuit which provides 30 individually
configurable voice interfaces to one E1 link in 30 different time slots. The
circuit demultiplexes the 2.56 Mbps DS-30X transmit signaling bitstreams
from the DS-30X network loop and converts it into 2.048 mHz E1 transmit

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 270 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

signaling bitstreams onto the E1 link. It also does the opposite, receiving
receive signaling bitstreams from the E1 link and transmitting receive
signaling bitstreams onto the DS-30X network loop.
The E1 interface circuit provides the following:
• An industry standard CEPT (0 to 655 feet) interface
• DS-30X signaling protocol into FXO A- and B-channel-associated
signaling protocol
• Switch-selectable transmission and reception of E1 signaling messages
over an E1 link in either loop or ground start mode
• Switch-selectable call processing between the Australian P2, North
American Standard, or other user-configurable schemes

Signaling and control

The LEI also contains signaling and control circuits that establish, supervise,
and take down call connections. These circuits work with the system
controller to operate the E1 line interface circuit during calls. The circuits
receive outgoing call signaling messages from the controller and return
incoming call status information to the controller over the DS-30X network
loop.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a card LAN link on
the LEI. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card if the
microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontrollers
The LEI contains a microcontroller that controls the internal operation of the
card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The microcontroller
controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link
— card identification (card type, vintage, serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test results
— programmed unit parameter status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration

— control of the E1 line interface
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
channel operation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 271

— maintenance diagnostics

• interface with the line card circuit

— converts on/off-hook, and ringer control messages from the DS-30X
loop into A/B bit manipulations for each time slot in the E1 data
stream, using channel associated signaling.

• the front panel LED when the card is enabled or disabled by instructions
from the NT8D01 controller card.

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the Common Equipment CPU over a
dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card
LAN link is described in "Card LAN link" (page 25).

Sanity Timer
The LEI also contains a sanity timer that resets the microcontroller in the
event of a loss of program control. If the timer is not properly serviced
by the microcontroller, it times out and causes the microcontroller to be
hardware-reset. If the microcontroller loses control and fails to service the
sanity timer at least once per second, the sanity timer automatically resets
the microcontroller restoring program control.

Man-Machine Interface
The LEI provides an optional Man-Machine Interface (MMI) that is primarily
used for E1 link performance monitoring and problem diagnosis. The MMI
provides alarm notification, E1 link performance reporting, and fault isolation
testing. The interface is accessed through connections from the I/O panel to
a terminal or modem. Multiple cards (up to 64) can be served through one
MMI terminal or modem by linking the LEIs through a daisy chain.

The MMI is an optional feature, since all E1 configuration settings are

performed through dip switch settings or preconfigured factory default
settings. Available MMI commands, and their functionality, are discussed
in-depth in "Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page 292).

ELEI additional functionality

As mentioned earlier, ELEI cards are enhanced to allow CAS+ compliance,
as shown in Figure 58 "CAS+ compliance" (page 272). This enhancement
provides several additional benefits for systems with ELEI cards installed.
Note: MDECTS and ELEI (operating in enhanced mode) cannot be
configured on the same system.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 272 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 58
CAS+ compliance

Key Benefits of using CAS+ signaling (ELEI mode) over traditional A/B bit
signaling (LEI mode) include:
1. Calling Line ID Presentation (CLIP)
When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated
call is directed towards the CAS+ compliant system, Calling Line ID can
be provided over the CAS+ interface. This is assuming that the incoming
call has the CLID without any presentation restrictions.
2. Redirecting Line ID Presentation (RLIP)
When an incoming call over the TDM/IP network or a CS 1000 originated
call which has undergone redirections is directed towards the CAS+
compliant system, Redirecting Line ID can be provided over the CAS+
interface. This is assuming that the incoming call has the Redirecting
Line ID without any presentation restrictions.
3. Message waiting indication (MWI)
Message waiting indication can be provided over the CAS+ interface.

Electrical specifications
Table 112 "LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page
273) provides a technical summary of the E1 line interface. Table 113 "LEI
card - power required" (page 273) lists the maximum power consumed
by the card.

E1 channel specifications
Table 112 "LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page
273) provides specifications for the 30 E1 channels. Each characteristic
is set by a dip switch. "Installation and Configuration" (page 274) for a
discussion of the corresponding dip switch settings.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 273

Table 112
LEI card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Framing CRC-4 or FAS, only
Coding AMI or HDB3
Signaling Loop or ground start A/B robbed-bit
Distance to LTU 0-199.6 meters (0-655 feet)

Power requirements
Table 113 "LEI card - power required" (page 273) shows the voltage and
maximum current that the LEI requires from the backplane. One NT8D06
IPE Power Supply AC or NT6D40 IPE Supply DC can supply power to
a maximum of eight LEIs.

Table 113
LEI card - power required
Voltage Max. Current
5.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
+15.0 V dc 150 mA
-15.0 V dc 150 mA

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning strikes is not
provided on the LEI. It does, however, protect against accidental shorts to
–52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise terminal equipment through

the public telephone network, install a Line Termination Unit (LTU) as part of
the terminal equipment to provide external line protection.

Environmental specifications
Table 114 "LEI card - environmental specifications" (page 273) shows the
environmental specifications of the LEI.

Table 114
LEI card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature – normal 15 to +30 C (+59 to 86 F), ambient
Operating temperature – short term 10 to +45 C (+50 to 113 F), ambient
Operating humidity – normal 20% to 55% RH (non-condensing)
Operating humidity – short term 20% to 80% RH (non condensing)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 274 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Parameter Specifications
Storage temperature –50 to + 70 C (–58 to 158 F), ambient
Storage humidity 5% to 95% RH (non-condensing)

Installation and Configuration

Installation and configuration of the LEI consists of six basic steps:

Step Action

1 Configure the dip switches on the LEI for the call environment.

2 Install the LEI into the selected card slots.

3 Cable from the I/O panel to the LTU, MMI terminal or modem
(optional), external alarm (optional), and other LEIs for daisy
chaining use of MMI terminal (optional).

4 Configure the MMI terminal.

5 Configure the LEI through the CS 1000 software and verify self-test
results.

6 Verify initial E1 operation and configure MMI (optional).

Steps 1-5 are explained in this section. Step 6 is covered in
"Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software" (page 292).
Installation and configuration of the ELEI follows the same steps.
If enhanced functionality is required, then one additional step is
required:

7 The Meridian 1 line unit(s) associated with the lineside E1 must

be programmed for wireless operation (set WTYP=DECT, and
WRLS=Yes in LD 10) in non–concentrated mode. Refer to Software
Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) details
on LD 10.

—End—

Dip switch settings

Begin the installation and configuration of the LEI by selecting the proper dip
switch settings for the environment. The LEI contains two dip switches, each
containing eight switch positions. They are located in the upper right corner
of the motherboard circuit card as shown in Figure 59 "LEI card - E1 protocol
dip switch locations" (page 276). The settings for these switches are shown
in Table 115 "LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings" (page 277) through
Table 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 279).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and Configuration 275

When the LEI card is oriented as shown in Figure 59 "LEI card - E1 protocol
dip switch locations" (page 276), the dip switches are ON when they are up,
and OFF when they are down. The dip switch settings configure the card
for the following parameters:

MMI port speed selection

This dip switch setting selects the appropriate baud rate for the terminal or
modem (if any) that is connected to the MMI.

Line Supervisory Signaling protocol

The LEI is capable of supporting loop start or ground start call processing
modes. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on what type of
line signaling the Customer Premise Equipment (CPE) supports.

Address of LEI to the MMI

The address of the LEI to the MMI is made up of two components:
• the address of the card within the shelf
• the address of the shelf in which the card resides

These two addresses are combined to create a unique address for the
card. The MMI reads the address of the card within the shelf from the card
firmware; the address of the shelf must be set by this dip switch.

The shelf address dip switch can be from 0 to 15, 16 being the maximum
number of lineside E1 IPE shelves (a maximum of 64 LEI cards) capable of
daisy chaining to a single MMI terminal. For ease, it is recommended that
this address be set the same as the address of the peripheral controller
identifier in LD 97 for type: XPE. This is not possible because the dip switch
is limited to 16; however, this is not mandatory.

E1 framing
The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment either in CRC-4 or FAS
only framing mode. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on
what type of framing the LTU equipment supports.

E1 Coding
The LEI is capable of interfacing with LTU equipment using either AMI or
HDB3 coding. Make the selection for this dip switch position based on the
type of coding the LTU equipment supports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 276 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 59
LEI card - E1 protocol dip switch locations

Line supervision on E1 failure

This setting determines in what state all 30 LEI ports appear to the CS
1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 in case of E1 failure. Ports can appear
as either in the "on-hook" or "off-hook" states on E1 failure.

Note: All idle LEI lines go off-hook and seize a Digitone Receiver when
the off-hook line processing is invoked on E1 failure. This may prevent
DID trunks from receiving incoming calls until the LEI lines time-out
and release the DTRs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and Configuration 277

Daisy-Chaining to MMI
If two or more LEIs are installed and the MMI used, daisy-chain the cards
together to use one MMI terminal or modem. Make the selection for this dip
switch position based on how many LEIs are being installed.

MMI Master or Slave

This setting is used only if daisy-chaining the cards to the MMI terminal or
modem. It determines whether this card is a master or a slave in the daisy
chain. Select the master setting if there are no LEIs between this card and
the MMI terminal or modem. Select the slave setting if there are other cards
in the daisy chain between this card and the MMI.

Table 115 "LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings" (page 277) through Table
117 "LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions
3-6)" (page 278) show the dip switch settings for Switch 1. Table 118 "LEI
card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 279) shows the dip switch
settings for Switch 2.

Table 115
LEI card - Switch 1 dip switch settings
Switch Switch Factory
Characteristic Selection Position Setting Default
MMI port speed selection 1200 baud 1 ON OFF
2400 baud 1 OFF
E1 signaling Ground start 2 ON OFF
Loop start 2 OFF
IPE Shelf address for LEI Table 117 "LEI 3 Table 117 "LEI OFF
card - XPEC card - XPEC
4 OFF
address dip switch address dip switch
settings (Switch 5 settings (Switch OFF
S1, positions 3-6)" S1, positions 3-6)"
6 OFF
(page 278) (page 278)
Card type for ringer XTI = 19 7 ON OFF
allocation XMLC = 18 7 OFF
E1 signaling See Table 116 8 OFF OFF
"LEI card -
signaling-type dip
switch settings"
(page 278)

When dip switch #1, positions 2 and 8 are set to "Table," AB Bits are
configured by the user through the Set Mode MMI command (see "Set
Mode" (page 302)). Otherwise, the signaling scheme selected by dip switch
1, positions 2 and 8 are used.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 278 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Table 116
LEI card - signaling-type dip switch settings
Switch #1
Characteristic Selection Position 2 Position 8
Signaling Type Loop start OFF OFF
Ground start ON OFF
Australian P2 OFF ON
Table ON ON

Table 117
LEI card - XPEC address dip switch settings (Switch S1, positions 3-6)
XPEC S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch S1 Switch
Address Position 3 Position 4 Position 5 Position 6
00 OFF OFF OFF OFF
01 ON OFF OFF OFF
02 OFF ON OFF OFF
03 ON ON OFF OFF
04 OFF OFF ON OFF
05 ON OFF ON OFF
06 OFF ON ON OFF
07 ON ON ON OFF
08 OFF OFF OFF ON
09 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON

When setting E1 Switch 2 dip switch settings, there are differences between
vintages. For NT5D33AB or NT5D34AB cards, use Table 118 "LEI card
- E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 279). For NT5D33AC or
NT5D34AC cards, use Table 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch
settings" (page 279).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation and Configuration 279

Table 118
LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings
Switch Switch Factory
Characteristic Selection Position Setting Default
E1 framing CRC-4 Disabled 1 ON OFF

CRC-4 Enabled OFF

E1 coding AMI 2 ON OFF

HDB3 OFF
NOT USED leave ON 3 ON ON
NOT USED leave ON 4 OFF OFF
NOT USED leave ON 5 OFF OFF
Line processing on E1 link On-hook 6 ON ON
failure
Off-hook OFF
Daisy-chaining to MMI YES 7 ON OFF

NO OFF
MMI master or slave Master 8 ON ON

Slave OFF

Table 119
ELEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings
Switch Switch Factory
Characteristic Selection Position Setting Default
E1 framing CRC-4 Disabled 1 ON ON

CRC-4 Enabled OFF

E1 coding AMI 2 ON OFF

HDB3 OFF
NOT USED leave ON 3 ON ON
NOT USED leave ON 4 OFF OFF
Mode LEI Mode 5 OFF OFF

ELEI Mode ON

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 280 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Switch Switch Factory

Characteristic Selection Position Setting Default
Line processing on E1 link On-hook 6 ON OFF
failure
Off-hook OFF
Daisy-chaining to MMI YES 7 ON OFF

NO OFF
MMI master or slave Master 8 ON ON

Slave OFF

After the card has been installed, display the dip switch settings using
the MMI command Display Configuration (D C). See "Man-Machine E1
maintenance interface software" (page 292) for details on this and the rest
of the available MMI commands.

Installation
Because of the wiring in some of the system modules and cabinets, the LEI
only works in certain card slot pairs. These restrictions depend on the type
of module or cabinet. In all other modules or cabinets where the conditions
listed below do not exist, the LEI works in any two adjacent card slots:
• In the NTAK12 Small Remote IPE Expansion Cabinet only card slots
10-15 are available.
• In the NT8D37 IPE module, if the 25-pair I/O connectors are partially
split between adjacent IPE card slots, the LEI works only in card slots
where Unit 0 of the motherboard card slot appear on the first pair of
the 25-pair I/O connector.

If installing the LEI into the NT8D37 IPE module, determine the vintage level
model. Certain vintage levels carry dedicated 25-pair I/O connectors only
for card slots 0, 4, 8, and 12. These vintage levels are cabled with only 16
pairs of wires from each card slot to the I/O panel. Some of the 25-pair I/O
connectors are split between adjacent card slots.

Other vintage levels cable each card slot to the I/O panel using a unique,
24-pair connector on the I/O panel. In these vintage levels, the LEI can be
installed in any available pair of card slots. However, because of the lower
number of wire pairs cabled to the I/O panel in the lower vintage level, only
certain card slots are available to the LEI.

See Table 120 "LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling"
(page 281) for the vintage level information for the NT8D37 IPE modules.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 281

Table 120
LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module vintage level port cabling
Number of ports
Vintage Level cabled to I/O panel
NT8D37BA 30 ports
NT8D37DE 16 ports
NT8D37EC 30 ports

Available and restricted card slots in the NT8D37 IPE module

If installing the LEI into an NT8D37 IPE module, the card slots available
depend on the vintage level module.

Vintage levels cabling 30 ports: For modules with vintage levels that
cabled 30 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed in any pair of
card slots 0-15.

Vintage levels cabling 16 ports: For modules with vintage levels that
cable 16 ports to the I/O panel, the LEI can be installed into the card slot
pairs shown in the following card slots:

Available: Motherboard/Daughterboard
0 and 1
1 and 2
4 and 5
5 and 6
8 and 9
9 and 10
12 and 13
13 and 14

LEIs must not be installed into the following card slot pairs:

Restricted: Motherboard/Daughterboard
2 and 3
3 and 4
6 and 7
10 and 11
11 and 12
14 and 15

If the LEI must be installed into one of the restricted card slot pairs, rewire
the IPE module card slot to the I/O panel by installing an additional NT8D81
cable from the LEI motherboard slot to the I/O panel, and re-arranging
the three backplane connectors for the affected card slots. This permits

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 282 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

the connection of the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card carrier and

maintenance external I/O cable at the IPE and CE module I/O panel
connector for card slots that are otherwise restricted.

Alternatively, all LEI connections can be made at the main distribution frame
instead of connecting the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA LEI card external I/O
cable at the I/O panel. This eliminates these card slot restrictions.

Cabling the LEI card

After the dip switches are configured and the LEI installed into the selected
card slots, the LEI can be cabled to the LTU equipment, the MMI terminal
or modem (optional), an external alarm (optional), and other LEIs for daisy
chaining use of the MMI terminal (optional).

The LEI is cabled from its backplane connector through connections from
the motherboard circuit card only to the I/O panel on the rear of the IPE
module. No cable connections are made from the daughterboard circuit
card. The connections from the LEI to the I/O panel are made with the
NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cables provided with the IPE module.

Cabling from the I/O panel with the NT5D35AA or NT5D36AA

lineside E1 I/O cable
In a twisted-pair E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel
to the E1 link and other external devices with the NT5D35AA lineside E1
I/O cable.
This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which
plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has four connectors:
1. a DB15 male connector (P2), which plugs into the E1 line
2. a DB9 male connector (P3), which plugs into an external alarm system
3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal
or modem
4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4
connector for MMI daisy chaining

In a coaxial E1 installation, make the connection from the I/O panel to the E1
link and other external devices through the NT5D36AA lineside E1 I/O cable.
This cable consists of a 25-pair amphenol connector (P1) on one end which
plugs into the I/O panel. The other end has 4 connectors:
1. a DB15 female connector (P2) with an adapter that breaks out Tx
(transmit) and Rx (receive) connectors, which that plug into the E1 line
2. a DB9 male connector (P3), which plugs into an external alarm system

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 283

3. a second DB9 male connector (P5), which connects to an MMI terminal

or modem
4. a DB9 female connector (P4), which connects to the next LEI’s P4
connector for MMI daisy chaining. The Tx marking on the adapter at P2
is the LEI output. The E1 data stream coming from the network into the
LEI connects at the Rx coaxial connector

Table 121 "LEI card - LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts" (page
283) shows the pin assignments of the LEI backplane and I/O Panel.

Table 121
LEI card - LEI backplane and I/O panel pinouts
Backplane I/O Panel
connector pin connector pin Signal
12A 1 E1 Tip, Receive data
12B 26 E1 Ring, Receive data
13A 2 E1 Tip, Transmit data
13B 27 E1 Ring, Transmit data
14A 3 Alarm out, normally open
14B 28 Alarm out, common
15A 4 Alarm out, normally closed
15B 29 No connection
16A 5 No connection
16B 30 Away from MMI terminal, receive data
17A 6 Away from MMI terminal, transmit data
17B 31 Toward MMI terminal, transmit data
18A 7 Toward MMI terminal, receive data
18B 32 Daisy chain control 2
19A 8 Daisy chain control 1
19B 33 Ground

Table 122 "LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts" (page 284) shows the
pin assignments from the I/O panel relating to the pin assignments of the
lineside E1 I/O cable.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 284 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Table 122
LEI card - lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts
I/O Panel LEI LEI Cable Connector to
Connector Connector External
Pin Lead Designations Pin Equipment
1 E1 Tip Receive data 11 DB15 male to E1 (P2). LEI is CPE
transmit and receive to network
26 E1 Ring Receive data 3
2 E1 Tip Transmit data 1
27 E1 Ring Transmit data 9
3 Alarm out, common 1
28 Alarm out (normally open) 2 DB9 male to external alarm (P3)
4 Alarm out (normally closed) 3
7 Toward MMI terminal, receive 2
data
DB9 male toward MMI (P5).
31 Toward MMI terminal, transmit 3
Wired as DCE.
data
Data is transmitted on pin 2
33 Ground 5 (RXD) and received on pin 3
7 (TXD)
8 Control 1
32 Control 2 9
33 Ground 5
8 Control 1 7
32 Control 2 9
DB9 female away from MMI
30 Away from MMI terminal, transmit 3 terminal (P4)
data
6 Away from MMI terminal, receive 2
data

E1 Connections
For twisted-pair installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is transmitted
over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11, as shown in Table 122 "LEI card -
lineside E1 I/O cable pinouts" (page 284).

Plug the DB 15 male connector labeled "P2" into the E1 link. E1 transmit
and receive pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is
hardwired without carrier facilities. If the LEI is connected through E1 carrier
facilities, the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the
RJ48 at the Telco demarc, the LTU, or other E1 carrier equipment. The E1
CPE at the far-end has transmit and receive wired straight from the RJ48
demarc at the far-end of the carrier facility.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 285

For 75 ohm coaxial installations, E1 signaling for all 30 channels is

transmitted over P2 connector pins 1, 3, 9, and 11 though an adapter and
out two coaxial connectors Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive). Tx is the LEI
output, and Rx is the LEI input from the E1 stream. E1 transmit and receive
pairs must be turned over between the LEI and the CPE that is hardwired
without carrier facilities. If the LEI is connected through E1 carrier facilities,
the transmit and receive pairs must be wired straight through to the RJ48
at the Telco demarc, the LTU, or other E1 carrier equipment. The E1 CPE
at the far end has Tx and Rx wired straight from the RJ48 demarc at the
far end of the carrier facility.

External Alarm Connections

P3 connector pins 1, 2 and 3 can be plugged into any external alarm-sensing
hardware. Plug the DB9 male connector labeled "P3" into an external
alarm. These connections are optional, and the LEI functionality is not
affected if they are not made.

The MMI monitors the E1 link for specified performance criteria and reports
on problems detected. One of the ways it can report information is through
this external alarm connection. If connected, the LEI’s microprocessor
activates the external alarm hardware if it detects certain E1 link problems it
has classified as alarm levels 1 or 2. See "Man-Machine E1 maintenance
interface software" (page 292) for a detailed description of alarm levels and
configuration. If an alarm level 1 or 2 is detected by the MMI, the LEI closes
the contact that is normally open, and opens the contact that is normally
closed. The MMI command "Clear Alarm" returns the alarm contacts to
their normal state.

MMI Connections
P5 connector pins 2, 3, 5, 7 and 9 are used to connect the LEI to the MMI
terminal, connecting LEIs in a daisy chain for access to a shared MMI
terminal. When logging into a LEI, "control 2" is asserted by that card, which
informs all of the other cards not to talk on the bus, but rather to pass the
data straight through. The pins labeled "control 1" are reserved for future
use. As with the external alarm connections, MMI connections are optional.
Up to 128 LEIs can be linked, located in up to 16 separate IPE shelves, to
one MMI terminal using the daisy chain approach.
If only one LEI is installed, cable from the DB9 male connector labeled "P5"
(toward MMI terminal) to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a
PC running a terminal emulation program, or a modem. For installations of
only one card, no connection is made to the DB9 female connector labeled
"P4" (away from MMI terminal).
If two or more LEIs are being installed into the system, the MMI port
connections can be daisy-chained together so that only one MMI terminal
is required for up to 128 LEIs. See Figure 60 "LEI card - connecting two

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 286 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

or more cards to the MMI" (page 287). Cards can be located in up to 15

separate IPE shelves. Start with any card slot in the IPE shelf and connect
to any other card slot. Connected card slots do not need to be consecutive.

Procedure 14
Connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal
Step Action
Follow this procedure for connecting two or more LEIs to the MMI terminal:

1 Cable the DB9 male connector labeled "P5" (toward MMI terminal)
to one of the COM ports on the back of any TTY, a PC running a
terminal emulation program, or a modem.

2 Make the connection from the first card to the second card by
plugging the DB9 female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI
terminal) from the first card into the DB9 male connector of the
second card labeled "P5" (toward MMI terminal).
3 Repeat step 2 for the remaining cards.

4 At the last card of the daisy chain, make no connection from the DB9
female connector labeled "P4" (away from MMI terminal).
5 If two LEIs are too far apart to connect the "P4" and "P5" connectors
connect them with an off-the-shelf DB9 female to DB9 male
straight-through extension cable, available at any PC supply store.

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 287

Figure 60
LEI card - connecting two or more cards to the MMI

Terminal configuration
For the MMI terminal to be able to communicate to the LEI, the interface
characteristics must be set to:
• speed – 1200 or 2400 bps
• character width – 7 bits
• parity bit – mark
• stop bits – one
• software handshake (XON/XOFF) – off

Software Configuration
Although much of the architecture and many features of the LEI card are
different from the analog line card, the LEI has been designed to emulate an
analog line card to the CS 1000 software. Because of this, the LEI software
configuration is the same as for two adjacent analog line cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 288 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

All 30 E1 channels carried by the LEI are individually configured using

the analog (500/2500-type) Telephone Administration program LD 10.
Use Table 123 "Card unit number to E1 channel mapping" (page 288) to
determine the correct unit number and Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 service-change instructions.

LEI circuitry routes 16 units (0 – 15) on the motherboard and 14 (0 – 13)

units on the daughterboard to 30 E1 channels. The motherboard circuit card
is located in the left card slot, and the daughterboard circuit card is located
in right card slot. For example, if installing the LEI into card slots 0 and 1,
the motherboard would reside in card slot 0 and the daughterboard would
reside in card slot 1. In order to configure the terminal equipment through
the switch software, the E1 channel number needs to be cross-referenced
to the corresponding card unit number. This mapping is shown in Table 123
"Card unit number to E1 channel mapping" (page 288).

Table 123
Card unit number to E1 channel mapping
Item TN E1 Channel Number
Motherboard 0 1
Motherboard 1 2
Motherboard 2 3
Motherboard 3 4
Motherboard 4 5
Motherboard 5 6
Motherboard 6 7
Motherboard 7 8
Motherboard 8 9
Motherboard 9 10
Motherboard 10 11
Motherboard 11 12
Motherboard 12 13
Motherboard 13 14
Motherboard 14 15
Motherboard 15 17
Daughterboard 0 18
Daughterboard 1 19
Daughterboard 2 20
Daughterboard 3 21

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 289

Item TN E1 Channel Number

Daughterboard 4 22
Daughterboard 5 23
Daughterboard 6 24
Daughterboard 7 25
Daughterboard 8 26
Daughterboard 9 27
Daughterboard 10 28
Daughterboard 11 29
Daughterboard 12 30
Daughterboard 13 31

Disconnect supervision
The LEI supports far-end disconnect supervision by opening the tip side
toward the terminal equipment upon the system’s detecting a disconnect
signal from the far-end on an established call. The Supervised Analog
Line feature (SAL) must be configured in LD 10 for each LEI port. At the
prompt FTR respond:

OSP <CR>
Against FTR respond:

ISP <CR>
The LEI treats OSP and ISP for both originating and terminating calls
as hook flash disconnect supervision, also known as cut-off disconnect.
Originating calls are outgoing from the terminal equipment. Terminating
calls are incoming to the terminal equipment. The LEI does not support
battery reversal answer and disconnect supervision on originating calls.

After the software is configured, power-up the card and verify the self-test
results. The STATUS LED on the faceplate indicates whether or not the
LEI has successfully passed its self test, and is, therefore, functional.
When the card is installed, this LED remains lit for two to five seconds as
the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes
three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in
software, the LED goes out. The LED goes out if either the motherboard or
daughterboard is enabled by the software. If the LED continually flashes or
remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 290 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Clocking Requirement
The clocking for NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface card in CS1000 Rls 5.0
system is as follows:
• Lineside E1 cards are clock master of their E1 link, which has a clock
accuracy requirement of +/-50ppm
• MGC does not provide a backplane clock with +/-50ppm accuracy at
freerun
• An accurate clock source is needed for Lineside E1 application

The following are the two methods to bring an accurate clock source to MCG:
• Configure a digital trunk card with Clock Controller within the same
cabinet/chassis as Lineside E1 cards.
With Clock Controller enabled, in both freerun or locked state, an
accurate clock will be provided to MGC.
• Use an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5) to bring
a clock source from other CS1000 cabinet/chassis that has a Central
Office Link.
With accurate clock source available, MGC will lock to the reference and
provide an backplane clock as accurate as the clock source.

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

The following sections elaborate on how to connect an MGC DECT Clock
Reference Cable.

Pre requisites
The pre requisites for connecting an MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable
are the following:
• MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable --- NTDW67AAE5.
Figure 61 "MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable" (page 291) shows the
MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable. It is used to provide clock reference
between CS1000 Media Gateway Cabinet/chassis.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Clocking Requirement 291

Figure 61
MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

Connecting MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable

Step Action

1 Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable to the AUI port of
the back of the MG1000 chassis. Figure 62 "MG1000 chassis" (page
291) shows the AUI port of the MG1000 chassis.
Figure 62
MG1000 chassis

2 In the Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis,

connect to 15-pin DSUB connector on the back panel formerly
used for the 10Base-T AUI connection. Figure 63 "Option 11C
Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis" (page 292) shows
the 10Base-T AUI connection of the Option 11C Mini chassis or
Succession 1.0 MG chassis.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 292 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 63
Option 11C Mini chassis or Succession 1.0 MG chassis

3 Use an MGC Breakout Adapter for Option 11C (NTDW63AAE5)

• Connect the adapter to 25 pairs MDF connector at Slot 0
• Connect the MGC DECT Clock Reference Cable (NTDW67AAE5)
to 15-pin DSUB connector on the Breakout Adapter. Figure 64
"Option 11C Cabinet" (page 292) shows the Option 11C Cabinet.

Figure 64
Option 11C Cabinet

—End—

Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software

Description
The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) provides E1-link diagnostics and
historical information for the LEI system. See "Installation and Configuration"
(page 274) for instructions on how to install the cabling and configure the

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 293

terminal for the MMI. The following sections describe the options available
through the LEI’s MMI terminal and explain how to set-up, configure, and
use the MMI.
The MMI provides the following maintenance features:
• configurable alarm parameters
• E1-link problem indicator
• current and historical E1-link performance reports
• E1 verification and fault isolation testing
• configuration of A\B bits (North American Standard, Australian P2, or
customized settings are available)

Alarms
The MMI may be used to activate alarms for the following E1-link conditions:
• excessive bit-error rate,
• frame-slip errors,
• out-of-frame,
• loss-of-signal, and
• blue alarm.

Pre-set thresholds and error durations trip LEI alarm notifications. For
descriptions of each of these E1-link alarm conditions, see "Performance
counters and reporting" (page 309). For instructions on how to set alarm
parameters, see "Set Alarm" (page 298). For information on accessing
alarm reporting, see "Display Alarms" (page 308), "Display Status" (page
308) and "Display Performance" (page 310).
Two levels of alarm severity exist for bit errors. Different threshold and
duration settings must be established for each level.
When the first level of severity is reached (alarm level 1), the MMI causes
the following:
• the external alarm hardware activates
• the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate is lit
• an alarm message is displayed on the MMI terminal
• an entry is created in the alarm log and printed to the MMI port

When the second level of severity is reached (alarm level 2), the MMI
performs all functions at alarm level 1. In addition, the LEI enters
line-conditioning mode. In this mode, the LEI sends either "on-hook" or
"off-hook" signals for all 30 ports to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 294 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

1, depending on how the dip switch for line processing is set (dip switch 2,
position 6). See Table 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings"
(page 279).

If the MMI detects E1-link failures for any of the other conditions monitored
(out-of-frame, excess frame slips, loss-of-signal, and blue alarm condition),
the LEI automatically performs all alarm level 2 functions. The MMI
also sends a yellow alarm to the far-end LTU. Alarms may be configured
to self-clear when the alarm condition is no longer detected. See "Set
Clearing" (page 301).

All alarms activated produce a record in the alarm log. The alarm log
maintains records for the most recent 100 alarms, and can be displayed,
printed, and cleared. The alarm log displays or prints the alarms in
descending chronological order, beginning with the most recent alarm.
Notifications in the alarm log include the date and time of the alarm’s
occurrence.

E1 Performance Counters and Reports

The MMI maintains performance error counters for the following E1
conditions:
• errored seconds
• bursty seconds
• unavailable seconds
• framer-slip seconds
• loss-of-frame seconds

The MMI retains E1 performance statistics for the current hour, and for
each hour for the previous 24. For descriptions of these performance error
counters and instructions on how to create a report on them and clear them,
see "Performance counters and reporting" (page 309).

E1 Verification and Fault Isolation Testing

The MMI enables various tests to be performed that either verify that the E1
is working adequately, or help to isolate a problem to the LEI, the E1 link, or
the CPE. For descriptions of all of these tests and instructions on how to
run them, see "Testing" (page 311).

Login and Password

The MMI can be accessed through any TTY, PC running a terminal
emulation program, or modem. After installing the MMI terminal and card
cables, the MMI can be configured.

For single-card installations, it is accessed by entering L<CR> to login.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 295

For multiple-card installations connected in a daisy chain, it is accessed by

entering L <address>, where the four-digit address is a combination
of the two-digit address of the IPE shelf as set by dip switch positions
on the card Switch 1, positions 3-6, plus the address of the card slot the
motherboard occupies. See Table 120 "LEI card - NT8D37 IPE module
vintage level port cabling" (page 281).

For example, to login to a card located in shelf 13, card slot 4, type:

L 13 4 <CR>
Spaces are inserted between the login command (L), the shelf address,
and the card slot address.

The MMI prompts for a password. The password is "LEILINK," and it

must be typed in all capital letters.

After logging in, the prompt looks like this:

LEI:: > (for single-card installations)

LEI::ss cc> (for multi-card installations, where ss represents the shelf

address and cc represents the card slot address.)

Basic commands
MMI commands can now be executed. The seven basic commands are:
• Help
• Alarm
• Clear
• Display
• Set
• Test
• Quit

Type ? <CR> to list these commands, along with an explanation of

their usage. A screen similar to Figure 65 "HELP (H, ?) screen" (page
296) appears. The help screen also appears by typing H<CR>, or
HELP<CR>.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 296 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 65
HELP (H, ?) screen

Each of these commands can be executed by entering the first letter of the
command or by entering the entire command. Commands with more than
one word are entered by entering the first letter of the first word, a space,
and the first letter of the second word or by entering the entire command.
Table 124 "MMI commands and command sets" (page 296) shows all
possible MMI commands in alphabetical order. These commands are also
described later in this section.

Table 124
MMI commands and command sets
Command Description
AD Alarm Disable. Disables all alarms.
AE Alarm Enable. Enables all alarms.
CA Clear Alarm. Clears all alarms, terminates time processing, and resets the E1
bit error rate and frame slip counters.
CAL Clear Alarm Log. Clears alarmlog.
CE Clear Error. Clears the E1 error counter.
D A(P) Display Alarms. Displays the alarm log, which is a list of the 100 most recent
alarms with time and date stamps. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by
typing P. Continue scrolling by typing any other key.)
D C(P) Display Configuration. Displays the configuration settings for the LEI(s), single-
or multiple-card system. Display includes each card’s serial number, MMI firmware
version, date and time, alarm disable/enable setting, self-clearing disable/enable
setting, values entered through the Set Configuration command, and dip switch
settings.(Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by
typing any other key.)
D H(P) Display History. Displays performance counters for the past 24 hours.
(Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by typing
any other key.)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 297

Command Description
DP Display Performance. Displays performance counters for the current hour.
D S(P) Display Status. Displays carrier status, including alarm state and, if active, alarm
level. (Momentarily stop the scrolling display by typing P. Continue scrolling by
typing any other key.)
H or ? Help. Displays the Help screen.
L Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a single-LEI system.
Lxx Login. Logs into the MMI terminal in a daisy-chained system, where xx represents
the address of the card to be configured.
Q Quit. Logs out of the MMI terminal.

Note: If it is a daisy-chained system, be certain to log out when finished with

configuration. In a daisy-chained system, only one card can occupy the bus at a
given time and all other LEIs cannot notify the MMI of alarms unless logged-out
of configuration mode.
SA Set Alarm. Sets alarm parameters, such as the allowable bit-errors per second,
threshold, and alarm duration.
SC Set Clearing. Sets the alarm self-clearing function, "enable" or "disable."
SD Set Date. Sets the date or verifies the current date.
SM Set Mode. Sets the A/B Bits mode.
SS Set Simple. Sets whether or not the LEI waits for the terminal equipment to return
an idle-state message before returning the channel to idle at call disconnect
from the far-end.
ST Set Time. Sets the time or verifies current time.
T Test. Initiates the E1 carrier test function. To terminate a test in-process, enter
the STOP TEST command at any time.

Configuring parameters
The MMI has been designed with default settings so that no configuration is
necessary. However, it can be configured based on the call environment.

Set Time
Before beginning to configure the MMI, login to the system and verify the
current time. Do this by entering the Set Time (S T) command. The
MMI displays the time it has registered. Enter a new time or hit Enter to
leave it unchanged. The time is entered in the "hh:mm:ss," the 24-hour, or
military, format.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 298 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Set Date
Verify the current date. Do this by entering the Set Date (S D)
command. The MMI then displays the date it has registered. Enter a
new date or hit Enter to leave it unchanged. The date is entered in the
"mm/dd/yy" format.

Set Alarm
The Set Alarm (S A) command sets the parameters by which an alarm
is activated and the duration of the alarm after it is activated. There are
three alarm levels as described below:
• Alarm Level 0 (AL0) consists of activity with an error threshold below the
AL1 setting, which is a satisfactory condition and no alarm is activated.
• Alarm Level 1 (AL1) consists of activity with an error threshold above
the AL1 setting, but below the AL2 setting that is deemed to be of minor
importance. In this situation, the external alarm hardware is activated
by closing the normally open contact, the RED ALARM LED on the
faceplate lights, and an alarm message is created in the alarm log and
the MMI terminal.
• Alarm Level 2 (AL2) consists of activity with an error threshold above
the AL2 setting which is deemed to be of major importance. In this
situation, the following happens:
— the external alarm hardware is activated by closing the normally
open contact
— the RED ALARM LED on the faceplate lights
— an alarm message is created in the alarm log and the MMI terminal
— the LEI card enters line-conditioning mode
— a yellow alarm message is sent to the CPE/LTU

Line processing sends the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 either all
"on-hook" or all "off-hook" signals, depending on the dip switch setting of
the card. See Table 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings"
(page 279).
When the Set Alarm command is selected, the prompt appears for setting
the threshold level and duration for alarm levels 1 and 2.
The E1 link processes at a rate of approximately 2.0 mb/s. The threshold
value indicates the ratio of the total number of bits that must be detected
as being in error per second before the LEI activates an alarm. It can be
set between 3 and 9 and can be different for each alarm level. Any other
value entered causes the MMI to display a "Parameter Invalid"
message. The digit entered as the threshold value is a number representing
a negative power of 10 as shown in Table 125 "E1 bit error rate threshold
settings" (page 299).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 299

Note: The error-rate threshold for a level 2 alarm must be greater (a

smaller power of 10) than for a level 1 alarm. Remember that the
numbers being represented are negative numbers. Since 3 represents
–3, and 4 represents –4, 4 represents a smaller number than 3 does.

Table 125
E1 bit error rate threshold settings
Alarm threshold bit
errors per second in Threshold to set Allowable Duration
power of 10 alarm Periods
10-3 2,000/ second 1-21 seconds
10-4 200/second 1-218 seconds
10-5 20/second 1-2148 seconds
10-6 2.0/second 1-3600 seconds
10-7 2.0/10 seconds 10-3600 seconds
10-8 2.0/100 seconds 100-3600 seconds
10-9 2.0/1000 seconds 1000-3600 seconds

The duration value is set in seconds and can be set from 1 to 3,600 seconds
(1 hour). This duration value indicates how long the alarm condition must
last before an alarm is declared. Low bit-error rates (107 through 109) are
restricted to longer durations since it takes more than one second to detect
an alarm condition above106. Higher bit-error rates are restricted to shorter
durations because the MMI error counter fills at 65,000 errors.
If the Set Clearing (S C) "Enable Self Clearing" option is set, the alarm
indications (LEDs and external alarm contacts) is automatically cleared after
the specified period, or duration, expires. Otherwise, the alarm continues
until the command Clear Alarm (C A) is entered.
When an alarm is cleared, all activity caused by the alarm indications is
cleared:
• the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally open
is reopened)
• the LED goes out
• an entry is made in the alarm log of the date and time the alarm was
cleared
• carrier-fail line supervision ceases (for alarm level 2 only)

If self-clearing alarm indications are disabled, carrier-fail line supervision

terminates when the alarm condition has ceased, but the external alarm
contact and faceplate LED remain active until the alarm is cleared.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 300 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

A heavy bit-error rate can cause 200 bit errors to occur much more quickly
than100 seconds. This causes the alarm to be declared sooner.

An alarm condition is not automatically cleared until the system no longer

detects the respective bit error threshold during the corresponding duration
period.

For example, if AL1 threshold of 6 (representing 10-6) is specified, and a

duration period of 100 seconds is specified, an alarm is activated if more
than 200 bit errors occur in any 100 second period. As soon as the alarm is
activated, the bit counter is reset to 0. If the next 100 seconds pass, and
less than 200 bit errors are detected, then the alarm clears after the alarm’s
duration period. However, if more than 200 bit errors are detected in the next
100 seconds, the alarm condition continues for the designated time period.

The alarm finally clears when the alarm condition is no longer detected for
the designated period, either by self-clearing (if this function is enabled), or
when the Clear Alarm (C A) command is entered.

In addition to bit errors, the Set Alarm function sets parameters for detecting
frame-slip errors by establishing a threshold necessary to activate an alarm.
If the threshold value is exceeded, a level 2 alarm is activated. The frame
slip threshold can be specified from 1 to 255 frame slips per time period.
The duration time period can be specified from 1 to 24 hours.

When entering the Set Alarm (S A) command, the MMI scrolls through
the previously described series of alarm options. These options are
displayed along with their current value, at which point a new value can be
entered or enter <CR> to retain the current value. Table 126 "Set alarm
options" (page 300) outlines the options available in the Set Alarm (S
A) function.

Table 126
Set alarm options
Option Description
AL1 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second before alarm level 1 is
activated. Factory default is 6.
AL1 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that
alarm level 1 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds.
AL2 Threshold Sets the allowable bit errors per second (from 3 to 9) before
alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10-5.
AL2 Duration Sets the duration in seconds (from 1 to 3,600 seconds) that
alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 10 seconds.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 301

Option Description
Frame Slip Sets the allowable frame slips per time period (from 1 to 255)
Threshold before alarm level 2 is activated. Factory default is 5.
Frame Slip Sets the duration in hours (from 1 to 24) that the frame slips
Duration are counted. After this time period, the counter is reset to 0.
Factory default is 2 hours.

Note: If the duration period set is too long, the LEI card is slow to
return to service automatically even when the carrier is no longer
experiencing errors. The CLEAR ALARM (C A) command has to be
entered manually to restore service promptly. To avoid this, an alarm’s
duration period is normally set to 10 seconds.

Set Clearing
The SET CLEARING (S C) command allows self-clearing of alarms by
responding to the question: Enable Self Clearing? (YES or NO). If YES is
chosen (the factory default setting), the system automatically clears (resets)
alarms after the alarm condition is no longer detected. Choosing the NO
option causes the system to continue the alarm condition until the Clear
Alarm (C A) command is entered. Line processing and yellow alarm
indication to the CPE terminates as soon as the alarm condition clears,
even if self-clearing is disabled.

Set Simple
The SET SIMPLE command controls call tear-down signaling when the
far-end disconnects from a call.

When the far-end terminates a call, Release 1 of LEI’s AB vintage sends a

disconnect message to the terminal equipment and waits for the terminal
equipment to go idle before going idle itself. A NO response to the S S
command configures Release 2 (and later) boards to operate in this way.
See Figure 66 "Set Simple (S S) no screen" (page 302).

Release 2 of AB vintage LEIs gives the administrator the option of using

the signaling described above, or configuring the LEI to take its channel idle
immediately after sending the call-disconnect message. A YES response
to the S S command, the default configuration for Release 2 (and later)
boards, configures the LEI to operate in this way. See Figure 67 "Set Simple
(S S) yes screen" (page 302).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 302 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 66
Set Simple (S S) no screen

Figure 67
Set Simple (S S) yes screen

Set Mode
At the SET MODE (S M) command, the MMI prompts the user with the
current signaling mode, either Default (Australian P2) or Table (of bit values.)
Entering a <CR> accepts the current value, or the user can type in 1 to
revert to the Default, or 2 to edit the table entries. See Figure 68 "Set Mode
screen" (page 302). If the user selects default, then the A/B Bit values is
reset to the Default values.
Responding to the MMI’s Set Mode prompt with "1" also results in the
line, "Signaling Bits set to Default," as in Figure 68 "Set Mode screen"
(page 302).
Figure 68
Set Mode screen

However, responding to this prompt with 2 selects "Table" and allows the
user to set the A/B Bit Mode to whatever configuration the user chooses.
If "Table" is selected, the individual table values are prompted for. See
Figure 69 "Set Mode (S M): Table screen" (page 303) and Figure 70 "Set
Mode (S M): Table screen" (page 304). After each value is displayed, enter
<CR> to do the following:
• accept the current value

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 303

• enter just the AB bits (which is copied to the CD bits)

• enter a complete ABCD bit pattern
• in the case of optional states, a ’N’ or ’n’ can be entered to indicate
that the state is not needed

Note that in D4 Framing for E1, there are no CD bits, so they are ignored.

The user is prompted for ABCD bit values for the following states when
the table mode is selected.

Send and Receive refer to the LEI sending ABCD bits to the CPE (Customer
Provided Equipment) or receiving ABCD bits from the CPE.

Incoming and Outgoing refer to E1 digital link from the CPE point of view.
Incoming is an external call arriving over the digital link and accepted by the
CPE. Outgoing is a call originated by the CPE over the digital link.

Configuring the A/B Bit Signaling table is illustrated in Set Mode (S M): Table
screen and Figure 70 "Set Mode (S M): Table screen" (page 304).

Figure 69
Set Mode (S M): Table screen

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 304 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Idle SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends (acting as the CO or
PSTN) when the circuit is in the idle state. This value is required.

Idle RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the CPE
when it is in the idle state. This value is required.

Blocking RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects to see from the
CPE when the customer equipment is in the blocking or fault state and is
unable to accept new calls. Set this value to N if this state is not needed. If
this value is not set to N, then dip switch #2 position 6 determines whether
off-hook or on-hook is sent to the M1/SL100 when this state is entered. See
Table 118 "LEI card - E1 Switch 2 (S2) dip switch settings" (page 279).

Figure 70
Set Mode (S M): Table screen

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 305

Incoming call Ringer ON SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to
indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that ringing voltage should be
applied at the CPE. This value is required.

Incoming call Ringer OFF SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to
indicate that a call is incoming to the CPE and that the ring cycle is in the
off portion of the cadence. This value is required.

Incoming call Offhook RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI expects
to see from the CPE when the customer equipment has gone to an off
hook state which indicates that the incoming call has been answered. This
value is required.

Incoming call CONNECTED SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to
the CPE to indicate that it has seen and recognized the off hook indication
sent by the CPE. The call is considered fully connected at this point. This
value is required.

Incoming call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the value that the
LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value
is required.

Incoming call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE – This is the value that the
LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to
end the call. This value is required.

Outgoing call SEIZE RECEIVE –This is the value that the LEI expects to
see when the CPE goes to an off hook condition and wishes to initiate a
call. This value is required.

Outgoing call SEIZE ACK SEND –This is the value that the LEI sends to
indicate that the seized condition has been noted and the M-1 is ready
for dial digits. This value can be set to N if it is not required such as in a
loop start case.

Outgoing call DIAL MAKE RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI
expects to see from the CPE during the make part of the digit. This value
is required.

Outgoing call DIAL BREAK RECEIVE – This is the value that the LEI
expects to see from the CPE during the break part of the digit. This value
is required.

Outgoing call ANSWERED SEND – This is the value that the LEI sends to
indicate that the far-end has answered the call. This value is required.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 306 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Outgoing call (CPE) DISCONNECT RECEIVE – This is the value that the
LEI expects to see from the CPE when the customer equipment wishes to
end the call. This value is required.

Outgoing call (Far-end) DISCONNECT SEND – This is the value that the
LEI sends to indicate that the far-end has released the call. This value
is required.

Disconnect Time – This is the number of milliseconds that the LEI sends
the disconnect signal to the CPE before reverting to the idle state. If the
CPE reverts to a connected state during this time, it is ignored. This value is
only used when disconnect supervision is available and is needed for the
signaling type in use. It is used when the far-end initiates the disconnect.
For loop start cases, this value is not used.

Intercall (release guard) Time – This is the number of milliseconds that

the LEI maintains the idle signal to the CPE before initiating a new call. The
CPE should not initiate a new call during this time. If it does so, the off-hook
indication is ignored until the release guard time has expired. This value
defaults to 0 which relies on the M-1 to observe the proper guard time. If a
non-zero value is entered, off-hook from the CPE and Ringer-On commands
from the M1/SL100 is ignored until this timer has expired.

Display Configuration (D C)
The Display Configuration (D C) command displays the various
configuration settings established for the LEI. Entering this command
causes a screen similar to Figure 71 "Display Configuration (D C) screen"
(page 306) to appear.

Figure 71
Display Configuration (D C) screen

Alarm operation and reporting

The MMI monitors the E1 link according to parameters established through
the Set Alarm command for the following conditions:
• Excessive bit error rate
• Frame slip errors

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 307

• Out of frame condition

• Loss of signal condition
• Blue alarm (AIS) condition

Descriptions of the excessive bit error rate and frame slip errors conditions
are found in "Configuring parameters" (page 297). Bit errors activate either
a level 1 or level 2 alarm. The remaining conditions, when detected, always
cause the system to activate a level 2 alarm.

An out-of-frame condition is declared if 3 consecutive frame bits are in error.

If this condition occurs, the hardware immediately attempts to reframe.
During the reframe time, the E1 link is declared out-of-frame, and silence is
sent on all receive timeslots.

A loss of signal condition is declared if a full frame (255 bits) of consecutive

zeros has been detected at the receive inputs. If this condition occurs, the
E1 link automatically attempts to resynchronize with the far-end. If this
condition lasts for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared, and
silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after two
seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm
condition occurs.

If a repeating device loses signal, it immediately begins sending an

unframed signal of all ones to the far-end to indicate an alarm condition.
This condition is called a blue alarm, or an Alarm Indication Signal (AIS). If
an AIS is detected for more than two seconds, a level 2 alarm is declared,
and silence is sent on all receive timeslots. The alarm is cleared if, after
two seconds, neither a loss of signal, out-of-frame condition, or blue alarm
condition occurs.

Alarm Disable
The Alarm Disable (A D) command disables the external alarm
contacts. When this command is typed, the MMI displays the message
Alarms Disabled and the MAINT LED lights. In this mode, no yellow
alarms are sent and the LEI does not enter line processing mode. Alarm
messages are sent on the MMI terminal and the LED continues to indicate
alarm conditions.

Alarm Enable
The Alarm Enable (A E) command does the reverse of the Alarm
Disable (A D) command. It enables the external alarm contacts.
When this command is typed in, the MMI displays the message Alarms
Enabled. In this mode, yellow alarms can be sent and the LEI can enter
line processing mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 308 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Clear Alarm
The Clear Alarm (C A) command clears all activity initiated by an
alarm: the external alarm hardware is deactivated (the contact normally
open is reopened), the LED goes out, an entry is made in the alarm log
of the date and time the alarm was cleared, and line processing ceases
(for alarm level 2 only). When this command is typed, MMI displays the
message Alarm acknowledged. If the alarm condition still exists, an alarm
is declared again.

Display Alarms
A detailed report of the most recent 100 alarms with time and date stamps
can be displayed by entering the Display Alarms (D A) command into
the MMI, which causes a screen similar to Figure 72 "Display Alarm (D A)
screen" (page 308) to appear.

Figure 72
Display Alarm (D A) screen

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by

entering D A P. If there is more than one screen in the log, the MMI scrolls
the log until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next
screen, press any key. The display shows another screen and stops again.
This continues until the entire log has been displayed.

Clear Alarm Log

Clear all entries in the alarm log by typing the Clear Alarm Log (C
A L) command.

Display Status
The Display Status (D S) command displays the current alarm
condition of the E1 link as well as the on-hook or off-hook status of each of
the 30 ports of the LEI. Entering this command causes a screen similar to
Figure 73 "Display Status (D S) screen" (page 309) to appear.

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by

entering D S P. If there is more than one screen, the MMI scrolls until the
screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen, press any
key. The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This continues
until the entire E1 link has been reported on.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 309

Figure 73
Display Status (D S) screen

Performance counters and reporting

The MMI monitors the performance of the E1 link according to several
performance criteria including errored, bursty, unavailable, loss-of-frame
and frame-slip seconds. It registers the performance of these criteria by
reading their status every second and counting their results. These counts
are accumulated for an hour, then reset to 0. Previous hour count results
are maintained for each of the previous 24 hours.
The LEI counts CRC-4 errors when CRC-4 is enabled and Bipolar Violations
(BPV) when CRC-4 is disabled. The performance criteria for which these
counts are maintained as follows:
• Errored seconds are seconds in which one or more CRC-4 / BPV errors,
or one or more out-of-frame errors in one second.
• Bursty seconds are seconds in which more than one and less than 320
CRC-4 / BPV errors in a second.
• Severely errored seconds are seconds in which more than 320 CRC-4 /
BPV errors, or one or more out-of-frames in a second.
• Unavailable seconds are seconds in which unavailable state starts with
10 consecutive severely errored seconds and ends with 10 consecutive
non-severely errored seconds (excluding the final 10 non-severely
errored seconds).
• Loss-of-frame seconds are seconds in which loss-of-frame or
loss-of-signal conditions exist for three consecutive seconds.
• Frame slip seconds are seconds in which one or more frame slips occur.

The MMI also maintains an overall error counter which is the sum of all
errors counted for the performance criteria listed above. The error counter
can only be cleared by entering the Clear Error (C E) command. It
stops counting at 65,000. The error counter provides an easy method

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 310 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

to determine if an alarm condition has been corrected. Clear the error

counter, wait a few minutes, and display the performance to see if any errors
occurred since the counter was cleared.

The MMI display reports on these performance counters through the

Display Performance (D P) or the Display History (D H)
commands.

Display Performance
Entering the Display Performance (D P) command displays
performance counters for the past hour. A screen similar to Figure 74
"Display Performance (D P) screen" (page 310) appears.

Figure 74
Display Performance (D P) screen

Each column, except the error counter, indicates the number of errors in the
current hour and is reset to zero every hour on the hour. Just before the
performance counters are reset to zero, the values are put into the history
log.

The error counter indicates the number of errors since the error counter
was cleared.

The Pause command can be used to display a full screen at a time, by

entering D P P. If more than one screen is to be displayed, the MMI scrolls
until the screen is full, then stops. When ready to see the next screen,
press any key. The display shows one more screen, and stops again. This
continues until the entire display has been shown.

Display History
Entering the Display History (D H) command displays performance
counters for each hour of the past 24 in reverse chronological order,
beginning with the last full hour. A screen similar to Figure 75 "Display
History (D H) screen" (page 311) appears.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 311

The Pause command works the same for Display History as it does for
the other display commands. Simply enter D H P to see a report on the
performance counters, one screen at a time.

Figure 75
Display History (D H) screen

As with all Display commands, the Pause command can be used to

display a full screen of the history report at a time, by entering D H P.

Clear Error
Reset the error counter to zero by entering the Clear Error (C E) command.
The error counter provides a convenient way to determine if the E1 link is
performing without errors since it can be cleared and examined at any time.

Testing
The Test Carrier (T) command allows tests to be run on the LEI, the
E1 link, or the CPE device. The three tests are designed to provide the
capability to isolate faulty conditions in any of these three sources. See
Table 127 "MMI Tests" (page 312) for additional information on these three
test types. Enter the T command, and at the prompt, enter which of these
three tests is to be initiated. The prompt is similar to Figure 76 "Test Carrier
(T) screen" (page 311).

Figure 76
Test Carrier (T) screen

Tests can be performed once, for one through 98 minutes, or continuously

(selected by entering 99 minutes), until a Stop Test command is entered.
Tests continue for the duration specified even if a failure occurs, and

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 312 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

terminate at the end of the time period or when a Stop Test command
is issued. Only Stop Test stops a test with a duration selection of 99;
however, the STOP command terminates a test set to any duration from one
to 99. After entering the test number, a prompt similar to Figure 77 "Test
parameters screen" (page 312) appears.

Figure 77
Test parameters screen

Before a test is run, be sure to verify that the card is disabled, as the tests
interfere with calls currently in process.

During a test, if an invalid word is received, this is recorded by a failure

peg counter. The peg counter has a limit of 65,000. At the end of the test,
the Test Results message indicates how many failures, if any, occurred
during the test.

Table 127 "MMI Tests" (page 312) shows which test to run for the associated
equipment.

Table 127
MMI Tests
Test number Equipment Tested Test Description
1 LEI Local loopback
2 E1 link, LEI, and E1 External loopback
network
3 CPE device and E1 Network loopback
network

Test 1, local loopback, loops the E1 link signaling toward itself at the
backplane connector. Test data is generated and received on all timeslots.
If this test fails, it indicates that the LEI is defective. Figure 78 "MMI Local
loopback test" (page 313) illustrates how the signaling is looped back
toward itself.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Man-Machine E1 maintenance interface software 313

Figure 78
MMI Local loopback test

Test 2, external loopback, applies an external loopback to the E1 link. Test

data is generated and received by the LEI on all timeslots. If test 1 passes
but test 2 fails, it indicates that the E1 link is defective between the LEI and
the external loopback location. If test 1 was not run and test 2 fails, the E1
link or the LEI could be defective. To isolate the failure to the E1 link, tests 1
and 2 must be run in tandem. Figure 79 "MMI External loopback test" (page
313) demonstrates how an external loopback is applied to the E1 link.

Figure 79
MMI External loopback test

Test 3, network loopback, loops the LEI’s received E1 data back toward the
CPE. No test data is generated or received by the LEI. If test 2 passes but
test 3 fails, it indicates that the CPE device is defective. If test 2 was not run
and test 3 fails, the E1 link or the CPE device could be defective. To isolate
the failure to the CPE device, tests 2 and 3 must be run in tandem. Figure
80 "MMI Network loopback test" (page 314) illustrates how the signaling is
looped back toward the CPE.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 314 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Figure 80
MMI Network loopback test

Applications
The LEI is an IPE line card that provides cost-effective connection between
E1-compatible IPE and a CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system or
off-premise extensions over long distances.
Some examples of applications where an LEI can be interfaced to an E1
link are:
• E1-compatible VRU equipment
• E1-compatible turret systems
• E1-compatible wireless systems
• Remote analog (500/2500-type) telephones through E1 to channel bank
• Remote Norstar sites behind CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1
over E1

The LEI is appropriate for any application where both E1 connectivity

and "lineside" functionality are required. This includes connections to
E1-compatible voice response units, voice messaging and trading turret
(used in stock market applications) systems. See Figure 81 "LEI connection
to IPE" (page 315).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 315

Figure 81
LEI connection to IPE

For example, the LEI can be used to connect the system to an E1-compatible
Voice Response Unit (VRU). An example of this type of equipment is Nortel
Open IVR system. In this way, the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian
1 can send a call to the VRU, and, because the LEI supports analog
(500/2500-type) telephone functionality, the VRU is able to send the call
back to the system for further handling.

The LEI can also be used to provide off-premise extensions to remote

locations, up to 500 miles from the system. In this application, analog
telephone functionality is extended over E1 facilities, providing a telephone
at a remote site with access to analog (500/2500-type) telephone line
functionality. See Figure 82 "LEI in off-premise extension application" (page
315). Audible Message Waiting Indicator can be provided as well.

Figure 82
LEI in off-premise extension application

Similarly, use the LEI to provide a connection between the system and a
remote Norstar system. See Figure 83 "LEI connection to Norstar system"
(page 316). In this case, channel banks are not required if the Norstar
system is equipped with an E1 interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 316 NT5D33 and NT5D34 Lineside E1 Interface cards

Note: Consider LEI audio levels when determining the appropriateness

of an application.

Figure 83
LEI connection to Norstar system

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 317

NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card

(XCMC)
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 317)

"Physical description" (page 318)

"Functional description" (page 318)

"Electrical specifications" (page 322)

"Configuration" (page 323)

Introduction
The NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card supports the Custom Local Area
Signaling Services (CLASS) feature. The CLASS Modem card receives
Calling Number and Calling Name Delivery (CND) data and time/date data
from the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1and transmits it to a line
port, such as a port on an Analog Line card, which delivers the CND data to
a CLASS telephone when presenting the telephone with a new call.

For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
feature, refer to Features and Services (NN43001-106-B). For administration
and maintenance commands, see Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611) .The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card
supports the Custom Local Area Signaling Services (CLASS) feature. The
CLASS Modem card receives Calling Number and Calling Name Delivery
(CND) data and time/date data from the system and transmits it to a line
port, such as a port on an Analog Line card, which delivers the CND data to
a CLASS telephone when presenting the telephone with a new call.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 318 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

For information about the CLASS: Calling Number and Name Delivery
feature, please refer to Features and Services (NN43001-106-B). For
administration and maintenance commands, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

Physical description
CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 IPE modules.

The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm

(12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to
the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED
that lights when the card is disabled. When the card is installed, the
LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test
completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the
card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the
LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

CLASS Modem cards are housed in NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral

Equipment (IPE) Modules.

The CLASS modem card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm

(12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to
the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the CLASS modem card is equipped with a red LED
that lights when the card is disabled. When the card is installed, the
LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test
completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the
card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the
LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Functional description
The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral
card slots of the IPE module. The CLASS modem card supports up to
32 transmit-only modem resources, using a DS30X interface. Up to 255
modems can be configured per system.

The CND transmission process begins with the CS 1000 software sending
an initiating message to the CLASS Modem card indicating the length of the
CND information and the type of the CND information flow to be transmitted.
In response, the CLASS Modem card assigns a message buffer to capture
the CND information from the CS 1000 software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 319

System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem
card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the
CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the
initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included
in the CND memory buffer.

Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the
CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system
software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem
card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent.

The transmission of the calling party name/number to the terminating

telephone is accomplished through asynchronous FSK simplex-mode
transmission at 1200 bits/second over a 2-wire loop, in accordance with the
Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implemented by the appropriate
PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz.

Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card
sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission
of the CND data.

Eight modems can be associated with each module. Table 128 "Time slot
mapping" (page 319) shows time slot mapping for the CLASS modem card.

Table 128
Time slot mapping
XCMC mapping of TNs
DS30X Modem units on the CLASS
TNs timeslot Modem card
00 00 module 0, 00
01 01 01
02 02 02
03 03 03
04 04 04
05 05 05
06 06 06
07 07 07
module 1,
08 08
00
09 09
01
10 10
02
11 11
03

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 320 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

XCMC mapping of TNs

DS30X Modem units on the CLASS
TNs timeslot Modem card
12 12 04
13 13 05
14 14 06
15 15 07
module 2,
16 16
00
17 17
01
18 18
02
19 19
03
20 20 04
21 21 05
22 22 06
23 23 07
module 3,
24 24
00
25 25
01
26 26
02
27 27
03
28 28 04
29 29 05
30 30 06
31 31 07

The CLASS Modem card is designed to plug into any one of the peripheral
card slots of the IPE module. The CLASS modem card supports up to
32 transmit-only modem resources, using a DS30X interface. Up to 255
modems can be configured per system.

The CND transmission process begins with the system software sending an
initiating message to the CLASS Modem card indicating the length of the
CND information and the type of the CND information flow to be transmitted.
In response, the CLASS Modem card assigns a message buffer to capture
the CND information from the system software.

System software then sends the CND information to the CLASS Modem
card, one byte at a time, where it is stored in the message buffer. If the
CLASS Modem card receives more bytes than were specified in the
initiating message, then the additional bytes are discarded and not included
in the CND memory buffer.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 321

Once all of the CND information has been stored in the memory buffer, the
CLASS Modem card begins transmission when requested by the system
software. Data is sent one ASCII character at a time. The CLASS Modem
card inserts a start and stop bit to each ASCII character sent.

The transmission of the calling party name/number to the terminating

telephone is accomplished through asynchronous FSK simplex-mode
transmission at 1200 bits/second over a 2-wire loop, in accordance with the
Bell 202 standard. The transmission is implemented by the appropriate
PCM equivalent of 1200 or 2200 Hz.

Upon completion of transmitting the CND data, the CLASS Modem card
sends a message to the system software to indicate successful transmission
of the CND data.

Eight modems can be associated with each module. Table 129 "Time slot
mapping" (page 321) shows time slot mapping for the CLASS modem card.

Table 129
Time slot mapping
XCMC mapping of TNs
DS30X Modem units on the CLASS
TNs timeslot Modem card
module 0,
00 00
00
01 01
01
02 02
02
03 03
03
04 04 04
05 05 05
06 06 06
07 07 07
module 1,
08 08
00
09 09
01
10 10
02
11 11
03
12 12 04
13 13 05
14 14 06
15 15 07

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 322 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

XCMC mapping of TNs

DS30X Modem units on the CLASS
TNs timeslot Modem card
module 2,
16 16
00
17 17
01
18 18
02
19 19
03
20 20 04
21 21 05
22 22 06
23 23 07
module 3,
24 24
00
25 25
01
26 26
02
27 27
03
28 28 04
29 29 05
30 30 06
31 31 07

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card.

This section lists the electrical characteristic of the CLASS modem card.

Data transmission specifications

Table 130 "CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics"
(page 322) provides specifications for the 32 transmit-only modem
resources.

Table 130
CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Units per card 32 transmit only modem resources
Transmission rate 1200 ± 12 baud

The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network.

Table 131 "CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics"

(page 323) provides specifications for the 32 transmit-only modem
resources.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 323

Table 131
CLASS modem card-data transmission electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Units per card 32 transmit only modem resources
Transmission rate 1200 ± 12 baud

The CLASS modem card has no direct connection to the Public Network.

Power requirements
The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5V dc ± 1%
supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf.

The CLASS modem card requires less than 1.0 Amps of +5V dc ± 1%
supply supplied by the power converter in the IPE shelf.

Environmental specifications
Table 132 "CLASS modem card - environmental specifications" (page
323) shows the environmental specifications of the card.

Table 132
CLASS modem card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 C to +65 C (+32  F to +149  F)
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –50 C to +70 C (–58  F to +158  F)

Table 133 "CLASS modem card - environmental specifications" (page

323) shows the environmental specifications of the card.

Table 133
CLASS modem card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 C to +65 C (+32  F to +149  F)
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –50 C to +70 C (–58  F to +158  F)

Configuration
The NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers
or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane
and reports that information back to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and
Meridian 1 CPU through the Card LAN interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 324 NT5D60/80/81 CLASS Modem card (XCMC)

The NT5D60AA CLASS Modem card has no user-configurable jumpers or

switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane
and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through the
Cardlan interface.

Software service changes

On systems equipped with either CNUMB (package 332) or CNAME
(package 333), up to 255 CLASS Modem (CMOD) units can be configured
in LD 13, and analog (500/2500-type) telephones can be assigned as
CLASS telephones in LD 10 by assigning them CNUS, or CNUA and CNAA
class of service. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 13 service change instructions.On
systems which are equipped with either CNUMB (package 332) or CNAME
(package 333), up to 255 CLASS Modem (CMOD) units can be configured
in LD 13, and analog (500/2500-type) telephones can be assigned as
CLASS telephones in LD 10 by assigning them CNUS, or CNUA and CNAA
class of service. See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 13 service change instructions.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 325

NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Contents
The following are the topics in this section:

"Introduction" (page 325)

"Physical description" (page 326)

"Functional description" (page 340)

"Architecture" (page 350)

"Operation" (page 355)

Introduction
This section contains information required to install the NT5D97 Dual-port
DTI2/PRI2 (DDP2) card.

The NT5D97 is a dual-port 2.0 Mb DTI2/PRI2 card (the DDP2 firmware

functions in DTI2 or PRI2 mode, depending on DIP switch settings) that
integrates the functionality of two NT8D72BA PRI2 cards, and one QPC414
ENET card into a single CE card. The NT5D97 occupies a single slot in
the Network shelf and provides two DTI2/PRI2 network connections: an
interface to an external D-Channel Handler (the NT6D11AF) or the NT6D80
Multi-purpose Serial Data Link card, and an optional plug-on NTBK51AA
Downloadable D-Channel daughterboard (DDCH) with two DCH interface
ports.

The NT5D97 DDP2 card can be mixed in the same machine with PRI2
NT8D72BA cards.

The NT5D97 DDP2 card hardware design uses a B57 ASIC E1/T1 framer.
The carrier specifications comply with the ANSI TI.403 specification. The
NT5D97 provides an interface to the 2.048 Mbps external digital line
either directly or through an office repeater, Network Channel Terminating
Equipment (NCTE), or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 326 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

DANGER
DANGER OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
The NT5D97 DDP2 card is not designed to be connected
directly to the Public Switched Network, or other exposed plant
networks. Such a connection should only be done using an
isolating-type networking terminating device that provides voltage
surge protection, such as a Line Terminating Unit (LTU), Network
Channel Terminating Equipment (NCTE), or Network Termination
1 (NT1), as certified by your local, regional, or national safety
agency and telecommunication authority.

Physical description
External D-Channel Interface DCH or MSDL
The connection between the DDP2 card and the external DCH or MSDL is
through a 26-pin female D type connector. The data signals conform to the
electrical characteristics of the EIA standard RS-422.
Two control signals are used to communicate the D-channel link status
to the DCH or MSDL. These are:
• Receiver Ready (RR), originating at the DDP2 card, to indicate to the
DCH or MSDL that the D-channel link is operational.
• Transmitter Ready (TR), originating at the DCH or MSDL, to indicate to
the DDP2 card that the DCH are ready to use the D-channel link.

Table 134 "DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals" (page 326) indicates
how the RR control signal operates with regard to the DDP2 status.

Table 134
DCH/MSDL Receiver Ready control signals
RR State Condition
ON • D-Channel data rate selected at 64 Kbps.
• PRI2 loop is enabled.
• PRI2 link is not in OOS or Local Alarm mode state.
• PRI2 link is not transmitting a Remote Alarm pattern.
• PRI2 link is not receiving a Remote Alarm Indication from a
remote facility.
OFF All other conditions

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 327

NT5D97 faceplate
Figure 84 "NT5D97 faceplate" (page 327) illustrates the faceplate layout
for the NT5D97 DDP card. The faceplate contains an enable/disable
switch; a DDCH status LED; 6 x 2 trunk port status LEDs; and six external
connectors. Table 135 "External connectors and LEDs" (page 328) shows
the name of each connector, its designation with respect to the faceplate
and the name and description of the card it is connected to. Also shown
are the names of the LEDs.

Figure 84
NT5D97 faceplate

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 328 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Table 135
External connectors and LEDs
Faceplate
Function Designator Type Description
Switch ENB/DIS Plastic, ESD Card Enable/disable switch
protected
Connectors Unit 0 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock
Controller card 0
Unit 0 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 0 to Clock
Controller card 1
Unit 1 Clock 0 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 1 to Clock
Controller card 0
Unit 1 Clock 1 RJ11 Connector Connects reference clock 1 to Clock
Controller card 1
J5 TRK 9 Pin Two external E1 Trunk 0 and Trunk 1
Female D
Connector
J6 DCH 26 Pin Connects to external DCH or MSDL
Female D
Connector
LEDs ENET 2 Red LEDs ENET 0 or ENET 1 is disabled
DIS 2 Red LEDs Trunk 0 or Trunk 1 is disabled
OOS 2 Yellow LEDs Trunk is out of service
NEA 2 Yellow LEDs Local (Near End) Alarm
FEA 2 Yellow LEDs Far End Alarm
LBK 2 Yellow LEDs Loop Back test being performed on Trunk
0 or Trunk 1
DCH Bicolor Red/Green NTBK51AA status
LED

The following sections provide a brief description of each element on the

faceplate.

Enable/Disable Switch
This switch is used to disable the card prior to insertion or removal from the
network shelf. While this switch is in disable position, the card does not
respond to the system CPU.

ENET LEDs
Two red LEDs indicate if the "ENET0" and "ENET1" portions of the card are
disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
• When the enable/disable switch is in disabled state (lit by hardware).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 329

• After power-up, before the card is enabled.

• When the ENET port on the card is disabled by software.

Trunk Disable (DIS) LEDs

Two red LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" portions of the
card are disabled. These LEDs are lit in the following cases:
• Upon reception of the "disable loop" message from the software.
• After power-up.

OOS LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the "trunk port 0" and "trunk port 1" portions of
the card are out of service.

NEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if the near end detects absence of incoming signal
or loss of synchronization in "trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1" respectively.
The near-end alarm causes a far-end alarm signal to be transmitted to
the far end.

FEA LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a far-end alarm has been reported by the far
end (usually in response to a near-end alarm condition at the far end) on
"trunk port 0" or "trunk port 1".

LBK LEDs
Two yellow LEDs indicate if a remote loopback test is being performed on
trunk port 0 or trunk port 1. The loopback indication is active when the
digital trunk is in remote loopback mode. Normal call processing is inhibited
during the remote loopback test.

DCH LED
When the dual colored LED is red, it indicates the on-board DDCH is
present but disabled. When the dual colored LED is green, it indicates the
on-board DDCH is present and enabled. If a DDCH is not configured on
the DDP2 card, this lamp is not lit.

Unit 0 Clk Connectors

Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
• Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.
• Digital trunk unit 0 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 330 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Unit 1 Clk Connectors

Two RJ11 connectors for connecting:
• Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 0.
• Digital trunk unit 1 recovered clock to primary or secondary reference
source on clock controller card 1.

Connector J5 (TRK)
A 9 pin D-Type connector used to connect:
• Digital trunk unit 0 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.
• Digital trunk unit 1 receive and transmit Tip / Ring pairs.

Connector J6 (DCH)
A 26 pin D-type connector is used to connect the DDP2 card to the external
MSDL or D-channel handler.

Port definitions
Since the NT5D97 card is dual-card, it equips two ports; these ports can be
defined in the following combinations:

Table 136
NT5D97AA/AB loops configuration
Loop 0
not configured DTI2 PRI2
Loop 1 not configured V V V
DTI2 V V V
PRI2 V V V

Table 137
NT5D97AD loops configuration
Loop 0
not configured DTI PRI DDCS
2 2
Loop 1 not configured V V V V
DTI2 V V V V
PRI2 V V V X
DDCS V V X V

Note: Each loop DPNSS can be defined in Normal or Extended

addressing mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 331

System capacity and performance

Physical capacity
Each NT5D97 DDP2 card occupies one slot on the network shelf. Each card
supports two digital trunk circuits and two network loops. The total number
of DDP2 cards per system is limited by the number of network loops,
physical capacity of the shelf, number of DTI2/PRI2 interfaces allowed by
the software and the range of DCH addresses.

D-Channel capacity
The software configuration for the NTBK51AA DDCH is similar to the MSDL
and only supports D-channel functionality.

The system has a total capacity of 16 addresses (Device Addresses or

DNUM) that can be reserved for DCH card, MSDL card or DDCH card. One
exception is DNUM 0 which is commonly assigned to the TTY terminal.

No two different D-Channel providers can share the same DNUM. Hence,
the combined maximum number of DCH, MSDL and DDCH cards in the
system is 16.

The DCH has one D-Channel unit, the DDCH has two D-Channel units,
and the MSDL has a maximum of four units. Therefore, the total number
of D-Channel is derived by the following formula:

Total_Num_DCH-Units = Num_DCHx1 + Num_DDCHx2 +

Num_MSDLx4

Therefore, Total_Num_DCH-Units in any given system is between 0-63.

CPU capacity
Using a NT5D97 DDP2 card instead of DTI2/PRI2 cards does not increase
the load on the CPU. The DDP2 replaces an ENET card and two DTI2/PRI2
cards. Emulating the ENET card and the overall CPU capacity is not
impacted by using a DDP2 card instead of a DTI2/PRI2 card.

Power requirements
Table 138 "NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements" (page 331) lists the power
requirements for the NT5D97 DDP2 card.

Table 138
NT5D97 DDP2 power requirements
Voltage Source Current
DDP2 DDP2
(without (with
NTBK51AA) NTBK51AA)
+5V Backplane 3A 3.8A

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 332 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Voltage Source Current

DDP2 DDP2
(without (with
NTBK51AA) NTBK51AA)
+12V Backplane 25mA 75mA
-12V Backplane 25mA 75mA
Total Power (Maximum) 15.6W 20.8W

Cable requirements
This section lists the types of cable used and the lengths required for
internal and external NT5D97 DDP2 connections.
Note: No additional cabling is required for nB+D configurations. Multiple
DDP2 cards and the D-channel are associated through software in
LD 17.

DDP2 cable assemblies include:

• E1 carrier cables
— NTCK45AA (A0407956)
— NT8D7217 (A0617192)
— NTCK78AA (A0618294)
— NTCK79AA (A0618296)

• DDP2 to QPC471/QPC775 Clock Controller Cables

— NTCG03AA
— NTCG03AB
— NTCG03AC
— NTCG03AD

• DDP2 to DCH cables

— NTCK46AA
— NTCK46AB
— NTCK46AC
— NTCK46AD

• DDP2 to MSDL cables

— NTCK80AA
— NTCK80AB

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 333

— NTCK80AC
— NTCK80AD

A description of each type of DDP2 cable follows.

E1 carrier cables
NTCK45AA (A0407956) The NTCK45AA (8 ft.) is an 120W cable for
systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the TRK port (P1,
D-type 9 pin male) on the DDP2 faceplate to the I/O filter (P2, P3 D-type 9
pin males).

Figure 85
NTCK45AA

Table 139 "NTCK45AA cable pins" (page 333) which follows lists the pin
attributes for the NTCK45AA cable.

Table 139
NTCK45AA cable pins
DDP2 I/O Pane
Cable Name Description Color pins pins
0 T-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Black P1-1 P2-6
0 R-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Ring Red P2-2 P2-7
0 T-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Tip Black P1-3 P2-2
0 R-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Ring White P1-4 P2-3
0 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P2
0 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P2
0 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P2-5
P2
0 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P2-9
P2
1 T-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Black P1-5 P3-6
1 R-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Red P1-6 P3-7
1 T-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black P1-7 P3-2

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 334 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

DDP2 I/O Pane

Cable Name Description Color pins pins
1 R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring White P1-8 P3-3
1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3
1 GND Shield Wire Bare N/C Case P3
1 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P3-5
P3
1 Standard Wire (3") Bare Case P3-9
P3

NT8D7217 (A0617192) The NT8D7217 (50 ft.) is an 120W cable for

systems equipped with an I/O filter panel, connecting the 9 pin I/O filter
connector to the 9 pin NCTE connector.

Figure 86
NT8D7217

Table 140 "NT8D7217 cable pins" (page 334) which follows lists the pin
attributes for the NT8D7217 cable.

Table 140
NT8D7217 cable pins
DDP2 I/O Panel
Cable Name Description Color pins pins
0 T-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Black P1-6 P2-6
0 R-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Ring White P1-7 P2-7
0 T-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Tip Black P1-2 P2-2
0 R-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Ring Red P1-3 P2-3
0 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-5 N/C
0 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-9 N/C
1 T-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Black P1-6 P2-6
1 R-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Ring White P1-7 P2-7
1 T-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black P1-2 P2-2
1 R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring Red P1-3 P2-3

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 335

DDP2 I/O Panel

Cable Name Description Color pins pins
1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-5 N/C
1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1-9 N/C

NTCK78AA (A0618294) The NTCK78AA (50 ft.) is an 120W cable for

connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male)
to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) (P2, P3 D-type 15 pin males). The
NTCK78AA is used for systems not equipped with an I/O filter panel.

Figure 87
NTCK78AA

Table 141 "NTCK78AA cable pins" (page 335) lists the pin attributes for
the NTCK78AA cable.

Table 141
NTCK78AA cable pins
DDP2
Cable Name Description Color pins NCTE pins
0 T-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Black P1-1 P2-1
0 R-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Ring Red P1-2 P2-9
0 T-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Tip Black P1-3 P2-3
0 R-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Ring White P1-4 P2-11
0 GND Shield Wire Bare P1 Case P2-2
0 GND Shield Wire Bare P1 Case P2-4
1 T-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Black P1-5 P3-1
1 R-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Red P1-6 P3-9
1 T-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Tip Black P1-7 P3-3
1 R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring White P1-8 P3-11
1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1 Case P3-2
1 GND Shield Wire Bare P1 Case P3-4

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 336 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

NTCK79AA (A0618296) The NTCK79AA (40 ft) is a 75W coaxial cable for
connecting the TRK port on the DDP2 faceplate (P1, D-type 9 pin male) to
the Line Terminating Unit (LTU) (P2, P3, P4, P5 BNC males).

Figure 88
NTCK79AA

Table 142 "NTCK79AA cable pins" (page 336) lists the pin attributes for
the NTCK79AA cable.

Table 142
NTCK79AA cable pins
DDP2
Cable Name Description Color pins NCTE pins
0 T-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Tip Red P1-1 P2 inner
conductor
0 R-PRI0TX Trunk 0 Transmit Ring Red P1-2 P2 shield
0 T-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Tip Green P1-3 P3 inner
conductor
0 R-PRI0RX Trunk 0 Receive Ring Green P1-4 P3 shield
1 T-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Red P1-5 P4 inner
conductor
1 R-PRI1TX Trunk 1 Transmit Ring Red P1-6 P4 shield
1 T-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Transmit Tip Green P1-7 P5 inner
conductor
1 R-PRI1RX Trunk 1 Receive Ring Green P1-8 P5 shield
1 Outer metallized PVC Bare N/C P1 Case
shield
1 3 stranded wire Bare N/C P1 Case

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 337

Reference clock cables

The NTCG03AA (14 ft), NTCG03AB (2.8 ft), NTCG03AC (4.0 ft), or
NTCG03AD (7 ft), is a DDP2 card to Clock Controller cable, connecting
each of the CLK0 or CLK1 ports on the DDP2 faceplate to the primary or
secondary source ports on Clock Controller card 0 or 1.

Figure 89
NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD

MSDL/DCH cables
External DCH cable
The NTCK46 cable connects the DDP2 card to the
NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA D-Channel Handler card.
The cable is available in four different sizes:
• NTCK46AA (6 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
• NTCK46AB (18 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
• NTCK46AC (35 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable
• NTCK46AD (50 ft.) - DDP2 to DCH cable

Figure 90
NTCK46AA/AB/AC/AD

External MSDL cable

The NTCK80 cable connects the DDP2 card to the NT6D80 MSDL card.
The cable is available in four different sizes:
• NTCK80AA (6 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 338 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

• NTCK80AB (18 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

• NTCK80AC (35 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable
• NTCK80AD (50 ft) - DDP2 to MSDL cable

Figure 91
NTCK80AA/AB/AC/AD

Cable diagrams
Figure 92 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 339) and
Figure 93 "DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel" (page 340) provide
examples of typical cabling configurations for the DDP2.

Figure 92 "DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel" (page 339) shows a
typical DDP2 cabling for a system with an I/O panel, with the connection
between the I/O panel and a Network Channel Terminating Equipment
(NCTE).

Figure 93 "DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel" (page 340) shows
cabling for a system without an I/O panel. Here, the DDP2 faceplate is
cabled directly to the NCTE.

Note: Since several clock cabling options exists, none has been
represented in the diagrams. Refer to "Clock configurations" (page
353) for a description on each available option.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 339

Figure 92
DDP2 cable for systems with an I/O panel

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 340 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 93
DDP2 cable for systems without an I/O panel

Functional description
NT5D97 circuit card locations
Each NT5D97 card requires one slot on a shelf. NT5D97 cards can be
placed in any card slot in the network bus.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 341

Note in all cases - If an NT8D72BA/NTCK43 card is being replaced by

a DDP2 card, the D-channel Handler can be reconnected to the DDP2
card, or removed if an onboard NTBK51DDCH card is used. Also, DIP
Switches in the NT5D97 must be set properly before insertion. NT5D97 has
a different DIP Switch setting from NTCK43AB. Refer to "NT5D97AA/AB
DIP switch settings" (page 341) for DIP switch setting).

NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings

The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for
trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally,
the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and
NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.

The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain
parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the
default values accordingly.

Table 143
DIP switch settings for NT5D97AA/AB
Trunks
Card 0 and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1
ENB/DSB S1
mounted on the face plate
Ring Ground S2
MSDL S3
TX Mode S4 S10
LBO Setting S5 S11
S6 S12
S7 S13
Receiver Interface S8 S14
General Purpose S9 S15

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows
the factory set-up.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 342 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 94
Dip switches for NT5D97AA/AB

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AA/AB

Impedance level and unit mode
The S9/S15 switch selects the impedance level and loop operation mode
on DEI2 OR PRI2. Refer to Table 144 "Impedance level and loop mode
switch settings" (page 343).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 343

Table 144
Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Swit Description S9/S15 Switch Setting
ch
1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm
ON - 75 ohm
2 Spare X
3 Spare X
4 Unit mode OFF - Loop operates in the DTI2 mode
ON - Loop operates in the PRI2 mode

Transmission mode
A per-trunk switch (S4/S10) provides selection of the digital trunk interface
type. Refer to Table 145 "Impedance level and loop mode switch settings"
(page 343).

Table 145
Impedance level and loop mode switch settings
Description S4/S10 switch settings
E1 OFF
Not used

Line build out

A per-trunk set of three switches (S5/S11, S6/S12 and S7/S13) provides
the dB value for the line build out. Refer to Table 146 "Trunk interface line
build out switch settings" (page 343).

Note: Do not change this setup.

Table 146
Trunk interface line build out switch settings
Switch setting
Description S5/S11 S6/S12 S7/S13
0dB OFF OFF OFF

Receiver impedance
A per-trunk set of four DIP switches (S8/S14 provides selection between 75
or 120 ohm values. Refer to Table 147 "Trunk interface impedance switch
settings" (page 344).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 344 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Table 147
Trunk interface impedance switch settings
Description S8/S14 switch setting
75 ohm OFF OFF ON OFF
120 ohm OFF OFF OFF ON

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AA/AB

A set of four Dip switches (S2) selects which Ring lines are connected to
ground. Refer to Table 148 "Ring ground switch settings" (page 344).

Table 148
Ring ground switch settings
Switch Description S2 switch settingS
1 Trunk 0 Transit OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
2 Trunk 0 Receive OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
3 Trunk 1 Transmit OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded
4 Trunk 1 Receive OFF-Ring line is not grounded
ON- Ring line is grounded

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for

NT5D97AA/AB
In case of an on-board NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard, set of four
switches (S3) provide the daughterboard address. Refer to Table 156 "Trunk
1 switches" (page 349).

Note: Switch 8 of S3 (S3-8) does not require a switch setting to select

between the on-board NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard and
an external DCHI/MSDL. The NT5D97 detects when the on-board
NTBK51AA D-channel daughterboard is used.

Table 149
DCH mode and address switch settings
Swit Description S3 switch setting
ch
1-4 D-channel daughterboard address See Table 150
"NTBK51AA
daughterboard
address select switch
settings" (page 345)
5-8 For future use OFF

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 345

Table 150 "NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings" (page

345) shows the possible selection of the NTBK51AA D-channel.

Table 150
NTBK51AA daughterboard address select switch settings
Device Address Switch Setting
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON
Note 1: The system contains a maximum number of 16 DCHI, MSDL, and DDCH devices. The
Device Addresses are equivalent to the MSDL DNUM designations.
Note 2: Device address 0 is commonly assigned to the System TTYD Monitor.

NT5D97AD DIP switch settings

The the NT5D97 DDP2 card is equipped with 6x2 sets of DIP switches for
trunk parameters settings for port0 and port1 respectively. Additionally,
the DDP2 card is equipped with one set of four DIP switches for the Ring
Ground setting. The NT5D97AA/AB has one set of eight DIP switches and
NT5D97AD has two sets of ten DIP switches for the D-channel Handler
parameters setting.

The DIP switches are used for the setting of default values of certain
parameters. Firmware reads the general purpose switches, which sets the
default values accordingly.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 346 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Table 151
DIP switch settings for NT5D97AD
Trunks 0
Card and 1 Port 0 Port 1 Trunk 0 Trunk 1
ENB/DSB S1
mounted on the face plate
Ring Ground S16
DPNSS S8 S9
MSDL S9
TX Mode S2 S10
LBO Setting S3 S13
S4 S14
S5 S15
Receiver Interface S6 S11
General Purpose S12 S7

Refer to DIP switch locations in Figure 95 "Dip switches locations for

NT5D97AD" (page 347).

The following parameters are set by DIP switches. The boldface font shows
the factory set-up.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 347

Figure 95
Dip switches locations for NT5D97AD

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 348 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Trunk interface switches for NT5D97AD

Trunk 0 switches Switch S12 gives the MPU information about its
environment.

Table 152
General purpose switches for NT5D97AD
Switch Description S9/S15 Switch Setting
S12_1 Impedance level OFF - 120 ohm
ON - 75 ohm
S12_2 Spare X
S12_3 Spare X
S12_4 Unit mode OFF - Unit operates in the DTI2 mode
ON - Unit operates in the PRI2 mode

Switch S2 selects the Transmission mode.

Table 153
TX mode switches for NT5D97AD
TX mode S2
E1 OFF
Not used ON

Switch S3, S4, and S5 select LBO function.

Table 154
LBO switches for NT5D97AD
LBO setting S3 S4 S5
0dB OFF OFF OFF
7.5dB ON ON OFF
15dB ON OFF ON

Switch S6 selects the Receiver interface.

Table 155
Receiver interface switches for NT5D97AD
Impedance S6-1 S6-2 S6-3 S6-4
75 ohm OFF OFF ON OFF
120 ohm OFF OFF OFF ON

Trunk 1 switches for NT5D97AD

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 349

Table 156
Trunk 1 switches
Switch Function
S7 General Purpose...See Table 152 "General purpose
switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348)
S10 TX Mode...See Table 153 "TX mode switches for
NT5D97AD" (page 348)
S13, S14 & S15 LBO...See Table 154 "LBO switches for NT5D97AD"
(page 348)
S11 RX Impedance...See Table 155 "Receiver interface
switches for NT5D97AD" (page 348)

Ring ground switches for NT5D97AD Switch S16 selects which ring
lines connect to ground. When set to ON, the ring line is grounded.

Table 157
Ring ground switch for NT5D97AD
Switch Line
S16_1 Trunk 0 Transmit
S16_2 Trunk 0 Receive
S16_3 Trunk 1 Transmit
S16_4 Trunk 1 Receive

DCH Address select switch for NTBK51AA daughterboard for NT5D97AD

Switch S9 selects the NTBK51AA DCH daughter card address.

Switch S8 is not used when the NTBK51AA daughter card is used. S8_1-10
can be set to OFF position.

Table 158
NTBK51AA DCH switches for NT5D97AD
Switch number Function
S9_1-4 DCH daughter card address
S9_5-8 Set to OFF
S9_9 Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)
S9_10 Set to ON (NTBK51AA Mode)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 350 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

MSDL external card

Table 159
Switch settings for MSDL external card
Switch number Function
S9_1-10 X
S8_1-10 X

Use Table 160 "Switch setting for MSDL external card" (page 350) to set
the card address.

Table 160
Switch setting for MSDL external card
Switch Setting
DNUM (LD 17) 1 2 3 4
0 OFF OFF OFF OFF
1 ON OFF OFF OFF
2 OFF ON OFF OFF
3 ON ON OFF OFF
4 OFF OFF ON OFF
5 ON OFF ON OFF
6 OFF ON ON OFF
7 ON ON ON OFF
8 OFF OFF OFF ON
9 ON OFF OFF ON
10 OFF ON OFF ON
11 ON ON OFF ON
12 OFF OFF ON ON
13 ON OFF ON ON
14 OFF ON ON ON
15 ON ON ON ON

Architecture
Clock operation
There are two types of clock operation - tracking mode and free-run mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 351

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, the DDP2 loop supplies an external clock reference to a
clock controller. Two DDP2 loops can operate in tracking mode, with one
defined as the primary reference source for clock synchronization, the other
defined as the secondary reference source. The secondary reference acts
as a back-up to the primary reference.

As shown in Figure 96 "Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking"

(page 351), a system with dual CPUs can use two clock controllers (CC-0
and CC-1). One clock controller acts as a back-up to the other. The clock
controllers should be completely locked to the reference clock.

Free run (non-tracking) mode

The clock synchronization of the can operate in free-run mode if:
• no loop is defined as the primary or secondary clock reference,
• the primary and secondary references are disabled, or
• the primary and secondary references are in local (near end) alarm

Figure 96
Clock Controller primary and secondary tracking

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 352 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Reference clock errors

CS 1000 software checks at intervals of 1 to 15 minutes to see if a clock
controller or reference-clock error has occurred. (The interval of this check
can be configured in LD 73).

In tracking mode, at any one time, there is one active clock controller which
is tracking on one reference clock. If a clock controller error is detected, the
system switches to the back-up clock controller, without affecting which
reference clock is being tracked.

A reference-clock error occurs when there is a problem with the clock driver
or with the reference clock at the far end. If the clock controller detects a
reference-clock error, the reference clocks are switched.

Automatic clock recovery

A command for automatic clock recovery can be selected in LD 60 with
the command EREF.
A DDP2 loop is disabled when it enters a local-alarm condition. If the local
alarm is cleared, the loop is enabled automatically. When the loop is
enabled, clock tracking is restored in the following conditions:
• If the loop is assigned as the primary reference clock but the clock
controller is tracking on the secondary reference or in free-run mode, it
is restored to tracking on primary.
• If the loop is assigned as the secondary reference clock but the clock
controller is in free-run mode, it is restored to tracking on secondary.
• If the clock check indicates the switch is in free-run mode:
— Tracking is restored to the primary reference clock if defined.
— If the primary reference is disabled or in local alarm, tracking is
restored to the secondary reference clock if defined.

Note: If the system is put into free-run mode by the craftsperson,

it resumes tracking on a reference clock unless the clock-switching
option is disabled (LD 60, command MREF), or the reference clock
is "undefined" in the database.

Automatic clock switching

If the EREF command is selected in LD 60, tracking on the primary or
secondary reference clock is automatically switched in the following manner:
• If software is unable to track on the assigned primary reference clock, it
switches to the secondary reference clock and sends appropriate DTC
maintenance messages.
• If software is unable to track on the assigned secondary reference clock,
it switches to free run.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 353

Clock configurations
Clock Controllers can be used in a single or a dual CPU system.

A single CPU system has one Clock Controller card. This card can receive
reference clocks from two sources referred to as the primary and secondary
sources. These two sources can originate from a PRI2, DTI2, etc. PRI2
cards such as the NT8D72BA are capable of supplying two references of
the same clock source. These are known as Ref1 (available at J1) and Ref2
(available at J2) on the NT8D72BA.

The NT5D97 card is capable of supplying two references from each clock
source, for example, four references in total. NT5D97 can supply Clk0 and
Clk1 from Unit 0 and Clk0 and Clk1 from Unit 1. Either Unit 0 or Unit 1 can
originate primary source, as shown in Figure 97 "Clock Controller - Option
1" (page 355) through Figure 100 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page 358).

There is one Clock Controller cable required for the DDP2 card, which
is available in four sizes; this is the NTCG03AA/AB/AC/AD. Refer to
"Reference clock cables" (page 337) for more information.

Table 161 "Clock Controller options - summary" (page 353) summarizes the
clocking options. Table 162 "Clock Controller options - description" (page
354) explains the options in more detail.

Table 161
Clock Controller options - summary
CC Option CPU Type Notes
Option 1 Single Ref from P0 on Clk0

Ref from P1 on Clk0

Option 2 Dual Ref from P0 on Clk0

Ref from P0 on Clk1

Option 3 Dual Ref from P1 on Clk0

Ref from P1 on Clk1

Option 4 Dual Ref from P0 on Clk0

Ref from P0 on Clk1

Ref from P1 on Clk0

Ref from P1 on Clk1

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 354 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Table 162
Clock Controller options - description
Clock Notes
Option
Option 1 This option provides a single CPU system with 2 clock sources
derived from the 2 ports of the DDP2.

Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 0.

Connector Clk0 provides a clock source from Unit 1.

Refer to Figure 97 "Clock Controller - Option 1" (page 355).

Option 2 This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock
source derived from port 0 of the DDP2.

Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 0.

Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 0.

Refer to Figure 98 "Clock Controller - Option 2" (page 356).

Option 3 This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references of a clock
source derived from port 1 of the DDP2.

Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 1.

Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 1.

Refer to Figure 99 "Clock Controller - Option 3" (page 357).

Option 4 This option provides a Dual CPU system with 2 references from each
clock source derived from the DDP2.

Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 0.

Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 0.

Connector Clk0 provides a Ref 1 clock source from Unit 1.

Connector Clk1 provides a Ref 2 clock source from Unit 1.

Refer to Figure 100 "Clock Controller - Option 4" (page 358).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 355

Figure 97
Clock Controller - Option 1

Operation
The following discussion describes possible scenarios when replacing a
digital trunk NT8D72BA PRI2 card or QPC536E DTI2 card or NTCK43 Dual
PRI card configuration with a NT5D97 DDP2 card configuration.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 356 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 98
Clock Controller - Option 2

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 357

Figure 99
Clock Controller - Option 3

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 358 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

Figure 100
Clock Controller - Option 4

Case 1 - The two ports of a QPC414 network card are connected to two
digital trunks.
In this case, the QPC414 and the two digital trunks are replaced by a single
DDP2 card, which is plugged into the network shelf in the QPC414 slot.
Case 2 - One port of the QPC414 card is connected to a digital trunk, and
the second is connected to a peripheral buffer. Both cards are in network
loop location.
In this case, the QPC414 should not be removed. The digital trunk is
removed and the DDP2 card is plugged into one of the two empty slots.
Case 3 - The network shelf is full, one port of a QPC414 network card is
connected to a digital trunk, and the second is connected to a peripheral
buffer. This arrangement is repeated for another QPC414. The digital trunks
are located in a shelf that provides only power.
In this case, the peripheral buffers must be re-assigned, so that each pair
of buffers uses both ports of the same QPC414 card. The other QPC414
card can then be replaced by the NT5D97 DDP2.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 359

CAUTION
The static discharge bracelet located inside the cabinet must be
worn before handling circuit cards. Failure to wear the bracelet
can result in damage to the circuit cards.

Procedure 15
Installing the NT5D97
Step Action

1 Determine the cabinet and shelf location where the NT5D97 is to

be installed. The NT5D97 can be installed in any card slot in the
Network bus.
2 Unpack and inspect the NT5D97and cables.

3 If a DDCH is installed, refer to the section Procedure 16 "Removing

the NT5D97" (page 360).
4 Set the option switches on the NT5D97 card before installation.
Refer to "NT5D97AA/AB DIP switch settings" (page 341).
The ENB/DIS (enable/disable faceplate switch) must be OFF (DIS)
when installing the NT5D97, otherwise a system initialize can occur.
The ENB/DIS on the NT5D97 corresponds to the faceplate switch
on the QPC414 Network card.
5 Install NT5D97 card in the assigned shelf and slot.

6 Set the ENB/DIS faceplate switch to ON.

If the DDCH is installed, the DDCH LED should flash three times.

7 If required, install the I/O adapters in the I/O panel.

8 Run and connect the NT5D97 cables

CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and NT5D97 card must NOT be routed through the center
of the cabinet past the power harness. Instead they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

9 If required, install connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted

cross-connect terminal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 360 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

10 If required, designate connecting blocks at the MDF or wall mounted

cross-connect terminal.

11 If required, install a Network Channel Terminating Equipment

(NCTE). or Line Terminating Unit (LTU).
12 Add related office data into switch memory.

13 Enable faceplate switch S1. This is the "Loop Enable" switch.

The faceplate LEDs should go on for 4 seconds then go off and
the OOS, DIS and ACT LEDs should go on again and stay on.
IF DDCH is installed, the DCH LED should flash 3 times.

14 Run the PRI/DTI Verification Test.

15 Run the PRI status check.

—End—

Procedure 16
Removing the NT5D97
Step Action

1 Determine the cabinet and shelf location of the NT5D97 card to

be removed.

2 Disable Network Loop using LD 60. The command is DISL "loop

number."
The associated DCHI might need to be disabled first. The faceplate
switch ENB/DIS should not be disabled until both PRI2/DTI2 loops
are disabled first.

3 If the NT5D97 card is being completely removed, not replaced,

remove data from memory.

4 Remove cross connections at MDF to wall-mounted cross-connect

terminal.

5 Tag and disconnect cables from card.

6 Rearrange Clock Controller cables if required.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 361

CAUTION
Clock Controller cables connecting the Clock Controller
and DDP2 card must NOT be routed through the center of
the cabinet past the power harness. Instead, they should
be routed around the outside of the equipment shelves.

7 Remove the DDP2 card only if both loops are disabled. If the other
circuit of a DDP2 card is in use, DO NOT remove the card. The
faceplate switch ENB/DIS must be in the OFF (DIS) position before
the card is removed, otherwise the system initializes.

8 Pack and store the NT5D97 card and circuit card.

—End—

Configuring the NT5D97

After the NT5D97 DDP2 is installed, configure the system using the same
procedures as the standard NT8D72BA PRI2.
Consider the following when configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 card:
• The CS 1000 software allows four ports to be defined for the NT6D80
MSDL. The DDCH (NTBK51AA) card has only two ports, 0 and 1;
therefore, ports 2 and 3 must not be defined when using the NTBK51AA.
• Port 0 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined to work with Loop 0 of the
NT5D97 DDP2 card, and Port 1 of the NTBK51AA can only be defined
to work with Loop 1 of the NT5D97. This relationship must be reflected
when configuring a new DCH in LD 17 (in response to the DCHL prompt,
enter either 0 or 1 when specifying the loop number used by the DCH).
• You cannot define one of the DDP2 loops for the NTBK51AA DDCH,
and the other loop for the NT6D11AF/NT5K75AA/NT5K35AA DCH card
or the NT6D80 MSDL.
• When configuring the NT5D97 DDP2 in DTI2 outgoing dial pulse mode,
a Digit Outpulsing patch is required.

Testability and diagnostics

The DDP2 card supports testing and maintenance functions through the
following procedures:
• Selftest upon power up or reset
• Signalling test performed in the LD 30
• Loopback tests, self tests, and continuity tests performed by LD 60
and LD 45

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 362 NT5D97 Dual-port DTI2 PRI2 card

• The D-Channel (DCH, MSDL, DDCH) maintenance is supported by

LD 96.

Note: The MSDL self-test is not applicable to the NTBK51AA

D-Channel daughterboard.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 363

NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 363)

"Applications" (page 363)

Introduction
The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16
analog (500/2500-type) telephones equipped with either ground button
recall switches, high-voltage Message Waiting lamps, or low-voltage
Message Waiting LEDs.
You can install this card in any IPE slot.
Note: Up to four NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card are supported in
each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card performs several functions, including:
• flexible transmission
• ground button operation
• low-voltage Message Waiting option
• card self-ID for auto-configuration

Applications
The NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card can be used for the following
applications:
• NT5K02AA high-voltage Message Waiting analog line card typically
used in Australia
• NT5K02DA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in France

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 364 NT5K02 Flexible Analog Line card

• NT5K02EA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line

card typically used in Germany
• NT5K02FA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card with 6001/2 termination (A/D –4 dB, D/A–1 dB)
• NT5K02GA same as NT5K02FA with a different loss plan (A/D –4 dB,
D/A –3 dB)
• NT5K02HA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in Belgium
• NT5K02JA low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line card typically used
in Denmark
• NT5K02KA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in Netherlands
• NT5K02LA and NT5K02LB analog line card typically used in New
Zealand
• NT5K02MA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in Norway
• NT5K02NA ground button, low-voltage message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in Sweden
• NT5K02PA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in Switzerland
• NT5K02QA ground button, low-voltage Message Waiting, analog line
card typically used in the United Kingdom

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 365

NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 365)

"MFC signaling" (page 365)

"MFE signaling" (page 367)

"Sender and receiver mode" (page 368)

"Physical specifications" (page 370)

Introduction
The XMFC/MFE (Extended Multi-frequency Compelled/Multi-frequency
sender-receiver) card is used to set up calls between two trunks.
Connections may be between a PBX and a Central Office or between two
PBXs. When connection has been established, the XMFC/MFE card sends
and receives pairs of frequencies and then drops out of the call.

The XMFC/MFE card can operate in systems using either A-law or µ-law
companding by changing the setting in software.

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

MFC signaling
The MFC feature allows the system to use the CCITT MFC R2 or L1
signaling protocols.

Signaling levels
MFC signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits, and is divided
into two levels:
• Level 1: used when a call is first established and may be used to send
the dialed digits.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 366 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

• Level 2: used after Level 1 signaling is completed and may contain

such information as the status, capabilities, or classifications of both
calling parties.

Forward and backward signals

When one NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card sends a pair of frequencies to a
receiving XMFC/MFE card (forward signaling), the receiving XMFC/MFE
card must respond by sending a different set of frequencies back to the
originating XMFC/MFE card (backward signaling). In other words, the
receiving card is always "compelled" to respond to the originating card.
In summary, the signaling works as follows:
• The first XMFC/MFE card sends a forward signal to the second card.
• The second card hears the forward signal and replies with a backward
signal.
• The first card hears the backward signal and "turns off" its forward signal.
• The second card hears the forward signal being removed and removes
its backward signal.
• The first XMFC/MFE can either send a second signal or drop out of
the call.

MFC signaling involves two or more levels of forward signals and two or
more levels of backward signals. Separate sets of frequencies are used
for forward and backward signals:
• Forward signals. Level I forward signals are dialed address digits that
identify the called party. Subsequent levels of forward signals describe
the category (Class of Service) of the calling party, and may include the
calling party status and identity.
• Backward signals. Level I backward signals (designated "A") respond
to Level I forward signals. Subsequent levels of backward signals (B, C,
and so on) describe the status of the called party.

Table 163 "MFC Frequency values" (page 366) lists the frequency values
used for forward and backward signals.

Table 163
MFC Frequency values
Forward direction backward direction
Digit DOD-Tx, DID-Rx DOD-Rx, DID-Tx
1 1380 Hz + 1500 Hz 1140 Hz + 1020 Hz
2 1380 Hz + 1620 Hz 1140 Hz + 900 Hz
3 1500 Hz + 1620 Hz 1020 Hz + 900 Hz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MFE signaling 367

Forward direction backward direction

Digit DOD-Tx, DID-Rx DOD-Rx, DID-Tx
4 1380 Hz + 1740 Hz 1140 Hz + 780 Hz
5 1500 Hz + 1740 Hz 1020 Hz + 780 Hz
6 1620 Hz + 1740 Hz 900 Hz + 780 Hz
7 1380 Hz + 1860 Hz 1140 Hz + 660 Hz
8 1500 Hz + 1860 Hz 1020 Hz + 660 Hz
9 1620 Hz + 1860 Hz 900 Hz + 660 Hz
10 1740 Hz + 1860 Hz 780 Hz + 660 Hz
11 1380 Hz + 1980 Hz 1140 Hz + 540 Hz
12 1500 Hz + 1980 Hz 1020 Hz + 540 Hz
13 1620 Hz + 1980 Hz 900 Hz + 540 Hz
14 1740 Hz + 1980 Hz 780 Hz + 540 Hz
15 1860 Hz + 1980 Hz 660 Hz + 540 Hz

The exact meaning of each MFC signal number (1-15) within each level
can be programmed separately for each trunk route using MFC. This
programming can be done by the customer and allows users to suit the
needs of each MFC-equipped trunk route.

Each MFC-equipped trunk route is associated with a data block that

contains the MFC signal functions supported for that route.

MFE signaling
The NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card can be programmed for MFE signaling which
is used mainly in France. MFE is much the same as MFC except it has its
own set of forward and backward signals.

Table 164 "MFE Frequency values" (page 367) lists the forward and
backward frequencies for MFE. The one backward signal for MFE is referred
to as the "control" frequency.

Table 164
MFE Frequency values
Forward direction
Digit OG-Tx, IC-Rx Backward direction
1 700 Hz + 900 Hz 1900 Hz
(Control Frequency)
2 700 Hz + 1100 Hz —
3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz —

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 368 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Forward direction
Digit OG-Tx, IC-Rx Backward direction
4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz —
5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz —
6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz —
7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz —
8 900 Hz + 1500 Hz —
9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz —
10 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz —

Sender and receiver mode

The XMFC/MFE circuit card provides the interface between the system’s
CPU and the trunk circuit which uses MFC or MFE signaling.

The XMFC/MFE circuit card transmits and receives forward and backward
signals simultaneously on two channels. Each channel is programmed like
a peripheral circuit card unit, with its own sending and receiving timeslots
in the network.

Receive mode
When in receive mode, the XMFC/MFE card is linked to the trunk card by
a PCM speech path over the network cards. MFC signals coming in over
the trunks are relayed to the XMFC/MFE card as though they were speech.
The XMFC/MFC card interprets each tone pair and sends the information
to the CPU through the CPU bus.

Send mode
When in send mode, the CPU sends data to the XMFC/MFE card through
the CPU bus. The CPU tells the XMFC/MFE card which tone pairs to send
and the XMFC/MFE card generates the required tones and sends them
to the trunk over the PCM network speech path. The trunk transmits the
tones to the far end.

XMFC sender and receiver specifications

Table 165 "XMFC sender specifications" (page 369) and Table 166 "XMFC
receiver specifications" (page 369) provide the operating requirements for
the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card. These specifications conform to CCITT R2
recommendations: Q.441, Q.442, Q.451, Q.454, and Q.455.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Sender and receiver mode 369

Table 165
XMFC sender specifications
Forward frequencies in DOD mode: 1380, 1500, 1620, 1740, 1860, 1980 Hz
Backward frequencies in DOD mode: 1140, 1020, 900, 780, 660, 540 Hz
Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.5 Hz from nominal
Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels
Level difference between frequencies: < 0.5 dB
Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation 37 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency
Time interval between start of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 125 usec.

Table 166
XMFC receiver specifications
Input sensitivity:
accepted: -5 to -31.5 dBmONew CCITT spec.
rejected: -38.5 dBmOBlue Book
Bandwidth twist:
accepted: fc +/- 10 Hz
rejected: fc +/- 60 Hz
Amplitude twist:
accepted: difference of 5 dB between adjacent frequencies
difference of 7 dB between non-adjacent frequencies
Norwegian requirement difference of 12 dB (for unloaded CO trunks)
rejected: difference of 20 dB between any two frequencies
Operating time: < 32 msec.
Release time: < 32 msec.
Tone Interrupt no release: < 8 msec. Receiver on, while tone missing
Longest Input tone ignored: < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies
Noise rejection: S/N > 18 dB No degradation, in band white noise
S/N > 13 dB Out-of-band disturbances for CCITT

XMFE sender and receiver specifications

Table 167 "XMFE sender specifications" (page 370) and Table 168
"XMFE receiver specifications" (page 370) provide the operating
requirements for the XMFC/MFE card when it is configured as an XMFE
card. These requirements conform to French Socotel specifications
ST/PAA/CLC/CER/692.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 370 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Table 167
XMFE sender specifications
Forward frequencies in OG mode: 700, 900, 1100, 1300, 1500 Hz
Forward frequencies in IC mode: 1900 Hz
Frequency tolerance: +/- 0.25% from nominal
Power level at each frequency: Selectable: 1 of 16 levels
Level tolerance: +/- 1.0 dB
Harmonic Distortion and Intermodulation: 35 dB below level of 1 signaling frequency
Time interval between start of 2 tones: 125 usec.
Time interval between stop of 2 tones: 125 usec.

Table 168
XMFE receiver specifications
Input sensitivity:
accepted: -4 dBm to -35 dBm +/- 10 Hz of nominal
rejected: -42 dBm signals
rejected: -4 dBmoutside 500-1900 Hz
rejected: -40 dBmsingle/multiple sine wave in 500-1900 Hz
Bandwidth:
accepted: fc +/- 20 Hz
Amplitude twist:
accepted: difference of 9 dB between frequency pair
Operating time: < 64 msec.
Release time: < 64 msec.
Tone Interrupt causing no
< 8 msec. Receiver on, tone missing
release:
Longest Input tone ignored: < 8 msec. Combination of valid frequencies
Longest control tone ignored: < 15 msec.Control Frequency only
Noise rejection: S/N > 18 dBNo degradation in-band white noise

Physical specifications
Table 169 "Physical specifications" (page 370) outlines the physical
specifications of the NT5K21 XMFC/MFE circuit card.

Table 169
Physical specifications
Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm)
Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm)
Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm)
Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical specifications 371

Cabinet Location Must be placed in the main cabinet

(Slots 1-10)
Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical
Environmental considerations Meets the environment of the system

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 372 NT5K21 XMFC/MFE card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 373

NT6D70 SILC Line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 373)

"Physical description" (page 375)

"Functional description" (page 375)

Introduction
The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA –48V North America,
NT6D70 BA –40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex
interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber
Loops (DSLs) to the System. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is
contained in ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration
(NN43001-318).

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

Note: A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in a Media

Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

The S/T Interface Line cards (SILC) (NT6D70AA-48V North America,

NT6D70 BA -40 V International) provide eight S/T four-wire full duplex
interfaces that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over
DSLs to the Meridian 1 system. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is
contained in ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718).

The S/T Interface Line card (SILC) (NT6D70AA –48V North America,
NT6D70 BA –40 V International) provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex
interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber
Loops (DSLs) to the CS 1000 system.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 374 NT6D70 SILC Line card

An NT6D70 SILC card can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway

Expansion. A maximum of four NT6D70 SILC cards are supported in a
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

ISDN BRI
ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data
(D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well
as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).

B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while
D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set-up, signaling and
other user data across the network.

One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations to
the same or to different locations. In either case, the D-channel can also
be used for packet communication to a third location simultaneously. The
two B-channels can also be combined to transmit data at uncompressed
speeds of up to 128 Kbps.

A wide range of devices and telephone numbers can be associated with

a single DSL to offer equipment flexibility and reduce line, wiring, and
installation costs.

Communication Server (CS) 1000 Release 1.1 and later supports ISDN
Basic Rate Interface (BRI).

ISDN BRI consists of two 64Kb/s Bearer (B) channels and one 16Kb/s Data
(D) channel. The BRI interface is referred to as a 2B+D connection as well
as a Digital Subscriber Loop (DSL).

B-channels transmit user voice and data information at high speeds, while
D-channels are packet-switched links that carry call set-up, signaling and
other user data across the network.

One single DSL can carry two simultaneous voice or data conversations to
the same or to different locations. In either case, the D-channel can also
be used for packet communications to a third location simultaneously. The
two B-channels can also be combined to transmit data at uncompressed
speeds of up to 128 Kb/s.

A wide range of devices and telephone numbers can be associated with

a single DSL to offer equipment flexibility and reduce line, wiring, and
installation costs.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 375

Physical description
The NT6D70 SILC card is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is
equipped with an LED to indicate its status.

The NT6D70 SILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted

in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped
with an LED to indicate its status.

The NT6D70 SILC Card is a standard-size circuit card designed to be

inserted in slots in the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. Its
faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and –48 V at 480 mA.

Power consumption is +5V at 800 mA and -48V at 480 mA.

Power consumption is +5 V at 800 mA and –48 V at 480 mA.

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided
on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in
which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module
certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before
providing such service.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in
which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module
certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before
providing such service.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the SILC card. When the SILC card is used in TIE trunk applications in
which the cabling is exposed to outside plant conditions, an NT1 module
certified for such applications must be used. Check local regulations before
providing such service.

Functional description
The NT6D70 SILC card provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex
polarity-sensitive interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over
Digital Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the system. Each S/T interface provides
two B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of eight
physical connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 376 NT6D70 SILC Line card

A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the system
over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own
physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical
termination.
The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the
DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft).
The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential
Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a
total of two watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at
all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices
must not draw more than the two watts of power. Any power requirements
beyond this limit must be locally powered.
Other functions of the SILC are:
• support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections
• execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control
the S/T interfaces
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and system
bus format
• multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs
• provide a reference clock to the clock controller

The SILC provides eight S/T four wire full duplex polarity sensitive interfaces
that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over Digital
Subscriber Loops (DSL) to the Meridian 1. Each S/T interface provides two
B-channels and one D-channel and supports a maximum of eight physical
connections that can link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL.
A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the Meridian
1 over a DSL. It may be directly connected to the DSL through its own
physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical
termination.
The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the
DSL wire gauge, however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft).
The SILC interface uses a 4 conductor cable that provides a differential
Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a
total of 2 Watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at
all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices
must not draw more than the 2 Watts of power. Any power requirements
beyond this limit must be locally powered.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 377

Other functions of the SILC are:

• support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections
• execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control
the S/T interfaces
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and
Meridian 1 system bus format
• multiplexes 4 D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs
• provide a reference clock to the clock controller

The NT6D70 SILC Card provides eight S/T four-wire full-duplex

polarity-sensitive interfaces to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over
DSL to the CS 1000. Each S/T interface provides two B-channels and one
D-channel and supports a maximum of eight physical connections that can
link up to 20 logical terminals on one DSL.
A logical terminal is any terminal that can communicate with the CS 1000
over a DSL. It can be directly connected to the DSL through its own
physical termination or be indirectly connected through a common physical
termination.
The length of a DSL depends on the specific terminal configuration and the
DSL wire gauge; however, it should not exceed 1 km (3,280 ft).
The SILC interface uses a four-conductor cable that provides a differential
Transmit and Receive pair for each DSL. The SILC has options to provide a
total of two watts of power on the Transmit or Receive leads, or no power at
all. When this power is supplied from the S/T interface, the terminal devices
must not draw more than the two watts of power. Any power requirements
beyond this limit must be locally powered.
Other functions of the SILC include the following:
• support point-to-point and multi-point DSL terminal connections
• execute instructions received from the MISP to configure and control
the S/T interfaces
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and CS
1000 system bus format
• multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs
• provide a reference clock to the clock controller

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 378 NT6D70 SILC Line card

Micro Controller Unit (MCU)

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation
of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial
control interface.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating

program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other
functions connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate
with the S/T transceivers.

The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the SILC. It has internal
memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial control interface.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating

program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other
functions connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is an IPE bus used by the MPU to communicate
with the S/T transceivers.

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation
of the SILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, and a serial
control interface.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM which contains the SILC operating

program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other
functions connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is an Peripheral Equipment (PE) bus used by the
MPU to communicate with the S/T transceivers.

IPE interface logic

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus
interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a
clock controller and converter.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 379

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which

includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is
installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports
the configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The IPE bus interface connects an IPE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates

signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to
the SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This
sets transmission levels for the B-channel voice calls.

The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange.

The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the IPE backplane
into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to
provide PCM framing bits.

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus

interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a
clock controller and converter.

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which

includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the SILC is installed.
It also queries the status and identification of the card, and reports the
configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The maintenance signaling channel (MSC) interface is used to communicate

signaling and card identification information from the Meridian 1 CPU
to the SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This
sets transmission levels for the B-channel circuit-switched voice calls.

The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 380 NT6D70 SILC Line card

The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane
into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to
provide PCM framing bits.

The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface,

a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock
controller and converter.

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which

includes polling the line cards to find the card slot where the SILC is
installed. It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports
the configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The PE bus interface connects one PE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates

signaling and card identification information from the CS 1000 CPU to
the SILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This
sets transmission levels for the B-channel voice calls.

The clock recovery circuit recovers the clock from the local exchange.

The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the PE backplane
into a 2.56-MHz clock to time the PE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to
provide PCM framing bits.

S/T interface logic

The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power
source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different
numbers and types of terminal.

The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full-duplex S/T bus interface.

This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each
physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel
ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for
voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those
terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to
other terminals making calls on the same DSL.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 381

The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts –48 V from the
IPE backplane and provides two watts of power to physical terminations on
each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI-compliant ISDN BRI terminals and
–40 V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals.
The total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed two
watts.The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL
power source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and
different number and types of terminals.

The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full duplex S/T bus interface.
This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each
physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel
ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for
voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those
terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to
other terminals making calls on the same DSL.

The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts -48 V from the
IPE backplane and provides 2 watts of power to physical terminations on
each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI compliant ISDN BRI terminals and -40
V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The
total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed 2 watts.

The S/T interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit and the DSL power
source. This interface supports DSLs of different distances and different
numbers and types of terminal.

The transceiver circuits provide four-wire full-duplex S/T bus interface.

This bus supports multiple physical terminations on one DSL where each
physical termination supports multiple logical B-channel and D-channel
ISDN BRI terminals. Idle circuit-switched B-channels can be allocated for
voice or data transmission to terminals making calls on a DSL. When those
terminals become idle, the channels are automatically made available to
other terminals making calls on the same DSL.

The power on the DSL comes from the SILC, which accepts –48 V from the
PE backplane and provides 2 watts of power to physical terminations on
each DSL. It provides -48 V for ANSI-compliant ISDN BRI terminals and –40
V for CCITT (such as ETSI NET-3, INS NET-64) compliant terminals. The
total power used by the terminals on each DSL must not exceed 2 watts.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 382 NT6D70 SILC Line card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 383

NT6D71 UILC line card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 383)

"Physical description" (page 384)

"Functional description" (page 384)

Introduction
The NT6D71 U Interface Line card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer
(Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface. The
UILC provides eight two-wire full-duplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces
to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops
(DSL) to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1. A description of the
ISDN BRI feature is contained in ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation
and Configuration (NN43001-318).

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

Note: A maximum of four UILCs are supported in an Media Gateway

and Media Gateway Expansion.

The NT6D71 U Interface Line Card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer
(Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI defined standard interface. The
UILC provides eight two-wire full duplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces
that are used to connect ISDN BRI compatible terminals over DSLs to the
Meridian 1. A description of the ISDN BRI feature is contained in ISDN
Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718).

The NT6D71 U Interface Line Card (UILC) supports the OSI physical layer
(Layer 1) protocol. The UILC is an ANSI-defined standard interface. The
UILC provides eight two-wire full-duplex (not polarity sensitive) U interfaces

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 384 NT6D71 UILC line card

to connect ISDN BRI-compatible terminals over Digital Subscriber Loops

(DSL) to the CS 1000. For more information on ISDN BRI, see "ISDN BRI"
(page 374).

A UILC can reside in a Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. A

maximum of four UILCs are supported in a Media Gateway and Media
Gateway Expansion.

Physical description
The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card. Its faceplate is equipped
with an LED to indicate its status.

The NT6D71 UILC is a standard size circuit card designed to be inserted

in peripheral equipment slots in the Meridian 1. Its faceplate is equipped
with an LED to indicate its status.

The NT6D71 UILC is a standard-size circuit card that inserts in slots in the
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion. The NT6D71 UILC can be
installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and
10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.

The faceplate is equipped with an LED to indicate its status.

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA.

Power consumption is +5V at 1900 mA.

Power consumption is +5 V at 1900 mA.

Functional description
Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports
one physical termination. This termination can be to a Network Termination
(NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Usually, this physical
termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that supports up
to eight physical terminal connections. The length of a DSL depends on the
specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should
not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi).
The main functions of the UILC are as follows:
• provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards
• support point-to-point DSL terminal connections
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and system
bus format
• multiplex four D-channels onto one timeslot

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 385

• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs

• provide loopback control of DSLs

Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-Channel and supports
one physical termination. This termination may be to a Network Termination
(NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Normally this physical
termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that allows up to 8
physical terminals to be connected. The length of a DSL depends on the
specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge, however, it should
not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi).
The main functions of the UILC are:
• provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards
• support point-to-point DSL terminal connections
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and
Meridian 1 bus format
• multiplex 4 D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs

Each U interface provides two B-channels and one D-channel and supports
one physical termination. This termination can be to a Network Termination
(NT1) or directly to a single U interface terminal. Usually, this physical
termination is to an NT1, which provides an S/T interface that supports up
to eight physical terminal connections. The length of a DSL depends on the
specific terminal configuration and the DSL wire gauge; however, it should
not exceed 5.5 km (3.3 mi).
The main functions of the UILC are as follows:
• provide eight ISDN U interfaces conforming to ANSI standards
• support point-to-point DSL terminal connections
• provide channel mapping between ISDN BRI format (2B+D) and CS
1000 bus format
• multiplex four D-channels onto one timeslot
• perform activation and deactivation of DSLs
• provide loopback control of DSLs

Micro Controller Unit (MCU)

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of
the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control
interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 386 NT6D71 UILC line card

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating

program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions
connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is an IPE bus that communicates with the U
transceivers.

The MCU coordinates and controls the operation of the UILC. It has internal
memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control interface, a maintenance
signaling channel, and a digital pad.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating

program and 8 K of RAM used to store interface selection and other
functions connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is an IPE bus used to communicate with the
U transceivers.

The Micro Controller Unit (MCU) coordinates and controls the operation of
the UILC. It has internal memory, a reset and sanity timer, a serial control
interface, a maintenance signaling channel, and a digital pad.

The memory consists of 32 K of EPROM that contains the UILC operating

program and 8 K of RAM that stores interface selection and other functions
connected with call activities.

The reset and sanity timer logic resets the MCU.

The serial control interface is a PE bus that communicates with U

transceivers.

IPE interface logic

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a IPE bus
interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a
clock converter.

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which

includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed.
It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the
configuration data and firmware version of the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 387

The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates

signaling and card identification information from the system CPU to
the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This
sets transmission levels for B-channel voice calls.

The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane
into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to
provide PCM framing bits.

The IPE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, an IPE bus

interface, a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a
clock converter.

The CardLAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which includes
polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed. It
also queries the status and identification of the card, and reports the
configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The IPE bus interface connects one IPE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface is used to

communicate signaling and card identification information from the
Meridian 1 CPU to the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains
maintenance instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This
sets transmission levels for the B-channel circuit-switched voice calls.

The clock converter converts the 5.12 MHz clock from the IPE backplane
into a 2.56 MHz clock to time the IPE bus channels and an 8 kHz clock to
provide PCM framing bits.

The PE interface logic consists of a Card-LAN interface, a PE bus interface,

a maintenance signaling channel interface, a digital pad, and a clock
converter.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 388 NT6D71 UILC line card

The Card-LAN interface is used for routine card maintenance, which

includes polling the line cards to find in which card slot the UILC is installed.
It also queries the status and identification of the card and reports the
configuration data and firmware version of the card.

The PE bus interface connects one PE bus loop that has 32 channels
operating at 64 kbps and one additional validation and signaling bit.

The Maintenance Signaling Channel (MSC) interface communicates

signaling and card identification information from the CS 1000 CPU to
the UILC MCU. The signaling information also contains maintenance
instructions.

The digital pad provides gain or attenuation values to condition the level of
the digitized transmission signal according to the network loss plan. This
sets transmission levels for B-channel voice calls.

The clock converter converts the 5.12-MHz clock from the PE backplane
into a 2.56-MHz clock to time the PE bus channels and an 8-kHz clock to
provide PCM framing bits.

U interface logic
The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop
termination and high-voltage protection to eliminate the external hazards
on the DSL. The U interface supports voice and data terminals, D-channel
packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support
eight DSLs for point-to-point operation.The U interface logic consists of a
transceiver circuit. It provides loop termination and high voltage protection
to eliminate the external hazards on the DSL. The U interface supports
circuit-switched voice and data terminals, D-channel packet data terminals,
and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support eight DSLs for
point-to-point operation.

The U interface logic consists of a transceiver circuit. It provides loop

termination and high-voltage protection to eliminate the external hazards
on the DSL. The U interface supports voice and data terminals, D-channel
packet data terminals, and NT1s. A UILC has eight transceivers to support
eight DSLs for point-to-point operation.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 389

NT6D80 MSDL card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 389)

"Physical description" (page 390)

"Functional description" (page 391)

"Engineering guidelines" (page 396)

"Installation" (page 401)

"Maintenance" (page 408)

"Replacing MSDL cards" (page 414)

"Symptoms and actions" (page 415)

"System disabled actions" (page 415)

Introduction
This document describes the Multi-purpose Serial Data Link (MSDL) card.
This card provides multiple interface types with four full-duplex serial
I/O ports that can be independently configured for various operations.
Peripheral software downloaded to the MSDL controls functionality for each
port. Synchronous operation is permitted on all MSDL ports. Port 0 can be
configured as an asynchronous Serial Data Interface (SDI).

An MSDL card occupies one network card slot in Large System Networks,
or Core Network modules and communicates with the CPU over the CPU
bus and with I/O equipment over its serial ports. It can coexist with other
cards that support the same functions. For example, cards supported with
the MSDL (NT6D80) are QPC757 (DCHI), QPC513 (ESDI), QPC841 (SDI)
and NTSD12 (DDP).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 390 NT6D80 MSDL card

Though the MSDL is designed to coexist with other cards, the number of
ports supported by a system equipped with MSDL cards is potentially four
times greater than when using other cards. Since each MSDL has four
ports, representing a single device, a system can support as many as 16
MSDL cards with a maximum of 64 ports.

Physical description
The MSDL card is a standard size circuit card that occupies one network
card slot and plugs into the module’s backplane connector to interface with
the CPU bus and to connect to the module’s power supply. On the faceplate,
the MSDL provides five connectors, four to connect to I/O operations
and one to connect to a monitor device that monitors MSDL functions.
Figure 101 "MSDL component layout" (page 390) illustrates major MSDL
components and their locations on the printed circuit card.

Note: Switches S9 and S10 are configured to reflect the device number
set in LD 17 (DNUM). S10 designates tens, and S9 designates ones.
For example, set device number 14 with S10 at 1 and S9 at 4.

Figure 101
MSDL component layout

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 391

Functional description
Figure 102 "MSDL block diagram" (page 392) illustrates the MSDL functional
block diagram. The MSDL card is divided into four major functional blocks:
• CPU bus interface
• Micro Processing Unit (MPU)
• Memory
• Serial interface

Two processing units serve as the foundation for the MSDL operation:
the Central Processing Unit (CPU) and the MSDL Micro Processing Unit
(MPU). CS 1000 software, MSDL firmware, and peripheral software control
MSDL parameters. Peripheral software downloaded to the MSDL controls
MSDL operations.
The MSDL card’s firmware and software do the following:
• communicate with the CPU to report operation status
• receive downloaded peripheral software and configuration parameters
• coordinate data flow in conjunction with the CPU
• manage data link layer and network layer signaling that controls
operations connection and disconnection
• control operation initialization and addressing
• send control messages to the operations

CPU bus interface

The CPU bus transmits packetized information between the CPU and the
MSDL MPU. This interface has a 16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus,
and interrupt and read/write control lines.

Shared Random Access Memory (RAM) between the CPU and the MSDL
MPU provides an exchange medium. Both the CPU and the MSDL MPU
can access this memory.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 392 NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 102
MSDL block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 393

Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

The MPU, which is based on a Motorola 68020 processor, coordinates and
controls data transfer and port addressing, communicating via the CPU bus
with the system.Prioritized interrupts tell the MPU which tasks to perform.

Memory
The MSDL card contains two megabytes of Random Access Memory
(RAM) for storing downloaded peripheral software that controls MSDL port
operations. The MSDL card includes the shared RAM that is used as a
communication interface buffer between the CPU and the MPU.

The MSDL Flash Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory (Flash

EPROM) also includes the peripheral software to protect it against a power
failure or reset. MSDL can copy peripheral software directly from the Flash
EPROM after power up or reset instead of requesting that the system CPU
download it.

The MSDL card also contains Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM)
for firmware that includes the bootstrap code.

Serial interface
The MSDL card provides one monitor port and four programmable serial
ports that can be configured for the following various interfaces and
combinations of interfaces:
• synchronous ports 0–3
• asynchronous port 0
• DCE or DTE equipment emulation mode
• RS-232 or RS-422 interface

Transmission mode – All four ports of the MSDL can be configured for
synchronous data transmission by software. Port 0 can be configured for
asynchronous data transmission for CRT, TTY, and printer applications only.

Equipment emulation mode – Configure an MSDL port to emulate DCE

or DTE by setting switches on the card and downloading LD 17 interface
parameters.

I/O port electrical interface – Each MSDL port can be configured as an

RS-232 or RS-422 interface by setting the switches on the MSDL card.
MSDL ports use Small Computer Systems Interface (SCSI) II 26-pin female
connectors.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 394 NT6D80 MSDL card

Figure 103 "MSDL functional block diagram" (page 395) shows the system
architecture using the MSDL as an operational platform. It illustrates
operation routing from the CPU, through the MSDL, to the I/O equipment. It
also shows an example in which DCH operation peripheral software in the
MSDL controls functions on ports 2 and 3.

MSDL operations
The system automatically performs self-test and data flow activities. Unless
a permanent problem exists and the system cannot recover, there is no
visual indication that these operations are taking place.
The system controls the MSDL card with software that it has downloaded.
The MSDL and the system enable the MSDL by following these steps:
1. When the MSDL card is placed in the system, the card starts a self-test.
2. When the MSDL passes the test, it indicates its state and L/W version to
the system. The CPU checks to see if downloading is required.
3. After downloading the peripheral software, the system enables the
MSDL.
4. MSDL applications (DCH, AML, SDI) may be brought up if appropriately
configured.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 395

Figure 103
MSDL functional block diagram

Data flow
The MSDL transmit interface, managed by the MSDL handler, sends data
from the system to the MSDL. This interface receives packetized data from
the system and stores it in the transmit buffer on the MSDL. The transmit
buffer transports these messages to the appropriate buffers, from which the
messages travel over the MSDL port to the I/O equipment.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 396 NT6D80 MSDL card

The MSDL uses the MSDL receive interface to communicate with the
system. The MSDL card receives packetized data from the I/O equipment
over the MSDL ports. This data is processed by the MSDL handler and sent
to the appropriate function.

The flow control mechanism provides an orderly exchange of transmit

and receive messages for each operation. Each operation has a number
of outstanding messages stored in buffers waiting to be sent to their
destinations. As long as the number of messages does not exceed the
threshold specified, the messages queue in the buffer in a first-in-first-out
process.

If the outstanding number of messages for an operation reaches the

threshold, the flow control mechanism informs the sender to wait until
the number of messages is below the threshold before sending the next
message.

If buffer space is not available, the request to send a message to the buffer
is rejected and a NO BUFFER fault indication is sent.

Engineering guidelines
Available network card slots
The number of available network slots depends on the system option, the
system size, and the number of available network slots in each module for
the selected system option.

Some of these network card slots are normally occupied by Network cards,
Superloop Network cards, Conference/TDS, and others, leaving a limited
number of unused slots for MSDL and other cards.

Card mix
A system that exclusively uses MSDL cards can support up to 16 such
cards, providing 64 ports. These ports can be used to run various
synchronous and asynchronous operations simultaneously.

The system also supports a mix of interface cards (MSDL, DCHI, and ESDI
for example). However, using multiple card types reduce the number of
cards and ports available.

Address decoding
The MSDL card decodes the full address information received from
the system. This provides 128 unique addresses. Since MSDL ports
communicate with the CPU using a single card address, the system can
support 16 MSDL cards providing 64 ports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engineering guidelines 397

The MSDL card addresses are set using decimal switches located on the
card. These switches can select 100 unique card addresses from 0 to 99.

An address conflict may occur between the MSDL and other cards because
of truncated address decoding by the other cards. For example, if a DCHI
port is set to address 5, it’s companion port is set to address 4, which means
that none of the MSDL cards can have hexadecimal address numbers 05H,
15H, É75H, nor addresses 04H, 14H, É74H. To avoid this conflicts system
software limits the MSDL card addresses from 0 to 15.

Port specifications
The MSDL card provides four programmable serial ports configured with
software as well as with switches for the following modes of operation:

Transmission mode Configure an MSDL port for synchronous or

asynchronous data transmission using LD 17.

Synchronous transmission uses an external clock signal fed into the MSDL.

Table 170 "Synchronous interface specifications" (page 397) lists the

synchronous interface specifications and the means of configuring the
interface parameters.

Table 170
Synchronous interface specifications
Parameter Specification Configured
Data bits In packets-Transparent N/A
Data rate 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, Software
48, 56, and 64 kbps
Transmission Full Duplex N/A
Clock Internal/External Software
Interface RS-232 Software
RS-422 Switches
Mode DTE or DCE Switches

Asynchronous transmission uses an internal clock to generate the

appropriate baud rate for serial controllers.

Table 171 "Asynchronous interface specifications" (page 398) lists

asynchronous interface specifications and the means of configuring
interface parameters.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 398 NT6D80 MSDL card

Table 171
Asynchronous interface specifications
Parameter Specification Configured
Data bit, parity 7 bits even, odd or no parity, or Software
8 bits no parity
Data rate 0.3, 0.6, (1.2), 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, Software
19.2, and 38.4 kbps
Stop bits 1 (default), 1.5, 2 Software
Transmission Full Duplex N/A
Interface RS-232 Software
RS-422 Switches
Mode DTE or DCE Switches

Emulation mode Each port can be configured to emulate a DCE port or a

DTE port by setting the appropriate switches on the MSDL. For details on
how to set the switches, refer to "Installation" (page 401) of this document.

DCE is a master or controlling device that is usually the source of information

to the DTE and may provide the clock in a synchronous transmission linking
a DCE to a DTE.

DTE is a peripheral or terminal device that can transmit and receive

information to and from a DCE and normally provides a user interface to the
system or to a DCE device.

Interface Each MSDL port can be configured as an RS-232 or an RS-422

interface by setting the appropriate switches on the card.

Table 172 "RS-232 interface pin assignments" (page 398) lists the RS-232
interface specifications for EIA and CCITT standard circuits. It shows the
connector pin number, the associated signal name, and the supported
circuit type. It also indicates whether the signal originates at the DTE or
the DCE device.

This interface uses a 26-pin (SCSI II) female connector for both RS-232
and RS-422 circuits.

Table 172
RS-232 interface pin assignments
EIA CCITT
Pin Signal name circuit circuit DTE DCE
1 Frame Ground (FG) AA 102 — —

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Engineering guidelines 399

EIA CCITT
Pin Signal name circuit circuit DTE DCE
2 Transmit Data (TX) BA 103 X
3 Receive Data (RX) BB 104 X
4 Request to Send (RTS) CA 105 X
5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB 106 X
6 Data Set Ready (DSR) CC 107 X
7 Signal Ground (SG) AB 102 — —
8 Carrier Detect (CD) CF 109 X
15 Serial Clock Transmit (SCT) DB 114 X
17 Serial Clock Receive (SCR) DD 115 X
18 Local Loopback (LL) LL 141 X
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD 108.2 X
21 Remote Loopback (RL) RL 140 X
23 Data Rate Selector (DRS) CH/CI 111/112 X
24 External Transmit Clock (ETC) DA 113 X
25 Test Mode (TM) TM 142 X

Table 173 "RS-422 interface pin assignments" (page 399) lists RS-422
interface specifications for EIA circuits. It shows the connector pin number,
the associated signal name, and the supported circuit type. It also indicates
whether the signal originates at the DTE or DCE device.

Table 173
RS-422 interface pin assignments
EIA
Pin Signal Name Circuit DTE DCE
1 Frame Ground (FG) AA — —
2 Transmit Data (TXa) BAa X
3 Receive Data (RXa) BBa X
4 Request to Send (RTS) CA X
5 Clear to Send (CTS) CB X
7 Signal Ground (SG) AB — —
8 Receive Ready (RR) CF X
12 Receive Signal Timing (RST) DDb X
13 Transmit Data (TXb) BAb X
14 Transmit Signal Timing (TSTb) DBb X

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 400 NT6D80 MSDL card

EIA
Pin Signal Name Circuit DTE DCE
15 Transmit Signal Timing (TSTa) DBa X
16 Receive Data (RXb) BBb X
17 Receive Signal Timing (RSTa) DDa X
20 Data Terminal Ready (DTR) CD X
23 Terminal Timing (TTa) DAb X
24 Terminal Timing (TTb) DAa X

Implementation guidelines
The following are guidelines for engineering and managing MSDL cards:
• An MSDL can be installed in any empty network card slot.
• A maximum of eight MSDL cards can be installed in a fully occupied
module because of the module’s power supply limitations.
• The Clock Controller card should not be installed in a module if more
than 10 MSDL ports are configured as active RS-232 (rather than
RS-422) ports in that module because of the module’s power supply
limitations.
• The MSDL address must not overlap other card addresses.
• Before downloading a peripheral software module for an MSDL, disable
all MSDL ports on cards running the same type of operation.

Environmental and power requirements

The MSDL card conforms to the same requirements as other interface
cards. The temperature, humidity, and altitude for system equipment,
including the MSDL, should not exceed the specifications shown in Table
174 "Environmental requirements" (page 400).

Table 174
Environmental requirements
Condition Environmental specifications
Operating
Temperature 0 to 50 C (32 to 122 F)
Relative Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing
Altitude 3,048 meters (10,000 feet) maximum
Storage
Temperature –50 to 70 C (–58 to 158 F)
Relative Humidity 5% to 95% non-condensing

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 401

A stable ambient operating temperature of approximately 22C (72F) is

recommended. The temperature differential in the room should not exceed
±3C (±5F).

The internal power supply in each module provides DC power for the MSDL
and other cards. Power consumption and heat dissipation for the MSDL is
listed in Table 175 "MSDL power consumption" (page 401).

Table 175
MSDL power consumption
Voltage Current Power Heat
(VAC) (Amps) (Watts) (BTUs)
+5 3.20 16.00 55.36
+12 0.10 1.20 4.15
–12 0.10 1.20 4.15

Installation
Device number
Before installing MSDL cards, determine which of the devices in the system
are available. If all 16 devices are assigned, remove one or more installed
cards to replace them with MSDL cards.

Make sure that the device number assigned to the MSDL card is not used
by an installed card, even if one is not configured. Use the MSDL planning
form, at the end of this section, to assist in configuring MSDL cards.

MSDL interfaces
Before installing the cards, select the switch settings that apply to your
system, the interfaces, and card addresses.

Table 176 "MSDL interface switch settings" (page 401) shows the switch
positions for the DCE and the DTE interface configurations on the MSDL
card. Figure 104 "MSDL switch setting example" (page 402) shows the
MSDL and the location of configuration switches on the MSDL. The switch
settings shown in this figure are an example of the different types of
interfaces available. Your system settings may differ.

Table 176
MSDL interface switch settings
DCE DTE
switch switch Interface Comment
DTE/DCE is software
OFF OFF RS-232
configured

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 402 NT6D80 MSDL card

DCE DTE
switch switch Interface Comment
OFF ON RS-422 DTE All switches configured
ON OFF RS-422 DCE All switches configured
ON ON N/A Not allowed

Figure 104
MSDL switch setting example

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 403

Installing the MSDL card

Procedure 17
Installing the MSDL card
Step Action
To install an MSDL card follow these steps:

1 Set Device Number S10 and S9.

2 Hold the MSDL by its card-locking devices. Squeeze the tabs to
unlatch the card locking devices and lift the locking device out
and away from the card. Be careful not to touch connector pins,
conductor traces, or integrated circuits. Static discharge may
damage integrated circuits.

3 Insert the MSDL card into the selected card slot of the module
following the card guides in the module.

4 Slide the MSDL into the module until it engages the backplane
connector.

5 Push the MSDL firmly into the connector using the locking devices
as levers by pushing them toward the card’s front panel.

6 Push the card-locking devices firmly against the front panel of the
card so they latch to the front lip in the module and to the post on
the card.

7 Observe the red LED on the MSDL faceplate. If it turns on, flashes
three times, and stays on continuously, the MSDL is operating
correctly but is not yet enabled. Go to step 7.

8 If the LED turns on and stays on continuously without flashing three

times, the card may be defective. Go to steps 8 and 9.
9 Connect the cables. The installation is complete.

10 Unplug the MSDL card and reinsert it. If the red LED still does
not flash three times, leave the card installed for approximately 10
minutes to allow the card to be initialized.
11 After 10 minutes unplug the card and reinsert it. If the card still does
not flash three times, the card is defective and must be replaced.

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 404 NT6D80 MSDL card

Cable requirements
The MSDL card includes four high-density 26-pin (SCSI II) female
connectors for ports and one 8-pin miniature DIN connector for the monitor
port. See Figure 105 "MSDL cabling" (page 405) for a diagram of the MSDL
cabling configuration.
A D-Channel on the MSDL requires a connection from the appropriate
MSDL port connector to the DCH connector located on the ISDN PRI trunk
faceplate.
Other operations on the MSDL are connected to external devices such as
terminals and modems. To complete one of these connections, connect the
appropriate I/O connector on the MSDL to a connector on the I/O panel
at the back of the module where the MSDL is installed. If a terminal is
connected to the regular SDI port, use 8 bit, VT100 terminal emulation. If
the terminal is connected to the SDI/STA port with line mode editing, use 8
bit, VT220 terminal emulation.
To determine the type and number of cables required to connect to MSDL
cards, you must determine the type of operation you wish to run and select
the appropriate cable to connect the operation to the MSDL port. Different
types of cables, as described in Table 177 "Cable types" (page 405),
connect the MSDL port to a device:
• NTND26, used to connect the MSDL port to the ISDN PRI trunk
connector J5, for DCH
• QCAD328, when cabling between two different columns, that is, I/O to
I/O (when MSDL is in one row and QPC720 is in another row)
• NTND98AA (J5 of QPC720 to I/O panel)
• NTND27, used to connect the MSDL port to the I/O panel at the rear of
the module, for other interface functions

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 405

Figure 105
MSDL cabling

Note: The choices of cable to use with an MSDL card depend on what
type of modem is connected. For example, the NTND27 cable is used
when the modem has a DB25 connection. If the modem is v.35, a
customized or external vendor cable is required.

Table 177
Cable types
Function Cable type Cable length
DCH NTND26AA 6 feet
NTND26AB 18 feet
NTND26AC 35 feet
NTND26AD 50 feet
AML, ISL, SDI NTND27AB 6 feet

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 406 NT6D80 MSDL card

Cable installation
When the MSDL card is installed, connect the cables to the equipment
required for the selected operation.

PRI trunk connections

D-channel operations require connections between the MSDL and a PRI
trunk card. Refer to ISDN Primary Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-569)
for a complete discussion of PRI and D-channels.

Procedure 18
Cabling the MSDL card to the PRI card
Step Action
The following steps explain the procedure for cable connection:

1 Identify the MSDL and the PRI cards to be linked.

2 Select the appropriate length cable for the distance between the
MSDL and the PRI card.
3 Plug the 26-pin SCSI II male connector end of a cable into the
appropriate MSDL port.

4 Route the cable through cable troughs, if necessary, to the

appropriate PRI card.
5 Plug the DB15 male connector end of the cable into the J5 DB15
female connector on the PRI card.

6 Secure the connections in place with their fasteners.

7 Repeat steps 1 through 6 for each connection.

—End—

I/O panel connections

Operations aside from PRI require cable connections to the I/O panel.

Procedure 19
Cabling the MSDL card to the I/O panel
Step Action
The following steps explain the procedure for cable connection:

1 Identify the MSDL card and the I/O panel connector to be linked.
2 Using the NTND27AB cable, plug the 26-pin SCSI II male connector
end of a cable into the appropriate MSDL port.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installation 407

3 Route the cable to the rear of the module next to the I/O panel.

4 Plug the DB25 male connector end of a cable into a DB25 female
connector at the back of the I/O panel.
5 Secure cable connectors in place with their fasteners.

6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for each connection.

—End—

MSDL planning form

Use the following planning form to help sort and store information
concerning the MSDL cards in your system as shown in the sample. Record
switch settings for unequipped ports as well as for equipped ports.

MSDL data form

Device no. Shelf Slot Card ID Boot Code
version
Date install Last update
ed
Ports Operation Logical no. Switch setting Cable no. Operation information
0
1
2
3

Sample
Device no. Shelf Slot Card ID Boot
Code
13 3 5 NT6D80AA-110046
version
004
Date instal Last update
led
5/5/93
2/1/93
Ports Operation Logical no. Switch Cable no. Operation
setting information
0 TTY 13 RS-232 NTND27AB maint TTY 9600 baud
DCE
1 DCH 25 RS-422 NTND26AB PRI 27 to hdqtrs
DTE

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 408 NT6D80 MSDL card

Sample
2 AML 3 RS-232 NTND27AB
DCE
3 Spare RS-232

Maintenance
Routine maintenance consists of enabling and disabling MSDL cards and
downloading new versions of peripheral software. These activities are
performed by an authorized person such as a system administrator.

Troubleshooting the MSDL consists of determining problem types, isolating

problem sources, and solving the problem. A craftsperson normally
performs these activities.

CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 systems have self-diagnostic

indicators as well as software and hardware tools. These diagnostic
facilities simplify MSDL troubleshooting and reduce mean-time-to-repair
(MTTR). For complete information concerning system maintenance, refer to
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Maintenance
(NN43021-700).

For complete information regarding software maintenance programs, refer

to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

MSDL states
MSDL states are controlled manually by maintenance programs or
automatically by the system. Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409) shows
MSDL states and the transitions among them. These are the three states
the MSDL may be in:
• Manually disabled
• Enabled
• System disabled

The following sections describe the relationships between these states.

Manually disabled
In this state, the MSDL is not active. The system does not attempt to
communicate or attempt any automatic maintenance on the MSDL.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance 409

Figure 106
MSDL states

A newly configured MSDL automatically enters the manually disabled state.

An operating MSDL can be manually disabled by issuing the DIS MSDL x
command in LD 37 (step 1 in Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409)).

Entering the DIS MSDL x command in LD 37 moves the card to manually

disabled status and stops all system communication with the card (step 5 in
Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409)).

Manually enabled
When the card has been manually disabled, re-enable it with the ENL MSDL
x command in LD 37 (step 2 in Figure 106 "MSDL states" (page 409)).

System disabled
When the system disables the MSDL card (step 4 in Figure 106 "MSDL
states" (page 409)), it continues to communicate and attempt maintenance
procedures on the card. To stop all system communication with the card,
enter DIS MSDL x to disable it (step 5 in Figure 106 "MSDL states"
(page 409)). Otherwise, the system periodically tries to enable the card,
attempting recovery during the midnight routines (step 3 in Figure 106
"MSDL states" (page 409)).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 410 NT6D80 MSDL card

The system disables the MSDL if the card:

• exhibits an overload condition
• does not respond to system messages
• is removed
• resets itself
• encounters a fatal error
• is frequently system disabled and recovered

When an MSDL is system disabled, a substate indicates why the MSDL is

disabled. The substates are:
• Not Responding The system cannot communicate with the MSDL.
• Self-Testing The MSDL card is performing self-tests.
• Self-tests Passed The MSDL card successfully completed self-tests
and the system is determining if download is required or the software
downloading is complete.
• Self-tests Failed The MSDL card self-tests failed.
• Shared RAM Tests Failed The system failed to read/write to the MSDL
shared RAM.
• Overload The system received an excessive number of messages
within a specified time period.
• Reset Threshold The system detected more than four resets within
10 minutes.
• Fatal Error The MSDL card encountered a fatal condition from which it
cannot recover.
• Recovery Threshold The MSDL card was successfully enabled by
the MSDL autorecovery function five times within 30 minutes. Each
time it was system disabled because of a problem encountered during
operation.
• Bootloading The MSDL base software is in the process of being
downloaded to the MSDL.

Detailed information on system disabled substates and the action required

for each substate appears in "Symptoms and actions" (page 415).

Maintaining the MSDL

The system controls automatic MSDL maintenance functions. A
craftsperson or system administrator performs manual maintenance by
changing the card status, downloading new versions of peripheral software,
or invoking self-tests.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance 411

System controlled maintenance

Built-in diagnostic functions constantly monitor and analyze the system and
individual card, performing the following operations:
• using autorecovery to automatically correct a temporarily faulty condition
and maintain the system and its components
• printing information and error messages to indicate abnormal conditions
that caused a temporary or an unrecoverable error

During system initialization, the system examines the MSDL base code. If
the base code needs to be downloaded, the CPU resets the MSDL card and
starts downloading immediately following initialization. At the same time, all
other MSDL peripheral software programs are checked and, if they do not
correspond to the system disk versions, the correct ones are downloaded
to the card.

If manual intervention is required during initialization or operation,

information and error messages appear on the console or the system
TTY to suggest the appropriate action. For a complete discussion of the
information and error messages, refer to Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611). Detailed information of system disabled
substates and the action required for each substate is found at the end
of this document.

Manually controlled maintenance

Use manual maintenance commands found in the following programs to
enable, disable, reset, get the status of, and perform self-tests on the MSDL
card:
• Input/Output Diagnostic Program LD 37
• Program LD 42
• Link Diagnostic Program LD 48
• PRI D-channel Diagnostic Program LD 96

For a complete discussion of these programs, refer to Software Input/Output

Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

Note 1: Enter commands after the dot (.) prompt.

Note 2: The "x" in the commands below represents the DNUM value
of the card number.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 412 NT6D80 MSDL card

Enabling the MSDL

Enter ENL MSDL x to enable the MSDL manually. If the MSDL base code
has not been previously downloaded or if the card version is different from
the one on the system disk, the software is downloaded and the card is
enabled.

To force software download and enable the card, enter ENL MSDL x
FDL. This command forces the download of the MSDL base code and the
configured peripheral software even if it is already resident on the card.
The card is then enabled.

To enable a disabled MSDL and its ports, enter ENL MSDL x ALL. This
command downloads all peripheral software (if required) and enables any
configured ports on the card. This command can be issued to enable some
manually disabled ports on an already enabled MSDL.

Disabling the MSDL

To disable an MSDL card, enter DIS MSDL x.

To disable the MSDL and all its ports, enter DIS MSDL x ALL.

Resetting the MSDL

To reset an MSDL and initiate a limited self-test, the MSDL must be in a
manually disabled state. To perform the reset, enter RST MSDL x.

Displaying MSDL status

To display the status of all MSDL cards, enter STAT MSDL.

To display the status of a specific MSDL, enter STAT MSDL x. The status
of the MSDL, its ports, and the operation of each port appears.

The command STAT MSDL x FULL displays all information about an

MSDL (card ID, bootload firmware version, base code version, base code
state, operation state, date of base code activation) as well as the version,
state, and activation date for each card operation.

Self-testing the MSDL

To perform extensive self-testing of an MSDL, enter SLFT MSDL x. This
test can be activated if the card is in the manually disabled state. If the test
passes, the system outputs the card ID and a pass message. If it fails, the
system displays a message indicating which test failed.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Maintenance 413

Manually isolating and correcting faults

Problems are due to configuration errors that occur during installation or
hardware faults resulting from component failure during operation. See
"Symptoms and actions" (page 415) for more information on problem
symptoms and required responses.
Isolate MSDL faults using the diagnostic tools described below:

Step Action

1 Observe and list the problem symptoms; for example, a typical

symptom is a permanently lit LED.

2 If the LED flashes three times but the card does not enable, verify
that the card is installed in a proper slot.

3 Check that the address is unique; no other card in the system can
be physically set to the same device number as the MSDL.

4 If installation is correct and no address conflict exists, refer to "Newly

installed MSDL cards" (page 413) or "Previously operating MSDL
cards" (page 413).
5 If the MSDL still does not operate correctly, contact your Nortel
representative.

—End—

Newly installed MSDL cards

Problems that occur during MSDL card installation usually result from
improperly installed, incorrectly addressed, or faulty cards.

If the LED on a newly installed MSDL does not flash three times after
insertion, wait 5 minutes, then remove and reinsert. If the LED still does not
flash three times, the card is faulty.

Previously operating MSDL cards

Problems that occur during normal operation usually result from faulty
cards. Follow these steps to evaluate the situation:

Step Action

1 Use the STAT MSDL x command to check MSDL card status. See
"Displaying MSDL status" (page 412).
2 If the card has been manually disabled, try to enable it using ENL
MSDL x. "Enabling the MSDL" (page 412) If this fails, perform
self-testing as described in step 4.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 414 NT6D80 MSDL card

3 If the card has been disabled by the system, disable it manually

with DIS MSDL x. Table

4 Invoke self-testing with the SLFT MSDL x command. "Self-testing

the MSDL" (page 412) If self-tests fail, replace the card. If self-tests
pass, try to enable the card again, as in step 2. If the card does
not enable, note the message output to the TTY and follow the
recommended action.

—End—

Replacing MSDL cards

After completing MSDL troubleshooting you may determine that one or
more MSDL cards are defective. Remove the defective cards and replace
them with new ones.

Procedure 20
Replacing an MSDL card
Step Action
An MSDL card can be removed from and inserted into a system module
without turning off the power to the module. Follow these steps:

1 Log in on the maintenance terminal.

2 At the > prompt, type LD 37 (you can also use LD 42, LD 48, or
LD 96) and press Enter.
3 Type DIS MSDL x ALL and press Enter to disable the MSDL and
any active operations running on one or more of its ports. The MSDL
card is now disabled.

4 Disconnect the cables from the MSDL faceplate connectors.

5 Unlatch the card-locking devices, and remove the card from the
module.

6 Set the switches on the replacement card to match those on the

defective card.
7 Insert the replacement card into the same card slot.

8 Observe the red LED on the front panel during self-test. If it flashes
three times and stays on, it has passed the test. Go to step 8.
9 If it does not flash three times and then stay on, it has failed the test.
Pull the MSDL partially out of the module and reinsert it firmly into the
module. If the problem persists, troubleshoot or replace the MSDL.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System disabled actions 415

10 Connect the cables to the MSDL faceplate connectors.

11 At the . prompt in the LD 37 program, type ENL MSDL x ALL and

press Enter to enable the MSDL and its operations. If the red LED
on the MSDL turns off, the MSDL is functioning correctly. Since
self-tests were not invoked, no result message appears.
12 Tag the defective card(s) with a description of the problem and return
them to your Nortel representative.

—End—

Symptoms and actions

Explained here are some of the symptoms, diagnoses, and actions required
to resolve MSDL card problems. Contact your Nortel representative for
further assistance.
These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the
card to an enabled state following installation or operational problems.
Symptom: The LED on the MSDL card is steadily lit.
Diagnosis: The MSDL card is disabled or faulty.
Action: Refer to "Trunk cards" (page 44).

or
Diagnosis: Peripheral software download failed because of MSDL card
or system disk failure.
Action: If only one MSDL card has its LED lit, replace it.

Symptom: Autorecovery is activated every 30 seconds to enable the

MSDL. MSDL300 messages appear on the console or TTY.
Diagnosis: The MSDL card has been system disabled because of an
incorrect address.
Action: Verify the switch settings.

or
Diagnosis: The MSDL card has been system disabled because of
peripheral software or configuration errors.
Action: Refer to "System disabled actions" (page 415).

System disabled actions

These explain the causes of problems and the actions needed to return the
card to an enabled state following system disabling.

SYSTEM DISABLED—NOT RESPONDING

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 416 NT6D80 MSDL card

Cause: The MSDL card is not installed or is unable to respond to the

messages from the system.
Action:
Check the MSDL messages on the console and take the action
recommended. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611).
Verify that the address switches on the MSDL are set correctly.
Verify that the card is properly installed in the shelf for at least 5 minutes.
If the problem persists, manually disable the card by entering the DIS
MSDL x. Follow the steps described in "Previously operating MSDL
cards" (page 413).

SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTING

Cause: The MSDL card has reset itself or the system has reset the card to
perform self-tests. Self-tests are in progress.
Action:
Wait until self-tests are completed. Under some circumstances, the
self-tests may take up to 6 minutes to complete.
Take the action described in the appropriate section below
("SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS PASSED" or "SYSTEM
DISABLED—SELF-TESTS FAILED").

SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS PASSED

Cause: The MSDL card passed self-tests. The system automatically

downloads the MSDL base code, if needed, and attempts to enable the
card using autorecovery. If a diagnostic program (overlay) is active, the
downloading of the MSDL base code occurs later.
Action:
Wait to see if the system enables the card immediately. If the
MSDL is enabled, no further action is necessary.
If the MSDL base code download fails five times, autorecovery
stops. The following appears in response to the STAT MSDL x
command;

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System disabled actions 417

MSDL 10: SYS DSBL—SELFTEST PASSED

NO RECOVERY UNTIL MIDNIGHT: FAILED BASE
DNLD 5 TIMES
SDI 10 DIS PORT 0
AML 11 DIS PORT 1
DCH 12 DIS PORT 2
AML 13 DIS PORT 3
Error messages usually indicate the problem in this case. See
"Maintaining the MSDL" (page 410).

SYSTEM DISABLED—SELF-TESTS FAILED

Cause: The card did not pass self-tests. These tests repeat five times. If
unsuccessful, autorecovery stops until midnight unless you take action.
Action:
Allow the system to repeat the self-tests.
If self-tests fail repeatedly, disable the card using the DIS MSDL x
command and replace the card.

SYSTEM DISABLED—SRAM TESTS FAILED

Cause: After self-tests pass, the system attempts to perform read/write tests
on the shared RAM on the MSDL and detects a fault. The shared RAM
test repeats five times, and, if unsuccessful, autorecovery does not resume
until midnight unless you take action.
Action:
Allow the system to repeat the self-tests.
If self-tests fail repeatedly, disable the card using the DIS MSDL x
command and replace the card.

SYSTEM DISABLED—OVERLOAD

Cause: The system received an excessive number of messages from the

MSDL card in a certain time. If the card invokes overload four times in
30 minutes, it exceeds the recovery threshold as described in "SYSTEM
DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD." The system resets the card,
invokes self-tests, and attempts to enable the card. The problem may be due
to excessive traffic on one or more MSDL ports. Traffic load redistribution
may resolve this condition.
Action:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 418 NT6D80 MSDL card

Check the traffic report, which may indicate that one or more MSDL
ports are handling excessive traffic.
By disabling each port, identify the port with too much traffic and allow
the remaining ports to operate normally. Refer to "Maintaining the MSDL"
(page 410). If the problem persists, place the card in the manually
disabled state by the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in
"Previously operating MSDL cards" (page 413).

SYSTEM DISABLED—RESET THRESHOLD

Cause: The system detected more than four MSDL card resets within 10
minutes. The system attempts to enable the card again at midnight unless
you intervene.
Action:
Place the card in the manually disabled state with the DIS MSDL x
command and follow the steps in "Previously operating MSDL cards"
(page 413).

SYSTEM DISABLED—FATAL ERROR

Cause: The MSDL card encountered a fatal error and cannot recover. The
exact reason for the fatal error is shown in the MSDL300 error message
output to the console of TTY when the error occurred.
Action:
Check the MSDL300 message to find out the reason.
Alternatively, display the status of the MSDL, which also indicates the
cause of the problem, with the STAT MSDL x command and check the
information to find the cause of the fatal error.
Allow the system to attempt recovery. If this fails, either by reaching a
threshold or detecting self-test failure, place the MSDL in the manually
disabled state with the DIS MSDL x command and follow the steps in
"Previously operating MSDL cards" (page 413).

SYSTEM DISABLED—RECOVERY THRESHOLD

Cause: The system attempted autorecovery of the MSDL card more than
five times within 30 minutes and each time the card was disabled again. The
system attempts to enable the card again at midnight unless you intervene.
Action:
Place the MSDL card in a manually disabled state with the DIS MSDL
x command and follow the steps in "Previously operating MSDL cards"
(page 413).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 419

NT7D16 Data Access card

Content list
The following are the topics in this section:

"Introduction" (page 420)

"Features" (page 420)

"Controls and indicators" (page 421)

"Dialing operations" (page 422)

"Operating modes" (page 426)

"Keyboard dialing" (page 453)

"Hayes dialing" (page 462)

"Specifications" (page 472)

"System database requirements" (page 475)

"Power supply" (page 478)

"Installing the Data Access card" (page 479)

"Port configuration" (page 481)

"Cabling" (page 482)

"Backplane pinout and signaling" (page 487)

"Configuring the Data Access card" (page 490)

"Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC" (page 494)

"Upgrading systems" (page 494)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 420 NT7D16 Data Access card

Introduction
The NT7D16 Data Access card (DAC) is a data interface card that integrates
the functionality of the QPC723A RS-232 4-Port Interface Line card
(RILC) and the QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line card (AILC). This
combination allows the NT7D16 DAC to work with the RS-232-C interface,
the RS-422 interface, or both.

The DAC supports up to six ports, each capable of operating in RS-232-C or

RS-422 mode. Each port supports its own parameters that, once configured
and stored in the system database memory, are downloaded to the card.

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

Features
Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) indicate the status of the card, the call
connection, and the mode (RS-232-C or RS-422) the DAC is operating in. A
push-button toggle switch allows you to scan all six ports and monitor the
activity on each port.
The DAC supports the following features:
• Asynchronous and full duplex operation
• Keyboard dialing
• Hayes dialing
• Data terminal equipment (DTE)/data communication equipment (DCE)
mode selection
• Modem and gateway connectivity in DTE mode
• Terminal and host connectivity in DCE mode
• Forced or normal DTR
• Hotline
• Remote and local loopback testing
• Virtual leased line mode
• Inactivity timeout
• Wire test mode
• Self diagnostics
• Inbound modem pooling with any asynchronous modems
• Outbound modem pooling using "dumb" modems
• Outbound modem pooling using auto dialing modems

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Controls and indicators 421

Controls and indicators

The LEDs on the DAC faceplate indicate the status mode for each port.
Figure 107 "NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate" (page 423) shows the
NT7D16 DAC faceplate.

Card status
The LED at the top of the faceplate is unlabeled. This LED is:
• off: if one or more ports are enabled
• on: if all ports are disabled

Electronic Industries Association signal monitors

The six LEDs located below the card status LED are labeled SD, RD,
DTR, DSR, DCD, and RI. They show the dynamic state of the associated
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) control leads for a specific port (as
shown by the display). When in RS-422 mode, only SD and RD are utilized.
When in RS-232-C mode, the LED goes on to indicate that the signal is
asserted on, or off to indicate that the signal is asserted off. When the LED
is off, there is no active voltage on the signal lead.

CONNECT
This lamp lights to indicate that a data call is established for the port
displayed. A data call is connected when the data module-to-data module
protocol messages are successfully exchanged between the two ends.

Port mode
This lamp lights to indicate that the port indicated is in RS-422 mode. If the
lamp is dark, the specified port is in RS-232-C mode.

Port number
The number displayed specifies the port driving the EIA signal LEDs
mentioned above. The push-button switch below the display allows you to
rotate among the six ports to monitor the activity of any port. This display
is also used to monitor several error conditions.

Port select button

This push-button switch below the display is used to select which port
is monitored.

Wire test
These switches are used to select the wire test mode for each of the six
ports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 422 NT7D16 Data Access card

Dialing operations
The DAC supports both keyboard and Hayes dialing sequences. The
following discussion concerns features common to both dialing modes.

Port firmware in idle state

The port firmware is considered idle when it is expecting one of the allowed
autobaud characters. The idle state is identified by either of the following
conditions:
• The last prompt received was RELEASED (keyboard dialing).
• The last prompt received was OK, NO CARRIER, or ERROR (Hayes
dialing).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dialing operations 423

Figure 107
NT7D16 Data Access card faceplate

Call Set-up abort

The user may abandon the call during the dialogue phase using one of
the following methods:
• Terminal off-line This method is useful for RS-232-C interface only.
The equipment drops Data Terminal Ready (DTR) to indicate an idle

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 424 NT7D16 Data Access card

connection. For example, if the equipment is turned off, the DAC

interprets that signal as an idle connection.
• Long break The user sends a break (transmit line held in the OFF or
SPACE state) for more than 1.2 seconds. The break is not transmitted
to the far end. At the end of the long break, the DAC port initiates call
disconnect. The AILU converts the dropping of DTR into a long break for
the RS-422 interface. The long break feature can be disabled through
the Modify menu on the DAC port.
• Three short breaks When the user equipment transmits three breaks
to the far end, the DAC abandons the call. Note that the breaks must
be spaced at least 10 msec apart, and all three must occur within 3
seconds.

Make Port Busy on loss of DTR

This feature is implemented by means of the Make Set Busy (MSB) station
feature. When this is activated, any attempt to reach the specified Data
DN results in a busy signal.

This application, which operates only in the RS-232-C mode, requires

a non-standard RS-232-C interface. Only two of the possible sixteen
RS-232-C modes can be used: Mode 8 (DCE, Host, Normal DTR, Manual
dial), and Mode 12 (DCE, Terminal, Normal DTR, Manual dial). This feature
is configured in the software, and is downloaded to the DAC.

A DTR timeout period is started whenever the DTR signal lead makes the
transition to OFF. If DTR is returned to ON within the set time period (5
seconds), the DAC port operates as if this feature was not activated. If the
DTR remains OFF beyond the 5 seconds, the system receives an MSB
feature key message. The DAC sends another MSB message when the
DTR returns to ON, and the port is able to receive inbound calls.

Note: If this feature is active, and the port is connected to a DTE that
holds DTR OFF when idle, then the port is permanently busied out to
inbound calls following the DTR timeout period.

Inactivity timeout
Once a successful data call is completed, the user’s activity is monitored. If
no activity occurs within the amount of time configured in the downloaded
parameters, the DAC releases the call. Three minutes before the inactivity
timeout takes place, the DAC sends a warning message to the near-end
equipment if terminal mode is selected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Dialing operations 425

Wire test mode

The DAC allows for the EIA signaling leads to be tested to facilitate
installation and troubleshooting. This feature can be invoked through the
service change downloaded parameters, or by setting the appropriate front
panel switch. Wire test mode only operates when the port is idle. The leads
are cycled ON and OFF in 0.5 second periods (ON for 0.5 seconds, OFF for
0.5 seconds) for the number of cycles shown in Table 178 "Wire test signal
leads cycle counts" (page 425). The lead status can be monitored by the
front panel LEDs. The test is run indefinitely until the front panel switch is
turned off, and the software wire test parameters are disabled.

Note: For the most accurate results, be sure no equipment is connected

to the EIA leads.

Table 178
Wire test signal leads cycle counts
Cycle count
EIA Signal Lead
Label description Pin RS-232-C RS-422
TxD Transmit 2 1 1
RxD Receive 3 2 2
CTS Clear To Send 5 3 —
DSR Data Set Ready 6 4 —
DCD Carrier Detect 8 5 —
DTR Data Terminal Ready 20 6 —
RI Ring Indicator 22 7 —
Note: The CTS signal is not included in the faceplate LED. Therefore, a
1.5-second delay occurs between the RxD lamp going on, and the DSR lamp
going on.

Independent storage of dialing parameters

Two dialing parameters, DCD control, and Answer mode, can be modified
by both keyboard and Hayes dialing commands.

The Hayes dialing mode also allows the user to modify the Input echo
control, and Prompt/Result codes transmit control. With keyboard dialing,
the Input echo control and Prompt/Response codes control are determined
by the downloaded parameters. They cannot be altered through dialing
commands.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 426 NT7D16 Data Access card

The DAC maintains separate buffers for keyboard and Hayes dialing modes.
Changes made to a given parameter in one mode do not affect that
parameter in the other mode. When a dialing mode is selected, the DAC
copies the corresponding dialing parameters into the active buffer. This
buffer controls the call processing.

If the DAC receives an incoming call while idle, the most recent dialing mode
is used to answer the call.

User input
User input may include either upper or lower case ASCII characters.

All entries are accumulated in an input record. This record is completed with
a Terminator character. For keyboard dialing, this character is always <CR>;
for Hayes dialing, it can be user defined (but default to <CR>). The entries
are not processed until the Terminator character is received.

The input record is limited to 43 characters, including the Terminator, but

excluding any ignored space characters.

The record can be edited by using the backspace and escape characters.

Operating modes
There are sixteen possible RS-232-C operating modes with three basic
common modes of operation which correspond to three types of equipment
connected to the DAC. The three modes are: modem, terminal, and host.
Host mode is a subset of the terminal mode, which only suppresses the
prompts at the terminal.

The fourth mode, gateway, is a subset of the modem mode and is not
normally used. This mode is useful if the attached modems do not have
Ring Indicator lead. The application used is inbound modem pooling.

The different modes enable the DAC to connect to different types of devices
such as modems (modes 0, 1, 2, and 3), gateways (modes 4, 5. 6, and 7),
hosts (modes 8. 9. 10, and 11), and terminals (modes 12. 13. 14, and 15).
After selecting the appropriate group (that is, modem, gateway, host, or
terminal), the installer should study the four different modes in that group
to make the proper selection. See Table 179 "DAC mode of operation
selection" (page 427).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 427

Table 179
DAC mode of operation selection
Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11)
Modem/
Operation Gateway/ Forced Type of device
mode Host/KBD DTR* Hotline to be connected Group selection
DEM PRM DTR HOT
0 (DTE) OFF OFF OFF Modem Pool Modes 0, 1, 2,
"Host On" (Ri Not Not inbound and and 3 are for
ng Indicator Forced Hotline outbound (similar RS232 modem
— RI) to Synchronous connectivity
/ Asynchronous
Data Module
(SADM) in
inbound) MSB
by RI
1 (DTE) OFF OFF ON Modem Pool
"Host On" Not Hotline inbound only
(RI) Forced (Hotline by RI-
similar to SADM)
2 (DTE) OFF ON OFF Modem Pool
"Host On" Forced Not inbound and
(RI) Hotline outbound (for
Hayes 1200
modem) MSB
by RI
3 (DTE) OFF ON ON Modem Pool
"Host On" Forced Hotline inbound only
(RI) (Hotline for Hayes
1200 modem
only)
4 (DTE) ON OFF OFF Gateway inbound Modes 4, 5, 6,
"Keyboard Not Not and outbound and 7 are for
Dialing Forced Hotline (DTR is OFF in RS232 Gateway
(KBD) On" idle state) MSB connectivity
(No RI) by Carrier Detect
(DCD)
5 (DTE) ON OFF ON Gateway inbound
"KBD On" Not Hotline only (Hotline by
(No RI) Forced DCD: ON for
Hotline
OFF for Virtual
Leased Line (VLL)
* Not prompted for Type = R422. Defaults for Type = R422: DEM = DCE and DTR = OFF.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 428 NT7D16 Data Access card

Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11)

Modem/
Operation Gateway/ Forced Type of device
mode Host/KBD DTR* Hotline to be connected Group selection
DEM PRM DTR HOT
6 (DTE) ON ON OFF Gateway inbound
"KBD On" Forced Not and outbound
(No RI) Hotline (DTR is on in idle
state)
MSB by DCD
7 (DTE) ON ON ON Gateway inbound
"KBD On" Forced Hotline only (Hotline by
(No RI) DCD:
ON for Hotline
OFF for VLL)
(DTR is ON in idle
state)
8 (DCE) OFF OFF OFF Outbound to Host Modes 8 and 9
"Host On" Not Not (similar to Multi are for RS422
(prompts off) Forced Hotline Channel Data Host connectivity
System (MCDS))
Prompt PBDO =
OFF/ON
9 (DCE) OFF OFF On Host Hotline by
"Host On" Not Hotline DTR
(prompts off) Forced
10 (DCE) OFF ON OFF Host similar to Modes 8, 9,
"Host On" Forced Not MCDS but does 10, and 11 are
(prompts off) Hotline not require DTR for RS232 Host
to be ON connectivity
11 (DCE) OFF ON On Continuous
"Host On" Forced Hotline Hotline mode
(prompts off) when DTR is ON
(VLL)
12 (DCE) ON OFF OFF Terminal similar Modes 12 and
"KBD On" Not Not to Asynchronou 13 are for
(prompts on) Forced Hotline s/Synchronous RS422 Terminal
Interface Module connectivity
(ASIM) when set
to Not Forced
DTR and Not
Hotline Prompt
PBDO = OFF/ON
* Not prompted for Type = R422. Defaults for Type = R422: DEM = DCE and DTR = OFF.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 429

Service changeable downloadable parameters (LD 11)

Modem/
Operation Gateway/ Forced Type of device
mode Host/KBD DTR* Hotline to be connected Group selection
DEM PRM DTR HOT
13 (DCE) ON OFF On Terminal similar to
"KBD On" Not Hotline ASIM when set to
(prompts on) Forced Not Forced DTR
and Hotline
14 (DCE) ON ON OFF Terminal similar Modes 12, 13,
"KBD On" Forced Not to ASIM when set 14, and 15 are for
(prompts on) Hotline to forced DTR and RS232 Terminal
Not Hotline connectivity
(similar to ASIM)
15 (DCE) ON ON Forced On Hotline Continuous
"KBD On" Hotline when DTR
(prompts on) is ON
* Not prompted for Type = R422. Defaults for Type = R422: DEM = DCE and DTR = OFF.

Selecting the proper mode for Modem connectivity

Select modes 0, 1, 2, and 3 when the DAC is connected to different types of
modems for inbound and outbound modem pooling. In these modes, the
DAC operates as a DTE, monitors the DSR, DCD, and RI control leads, and
drives the DTR lead. No menus are given and no characters are echoed
when DCD is OFF. All prompts and messages are enabled for inbound
calls and disabled for outbound calls.

In modes 0 and 1, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF when in the idle state,
and ON when processing an incoming or outgoing call.

In modes 2 and 3, the DAC drives the DTR lead ON except when the call is
being disconnected. At disconnect, DTR is dropped for 0.2 seconds and
then returns to ON.

In the case of outbound modem pooling, the DAC answers the data call and
drives the DTR lead ON (modes 0 and 1). Then the calling data module and
the DAC form a transparent link between the calling DTE and the modem.
The DTE user may then enter the appropriate commands to the modem for
dialing a remote modem. When the call is established, the modem may
cause the DAC to disconnect the call by dropping either DSR or DCD.

In the case of inbound modem pooling, the modem must drive the RI lead
ON to activate the DAC. Then the DAC responds by driving the DTR lead
ON and making the unit busy for outbound calls (modes 0 and 1). The
modem is expected to turn DCD to ON within 35 seconds; otherwise,

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 430 NT7D16 Data Access card

the call is dropped by the DAC. If the modem turns DCD ON before the
35-second timeout, the DAC validates the incoming call and prepares to
accept <CR> from the remote modem for autobaud. See Figure 108 "DAC
to modem connectivity" (page 430) for more details.

Figure 108
DAC to modem connectivity

Mode 0
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a modem,
except Hayes-1200, for inbound and outbound modem pooling (see modes 2
and 3 for Hayes-1200 modem). The following modem features are required:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the modem is used

for inbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to drive the RI lead ON
when ringing is present at its tip and ring. In addition, the modem should
auto-answer after the first ringing cycle if the DTR lead is ON (most modems
support this feature).

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all modems to

be connected to the DAC. It allows the modem to drive the DCD lead ON
when the carrier is detected and OFF when the carrier is absent (most
modems support this feature).

Auto-dial capability This feature is required when the modem is used for
outbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to go off-hook and dial the
remote number (such as Smartmodem Hayes-2400 or Bizcomp).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 431

Auto-reset capability This feature is required when the modem is used

for outbound modem pooling. The modem should execute auto-reset
when the DTR lead goes OFF. As a result, the modem must reset all its
internal parameters to the default values. This feature prevents the users
of the modem pool from modifying the modem’s default parameters to
inappropriate values.

Configuring modems for mode 0

To configure Hayes modem 2400, enter the following commands:
AT&D2&W
ATVl&W
ATQ&W
ATEl&W
ATSO= 1&W
AT&Cl&Sl&W
AT&J&W
ATB1&W
AT&D3&W

Since the default parameters are programmable using commands, there is

no guarantee that users cannot change them.
To configure Bizcomp 1200 modem, set the following parameters in LD11:
DEMDTE
PRMOFF
DTROFF
HOTOFF

• To configure MULTI MODEM 224E modem, set the configuration

switches as follows:

switches 3 and 8 to DOWN position

• all other switches to UP position. Switch 7 should be UP when using
RJ-11 jack.

Programing DAC for mode 0 in service change LD11

When used for inbound or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be
configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbound and outbound
Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232; station hunting for
the outbound modem access should be in the opposite direction to the
500/2500 station hunting for the inbound modem access. See Figure 109
"DAC to Modem Pool connectivity" (page 432) for more details.

Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate outbound

and inbound Modem Pools.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 432 NT7D16 Data Access card

Figure 109
DAC to Modem Pool connectivity

Mode 1
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an
auto-answer modem for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC
automatically executes Hotline operation when RI is driven ON by the
modem. The following modem features are required:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the modem is used

for inbound modem pooling. It allows the modem to drive the RI lead ON
when ringing is present at its tip and ring. In addition, the modem should
auto-answer after the first ringing cycle if the DTR lead is ON (most modems
support this feature).

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all modems to

be connected to the DAC. It allows the modem to drive the DCD lead ON
when the carrier is detected and OFF when the carrier is absent (most
modems support this feature).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 433

The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by switches 6 and 8, and the
system should be programmed to allow inbound modem calls only.

Configuring modems for mode 1

Most dumb modems can be configured for this mode. The modem must be
able to auto-answer and use dynamic control of DCD as described in mode
0. Smart modems can also be used if set to the dumb mode of operation.
Hayes 2400, Bizcomp 1200, and MULTI MODEM 224E can be used when
set up as follows:
• For Hayes 2400, the dumb-mode-strap should be moved to the
dumb-position (see Hayes manual).
• For Bizcomp 1200 modem, set the following parameters in LD11:

DEMDTE
PRMOFF
DTROFF
HOTON

Hayes 1200 cannot be used in this mode when the default parameters are
selected (see mode 3).

Programing DAC for mode 1 in service change LD11

The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature key is used for
this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an Asynchronous Data
Module (ADM) trunk.

Mode 2
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200
modem for inbound and outbound modem pooling. This mode is created
specially to resolve some problems that were encountered with this modem,
namely, the auto-reset implementation. When this modem is operating in
the auto-reset mode, it drives both RI and DCD ON as long as DTR is OFF.
This problem was resolved by driving DTR ON in the idle state, and OFF for
0.2 seconds, and then ON when an established call is dropped. The DAC
also ignores the status of RI and DCD for approximately 2 seconds after a
call is released to avoid false inbound call initiation.

Configuring Hayes 1200 for mode 2

To configure this modem, set the following parameters in LD11:
DEMDTE
PRMOFF
DTRON
HOTOFF

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 434 NT7D16 Data Access card

To configure this modem, set the configuration switches as follows:

• switches 3, 8, and 10 to DOWN position
• all other switches to UP position. Switch 7 should be UP when using
RJ-11 jack.

Programing DAC for mode 2 in service change LD11

When used for inbound or outbound Modem Pool only, the DAC can be
configured as R232 in LD11. When used for both inbound and outbound
Modem Pool, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is
programmed as station hunting, outbound modem access should be in the
opposite direction to the 500/2500 station hunting for the inbound modem
access.

Note: If Call Detail Recording (CDR) is required, use separate outbound

and inbound Modem Pools.

Mode 3
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a Hayes-1200
modem for inbound Hotline operation. It is recommended that mode 1 be
used for inbound Hotline operations if some other modem is available.
However, if only Hayes-1200 modems are available, then this mode could
be used as a last resort.

Configuring Hayes 1200 for mode 3

For Hayes 1200 modem, set the following parameters in LD11:
DEMDTE
PRMOFF
DTRON
HOTON
To configure this modem, set the configuration switches as follows:
• all switches to UP position, except for switch 4. Switch 7 should be
UP when using RJ-11 jack.

Programing DAC for mode 3 in service change LD11

The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this
mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Selecting the proper mode for Gateway connectivity

Select modes 4, 5, 6, and 7 when the DAC is connected to different types of
gateways for inbound and outbound operations. The term gateway refers to
any equipment that has the following characteristics:
• The equipment must be a DCE.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 435

• The equipment does not drive RI lead (optional, the DAC ignores this
lead).
• The equipment must drive DCD lead dynamically.
• The equipment drives DSR lead (optional).
• The equipment can monitor the DTR lead (optional, depending on the
mode selected).

In modes 4, 5, 6, and 7, the DAC:

• operates as a DTE
• monitors the DSR
• monitors DCD control leads
• drives the DTR lead

The RI lead is ignored. No menus or prompts are given when DCD is OFF.
All prompts and messages are enabled for inbound calls and disabled
for outbound calls. See Figure 110 "DAC to Gateway connectivity" (page
436) for more details.

In modes 4 and 5, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF in the idle state, and
ON when processing an incoming or outgoing call.

In modes 6 and 7, the DAC drives the DTR lead ON except when the call is
being disconnected. At disconnect, DTR is dropped for 0.2 seconds and
then returns to ON.

With outbound gateway access, the DAC answers the data call and drives
the DTR lead ON (modes 4 and 5; in modes 6 and 7, DTR is already ON).
Then the calling data module and the DAC form a transparent link between
the calling Data Module (DM) and the gateway. The DM user may then enter
the appropriate commands to the gateway to establish a data call. The
DAC expects the gateway to drive DCD ON (modes 4 and 5 only) within 35
seconds. If the gateway fails to do so, the DAC turns DTR OFF and drops
the call. When the call is established, the gateway may cause the DAC to
disconnect the call by dropping either DSR or DCD.

For inbound gateway access, the gateway must drive the DCD lead ON to
activate the DAC. When the DAC receives this signal, it drives the DTR lead
ON, makes the unit busy for outbound calls (modes 4 and 5; in modes 6 and
7, DTR is already ON), and prepares to accept <CR> for autobaud. The
DAC expects DCD to remain ON for as long as the data call is established.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 436 NT7D16 Data Access card

Figure 110
DAC to Gateway connectivity

Mode 4
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway for
inbound and outbound operation. The characteristics of the gateways to
be used with this mode are:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the gateway is used

for inbound operation. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON
when the inbound data call is pending. In addition, the gateway should
auto-answer when the DTR lead is ON.

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all gateways

to be connected to the DAC. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead
ON when the data call is established, and OFF when the data call is
disconnected.

In the inbound operation, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF until the
gateway drives the DCD lead ON. Then, the DAC drives DTR ON and makes
that unit busy for any outbound calls. After that, the user of the gateway may
enter the proper commands to establish a local data call to any DM.

In the outbound operation, the DAC drives the DTR lead OFF until another
DM calls it for outbound accessing. The DAC answers the data call and
drives the DTR lead ON. The calling DM is then transparently connected to
the gateway. The DAC requires the gateway to drive the DCD lead to ON
within 35 seconds after the outbound call is connected. Call disconnection
may be initiated by dropping DCD (or DSR) from ON to OFF.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 437

Programing DAC for mode 4 in service change LD 11

When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be
configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound
gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is
programmed as station hunting, outbound gateway access should be in the
opposite direction to the hunting for inbound gateway access. See Figure
111 "DAC to Gateway-Inbound/Outbound connectivity" (page 437) for more
details.

Note: If CDR is required, use separate outbound and inbound gateway

access.

Figure 111
DAC to Gateway-Inbound/Outbound connectivity

Mode 5
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to an
auto-answer gateway for inbound Hotline operation. In this mode, the DAC
automatically executes Hotline operation when DCD is driven ON by the
gateway. If the DM being called by the Hotline operation is busy or not
answering, the DAC places repeated Hotline calls as long as the DCD lead
is ON until the called unit answers. The following features are required
on the gateway used in this mode:

Auto-answer capability This feature is required when the gateway is used

for inbound operation. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead ON
when the inbound data call is pending. In addition, the gateway should
auto-answer when the DTR lead is ON.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 438 NT7D16 Data Access card

Dynamic control of DCD This feature must be supported by all gateways

to be connected to the DAC. It allows the gateway to drive the DCD lead
ON when the data call is established, and OFF when the data call is
disconnected.

The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD
parameters in LD 11. The system should be programmed to allow inbound
modem calls only.

Programing DAC for mode 5 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this
mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Mode 6
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway that
requires DTR to be ON always except during call disconnection. In this
mode, the DAC can be used for both inbound and outbound operations. The
operation of this mode is similar to mode 4 except for the following:
• The DTR lead is ON in the idle state.
• The DTR lead is dropped OFF for 0.2 seconds when an established
call is disconnected.

Programing DAC for mode 6 in service change LD 11

When used for inbound or outbound gateway access, the DAC can be
configured as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound
gateway access, the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is
programmed as station hunting, outbound gateway access should be in the
opposite direction to the hunting for inbound gateway access. See Figure
111 "DAC to Gateway-Inbound/Outbound connectivity" (page 437) for more
details.

Note: If CDR is required, use separate outbound and inbound gateway

access.

Mode 7
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a gateway for
inbound Hotline operation. The operation of this mode is similar to mode 5
except for the following:
• The DTR lead is ON in the idle state.
• The DTR lead is dropped OFF for 0.2 second when an established call
is disconnected.

The baud rate of inbound Hotline calls is determined by programmable

database. The system should be programmed to allow inbound calls only
on the DAC unit.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 439

Programing DAC for mode 7 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this
mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Selecting the proper mode for Host connectivity

Select modes 8, 9, 10, and 11 when the DAC is connected to different types
of hosts (DTE). In these modes, the DAC operates as a DCE and drives
DSR, DCD, and RI control leads (see Figure 112 "DAC to Host connectivity"
(page 439)). CTS, DSR, and DCD are driven OFF in the idle state.

The DAC does not send any menu or prompt to the host, nor echoes any
command sent from the host. The CTS, DSR, and DCD are driven ON until
the call is released. An incoming call to the DAC causes the RI lead to go
ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered
by the host. When the host turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call. If
DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives CTS, DSR, and
DCD ON. If DTR was already ON, the DAC does not drive RI ON.

Figure 112
DAC to Host connectivity

Mode 8
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for
host accessing. In this mode, the DAC operates in a similar manner to the
MCDS. The hosts display the following characteristics:

Auto-answer capability The host should be capable of monitoring the RI

lead for detection of incoming calls. When RI is turned ON by the DAC, the
host responds by driving DTR ON, which forces the DAC to answer the

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 440 NT7D16 Data Access card

incoming call. If the host drives the DTR lead ON all the time, incoming
calls are always immediately answered and the RI lead is not turned ON
by the DAC. If DM-to-DM protocol exchange is successful, the DAC drives
CTS, DSR, and DCD ON.

Dynamic control of DTR This feature is required only if the host must be
capable of releasing an established call. The host should be able to drop an
established data call by driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms.

Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make Set Busy is

activated when DTR is driven OFF for more than five seconds.

In this mode, the DAC does not send any menus or prompts to the host.
However, the host can still originate an outgoing call by blind-dialing
(sending commands to the DAC without receiving echoes).

Programing DAC for mode 8 in service change LD 11 When used for

inbound or outbound host access, the DAC can be configured as R232 or
R422 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound host access, the
DAC must be configured as R232 or R422. When the DAC is programmed
as station hunting, outbound host access should be in the opposite direction
to the hunting for inbound host access.

Note: If CDR is required, use separate outbound and inbound host

access.

Mode 9
Select this mode when the DAC is connected to a host and Hotline call
origination is required. In this mode, the host can Hotline to a specific data
unit by simply driving the DTR lead ON. The transition of DTR from OFF
to ON causes the DAC to Hotline to the Autodial DN. The hosts display
the following characteristics.

Dynamic control of DTR for call origination The host should be capable
of driving the DTR lead from OFF to ON to initiate the Hotline call. If the
host always drives the DTR lead ON (not capable of dynamic control), mode
11 should be used.

Dynamic control of DTR for releasing established calls This feature

is required only if it is required that the host be capable of releasing an
established call. The host should be able to drop an established data call by
driving DTR OFF for more than 100 ms.

Programing DAC for mode 9 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 (the Autodial feature is used
for this mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 441

Mode 10
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host for
inbound host accessing. The host in this mode is not required to monitor RI
or drive DTR. This mode is similar to mode 8, except for the following:
• The status of DTR lead is assumed to be always ON, even when the
actual condition of that lead is OFF (forced-DTR). The DAC always
answers an incoming call regardless of the status of DTR.
• The host cannot release an established data call by driving DTR OFF.
As a result, the host cannot initiate call release except with a long break
or three short breaks.

In this mode, the DAC does not send any menus or prompts to the host.
However, the host can still originate an outgoing call by blind-dialing
(sending commands to the DAC without receiving echoes).

Programing DAC for mode 10 in service change LD 11

When used for inbound or outbound host access, the DAC can be configured
as R232 in LD 11. When used for both inbound and outbound host access,
the DAC must be configured as R232. When the DAC is programmed as
station hunting, outbound host access should be in the opposite direction to
the hunting for inbound host access.

Note: If CDR is required, use separate outbound and inbound gateway

access.

Mode 11
This mode provides a "virtual leased line" and the meaning of the Forced
DTR switch is re-defined. The operation is similar to having a leased
line feature, where the connection between two extensions is always
established. The DAC does not send any menus or prompts to the host.
The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by switches 6, 7, and 8.

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a host and
continuous Hotline operation is required. In this mode, the DAC repeatedly
tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is ON. When the DAC tries
to Hotline to a busy Data Module, it activates Ring Again and the connection
is established as soon as the called unit is free. After establishing the data
call, if the called unit releases the call for any reason, the DAC automatically
tries to Hotline again to reestablish the call.

If the data unit being called does not answer the Hotline call, the DAC tries
to place another Hotline call once every 40 seconds until the called unit
answers. This mode is recommended only when a permanent connection
between a host and another data unit is required.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 442 NT7D16 Data Access card

Programing DAC for mode 11 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 (the Autodial feature is used for this
mode). The DAC must not be configured as an ADM trunk.

Selecting the proper mode for Terminal connectivity

Select modes 12, 13, 14,and 15 when the DAC is connected to different
types of terminals. In these modes, the DAC operates as a DCE, drives
DSR, DCD, and RI control leads, and monitors DTR lead in modes 12, 13,
and 15 (see Figure 113 "DAC to Terminal connectivity" (page 442)). DTR is
ignored in mode 14. All the menus and prompts are sent to the terminals
and all the commands from the terminals are echoed. CTS, DSR, and DCD
are driven OFF during the idle state (data call is not established).

When the call is released, DSR and DCD are turned OFF for 200 ms. The RI
lead is controlled only in modes 12, 13, and 15, and is driven OFF in the idle
and connect states. An incoming call to the DAC causes the RI lead to go
ON for 2 seconds and then OFF for 4 seconds until the call is answered by
the terminal. When the terminal turns DTR ON, the DAC answers the call.

Mode 12
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal
(DTE) for inbound and outbound data calls. This mode is similar to the
operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and not-Hotline. In this
mode, call origination and auto-answer are executed by the DAC unless the
DTR lead is driven ON by the terminal. Any terminal that drives the DTR
lead ON can be used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102).

Figure 113
DAC to Terminal connectivity

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 443

The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped
or when control—Z is entered during the idle state. In this case, the DAC
drives those leads OFF for 0.2 seconds and then ON. When the DTR lead
is driven OFF by the terminal, the DAC does not execute autobaud nor
responds to any command.

Note: If the PBDO parameter in LD 11 is ON, then Make Set Busy is

activated when DTR is driven OFF for more than five seconds.

Programing DAC for mode 12 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 since Autodial, Speed Call,
and Display commands are likely to be used.

Mode 13
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal
(DTE) and Hotline call origination is required. This mode is similar to the
operation of the ASIM when set to not-forced-DTR and Hotline. In this
mode, the terminal is able to Hotline to a specific data unit by driving the
DTR lead ON. The transition of DTR from OFF to ON causes the DAC to
Hotline to the Autodial DN. Any terminal that drives DTR lead ON can be
used with this mode (such as VT100 or VT102).

The DAC drives CTS, DSR, and DCD ON, except when a call is dropped.
In this case, the DAC drives those leads OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.
The baud rate of the Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD
parameters in LD 11.

Programing DAC for mode 13 in service change LD11

The DAC must be configured as R232 or R422 since Autodial, Speed Call,
and Display commands are likely to be used.

Mode 14
This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal
(DTE) for inbound and outbound data calls. This mode is similar to the
operation of the ASIM when set to forced-DTR and not-Hotline. The terminal
used with this mode is not required to drive the DTR lead. This mode of
operation is similar to mode 12, except for the following:
• The status of DTR lead is assumed to be always ON, even when the
actual condition of that lead is OFF (forced-DTR). The DAC always
answers an incoming call regardless of the DTR status.
• The terminal cannot release an established data call by driving DTR
OFF. As a result, the terminal cannot initiate call release except with a
long break or three short breaks.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 444 NT7D16 Data Access card

Programing DAC for mode 14 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 since Autodial, Speed Call, and
Display commands are likely to be used.

Mode 15
This mode provides a "virtual leased line" and the meaning of the "Forced
DTR" switch is re-defined.

This mode should be selected when the DAC is connected to a terminal

(DTE) and continuous Hotline call origination is required. In this mode,
the DAC repeatedly tries to Hotline to the Autodial DN as long as DTR is
ON. This operation is similar to having a leased line feature, where the
connection between two extensions is always established. When the
DAC tries to Hotline to a busy Data Module, it activates Ring Again and
the connection is established as soon as the called unit is free. After
establishing the data call, if the called unit releases the call for any reason,
the DAC automatically tries to Hotline again to reestablish the call.

If the data unit being called does not answer the Hotline call, the DAC tries
to place another Hotline call once every 40 seconds until the called unit
answers. This mode is recommended only when a permanent connection
between a terminal and another data unit is required. The baud rate of the
Hotline call is determined by the AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11.
The status of CTS, DSR, and DCD is controlled in a similar manner as
described in mode 13.

Programing DAC for mode 15 in service change LD 11

The DAC must be configured as R232 since Autodial, Speed Call, and
Display commands are likely to be used.

Mode selection baud rates

The AUTB and BAUD parameters in LD 11 provide two functions for calls
originated from a DAC:
• Provide a way to select a baud rate of a Hotline call. The DAC starts the
Hotline operation without receiving a <CR> for autobaud.
• Set the DAC to operate at a fixed baud rate. The DAC does not return
the menu or Hotline unless a <CR> is received at the selected baud
rate. Normally the DAC should be selected to operate at autobaud.

Note: If AUTB is set to ON, the BAUD parameter is not prompted. If

AUTB is set to OFF, you may select a fixed baud rate in response to the
prompt BAUD.

When the DAC receives a call, it adapts to the caller’s baud rate.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 445

See Table 180 "Connect and disconnect protocol" (page 445) for connect
and disconnect protocol.

Table 180
Connect and disconnect protocol
Mode of
operation Interface application Comments
Mode 0 Inbound and Outbound Outbound modem pooling:
modem pools
Modem sends ring/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4
For inbound modem pools, seconds OFF) to initiate connection.
most dumb modems may be
used.
DAC responds by driving DTR ON within the first ring
cycle.
For outbound modem pools,
only smart modems
Modem responds by answering the incoming call and
(auto-dialer) may be used.
driving DCD ON within 35 seconds.

If modem does not drive DCD ON within 35 seconds,

the DAC drops DTR and goes idle.

Remote DTE sends <CR> to the DAC. The DAC

autobauds and sends initial prompt.
Outbound modem pooling:

Local DM user calls to the outbound modem access

number.

DAC answers the outbound call and drives DTR ON.

Modem receives DTR and prepares to receive

commands.

Local DM user enters the proper commands for

calling the remote modem.

Remote modem answers; data call established.

Call disconnection (DAC):

DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call.

The modem must drop DCD.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 446 NT7D16 Data Access card

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments
DAC drops DTR if the remote modem sends a long
break or three short breaks. The modem must drop
DCD.
Call disconnection (modem):

Modem drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more).

The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.

Modem drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more).

The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.
Mode 1 Inbound Hotline modem Inbound Hotline modem pooling:
pools
Modem sends ring/no ring cycle (2 seconds ON, 4
Most dumb modems can be seconds OFF) to initiate connection.
used for this application.
DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to
a specific Data Module (Autodial).

When Data Module answers, then and only then, the

DAC turns DTR ON.

Modem should answer the incoming call when DTR

goes ON and should turn DCD ON within 35 seconds;
otherwise the DAC disconnects the call.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is the same as mode 0.

Mode 2 Inbound and Outbound Inbound and Outbound modem pooling:
modem pools (with forced
DTR)
The DAC operation is identical to mode 0 except that
DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect).
Use this mode with Hayes
Call disconnection:
1200 modem.

Disconnection is identical to mode 0 except:

—When a call is released, the DAC turns DTR OFF

for 0.2 second and then ON. DTR stays ON until the
next call release.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 447

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments
—The DAC ignores RI and DCD for about 2 seconds
after releasing a call. This avoids problems with the
Hayes 1200 modem.
Mode 3 Inbound Hotline modem Inbound Hotline modem pooling:
pools (with forced DTR)
The DAC operation is identical to mode 1 except that
Use this mode with Hayes DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect).
1200 modem.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 2.

Mode 4 Inbound and Outbound Inbound Gateway connection protocol:
Gateway access
Gateway raises DCD to initiate connection.

DAC responds by driving DTR ON.

Gateway does not need to turn DSR ON. However,

toggling DSR or DCD from ON to OFF causes the
DAC to disconnect the call.

Gateway user sends <CR> to the DAC.

DAC autobauds and sends the initial prompt to the

Gateway.
Outbound Gateway connection protocol:

Local DM user calls the DAC that is connected to a

Gateway.

DAC answers the data call and drives DTR ON.

Gateway receives DTR and prepares to receive

commands.

Local DM user is now transparently connected to the

Gateway.

Gateway is expected to drive DCD ON within 35

seconds. If the Gateway fails to do so, the DAC drops
DTR and the call.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 448 NT7D16 Data Access card

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments

Call disconnection (DAC):

DAC drops DTR if the local DM user drops the call.

The Gateway must drop DCD.

DAC drops DTR if the DAC receives a long break or

three short breaks. The Gateway must drop DCD.
Call disconnection (Gateway):

Gateway drops DCD (DCD OFF for 100 ms or more).

The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.

Gateway drops DSR (DSR OFF for 100 ms or more).

The DAC drops DTR and disconnects the local call.
Mode 5 Inbound Hotline Gateway Inbound Hotline Gateway protocol:
access
Gateway raises DCD to initiate connection.

DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to

a specific Data Module (Autodial).

When Data Module answers, then and only then, the

DAC turns DTR ON.

Gateway does not need to turn DSR ON. However,

toggling DSR or DCD from ON to OFF causes the
DAC to drop the call.

Gateway is not transparently linked to the equipment

connection to the DM.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 4.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 449

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments
Mode 6 Inbound and Outbound Inbound and Outbound Gateway protocol:
Gateway access (with forced
DTR)
The DAC operation is identical to mode 4 except that
DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect).
The establishment of the outbound call does not
require DCD to be driven ON by the Gateway.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 4 except that when

a call is released, the DAC turns DTR OFF for 0.2
second and then ON. DTR stays ON until the next
call release.
Mode 7 Inbound Hotline Gateway Inbound Hotline Gateway protocol:
access (with forced DTR)
The DAC operation is identical to mode 5 except that
DTR is always forced ON (except during disconnect).
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 6.

Mode 8 Host access for call Host answering an incoming data call:
origination and answering
Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the
connection.

DAC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and

OFF for 4 seconds until the Host answers by turning
DTR ON. (If the Host always drives DTR ON, the DAC
immediately answers the call without driving RI ON.)

When Host receives RI ON, it should respond by

turning DTR ON.

DAC answers when it receives DTR ON.

DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON when the call is

completely established. The local DM user is now
transparently linked to the Host.
Host originating a data call:

Host turns DTR ON to initiate the connection.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 450 NT7D16 Data Access card

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments

DAC prepares to receive <CR> for autobaud.

Host sends <CR> followed by other commands for

establishing a data call (the DAC does not echo a
command, nor does it send any prompt to the Host
(blind dialing).

When the data call is completely established, the

DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON as long as the
call is connected.
Call disconnect ion (DAC):

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user

releases the call. The Host should then drop the call.

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the Host sends a

long break or three short breaks. The Host should
then drop the call.
Call disconnection (Host):

The Host toggles DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must

be OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC drops DSR,
DCD, and CTS and disconnects the local call.
Mode 9 Hotline call origination Hotline originated by Host (Inbound):

Host toggles DTR from OFF to ON to initiate the

Hotline call.

DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to

a specific Data Module (Autodial).

3When Data Module answers, then and only then,

the DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS ON (the DAC
does not send any prompts to the Host). If the Data
Module is busy or not responding, the DAC requires
another transition of DTR from OFF to ON to initiate
another Hotline call. If the Host keeps DTR ON, the
DAC does not try to establish another Hotline call,
unless the Host sends a <CR> while DTR is ON.
Call disconnection:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operating modes 451

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments

Disconnection is identical to mode 8.

Mode 10 Host access for call Host access for call origination and answering:
origination and answering
(with forced DTR)
The DAC operation is identical to mode 8 except
DTR is always considered ON, even when the Host
is driving DTR OFF.
Call disconnection:

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the local DM user

releases the call. The Host should then drop the call.

DAC drops DSR, DCD, and CTS if the Host sends a

long break or three short breaks. The Host should
then drop the call.
Mode 11 Hotline call origination Hotline origination by Host (continuous Hotline
(Virtual Leased Line) mode):

The DAC operation is similar to mode 9 except the

Host initiates the Hotline call by driving DTR ON.
However, if the DM is busy or not answering, the
DAC continuously tries to originate Hotline calls once
every 40 seconds (as long as DTR stays ON) until the
called DM answers the call.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 8.

Mode 12 Terminal access for call Terminal answering an incoming data call:
origination and answering
DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state.

Local DM user dials the access number to initiate the

connection.

DAC responds by driving RI ON for 2 seconds and

OFF for 4 seconds, until the terminal answers by
turning DTR ON (if the terminal always drive DTR
ON, the DAC immediately answers the call without
driving RI ON).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 452 NT7D16 Data Access card

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments
When terminal receives RI ON, it should respond by
turning DTR ON.

DAC answers when DTR goes ON and the local DM

user is now transparently linked to the terminal.
Terminal originating an outgoing data call:

DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state.

Terminal turns DTR ON to initiate the connection.
DAC prepares to receive <CR> for autobaud.
Terminal sends <CR> followed by other commands
for establishing a data call (the DAC echoes all
commands).
Call disconnection (DAC):

If the local DM user releases the call, the DAC turns

DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then
ON.
Call disconnection (terminal):

Terminal toggles DTR from ON to OFF (DTR must be

OFF for 100 ms or more). The DAC turns DSR, DCD,
and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then ON.
Terminal sends a long break or three short breaks.
The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2
second and then ON.
Mode 13 Hotline call origination Hotline originated by terminal:

DAC drives DSR, DCD, and CTS ON in the idle state.

Terminal toggles DTR from OFF to ON to initiate

Hotline call.

DAC responds by trying to establish a Hotline call to

a specific DM (Autodial).

If Data Module is busy or not responding, the DAC

requires another transition of DTR from OFF to ON
to initiate another Hotline call. If the terminal keeps

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keyboard dialing 453

Mode of
operation Interface application Comments
DTR ON, the DAC does not try to establish another
Hotline call unless the terminal sends a <CR> while
DTR is ON.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 12.

Mode 14 Terminal access for call Terminal access for call origination and
origination and answering answering:
(with forced DTR)
The DAC operation is identical to mode 12 except
that DTR is considered to be always ON, even when
the terminal is driving DTR OFF.
Call disconnection (DAC):

If the local DM user drops the call, the DAC turns

DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for 0.2 second and then
ON.
Call disconnection (terminal):

The terminal sends a long break or three short

breaks. The DAC turns DSR, DCD, and CTS OFF for
0.2 second, and then ON.
Mode 15 Hotline call origination Hotline call origination by terminal:
(Virtual Leased Line)
The DAC operation is similar to mode 13 except the
terminal initiates the Hotline call by driving DTR ON.
However, if the called DM is busy or not answering,
the DAC continuously tries to originate Hotline calls
once every 40 seconds (as long as DTR remains ON)
until the Data Module answers the call.
Call disconnection:

Disconnection is identical to mode 12.

Keyboard dialing
Keyboard dialing is an interactive dialogue mode between the connected
equipment and the DAC. This dialogue allows equipment to give dialing
commands to the DAC in order to make a data call to another far-end data
port. Keyboard dialing supports a modify mode that allows the user to
modify certain dialing parameters.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 454 NT7D16 Data Access card

The following keyboard dialing features are supported with the DAC:
• Autobaud from 110 to 19200 bps
• Autoparity to ensure that the keyboard dialing menu is readable on the
data terminal during the interactive dialogue mode
• Originating calls to local and remote hosts
• Ring Again
• Speed Call
• Two answer modes for incoming calls: manual and auto
• Digit display
• Dialing by mnemonic

Initiating conditions
In order for the DAC to respond to user commands/entries, the following
conditions must be met:
• The DAC must be active (power ON), and successfully receive the
downloaded parameters from the system.
• The user equipment must be active, and, if in RS-232-C mode, must
assert these control lines
— DCE mode: DTR (unless Forced DTR has been software selected)
— DTE mode: RI has cycled the appropriate number of times

Echo
During call setup (dialogue phase), all user input is echoed back to the
user equipment. Once the call is established, the DAC is transparent to
data communication. To get echoed characters after a call is established,
the far end must provide the echo.

Note: When RS-232-C modes 12-15 (Host modes) are selected, there
is no echo during dialogue phase.

Prompts
Call processing prompts are in upper case letters only. Other prompts
consist of both upper and lower case characters, and the dialogue session
depicts the actual upper/lower case letters used.

All prompts are preceded by the Carriage Return and Line Feed ASCII
characters (<CR>, <LF>).

Prompts requesting user input are terminated with the ASCII colon (:).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keyboard dialing 455

Prompts requiring a Yes or No answer are terminated by a question mark

(?), followed by a list of allowable responses. The default response, if
allowed, is bracketed.

Call abort
In addition to the methods mentioned above, which are common to both
Hayes and keyboard modes, keyboard dialing supports the following method
to abort a call during the dialogue phase.
• Sending the Control Z character (simultaneously pressing the control
and Z keys) sends a message to the DAC to immediately abandon the
data call setup.

Autobaud
All user dialogue must begin with Autobaud detection. This allows the DAC
to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, only <CR>
is recognized by the DAC. All other entries are ignored, and no entries are
echoed. Once a valid <CR> is detected, the DAC responds with the New
Menu prompt at the baud rate detected. If a fixed rate is determined by the
downloaded parameters, the DAC looks for that rate. If the rates agree, the
dialogue phase begins. If not, the following prompt is sent to the user:

Baud Rate xxxx expected

After receiving a number of invalid responses, the DAC reverts to autobaud
detection, since the terminal data speed may change.

Keyboard Autobaud is allowed after the call is placed in off-line mode.

Note: If the Hayes autobaud characters A or a are sent, the DAC

enters Hayes dialing mode. Autobaud character detection is selected
in the software.

Auto parity
The user can override the downloaded parity rate by entering the ASCII
period (.) as a command. This period must be the only command sent,
followed by <CR>. The period must be sent only when the Primary menu is
displayed, and can be sent only once during a call setup session.

Dialing operation
For the purposes of this document, when illustrating the prompt/response
sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keyboard. All
other type represents the DAC output. Likewise, "xxxxxxx," "yyyyyyy," or
"zzzzzzz" represents numbers entered by the user, or dialed by the DAC,
and in no way indicates the absolute character limit. A maximum of 43
characters is allowed.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 456 NT7D16 Data Access card

When the user enters the autobaud character, <CR>, and the dialing mode
is Manual (not Hotline), the DAC sends the following menu:

<CR><LF><CR><LF><LF>ENTER NUMBER OR H (FOR HELP):<SP>

If the user enters <CR>, the DAC presents this prompt again. When a
number is entered, the DAC attempts to place the call. Entering H at this
point lists the Primary Commands menu:

Primary Commands Menu:

A - Auto Dial C - Call

D - Display M - Modify
S - Speed Call
CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)
Select: <SP>

Whenever a Primary command is expected, the user may enter the Parity
command (period). If Auto Parity has already been done, the Invalid
Command menu is presented:

Invalid Command/Entry
Re-Enter: <SP>

The user’s port is set to idle by entering CTRL Z. Any call in progress
is dropped and any Ring Again placed is released. Once the Primary
Command menu appears, the user must enter C to place a call. The DAC
does not accept a number in place of a Primary command.

Primary commands
Once the Primary menu has appeared, only primary commands are
accepted.

Call (C)
The Call command must be used to place a call once the Primary menu
appears. The DAC does not accept only number.

C<CR>

ENTER NUMBER:<SP>

xxxxxxx<CR>

CALLING xxxxxxx
RINGING
ANSWERED

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keyboard dialing 457

CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS

Autodial (A)
The Autodial command allows the user to dial a predefined number stored
within the local system. The DAC automatically attempts to place a data
call to the Autodial number:

A <CR>

CALLING xxxxxxx

RINGING

ANSWERED

CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS

The currently stored Autodial number may be viewed by entering the

primary command D (Display), followed by the selection A (Autodial). See
the Display discussion later in this document.

Note: If the Autodial feature key is not defined in the software you are
notified by the following: Feature key Autodial not defined.

Speed Call (S)

The Speed Call command allows the user to make a call to a number
associated with a 1-, 2-, or 3-digit access code. The user supplies the
access code, and the DAC places the call according to the code supplied.

S<CR>

ENTER ACCESS CODE: <SP>

xxx<CR>
CALLING yyyyyy
RINGING
ANSWERED
CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS

If the DAC does not know the access code length, you are notified by:
ENTER ACCESS CODE (all digits) <SP>. Leading zeroes must be entered
if the access code is less than the maximum number of digits allowed for the
Speed Call list for the associated data DN (DDN).

Note: If the Speed Call feature key is not defined in the software, you
are notified by the following: Feature key Speed Call not defined.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 458 NT7D16 Data Access card

Both the Autodial and Speed Call commands can be changed with the
Modify command (M). Additionally, the Speed Call number can be changed
in the service change. When this command is entered, the Modify menu
appears.

Modify Menu:

A - Auto Number D - DCD Control

L - Long Break M - Manual Answer
Q - Quit Modify Menu R - Remote Loopback
S - Speed Call
CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)
Select:<SP>

Any of these choices leads to another series of prompts and responses.

By entering A on the keyboard, you enter the Autodial Modify menu.

Respond to the following prompts to change the Autodial number.

A <CR>

Current Autodial number: zzzzzzz

Enter Autodial number: <SP>

xxxxxxx <CR>

New Autodial number: xxxxxxx

By entering S on the keyboard, you enter the Speed Call Modify menu. The
Speed Call number can also be changed in the software. Respond to the
following prompts to change the Speed Call number.

S<CR>

Enter access code <SP>

Current Speed Call number: zzzzzzz

Enter Speed Call number: <SP>

zzzzzzz<CR>

New Speed Call number: xxxxxxx

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keyboard dialing 459

By entering R on the keyboard, you enter the Remote Loopback Modify

menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the Remote
Loopback feature.

R <CR>

Remote Loopback Disabled (or enabled, indicating current status)

Remote Loopback
(Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> or N <CR>

Remote Loopback: Enabled (or Disabled)

By entering M on the keyboard, you enter the Manual Answer Modify menu.
Manual Answer indicates that the DAC prompts the user to answer an
incoming data call. Auto answer picks up the call after the specified number
of rings. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the Manual
Answer feature.

M <CR>

Current Answer Mode: Manual

Auto - xx Rings

Manual Answer? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> N <CR>

Number of rings (1-255 <1>): <SP>

yy

New Answer Mode: Manual New Answer Mode: Auto - yy Rings

By entering D on the keyboard, you enter the DCD Modify menu. Respond
to the following prompts to enable DCD as Forced or Dynamic.

D <CR>

DCD Control:Dynamic
Forced On

Dynamic DCD? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> N <CR>

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 460 NT7D16 Data Access card

DCD Control: DynamicDCD Control: Forced On

By entering L on the keyboard, you enter the Long Break Detect Modify
menu. Respond to the following prompts to enable or disable the detection
of the Long Break as an abandon signal.

L <CR>

Long Break:Detected
Ignored

Detect Long Break? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> N <CR>

Long Break: Detected Long Break: Ignored

To exit the Modify menu, enter Q. This entry returns you to the Primary
commands menu. To view the port’s parameters, enter D when in the
Primary Commands menu. This display shows the Display Options menu.

Display Options Menu:

A - Auto Dial number D - Date and Time

K - Feature Keys P - Data Port Parameters
Q - Quit Display S - Speed Call number(s)
CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)
Select: <SP>

Ring Again
When a call is placed to a busy DN, the DAC prompts you to activate
Ring Again. The Ring Again feature alerts you as soon as the dialed DN
becomes free. Primary Commands menu is displayed when the Ring Again
is activated. The following is the prompt and response sequence enabling
the Ring Again feature.

Note: If you hang up the call, or give an abandon command, Ring

Again is canceled.

BUSY, RING AGAIN? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR> or N <CR>
RING AGAIN PLACED
Primary Commands Menu:

A - Auto Dial C - Call

D - Display M - Modify
S - Speed Call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Keyboard dialing 461

CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)

Select: <SP>

If a Ring Again request has already been placed, the DAC offers the option
of overriding the previous request.

RING AGAIN ACTIVE, REPLACE? (Y/N): <SP>

Y <CR>

RING AGAIN PLACED

Primary Commands Menu:

A - Auto Dial C - Call

D - Display M - Modify
S - Speed Call
CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)
Select: <SP>

When the called DN becomes available, the system notifies the DAC, which
then prompts the user to place the call. If you do not respond to the Ring
Again prompt within a software determined time period, Ring Again is
canceled, and the Primary Commands Menu appears.

DATA STATION NOW AVAILABLE, PLACE CALL? (Y/N/<Y>): <SP>

Y <CR>

CALLING XXXX
RINGING
ANSWERED
CALL CONNECTED. SESSION STARTS

Note 1: If the Ring Again notice occurs during a parameter change, the
prompt only appears after the change has been completed.
Note 2: If the notice occurs during an active call, the Ring Again notice
is ignored. When the active call is completed, you are notified that the
Ring Again call was canceled.

You can also cancel the Ring Again request at this time.

DATA STATION NOW AVAILABLE, PLACE CALL? (Y/N/[Y]): <SP>

N <CR>
RING AGAIN CANCELLED
Primary Commands Menu:
A - Auto Dial S - Speed Call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 462 NT7D16 Data Access card

C - Call M - Modify
D - Display
CTRL Z (Abort Keyboard Dialing)
Select: <SP>

Not in service
When the DAC attempts a call to a DN that is not supported, it sends you
a message. The call is released, and you must reenter the Autobaud
character <CR> to initiate keyboard dialing again.

C<CR>

ENTER NUMBER:<SP>

xxxxxxx<CR>

CALLING xxxxxxx

NOT IN SERVICE

RELEASED

No response from the system

Likewise, when the DAC receives no system response from your port after
a 30-second timeout period, the DAC sends you a message. The call is
abandoned. This means the port is either disabled or unequipped.

C<CR>

ENTER NUMBER:<SP>

xxxxxxx<CR>

NO SYSTEM RESPONSE

RELEASED

Hayes dialing
Like keyboard dialing, Hayes dialing is an interactive dialing mode with the
terminating equipment connected to the NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC).
In addition to the common parameters and functions, the Hayes dialing
mode offers the following features:
• Data call dialing
• Two modes for answering incoming calls: auto and manual
• Repeat previous command

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hayes dialing 463

• Character echo control

• On-hook/off-hook control
• Detect off-line escape sequence
• Return to on-line
• Initiate Remote Digital Loopback
• Terminate Remote Digital Loopback
• Modify S Registers S0 through S12
• Display S Registers S0 through S12
• Support all S Registers except: S6, S7, S9, and S11

The Hayes dialing mode supports the following AT Dialing commands.

Initiating conditions
The DAC responds to commands only when the following initial requirements
are met:
• the DAC is active
• the DAC has successfully received the downloaded parameters
• the user equipment is active, and, if operating in RS-232-C mode
— the DCE mode is DTR (unless Forced DTR has been software
selected)
— the DTE mode, and RI has cycled the appropriate number of times
and DCD is asserted on by the modem

Note: In Gateway mode, DCD must be asserted on. In modem mode,

only RI must be on. The DAC asserts DTR to the modem, and awaits
DCD from the modem.

Input requirements
All input must be in the same case (upper or lower).

The Hayes repeat command, A/, is used to immediately execute the last
command entered. The terminator character need not be entered. A
complete discussion of the Repeat command can be found later in this
document.

Where a Dial Number is expected, you may enter the characters 0-9, #, and
comma (,). The characters @, P, R, T, and W are accepted, but ignored.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 464 NT7D16 Data Access card

The maximum number of characters is 43. This limit includes the AT prefix,
and the record Terminator character, but does not include the ASCII space
character.

Echo
Throughout the dialogue phase, the DAC echoes all user input. In RS-232-C
modes 0, 1, 2, and 3, no inbound call messages are presented to the
modem. Prompts are presented only if the modem user originates the
call. In modes 8, 9, 10, and 11, no prompts or characters echo under any
circumstances. The echo function can be turned off with a Hayes dialing
command.

All prompts and responses issued by the system are displayed to the user
unless the display command has been disabled. Like the Repeat command,
this is explained later in this document.

Note: If the RS-232-C DAC Host modes (1, 2, 3, 8, 9, 10, 11, or 12) are
used, all attempts to enable the echo or display is ignored. Likewise, the
Hayes Reset command is also ignored.

Result codes and messages

Each input record generates a result code which is sent to the user. Only
one code is sent regardless of the number of commands in the record.
The reply is in one of two formats:
• Numeric replies contain a one- or two-number code
• Verbose replies contain one or more words

Table 181 "Hayes dialing result codes and messages" (page 465) shows the
codes for each reply in both formats, and explanations for the codes.

Note 1: Verbose commands are the default and appear in upper case
characters only. Numeric commands are sent by issuing the Numeric
Results code command (explained later in this document).
Note 2: All verbose codes and messages are preceded and terminated
by the user defined Terminator and New Line characters. The default, or
reset, characters are the ASCII Carriage Return, and ASCII Line Feed.
The Numeric codes are preceded and terminated by the Terminator
character only.
Note 3: The Suppress result command (explained later in this
document) disables the sending of these codes. If in RS-232-C DAC
Host modes, this command is ignored.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hayes dialing 465

Table 181
Hayes dialing result codes and messages
Verbose Numer
code ic
code Description
OK 0 Command(s) executed, no error
CONNECT 1 Data call established, session starts
RING 2 Inbound call presented
NO CARRIER 3 Data call abandoned
ERROR 4 Error in command line
NO DIALTONE 6 System does not allow call to proceed
BUSY 7 Far end is busy
NO ANSWER 8 Far end does not answer
CONNECT 1200 5 Session starts at 1200 baud
CONNECT 2400 10 Session starts at 2400 baud
CONNECT 4800 11 Session starts at 4800 baud
CONNECT 9600 12 Session starts at 9600 baud
CONNECT 19200 14 Session starts at 19200 baud

Baud rate detection

Every command line begins with Baud rate detection. This phase allows
the DAC to determine the user equipment baud rate. During this phase, the
DAC accepts only the ASCII "A," or "a" characters. Once a valid autobaud
character is detected, the DAC echoes the parity bit character at the baud
rate detected.

Note: If Hayes dialing is desired, you must enter the character "A" or "a"
BEFORE the <CR>. If Carriage Return (<CR>) is entered before this
Hayes dialing command, you are placed in keyboard dialing mode.

Parity detection
Once the baud rate has been determined, the DAC accepts only the
ASCII characters "T," "t," or "/." If the Repeat character "/" is entered, the
previous command is executed. If "T," or "t" is entered, the DAC uses its
parity and the parity of the preceding A (a) to determine the user’s parity.
This parity is used on the following messages and prompts associated with
the command lines.

Note: The parity determined here overrides the parity downloaded from
the system. Also, the T (t) must be entered in the same case as the A
(a). If you entered uppercase A for the Baud Rate, you must enter upper
case T for the parity.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 466 NT7D16 Data Access card

Dialing operation
Like keyboard dialing, the Hayes dialing commands allow the user to initiate
a data call, as well as change certain dialing parameters. The commands
may be entered in either upper or lower case, but must be the same case
throughout the command line. Also the case must match the autobaud case.

Note: Hayes dialing does not allow for the Ring Again feature. If a call
is made to a busy number, that call is abandoned.

Table 182 "AT dialing commands" (page 466) provides a list of the AT dialing
commands.

Table 182
AT dialing commands
Command Description
ATA Answer (answer incoming data call)
ATDnnnn Dial (n = 0-9, numbers to be dialed)
ATDTnnnn
A/ Repeat last command (no <CR> needed)
ATO On-line (enter three Escape characters rapidly to go off-line)
ATDPnnnn Voice call (n = 0-9, numbers to be dialed)
ATF0 Handsfree/mute (toggle Handsfree between mute and normal)
ATF1 Hold (put voice call on hold)
ATF2 Select (take voice call off hold)
ATH0 Hang up data call
ATHP Hang up voice call
ATQn Result code (n = 0, 1; if n = 0, result codes are sent)
ATVn Verbal result (n = 0, 1; if n = 0, numeric codes are sent)
ATXn Result code selection (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, extended results)
ATSn Read S register (n = number of S register to read)
ATSn=x Write S register (n = S register number; x = new value)
ATZ Soft reset (reset to default parameters)
ATCn Carrier detect (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, carrier detect is enabled)
Note 1: To use AT dialing, enter CTRL-z at carriage return (<CR>) when the port is idle.
Note 2: Follow each command (except A/) by a carriage return (<CR>) to execute it.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hayes dialing 467

Command Description
ATEn Echo (n = 0, 1; if n = 1, commands echo back to terminal)
ATTSP! Transparent mode
Note 1: To use AT dialing, enter CTRL-z at carriage return (<CR>) when the port is idle.
Note 2: Follow each command (except A/) by a carriage return (<CR>) to execute it.

For the purposes of this document, when illustrating the prompt/response

sequences, the bold type is what the user enters on the keyboard. All
other type represents the DAC output. Likewise, "xxxxxxx," "yyyyyyy,"
or "zzzzzzz" represents numbers entered by the user, or dialed by the
DAC, and in no way indicates the absolute character limit. The number of
characters is dependent on the feature activated (Auto Dial, Speed Call, for
example). Also, for simplicity purposes, all Result messages are shown in
Verbose code. See Table 181 "Hayes dialing result codes and messages"
(page 465) for a complete list of the Verbose and Numeric codes. See
Features and Services (NN43001-106-B) for a complete description of the
features operating.

S registers
These commands allow the user to access various dialing parameters. The
user can determine the present parameter setting, and alter the parameter.
These parameters are grouped into a set referred to as the S registers.

All S registers may be changed with the exception of S1, the Ring count.
If an attempt is made to change this parameter, the command is accepted
but no action is taken. The Ring count is the number of expired 6-second
intervals since an inbound call has been received. The current count may
be displayed through the Display S register command but cannot be altered
After a call is dropped, the Ring counter is set back to 0.

If, when using the display or alter commands, no register or value number is
input, the number 0 is used. For example, ATS? is equivalent to ATS0.

Allowable S registers Table 183 "Allowable S registers" (page 468) shows

the supported S registers allowed by the DAC. This table shows the register
number, the range accepted (decimal values shown), and a description of
the register. Whenever a register value is changed, the DAC checks for
validity. If the value entered is not within the allowed range, all processing
ceases and no command processing following the invalid entry is accepted.
The DAC sends an ERROR result message.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 468 NT7D16 Data Access card

Table 183
Allowable S registers
S register Range Range units Supported Description
S0 0–255 Rings Yes Number of rings to answer a system call (0
= manual answer)
S1 0–255 Rings Yes Ring count for the current inbound system
call
S2 0–127 ASCII Yes Off-line escape sequence character
S3 0–127 ASCII Yes Input/output line terminating character
S4 0–127 ASCII Yes New line character for the output line
S5 0–32, ASCII Yes Backspace character for input/output lines
127
S6 2–255 Seconds No Wait time before blind dialing
S7 1–255 Seconds Yes Timeout timer for far end answering
S8 0–30 Seconds Yes Duration for the dial pause character
S9 1–255 0.1 second No Carrier detect response time
S10 1–255 0.1 second No Delay time between loss of carrier and call
release
S11 50–255 Milliseconds No Touch tone spacing
S12 20–255 20 millisec Yes Guard time for the escape sequence
onds

You can view any of the S registers by issuing the following display
command. Any S register can be specified through the ATS command,
and the system displays the current setting for that parameter. More than
one S register can be viewed by listing the desired registers on the same
command line.

One registerTwo registers

ATS8? ATS8? S9
20 002
OK 006
OK

To change any S register range, except S1, use the following change
command. The new parameters remain in effect until another change
command is given or the Hayes Reset modem command (Z) is issued. If
the DAC is powered up, the parameters are reset to the defaults.

ATS8 = 15

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hayes dialing 469

OK

Reset Hayes parameters

All of the Hayes dialing parameters and S registers remain even after the
data call is complete. Similarly, if the dialing mode, keyboard to Hayes
or vice versa, are changed, the parameters remain as specified. The
following command allows you to reset the parameters and S registers to
the defaults. Entering 0 resets to the Hayes default, while entering 1 resets
to the downloaded operating parameters.

CAUTION
All previous instructions are ignored.
Use this command to reset all parameters. It should be the last
command entered, because all previous commands are ignored.

ATZ0
1

OK

Table 184 "Hayes parameters and S register reset values" (page 469) lists
all the parameter and S register default values. These are the values
established when the reset command is given.

Table 184
Hayes parameters and S register reset values
Parameter Value Description
C 1 * DCD controlDynamic (1)
Forced ON (0)
E 1 * Input character echo Enabled (1)
Disabled (0)
Q 0 Send Result codesEnabled (1)
Disabled (0)
V 1 Result codes sent in Verbose format
X 1 Features selection 0 - 8, 10 - 13
P — Dial method (pulse)
S0 0 *?1 Manual Answer (if 0)?Auto answer on 1 ring
S1 0 Ring count 0
S2 43 Escape sequence character Plus sign (+)
* Parameters that are reset to the downloaded operating parameters when 1 is
entered at the reset command.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 470 NT7D16 Data Access card

Parameter Value Description

S3 13 Terminator character Carriage Return (<CR>)
S4 10 New line character Line Feed (<LF>)
S5 8 Back space character BS (<BS>)
S6 2 Blind dial delay 2 seconds
S7 30 Timeout for outbound call answer 30 seconds
S8 2 Dial pause delay 2 seconds
S9 6 Carrier detect response time 0.6 seconds
S10 14 Call disconnect timer for carrier loss 1.4 seconds
S11 95 Touchtone space 95 milliseconds
S12 50 Escape sequence guard timer 1.00 seconds
* Parameters that are reset to the downloaded operating parameters when 1 is
entered at the reset command.

Outbound calls
The DAC supports two types of outbound data calls:
• point-to-point data calls
• calls sent through a modem without call origination capabilities

Hayes dialing does not provide for any alterations during call processing,
Ring Again, or Controlled Call Back Queueing (CCBQ) for example.
Consequently, if such variances occur during the call processing, the DAC
releases the call and notifies you with a NO CARRIER or BUSY result code.
Table 185 "Allowed outbound call command characters" (page 470) lists the
command characters allowed for an outbound call.

Table 185
Allowed outbound call command characters
Character Description
0-9 Dial number normal digits
, Delay dialing the next digit by the value set in S8 register

Inbound calls
The DAC supports auto answer and manual answer capabilities. The
following commands give examples of both auto and manual answer
dialogues.

This dialogue session describes the sequence when the S0 register is set to
three. In this case, the DAC automatically answers the incoming call on the
third ring, and the session begins with the CONNECT message.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hayes dialing 471

RING

RING

RING

CONNECT

Issuing the On Hook command while the call is still ringing disconnects the
incoming call. The DAC disconnects the call and notifies you with a NO
CARRIER message.

RING

RING

ATH0

NO CARRIER

When the S0 register is set to 0, the DAC is set to manual answer, and an
inbound call must be answered with the Answer command. You can also
abandon the call with the On Hook message, as in the Autodial sequence.

RING

RING

ATH0

NO CARRIER

Off Line mode

Off Line mode acts as a sort of Hold mode. Once the call is answered and
the session begins, the Off Line command enables you to enter Hayes
command modes. The Off Line sequence is transmitted to the far-end,
but at the end of the sequence, the command mode is initiated. At this
point, any Hayes command except Dial Number can be executed. Once the
desired command is completed, you can return to the call through the On
Line command.

The Guard Time (S12 register) defines the amount of time for no local
input for the Off Line escape sequence to take place. If the S12 register
is set to 0, enter the escape character defined in the S2 register. For a

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 472 NT7D16 Data Access card

complete list of the parameters allowed for each S Register, see Table 184
"Hayes parameters and S register reset values" (page 469) describing the
S Registers.

In the following example, <GT> is the Guard Time and <EC> the Escape
Character defined in the S2 register. The example shows the Off Line
escape sequence, the command to display an S register (Ring Count, in this
case), and the command to go back on line and attend to the answered call.

<GT><EC><EC><EC><GT

OK

ATS1

005

OK

ATO0

CONNECT

Specifications
QPC430 and QPC723 interfaces
The NT7D16 Data Access card provides the same features as the QPC430
four-port Asynchronous Interface Line Card (AILC) and the QPC723
RS-232 Interface Line Card (RILC). The operational mode for each port is
determined in LD 11.

Download parameters
These parameters are configured in the system through service change
operations. They are then downloaded to the DAC. For a complete
description of the service change procedures, see Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611)..

System parameters
System parameters downloaded by the switch include the type of system,
the inactivity timer, and the data DN. These parameters are described below:
• System type: CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1
• Inactivity timeout
— No timeout
— 15 minutes
— 30 minutes

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Specifications 473

— 60 minutes

• DDN: 1 to 7 digits (0–9)

Operating parameters
There are thirteen parameters configured in the system that are downloaded
to the DAC. They are:
• Dialogue parity
— Space (OFF)
— Mark (ON)
— Even
— Odd

• DTR control
— Dynamic (affected by call progress)
— Forced ON

• DCD control
— Dynamic (affected by call progress)
— Forced ON

• Dialing mode
— Manual (user initiates the call with dialogue commands)
— Hotline (call the Autodial number upon connection)

• Wire test
— Disabled (can be invoked only with front panel switch)
— Enabled (start only if the DAC firmware is idle)

• Language
— English
— Quebec French

• Keyboard dialing
— Enabled (allow both keyboard or Hayes dialing modes)
— Disabled (Hayes dialing only)

• Make port busy

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 474 NT7D16 Data Access card

— Disabled—On with DTR (normal)

— Enabled—Off with DTR (modes 8 or 12, and no DTR for 5 seconds)

• Auto Baud
— Variable (use auto baud rate)
— Fixed (use baud rate selection only)

• Baud rate
— 110
— 150
— 300
— 600
— 1200
— 2400
— 4800
— 9600
— 19200

• Operating mode
— DCE
— DTE

• Equipment type
— Terminal (send prompts/replies)
— Host (suppress prompts/replies)

• Long Break Detect

In Table 161 "Clock Controller options - summary" (page 353) and Figure
104 "MSDL switch setting example" (page 402), the rectangles represent
the settings of service change parameters in LD11 that affect the desired
function. The diamonds represent the logical DAC operating mode
decisions.

Upload parameters
The system can, at any time, request information from a DAC port. The
uploaded parameters contain information about the individual card (card
type, order code, release information), as well as the status of the configured
operating parameters. Because the dialogue operations of data calls can

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System database requirements 475

affect the operating parameters, this is useful to monitor and confirm port
settings. An additional parameter is listed in the uploaded information: port
interface mode (RS-232-C/RS-422). The interface is set by the use of
jumpers on the DAC, and cannot be altered by the service change.

System database requirements

To ensure proper operation of the DAC keyboard and Hayes dialing, the
system requires the following:
• The Data DN must appear only once.
• For access to remote hosts, the TNs class of service must allow external
calls. The Data TN must have the following in its class of service:
— Call Pickup Denied (PUD)
— Call Forward No Answer Denied (FND)
— Call Forward Busy Denied (FBD)
— Data (DTA)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 476 NT7D16 Data Access card

Figure 114
Operating mode selection-RS422

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 System database requirements 477

Figure 115
Operating mode selection-RS-232-C

Note: Warning Tone Denied (WTD) defaults if DTA is entered.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 478 NT7D16 Data Access card

• If the DAC is used to call out through modem pooling, where the modem
pool consists of dumb modems connected to QMT8 SADM or QMT12
V.35 SADM, the DAC port should be configured with a secondary DN,
which has a single appearance.
• The Virtual keys must be assigned as shown in Table 186 "Virtual key
assignments" (page 478).

Table 186
Virtual key assignments
Key number
Feature key SL-1 SL-100 Use
Data DN 0 0 Required
Secondary DN 1 1 Required for manual
modem pooling
Call Transfer 2 — Required for manual
modem pooling
Auto Dial 3 2 Required for Hotline and VLL
Ring Again 4 6 Optional
Speed Call 5 3 Optional
Display 6 — Required
Make Set Busy 7 7 Optional

Power supply
Be sure that all power requirements are met before installing the DAC.
Operation may be affected by improper power and environmental conditions.

EIA signals supported

The DAC supports a subset of the standard signals. Only 8 leads can be
brought through the backplane connector for each port, totaling 48 leads
for each card slot. Table 187 "EIA signals supported (RS-232-C)" (page
478) lists the EIA signals supported on this card.

Table 187
EIA signals supported (RS-232-C)
DB-25 Signal DCE DTE
EIA Pin abbreviation Description mode mode
BA 2 TD Transmitted Data In Out
BB 3 RD Received Data Out In
CB 5 CTS Clear To Send Out In
Note: RS-422 leads supported are: Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Installing the Data Access card 479

DB-25 Signal DCE DTE

EIA Pin abbreviation Description mode mode
CC 6 DSR Data Set Ready Out In
AB 7 GND Signal Ground — —
CF 8 DCD Carrier Detect Out In
CD 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready In Out
CE 22 RI Ring Indicator Out In
Note: RS-422 leads supported are: Tx (transmit) and Rx (receive).

Environmental
The DAC functions fully when operating within the following specified
conditions. See Table 188 "DAC environmental specifications" (page 479)

Table 188
DAC environmental specifications
Specification Operating Storage
Ambient temperature 0 to 60 degrees C 40 to 70 degrees C
Humidity 5% to 95% 5% to 95%

Reliability
The DAC has a predicted mean time between failure (MTBF) of 8 years at
45 degrees Celsius. The mean time to repair (MTTR) is 1 hour.

Installing the Data Access card

Cabinet system
The DAC is fully supported in any card slot in either the main or expansion
cabinet without any hardware modification. Insert the DAC into any available
card slot and secure it in place using the locklatches.
To cable out the DAC, run a standard 25-pair cable to the cross connect, or
use one of the following breakout cables in conjunction with an Amphenol
50-pin female-to-female gender converter:
• QCAD318A50-pin Amphenol to 6 female DB25 connectors
• QCAD319A50-pin Amphenol to 6 male DB25 connectors
Note: For Cabinet system, the format to be used in response to the
"TN" prompt must be one of the following:

CC 00 00 UUCC - Card Slot

or CC UUUU - Unit Number

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 480 NT7D16 Data Access card

Large System
In Large Systems, the DAC is fully supported in IPE modules. These special
slots on the DAC have 24-pair cables pre-wired to the Main Distribution
Frame (MDF) in card slots 0-15. The IPE slot supports the first four ports
on the DAC if connections are made at the MDF. Most IPE modules can be
upgraded to wire 24-pair cables to the MDF for all card slots.
Note: For directions concerning the pinouts for the MDF, refer to
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation
and Configuration (NN43021-310).

Before you begin, power down:

• the IPE module only, if it is a DC-powered system
• the entire column, if it is an AC-powered system

It is recommended that you begin the installation from the right hand side
(when facing the backplane), starting with slot 0 and moving towards slots
on the left side. If you wish to add more than six DACs, and require slots 8
through 15, remove the input/output (I/O) panel. Be aware that a full shelf
installation can take up to 3 hours. You need the following equipment to
upgrade the cabling:
• A0359946 Amphenol cables
— These connectors include all the connector and screw apparatus.
— You need one cable for each DAC.

• cable ties
• wire cutters
• A3/16 nutdriver

System compatibility
To support the 24-pair requirement of the DAC, some cabling may need to
be upgraded (Table 189 "System option compatibility with the DAC" (page
481)). See "Upgrading systems" for more information.

Ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 of the DAC work in any standard 16-pair IPE slot
(connect directly to the MDF).

An upgraded backplane has three shrouds for each card slot. A backplane
that cannot be upgraded has only two shrouds for each card slot.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Port configuration 481

Table 189
System option compatibility with the DAC
Maximum no.
Backplane Backplane of ports/DAC
System option code release Upgrade supported
Large Systems NT8D3701 3 and below No 4
Large Systems NT8D3701 4 and above Yes 6

Port configuration
Figure 116 "NT7D16 Data Access Card port connectors" (page 482) shows
the port configurations for both the RS-232-C and RS-422 ports. The
software configuration requirements for the DAC are shown at the end of
this chapter. Responses to the prompts listed are required. Depending on
the configuration, ensure that the option plug is set for RS-232 or RS-422.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 482 NT7D16 Data Access card

Figure 116
NT7D16 Data Access Card port connectors

Cabling
Several cabling schemes are possible for both AILC and RILC modes.
Typical capacitance for 24- and 26-gauge cables is shown in the Table 190
"RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF" (page 483) and Table
191 "RS-422 maximum line capacitance 60,000 µF" (page 483). RS-232
and RS-422 transmission distance is limited by the electrical capacitance
of the cable. Low-capacitance cable carries a digital signal further than a
high-capacitance cable.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cabling 483

Table 190
RS-232-C maximum line capacitance 2,500 µF
Gauge Capacitance per foot (µF) Max distance
24 24 104
26 15 166

Table 191
RS-422 maximum line capacitance 60,000 µF
Gauge Capacitance per foot (µF) Max distance
24 24 2500
26 15 4000

Figure 117 "Cabling to the data equipment" (page 484) shows the cabling
choices available. It includes cabling with the RS-232-C cable, associated
patch panel, the RJ-11, and the octopus cable. Each scheme can be tailored
to suit individual needs, and specific alternatives are shown in later figures.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 484 NT7D16 Data Access card

Figure 117
Cabling to the data equipment

Figure 118 "RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks" (page 485) shows a connection through
an RJ-11 or RJ-45 jack located at the data station. It is recommended that
four wires be used similarly to the AIM drop when using the RJ-11 jack.
Another cable is required to convert the RJ-11 or RJ-45 into DB25.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Cabling 485

Note: It is necessary to turn over Receive Data and Send Data between
the DAC and the AILU. This is done on the TN at the MDF.

Figure 118
RJ-11 or RJ-45 jacks

Figure 119 "Patch panel layout" (page 486) illustrates the patch panel.
RS-232-C cables are used to connect the data equipment to the patch
panel. This particular panel shows two 50-pin connectors into twelve
DB25. The signals from the MDF travel on 25-pair cables, terminating at
the patch panel.

Note: Use patch panels that follow the pinout of the DAC.

Figure 120 "Octopus cabling" (page 487) describes an octopus cabling

scheme. This cable replaces the combined patch panel and RS-232-C
cabling scheme. The 25-pair cable is split into six RS-232-C male or female
connectors. This allows direct connections to the data equipment from the
I/O panel. The octopus cable allows for the maximum segregation of the
voice signals that might otherwise be present within the same 25-pair cable.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 486 NT7D16 Data Access card

Figure 119
Patch panel layout

Note: Use an octopus cable that follows the pinout of the DAC, such
as QCAD318A (female) and QCAD319A (male), in conjunction with a
50-pin female-to-female gender converter.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Backplane pinout and signaling 487

Figure 120
Octopus cabling

Backplane pinout and signaling

Two 40-pin, and two 20-pin edge connectors connect the card to the
backplane. The detailed pinout configurations are listed in Table 192
"RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports" (page 488) and
Table 193 "RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports" (page
489).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 488 NT7D16 Data Access card

Table 192
RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for first three DAC ports
I/O cable RS-232-C
Patch pair
Pair RS-422 or
Pair Pin color Unit no. Signal Pin no. Signal octopus
1T 26 W-BL UNIT 0 TD0 2 RDA0
1R 1 BL-W RD0 3 RDB0
2T 27 W-O DTR0 20 SDA0
2R 2 O-W GND0 7 SDB0 Connector
3T 28 W-G DCD0 8 1
3R 3 G-W DSR0 6
4T 29 W-BR RI0 22
4R 4 BR-W CTS0 5
5T 20 W-S UNIT 1 TD1 2 RDA1
5R 5 S-W RD1 3 RDB1
6T 31 R-BL DTR1 20 SDA1
6R 6 BL-R GND1 7 SDB1 Connector
7T 32 R-O DCD1 8 2
7R 7 O-R DSR1 6
8T 33 R-G RI1 22
8R 8 G-R CTS1 5
9T 34 R-BR UNIT 2 TD2 2 RDA2
9R 9 BR-R RD2 3 RDB2
10T 35 R-S DTR2 20 SDA2
10R 10 S-R GND2 7 SDB2 Connector
11T 36 BK-BL DCD2 8 3
11R 11 BL-BK DSR2 6
Note 1: The RS-232 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC723 RILC.
Note 2: The RS-422 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC430 AILC (first pair: Receive Data;
second pair: Send Data). Receive and Send are designated with reference to the DTE; therefore,
they must be turned over in the cross-connect since most DTE have first pair as Send Data and
second pair as Receive Data.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Backplane pinout and signaling 489

I/O cable RS-232-C

Patch pair
Pair RS-422 or
Pair Pin color Unit no. Signal Pin no. Signal octopus
12T 37 BK-O RI2 22
12R 12 O-BK CTS2 5
Note 1: The RS-232 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC723 RILC.
Note 2: The RS-422 pinout follows the standard set by the QPC430 AILC (first pair: Receive Data;
second pair: Send Data). Receive and Send are designated with reference to the DTE; therefore,
they must be turned over in the cross-connect since most DTE have first pair as Send Data and
second pair as Receive Data.

Table 193
RS-232-C and RS-422 pinouts for last three DAC ports
I/O cable RS-232-C
Pair RS-422 Patch pair or
Pair Pin color Unit no. Signal Pin no. Signal octopus
13T 38 BK-G UNIT 3 TD3 2 RDA3
13R 13 G-BK RD3 3 RDB3
14T 39 BK-BR DTR3 20 SDA3
14R 14 BR-BK GND3 7 SDB3 Connector
15T 40 BK-S DCD3 8 1
15R 15 S-BK DSR3 6
16T 41 Y-BL RI3 22
16R 16 BL-Y CTS3 5
17T 42 Y-O UNIT 4 TD4 2 RDA4
17R 17 O-Y (Note) RD4 3 RDB4
18T 43 Y-G DTR4 20 SDA4
18R 18 G-Y GND4 7 SDB4 Connector
19T 44 Y-BR DCD4 8 2
19R 19 BR-Y DSR4 6
20T 45 Y-S RI4 22
20R 20 S-Y CTS4 5
21T 46 V-BL UNIT 5 TD5 2 RDA5
21R 21 BL-V (Note) RD5 3 RDB5
Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 490 NT7D16 Data Access card

I/O cable RS-232-C

Pair RS-422 Patch pair or
Pair Pin color Unit no. Signal Pin no. Signal octopus
22T 47 V-O DTR5 20 SDA5
22R 22 O-V GND5 7 SDB5 Connector
23T 48 V-G DCD5 8 3
23R 23 G-V DSR5 6
24T 49 V-BR RI5 22
24R 24 BR-V CTS5 5
Note: Units 4 and 5 are available when the DAC is installed in a fully wired 24-pair slot.

Configuring the Data Access card

LD 11 must be configured to accept the DAC. The commands listed here
must be answered. LD 20 prints out card information when requested. For a
complete list of the service change prompts and responses, see Software
Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

DAC administration (LD 11)

Responding R232 or R422 to the TYPE prompt in LD11 begins the prompt
sequence for the DAC configuration. Responses to the following prompts
are required. The defaults are bracketed, and may be issued by Carriage
Return (<CR>).

LD 11 - Configure Data Access card.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW CHG MOV Add, change, move or copy the unit
COPY
TYPE: R232 RS-232-C unit
R422 RS-422 unit
TN lscu DAC data TN. The loop (LL) must be a superloop.
RNPG <CR> Ringing number pickup group (default to zero)
CLS Class of Service allowed for the DAC.
DTA Data Allowed
ADD Digit Display Allowed
TOV (0) - 3 Timeout value, where:

0 = no timeout
1 = 15 minutes
2 = 30 minutes
3 = 60 minutes

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the Data Access card 491

Prompt Response Description

OPE (NO) YES Operation parameter change
PAR (SPAC) ODD EVEN SPAC = space parity
MARK ODD = odd parity
EVEN = even parity
MARK = mark parity
DTR (OFF) ON DTR settings, where:

ON = forced DTR
OFF = dynamic DTR

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232

HOT (OFF) ON Hotline

If HOT = ON, then AUTB = OFF

AUT (ON) OFF Automatic answer
AUTB (ON) OFF Autobaud

Prompt appears only if HOT - OFF

BAUD 0-(7)-8 Baud rate, where:

0 = 110
1 = 150
2 = 300
3 = 600
4 = 1200
5 = 2400
6 = 4800
7 = 9600
8 = 19200

This prompt appears only if AUTB = OFF.

DCD (ON) OFF DCD settings, where:

ON = dynamic DCD
OFF = forced DCD

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 492 NT7D16 Data Access card

Prompt Response Description

PRM (ON) OFF Prompt mode, where:

ON = prompt (Terminal) mode

OFF = no prompt (Host) mode
DEM (DCE) DTE Data Equipment mode

This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232.

DLNG (ENG) FRN Data port language, where:

ENG = English
FRN = Quebec French
KBD (ON) OFF Keyboard dialing, where:

ON = enabled
OFF = disabled (Hayes dialing commands still work)
WIRE (OFF) ON Wire test mode, where:

OFF = disabled
ON = enabled
PBDO (OFF) ON Port busy upon DTR off, where:

OFF = disabled (port busy on with DTR)

ON = enabled (port busy off with DTR)
This prompt appears only if TYPE = R232
PBDO = OFF for any RS-232-C mode besides 8, or 12 If
PBDO = ON, key 7 = MSB
KEY Key settings
0 SCR xxxx Primary data DN
1 SCR xxxx Secondary Data DN
2 TRN Call Transfer
3 ADL yy xxxx Autodial
4 RGA Ring Again
5 SCC 0-253 Speed Call Controller, list number
6 DSP Display
7 MSB Make Set Busy
Primary and secondary data DNs must be single
appearance DNs. Feature key assignment must be as
shown here.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the Data Access card 493

Printing the card parameters (LD 20)

By responding R232, R422, or DAC to the TYPE prompt in LD 20, you can
print out the configured parameters for each port, or the entire DAC. This is
useful to determine if any parameters have been altered during keyboard or
Hayes dialing modify procedures.

LD 20 - Print DAC parameters.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: PRT Print data, TN, or unit information for the unit specified
LTN
LUU
TYPE: R232 Print information for the RS-232-C, RS-422 ports, or the
R422 whole DAC
DAC
TN lscu Print information for this TN, where l = loop, s = shelf, c =
card, u = unit. Uploaded parameters can only be printed
when a specific TN is listed.

The operation parameter printout for an RS-232 or RS-422 port is similar

to the following, depending on the configuration.

Table 194
Print out example
DBASE UPLOAD
R-232 or R-422 R-232 or R-422
PAR SPAC SPAC
DTR ON ON
HOT OFF OFF
AUT ON O
AUTB ON ON
BAUD 9600 4800
DCD OFF OFF
PRM KBD ON KBD ON
DEM DCE DCE
DLNG FRN FRN
KBD ON ON
Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 494 NT7D16 Data Access card

DBASE UPLOAD
R-232 or R-422 R-232 or R-422
WIRE OFF OFF
PBDO OFF OFF
Note: The Upload parameters are printed only when a single TN is specified.

Connecting Apple Macintosh to the DAC

The Apple Macintosh can be connected with twisted pair wire to a port
of a NT7D16 Data Access Card (DAC) to allow access to the switching
capability. The Macintosh can then access local or remote terminals,
personal computers, hosts, and peripherals.

shows the 9-pin subminiature D (DB9) connection to the Macintosh. Figure

122 " Macintosh to DAC connection-mini-8 DIN" (page 495) shows the
mini-8 DIN connection to the Macintosh.

Upgrading systems
The following explains when and how to upgrade your system to support
the DAC. Ports 0, 1, 2, and 3 of the DAC work in any standard 16-pair IPE
slot (connect directly to the MDF).

Figure 121
Macintosh to DAC connection-9-pin subminiature D

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Upgrading systems 495

Figure 122
Macintosh to DAC connection-mini-8 DIN

Large System and CS 1000M HG upgrade

The DAC can be installed directly into slots 0, 4, 8, and 12 with no cabling
changes. If other slots are required, the upgrade must be made. Follow
this procedure to upgrade your cabling. You can upgrade the cabling
segment-by-segment, or the entire module at one time.

Note 1: Four NT8D81AA cable/filter assemblies are required to upgrade

the entire module, one assembly per segment.
Note 2: Cables are designated by the letter of the I/O panel cutout
where the 50-pin cable connector is attached. The 20-pin connectors
are labeled 1, 2, and 3.
Note 3: The locations for the cable connectors are designated by the
slot number (L0-L9), and the shroud row (1, 2, and 3).

Segment 0

Step Action

1 Leave cable A as is in slot L0.

2 Move cable end B-3 to L1-3.

3 Remove cable C from the backplane and connect ends C-1, C-2,
and C-3 to L2-1, L2-2, and L2-3.
4 Add cable D to the I/O panel by connecting ends D-1, D-2, and D-3
to L3-1, L3-2, and L3-3.

—End—

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 496 NT7D16 Data Access card

Segment 1

Step Action

1 Leave cable E as is in slot L4.

2 Move cable end F-3 to L5-3.

3 Remove cable G from the backplane and connect ends G-1, G-2,
and G-3 to L6-1, L6-2, and L6-3.

4 Add cable H to the I/O panel by connecting ends H-1, H-2, and H-3
to L7-1, L7-2, and L7-3.

—End—

Segment 2

Step Action

1 Leave cable K as is in slot L8.

2 Move cable end L-3 to L9-3.

3 Remove cable M from the backplane and connect ends M-1, M-2,
and M-3 to L10-1, L10-2, and L10-3.
4 Add cable N to the I/O panel by connecting ends N-1, N-2, and N-3
to L11-1, L11-2, and L11-3.

—End—

Segment 3

Step Action

1 Leave cable R as is in slot L12.

2 Move cable end S-3 to L13-3.

3 Remove cable T from the backplane and connect ends T-1, T-2, and
T-3 to L14-1, L14-2, and L14-3.

4 Add cable U to the I/O panel by connecting ends U-1, U-2, and U-3
to L15-1, L15-2, and L15-3.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Upgrading systems 497

—End—

Be sure to re-label the MDF to show that the module has been upgraded
to provide one cable for each IPE slot. The resulting backplane and cable
arrangement should look like this:

Backplane slot-connector I/O panel cable position

L0 A
L1 B
L2 C
L3 D (new cable)
L4 E
L5 F
L6 G
L7 H (new cable)
L8 K
L9 L
L10 M
L11 N (new cable)
L12 R
L13 S
L14 T
L15 U (new cable)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 498 NT7D16 Data Access card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 499

NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 499)

"Physical description" (page 501)

"Functional description" (page 506)

"Electrical specifications" (page 519)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 524)

"Configuration" (page 527)

Introduction

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
The NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and
Meridian 1.
The NTDK16 digital line card is supported ONLY in the Chassis system.

The Digital Line card is a voice and data communication link between the
system and Digital Telephones. It supports voice only or simultaneous voice
and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring.

When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous

or synchronous terminal or personal computer can be connected to the
system through the digital telephone.

The Digital Line card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication links.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 500 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

NT8D02 Digital Line card

The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line card is supported in the Media Gateway
and Media Gateway Expansion.

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

NTDK16 Digital Line card

The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Chassis system. It is
based on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and is functionally equivalent to
three NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis.
It uses A94 Digital Line Interface chips (DLIC) to provide the interface
between the Digital sets and the system.

The NTDK16 Digital Line card can only be installed in slot 4 of the main
chassis which is slotted to prevent accidental insertion of other cards.The
Digital Line Card is a voice and data communication link between the system
and Meridian Digital Telephones. It supports voice only or simultaneous
voice and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone
wiring.

When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous

or synchronous terminal or personal computer can be connected to the
system through the digital telephone.

In Option 11C systems the NT8D02 Digital Line Card is installed in slots 1
through 10 of the main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion
cabinets. In Option 11C Mini, the NT8D02 DLC can be installed in slots 1 to
3 in the main chassis, or in slots 7 to 10 in the chassis expander.

The NTDK16 is a 48 port card supported only in the Option 11C Mini. It is
based on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card, it is functionally equivalent to three
NT8D02s, and configured as cards 4, 5, and 6 in the main chassis. It uses
A94 Digital Line Interface chips (DLIC) to provide the interface between the
Digital sets and the Option 11C Mini system.

In Option 11C Mini systems the NTDK16 Digital Line Card can only be
installed in slot 4 of the main chassis which is slotted to prevent accidental
insertion of other cards.

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card is an intelligent peripheral equipment (IPE)

device that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE Module. It provides 16
voice and 16 data communication links between a Meridian 1 switch and
modular digital telephones.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 501

The digital line card supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data
service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring. When
a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous
ASCII terminal, or a PC acting as an asynchronous ASCII terminal, can be
connected to the system through the digital telephone.

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card provides 16 voice and 16 data communication
links.

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card supports voice only, or simultaneous voice
and data service over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring.
When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an asynchronous
ASCII terminal, or a PC acting as an asynchronous ASCII terminal, can be
connected to the system through the digital telephone.

The 32 port NT8D02 Digital Line Card is supported in the Media Gateway
and Media Gateway Expansion. It can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and
4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway
Expansion.

The 48 port digital line card is not supported in any configuration.

Physical description
The Digital Line card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5
in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board. The NT8D02 is a double-sided PCB,
whereas the NTDK16 is 4 layers, but standard thickness. Both cards
connect to the backplane through a 120-pin or 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with a red LED
that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 123 "Digital line card -
faceplate" (page 503). When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two
to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully,
the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and
enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes
or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of
Card 4. The NTDK16BA has three LEDs. These LEDs show the status
of Cards 4, 5, and 6 configured on the NTDK16.

The digital line card circuitry is contained on a 320 mm (12.5 in.) by 254
mm (10 in.) printed circuit board (PCB). The NT8D02 is a double-sided
PCB, whereas the NTDK16 is 4 layers, but standard thickness. Both cards
connect to the backplane through a 120-pin or 160-pin edge connector.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 502 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

The faceplate of the NTDK16BA digital line card is equipped with three light
emitting diodes (LEDs). A red LED lights when the card is disabled. At
power-up, this LED flashes as the digital line card runs a self-test. If the test
completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured
in software) and the LED goes out. This LED only shows the status of the
NTDK16 in slot 4.

Note: The NTDK16AA has one LED. This LED shows the status of
Card 4. The NTDK16BA has three LEDs. These LEDs show the status
of Cards 4, 5, and 6 configured on the NTDK16.

Digital line cards are housed in NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

(IPE) Modules. Up to 16 cards are supported.

The digital line card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5

in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects to the
backplane through a 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the digital line card is equipped with a red LED that lights
when the card is disabled. See Figure 124 "Digital line card - faceplate"
(page 504). When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five
seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the
LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and
enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes
or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 503

Figure 123
Digital line card - faceplate

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 504 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Figure 124
Digital line card - faceplate

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40

cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) double-sided printed circuit board. The card connects
to the backplane through a 160-pin edge connector.

The faceplate of the NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with a red LED
that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 125 "Digital line card -
faceplate" (page 505). When the card is installed, the LED remains lit for two
to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully,

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 505

the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the card is configured and
enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continually flashes
or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Figure 125
Digital line card - faceplate

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 506 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Functional description
NT8D02 Digital Line card
The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit
provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital
apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed
(TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is
assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a
total of 32 addressable ports per card.
The NT8D02 Digital Line card is equipped with 16 identical digital line
interfaces. Each interface provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling
path to and from a digital terminal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex
512 kHz Time Compression Multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital
telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate Terminal
Number (TN) in the system database, giving a total of 32 addressable units
per card. The digital line card supports Nortel’ Meridian Digital Telephone.
The digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following
functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

Figure 126 "Digital line card - block diagram" (page 507) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line card.
Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 507

Figure 126
Digital line card - block diagram

NTDK16 Digital Line card

The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit
provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital
apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed
(TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is
assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a
total of 96 addressable ports per card. Refer to Figure 127 "NTDK16 DLC"
(page 509).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 508 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the
following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The card also provides:

• Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250
• Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance.
• Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire.

Interface between three DS30X loops and 48 TCM lines. The digital line
card is equipped with 16 identical digital line interfaces. Each interface
provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from a digital
terminal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz Time Compression
Multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated
data terminal is assigned a separate Terminal Number (TN) in the system
database, giving a total of 32 addressable units per card. The digital line
card supports Nortel Networks’ Meridian Digital Telephone.

Figure 128 "Digital line card - block diagram" (page 510) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the digital line card. Each of
these functions are described on the following pages.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 509

Figure 127
NTDK16 DLC

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 510 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Figure 128
Digital line card - block diagram

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card is equipped with 16 identical digital line
interfaces. Each interface provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling
path to and from a digital terminal (telephone) over a 2-wire full duplex
512 kHz Time Compression Multiplexed (TCM) digital link. Each digital
telephone and associated data terminal is assigned a separate Terminal
Number (TN) in the system database, giving a total of 32 addressable units
per card. The digital line card supports Nortel Networks’ Meridian Digital
Telephone.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 511

Figure 129 "NT8D02 Digital Line Card - block diagram" (page 511) shows a
block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D02 Digital Line
Card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Figure 129
NT8D02 Digital Line Card - block diagram

Functional description of the NT8D02

The digital line card is equipped with 16 identical units. Each unit provides
a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital apparatus
over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed (TCM)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 512 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is assigned
a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a total of 32
addressable ports per card.
The digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the following
functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

Functional description of the NTDK16

The NTDK16 digital line card is equipped with 48 identical units. Each unit
provides a multiplexed voice, data, and signaling path to and from digital
apparatus over a 2-wire full duplex 512 kHz time compression multiplexed
(TCM) digital link. Each digital telephone and associated data terminal is
assigned a separate terminal number (TN) in the system database, for a
total of 96 addressable ports per card. Refer to Figure 130 "NTDK16 DLC"
(page 513).
The NTDK16 digital line card contains a microprocessor that provides the
following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The card also provides

• Ability to support Digital sets and the Digital Console M2250
• Provides a serial link (Card LAN) for status report and maintenance.
• Supports loop lengths up to 3500 ft. (1.0 km) using 24 AWG wire.
• Interface between three DS30X loops and 48 TCM lines.

Card interfaces
The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops
and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are
discussed in detail in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page
21).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 513

The digital line card passes voice, data, and signaling over DS-30X loops
and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These interfaces are
discussed in detail in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page
21).

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card passes voice, data, and signaling over
DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link.

Digital line interfaces

The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC).
Each digital line interface circuit provides eight identical, individually
configurable voice and data interfaces to eight digital telephone lines. These
lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data, and signaling information as TCM
loops.

The purpose of each digital line interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from
the DS-30X Tx channel into eight integrated voice and data bitstreams. The
circuits then transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate
Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the eight TCM loops. They also perform
the opposite action: they receive eight BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM
loops and multiplex them onto the DS-30X Rx channel. The two digital line
interface circuits perform the multiplexing and de-multiplexing functions for
the 16 digital telephone lines.

Figure 130
NTDK16 DLC

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 514 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits
that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits
work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface
circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages
from the Call Server and return incoming call status information to the Call
Server over the DS-30X network loop.

The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC).
Each digital line interface circuit provides eight identical, individually
configurable voice and data interfaces to eight digital telephone lines. These
lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data, and signaling information as TCM
loops. Each TCM loop can be connected to a Nortel Networks M2xxx,
M39xx, or Aries digital telephone.

The purpose of each digital line interface circuit is to demultiplex data from
the DS-30X Tx channel into eight integrated voice and data bitstreams
and transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate Mark
Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the eight TCM loops. They also do the
opposite: receive eight BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM loops and
multiplex them onto the DS-30X Rx channel. The two digital line interface
circuits together perform the multiplexing and demultiplexing functions for
the 16 digital telephone lines.

The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits
that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits
work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface
circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages
from the CP and return incoming call status information to the CP over
the DS-30X network loop.

The digital line interface contains two Digital Line Interface Circuits (DLIC).
Each digital line interface circuit provides eight identical, individually
configurable voice and data interfaces to eight digital telephone lines. These
lines carry multiplexed PCM voice, data, and signaling information as TCM
loops.

The purpose of each digital line interface circuit is to de-multiplex data from
the DS-30X Tx channel into eight integrated voice and data bitstreams. The
circuits then transmit those bitstreams as Bi-Polar Return to Zero, Alternate
Mark Inversion (BPRZ-AMI) data to the eight TCM loops. They also perform
the opposite action: they receive eight BPRZ-AMI bitstreams from the TCM
loops and multiplex them onto the DS-30X Rx channel. The two digital line
interface circuits perform the multiplexing and de-multiplexing functions for
the 16 digital telephone lines.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 515

The digital line interface circuits also contain signaling and control circuits
that establish, supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits
work with the on-card microcontroller to operate the digital line interface
circuits during calls. The circuits receive outgoing call signaling messages
from the Call Processor and return incoming call status information to the
Call Processor over the DS-30X network loop.

TCM loop interface circuit

Each digital telephone line terminates on the NT8D02 Digital Line card
at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling
and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line
interface circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone.

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop
interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the
card microcontroller can remove the ±15 V dc power supply from the
TCM loop interfaces. This happens when either the microcontroller gets a
command from the NT8D01 controller card to shut down the channel, or
the digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization
signal. The ±15 V dc power supply signal is removed from all 16 TCM loop
interface units at the same time.

Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length
when using 24-gauge wire. They support a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5
dB at 256 KHz and a maximum dc loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Each digital telephone line terminates on the digital line card at a TCM
loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling and foreign
voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line interface
circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone.

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop
interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the
card microcontroller can remove the ±15 V dc power supply from the
TCM loop interfaces. This happens when either the microcontroller gets a
command from the NT8D01 controller card to shut down the channel or the
digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization signal.
The ±15 V dc power supply signal is removed from all 16 TCM loop interface
units at the same time.

Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length
when using 24-gauge wire. They allow for a maximum AC signal loss of
15.5 dB at 256 KHz and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 516 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Each digital telephone line terminates on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card
at a TCM loop interface circuit. The circuit provides transformer coupling
and foreign voltage protection between the TCM loop and the digital line
interface circuit. It also provides battery voltage for the digital telephone.

To prevent undesirable side effects from occurring when the TCM loop
interface cannot provide the proper signals on the digital phone line, the
card microcontroller can remove the ±15 V dc power supply from the
TCM loop interfaces. This happens when either the microcontroller gets a
command from the NT8D01 controller card to shut down the channel, or
the digital line card detects a loss of the 1 KHz frame synchronization
signal. The ±15 V dc power supply signal is removed from all 16 TCM loop
interface units at the same time.

Each TCM loop interface circuit can service loops up to 3500 ft. in length
when using 24-gauge wire. They support a maximum ac signal loss of 15.5
dB at 256 KHz and a maximum dc loop resistance of 210 ohms.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on
the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card
if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on

the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card
if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller and a Card LAN link on

the digital line card. A sanity timer is provided to automatically reset the card
if the microcontroller stops functioning for any reason.

Microcontroller
The NT8D02 Digital Line card contains a microcontroller that controls the
internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller
card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the Call Server through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the digital line interfaces

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 517

— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card

— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
line interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics

The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is
enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.
The digital line card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The
microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the digital line interfaces
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
line interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics

The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is
enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.

Microcontroller
The NT8D02 Digital Line Card contains a microcontroller that controls the
internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller
card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE Call Processor through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the digital line interfaces

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 518 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card

— programming of loop interface control circuits for administration of
line interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics

The microcontroller also controls the front panel LED when the card is
enabled or disabled by instructions from the NT8D01 controller card.

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment Call Server
over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment CP over a

dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The Card
LAN link is described in the section "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page
21).

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment Call Processor

over a dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Sanity timer
The NT8D02 Digital Line card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service
the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it
times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

The digital line card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service
the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it
times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card also contains a sanity timer that resets the
microcontroller if program control is lost. The microcontroller must service
the sanity timer every 1.2 seconds. If the timer is not properly serviced, it
times out and causes the microcontroller to be hardware reset.

Circuit power
The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc for use by the digital
line interface circuits. The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power
the loop interface circuits.

The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc for use by the digital
line interface circuits. The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power
the loop interface circuits.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Digital line interface specifications 519

The +15 V dc input is regulated down to +10 V dc for use by the digital
line interface circuits. The ±15.0 V dc inputs to the card are used to power
the loop interface circuits.

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line
card.

This section lists the electrical characteristic of the digital line card.

This section lists the electrical characteristics of the NT8D02 Digital Line
Card.

Digital line interface specifications

Table 195 "NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summary" (page
519) provides a technical summary of the digital line cards.

Table 195
NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line card technical summary
NT8D02 DLC NTDK16BA DLC NTDK16AA DLC
Characteristics description description description
Units per card 16 voice, 16 data 48 voice, 48 data 48 voice, 48 data
Impedance 100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm
30 m (100 ft) to 915 30 m (100 ft) to 915 30 m (100 ft) to 915
m (3000 ft) with 24 m (3000 ft) with 24 m (3000 ft) with 24
AWG PVC cable (+15 AWG PVC cable (±15 AWG PVC cable (±15
Loop limits V DC at 80 mA) V DC at 80 mA) V DC at 80 mA)
0 to 1070 m (3500 0 to 1070 m (3500 0 to 1070 m (3500
ft) with 24 AWG PVC ft) with 24 AWG PVC ft) with 24 AWG PVC
cable (±15 V DC cable (±15 V DC cable (±15 V DC
at 80 mA) at 80 mA) at 80 mA)
Line rate 512 kbps ± 100 ppm 512 kbps ± 100 ppm 512 kbps ± 100 ppm
+ 5 V DC + 5 V DC + 5 V DC
±15 V DC ±15 V DC ±15 V DC
Power supply +10 V DC +8 V DC
Transmitter output voltage:
• successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and
-1.5 ± 0.15 V
• "0" bits 0 ± 50 mV
Not applicable Not applicable Power Failure Transfer
Additional circuitry Control Ring Sync.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 520 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Technical summary
Table 196 "NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summary" (page
520) provides a technical summary of the digital line cards.

Table 196
NT8D02/NTDK16 Digital Line Card technical summary
NT8D02 DLC NTDK16BA DLC NTDK16AA DLC
Characteristics description description description
Units per card 16 voice, 16 data 48 voice, 48 data 48 voice, 48 data
Impedance 100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm 100 Ohm j/b ohm
30 m (100 ft) to 915 30 m (100 ft) to 915 30 m (100 ft) to 915
m (3000 ft) with 24 m (3000 ft) with 24 m (3000 ft) with 24
AWG PVC cable (+15 AWG PVC cable (±15 AWG PVC cable (±15
Loop limits V DC at 80 mA) V DC at 80 mA) V DC at 80 mA)
0 to 1070 m (3500 0 to 1070 m (3500 0 to 1070 m (3500
ft) with 24 AWG PVC ft) with 24 AWG PVC ft) with 24 AWG PVC
cable (±15 V DC cable (±15 V DC cable (±15 V DC
at 80 mA) at 80 mA) at 80 mA)
Line rate 512 kbps ± 100 ppm 512 kbps ± 100 ppm 512 kbps ± 100 ppm
+ 5 V DC + 5 V DC + 5 V DC
±15 V DC ±15 V DC ±15 V DC
Power supply +10 V DC +8 V DC
Transmitter output voltage:
• successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and
-1.5 ± 0.15 V
• "0" bits 0 ± 50 mV
Not applicable Not applicable Power Failure Transfer
Additional circuitry Control Ring Sync.

Digital line interface specifications

Table 197 "Digital line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics"
(page 520) provides specifications for the 16 digital line interfaces, and
Table 200 "Digital line card-power required" (page 522) lists the maximum
power consumed by the card.

Table 197
Digital line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Units per card 16 voice, 16 data
Line rate 512 kbps ± 100 ppm
Impedance 1003/4

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Technical summary 521

Characteristics Description
Loop limits 0 to 1067 m (3500 ft.) with 24 AWG
PVC cable (±15 V dc at 80 mA)
Maximum ac Signal loss 15.5 dB at 256 KHz
Maximum dc Loop resistance 210 ohms
Transmitter output voltage:
successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and –1.5 ± 0.15 V
"0" bits 0 ± 50 mV

Table 244 "Environmental specifications" (page 684) provides specifications

for the 16 digital line interfaces, and Table 200 "Digital line card-power
required" (page 522) lists the maximum power consumed by the NT8D02
Digital Line Card.

Table 198
NT8D02 Digital Line Card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Units per card 16 voice, 16 data
Line rate 512 kbps ± 100 ppm
Impedance 100 ohms
Loop limits 0 to 1067 m (3500 ft.) with 24 AWG
PVC cable (±15 V dc at 80 mA)
Maximum ac Signal loss 15.5 dB at 256 KHz
Maximum dc Loop resistance 210 ohms
Transmitter output voltage:
successive "1" bits +1.5 ± 0.15 V and –1.5 ± 0.15 V
"0" bits 0 ± 50 mV

Power requirements
The digital line card needs +15V DC over each loop at a maximum current
of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line
feed interface can supply power to one loop of varying length up to 1070 m
(3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of
15.5 dB at 256 kHz, and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms; 26
AWG wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 522 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Table 199
Digital line card-power required
Voltage Current (max.)
±5.0 V dc 150 mA
+15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
–15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp

The digital line card needs +15V DC over each loop at a maximum current
of 80 mA. It requires +15V, -15V, and +5V from the backplane. The line
feed interface can supply power to one loop of varying length up to 1070 m
(3500 ft) using 24 AWG wire with a maximum allowable AC signal loss of
15.5 dB at 256 kHz, and a maximum DC loop resistance of 210 ohms; 26
AWG wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft).

The digital line card provides +15 V dc over each loop at a maximum current
of 80 mA. It requires +15 V, -15 V, and +5 V from the backplane. One
NT8D06 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply ac or NT6D40 Peripheral
Equipment Power Supply dc can supply power to a maximum of 16 digital
line cards.

Table 200
Digital line card-power required
Voltage Current (max.)
±5.0 V dc 150 mA
+15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
–15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card provides +15 V dc over each loop at a
maximum current of 80 mA. It requires +15 V, -15 V, and +5 V from the
backplane. One NT8D06 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply ac or
NT6D40 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply dc can supply power to a
maximum of 16 digital line cards.

Table 201
NT8D02 Digital Line Card - power requirements
Voltage Current (max.)
±5.0 V dc 150 mA
+15.0 V dc 1.6 Amp
–15.0 V dc 1.3 Amp

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Technical summary 523

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided
on the NT8D02 Digital Line card. The NT8D02 Digital Line card does,
however, have protection against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise telephones, primary and

secondary Main Distribution Frame (MDF) protection must be installed.

Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central

office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for
on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local
regulations before providing such service.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the Digital line card.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the digital line card. The digital line card does, however, have protection
against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise telephones, primary and

secondary Main Distribution Frame (MDF) protection must be installed.
Details on installing protection devices are given in "Environmental
specifications" (page 323).

Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central

office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for
on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local
regulations before providing such service.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card. The NT8D02 Digital Line Card does,
however, have protection against accidental shorts to –52 V dc analog lines.

When the card is used to service off-premise telephones, primary and

secondary Main Distribution Frame (MDF) protection must be installed.

Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs routed through the central

office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be subject to a requirement for
on-card protection, and MDF protectors may not be acceptable. Check local
regulations before providing such service.

Environmental specifications
Table 202 "Digital line card - environmental specifications" (page 524) shows
the environmental specifications of the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 524 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Table 202
Digital line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60C (+32 to +140F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F)

Table 203 "Digital line card - environmental specifications" (page 524) shows
the environmental specifications of the card.

Table 203
Digital line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F)

Table 203 "Digital line card - environmental specifications" (page 524) shows
the environmental specifications of the NT8D02 Digital Line Card.

Table 204
NT8D02 Digital Line Card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F)

Connector pin assignments

Table 205 "NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts" (page 525) shows
the I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as
an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Normally, these pin positions are
cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for
connection with 25-pair cables to the MDF.

The information in Table 205 "NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane

pinouts" (page 525) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the
backplane, since the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and
Configuration (NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 525

Table 205
NT8D02 Digital Line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Lead Backplane Lead
Pinout* Designations Pinout* Designations
12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip
13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip
14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip
15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip
16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip
17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip
18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip
19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip
62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip
63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip
64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip
65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11, Tip
66A Line 12, Ring 66B Line 12, Tip
67A Line 13, Ring 67B Line 13, Tip
68A Line 14, Ring 68B Line 14, Tip
69A Line 15, Ring 69B Line 15, Tip
*These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes

Table 206 "Digital line card - backplane pinouts" (page 526) shows the
I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as
an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Normally, these pin positions are
cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for
connection with 25-pair cables to the MDF.

The information in Table 206 "Digital line card - backplane pinouts" (page
526) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, since
the cabling arrangement may vary at the I/O panel. See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 526 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Table 206
Digital line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Lead Backplane Lead
Pinout* Designations Pinout* Designations
12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip
13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip
14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip
15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip
16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip
17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip
18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip
19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip
62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip
63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip
64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip
65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11, Tip
66A Line 12, Ring 66B Line 12, Tip
67A Line 13, Ring 67B Line 13, Tip
68A Line 14, Ring 68B Line 14, Tip
69A Line 15, Ring 69B Line 15, Tip
*These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes

Table 206 "Digital line card - backplane pinouts" (page 526) shows the
I/O pin designations at the backplane connector, which is arranged as
an 80-row by 2-column array of pins. Normally, these pin positions are
cabled to 50-pin connectors at the I/O panel in the rear of each module for
connection with 25-pair cables to the MDF.

The information in Table 206 "Digital line card - backplane pinouts" (page
526) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the backplane, since
the cabling arrangement can vary at the I/O panel. See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for cable pinout information for the I/O panel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 527

Table 207
NT8D02 Digital Line Card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Lead Backplane Lead
Pinout* Designations Pinout* Designations
12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip
13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip
14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip
15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip
16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip
17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip
18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip
19A Line 7, Ring 19B Line 7, Tip
62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip
63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip
64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip
65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11, Tip
66A Line 12, Ring 66B Line 12, Tip
67A Line 13, Ring 67B Line 13, Tip
68A Line 14, Ring 68B Line 14, Tip
69A Line 15, Ring 69B Line 15, Tip
*These pinouts apply to both the NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes

Configuration
This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and
jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Line card and configuring the system
software to properly recognize the card. Figure 131 "Digital line card -
jumper block and switch locations" (page 529) shows where the switches
and jumper blocks are located on this board.

This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and
jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card and configuring the system
software to properly recognize the card. Figure 132 "Digital line card -
jumper block and switch locations" (page 530) shows where the switches
and jumper blocks are located on this board.

This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and
jumpers on the NT8D02 Digital Line Card and configuring the system
software to properly recognize the card. "NT8D02 Digital Line Card - jumper
block and switch locations" (page 531) shows where the switches and
jumper blocks are located on this board.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 528 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D02 Digital Line card has no user-configurable jumpers or switches.
The card derives its address from its position in the backplane and reports
that information back to the Call Server through the LAN Link interface.

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card has no user-configurable jumpers or

switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane
and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CP through the LAN
Link interface.

The NT8D02 Digital Line Card has no user-configurable jumpers or

switches. The card derives its address from its position in the backplane
and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 Call Processor through
the LAN Link interface.

The NT8D02GA, NT8D02HA, and NT8D02HAE5 Cards are based on a

different architecture and hence need a jumper (J1) to activate/deactivate
the unterminated line detection feature. When connected to digital sets, the
jumper J1 should be removed. This enables the unterminated line detection
feature. This jumper settings is applicable only to NT8D02GA , NT8D02HA,
and NT8D02HAE5 packs.

Software service changes

Voice and data ports are configured using LD 11. See Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change
instructions. Voice and data ports are configured using the Meridian Digital
TelephoneAdministration program LD 11. See the Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change
instructions.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 529

Figure 131
Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations

Voice and data ports are configured using LD 11. See Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 11 service change
instructions.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 530 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Figure 132
Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 531

NT8D02 Digital Line Card - jumper block and switch locations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 532 NT8D02 and NTDK16 Digital Line cards

Figure 133
Digital line card - jumper block and switch locations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 533

NT8D03 Analog Line card

Overview
The NT8D03 Analog Line card provides an interface for up to 16
analog (500/2500-type) telephones. It is equipped with an 8051-family
microprocessor that performs the following functions:
• control of card operation
• card identification
• self-test
• status reporting to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

A maximum of four NT8D03 Analog Line cards can be installed in each
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.The NT8D03 Analog Line
Card provides an interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephone
sets. It is equipped with an 8051-family microprocessor that performs the
following functions:
• control of card operation
• card identification
• self-test
• status reporting to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The NT8D03 Analog Line Card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the
Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9 and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.

Note: A maximum of four NT8D03 Analog Line Cards can be installed

in each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 534 NT8D03 Analog Line card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 535

NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line

card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 535)

"Physical description" (page 538)

"Functional description" (page 541)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 556)

"Configuration" (page 558)

Introduction
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is an IPE line card that can
be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card (µ-Law) provides talk
battery and signaling for up to 16 regular 2-wire common battery analog
(500/2500-type) telephones and key telephone equipment, with the
Message Waiting lamp feature.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is functionally identical to

the NT8D03 Analog Line card, except it can also connect a high-voltage,
low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on
telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature.

The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot.

Note: A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line cards

per Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion are supported.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 536 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding,
and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change
improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a
single-building environment.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card supports 56K modem
operation.

CAUTION
Damage to Equipment
If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line
card, do not define that port in software (LD 10) as having message
waiting capabilities. Otherwise, the modem gets damaged.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card interfaces to and is

compatible with the equipment listed in Table 208 "NT8D09 Analog Message
Waiting Line card application and compatibility" (page 536).

Table 208
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card application and compatibility
Equipment Specifications
500-type rotary dial sets (or equivalent):
dial speed 8.0 to 12.5 pps
percent break 58 to 70%
interdigital time 150 ms
2500-type Digitone sets (or equivalent):
frequency accuracy ± 1.5%
pulse duration 40 ms
interdigital time 40 ms
speed 12.5 digits/s

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is an Intelligent Peripheral

Equipment (IPE) line card that can be installed in the NT8D37 IPE module.
Up to 16 cards are supported.

The analog message waiting line card provides talk battery and signaling
for up to 16 regular 2-wire common battery analog (500/2500-type)
telephones and key telephone equipment. The card can also connect a
high-voltage, low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp
on telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature. This voltage is
provided by the NT6D40 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply, DC.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 537

Cards later than vintage NT8D09AK support µ-Law and A-Law companding,
and provide a 2 dB transmission profile change. The transmission change
improves performance on long lines, particularly for lines used outside of a
single-building environment.

CAUTION
Damage to Equipment
If a modem is connected to a port on the message waiting line
card, do not define that port in software (LD 10) as having message
waiting capabilities. Otherwise, the modem gets damaged.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card (µ-Law) provides talk
battery and signaling for regular 2-wire common battery 500-type (rotary
dial) and 2500-type (Digitone dial) telephones and key telephone equipment.

The analog message waiting line card is functionally identical to the NT8D03
Analog Line Card, except that it can also connect a high-voltage, low-current
feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on telephones equipped
with the Message Waiting feature.

The analog message waiting line card supports 56K modem operation.

The analog message waiting line card interfaces to and is compatible with
the equipment listed in Table 209 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line
Card application and compatibility" (page 537).

Table 209
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card application and compatibility
Equipment Specifications
500 type rotary dial sets (or equivalent):
dial speed 8.0 to 12.5 pps
percent break 58 to 70%
interdigital time 150 ms
2500 type Digitone sets (or equivalent):
frequency accuracy + 1.5%
pulse duration 40 ms
interdigital time 40 ms
speed 12.5 digits/s

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card (µ-Law) provides an

interface for up to 16 analog (500/2500-type) telephones with the Message
Waiting lamp feature.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 538 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is functionally identical to

the NT8D03 Analog Line Card, except it can also connect a high-voltage,
low-current feed to each line to light the message waiting lamp on
telephones equipped with the Message Waiting feature.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card supports 56K modem
operation.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card interfaces to and is

compatible with the equipment listed in Table 209 "NT8D09 Analog Message
Waiting Line Card application and compatibility" (page 537).

Table 210
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card application and compatibility
Equipment Specifications
500-type rotary dial sets (or equivalent):
dial speed 8.0 to 12.5 pps
percent break 58 to 70%
interdigital time 150 ms
2500-type Digitone sets (or equivalent):
frequency accuracy + 1.5%
pulse duration 40 ms
interdigital time 40 ms
speed 12.5 digits/s

Physical description
The circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.)
printed circuit board.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card circuits connects to the
backplane through a 160-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to a
connector in the bottom of the cabinet which is cabled to the cross-connect
terminal (Main Distribution Frame) through 25-pair cables. Station apparatus
then connects to the card at the cross-connect terminal.

The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card is

equipped with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled (see
Figure 134 "Analog message waiting line card - faceplate" (page 539). At
power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test
completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured
in software) and the LED goes out.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 539

Figure 134
Analog message waiting line card - faceplate

The analog message waiting line card mounts in any IPE slot. The circuitry
is mounted on a 31.75 cm. by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit
board.

The analog message waiting line card connects to the backplane through a
160-pin edge connector. The backplane is cabled to the Input/Output (I/O)
panel that then connects to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF), also called
a cross-connect terminal through 25-pair cables. Telephones connect to the

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 540 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

card through the MDF. SeeCommunication Server 1000M and Meridian 1

Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination
and cross-connect information.

The faceplate of the analog message waiting line card is equipped with a red
LED that lights when the card is disabled. See Figure 134 "Analog message
waiting line card - faceplate" (page 539). When the card is installed, the
LED remains lit for two to five seconds as a self-test runs. If the self-test
completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit until the
card is configured and enabled in software; then the LED goes out. If the
LED continually flashes or remains weakly lit, the card should be replaced. .

In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting

Line Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots
11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets. In Option 11C Mini, the card
is installed in slots 1 to 3 in the main chassis, or 7 to 10 in the chassis
expander.

The line card circuits connects to the backplane through a 160-pin

connector. The backplane is cabled to a connector in the bottom of the
cabinet which is cabled to the cross-connect terminal (main distribution
frame) through 25-pair cables. Station apparatus then connects to the card
at the cross-connect terminal.

The faceplate of the analog message waiting line card is equipped with a
red light emitting diode (LED) which lights when the card is disabled. At
power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test
completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured
in software) and the LED goes out.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card can be installed in slots
1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9 and 10 of the Media
Gateway Expansion.

A maximum of four NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Cards per Media
Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion are supported.

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card circuits connects to the
backplane through a 160-pin connector. The backplane is cabled to a
connector in the bottom of the cabinet which is cabled to the cross-connect
terminal (main distribution frame) through 25-pair cables. Station apparatus
then connects to the card at the cross-connect terminal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 541

The faceplate of the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card is

equipped with a red LED which lights when the card is disabled. At
power-up, the LED flashes as the analog line card runs a self-test. If the test
completes successfully, the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured
in software) and the LED goes out.

Functional description
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card contains a microprocessor
that provides the following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card also provides:

• 600 ohms balanced terminating impedance
• analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and
reception signals for 16 audio phone lines
• transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD)
signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format
• on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection
• 20 Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the
station goes off-hook
• synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal
to zero crossing of ringing voltage
• loopback of SSD messages and Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) signals
for diagnostic purposes
• correct initialization of all features at power-up
• direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial
pulses
• connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps
• lamp status detection
• disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 542 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Figure 135 "Analog message waiting line card - block diagram" (page
543) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog
message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the
following sections.
Figure 136 "Analog message waiting line card - block diagram" (page
544) shows a block diagram of the major functions contained on the analog
message waiting line card. Each of these functions are described in the
following sections.
The analog message waiting line card contains a microprocessor that
provides the following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The analog message waiting line card also provides:

• 600-ohm balanced terminating impedance
• analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and
reception signals for 16 audio phone lines

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 543

Figure 135
Analog message waiting line card - block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 544 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Figure 136
Analog message waiting line card - block diagram

• transmission and reception of scan and signaling device (SSD) signaling

messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format
• on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 545

• 20-Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the

station goes off-hook
• synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal
to zero crossing of ringing voltage
• loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals
for diagnostic purposes
• correct initialization of all features at power-up
• direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial
pulses
• connection of -150 V DC at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps
• lamp status detection
• disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card contains a microprocessor

that provides the following functions:
• self-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card also provides the following:
• 600 ohms balanced terminating impedance
• analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and
reception signals for 16 audio phone lines
• transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD)
signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling channel in A10 format
• on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash detection
• 20 Hz ringing signal connection and automatic disconnection when the
station goes off-hook
• synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal
to zero crossing of ringing voltage
• loopback of SSD messages and Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) signals
for diagnostic purposes
• correct initialization of all features at power-up
• direct reporting of digit dialed (500-type telephones) by collecting dial
pulses

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 546 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

• connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps

• lamp status detection
• disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance

Card interfaces
The analog message waiting line card passes voice and signaling data
over DS-30X loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These
interfaces are discussed in "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21).

Line interface units

The analog message waiting line card contains 16 identical and
independently configurable line interface units (also referred to as circuits).
Each unit provides 600-ohm impedance matching and a balance network in
a signal transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Circuits are also provided in each
unit to apply the ringing voltage onto the line synchronized to the ringing
current zero crossing. Signal detection circuits monitor on-hook/off-hook
status and switchhook flash detection. Four CODECs are provided to
perform A/D and D/A conversion of line analog voiceband signals to digital
PCM signals. Each CODEC supports four line interface units. The following
features are common to all units on the card:
• Transmission and reception of Scan and Signaling Device (SSD)
signaling messages over a DS30X signaling channel in A10 format.
• Loopback of SSD messages and pulse code modulation (PCM) signals
for diagnostic purposes.
• Correct initialization of all features, as configured in software, at
power-up.
• Direct reporting of digits dialed (500 telephones) by collecting dial
pulses.
• Connection of –150 V dc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps in
two telephones in parallel. The two telephones must be the same type or
the neon series resistor in each telephone must be 54 K ohms or greater.
• Lamp status detection (does not detect a failure of either lamp when
operating in parallel).
• Disabling and enabling of selected units for maintenance.
• 40 mA to telephones with short circuit protection.

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by the following:
• a microcontroller
• a card LAN interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 547

• signaling and control circuits on the analog message waiting line card

Microcontroller
The analog message waiting line card contains a microcontroller that
controls the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the
controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CP through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration:

— programming of the codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of line interface unit operation
— enabling/disabling of an interrupted dial tone to indicate call waiting
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission loss levels

Signaling and control

The signaling and control portion of the card provides circuits that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the
system CP to operate the line interface circuits during calls. The circuits
receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CP and return incoming
call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Circuit power
The +8.5 V dc input is regulated down to +5 V dc for use by the digital logic
circuits. All other power to the card is used by the line interface circuits. The
+15.0 V dc input is regulated down to +12 V dc to power the analog circuits.
The –48.0 V dc input is for the telephone battery.

Ringing power for telephones is 86 Vrms ac at 20 Hz on –48 V dc. The

Rsync signal is used to switch 20 Hz ringing on and off at the zero current
cross-over point to lengthen the life of the switching circuits.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 548 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Power for lighting the message waiting lights is provided by either the
peripheral equipment power supply or the ringing generator. Logic on the
message waiting line card interrupts the –150 V dc signal at 1 Hz intervals
to provide a flashing message waiting light.

Technical summary or
Electrical specifications
Analog line interface
The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card meets the EIA/TA464
standard for ONS Type II line cards. Table 211 "Analog message waiting
line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics" (page 548) shows a
summary of the analog line interface unit electrical characteristics.

Table 211
Analog message waiting line card - line interface unit electrical characteristics
Characteristics Description
Impedance 600 ohms
Loop limit 1000 ohms at nominal –48 V
(excluding telephone) (excluding telephone)
Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms
Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals
Ringing voltage 86 V ac
Signaling Loop start
Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied
(approximately –44.5 V on ring and –2.5 V on tip at
nominal –48 V battery)
Power input from –48 (can be as low as –42 for DC-powered
backplane systems), +15, +8.5, –150 V and ringing voltage
Insertion loss 4 dB ±1 dB at 1020 Hz
3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM
0.5 dB loss for PCM to analog

Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of:
• 20 dB for 200-500 Hz
• 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz

Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of:
• 20 dB for 200-500 Hz
• 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 549

Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of:
• 20 dB for 200-500 Hz
• 26 dB for 500-3400 Hz

Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 ohms with a return loss of:
• 20 dB for 200 – 500 Hz
• 26 dB for 500 – 3400 Hz

Insertion loss
On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6
dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5
dB loss for PCM to analog.

Insertion loss
On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6
dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5
dB loss for PCM to analog.

Insertion loss
On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 kHz is 6
dB + 1 dB. This is arranged as 3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM, and 2.5
dB loss for PCM to analog.

Frequency response
The loss values in Table 212 "Analog message waiting line card - frequency
response" (page 549) are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.

Table 212
Analog message waiting line card - frequency response
Frequency (Hz) Minimum (dB) Maximum (dB)
60 20.0 -
200 0.0 5.0
300 –0.5 1.0
3000 –0.5 1.0
3200 –0.5 1.5
3400 0.0 3.0

Frequency response
The loss values in Table 214 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card
frequency response" (page 550) are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 550 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Table 213
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response
Frequency Minimum Maximum
60 Hz 20.0 dB —
200 Hz 0.0 dB 5.0 dB
300 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB
3000 Hz –0.5 dB 1.0 dB
3200 Hz –0.5 dB 1.5 dB
3400 Hz 0.0 dB 3.0 dB

Frequency response
The loss values in Table 214 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card
frequency response" (page 550) are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.

Table 214
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card frequency response
Frequency Minimum Maximum
60 Hz 20.0 dB --
200 Hz 0.0 dB 5.0 dB
300 Hz -0.5 dB 1.0 dB
3000 Hz -0.5 dB 1.0 dB
3200 Hz -0.5 dB 1.5 dB
3400 Hz 0.0 dB 3.0 dB

Message channel noise

The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the
connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not
exceed 20 dBrnC.

Table 215 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary"
(page 550) provides a technical summary of the analog message waiting
line card.

Table 215
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card technical summary
Impedance 600 ohms
Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set)
Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms
Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 551

Ringing voltage 86 V AC
Signaling Loop start
Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied
(approximately -44.5 V on ring and -2.5 V on tip at nominal -48
V battery)
Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -15,
+8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog message
waiting line card.
Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz
3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM,
2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog

Message channel noise

The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the
connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not
exceed 20 dBrnC.

Table 217 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary"
(page 552) provides a technical summary of the NT8D09 Analog Message
Waiting Line Card.

Table 216
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary
Impedance 600 ohms
Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set)
Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms
Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals
Ringing voltage 86 V ac
Signaling Loop start
Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied
(approximately –44.5 V on ring and –2.5 V on tip at
nominal –48 V battery)
Power input from –48 (can be as low as –42 for dc-powered systems),
backplane +15, –15, +8.5 V and ringing voltage; also –150 V
on analog message waiting line card
Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz
3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM,
2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 552 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Message channel noise

The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95 percent of the
connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not
exceed 20 dBmC.

Message channel noise

The message channel noise C-weighted (dBrnC) on 95 percent of the
connections (line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not
exceed 20 dBrnC.

Table 217 "NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary"
(page 552) provides a technical summary of the analog message waiting
line card.

Table 217
NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card technical summary
Impedance 600 ohms
Loop limit (excluding set) 1000 ohms at nominal -48 V (excluding set)
Leakage resistance 30,000 ohms
Ring trip During silent or ringing intervals
Ringing voltage 86 V AC
Signaling Loop start
Supervision Normal battery conditions are continuously applied
(approximately -44.5 V on ring and -2.5 V on tip at nominal -48
V battery)
Power input from backplane -48 (can be as low as -42 for DC-powered systems), +15, -15,
+8.5 V and ringing voltage; also -150 V on analog message
waiting line card.
Insertion loss 6 dB + 1 dB at 1020 Hz
3.5 dB loss for analog to PCM,
2.5 dB loss for PCM to analog

Frequency response
The loss values in Table 218 "Analog message waiting line card - frequency
response" (page 552) are measured relative to the loss at 1 kHz.

Table 218
Analog message waiting line card - frequency response
Frequency (Hz) Minimum (dB) Maximum (dB)
60 20.0 —
200 0.0 5.0
300 –0.5 1.0

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 553

Frequency (Hz) Minimum (dB) Maximum (dB)

3000 –0.5 1.0
3200 –0.5 1.5
3400 0.0 3.0

Power requirements
Table 219 "Power requirements" (page 553) provides the power
requirements for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card.

Table 219
Power requirements
Voltage Idle Active
(+/-) Tolerance current current Max
+ 12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48
mA
+ 8.0 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280
mA
–48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA 688
mA
–48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA 320
(Note 1) mA
86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 mA 160
(Note 2) mA
–150.0 V dc 3.00 V dc 0 mA 2 mA 32
mA
Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.
Note 2: Reflects the current for ringing a single station set (or DN telephone).
There may be as many as five ringers on each line.

Table 220 "Analog message waiting line card - power requirements" (page
554) provides the power requirements for the analog message waiting line
card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 554 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Table 220
Analog message waiting line card - power requirements
Voltage Idle Active
(+/–) Tolerance current current Maximum
+12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA
+8.5 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA
–48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA* 688 mA
–48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA** 160 mA
86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 mA*** 160 mA
–150.0 V dc 3.00 V dc 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA
* Current required for each line off-hook
** Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage
*** Reflects the current for ringing a single DN telephone. There may be as many
as five ringers on each line.

Table 221 "Power requirements" (page 554) provides the power

requirements for the analog message waiting line card.

Table 221
Power requirements
Voltage Idle Active
(+/-) Tolerance current current Max
+ 12.0 V DC 0.36 V DC 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA
+ 8.0 V DC 0.40 V DC 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA
- 48.0 V DC 2.00 V DC 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA
- 48.0 V DC 5.00 V DC 0 mA 10 mA 320 mA
(Note 1)
86.0 V AC 5.00 V AC 0 mA 10 mA 160 mA
(Note 2)
-150.0 V DC 3.00 V DC 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA
Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.
Note 2: Reflects the current for ringing a single station set. There may be as
many as five ringers on each line.

Table 222 "Power requirements" (page 555) provides the power

requirements for the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 555

Table 222
Power requirements
Voltage Idle Active
(+/-) Tolerance current current Max
+ 12.0 V dc 0.36 V dc 48 mA 0 mA 48 mA
+ 8.0 V dc 0.40 V dc 150 mA 8 mA 280 mA
–48.0 V dc 2.00 V dc 48 mA 40 mA 688 mA
–48.0 V dc 5.00 V dc 0 mA 10 mA 320 mA
(Note 1)
86.0 V ac 5.00 V ac 0 mA 10 m 160 mA
(Note 2)
–150.0 V dc 3.00 V dc 0 mA 2 mA 32 mA
Note 1: Each active ringing relay requires 10 mA of battery voltage.
Note 2: Reflects the current for ringing a single station set. There may be as
many as five ringers on each line.

Foreign and surge voltage protections

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided
on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting line card.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the analog message waiting line card. When the card is used to service
off-premise telephones, primary and secondary MDF protection must be
installed. Details on installing protection devices are given in "Environmental
specifications" (page 323). Off-premise telephones served by cable pairs
routed through the central office, or crossing a public right-of-way, can be
subject to a requirement for on-card protection, and MDF protectors may
not be acceptable. Check local regulations before providing such service.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided on

the Analog Message Waiting line card. When the Analog line card is used to
service off-premise telephones, the NTAK92 Off-premise protection module
must be used. Check local regulations before providing such service.

In-circuit protection against power line crosses or lightning is not provided

on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card. When the analog line
card is used to service off-premise telephones, the NTAK92 Off-Premise
protection module must be used. Check local regulations before providing
such service.

Overload level
Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion
in speech transmission.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 556 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Overload level
Signal levels exceeding +6.5 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion
in speech transmission.

Overload level
Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion
in speech transmission.

Overload level
Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion
in speech transmission.

Environmental specifications
Table 223 "Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications"
(page 556) lists the environmental specifications for the analog message
waiting line card.

Table 223
Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F)

Table 224 "Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications"

(page 556) lists the environmental specifications for the analog message
waiting line card.

Table 224
Analog message waiting line card - environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 C (+32 to +140 F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 C (–40 to +158 F)

Connector pin assignments

The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE
backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled
to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the
MDF by 25-pair cables.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 557

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the analog

message waiting line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to
that used for trunk cards. A typical connection example is shown in
Figure 137 "Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection
example" (page 559) and Table 132 "CLASS modem card - environmental
specifications" (page 323) shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane
connector. This connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of
pins. Normally, these pin positions are cabled to 50-pin connectors at the
I/O panel in the rear of each module for connection with 25-pair cables to
the cross-connect terminal.

The information in Table 225 "Analog message waiting line card - backplane
pinouts" (page 557) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the
backplane, since the cabling arrangement may vary at the I/O panel. See
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and
Configuration (NN43021-310) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel.

Table 225
Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Lead Backplane Lead
pinout* designations pinout* designations
12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip
13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip
14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip
15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip
16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip
17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip
18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip
19A Line 7, Ring 18B Line 7, Tip
62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip
63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip
64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip
65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11, Tip
66A Line 12, Ring 66B Line 12, Tip
67A Line 13, Ring 67B Line 13, Tip
68A Line 14, Ring 68B Line 14, Tip
69A Line 15, Ring 69B Line 15, Tip
* These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 558 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Configuration
This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and
jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card and configuring
the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 138 "Analog
message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations" (page
561) shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card has no user-configurable
jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the
backplane and reports that information back to the CPU through the LAN
Link interface.

Software service changes

Individual line interface units on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting
Line card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone
Administration program LD 10.

The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the

customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change
instructions.

Analog message waiting line cards with a vintage later than NT8D09AK
provide a fixed +2 dB transmission profile change in the gain of the D/A
convertor. See Table 226 "Transmission Profile Changes" (page 560).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 559

Figure 137
Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example

This transmission profile change is used for control of end-to-end connection

loss. Control of such loss is a major element in controlling transmission
parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss
plan for the analog message waiting line card determines port-to-port loss
between an analog line card unit (port) and other IPE ports. LD 97 is used
to configure the system for port-to-port loss. See Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 97 service change
instructions.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 560 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Table 226
Transmission Profile Changes
Vintage A/D convertor gain D/A convertor gain
Previous to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 dB
AK and later –3.5 dB –0.5 dB

The analog message waiting line card brings the 16 phone lines to the IPE
backplane through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled
to the I/O panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the
MDF by 25-pair cables.

Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to the analog

message waiting line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that
used for trunk cards. A typical connection example is shown in Figure 139
"Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example"
(page 563), and Table 227 "Analog message waiting line card - backplane
pinouts" (page 561) shows the I/O pin designations at the backplane
connector. This connector is arranged as an 80-row by 2-column array of
pins. Normally, these pin positions are cabled to 50-pin connectors at the
I/O panel in the rear of each module for connection with 25-pair cables to
the cross-connect terminal.

The information in Table 227 "Analog message waiting line card - backplane
pinouts" (page 561) is provided as a reference and diagnostic aid at the
backplane, since the cabling arrangement may vary at theI/O panel. See
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and
Configuration (NN43021-310) for cable pinout information at the I/O panel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 561

Figure 138
Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations

Table 227
Analog message waiting line card - backplane pinouts
Backplane Lead Backplane Lead
pinout* designations pinout* designations
12A Line 0, Ring 12B Line 0, Tip
13A Line 1, Ring 13B Line 1, Tip
* These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 562 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Backplane Lead Backplane Lead

pinout* designations pinout* designations
14A Line 2, Ring 14B Line 2, Tip
15A Line 3, Ring 15B Line 3, Tip
16A Line 4, Ring 16B Line 4, Tip
17A Line 5, Ring 17B Line 5, Tip
18A Line 6, Ring 18B Line 6, Tip
19A Line 7, Ring 18B Line 7, Tip
62A Line 8, Ring 62B Line 8, Tip
63A Line 9, Ring 63B Line 9, Tip
64A Line 10, Ring 64B Line 10, Tip
65A Line 11, Ring 65B Line 11, Tip
66A Line 12, Ring 66B Line 12, Tip
67A Line 13, Ring 67B Line 13, Tip
68A Line 14, Ring 68B Line 14, Tip
69A Line 15, Ring 69B Line 15, Tip
* These pinouts apply to both NT8D37 and NT8D11 backplanes.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 563

Figure 139
Analog message waiting line card - typical cross connection example

Configuration
This section outlines the procedures for configuring the switches and
jumpers on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card and configuring
the system software to properly recognize the card. Figure 140 "Analog
message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations" (page
565) shows where the switches and jumper blocks are located on this board.

Jumper and switch settings

The NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line Card has no user-configurable
jumpers or switches. The card derives its address from its position in the
backplane and reports that information back to the Meridian 1 CPU through
the LAN Link interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 564 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Software service changes

Individual line interface units on the NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting
Line Card are configured using the Analog (500/2500-type) Telephone
Administration program LD 10.

The message waiting feature is enabled by entering data into the

customer data block using LD 15. See Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 10 and LD 15 service change
instructions.

Analog message waiting line cards with a vintage later than NT8D09AK
provide a fixed +2 dB transmission profile change in the gain of the D/A
convertor. See Table 228 "Transmission Profile Changes" (page 564).

This transmission profile change is used for control of end-to-end connection

loss. Control of such loss is a major element in controlling transmission
parameters such as received volume, echo, noise, and crosstalk. The loss
plan for the analog message waiting line card determines port-to-port loss
between an analog line card unit (port) and other Meridian 1 IPE ports.
LD 97 is used to configure the Meridian system for port-to-port loss. See
Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD
97 service change instructions.

Table 228
Transmission Profile Changes
Vintage A/D convertor gain D/A convertor gain
Previous to AK –3.5 dB –2.5 dB
AK and later –3.5 dB –0.5 dB

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 565

Figure 140
Analog message waiting line card - jumper block and switch locations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 566 NT8D09 Analog Message Waiting Line card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 567

NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 567)

"Physical description" (page 571)

"Functional description" (page 576)

"Operation" (page 585)

"Electrical specifications" (page 676)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 686)

"Configuration" (page 690)

"Applications" (page 710)

Introduction
Nortel is pleased to introduce the NT8D14CA Universal Trunk (XUT) card as
a replacement for the NT8D14BB card. The NT8D14CA has been modified
to add a longer loop capability for CAMA trunk applications.
The NT8D14CA comes equipped with a set of 2 jumpers for each hybrid
that should be set to the longer loop length (LL) when the trunk is used in a
CAMA application. The jumpers are numbered P35 to P50 and are set to
the shorter loop length (SL) position when it comes from the factory. For
each hybrid, both jumpers should be changed to the LL position only if used
as a CAMA trunk. Otherwise the jumpers should be left to the SL position.
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interfaces eight analog trunk lines to
the system. Each trunk interface is independently configured by software
control using the Trunk Administration program LD 14.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 568 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

You can install this card in any IPE slot.In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems
the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed in slots 1 through 10 of the
Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 in the Expansion cabinets.
Note: Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion can contain
up to four analog trunk cards.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card supports the following trunk types:
• Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks
• Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area Telephone
Service (WATS) trunks
• Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
• Tie trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop
Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)
• Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks
• Paging trunks

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake
Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.
Table 229 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 568) lists the signaling and
trunk types supported by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.

Table 229
Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types
CO/FX/
Signaling type WATS DID Tie RAN Paging CAMA
Loop start Yes No No N/A N/A Yes
(see note)
Ground start Yes No No N/A N/A No
Loop DR No Yes Yes N/A N/A No
Loop OAID No No Yes N/A N/A No
Continuous operation mode No No No Yes N/A No
Start modes (pulse and level) No No No Yes N/A No
Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.

The NT8D14 Universal trunk Card is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

(IPE) device that can be installed in either the NT8D37 IPE Module or the
NT8D11 CE/PE Module. The Universal Trunk card interfaces eight analog

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 569

trunk lines to the Meridian 1 switch. Each trunk interface is independently

configurable by software control using the Trunk Administration program
LD 14.
The universal trunk card supports the following trunk types:
• Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks
• Central office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FEX), and Wide Area Telephone
Service (WATS) trunks
• Direct inward dial (DID) trunks
• TIE trunks: two-way loop dial repeating (LDR) and two-way loop
outgoing automatic incoming dial (OAID)
• Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks
• Paging trunks

The universal trunk card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and
Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.
Table 230 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 569) lists the signaling and
trunk types supported by the universal trunk card.

Table 230
Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types
CO/FX/
Signaling type WATS DID Tie RAN Paging CAMA
Loop start Yes No No N/A N/A Yes
(see note)
Ground start Yes No No N/A N/A No
Loop DR No Yes Yes N/A N/A No
Loop OAID No No Yes N/A N/A No
Continuous operation mode No No No Yes N/A No
Start modes (pulse and level) No No No Yes N/A No
Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is an analog trunk card that can be
installed in either the Media Gateway or Media Gateway Expansion. The
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card interfaces eight analog trunk lines to the CS
1000 system. Each trunk interface is independently configured by software
control using the Trunk Administration program LD 14.
Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion can contain up to
four analog trunk cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 570 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and

4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway
Expansion.
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card supports the following trunk types:
• Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunks
• Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone
Service (WATS) trunks
• Direct Inward Dial (DID) trunks
• Tie trunks: two-way Loop Dial Repeating (LDR) and two-way loop
Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)
• Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunks
• Paging trunks

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card also supports Music, Automatic Wake
Up, and Direct Inward System Access (DISA) features.
Table 230 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 569) describes the signaling
and trunk types supported by the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card.

Table 231
Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types
CO/FX/
Signaling type WATS DID Tie RAN Paging CAMA
Loop start Yes No No N/A N/A Yes
(see note)
Ground start Yes No No N/A N/A No
Loop DR No Yes Yes N/A N/A No
Loop OAID No No Yes N/A N/A No
Continuous operation mode No No No Yes N/A No
Start modes (pulse and level) No No No Yes N/A No
Note: For incoming and outgoing service, DID trunks must be programmed as loop dial repeating.

The Universal Trunk Card has eight identical units. You configure the trunk
type of each unit independently in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14). The card
supports the following types of trunks:
• Central Office (CO), Foreign Exchange (FX), and Wide Area Telephone
Service (WATS)
• Direct Inward Dial (DID) and Direct Outward Dial (DOD)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 571

• Tie Two-way Dial Repeating (DR) and Two-way Outgoing Automatic

Incoming Dial (OAID)
• Paging (PAG)
Note: All-call zone paging is not supported.

• Recorded Announcement (RAN).

The Universal Trunk Card also supports Music, Automatic Wake Up, and
Direct Inward System Access (DISA).

Table 232 "Supported trunk type and signaling matrix" (page 571) is a matrix
of the trunk types and signaling supported by the Universal Trunk Card.

Table 232
Supported trunk type and signaling matrix
CO/FX DID/
WATS DOD Tie PAG RAN
Loop start yes no no no no
Ground start yes no no no no
Loop dial no yes yes no no
repeating
Loop OAID no no yes no no

Physical description
The trunk and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by
25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card connects to the backplane through a

160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel, which
is cabled to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. External
equipment, such as recorded announcement machines, paging equipment,
and Central Office facilities, connect to the card at the MDF. Each unit on the
card connects to the backplane through an 80-pin connector, the backplane
is cabled to the Input/Output (I/O) panel, and the I/O panel is cabled to
the cross-connect terminal. At the cross-connect terminal, each unit
connects to external apparatus, such as Central Office facilities or recorded
announcement equipment. Each unit connects to external apparatus by tip
and ring leads which carry voice, ringing, tone signaling, and battery.

See the Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and
cross-connect information.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 572 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode (LED).
See Figure 141 "Universal trunk card - faceplate" (page 573). When an
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to
five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the LED
flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and
enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously
or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

The universal trunk card mounts in any IPE slot. The trunk and common
multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by
10 in.) printed circuit board.

The universal trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin

connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel, which is
cabled to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables. External
equipment, such as recorded announcement machines, paging equipment,
and central office facilities, connect to the card at the MDF.

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and
cross-connect information.

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. See Figure 142
"Universal trunk card - faceplate" (page 574). When a universal trunk card is
installed, the LED remains lit for 2 to 5 seconds while the self-test runs. If the
self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three times and remains lit
until the card is configured and enabled in software, then the LED goes out.
If the LED flashes continuously or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

The trunk and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by

25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card connects to the backplane through

a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment, such as recorded
announcement machines, paging equipment, and Central Office facilities,
connect to the card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin
connector. See the Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large
System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and
cross-connect information.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 573

Figure 141
Universal trunk card - faceplate

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 574 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 142
Universal trunk card - faceplate

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red Light Emitting Diode
(LED). See Figure 142 "Universal trunk card - faceplate" (page 574). When
an NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is installed, the LED remains lit for two
to five seconds while the self-test runs. If the self-test is successful, the
LED flashes three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and
enabled in software, then the LED goes out. If the LED flashes continuously
or remains weakly lit, replace the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 575

In Meridian 1 Option 11C systems the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is

installed in slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50
in the Expansion cabinets.

When the card is installed, the red Light Emitting Diode (LED) on the
faceplate flashes as the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully,
the card is automatically enabled (if it is configured in software) and the LED
goes out. If the self-test fails, the LED lights steadily and remains lit. The
LED also turns on and remains lit if one or more units on the card becomes
disabled after the card is operating.

Each unit on the card connects to the backplane through an 80-pin

connector, the backplane is cabled to the Input/Output (I/O) panel, and the
I/O panel is cabled to the cross-connect terminal.

At the cross-connect terminal, each unit connects to external apparatus,

such as Central Office facilities or recorded announcement equipment.
Each unit connects to external apparatus by tip and ring leads which carry
voice, ringing, tone signaling, and battery.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 576 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 143
Universal trunk card - faceplate

Functional description
Figure 144 "NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram" (page 577) shows
a block diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Universal
Trunk card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 577

Figure 144
NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram

The Universal Trunk Card:

• allows trunk type to be configured on a per unit basis
• indicates status during an automatic or manual self-test
• provides card-identification for auto configuration, and to determine the
serial number and firmware level of the card
• converts transmission signals from analog-to-digital/digital-to-analog
• operates in A-Law or µ-Law companding modes on a per unit basis
• provides software selected terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200
ohm) on a per unit basis (1200 ohm supported for RAN trunks only)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 578 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

• provides software selected balance impedance (600 ohm or complex

impedance network) on a per unit basis
• interfaces eight PCM signals to one DS-30X timeslot in A10 format
• transmits and receives SSD signaling messages over a DS-30X
signaling channel in A10 format
• supports PCM signal loopback to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes.

Figure 145 "Universal trunk card - block diagram" (page 579) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the universal trunk card. Each
of these functions are described on the following pages.

Figure 145 "Universal trunk card - block diagram" (page 579) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk
Card. Each of these functions is described on the following pages.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 579

Figure 145
Universal trunk card - block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 580 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 146
NT8D14 Universal trunk card - block diagram

Card interfaces
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over
DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link. These
interfaces are described in "Intelligent Peripheral Equipment" (page 21).

Trunk interface units

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains eight identical and independently
configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each
unit provides impedance matching and a balanced network in a signal
transformer/analog hybrid circuit.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 581

Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.
Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two codecs are
provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband
signals to digital PCM signals. Each codec supports four trunk interface
units. The following features are common to all units on the card:
• trunk type configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per-unit basis
(minimum vintage BA)
• balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms or complex impedance network)
selectable on a per-unit basis (minimum vintage BA)
• control signals provided for RAN and paging equipment
• loopback of PCM signals received from trunk facility over DS-30X
network loop for diagnostic purposes
• switchable pads for transmission loss control

The universal trunk card contains eight identical and independently

configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each
unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal
transformer/analog hybrid circuit.
Also provided are relays for placing outgoing call signaling onto the trunk.
Signal detection circuits monitor incoming call signaling. Two Codecs are
provided for performing A/D and D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband
signals to digital PCM signals. Each Codec supports four trunk interface
units. The following features are common to all units on the card:
• trunk type configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohm) selectable on a per unit basis
(minimum vintage BA)
• balance impedance (600 or 900 ohm or complex impedance network)
selectable on a per unit basis (minimum vintage BA)
• control signals provided for RAN and paging equipment
• loopback of PCM signals received from trunk facility over DS-30X
network loop for diagnostic purposes
• switchable pads for transmission loss control

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card passes voice and signaling data over
DS-30X loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link.
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card contains eight identical and
independently configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits).
Each unit provides impedance matching and a balanced network in a signal
transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 582 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor
incoming call signaling. Two CODECs are provided for performing A/D and
D/A conversion of trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
Each Codec supports four trunk interface units. The following features are
common to all units on the card:
• trunk type configurable on a per unit basis
• terminating impedance (600 or 900 ohms) selectable on a per-unit basis
(minimum vintage BA)
• balance impedance (600 or 900 ohms or complex impedance network)
selectable on a per-unit basis (minimum vintage BA)
• control signals provided for RAN and paging equipment
• loopback of PCM signals received from trunk facility over DS-30X
network loop for diagnostic purposes
• switchable pads for transmission loss control

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,
and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,

and signaling and control circuits on the universal trunk card.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN interface,

and signaling and control circuits on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card.

Microcontroller
The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls
the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the
controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration through the card LAN

link:
— programming of the codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 583

— programming of input/output interface control circuits for

administration of trunk interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission pad settings

The universal trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the controller card. The
microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CPU via the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration via the card LAN link:
— programming of the Codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of trunk interface unit operation
— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission pad settings

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card contains a microcontroller that controls

the internal operation of the card and the serial card LAN link to the
controller card. The microcontroller controls the following:
• reporting to the CE CPU through the card LAN link:
— card identification (card type, vintage, and serial number)
— firmware version
— self-test status
— programmed configuration status

• receipt and implementation of card configuration through the card LAN

link:
— programming of the Codecs
— enabling/disabling of individual units or entire card
— programming of input/output interface control circuits for
administration of trunk interface unit operation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 584 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

— maintenance diagnostics
— transmission pad settings

The Universal Trunk Card is equipped with a microprocessor which controls

card operation. The microprocessor also provides the communication
function for the card.
The Universal Trunk Card communicates with the Controller Card through a
serial communication link. Features provided through the link include:
• card-identification
• self-test status reporting
• status reporting to the Controller Card
• maintenance diagnostics

Card LAN interface

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment CPU over a
dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment CPU over a

dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link. The card
LAN link is described in "SDI function" (page 1118).

Maintenance data is exchanged with the common equipment CPU over a

dedicated asynchronous serial network called the Card LAN link.

Signaling and control

The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk card works with
the CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from
the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status
information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control
portion of the card provides the means for analog loop terminations to
establish, supervise, and take down call connections.

The signaling and control portion of the card provides circuits that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the
system CPU to operate trunk interface circuits during calls. The circuits
receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming
call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

The signaling and control portion of the card provides circuits that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections. These circuits work with the
system CPU to operate trunk interface circuits during calls. The circuits
receive outgoing call signaling messages from the CPU and return incoming
call status information over the DS-30X network loop.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 585

The signaling and control portion of the Universal Trunk Card works with
the CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from
the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns status
information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control
portion of the card provides the means for analog loop terminations to
establish, supervise, and take down call connections.

Signaling interface
All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long. The messages are
transmitted in channel zero of the DS-30X in A10 format.

Configuration information for the Universal Trunk card is downloaded from

the CPU at power-up or by command from maintenance programs. Eleven
configuration messages are sent. Three messages are sent to the card
to configure the make/break ratio and A-Law or µ-Law operation. One
message is sent to each unit to configure the trunk characteristics.

All trunk signaling messages are three bytes long. The messages are
transmitted in channel zero of the DS-30X in A10 format.

Configuration information for the Universal Trunk Card is downloaded from

the CPU at power-up or by command from maintenance programs. Eleven
configuration messages are sent. Three messages are sent to the card
to configure the make/break ratio and A-Law or µ-Law operation. One
message is sent to each unit to configure the trunk characteristics.

Operation
Administrators can assign optional applications, features, and signaling
arrangements for each unit on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card through
the Trunk Administration LD 14 and Trunk Route Administration LD 16
programs or jumper strap settings on the card.

The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit
on the universal trunk card are assigned through the Trunk Administration
LD 14 and Trunk Route Administration LD 16 programs and/or jumper strap
settings on the card.

See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for

detailed information on assigning features and services to trunks.

Administrators can assign optional applications, features, and signaling

arrangements for each unit on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card through
the Trunk Administration LD 14 and Trunk Route Administration LD 16
programs or jumper strap settings on the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 586 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Loop start operation

Loop start operation is configured in software and implemented in the card
through software download messages. When the card is idle, it provides a
high impedance toward the CO for isolation and ac (ringing) detection.

Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the

card through software download messages. When the universal trunk
card is idle, it provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and
AC (ringing) detection.

Loop start operation is configured in software and implemented in the card

through software download messages. When the card is idle, it provides a
high impedance toward the CO for isolation and ac (ringing) detection.

Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the card

through software download messages. When the Universal Trunk is idle, it
provides a high impedance toward the CO for isolation and AC detection.

Incoming calls
The alerting signal into the System is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by the
CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the System
places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO.
See Figure 147 "Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS"
(page 587) and Figure 148 "Loop start call connection sequence - incoming
call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 588).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 587

Figure 147
Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

The alerting signal into the Meridian 1 is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by

the CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the
Meridian 1 places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads
toward the CO. See Figure 153 "Loop start call states - incoming call from
CO/FX/WATS" (page 594) and Figure 154 "Loop start call connection
sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 595).

The alerting signal into the CS 1000 is 20 Hz (nominal) ringing sent by

the CO. When an incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the
CS 1000 places a low-resistance dc loop across the tip and ring leads
toward the CO. See Figure 149 "Loop start call states - incoming call" (page
589) and Figure 150 "Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call"
(page 590).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 588 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 148
Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

The alerting signal is 20 Hz ringing sent by North American CO. When an

incoming call is answered, ringing is tripped when the trunk places a low
resistance DC loop towards the CO.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 589

Figure 149
Loop start call states - incoming call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 590 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 150
Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to
place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO.
See Figure 151 "Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS"
(page 591) and Figure 152 "Ground start call connection sequence -
incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 592). When the CO detects the
low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits.When the CO is ready

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 591

to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward address signaling is then

applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or
DTMF tones.

Figure 151
Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 592 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 152
Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

For outgoing calls from the Meridian 1, software sends an outgoing seizure
message to place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads
toward the CO (see Figure 155 "Loop start call states - outgoing call to
CO/FX/WATS" (page 596) and Figure 156 "Loop start call connection
sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 597)). When the CO
detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive digits.When the CO

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 593

is ready to receive digits, it returns dial tone. Outward address signaling is

then applied from the Meridian 1 in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses
or DTMF tones.

For outgoing calls, the software sends an outgoing seizure message to

place a low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads toward the CO.
See Figure 159 "Ground start call states - incoming call" (page 601) and
Figure 160 "Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call" (page
602). When the CO detects the low-resistance loop, it prepares to receive
digits.When the CO is ready to receive digits, it returns a dial tone. Outward
address signaling is then applied from the CS 1000 in the form of loop
(interrupting) dial pulses or DTMF tones.

For outgoing calls from a telephone set or attendant console, software

sends an outgoing seizure message to place a low resistance loop across
the tip and ring leads towards the CO. When the CO is ready to receive
digits, it returns dial tone. The outward address signaling is applied from the
system in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses.

Polarity-sensitive/-insensitive packs feature The CS 1000 software

provides the polarity-sensitive/polarity-insensitive (PSP and PIP) packs
feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration for loop start
and ground start operation.

On trunks equipped with far-end answer supervision, the PSP class of

service is enabled in software and causes call-duration recording in CDR
records to begin only upon receipt of answer supervision from the far-end.

For trunks not equipped with answer supervision, the PIP class of service
is enabled and call-duration recording begins immediately upon near-end
trunk seizure. The PSP and PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk
Administration program LD 14.

The Meridian 1 software provides the Polarity-Sensitive/Insensitive Packs

(PSP and PIP) feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call duration
for loop start and ground start operation.

On trunks equipped with far-end answer supervision, the PSP class of

service is enabled in software and causes call-duration recording in CDR
records to begin only upon receipt of answer supervision from the far-end.

For trunks not equipped with answer supervision, the PIP class of service
is enabled and call-duration recording begins immediately upon near-end
trunk seizure.

The PSP and PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk Administration
program (LD 14).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 594 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 153
Loop start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

The CS 1000 software provides the polarity-sensitive/polarity-insensitive

(PSP and PIP) packs feature for the accurate recording of outgoing call
duration for loop start and ground start operation. On trunks equipped with
far-end answer supervision, the PSP class of service is enabled in software
and causes call-duration recording in CDR records to begin only upon
receipt of answer supervision from the far-end. For trunks not equipped with
answer supervision, the PIP class of service is enabled and call-duration
recording begins immediately upon near-end trunk seizure. The PSP and
PIP classes of service are enabled in the Trunk Administration program
LD 14.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 595

Figure 154
Loop start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 596 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 155
Loop start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 597

Figure 156
Loop start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

Ground start operation

Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through
software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the
CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring
lead.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 598 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through

software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the
CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring
lead.

Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through

software download messages. In the idle state, the tip conductor from the
CO is open and a high-resistance negative battery is present on the ring
lead.

Ground start operation is configured in software and implemented through

software download messages. In an idle state, the tip conductor from the
CO is open and a high resistance negative battery is present on the tip
of the trunk.

Incoming calls
In an incoming call, after ground is detected on the tip, the universal trunk
card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an
attendant and tripping the ringing. When the attendant answers, a low
resistance is placed across the tip and ring conductors, which trips CO
ringing and establishes a speech path. See Figure 157 "Ground start call
states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 599) and Figure 158
"Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS"
(page 600).

In an incoming call, after ground is detected on the tip, the universal trunk
card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an
attendant and tripping the ringing. When the attendant answers, a low
resistance is placed across the tip and ring conductors, which trips CO
ringing and establishes a speech path.

See Figure 161 "Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS"
(page 604) and Figure 162 "Ground start call connection sequence -
incoming call from CO/FX/WATS" (page 606).

In an incoming call, after ground is detected on the tip, the universal trunk
card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an
attendant and tripping the ringing. When the attendant answers, a low
resistance is placed across the tip and ring conductors, which trips CO
ringing and establishes a speech path. See Figure 159 "Ground start
call states - incoming call" (page 601) and Figure 160 "Ground start call
connection sequence - incoming call" (page 602).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 599

Figure 157
Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 600 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 158
Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 601

Figure 159
Ground start call states - incoming call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 602 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 160
Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call

Reverse-wiring compensation The CS 1000 software includes a feature

for detecting reverse wiring (connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to
the far-end ring and tip leads) on ground start trunks with far-end answer
supervision.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 603

Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring

compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead.
Since the software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets
the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the
interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512
milliseconds, the software assumes a far-end disconnect. This causes the
call to be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed.

The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows. If an

apparent disconnect takes place immediately after the first ringing signal,
the software time stamps the event and temporarily remove the call from
the console loop key.

If another such ringing/disconnect event occurs during the No Ringing

Detector (NRD) time, the trunk is considered "possibly reverse-wired"
and a threshold counter starts. Calls on trunks identified as possibly
reverse-wired are presented to the attendant during the initial ring, removed,
and then continuously presented after the second ring. If a call on a
possibly reverse-wired trunk is abandoned before the attendant answers, it
is disconnected after the NRD timer expires.

A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switched by the software

to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place
on a call-by-call basis. So if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes
reverse-wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse-wired
and the threshold count begins.

If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the
trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired." Once identified as positively
reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a
reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears
the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented.

Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of
attendant answer.
Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms)
disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground
detector.

The Meridian 1 software includes a feature for detecting reverse wiring

(connection of near-end tip and ring leads to far-end ring and tip leads,
respectively) on ground start trunks with far-end answer supervision.

Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring

compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring
lead. Since software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 604 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the
interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512
milliseconds, software assumes far-end disconnect. This causes the call to
be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed.

The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows. If an apparent

disconnect takes place immediately after the first ringing signal, the software
time stamps the event and temporarily removes the call from the console
loop key.

If another such ringing/disconnect event occurs during the No Ringing

Detector (NRD) time, the trunk is considered "possibly reverse wired" and
a threshold counter is incremented. Calls on trunks identified as possibly
reverse wired is presented to the attendant during the initial ring, removed,
and then continuously presented after the second ring. If a call on a
possibly reverse-wired trunk is abandoned before the attendant answers, it
is disconnected after the NRD timer expires.

Figure 161
Ground start call states - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 605

Trunks identified as possibly reverse wired are switched by software to loop

start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place on a
call-by-call basis. So if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes reverse
wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse wired and the
threshold count begins.

If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the
trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired." When identified as positively
reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a
reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears
the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented.

The CS 1000 software includes a feature for detecting reverse wiring

(connection of the near-end tip and ring leads to the far-end ring and tip
leads) on ground start trunks with far-end answer supervision.

Ordinarily, an incoming call on a reverse-wired trunk without reverse-wiring

compensation presents ringing on the tip lead rather than on the ring lead.
Since the software expects to see a ground on the tip lead, it interprets
the end of the first ringing signal as a switchhook flash. But since the
interval between ringing signals exceeds the switchhook flash time of 512
milliseconds, the software assumes a far-end disconnect. This causes the
call to be presented to a console loop key and then immediately removed.

The reverse-wiring compensation feature operates as follows. If an

apparent disconnect takes place immediately after the first ringing signal,
the software time stamps the event and temporarily remove the call from the
console loop key. If another such ringing/disconnect event occurs during
the No Ringing Detector (NRD) time, the trunk is considered "possibly
reverse-wired" and a threshold counter starts. Calls on trunks identified as
possibly reverse-wired are presented to the attendant during the initial ring,
removed, and then continuously presented after the second ring. If a call on
a possibly reverse-wired trunk is abandoned before the attendant answers,
it is disconnected after the NRD timer expires.

A trunk identified as possibly reverse-wired is switched by the software

to loop start processing after the second ring. This switching takes place
on a call-by-call basis. So if a previously correctly wired trunk becomes
reverse-wired, the next incoming call is marked as possibly reverse-wired
and the threshold count begins.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 606 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 162
Ground start call connection sequence - incoming call from CO/FX/WATS

If the threshold count exceeds its limit, an error message is printed and the
trunk is registered as "positively reverse wired." Once identified as positively
reverse wired, the call is presented continuously from the first ring. When a
reverse-wired trunk becomes correctly wired, the first subsequent call clears
the threshold counter and normal ground start processing is implemented.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 607

Note 1: The far-end can reverse battery and ground upon receipt of
attendant answer.
Note 2: The near-end provides a high-impedance (>150k ohms)
disconnect signal of at least 50 ms before reconnecting the ground
detector.

Outgoing calls
For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO
responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground
is detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip
and ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring. Addressing is
then applied from the system in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses
or DTMF tones. See Figure 163 "Ground start call states - outgoing call to
CO/FX/WATS" (page 608) and Figure 164 "Ground start call connection
sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 609).

The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature

must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with
ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation in this
section for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.

This biases the tip ground detector OFF until the CO places ground on
the tip at seizure. After the tip ground is detected, the Universal Trunk
Card scans for a ringing detection signal before presenting the call to an
attendant and tripping the ringing. A low resistance is placed across the tip
and ring conductors and a speech path is established.

For outgoing calls, the trunk provides ground to the ring lead. The CO
responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground is
detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and
ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring. Addressing is then
applied from the Meridian 1 in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or
DTMF tones. See Figure 165 "Ground start call states - outgoing call to
CO/FX/WATS" (page 610) and Figure 166 "Ground start call connection
sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS" (page 611).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 608 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 163
Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 609

Figure 164
Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature

must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with
ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation for a
more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 610 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 165
Ground start call states - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 611

Figure 166
Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call to CO/FX/WATS

For outgoing calls, the trunk provides a ground to the ring lead. The CO
responds by grounding the tip and returning dial tone. After the tip ground is
detected by the card, a low-resistance path is placed between the tip and
ring leads and the ground is removed from the ring. Addressing is then
applied from the CS 1000 in the form of loop (interrupting) dial pulses or

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 612 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

DTMF tones. See Figure 167 "Ground start call states - outgoing call" (page
612) and Figure 168 "Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing
call" (page 613).

The Polarity-Sensitive/Polarity-Insensitive Packs (PSP and PIP) feature

must be set to provide for proper outgoing call-duration recording with
ground start operation. Refer to the description of loop start operation in this
section for a more complete discussion of PSP and PIP.

Figure 167
Ground start call states - outgoing call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 613

Figure 168
Ground start call connection sequence - outgoing call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 614 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 169
Loop start call states - outgoing call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 615

Figure 170
Loop start call connection sequence

Direct inward dial operation

Incoming calls
An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip
and ring leads. See Figure 171 "DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming
call from CO" (page 617) and Figure 172 "DID trunk, loop DR call connection
sequence - incoming call from CO" (page 618).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 616 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the
called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground
on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party
release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low-resistance loop, at
which time normal battery and ground are restored at the near-end. This
also applies to incoming tie trunk calls from a far-end PBX.

Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial,
or wink start.

An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip
and ring leads. See Figure 173 "DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming
call from CO" (page 619) and Figure 174 "DID trunk, loop DR call connection
sequence - incoming call from CO" (page 620).

Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then presented from the CO. When the
called party answers, the universal trunk card reverses battery and ground
on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The trunk is arranged for first party
release. The CO releases the trunk by removing the low-resistance loop,
at which time normal battery and ground are restored at the near-end.
The operation represented in Figure 173 "DID trunk, loop DR call states -
incoming call from CO" (page 619) and Figure 174 "DID trunk, loop DR call
connection sequence - incoming call from CO" (page 620) also applies to
incoming TIE trunk calls from a far-end PBX.

Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial,
or wink start.

An incoming call from the CO places a low-resistance loop across the tip
and ring leads. See Figure 185 "DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming
call" (page 633) and Figure 186 "DID trunk, loop DR call connection
sequence - incoming call" (page 634). Dial pulses or DTMF tones are then
presented from the CO. When the called party answers, the universal trunk
card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO. The
trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk by
removing the low-resistance loop, at which time normal battery and ground
are restored at the near-end. This also applies to incoming tie trunk calls
from a far-end PBX.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 617

Figure 171
DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO

Note: The near-end can be configured for immediate start, delay dial,
or wink start.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 618 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 172
DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 619

Figure 173
DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call from CO

An incoming call from the CO places a low resistance loop across the tip and
ring leads. Dial pulses or DTMF signals are then presented from the CO.
When the call is presented and the terminating party answers, the Universal
Trunk Card reverses battery and ground on the tip and ring leads to the CO.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 620 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 174
DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call from CO

The trunk is arranged for first party release. The CO releases the trunk
by removing the low resistance loop and normal battery and ground are
restored at the system.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 621

Two-way, loop dial repeating, TIE trunk operation

Incoming calls
In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a
low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 175 "Two-way,
loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page
622) and Figure 176 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence
- incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 623).

This causes a current to flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk
circuit. Address signaling is then applied by the far-end in the form of DTMF
tones or dial pulses. When the called party answers, an answer supervision
signal is sent by the software, causing the System to reverse battery and
ground on the tip and ringleads to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is
initiated by opening the loop while the near-end disconnect is initiated
by restoring normal battery and ground. The operation represented in
Figure 175 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from
far-end PBX" (page 622) and Figure 176 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call
connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 623) also
applies to incoming DID trunk calls from a CO.

Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, the party at

the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a

low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 177 "Two-way,
loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page
624) and Figure 178 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence
- incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 625).

This causes a current to flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk
circuit. Address signaling is then applied by the far-end in the form of DTMF
tones or dial pulses. When the called party answers, an answer supervision
signal is sent by software, causing the Meridian 1 to reverse battery and
ground on tip and ring to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is initiated by
opening the loop while near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring normal
battery and ground. The operation represented in Figure 177 "Two-way,
loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page
624) and Figure 178 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence
- incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 625) also applies to incoming DID
trunk calls from a CO.

Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, the party at

the far-end hangs up, after recognizing near-end call termination.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 622 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 175
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 623

Figure 176
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 624 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 177
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 625

Figure 178
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

In an incoming call configuration, the far-end initiates a call by placing a

low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. See Figure 187 "Two-way,
loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page
635) and Figure 188 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence
- incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 636) on. This causes a current to
flow through the battery feed resistors in the trunk circuit. Address signaling
is then applied by the far-end in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 626 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

When the called party answers, an answer supervision signal is sent by the
software, causing the CS 1000 to reverse battery and ground on the tip and
ringleads to the far-end. Far-end disconnect is initiated by opening the loop
while the near-end disconnect is initiated by restoring normal battery and
ground. The operation represented in Figure 187 "Two-way, loop DR, tie
trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 635) and Figure 188
"Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from
far-end PBX" (page 636) also applies to incoming DID trunk calls from a CO.

Note: Where no near-end answer supervision is provided, the party at

the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call termination.

Outgoing calls
In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is
connected to an existing PBX by a tie trunk. See Figure 179 "Two-way, loop
DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 627) and
Figure 180 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence -
outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 628).

An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a
low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward addressing is
then applied from the System in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. If
answer supervision is provided by the far-end, reverse battery and ground
on the tip and ring leads are returned. The operation represented in Figure
181 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX"
(page 629) and Figure 182 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection
sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 630) also applies to
outgoing calls on a DID trunk.

Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at

the near-end hangs up, after recognizing far-end call termination.

In an outgoing call configuration, the universal trunk card is connected

to another PBX by a TIE trunk. See Figure 183 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE
trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 631) and Figure 184
"Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to
far-end PBX" (page 632).

An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a
low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward addressing is
then applied from the Meridian 1 in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. If
answer supervision is provided by the far-end, reverse battery and ground
on tip and ring is returned. The operation represented in Figure 183
"Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX"
(page 631) and Figure 184 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection
sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 632) also applies to
outgoing calls on a DID trunk.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 627

Figure 179
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at

the near-end hangs up, after recognizing far-end call termination.

In an outgoing call configuration, the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is

connected to an existing PBX by a tie trunk. See Figure 189 "Two-way,
loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 637).
An outgoing call from the near-end seizes the trunk facility by placing a
low-resistance loop across the tip and ring leads. Outward addressing is
then applied from the CS 1000 in the form of DTMF tones or dial pulses. If
answer supervision is provided by the far-end, reverse battery and ground
on the tip and ring leads are returned. The operation represented in Figure
189 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX"

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 628 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

(page 637) and Figure 190 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection
sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 638) also applies to
outgoing calls on a DID trunk.

Note: Where no far-end answer supervision is provided, the party at

the near-end hangs up after recognizing far-end call termination.

Figure 180
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 629

Figure 181
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 630 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 182
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 631

Figure 183
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 632 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 184
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 633

Figure 185
DID trunk, loop DR call states - incoming call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 634 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 186
DID trunk, loop DR call connection sequence - incoming call

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 635

Figure 187
Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 636 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 188
Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 637

Figure 189
Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 638 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 190
Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Senderized operation for DID and two-way loop DR trunks

Incoming calls
If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode:
Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned
at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See
Figure 191 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through
senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/" (page 640).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 639

Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after
ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse towards office
occurs one second later.

For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end starts pulsing
after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum).

For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook
or battery/ground reversal) is returned by the System after receipt of the
seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure
and ends (go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384
ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting
the go signal starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms,
minimum). Stop/go signaling, in addition to the signaling function, serves as
an integrity check to help identify a malfunctioning trunk.

If required, the near-end can be configured to provide pseudo-answer

supervision at the expiration of the end-of-dial timer. End-of-dial timer
settings are made at the EOD (non-DTMF) or ODT (DTMF) prompts in the
Trunk Route Administration program LD 16.

The operation represented in Figure 192 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call
states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/"
(page 641) also applies to incoming calls on a DID trunk from a CO.

If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can be operated in any mode:

immediate start (IMM), delay dial (DDL) or wink (WNK) start, as assigned at
the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Figure 194
"Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized,
tandem PBX from a CO/FX/" (page 645).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 640 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 191
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a
CO/FX/WATS trunk

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 641

Figure 192
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a
CO/FX/WATS trunk

Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards the office occurs
after ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse toward the
office occurs one second later.

For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end may start
pulsing after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 642 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or
battery/ground reversal) is returned by the Meridian 1 after receipt of the
seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure
and ends (go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384
ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting
the go signal may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms,
minimum). Stop/go signaling, in addition to the signaling function, serves as
an integrity check to help identify a malfunctioning trunk.

If required, the near-end can be configured to provide pseudo-answer

supervision at expiration of the end-of-dial timer. End-of-dial timer settings
are made at the EOD (non-DTMF) or ODT (DTMF) prompts in the Trunk
Route Administration program LD 16.

The operation represented in Figure 194 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call
states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a CO/FX/"
(page 645) also applies to incoming calls on a DID trunk from a CO.

If the far-end is senderized, the near-end can operate in any mode:

Immediate Start (IMM), Delay Dial (DDL) or Wink (WNK) start, as assigned
at the STRI prompt in the Trunk Administration program LD 14. See Figure
196 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a
senderized, tandem PBX from a CO" (page 647).

Note: If a ground start trunk, the outpulse towards office occurs after
ground detection. If a loop start trunk, the outpulse towards office
occurs one second later.

For immediate start, following the seizure signal, the far-end starts pulsing
after the standard delay (normally 65 ms, minimum).

For delay dial or wink start modes, stop/go signaling (off hook/on hook or
battery/ground reversal) is returned by the CS 1000 after receipt of the
seizure signal. The delay dial (stop) signal begins immediately upon seizure
and ends (go signal) 384 ms later. The wink start (stop) signal begins 384
ms after seizure and ends (go signal) 256 ms later. The far-end detecting
the go signal starts pulsing after the standard delay (normally 55 ms,
minimum). Stop/go signaling, in addition to the signaling function, serves as
an integrity check to help identify a malfunctioning trunk.

If required, the near-end can be configured to provide pseudo-answer

supervision at the expiration of the end-of-dial timer. End-of-dial timer
settings are made at the EOD (non-DTMF) or ODT (DTMF) prompts in the
Trunk Route Administration program LD 16.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 643

The operation represented in Figure 196 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call
states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX from a CO" (page
647) also applies to incoming calls on a DID trunk from a CO.

Outgoing calls
When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal
from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is
ready to receive digits. See Figure 193 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call
states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS" (page 644).

Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration

of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided,
the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call
termination.

When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal
from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is
ready to receive digits. See Figure 195 "Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call
states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS" (page 646).

Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided at the near-end at

expiration of end-of-dial timer.Where no far-end answer supervision is
provided, the party at the far-end hangs up, after recognizing near-end
call termination.

When DDL or WNK mode is used, outgoing calls require a stop/go signal
from the far-end so that the near-end cannot outpulse until the far-end is
ready to receive digits. See Figure 197 "Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call
states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO" (page 648).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 644 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 193
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 645

Figure 194
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - incoming call through senderized, tandem PBX from a
CO/FX/WATS trunk

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 646 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 195
Two-way, loop DR, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO/FX/WATS

Note: Pseudo-answer supervision is provided by near-end at expiration

of end-of-dial timer. Where no far-end answer supervision is provided,
the party at the far-end hangs up after recognizing near-end call
termination.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 647

Figure 196
Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - incoming call through a senderized, tandem PBX
from a CO

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 648 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 197
Two-way, loop DR, tie trunk call states - outgoing call through far-end PBX to CO

Outgoing automatic, incoming dial operation

Incoming calls
When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is seized by the far-end on an
incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads.
Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or
loop pulses, or DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the far-end when
the loop is opened. When the near-end detects an open loop, it returns to
a normal state.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 649

See Figure 198 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call
from far-end PBX" (page 650) and Figure 199 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE
trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page
651).

When the universal trunk card is seized by the far-end on an incoming call,
a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Addressing
is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop pulses, or
DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the far-end when the loop is opened.
When the near-end detects an open loop, it returns to a normal state.

See Figure 202 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call
from far-end PBX" (page 654) and Figure 204 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE
trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page
656).

When the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is seized by the far-end on an

incoming call, a low-resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads.
Addressing is then sent by the far-end in the form of battery-ground or loop
pulses, or DTMF tones. The trunk is released at the far-end when the loop
is opened. When the near-end detects an open loop, it returns to a normal
state. See Figure 203 "Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming
call from far-end PBX" (page 655) and Figure 207 "Two-way, loop OAID, tie
trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX" (page 659).

When the Universal Trunk is seized by the far end on an incoming call, a
low resistance loop is placed across the tip and ring leads. Dial pulses are
sent by the far end by interrupting the loop current. The trunk is released
at the far end when the loop is opened. When it detects an open loop, the
near end reverts to a normal state.

Outgoing calls
When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places the
battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the
seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and
ring leads.

See Figure 200 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to
far-end PBX" (page 652) and Figure 201 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk
call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 653).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 650 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 198
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places battery

on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the seizure. The
far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring leads.

See Figure 205 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to
far-end PBX" (page 657) and Figure 206 "Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk
call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 658).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 651

Figure 199
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 652 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 200
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the near-end places the

battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far-end of the
seizure. The far-end responds with a low resistance across the tip and ring
leads. See Figure 208 "Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - outgoing
call to far-end PBX" (page 660) and Figure 209 "Two-way, loop OAID, tie
trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX" (page 661).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 653

Figure 201
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 654 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 202
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

When seized as a dial-selected outgoing trunk, the Universal Trunk places

battery on the tip and ground on the ring. This alerts the far end of the
seizure. The far end responds with a low resistance across the tip and
ring leads.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 655

Figure 203
Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 656 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 204
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 657

Figure 205
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 658 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 206
Two-way, loop OAID, TIE trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 659

Figure 207
Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - incoming call from far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 660 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 208
Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call states - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 661

Figure 209
Two-way, loop OAID, tie trunk call connection sequence - outgoing call to far-end PBX

Recorded announcement trunk operation

Note: Refer to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) for information
on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a RAN machine
or a given trunk.

When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit

is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine.
Announcement machines must be compatible with RAN trunks. Use the
manufacturer’s instructions to set up the Announcement machines.
Each trunk unit provides the following for operation with RAN equipment:
• pulse start, level start, or continuous operation modes

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 662 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

• selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for
interface with a low-impedance (2 or 4 ohms) source
• connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine
channel
Note: Refer to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) for
information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a
RAN machine or a given trunk.

When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit

is connected to a customer-provided-recorded announcement machine.
Announcement machines must be compatible with Meridian 1 RAN trunks.
Use the manufacturer’s instructions to set up the Announcement machines.
Each trunk unit provides the following for operation with RAN equipment:
• pulse start, level start, or continuous operation modes
• selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for
interface with a low-impedance (2- or 4-ohm) source
• connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine
channel
Note: Refer to "Multi-Channel RAN modes" (page 671) for
information on Multi-Channel RAN modes, which are not linked to a
RAN machine or a given trunk.

When configured for Recorded Announcement (RAN) operation, a trunk unit

is connected to a customer-provided recorded announcement machine.
Announcement machines must be compatible with CS 1000 RAN trunks.
Use the manufacturer’s instructions to set up the Announcement machines.
Each trunk unit provides the following for operation with RAN equipment:
• pulse start, level start, or continuous operation modes
• selectable termination of tip and ring leads into 600 or 900 ohms for
interface with a low-impedance (2 or 4 ohms) source
• connection of up to 24 trunk units to a single announcement machine
channel

In this mode of operation, the Universal Trunk is connected to a digital

announcement machine. The announcer provides a number of channels
and operates in a continuous mode, generating 150-300 ms common control
pulses every 7 or 14 seconds (at the start of the announcement period). A
number of trunks can be connected to one announcement machine.

The Universal Trunk Card does not support the Code-A-Phone 210DC
announcement recorder.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 663

Recorded announcement machines

Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages
that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most
commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally,
although some drum and tape units are still in service.

An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each

channel may be prerecorded with a different message. Some announcement
machines also provide a Special Information Tone (SIT) capability. These
tones are inserted at the beginning of intercept messages such as "Your call
cannot be completed as dialed. Please check the number and try again."

Figure 210 "Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk

card (typical)" (page 664) shows a typical connection from a single
announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 664 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 210
Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical)

Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages

that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most
commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally,
although some drum and tape units are still in service.

An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each

channel can be prerecorded with a different message. Some announcement
machines also provide a Special Information Tone (SIT) capability. These
tones are inserted at the beginning of intercept messages (such as "Your call
cannot be completed as dialed. Please check the number and try again.").

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 665

Figure 211 "Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk

Card (typical)" (page 666) shows a typical connection from a single
announcement machine channel to unit 0 on a universal trunk card installed
in slot 0 in an NT8D37 IPE Module.

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information.

Recorded announcement machines store prerecorded voice messages

that are played back to the trunk units to which they are connected. Most
commercially available announcement machines store recordings digitally,
although some drum and tape units are still in service.

An announcement machine can provide one or more channels and each

channel may be prerecorded with a different message. Some announcement
machines also provide a Special Information Tone (SIT) capability. These
tones are inserted at the beginning of intercept messages such as "Your call
cannot be completed as dialed. Please check the number and try again."

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 666 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 211
Connecting RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)

RAN modes of operation

Figure 212 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 668) shows
the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating
modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in
Figure 212 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 668) are
typical.

Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line
to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line. For
pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the
announcer ST+ line only, and leave the announcer B line unconnected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 667

Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled

to a single announcer channel.

Figure 213 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 669) shows
the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating
modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in
the figure are typical.

Figure 214 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 670) shows
the relationship of control signals to message playback for the operating
modes available in announcement machines. The signal names shown in
the figure are typical.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 668 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 212
RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 669

Figure 213
RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 670 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 214
RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)

Note 1: For continuous operation mode, connect the trunk unit MB line
to the announcer B line only, and ground the announcer ST+ line. For
pulse start or level start modes, connect the trunk unit MB line to the
announcer ST+ line only, and leave the announcer B line unconnected.
Note 2: A maximum of 24 universal trunk card units can be paralleled
to a single announcer channel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 671

Multi-Channel RAN modes

In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one
RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own
dedicated RAN channel on a physical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN
routes do not support the cross connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk
ports together so that several callers hear the same RAN message.

Multi-channel machine types - Continuous Mode Multi-Channel (MCON),

Pulse Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MPUL) and Level Start/Stop Multi-Channel
(MLVL) – are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. All trunks
belonging to the RAN route are considered independent. RAN trunks and
RAN machine channels are connected one-to-one. If one RAN trunk is
detected as faulty, then all other trunks are not impacted.

For the RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded
announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal received from
the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16.

In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one

RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own
dedicated RAN channel on a physical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN
routes do not support the cross-connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk
ports together so that several callers hear the same RAN message.

The new multi-channel machine types – continuous Mode Multi-Channel

(MCON), Pulse Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MPUL) and Level Start/Stop
Multi-Channel (MLVL) – are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk.
All trunks belonging to the RAN route are considered independent. RAN
trunks and RAN machine channels are connected one to one. If one RAN
trunk is detected as faulty, then all other trunks are not impacted.

For these new RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded
announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal received from
the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16.

In Multi-Channel RAN, multiple RAN channels can be configured within one

RAN trunk route. In a Multi-Channel RAN route, each trunk has its own
dedicated RAN channel on a physical RAN machine. Multi-Channel RAN
routes do not support the cross connecting (daisy chains) of multiple trunk
ports together so that several callers hear the same RAN message.

Multi-channel machine types – Continuous Mode Multi-Channel (MCON),

Pulse Start/Stop Multi-Channel (MPUL) and Level Start/Stop Multi-Channel
(MLVL) – are not linked to a RAN machine or a given trunk. All trunks
belonging to the RAN route are considered independent. RAN trunks and
RAN machine channels are connected one-to-one. If one RAN trunk is
detected as faulty, then all other trunks are not impacted.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 672 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

For the RAN machine types, the maximum length of the recorded
announcement is two hours. The meaning of a ground signal received from
the RAN machine (play or idle) is configured in LD 16.

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control Mode (minimum vintage BA) A RAN

mode of operation is available called "Multi-Channel Level Start/Control
Mode." This mode enables provisioning of multiple RAN channels for
a RAN route (playing the same message independently on demand)
cross-connected one-to-one to each RAN trunk in a multi-channel level start
RAN route. Do not bridge RAN trunks in a multi-channel RAN route.

The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control mode, using the following response:

RTYP = MLSS

Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14.

Refer to "Programming RAN trunks" (page 675) and to Software

Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on
service change programs.

A RAN mode of operation is available called "Multi-Channel Level

Start/Control Mode." This mode allows provisioning of multiple RAN
channels for a RAN route (playing the same message independently on
demand) cross-connected one-for-one to each RAN trunk in a multi-channel
level start RAN route. Do not bridge RAN trunks in a multi-channel RAN
route.

The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control mode, using the following response:

RTYP = MLSS

Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14.

Refer to "Programming RAN trunks" (page 675) and to Software

Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for more detailed
instructions on service change programs.

A RAN mode of operation is available called "Multi-Channel Level

Start/Control Mode." This mode enables provisioning of multiple RAN
channels for a RAN route (playing the same message independently on
demand) cross-connected one-to-one to each RAN trunk in a multi-channel
level start RAN route. Do not bridge RAN trunks in a multi-channel RAN
route.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 673

The Route Data Block LD 16 is used to configure a RAN route in

Multi-Channel Level Start/Control mode, using the following response:
RTYP = MLSS.

Trunk members are provisioned in the Trunk Data Block LD 14.

Refer to "Programming RAN trunks" (page 675) and to Software

Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for instructions on
service change programs.

Continuous operation mode In the continuous operation mode

(sometimes called the Audichron mode), a message is constantly played,
over and over again. Callers "barge in" on a playing message or receive
a ringback tone until the message plays again. The start line (ST+) is
hardwired as always active. See Figure 212 "RAN control signals (Control
GRD = IDLE)" (page 668). At the end of each message, a pulse is issued
on the "C" line that is used by the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call.

Note: The "B" (busy) signal line indicates availability of an

announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for
the continuous operation mode. This signal is made active (ground) by
the announcement machine if the channel contains a recorded message
and is in an online condition. The "B" line is not connected to a trunk
unit when configured for start mode operation.

In the continuous operation mode (sometimes called the Audichron mode),

a message is constantly played, over and over again. Callers "barge in" on
a playing message or are provided with a ringback tone until the message
begins its next playing. The start line (ST+) is hardwired as always active.
See Figure 213 "RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 669). At
the end of each message, a pulse is issued on the "C" line that is used by
the trunk unit to cut through to the waiting call.

Note: The "B" (busy) signal line shown in Figure 211 "Connecting
RAN equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)" (page
666) (not represented in Figure 213 "RAN control signals (Control
GRD = IDLE)" (page 669)) is used to indicate availability of an
announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for
the continuous operation mode. This signal is made active (ground) by
the announcement machine if the channel contains a recorded message
and is in an online condition. The "B" line is not connected to a trunk
unit when configured for start mode operation.

In the continuous operation mode (sometimes called the Audichron mode),

a message is constantly played, over and over again. Callers "barge in"
on a playing message or receive a ringback tone until the message plays
again. The start line (ST+) is hardwired as always active. See Figure 214

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 674 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

"RAN control signals (Control GRD = IDLE)" (page 670). At the end of
each message, a pulse is issued on the "C" line that is used by the trunk
unit to cut through to the waiting call.

Note: The "B" (busy) signal line indicates availability of an

announcement machine message to the trunk unit when configured for
the continuous operation mode. This signal is made active (ground) by
the announcement machine if the channel contains a recorded message
and is in an online condition. The "B" line is not connected to a trunk
unit when configured for start mode operation.

Start modes (minimum vintage BA) In a start mode (sometimes called

the Code-a-Phone or start-stop mode), playback of a message does not
begin until a start pulse is received by the announcement machine. Two
subcategories of the start mode exist: pulse start and level start.

In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that
continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other
start pulses that might occur until the message is complete.

In the level start mode, the start signal is a "level" rather than a pulse. The
leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues
until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the
message is reached. A message that is terminated by the trailing edge of a
level start signal is immediately reset and ready for playback again.

In a start mode (sometimes called the Code-a-Phone or start-stop mode),

playback of a message does not begin until a start pulse is received by the
announcement machine. Two subcategories of the start mode exist: pulse
start and level start.

In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that
continues until completion. See Figure 213 "RAN control signals (Control
GRD = IDLE)" (page 669). The announcement machine ignores all other
start pulses that might occur until the message is complete.

In the level start mode, the start signal is a "level" rather than a pulse. The
leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues
until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the
message is reached. A message that is terminated by the trailing edge of a
level start signal is immediately reset and ready for playback again.

In a start mode (sometimes called the Code-a-Phone or start-stop mode),

playback of a message does not begin until a start pulse is received by the
announcement machine. Two subcategories of the start mode exist: pulse
start and level start.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 675

In the pulse start mode, a start pulse activates playback of a message that
continues until completion. The announcement machine ignores all other
start pulses that might occur until the message is complete.

In the level start mode, the start signal is a "level" rather than a pulse. The
leading edge of the start signal initiates message playback that continues
until either the trailing edge of the start signal occurs or the end of the
message is reached. A message that is terminated by the trailing edge of a
level start signal is immediately reset and ready for playback again.

Call routing to RAN trunks

The CS 1000 software controls recorded announcement machines. These
programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of intercept
treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant, announcement), queue
the intercept, and provide ringback tone to the calling party. At the proper
time, an intercepted call is connected to the appropriate RAN trunk.

programs in the Meridian 1 control recorded announcement machines.

These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the type of
intercept treatment required (overflow, attendant, announcement, etc.),
queue the intercept, and provide ringback tone to the calling party. At the
proper time, an intercepted call is connected to the appropriate RAN trunk.

The software in the CS 1000 controls recorded announcement machines.

These programs detect the calls to be intercepted, determine the
type of intercept treatment required (for example, overflow, attendant,
announcement), queue the intercept, and provide ringback tone to the
calling party. At the proper time, an intercepted call is connected to the
appropriate RAN trunk.

Programming RAN trunks

The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the
Trunk Data Block LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Route Data
Block LD 16 programs.
The Trunk Data Block and Route Data Block programs specify the following:
• the RAN trunk
• the type of announcement machine
• the number of repetitions of announcements before a forced disconnect
(all calls) or an attendant intercept is initiated (CCSA/DID calls only)
• the point at which the trunk may be connected to the announcement

The Customer Data Block program defines the type of intercept and the
trunk route to which the intercept is to be connected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 676 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611)

for instructions on service change programs.The type of intercept and
the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the Trunk Administration LD
14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Trunk Route Administration LD 16
programs.
The Trunk Data Block and Route Data Block programs specify the following:
• the RAN trunk
• the type of announcement machine
• the number of repetitions of announcements before a forced disconnect
(all calls) or an attendant intercept is initiated (CCSA/DID calls only)
• the point at which the trunk may be connected to the announcement

The Customer Data Block program defines the type of intercept and the
trunk route to which the intercept is to be connected.

Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611)

for more detailed instructions on service change programs.

The type of intercept and the RAN trunk parameters are defined in the
Trunk Data Block LD 14, Customer Data Block LD 15, and Route Data
Block LD 16 programs.

The Trunk Data Block and Route Data Block programs specify the RAN
trunk, the type of announcement machine, the number of repetitions of
announcements before a forced disconnect (all calls) or an attendant
intercept is initiated (CCSA/DID calls only), and the point at which the trunk
can connect to the announcement.

The Customer Data Block program defines the type of intercept and the
trunk route to which the intercept is to be connected.

Refer to Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611)

for instructions on service change programs.

Electrical specifications
Table 233 "Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics"
(page 677) gives the electrical characteristics of the NT8D14 Universal
Trunk card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 677

Table 233
Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics
Trunk Types
Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging
Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms 600/900 ohms 600 ohms
(Note 1) (Note 1) (Note 1)
Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A
(Note 1), 3COM, or (Note 1), 3COM,
3CM2 (Note 2) or 3CM2 (Note 2)
Supervision type Ground or loop Loop start (with Continuous, N/A
start (Note 3) ans sup) (Note 3) level, or pulse
DC signaling loop 1700-ohm loop with 2450-ohm loop 600/900-ohm 600 ohm
length (max) near-end battery of with near-end loop loop
–42.75 V battery of –44 V
Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V –42 to –52.5 V –42 to –52 V N/A
(Note 4)
Minimum detected 20 mA 10 mA 10 mA N/A
loop current
Ground potential ±3 V ±3 V ±1 V ±1 V
difference
Low DC loop <300 ohms N/A N/A N/A
resistance during
outpulsing
High DC loop Ground start N/AŠ N/A N/A
resistance Š 30k ohms;
loop start
Š 5M ohms
Ring detection 17 to 33 Hz 40 to N/A N/A N/A
120 V rms
Note 1: Selected in software.
Note 2: Selected by jumper strap settings on card. Refer to Table 250 "Jumper strap settings -
factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 691), Table 251 "Jumper strap settings - extended
range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692), and Table 252 "Trunk types - termination
impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 692) for details.
Note 3: For loop extender application, the maximum voltage applied between tip and ring is –105 V
±5%. The minimum dc loop resistance for this type of application is 1800 ohms.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 678 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Trunk Types
Characteristic CO / FX / WATS DID / TIE RAN Paging
Line leakage Š 30k ohms, Š 30k ohms, N/A N/A
tip-to-ring, tip-to-ring,
tip-to-ground, tip-to-ground,
ring-to-ground ring-to-ground
AC induction rejection 10 V rms, 10 V rms, N/A N/A
tip-to-ring, tip-to-ring,
tip-to-ground, tip-to-ground,
ring-to-ground ring-to-ground
Note 1: Selected in software.
Note 2: Selected by jumper strap settings on card. Refer to Table 250 "Jumper strap settings -
factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 691), Table 251 "Jumper strap settings - extended
range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692), and Table 252 "Trunk types - termination
impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 692) for details.
Note 3: For loop extender application, the maximum voltage applied between tip and ring is –105 V
±5%. The minimum dc loop resistance for this type of application is 1800 ohms.

Table 234 "Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics"

(page 678) gives the electrical characteristics of the NT8D14 Universal
Trunk card.

Table 234
Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics
CO/FX/WATS DID or TIE RAN Paging
Characteristic trunks trunks trunks trunks
Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600/900 600
ohms ohms
(Note 1)
Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), N/A N/A
3COM, or 3CM2 (Note 2)
Supervision type Ground or Loop start Contin N/A
loop start (with ans sup) uous,
(Note 3) (Note 3) level, or
pulse
DC signaling loop length 1700-ohm loop with 2450-ohm loop 600/90 600 ohm loop
(max) near-end battery of with near-end 0-ohm
–42.75 V battery of –44 V loop
Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V (Note –42 to –52.5 V –42 to N/A
4) –52 V
Minimum detected loop 20 mA 10 mA 10 mA N/A
current

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 679

CO/FX/WATS DID or TIE RAN Paging

Characteristic trunks trunks trunks trunks
Ground potential difference ±3 V ±1 V ±1 V
Low DC loop resistance <300 ohms N/A N/A N/A
during outpulsing
High DC loop Ground start N/A N/A N/A
resistanceŠŠŠŠ Š 30k ohms;
loop start
Š 5M ohms
Ring detection 17 to 33 Hz 40 to 120 N/A N/A N/A
V rms
Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, N/A N/A
tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground
AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, N/A N/A
tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground
Note 1: Selected in software.
Note 2: Selected by jumper strap settings on card. Refer to Table 255 "Jumper strap settings
- factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 698), Table 256 "Jumper strap settings -
extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698), and Table
257 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page
699) for details.
Note 3: Loop start answer supervision introduced with vintage BA cards and release 19 software.
Note 4: For loop extender application, the maximum voltage applied between tip and ring is -105 V
±5%. The minimum dc loop resistance for this type of application is 1800 ohms.

Table 234 "Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics"

(page 678) gives the electrical characteristics of the NT8D14 Universal
Trunk Card.

Table 235
NT8D14 Universal trunk card - trunk interface electrical characteristics
CO/FX/WATS DID or tie RAN Paging
Characteristic trunks trunks trunks trunks
Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1) 600/900 600 ohms
ohms
(Note 1)
Balance impedance 600 or 900 ohms (Note 1), 3COM, or 3CM2 N/A N/A
(Note 2)
Supervision type Ground or loop start Loop start (with ans Continuou N/A
(Note 3) sup) (Note 3) s, level, or
pulse

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 680 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

CO/FX/WATS DID or tie RAN Paging

Characteristic trunks trunks trunks trunks
DC signaling loop length 1700-ohms loop with 2450-ohms loop with 600/ 600 ohms
(max) near-end battery of near-end battery of 900-ohms loop
–42.75 V –44 V loop
Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V (Note –42 to –52.5 V –42 to –52 N/A
4) V
Minimum detected loop 20 mA 10 mA 10 mA N/A
current
Ground potential ±3 V ±1 V ±1 V
difference
Low DC loop resistance <300 ohms N/A N/A N/A
during outpulsing
High DC loop resistance Ground start N/A N/A N/A
Š 30k ohms;
loop start
Š 5M ohms
Ring detection 17 to 33 Hz N/A N/A N/A
40 to 120 V rms
Line leakage Š 30k ohms, tip-to-ring, N/A N/A
tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground
AC induction rejection 10 V rms, tip-to-ring, N/A N/A
tip-to-ground, ring-to-ground
Note 1: Selected in software.
Note 2: Selected by jumper strap settings on card. Refer to Table 255 "Jumper strap settings
- factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 698), Table 256 "Jumper strap settings -
extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698), and Table
257 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page
699) for details.
Note 3: Loop start answer supervision introduced with vintage BA cards and Release 19 software.
Note 4: For loop extender application, the maximum voltage applied between tip and ring is –105 V
±5%. The minimum DC loop resistance for this type of application is 1800 ohms.

Electrical characteristics of the Universal Trunk Card are listed in Table 236
"Universal Trunk Card electrical characteristics" (page 680).

Table 236
Universal Trunk Card electrical characteristics
Characteristic DID trunk CO trunk
Terminal impedance 600 or 900 ohms (selected by 600 or 900 ohms (selected by
software) software)
Signaling range 2450 ohms 1700 ohms

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 681

Characteristic DID trunk CO trunk

Signaling type Loop start Ground or loop start
Far end battery - 42 to - 52.5 V - 42 to - 52.5 V
Near end battery N/A - 42.75 to - 52.5 V
Minimum loop current N/A 20 mA
Ground potential difference + 3 V +3V
Low DC loop resistance N/A < 300 ohms
during outpulsing
High DC loop resistance N/A Ground start equal to or greater
than 30 kohms; loop start equal
to or greater than 5 Mohms
Line leakage Equal to or greater than 30 kohms Equal to or greater than 30 kohms
(tip to ring, tip to ground, ring to (tip to ring, tip to ground, ring to
ground) ground)
Effective loss See"PAD switching" (page 684) See"PAD switching" (page 684)

Power requirements
Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card is provided by the module power
supply (ac or dc).

Table 237
Power requirements for universal trunk card
Voltage Tolerance Current (max.)
+15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA
–15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA
+5.0 V dc ±5% 750 mA
+8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA
–48.0 V dc ±5% 415 mA

Power to the universal trunk card is provided by the module power supply
(ac or dc). Table 238 "Power requirements" (page 681) lists the power
requirements for the universal trunk card.

Table 238
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Current (max.)
+15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA
–15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA
+5.0 V dc ±5% 750 mA

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 682 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Voltage Tolerance Current (max.)

+8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA
–48.0 V dc ±5% 415 mA

Power to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card is provided by the module

power supply (ac or dc).

Table 239
Power requirements for universal trunk card
Voltage Tolerance Current (max.)
+15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA
–15.0 V dc ±5% 306 mA
+5.0 V dc ±5% 750 mA
+8.5 V dc ±2% 450 mA
–48.0 V dc ±5% 415 mA

Power requirements for the Universal Trunk Card are specified in Table 240
"Power requirements" (page 682).

Table 240
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Idle current Active current
± 15.0 V DC ± 5% 306 ma 306 ma
+ 8.5 V DC ± 2% 120 ma 120 ma
- 48.0 V DC ± 5% 346 ma 346 ma
+ 5.0 V DC ± 10% 350 ma 350 ma

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage
(power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

The universal trunk card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage (power
cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

The Universal Trunk Card meets CS03 overvoltage (power cross)

specifications.

The NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card meets UL-1489 and CS03 over-voltage
(power cross) specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 683

Environmental specifications
Table 241 "Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal
Trunk card" (page 683) lists the environmental specifications for the
NT8D14 Universal Trunk card.

Table 241
Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0¡ to +60¡ C (+32 to +140¡ F), ambient
0 to 50 degrees C, ambient (Small Systems
and CS 1000E)
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40¡ to +70¡ C (–40¡ to +158¡ F)

Table 242 "Environmental specifications" (page 683) lists the environmental

specifications for the universal trunk card.

Table 242
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0¡ to +60¡ C (+32 to +140¡ F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Storage temperature –40¡ to +70¡ C (–40¡ to +158¡ F)

Table 243 "Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal

Trunk Card" (page 683) lists the environmental specifications for the
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card.

Table 243
Environmental specifications for the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0¡ to +60¡ C (+32 to +140¡ F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Storage temperature –40¡ to +70¡ C (–40¡ to +158¡ F)

Table 244 "Environmental specifications" (page 684) lists the environmental

specifications for the Universal Trunk Card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 684 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 244
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to 50 degrees C, ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature - 40 to + 70 degrees C

Release control
Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or
originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start
configuration can provide disconnect supervision. You configure release
control for each trunk independently in the Route Data Block (LD 16).

Release control establishes which end of a call (near, far, either, joint, or
originating) disconnects the call. Only incoming trunks in idle ground start
configuration can provide disconnect supervision. You configure release
control for each trunk independently in the Route Data Block (LD 16).

PAD switching
The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the
class-of-service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14).
Transmission properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss
(non-VNL).
Non-VNL trunks are assigned either a Transmission Compensated (TRC) or
Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service to ensure stability
and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks.
The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs
contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• Transmission Compensated
— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than
2 dB for which impedance compensation is provided
— or used for a four-wire non-VNL facility

• Non-Transmission Compensated
— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB
— or used when impedance compensation is not provided

The insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as follows:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 685

Table 245
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the

class-of-service (COS) you assign in the Trunk Data Block (LD 14).
Transmission properties may be via net loss (VNL) or non via net loss
(non-VNL).
Non-VNL trunks are assigned either a Transmission Compensated (TRC) or
Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service to ensure stability
and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as Tie trunks.
The class-of-service determines the operation of the switchable PADs
contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• Transmission Compensated
— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than
2 dB for which impedance compensation is provided
— or used for a four-wire non-VNL facility

• Non-Transmission Compensated
— used for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB
— or used when impedance compensation is not provided

Table 246 "Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)"
(page 686) shows PAD settings and the resulting port-to-port loss for
connections between the Universal Trunk Card (UTC) and any other
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) or Peripheral Equipment (PE) unit,
denoted as Port B

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 686 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

In Option 11C systems, the insertion loss from IPE ports to IPE ports is as
follows.

Table 246
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

Connector pin assignments

The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane
through a 160-pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the
universal trunk card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin
connector.

A list of the connections to the universal trunk card is shown in Table 247
"Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts" (page 686). See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for I/O panel connector information and wire assignments
for each tip/ring pair.

Table 247
Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts
Signal Signal
Back- Back-
Trunk plane RAN Paging Other plane RAN Paging Other
Number Pin mode mode modes Pin mode mode modes
0 12A Tip Tip Tip 12B Ring Ring Ring
13A CP A N/A 13B MB RG N/A
1 14A Tip Tip Tip 14B Ring Ring Ring
15A CP A N/A 15B MB RG N/A

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 687

Signal Signal
Back- Back-
Trunk plane RAN Paging Other plane RAN Paging Other
Number Pin mode mode modes Pin mode mode modes
2 16A Tip Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring
17A CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A
3 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring
19A CP A N/A 19B MB RG N/A
4 62A Tip Tip Tip 62B Ring Ring Ring
63A CP A N/A 63B MB RG N/A
5 64A Tip Tip Tip 64B Ring Ring Ring
65A CP A N/A 65B MB RG N/A
6 66A Tip Tip Tip 66B Ring Ring Ring
67A CP A N/A 67B MB RG N/A
7 68A Tip Tip Tip 68B Ring Ring Ring
69A CP A N/A 69B MB RG N/A

The universal trunk card brings the eight analog trunks to the IPE backplane
through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the
input/output (I/O) panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected
to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Telephone trunks connect to the universal trunk card at the MDF using a
wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. A typical connection example is
shown in Figure 215 "Universal trunk card - typical cross connect example"
(page 690), and a list of the connections to the universal trunk card is shown
in Table 249 "Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts" (page 688).

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for more detailed I/O panel
connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

The universal trunk card connects the eight analog trunks to the backplane
through a 160-pin connector shroud. Telephone trunks connect to the
universal trunk card at the back of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin
connector. A list of the connections to the universal trunk card is shown
in Table 248 "Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts" (page 688). See
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation
and Configuration (NN43021-310) for I/O panel connector information and
wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 688 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 248
Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts
Signal Signal
Back-
Trunk plane RAN Paging Other Back-pl RAN Paging Other
Number Pin mode mode modes ane Pin mode mode modes
0 12A Tip Tip Tip 12B Ring Ring Ring
13A CP A N/A 13B MB RG N/A
1 14A Tip Tip Tip 14B Ring Ring Ring
15A CP A N/A 15B MB RG N/A
2 16A Tip Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring
17A CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A
3 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring
19A CP A N/A 19B MB RG N/A
4 62A Tip Tip Tip 62B Ring Ring Ring
63A CP A N/A 63B MB RG N/A
5 64A Tip Tip Tip 64B Ring Ring Ring
65A CP A N/A 65B MB RG N/A
6 66A Tip Tip Tip 66B Ring Ring Ring
67A CP A N/A 67B MB RG N/A
7 68A Tip Tip Tip 68B Ring Ring Ring
69A CP A N/A 69B MB RG N/A

Table 249
Universal trunk card - backplane pinouts
Trunk Signal Signal
Back- Back-
Number
plane RAN Paging Other plane RAN Paging Other
Pin mode mode modes Pin mode mode modes
0 12A Tip Tip Tip 12B Ring Ring Ring
13A CP A N/A 13B MB RG N/A
1 14A Tip Tip Tip 14B Ring Ring Ring
15A CP A N/A 15B MB RG N/A
2 16A Tip Tip Tip 16B Ring Ring Ring
17A CP A N/A 17B MB RG N/A
3 18A Tip Tip Tip 18B Ring Ring Ring
19A CP A N/A 19B MB RG N/A
4 62A Tip Tip Tip 62B Ring Ring Ring

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 689

Trunk Signal Signal

Back- Back-
Number
plane RAN Paging Other plane RAN Paging Other
Pin mode mode modes Pin mode mode modes
63A CP A N/A 63B MB RG N/A
5 64A Tip Tip Tip 64B Ring Ring Ring
65A CP A N/A 65B MB RG N/A
6 66A Tip Tip Tip 66B Ring Ring Ring
67A CP A N/A 67B MB RG N/A
7 68A Tip Tip Tip 68B Ring Ring Ring
69A CP A N/A 69B MB RG N/A

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 690 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 215
Universal trunk card - typical cross connect example

Configuration
The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance
and balance network configuration is selected by software service change
entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

NT8D14 has a reduced jumper strap setting on the card. There are
only three jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X on each channel. Table 250
"Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page
691), Table 251 "Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA,

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 691

NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)" (page 692), and Table 252 "Trunk types -

termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)"
(page 692) show the functionality of these three jumpers.

Table 250
Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Jumper strap settings (Note 1)
J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
CO/FX/WATS 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2
2-way TIE (LDR)
2-way TIE (OAID)
DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2
RAN: continuous Not applicable: RAN Off Off 1–2 1–2
operation mode and paging trunks
should not leave the
Paging
building.
Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the
unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused
straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below.
Note 2: For the NT8D14BB card, J4.X is not provided on the card. The J4.X jumper setting
specified in Table 250 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page
691) does not apply.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 692 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 251
Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)
Jumper strap settings (Note 1)
J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
CO/FX/WATS > 1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 2–3
2-way TIE (LDR)
2-way TIE (OAID)
DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3
RAN: pulse start or level Not applicable: RAN Off Off 2–3 1–2
start modes trunks should not leave
the building.
Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the
unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note 2: For the NT8D14BB card, J4.X is not provided on the board. The J4.X jumper setting
specified in Table 251 "Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB,
NT8D14BB)" (page 692) does not apply.

Table 252
Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)
Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
2-way TIE (LDR) 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
DID (loop length < 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
600 ohms) ohms
DID (loop length Š 600 or 900 600 ohms N/A 3CM2
600 ohms) ohms
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 693

Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)

Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
RAN: continuous 600 or 900 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A
operation mode ohms
Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.

The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance
and balance network configuration is selected by software service change
entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

NT8D14BB (Release 10 and higher) has a reduced jumper strap setting

on the card. There are only three jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X per
channel. Table 255 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA,
NT8D14BB)" (page 698), Table 256 "Jumper strap settings - extended
range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page
698), and Table 257 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance
network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 699) show the functionality of
these 3 jumpers.

The trunk type for each unit on the card as well as its terminating impedance
and balance network configuration is selected by software service change
entries at the system terminal and by jumper strap settings on the card.

NT8D14BB (Release 10 and higher) has a reduced jumper strap setting

on the card. There are only three jumpers, J1.X, J2.X, and J3.X on each
channel. Table 255 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA,
NT8D14BB)" (page 698), Table 256 "Jumper strap settings - extended
range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page
698), and Table 257 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance
network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 699) show the functionality of
these three jumpers.

Jumper strap settings

For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard
configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 250 "Jumper strap
settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 691).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 694 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 251 "Jumper
strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB)"
(page 692), for the following:
• For CO/FX/WATS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.)
• DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms
• RAN trunks operating in pulse start or level start modes

Figure 216 "Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and
NT8D14BB Release 9 and below" (page 695) shows jumper locations on
the universal trunk card (vintage BA).
For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard
configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 255 "Jumper strap
settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 698).
The jumper strap settings must be changed, as shown in Table 256 "Jumper
strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB
Release 10 and up)" (page 698), for the following:
• For CO/FX/WATS or TIE trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.)
• DID trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms
• RAN trunks operating in pulse start or level start modes

Figure 218 "Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and
NT8D14BB Release 9 and below" (page 702) shows jumper locations on
the universal trunk card (vintage BA).

Note: Refer to Circuit Card: Description and Installation (NN43001-311)

for vintage AA jumper strap settings.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 695

Figure 216
Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below

For most applications, the jumper strap settings remain set to the standard
configuration as shipped from the factory. See Table 255 "Jumper strap
settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 698).

For CO/FX/WATS or tie trunk loops exceeding 1524 meters (5000 ft.), DID
trunks exceeding a loop resistance of 600 ohms, or RAN trunks operating
in pulse start or level start modes, the jumper strap settings must be
changed as shown in Table 256 "Jumper strap settings - extended range

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 696 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

(NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698).

Figure 218 "Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and
NT8D14BB Release 9 and below" (page 702) shows jumper locations on
the universal trunk card (vintage BA).

Service change entries

The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by
making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.

See Table 253 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network
(NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 696) for the proper values for the trunk
type and loop length. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 service change instructions.

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length
between the near-end and the far-end (a Central Office, for example) must
be known. To assist in determining loop length, some typical resistance
and loss values for the most common cable lengths are given in Table 254
"Cable loop resistance and loss" (page 697) for comparison with values
obtained from actual measurements.

Table 253
Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)
Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
2-way TIE (LDR) 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
2-way TIE (OAID) 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
DID (loop length < 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
600 ohms) ohms
DID (loop length Š 600 or 900 600 ohms N/A 3CM2
600 ohms) ohms
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 697

Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)

Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
RAN: continuous 600 or 900 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A
operation mode hms
Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB.

Table 254
Cable loop resistance and loss
Cable loop loss (dB)
Cable loop resistance (ohms) (nonloaded at 1kHz)
Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG
915 m (3000 ft.) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5
1524 m (5000 ft.) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5
2225 m (7300 ft.) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7
3566 m (11700 ft.) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0
5639 m (18500 ft.) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.4

The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected by
making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD 14.

Refer to Table 257 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance

network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 699) to select the proper values
for the trunk type and loop length being employed.

Refer to Meridian 1 Software Input/Output Reference — Administration

(NN43001-611) for LD 14 service change instructions.

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length
between the near-end (Meridian 1) and the far-end (a Central Office, for
example) must be known. To assist in determining loop length, some typical
resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths are given
in Table 258 "Cable loop resistance and loss" (page 700), for comparison
with values obtained from actual measurements.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 698 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 255
Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Jumper strap settings (Note 1)
J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
CO/FX/WATS 0–1524m (5000ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2
2-way TIE (LDR)
2-way TIE (OAID)
DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2
RAN: continuous Not applicable: RAN Off Off 1–2 1–2
operation mode and paging trunks
should not leave the
Paging
building.
Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the
unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused
straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below.
Note 2: For the NT8D14BB (Release 10 and higher) card, J4.X is not provided on the card. The
J4.X jumper setting specified in Table 255 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA,
NT8D14BB)" (page 698) does not apply.

Table 256
Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)
Jumper strap settings (Note 1)
J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
CO/FX/WATS >1524m(5000ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3
2-way TIE (LDR)
2-way TIE (OAID)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 699

Jumper strap settings (Note 1)

J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3
RAN: pulse start or Not applicable: RAN Off Off 2–3 1–2
level start modes trunks should not leave
the building.
Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the
unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note 2: For the NT8D14BB Release 10 or later card, J4.X is not provided on the board. The
J4.X jumper setting specified in Table 256 "Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA,
NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698) does not apply.

Table 257
Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)
Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
CO/FX/WATS 600 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
or
900
ohms
2-way TIE (LDR) 600 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
or
900
ohms
2-way TIE (OAID) 600 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
or
900
ohms
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB (Release 10 and later).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 700 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)

Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
DID (loop length 600 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
< 600 ohms)
or
900
ohms
DID (loop length 600 or 900 600 ohms N/A 3CM2
Š 600 ohms) ohms
RAN: continuous 600 or 900 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A
operation mode ohms
Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A
Note 1: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note 2: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB (Release 10 and later).

Table 258
Cable loop resistance and loss
Cable loop loss (dB)
Cable loop resistance (ohms) (nonloaded at 1kHz)
Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG
915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5
1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5
2225 m (7300 ft) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7
3566 m (11700 ft) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0
5639 m (18500 ft) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.4

The trunk type, terminating impedance, and balance network are selected
by making service change entries in the Trunk Administration program LD
14. See Table 257 "Trunk types - termination impedance and balance
network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)" (page 699) for the proper values for the
trunk type and loop length. Refer to Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 service change instructions.

Before the appropriate balance network can be selected, the loop length
between the near-end (CS 1000) and the far-end (a Central Office, for
example) must be known. To assist in determining loop length, some typical

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 701

resistance and loss values for the most common cable lengths are given
in Table 258 "Cable loop resistance and loss" (page 700) for comparison
with values obtained from actual measurements.

Figure 217
Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BB Release 10 and higher

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 702 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 218
Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 703

Table 259
Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Jumper strap settings (Note 1)
J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
CO/FX/WATS
2-way tie (LDR) 0–1524 m (5000 ft.) Off Off 1–2 1–2
2-way tie (OAID)
DID 0–600 ohms Off Off 1–2 1–2
RAN: continuous Not applicable: RAN Off Off 1–2 1–2
operation mode and paging trunks
should not leave the
Paging
building.
Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the
unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block. Store unused
straps on the universal trunk card by installing them on a single jumper pin as shown below.
Note 2: For the NT8D14BB (Release 10 and higher) card, J4.X is not provided on the card. The
J4.X jumper setting specified in Table 255 "Jumper strap settings - factory standard (NT8D14BA,
NT8D14BB)" (page 698) does not apply.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 704 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Table 260
Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and
later)
Jumper strap settings (Note 1)
J4.X
Trunk types Loop length J1.X J2.X J3.X (Note 2)
CO/FX/WATS
2-way tie (LDR) > 1524 m (5000 ft) Off Off 1–2 2–3
2-way tie (OAID)
DID > 600 ohms On On 1–2 2–3
RAN: pulse start or Not applicable: RAN Off Off 2–3 1–2
level start modes trunks should not leave
the building.
Note 1: Jumper strap settings J1.X, J2.X, J3.X, and J4.X apply to all eight units; "X" indicates the
unit number, 0–7. "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note 2: For the NT8D14BB Release 10 or later card, J4.X is not provided on the board. The
J4.X jumper setting specified in Table 256 "Jumper strap settings - extended range (NT8D14BA,
NT8D14BB, NT8D14BB Release 10 and up)" (page 698) does not apply.

Table 261
Trunk types - termination impedance and balance network (NT8D14BA, NT8D14BB)
Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)
Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
CO/FX/WATS 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
2-way tie (LDR) 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
2-way tie (OAID) 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
ohms
DID (loop length < 600 or 900 600 ohms 3COM 3CM2
600 ohms) ohms
DID (loop length Š 600 or 900 600 ohms N/A 3CM2
600 ohms) ohms
Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB (Release 10 and later).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 705

Balance network for loop lengths (Note 2)

Terminating
impedance 0–915 m 915–1524 m > 1524 m
Trunk types (Note 1) (0–3000 ft) (3000–5000 ft) (> 5000 ft)
RAN: continuous 600 or 900 600 or 900 ohms N/A N/A
operation mode ohms
Paging 600 ohms 600 ohms N/A N/A
Note: The terminating impedance of each trunk unit is software selectable in LD 14 and should
match the nominal impedance of the connecting equipment.
Note: The balance network of each trunk unit is software selectable between resistive 600 or
900 ohms or 3COM and jumper selectable between 3COM and 3CM2. Jumper selection for
3COM/3CM2 restriction does not apply to NT8D14BB (Release 10 and later).

Table 262
Cable loop resistance and loss
Cable loop loss (dB)
Cable loop resistance (ohms) (nonloaded at 1kHz)
Cable length 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG 22 AWG 24 AWG 26 AWG
915 m (3000 ft) 97 155 251 0.9 1.2 1.5
1524 m (5000 ft) 162 260 417 1.6 2.0 2.5
2225 m (7300 ft) 236 378 609 2.3 3.0 3.7
3566 m (11700 ft) 379 607 977 3.7 4.8 6.0
5639 m (18500 ft) 600 960 1544 5.9 7.6 9.4

Port-to-port loss configuration

Loss parameters are selected on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card by a
switchable pad controlled by codec emulation software. For convenience,
the pads settings are called "in" and "out." Pad settings are determined by
the two factors listed below (the first is under direct user control; the second
is controlled indirectly):
• Class of Service is assigned in LD 14 (under direct user control).
• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the
basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the
user (controlled indirectly).

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of

service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss
(VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 706 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response
VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting
either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission
Compensated (NTC) response.
Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as
Tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable
pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
Figure 219
Universal trunk card - jumper locations for NT8D14BA and NT8D14BB Release 9 and below

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 707

• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire
non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or
when impedance compensation is not provided.

See Table 263 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 707) for the pad switching
control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss
introduced for connections between the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card and
any other port designated as Port B.

Table 263
Pad switching algorithm
Universal Trunk
Port B pads Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Port B to Universal
Universal trunk
Transmit Receive Transmit Receive trunk card to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D card Port B
IPE line N/A N/A Out Out 0.5 0.5
Universal trunk In Out In Out 1 1
(TRC)
IPE TIE (VNL) In In Out Out 0 0
Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the system. Transmit is from the system
to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card). Receive is to the
system from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the Universal trunk card).
Note 2: When Port B is the call originating port. If the Universal trunk card is the originating port, the
UTC pads are out, the Port B (PE CO/FX/WATS) pads are in.

Loss parameters are selected on the Universal trunk card by a switchable

pad controlled by CODEC emulation software. For convenience, the pads
settings are called "in" and "out." Pad settings are determined by the two
factors listed below:
• Class of Service (CLS) is assigned in LD 14 (under direct user control)
• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the
basis of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the
user (controlled indirectly)

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of

service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss
(VNL) or not Via Net Loss (non VNL).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 708 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response
VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting
either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission
Compensated (NTC) response.
Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as
TIE trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable
pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire
non-VNL facility
• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or
when impedance compensation is not provided

See Table 264 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 708) for the pad switching
control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss
introduced for connections between the Universal trunk card and any other
IPE or PE port designated as Port B.

Table 264
Pad switching algorithm
Universal Trunk
Port B pads Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Port B to Universal
Universal trunk
Transmit Receive Transmi Receive trunk card to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D card Port B
IPE line N/A N/A Out Out 0.5 0.5
Universal trunk (TRC) In Out In Out 1 1
IPE TIE (VNL) In In Out Out 0 0
PE line N/A N/A Out Out 1 1
Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1. Transmit is from the
Meridian 1 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card). Receive is
to the Meridian 1 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the Universal
Note 2: When Port B is the call originating port. If the Universal trunk card is the originating port, the
UTC pads are out, the Port B (PE CO/FX/WATS) pads are in.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 709

Universal Trunk
Port B pads Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Port B to Universal
Universal trunk
Transmit Receive Transmi Receive trunk card to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D card Port B
PE CO/FX/WATS Out Out In In 1 1
(TRC)
PE TIE Out Out In In 0.5 0.5
Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1. Transmit is from the
Meridian 1 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card). Receive is
to the Meridian 1 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the Universal
Note 2: When Port B is the call originating port. If the Universal trunk card is the originating port, the
UTC pads are out, the Port B (PE CO/FX/WATS) pads are in.

Loss parameters are selected on the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card by a

switchable pad controlled by Codec emulation software. For convenience,
the pads settings are called "in" and "out." Pad settings are determined by
the two factors listed below: the first is under direct user control; the second
is controlled indirectly.
• Class of Service is assigned in LD 14.
• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis
of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user.

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of

service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss
(VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL).
The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response
VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting
either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission
Compensated (NTC) response.
Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as
tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable
pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire
non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or
when impedance compensation is not provided.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 710 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

See Table 264 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 708) for the pad switching
control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss
introduced for connections between the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card and
any other port designated as Port B.

Table 265
Pad switching algorithm
Universal Trunk
Port B pads Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Port B to Universal
Universal trunk
Transmit Receive Transmit Receive trunk card
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D card to Port B
IPE line N/A N/A Out Out 0.5 0.5
Universal trunk (TRC) In Out In Out 1 1
IPE tie (VNL) In In Out Out 0 0
PE line N/A N/A Out Out 1 1
PE CO/FX/WATS Out Out In In 1 1
(TRC)
PE tie Out Out In In 0.5 0.5
Note 1: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the CS 1000. Transmit is from the CS
1000 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the Universal trunk card). Receive is to the
CS 1000 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the Universal trunk card.
Note 2: When Port B is the call originating port and if the Universal trunk card is the originating port,
the UTC pads are out and the Port B (PE CO/FX/WATS) pads are in.

Applications
The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each
trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks.

The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each

trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks.

Paging trunk operation

A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure
units as paging trunks in the Trunk Data Block program LD 14 and assign
routes in the Route Data Block program LD 16.

Figure 220 "Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal

Trunk card (typical)" (page 711) shows a typical connection from
customer-provided equipment to unit 0 on a universal trunk card that can be
installed in slots 1, 2, and 3 in a Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 711

in a Media Gateway Expansion. See Communication Server 1000M and

Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310)
for trunk wiring information.

Figure 220
Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk card (typical)

A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure

units as paging trunks in the Trunk Administration program LD 14 and
assign routes in the Route Administration program LD 16.

Figure 222 "Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal

Trunk Card (typical)" (page 714) shows a typical connection from
customer-provided equipment to unit 0 on a universal trunk card that is
installed in slot 0 in an NT8D37 IPE Module.

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for more detailed trunk wiring
information.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 712 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

In the Paging mode, the Universal Trunk is connected to a customer-provided

paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by dial-up or attendant
key operation, it provides a loop closure across control leads A and B. In a
typical application, it transfers the input of the paging amplifier system to
the transmission path of the trunk.

A universal trunk card unit can be configured as a paging trunk. Configure

units as paging trunks in the Trunk Data Block program LD 14 and assign
routes in the Route Data Block program LD 16. Figure 222 "Connecting
paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)" (page
714) shows a typical connection from customer-provided equipment to unit 0
on a universal trunk card that can be installed in slots 1, 2, and 3 in a Media
Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 in a Media Gateway Expansion. See
Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation
and Configuration (NN43021-310) for trunk wiring information.

Music operation
A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should
provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms.

Configure units for music at the MUS or AWR prompts in the Trunk
Administration program LD 14 and assign routes at the MRT prompt in the
Route Data Block program LD 16.

Music operation is similar to that of RAN in the continuous operation mode.

Connect the unit tip and ring leads to the audio source and ground the
CP line at the MDF.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 713

Figure 221
Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)

If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is
online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise,
ground the MB line at the MDF.A trunk unit can be connected to a music
source. The audio source should provide an adjustable power output at
600 ohms.

Configure units for music at the MUS or AWR prompts in the Trunk
Administration program LD 14 and assign routes at the MRT prompt in the
Trunk Route Administration program LD 16.

Music operation is similar to that of RAN in the continuous operation mode.

Connect the unit tip and ring leads to the audio source and ground the
CP line at the MDF. See Figure 211 "Connecting RAN equipment to the
NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)" (page 666).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 714 NT8D14 Universal Trunk card

Figure 222
Connecting paging equipment to the NT8D14 Universal Trunk Card (typical)

If the music source is equipped with contacts that close when music is
online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line; otherwise,
ground the MB line at the MDF.

A trunk unit can be connected to a music source. The audio source should
provide an adjustable power output at 600 ohms. Configure units for music
at the MUS or AWR prompts in the Trunk Administration program LD 14 and
assign routes at the MRT prompt in the Route Data Block program LD 16.

Music operation is similar to that of RAN in the continuous operation mode.

Connect the unit tip and ring leads to the audio source and ground the CP
line at the MDF. If the music source is equipped with contacts that close
when music is online, use these contacts to provide a ground to the MB line;
otherwise, ground the MB line at the MDF.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 715

NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 715)

"Physical description" (page 719)

"Functional description" (page 723)

"Operation" (page 747)

"Electrical specifications" (page 772)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 776)

"Configuration" (page 784)

"Applications" (page 795)

Introduction
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card interfaces four analog telephone trunks to
the switch. Each trunk interface connects to a trunk facility using tip and ring
leads that carry voice, ringing, and tone signaling, and to signaling interfaces
by E and M leads. Each unit can be configured independently by software
control in the Trunk Data Block (or Trunk Administration) program LD 14.
You can install this card in any IPE slot.
Note: Up to four analog trunk cards are supported in each Media
Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion.

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card supports the following types of trunks:
• 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks
• two-wire dial repeating trunks
• two or four wire tie trunks

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 716 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

• 4-wire E and M Trunks:

— Type I or Type II signaling
— duplex (DX) signaling

• paging (PAG) trunks

Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX
signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching
systems use Type II signaling.
Table 266 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 716) lists the signaling and
trunk types supported by the NT8D15 E and M Trunk card.

Table 266
Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types
Signaling RLM/RLR TIE PAG CSA/CAA/CAM
2-wire E and M Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-wire E and M Yes Yes No Yes
Legend:
RLM Release Link Main
RLR Release Link Remote
CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement
CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement with Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
CAM Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card is an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment

(IPE) device that can be installed in either the NT8D37 IPE Module or the
NT8D11 CE/PE Module. The E and M Trunk card interfaces four analog
telephone trunks to the Meridian 1 switch. Each trunk interface connects to
a trunk facility using tip and ring leads that carry voice, ringing, and tone
signaling, and to signaling interfaces by E and M leads. Each unit can be
configured independently by software control in the Trunk Administration
program LD 14.
The E and M Trunk card supports the following types of trunks:
• 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks
• 4-wire E and M Trunks:
— Type I or Type II signaling
— Duplex (DX) signaling

• Paging (PAG) trunks

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 717

Type I signaling utilizes two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX
signaling utilizes two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching
systems use Type II signaling.
Table 267 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 717) lists the signaling and
trunk types supported by the E and M Trunk card.

Table 267
Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types
Signaling RLM/RLR TIE PAG CSA/CAA/CAM
2-wire E and M Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-wire E and M Yes Yes No Yes
Legend:
RLM Release Link Main
RLR Release Link Remote
CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement
CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement with Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
CAM Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card interfaces four analog telephone trunks
to the CS 1000. Each trunk interface connects to a trunk facility using tip
and ring leads that carry voice, ringing, and tone signaling, and to signaling
interfaces by E and M leads. Each unit can be configured independently by
software control in the Trunk Data Block program LD 14.
Up to four analog trunk cards are supported in each Media Gateway and
Media Gateway Expansion. The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card can be
installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway and slots 7, 8, 9, and
10 of the Media Gateway Expansion.
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card supports the following types of trunks:
• 2-wire E and M Type I signaling trunks
• 4-wire E and M Trunks:
— Type I or Type II signaling
— duplex (DX) signaling

• paging (PAG) trunks

Type I signaling uses two signaling wires plus ground. Type II and DX
signaling uses two pairs of signaling wires. Most electronic switching
systems use Type II signaling.
Table 267 "Trunk and signaling matrix" (page 717) lists the signaling and
trunk types supported by the NT8D15 E and M Trunk card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 718 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 268
Trunk and signaling matrix
Trunk types
Signaling RLM/RLR Tie PAG CSA/CAA/CAM
2-wire E and M Yes Yes Yes Yes
4-wire E and M Yes Yes No Yes
Note: Yes
for 11C and
11C mini.
Legend:
RLM Release Link Main
RLR Release Link Remote
CSA Common Control Switching Arrangement
CAA Common Control Switching Arrangement with Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
CAM Centralized Automatic Message Accounting (CAMA) trunk

This chapter outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the

NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card. The information is intended to be used as a
guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the trunk circuit.
NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card has four identical trunk circuits. Each circuit
can be configured independently by software control. The trunk circuits on
the card support the following types of trunks:
• two-wire E and M type I signaling trunks (non-ESN)
• two-wire dial repeating trunks
• two or four wire tie trunks
• four-wire E and M type I and II signaling type II trunks (ESN and
Non-ESN applications)
• Paging (PAG)

Type I signaling (as on the two-wire E & M trunk) utilizes two signaling wires
plus ground. Type II signaling utilizes tow pairs of signaling wires and is
used by most electronic switching systems.

Table 269 "Supported trunk and signaling matrix" (page 719) shows a
matrix of the trunk types and signaling supported by the NT8D15 E and M
Trunk Card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 719

Table 269
Supported trunk and signaling matrix
CSA
RLM CAA
Signaling RLR ATV TIE PAG CAM
2-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes
4-wire E and M yes yes yes yes yes

Physical description
The line interface and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75
cm by 25.40 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The E and M Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin

connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back
of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector. Telephone lines from
station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF
using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for termination and cross connect information.

Each card provides four circuits. Each circuit connects with the switching
system and with the external apparatus by an 80-pin connector at the rear
of the pack. Each trunk circuit on the card connects to trunk facilities by tip
an ring leads which carry voice, ringing, tone signaling and battery. Trunk
option selection is determined by software control in LD 14.

Figure 223 "E and M Trunk card - faceplate" (page 721) illustrates the
faceplate of the E and M Trunk card. The words "Dict Trk" appear on the
faceplate label because earlier versions of this card provided dictation trunk
connections for third-party equipment.

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an E and M
trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while
the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes
three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in
software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains
weakly lit, replace the card.

The E and M trunk has a microprocessor which performs a number of

operations. On power up a self test of the circuitry on the card is performed.
The self-test can also be requested by a command entered in maintenance
programs. The card faceplate Light-Emitting Diode (LED) is lit while the self
test is performed. If the self test passes, the faceplate LED flashes three
times and stays lit until the card is enabled in software. If the test fails,
the LED stays lit (does not flash).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 720 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The E and M Trunk card mounts in any IPE slot. The line interface and
common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm (12.5
in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

The E and M Trunk card connects to the IPE backplane through a 160-pin
connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel on the rear of
the module, which is then connected to the Main Distribution Frame (MDF)
by 25-pair cables. Telephone lines from station equipment cross connect to
the OPS analog line card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used
for line cards. See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large
System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for termination and
cross connect information.

SeeFigure 223 "E and M Trunk card - faceplate" (page 721) for an illustration
of the faceplate on the E and M Trunk card. The words "Dict Trk" appear on
the faceplate label because earlier versions of this card provided dictation
trunk connections for third-party equipment.

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an E and M
Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for 2 to 5 seconds while the
self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes three
times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in software,
the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains weakly lit,
replace the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 721

Figure 223
E and M Trunk card - faceplate

The E and M Trunk card mounts in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the Media Gateway
and slots 7, 8, 9, and 10 of the Media Gateway Expansion. The line interface
and common multiplexing circuitry is mounted on a 31.75 cm by 25.40 cm
(12.5 in. by 10 in.) printed circuit board.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 722 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The E and M Trunk card connects to the backplane through a 160-pin

connector shroud. External equipment connects to the card at the back
of the Media Gateway using a 25-pin connector. Telephone lines from
station equipment cross connect to the OPS analog line card at the MDF
using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards. See Communication
Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310) for termination and cross connect information.

Figure 223 "E and M Trunk card - faceplate" (page 721) illustrates the
faceplate of the E and M Trunk card. The words "Dict Trk" appear on the
faceplate label because earlier versions of this card provided dictation trunk
connections for third-party equipment.

The faceplate of the card is equipped with a red LED. When an E and M
Trunk card is installed, the LED remains lit for two to five seconds while
the self-test runs. If the self-test completes successfully, the LED flashes
three times and remains lit. When the card is configured and enabled in
software, then the LED goes out. If the LED continues to flash or remains
weakly lit, replace the card.

In Option 11C systems the NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card is installed in

slots 1 through 10 of the Main cabinet, or in slots 11 through 50 of the
Expansion cabinets.

Each card provides four circuits. Each circuit connects with the switching
system and with the external apparatus by an 80-pin connector at the rear
of the pack.

Each trunk circuit on the card connects to trunk facilities by tip an ring leads
which carry voice, ringing, tone signaling and battery. Trunk option selection
is determined by software control in LD 14.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 723

Figure 224
E and M Trunk card - faceplate

Functional description
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements.
The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A-Law or µ-Law
companding modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 724 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 225 "E and M Trunk card - block diagram" (page 725) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M Trunk card. Each
of these functions is discussed on the following pages.

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card serves various transmission requirements.

The trunk circuits on the card can operate in either A or µ-Law companding
modes. The mode of operation is set by service change entries.

Figure 226 "E and M Trunk card - block diagram" (page 726) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M Trunk card. Each
of these functions is discussed on the following pages.

Figure 226 "E and M Trunk card - block diagram" (page 726) shows a block
diagram of the major functions contained on the E and M Trunk card. Each
of these functions is discussed on the following pages.

Common features
The following features are common to all circuits on the NT8D15 E and M
Trunk card:
• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission
signals.
• Interfaces each of the four PCM signals to one DS30X timeslot in A10
format.
• Transmit and receive SSD signaling messages over a DS30X signaling
channel in A10 format.
• Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under
software control.
• Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in
software and down loaded at power up and by software commands.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 725

Figure 225
E and M Trunk card - block diagram

• Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate

Light Emitting Diode (LED).
• Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes.
• Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number
and firmware level of card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 726 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 226
E and M Trunk card - block diagram

• Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm)

two and four-wire modes.
• Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software.
• Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 727

Figure 227
E and M Trunk card - block diagram

• Isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit.

• Software control of A/µ-Law mode.
• Software control of digit collection.

The following features are common to all circuits on the NT8D15 E and M
Trunk Card:
• Analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission signals
• Interfaces each of the four PCM signals to one DS30X timeslot in A10
format
• Transmit and receive SSD signaling messages over a DS30X signaling
channel in A10 format

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 728 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

• Ability to enable and disable individual ports or the entire card under
software control
• Provides outpulsing on the card. Make break ratios are defined in
software and down loaded at power up and by software commands.
• Provides indication of card status from self-test diagnostics on faceplate
Light Emitting Diode (LED)
• Supports loopback of PCM signals to DS30X for diagnostic purposes
• Card ID provided for auto configuration and determining serial number
and firmware level of card
• Software controlled terminating impedance (600, 900, or 1200 ohm)
two and four-wire modes
• Allows trunk type to be configured on a per port basis in software
• Software controlled 600 ohm balance impedance is provided.
• isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling circuit
• Software control of A/mu law mode
• Software control of digit collection

Card interfaces
The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X
loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link.
The E and M Trunk card contains four identical and independently
configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each
unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal
transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing
outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor
incoming call signaling. A CODEC performs A/D and D/A conversion of
trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
The four units on the card can operate in the A-Law or the µ-Law
companding mode. The mode is selected by making service change
entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E and M,
4-wire E and M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by
service change entries and jumper strap settings. All units on the card
can perform the following features:
• convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
• provide outpulsing on the card: make/break ratios are defined in
software and downloaded at power-up and by software command
• provide 600-ohms balance and termination impedance (2-wire
configuration)
• provide 600-ohms termination impedance (4-wire configuration)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 729

• provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections

• enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-port basis
in software
• provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling
circuit
• provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes
• support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for
diagnostic purposes

The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X
loops, and maintenance data over the card LAN link.
The E and M Trunk card contains four identical and independently
configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each
unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal
transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing
outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor
incoming call signaling. A Codec performs A/D and D/A conversion of trunk
analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
The four units on the card can operate in the A-Law or the µ-Law
companding mode. The mode is selected by making service change
entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E and M,
4-wire E and M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by
service change entries and jumper strap settings. All units on the card
can perform the following features:
• convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
• provide outpulsing on the card: make/break ratios are defined in
software and downloaded at power-up and by software command
• provide 600-ohm balance and termination impedance (2-wire
configuration)
• provide 600-ohm termination impedance (4-wire configuration)
• provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections
• allow trunk type and function to be configured on a per port basis in
software
• provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling
circuit
• provide software control of A-Law and µ-Law modes
• support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for
diagnostic purposes

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 730 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The E and M Trunk card passes voice and signaling data over DS-30X
loops and maintenance data over the card LAN link.
The E and M Trunk card contains four identical and independently
configurable trunk interface units (also referred to as circuits). Each
unit provides impedance matching and a balance network in a signal
transformer/analog hybrid circuit. Also provided are relays for placing
outgoing call signaling onto the trunk. Signal detection circuits monitor
incoming call signaling. A CODEC performs A/D and D/A conversion of
trunk analog voiceband signals to digital PCM signals.
The four units on the card can operate in the A-Law or the Mu-Law
companding mode. The mode is selected by making service change
entries. Each unit can be independently configured for 2-wire E and M,
4-wire E and M, and paging trunk types. The trunk type is selected by
service change entries and jumper strap settings. All units on the card
can perform the following features:
• convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog
• provide outpulsing on the card: make/break ratios are defined in
software and downloaded at power-up and by software command
• provide 600-ohms balance and termination impedance (2-wire
configuration)
• provide 600-ohms termination impedance (4-wire configuration)
• provide pad control for 2-wire and 4-wire facility connections
• enable trunk type and function to be configured on a per-port basis
in software
• provide isolation of foreign potentials from transmission and signaling
circuit
• provide software control of A-Law and Mu-Law modes
• support loopback of pulse code modulation (PCM) signals to DS-30X for
diagnostic purposes

Trunk circuit features

The following features in addition to those previously listed are provided
by each circuit:
• Two-wire E and M type I signaling (Non-ESN)
— Near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead
— Ground detection with E lead
— Voice transmission through Tip and Ring for transmit and receive

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 731

• Four-wire E and M signaling type I and II, two-way dial repeating (ESN
and Non-ESN)
— echo suppression for type I
— Switchable seven dB and 16 dB for carrier interface for ESN
applications
— Transmit and receive of voice through two separate paths

• Type I signaling through E and M leads

— Type II signaling
– Near-end seizure with MA/MB leads
– Far-end detection with EA/EB leads

• Paging trunk loop OAID operation

— Support access by low resistance path at the PA/PB lead.
— All call zone paging is not supported.

• Two to four-wire conversion of the transmission path

Trunk unit functions

The functions provided by each unit on the E and M Trunk card include
2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as follows:
• 2-wire, E and M Type I signaling (see Figure 228 "E and M Type I
signaling" (page 732)) with:
— near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead
— ground detection with E lead
— voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive

• 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 229 "E and M Type II
signaling" (page 732)), 2-way dial repeating with:
— echo suppression for Type I signaling
— switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface
— voice transmission and reception through two separate paths
— Type I signaling through E and M leads
— Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end
detection by E/SG lead

• 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 230 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 734))

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 732 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

• paging trunk operation (see Figure 231 "Paging trunk operation" (page
735)) with support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads
Note: Paging end-to-end signaling is not supported.

Figure 228
E and M Type I signaling

Figure 229
E and M Type II signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 733

The functions provided by each unit on the E and M Trunk card include
2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as follows:
• 2-wire, E and M Type I signaling (see Figure 232 "E and M Type I
signaling" (page 736)) with:
— near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead
— ground detection with E lead
— voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive

• 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling (see Figure 233 "E and M Type II
signaling" (page 737)), 2-way dial repeating with:
— echo suppression for Type I signaling
— switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface
— voice transmission and reception through two separate paths

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 734 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 230
4-wire DX signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 735

Figure 231
Paging trunk operation

— Type I signaling through E and M leads

— Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end
detection by E/SG leads

• 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 234 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 738))

• paging trunk operation (see Figure 235 "Paging trunk operation" (page
739)) with:
— support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads
— paging end-to-end signaling not supported

The functions provided by each unit on the E and M Trunk card include
2-wire signaling, 4-wire signaling, and paging operation as follows:
• 2-wire, E and M Type I signaling (see Figure 236 "E and M Type I
signaling" (page 739)) with:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 736 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 232
E and M Type I signaling

— near-end seizure and outpulsing with M lead

— ground detection with E lead
— voice transmission through tip and ring for transmit and receive

• 4-wire, E and M Type I and II signaling, 2-way dial repeating with:

— echo suppression for Type I signaling
— switchable 7 dB and 16 dB pads for carrier interface
— voice transmission and reception through two separate paths
— Type I signaling through E and M leads
— Type II signaling with near-end seizure by SB/M leads and far-end
detection by E/SG leads

• 4-wire, DX signaling (see Figure 234 "4-wire DX signaling" (page 738))

• paging trunk operation (see Figure 235 "Paging trunk operation" (page
739)) with support access by low-resistance path at the PG/A1 leads.
Note: Paging end-to-end signaling is not supported.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 737

Figure 233
E and M Type II signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 738 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 234
4-wire DX signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 739

Figure 235
Paging trunk operation

Figure 236
E and M Type I signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 740 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 237
4-wire DX signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 741

Figure 238
Paging trunk operation

Card control functions

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and
signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and

signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card.

Control functions are provided by a microcontroller, a card LAN, and

signaling and control circuits on the E and M Trunk card.

Microcontroller
The E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card. The microcontroller provides the following functions:
• card-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• maintenance diagnostics

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 742 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal

operation of the card and the serial communication link to the NT8D01
Controller Card. The microcontroller provides the following functions:
• card-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• status report to the controller
• maintenance diagnostics

The E and M Trunk card contains a microcontroller that controls the internal
operation of the card. The microcontroller provides the following functions:
• card-identification
• self-test
• control of card operation
• maintenance diagnostics

Card LAN
The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring
maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the SSC
card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The following functions
are supported:
• providing card ID/RLS
• reporting self-test status
• polling from the controller card
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link

The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring

maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the
NT8D01 Controller Card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The
following functions are supported:
• providing card ID/RLS
• reporting self-test status
• polling from the controller card
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 743

The card LAN provides a serial communication link for transferring

maintenance data and control signals between the trunk card and the SSC
card. The card LAN controls the microcontroller. The following functions
are supported:
• providing card ID/RLS
• reporting self-test status
• enabling/disabling of the DS-30X link

The Card Lan interface supports maintenance functions. The following list
of features are provided by the Card Lan:
• Polling form the Peripheral Controller
• Enable disable of the DS30X link
• Card status reporting
• Self-test status reporting
• Card ID
• Report configuration data
• Report of the firmware version

The Card Lan communicates through a serial communication link between

the trunk card and the Peripheral Controller. The microprocessor provides
the Card Lan function for the E and M Trunk.

Signaling interface
All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. The messages
are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format.

Configuration information for the E and M trunk is downloaded from the

CPU at power up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven
configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each unit (4)
to configure trunk type, signaling type, balance impedance etc. Three
messages are sent per card to configure the make/break ratio, A/µ-Law
operation.

All signaling messages for the trunk are three bytes long. The messages
are transmitted in channel zero of the DS30X in A10 format.

Configuration information for the E & M trunk is downloaded from the

CPU at power up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven
configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each unit (4)
to configure trunk type, signaling type, balance impedance etc. Three
messages are sent per card to configure the make/break ratio, A/mu-Law
operation.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 744 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Signaling and control

The signaling and control portion of the E and M Trunk card works with the
system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages
from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns
status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and
control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections.
Configuration information for the E and M Trunk card is downloaded from
the CPU at power-up and by command from maintenance programs.
Configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to configure trunk
and signaling type. The other messages are sent to each card to select the
make/break ratio and the A-Law and µ-Law modes.
The signaling and control circuits on the card perform the following functions:
• provide an interface between the card and the system CPU
— transmit PCM signals from each of the four units to one DS-30X
timeslot in A10 format (ready to send/clear to send—flow control,
handshake format)
— transmit and receive signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling
channel in A10 format

• decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate

interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes
• decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive
outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary), or 10 pps2 (secondary)
• monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when
required for each state change
• control disabling and enabling of unit or card
• control A-Law and µ-Law operation modes
• control transmission pad settings

The signaling and control portion of the E and M Trunk card works with the
system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages
from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns
status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and
control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections.
Configuration information for the E and M trunk card is downloaded from
the CPU at power-up and by command from maintenance programs. Seven
configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to each of the four

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 745

units to configure trunk and signaling type. The remaining three messages
are sent per card to select the make/break ratio and the A-Law and µ-Law
modes.
The signaling and control circuits on the card perform the following functions:
• provide interface between the card and the system CPU
— transmit PCM signals from each of the four units to one DS-30X
timeslot in A10 format (ready to send/clear to send—flow control,
handshake format)
— transmit and receive signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling
channel in A10 format

• decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate

interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes
• decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive
outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary), or 10 pps2 (secondary)
• monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when
required for each state change
• control disabling and enabling of unit or card
• control of A-Law and µ-Law operation modes
• control of transmission pad settings

The signaling and control portion of the E and M Trunk card works with the
system CPU to operate the card hardware. The card receives messages
from the CPU over a signaling channel in the DS-30X loop and returns
status information to the CPU over the same channel. The signaling and
control portion of the card provides analog loop terminations that establish,
supervise, and take down call connections.
Configuration information for the E and M trunk card is downloaded from
the CPU at power-up and by command from maintenance programs.
Configuration messages are sent. One message is sent to configure trunk
and signaling type. The other messages are sent to each card to select the
make/break ratio and the A-Law and Mu-Law modes.
The signaling and control circuits on the card perform the following functions:
• provide an interface between the card and the system CPU
— transmit PCM signals from each of the four units to one DS-30X
timeslot in A10 format (ready to send/clear to send—flow control,
handshake format)
— transmit and receive signaling messages over a DS-30X signaling
channel in A10 format

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 746 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

• decode received messages to set configuration and activate/deactivate

interface relays for PCM loopback diagnostic purposes
• decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive
outpulsing relays at 20 pps, 10 pps1 (primary), or 10 pps2 (secondary)
• monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when
required for each state change
• control disabling and enabling of unit or card
• control A-Law and Mu-Law operation modes
• control transmission pad settings

The signaling and control portion of the trunk card works with the CPU to
operate the card hardware. The card receives messages from the CPU over
a signaling channel in the DS30X loop and returns status information to the
CPU over the same channel. The signaling and control portion of the card
provides the means for analog loop terminations to establish, supervise and
take down call connections.
The signaling and control operation of the card performs many functions
which are handled by different functional units. Some of the functions of the
signaling and control portion of the E & M card are:
• Communications between the card and the CPU
• Monitor signals from the trunk interface and generate a message when
required for each state change
• Decode received messages and activate/deactivate configuration and
interface relays PCM loopback for diagnostic purposes
• Disable and enable units for maintenance
• Drive Light Emitting Diode (LED) on faceplate
• Decode outpulsing messages (one per digit) from the CPU to drive
outpulsing relays
— Make break ratios (20pps, 10pp1, 10pps2) are downloaded by
software.

• Control of A/mu-law operation

Maintenance features
The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M trunk:
• indication of card status from self-test
• software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card
• loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 747

• card ID for autoconfiguration and determination of serial number and

firmware level

The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M Trunk:
• indication of card status from self-test
• software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card
• loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes
• card ID for autoconfiguration and to determine the serial number and
firmware level of the card

The following features are provided for maintenance of the E and M Trunk:
• indication of card status from self-test
• software enable and disable capability for individual units or entire card
• loopback of PCM signals to DS-30X for diagnostic purposes
• card ID for autoconfiguration and determination of serial number and
firmware level

Operation
The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit
on the E and M Trunk card are assigned through the Trunk Administration
LD 14 and Trunk Route LD 16 programs.

The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit
on the E and M Trunk card are assigned through the Trunk Administration
LD 14 and Trunk Route LD 16 programs.

See Software Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for

detailed information on assigning features and services to trunks.

The optional applications, features, and signaling arrangements for each unit
on the E and M Trunk card are assigned through the Trunk Administration
LD 14 and Trunk Route LD 16 programs.

Signaling and call control

The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E
and M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by
a disconnect message sent to the associated unit.

Figure 239 "Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and

M and CO trunks" (page 748) shows the trunk signaling orientation for a
tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 748 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 239
Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks

The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E
and M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by
a disconnect message sent to the associated unit.

Figure 242 "Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M

and CO trunks" (page 752) shows the E and M Trunk signaling orientation
for a tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks.

The information in this section describes the signaling and call control of E
and M Type I and II trunks. The call is terminated and the trunk released by
a disconnect message sent to the associated unit. Figure 247 "Signaling
orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks" (page
765) shows the trunk signaling orientation for a tandem connection between
E and M and CO trunks.

E and M Type I signaling

Figure 240 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release"
(page 750) shows E and M Type I signaling patterns for incoming and
outgoing calls. Figure 241 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating
party release on a tandem connection" (page 751) shows Type I signaling
patterns on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized
and the route is over a CO trunk (not applicable to CCSA).

Figure 243 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release"
(page 753) shows E and M Type I signaling patterns for incoming and
outgoing calls. Figure 244 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating
party release on a tandem connection" (page 754) shows Type I signaling
patterns on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized
and the route is over a CO/FX/WATS trunk (not applicable to CCSA).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 749

Figure 248 "E and M type signaling patterns - originating party release"
(page 766) shows E and M Type I signaling patterns for incoming and
outgoing calls. Figure 249 "E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating
party release on a tandem connection" (page 767) shows Type I signaling
patterns on a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized
and the route is over a CO trunk (not applicable to CCSA).

Idle state For E and M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground
and the E lead is an open circuit.

For E and M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E
lead is an open circuit.

For E and M signaling, in the idle state the M lead is ground and the E
lead is an open circuit.

Outgoing calls Outgoing calls are processed as follows:

• The M lead changes from ground to battery.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 750 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 240
E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 751

Figure 241
E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

— If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change

from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).

Outgoing calls are processed as follows:

• The M lead changes from ground to battery.
— If answer supervision is provided by the far-end, there is a change
from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 752 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 242
Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks

Outgoing calls are processed as follows:

• The M lead changes from ground to battery.
— If answer supervision is provided by the far end, there is a change
from open to ground on the E lead (ground detection).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 753

Figure 243
E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 754 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 244
E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

Incoming calls The far-end initiates calls as follows:

• The ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling.
• Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open
on the E lead.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 755

• If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any
mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start
arrangement basis. See Table 270 "Operation Mode" (page 755).
— In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called
office. The seizure signal (off hook supervisory state) from the
far-end should be at least 150 ms. At the end of the seizure signal,
the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70
ms minimum).
— In delay dial mode, a 256-384 ms off hook/on hook signal is returned
to the far-end immediately after receipt of the seizure signal. When
the far-end detects the on hook signal (start signal), the far-end can
start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum).
— In wink start mode, within a 128–256 ms period after receipt of the
seizure signal from the far-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms,
wink start, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office.

Table 270
Operation Mode
Operation mode Start arrangement
Immediate start IMM
Delay dial DDL
Wink start WNK

The far-end initiates calls as follows:

• Ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling.
• Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open
on the E lead.
• If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system may be operated in
any mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a
start arrangement basis. See Table 271 "Operation mode" (page 756).
— In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called
office. The seizure signal (off hook supervisory state) from the
far-end should be at least 150 ms. At the end of the seizure signal,
the far-end may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70
ms minimum).
— In delay dial mode, a 256–384 ms off hook/on hook signal is returned
to the far-end immediately after receipt of the seizure signal. When
the far-end detects the on hook state of the signal (the start signal),
the far-end may start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70
ms minimum).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 756 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

— In wink start mode, within a 128–256 ms period after receipt of the

seizure signal from the far-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms,
wink start, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office.

Table 271
Operation mode
Operation mode Start arrangement
Immediate start IMM
Delay dial DDL
Wink start WNK

The far-end initiates calls as follows:

• The ground is placed on the E lead in E and M signaling.
• Dial pulses are subsequently applied from the far-end as ground open
on the E lead.
• If the far-end is equipped for sending, the system can operate in any
mode (immediate start, delay dial, or wink start), as assigned on a start
arrangement basis. See Table 272 "Operation Mode" (page 756).
— In immediate start mode, there is no start signal from the called
office. The seizure signal (off hook supervisory state) from the
far-end should be at least 150 ms. At the end of the seizure signal,
the far-end can start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70
ms minimum).
— In delay dial mode, a 256–384 ms off hook/on hook signal is returned
to the far-end immediately after receipt of the seizure signal. When
the far-end detects the on hook signal (start signal), the far-end can
start pulsing after the standard delay (normally 70 ms minimum).
— In wink start mode, within a 128–256 ms period after receipt of the
seizure signal from the far-end, the called office transmits a 250 ms,
wink start, off hook/on hook signal to the calling office.

Table 272
Operation Mode
Operation mode Start arrangement
Immediate start IMM
Delay dial DDL
Wink start WNK

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 757

E and M Type II signaling

Figure 245 "E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release"
(page 758) shows E and M Type II signaling patterns for incoming and
outgoing calls. Figure 246 "E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating
party release on a tandem connection" (page 759) shows Type II signaling
patterns for a tandem connection where the originating end is senderized
and the route is over a CO trunk (CCSA not applicable).

Type II signaling uses four leads: M, SB, E, and SG. Instead of changes
of state between battery and ground (M signals) or open and ground (E
signals), the trunk signals by closing the contacts between the lead pairs
M and SB. Signals are received by detecting current flow between lead
pairs E and SG.

On incoming calls, the far end seizes the trunk by shorting the E and SG
leads together. This transmits the ground from the SG lead to the E lead (in
Type I signaling the ground to the E lead comes from the far-end). Dialing
is done by opening and closing the E/SG contacts. Since the SB and M
leads are also used as the ESCG and ESC leads, respectively, for echo
suppression, echo suppressor control cannot be used with Type II signaling.

Note: M, SB, E, and SG designations are Electronic Industries

Association and Telecommunications Industries Association (EIA/TIA)
conventions. These leads are also known as MB, MA, EA, and EB,
respectively.

Release control
Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in LD 16. Disconnect
supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. The two options
available are EITHER or ORIGINATING party control. These can be
specified for the end (near-end), or for the central office or other PBX end
(far-end). Joint party control can also be specified for the far-end.

Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in LD 16. Disconnect

supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. The two options
available are EITHER or ORIGINATING party control. These can be
specified for the Meridian 1 end (near-end), or for the CO or other PBX end
(far-end). Joint party control can also be specified for the far-end.

Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in LD 16. Disconnect

supervision is specified for each trunk group independently. The two options
available are EITHER or ORIGINATING party control. These can be
specified for the CS 1000 end (near-end), or for the CO or other PBX end
(far-end). Joint party control can also be specified for the far-end.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 758 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Release control of a call made over a trunk is specified in the route data
block (LD 16). Disconnect supervision is specified for each trunk group
independently.

Only incoming trunks in idle ground start configuration can provide

disconnect supervision. For a list of prompts and responses and default
conditions see Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611).

Figure 245
E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 759

Figure 246
E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

Duplex signaling
Duplex (DX) signaling makes use of the voice transmission leads for
signaling as well as for voice transmission.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 760 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

For descriptive purposes, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the
signaling pair. The other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite
direction to balance the overall current flow between the near and far ends.
During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the
same direction.

Table 273 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release" (page
760) and Table 274 "DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party
release" (page 760) show call-connection and take-down sequencing for
DX signaling. Table 275 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party
release on tandem connections" (page 761) and Table 276 "DX signaling
- incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections"
(page 761) show sequencing where the E and M Trunk card is used in
a tandem PBX.

Table 273
DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow High
(dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits)
Digits Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Far-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High
Network taken down and trunk idled when No current flow High
near-end goes on hook
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 274
DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow Low
(dial tone to far-end: near-end ready for digits)
Digits Current flow interrupted Low-high-low
for each pulse for each pulse
Near-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 761

Current in State of trunk

Condition signaling lead detector
Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 275
DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure (far-end ready for digits) Current flow High
Dial CO/FX/WATS Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Stop sender No current flow Low
Go sender (universal service provided by far-end Current flow High
PBX if originating end is senderized)
CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits
Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Outpulsed No current flow Low
Far end answers No current flow Low
Far end on hook first Current flow High
Near end on hook, network taken down, trunk No current flow High
idled
Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 276
DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow Low
(Can be arranged for IS, DD, or WS) (near-end
ready for digits)
Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN Current flow interrupted Low-high-low for each
for each pulse pulse

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 762 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Current in State of trunk

Condition signaling lead detector
Stored digits outpulsed on CO/FX/WATS trunk
after ground detection if a ground start, but after
3 seconds if a loop start
If answer supervision: pseudo-answer No current flow Low
supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds
after last dial pulse received
If no answer supervision: CO end disconnects Current flow Low
(if a CO ground start – the trunk is idled and
network taken down, but the incoming TIE trunk
is held under control of the originating end)
Originating end disconnects – network taken No current flow High
down and trunk idled

Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken
down, but the incoming tie trunk is controlled by the originating end.

Duplex (DX) signaling uses the voice transmission leads for signaling as
well as for voice transmission. See "SDI function" (page 1118).

For descriptive purposes, the lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the
signaling pair, whereas the other pair Tip A/Ring A conducts current in the
opposite direction to balance the overall current flow between the near and
far-ends. During signaling, current flows through both Tip B and Ring B
leads in the same direction.

Table 277 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release" (page
762) and Table 278 "DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party
release" (page 763) show call-connection and take-down sequencing for
DX signaling. Table 279 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party
release on tandem connections" (page 763) and Table 280 "DX signaling
- incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections"
(page 764) show sequencing where the E and M Trunk card is used in
a tandem PBX.

Table 277
DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow High
(dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 763

Current in State of trunk

Condition signaling lead detector
Digits Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Far-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High
Network taken down and trunk idled when No current flow High
near-end goes on hook
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 278
DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow Low
(dial tone to far-end: near-end ready for digits)
Digits Current flow interrupted Low-high-low for each
for each pulse pulse
Near-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High
Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 279
DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure (far-end ready for digits) Current flow High
Dial CO/FX/WATS Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Stop sender No current flow Low
Go sender (universal service provided by far-end Current flow High
PBX if originating end is senderized)
CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 764 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Current in State of trunk

Condition signaling lead detector
Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Outpulsed No current flow Low
Far end answers No current flow Low
Far end on hook first Current flow High
Near end on hook, network taken down, trunk No current flow High
idled
Near end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 280
DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Current in signaling State of trunk
Condition lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow Low
(Meridian 1 may be arranged for IS, DD, or WS)
(near-end ready for digits)
Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN Current flow interrupted Low-high-low for each
for each pulse pulse
Stored digits outpulsed on CO/FX/WATS trunk
after ground detection if a ground start, but after
3 seconds if a loop start
If answer supervision: pseudo-answer No current flow Low
supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds
after last dial pulse received
If no answer supervision: CO end disconnects Current flow Low
(if a CO ground start – the trunk is idled and
network taken down, but the incoming TIE trunk
is held under control of the originating end)
Originating end disconnects – network taken No current flow High
down and trunk idled

Duplex (DX) signaling makes use of the voice transmission leads for
signaling as well as for voice transmission. For descriptive purposes, the
lead pair Tip B/Ring B is designated the signaling pair. The other pair Tip
A/Ring A conducts current in the opposite direction to balance the overall
current flow between the near and far ends. During signaling, current flows
through both Tip B and Ring B leads in the same direction.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 765

Figure 247
Signaling orientation for tandem connection between E and M and CO trunks

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 766 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 248
E and M type signaling patterns - originating party release

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 767

Figure 249
E and M Type I signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 768 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 250
E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 769

Figure 251
E and M Type II signaling patterns - originating party release on a tandem connection

Table 277 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release" (page
762) and Table 278 "DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party
release" (page 763) show call-connection and take-down sequencing for
DX signaling. Table 279 "DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party
release on tandem connections" (page 763) and Table 280 "DX signaling
- incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections"
(page 764) show sequencing where the E and M Trunk card is used in
a tandem PBX.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 770 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 281
DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow High
(dial tone from far-end: far-end ready for digits)
Digits Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Far-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High
Network taken down and trunk idled when No current flow High
near-end goes on hook
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 282
DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow Low
(dial tone to far-end: near-end ready for digits)
Digits Current flow interrupted Low-high-low for each
for each pulse pulse
Near-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High
Network taken down and trunk idled No current flow High
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 283
DX signaling - outgoing calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure (far-end ready for digits) Current flow High
Dial CO/FX/WATS Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 771

Current in State of trunk

Condition signaling lead detector
Stop sender No current flow Low
Go sender (universal service provided by far-end Current flow High
PBX if originating end is senderized)
CO/FX/WATS offices ready for digits
Stored Office DN digits Current flow interrupted High
for each pulse
Outpulsed No current flow Low
Far-end answers No current flow Low
Far-end on hook first Current flow High
Near-end on hook, network taken down, trunk No current flow High
idled
Near-end on hook first, network taken down Current flow Low
Far-end on hook, trunk idled No current flow High

Table 284
DX signaling - incoming calls with originating party release on tandem connections
Current in State of trunk
Condition signaling lead detector
Idle No current flow High
Seizure Current flow Low
(CS 1000 can be arranged for IS, DD, or WS)
Near-end ready for digits
Dial CO/FX/WATS and office DN Current flow interrupted Low-high-low for each
for each pulse pulse
If a ground start*, the stored digits are sent out
on CO/FX/WATS trunk after ground detection. If
a loop start, the stored digits are outpulsed on
CO/FX/WATS trunk after 3 seconds.
If answer supervision is enabled, pseudo-answer No current flow Low
supervision is sent approximately 13 seconds
after last dial pulse is received
If no-answer supervision is enabled, CO end Current flow Low
disconnects
Originating end disconnects – network torn down No current flow High
and trunk idled

Note: * – CO ground start: the trunk is idled and the network taken
down, but the incoming tie trunk is controlled by the originating end.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 772 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Electrical specifications
This section lists the electrical specifications for the E and M Trunk card.

This section lists the electrical specifications for the E and M Trunk card.

The electrical characteristics of all trunk circuits are provided in Table 286
"Electrical characteristics of trunk cards" (page 772).

Table 285 "Electrical characteristics of E and M Trunk cards" (page 772) lists
the electrical characteristics of the trunk interface on the E and M Trunk card.

Table 285
Electrical characteristics of E and M Trunk cards
Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk
Signaling range Type I#160;#160; 150 ohms Type I#160;#160; 150 ohms
#160;#160; #160;#160; Type
II#160;#160; 300 ohms loop
Signaling type Type I, Type II Type I
Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V dc –42 to –52.5 V dc
Near-end battery –42.75 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.5 V dc
Ground potential difference ±10 V dc ±10 V dc
Line leakage between E lead Š20K3/4 Š20K3/4
and ground
Effective loss See pad table (Table 306 "Pad See pad table (Table 306 "Pad
switching algorithm" (page switching algorithm" (page 791))
791))
Terminating impedance 600 ohms 600 ohms
Balance impedance N/A 600 ohms

Table 286
Electrical characteristics of trunk cards
Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk
Nominal impedance 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by 600 or 900 ohms, (selected by
software) software)
Signaling range 2450 ohms 1700 ohms
Signaling type Loop Ground or loop start
Far-end battery -42 to -52.5 V -42 to -52.5 V
Near-end battery N/A -42.75 to -52.5 V
Minimum loop current N/A 20 mA
Ground potential difference + 10 V +3V

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 773

Characteristic DID Trunk CO trunk

Low DC loop resistance during N/A 300 ohms
outpulsing
High DC loop resistance N/A Ground start equal to or greater
than 30 kS. Loop start equal to
or greater than 5 MS
Line leakage Equal to or greater than 30 kS Equal to or greater than 30 kS
(Tip to Ring, Tip to GND, Ring (Tip to Ring, Tip to GND, Ring
to GND). to GND)
Effective loss See pad table See pad table

Table 287 "Electrical characteristics" (page 773) lists the electrical

characteristics of the trunk interface on the E and M Trunk card.

Table 287
Electrical characteristics
Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk
Signaling range Type I 150 ohms Type I 150 ohms
Type II 300 ohms loop
Signaling type Type I, Type II Type I
Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V dc –42 to –52.5 V dc
Near-end battery –42.75 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.5 V dc
Ground potential difference ±10 V dc ±10 V dc
Line leakage between E lead and Š20K1/2 ³20K1/2
ground
Effective loss See pad table (Table 307 See pad table (Table 307
"Pad switching algorithm" "Pad switching algorithm"
(page 792)) (page 792))
Terminating impedance 600 ohms 600 ohms
Balance impedance N/A 600 ohms

Table 287 "Electrical characteristics" (page 773) lists the electrical

characteristics of the trunk interface on the E and M Trunk card.

Table 288
Electrical characteristics of the E and M Trunk interface
Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk
Signaling range Type I 150 ohms Type I 150 ohms
Type II 300 ohms loop
Signaling type Type I, Type II Type I

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 774 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Characteristic 4-wire trunk 2-wire trunk

Far-end battery –42 to –52.5 V dc –42 to –52.5 V dc
Near-end battery –42.75 to –52.5 V dc –42.75 to –52.5 V dc
Ground potential difference ±10 V dc ±10 V dc
Line leakage between E lead Š20K ohms ³20K ohms
and ground
Effective loss See pad table See pad table
(Table 307 "Pad switching (Table 307 "Pad switching
algorithm" (page 792)) algorithm" (page 792))
Terminating impedance 600 ohms 600 ohms
Balance impedance N/A 600 ohms

Power requirements
Table 289 "Power requirements" (page 774) lists the power requirements
for the E and M Trunk card.

Table 289
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Max current
+15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA
–15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA
+8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA
–48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA

Table 290 "Power requirements" (page 774) lists the power requirements
for the E and M Trunk card.

Table 290
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Max current
+15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA
–15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA
+8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA
–48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA

Table 290 "Power requirements" (page 774) lists the power requirements
for the E and M Trunk card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 775

Table 291
Power requirements
Voltage Tolerance Max current
+15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA
–15.0 V dc ±5% 200 mA
+8.5 V dc ±2% 200 mA
–48.0 V dc ±5 % 415 mA

Power requirements for the NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card are specified in
Table 292 "Power requirements" (page 775).

Table 292
Power requirements
Idle Active
Voltage Tolerance Current Current
+/- 15.0 V DC +/- 5% 200mA 200 mA
+ 8.5 V DC +/- 2% 200 mA 200 mA
- 48.0 V DC +/- 5% 415 mA 415 mA
+5.0 V DC N/A N/A N/A

Environmental specifications
Table 293 "Environmental specifications" (page 775) provides the
environmental specifications for the E and M Trunk card.

Table 293
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 degrees C
(32 to +140 degrees F), ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C
(–40 to +158 degrees F)

Table 294 "Environmental specifications" (page 775) provides the

environmental specifications for the E and M Trunk card.

Table 294
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0 to +60 degrees C
(32 to +140 degrees F), ambient

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 776 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Parameter Specifications
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (noncondensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C
(–40 to +158 degrees F)

Table 295
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C
(–40 to +158 degrees F)

Environmental specifications are provided in Table 296 "Environmental

specifications" (page 776).

Table 296
Environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 0– 50 degrees C,ambient
Operating humidity 5 to 95% RH (non condensing)
Storage temperature –40 to +70 degrees C

Foreign and surge voltage protection

The E and M Trunk card meets CS03 over-voltage (power cross)
specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

The E and M Trunk card meets CS03 over-voltage (power cross)

specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

The E and M Trunk card meets CS03 over-voltage (power cross)

specifications and FCC Part 68 requirements.

The E and M trunk circuit meets CS03 over voltage (power cross)
specifications.

Connector pin assignments

The E and M Trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane
through a 160-pin connector shroud.The backplane is cabled to the I/O
panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 777

Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk card at the MDF using a
wiring plan similar to that used for line cards.

A typical connection example is shown in Figure 252 "E and M Trunk card
- typical cross connection example" (page 779). A list of the connections
to the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table
297 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 777).
A list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire
modes is shown in Table 298 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for
4-wire modes" (page 777).

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for complete I/O connector
information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Table 297
E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes
2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode
Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring
15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M
1 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring
19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M
2 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring
65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M
3 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring
69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M

Table 298
E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes
4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode
Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB
13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB
14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB
15B ECG 15A ESCG 15B MA 15A MB

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 778 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode

Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB
17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB
18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB
19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB
2 62B TA 62A TB 62B TA 62A TB
63B RA 63A RB 63B RA 63A RB
64B E 64A M 64B EA 64A EB
65B ECG 65A ESCG 65B MA 65A MB
3 66B TA 66A TB 66B TA 66A TB
67B RA 67A RB 67B RA 67A RB
68B E 68A M 68B EA 68A EB
69B ECG 69A ESCG 69B MA 69A MB

The E and M Trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the IPE backplane
through a 160-pin connector shroud. The backplane is cabled to the I/O
panel on the rear of the module, which is then connected to the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF) by 25-pair cables.

Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk card at the MDF using a
wiring plan similar to that used for line cards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 779

Figure 252
E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example

A typical connection example is shown in Figure 253 "E and M Trunk card -
typical cross connection example" (page 782); a list of the connections to
the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 299
"E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 780); and
a list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire
modes is shown in Table 300 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for
4-wire modes" (page 780).

See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System

Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for more detailed I/O panel
connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 780 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 299
E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes
2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode
Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring
15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M
1 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring
19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M
2 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring
65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M
3 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring
69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M

Table 300
E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes
4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode
Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB
13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB
14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB
15B ECG 15A ESCG 15B MA 15A MB
1 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB
17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB
18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB
19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB
2 62B TA 62A TB 62B TA 62A TB
63B RA 63A RB 63B RA 63A RB
64B E 64A M 64B EA 64A EB
65B ECG 65A ESCG 65B MA 65A MB
3 66B TA 66A TB 66B TA 66A TB
67B RA 67A RB 67B RA 67A RB
68B E 68A M 68B EA 68A EB
69B ECG 69A ESCG 69B MA 69A MB

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 781

The E and M Trunk card brings the four analog trunks to the backplane
through a 160-pin connector shroud. External equipment connects to the
card at the back of the Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion
using a 25-pin connector. Telephone trunks connect to the E and M Trunk
card at the MDF using a wiring plan similar to that used for line cards.

A typical connection example is shown in Figure 253 "E and M Trunk card -
typical cross connection example" (page 782). A list of the connections to
the E and M Trunk card in the various 2-wire modes is shown in Table 299
"E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes" (page 780). A
list of the connections to the E and M Trunk card in the various 4-wire modes
is shown in Table 300 "E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire
modes" (page 780). See Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1
Large System Installation and Configuration (NN43021-310) for complete
I/O connector information and wire assignments for each tip/ring pair.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 782 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 253
E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 783

Figure 254
E and M Trunk card - typical cross connection example

Table 301
E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 2-wire modes
2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode
Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
0 12B Tip 12A Ring 12B Tip 12A Ring
15B A 15A PG 14B E 14A M
1 16B Tip 16A Ring 16B Tip 16A Ring
19B A 19A PG 18B E 18A M
2 62B Tip 62A Ring 62B Tip 62A Ring
65B A 65A PG 64B E 64A M

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 784 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

2-wire Paging Mode 2-wire Type I Mode

Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
3 66B Tip 66A Ring 66B Tip 66A Ring
69B A 69A PG 48B E 68A M

Table 302
E and M Trunk card - backplane pinouts for 4-wire modes
4-wire Type I Mode 4-wire Type II Mode
Trunk
Number Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal
0 12B TA 12A TB 12B TA 12A TB
13B RA 13A RB 13B RA 13A RB
14B E 14A M 14B EA 14A EB
15B ECG 15A ESCG 15B MA 15A MB
1 16B TA 16A TB 16B TA 16A TB
17B RA 17A RB 17B RA 17A RB
18B E 18A M 18B EA 18A EB
19B ECG 19A ESCG 19B MA 19A MB
2 62B TA 62A TB 62B TA 62A TB
63B RA 63A RB 63B RA 63A RB
64B E 64A M 64B EA 64A EB
65B ECG 65A ESCG 65B MA 65A MB
3 66B TA 66A TB 66B TA 66A TB
67B RA 67A RB 67B RA 67A RB
68B E 68A M 68B EA 68A EB
69B ECG 69A ESCG 69B MA 69A MB

Configuration
Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M Trunk card can be individually
configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss
compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and
configuration software service entries.

The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 255 "E and M Trunk card -
jumper locations" (page 786).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 785

Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M trunk card can be individually
configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss
compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and
configuration software service entries.

The locations of the jumpers are shown in Figure 255 "E and M Trunk card -
jumper locations" (page 786).

Each of the four trunk circuits on the E and M trunk card can be individually
configured for trunk type, companding mode, and port-to-port loss
compensation. Configuring the card requires both jumper changes and
configuration software service entries.

Jumper settings
The NT8D15 E and M Trunk card serves various transmission requirements.
The four units on the card can operate in A-Law or µ-Law companding
modes, which are selected by service change entries. Each unit can be
independently configured for 2-wire E and M, 4-wire E and M, and paging
trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service change entries and
jumper strap settings.

See Table 303 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page 787).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 786 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 255
E and M Trunk card - jumper locations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 787

Table 303
E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings
Mode of operation (Note 2)
2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk
DX tip & ring pair
Jumper M—rcv E—rcv
(Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II E—xmt M—xmt
J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3
J2.X On On (Note 3) On On Off Off
J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2
J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J6.X Off Off Off Off On On
J7.X Off Off Off Off On On
J8.X Off Off Off Off On On
J9.X Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 Pins 1–2
Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all four units; "X" indicates the unit number,
0–3.
Note: "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable.
Note: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance is greater than 2500
ohms.

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card serves various transmission requirements.

The four units on the card can operate in A-Law or µ-Law companding
modes, which are selected by service change entries. Each unit can be
independently configured for 2-wire E and M, 4-wire E and M, and paging
trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service change entries and
jumper strap settings.

See Table 304 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page 788) and
Figure 255 "E and M Trunk card - jumper locations" (page 786).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 788 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Table 304
E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings
Mode of operation (Note 2)
2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk
DX tip & ring pair
Jumper M—rcv E—rcv
(Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II E—xmt M—xmt
J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3
J2.X On On On On Off Off
(Note 3)
J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2
J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J6.X Off Off Off Off On On
J7.X Off Off Off Off On On
J8.X Off Off Off Off On On
J9.X Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 Pins 1–2
Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all four units; "X" indicates the unit number,
0–3.
Note: "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable.
Note: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance is greater than 2500
ohms.

The NT8D15 E and M Trunk Card serves various transmission requirements.

The four units on the card can operate in A-Law or Mu-Law companding
modes, which are selected by service change entries. Each unit can be
independently configured for 2-wire E and M, 4-wire E and M, and paging
trunk types. The trunk type is selected by service change entries and
jumper strap settings. See Table 304 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap
settings" (page 788).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 789

Table 305
E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings
Mode of operation (Note 2)
2-wire trunk 4-wire trunk
DX tip & ring pair
Jumper M—rcv E—rcv
(Note 1) Type I Paging Type I Type II E—xmt M—xmt
J1.X Off Off Off Off Pins 1–2 Pins 2–3
J2.X On On On On Off Off
(Note 3)
J3.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J4.X Off Off Off Off Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2
J5.X Off Off Off Off (Note 4) (Note 4)
J6.X Off Off Off Off On On
J7.X Off Off Off Off On On
J8.X Off Off Off Off On On
J9.X Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 2–3 Pins 1–2 Pins 1–2
Note: Jumper strap settings J1.X through J9.X apply to all four units; "X" indicates the unit number,
0–3.
Note: "Off" indicates that no jumper strap is installed on a jumper block.
Note: Paging trunk mode is not zone selectable.
Note: Jumper strap installed in this location only if external loop resistance is greater than 2500
ohms.

Software service entries

The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in Route Data
Block, Automatic Trunk Maintenance (LD 16). The companding mode is
selected by making service change entries in Trunk Data Block (LD 14).

Refer to Table 303 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page
787) to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed.

The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in the Trunk
Route Administration Program LD 16. The companding mode is selected by
making service change entries in the Trunk Administration Program LD 14.

Refer to Table 304 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page
788) to select the proper values for the trunk type being employed.

Refer to Meridian 1 Software Input/Output Reference — Administration

(NN43001-611) for LD 14 and LD 16 service change instructions.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 790 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The trunk type is selected by making service change entries in the Route
Data Block Program LD 16. The companding mode is selected by making
service change entries in the Trunk Data Block Program (LD 14). Refer to
Table 304 "E and M Trunk card - jumper strap settings" (page 788) to select
the proper values for the trunk type being employed. Refer to the Software
Input/Output Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for LD 14 and
LD 16 service change instructions.

Port-to-port loss configuration

Loss parameters are selected on the E and M Trunk card by a switchable
pad controlled by CODEC emulation software. The pads settings are called
"in" and "out." Pad settings are determined by the three factors listed below
(the first two are under direct user control; the third is controlled indirectly):
• Class of Service is assigned in LD 14.
• Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire
setting provides 0.5 dB more loss in each direction of transmission for
echo control).
Note: Facilities associated with the Nortel Electronic Switched
Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum
transmission; so, the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the
ESN setting. However, the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks
using the ESN feature. Conversely, the 2-wire setting, often called
non-ESN, can be used on certain trunks in an ESN environment.

• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis

of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user.

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of

service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss
(VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL).
The VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing VNL. The
non-VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing TRC
(Transmission Compensated) or NTC (Non-Transmission Compensated).
Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as
tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable
pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire
non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or
when impedance compensation is not provided.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 791

See Table 306 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 791) for the pad switching
control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss
introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card and any other
IPE port designated as Port B.
Figure 256 "Pad orientation" (page 791) shows the pad switching orientation.

Table 306
Pad switching algorithm
Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Port B to E and M to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D E and M Port B
IPE line N/A N/A Out In 2.5 3.5
Universal Out Out In In 0 0
trunk (TRC)
IPE TIE (VNL) In Out In Out 0 0
Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the system. Transmit is from the system to
the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card). Receive is to the system
from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E and M Trunk card).

Loss parameters are selected on the E and M trunk card by a switchable

pad controlled by Codec emulation software. For convenience in this
discussion, the pads settings are called "in" and "out." Pad settings are
determined by the three factors listed below: the first two are under direct
user control; the third is controlled indirectly.
Figure 256
Pad orientation

• Class of service is assigned in LD 14.

• Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire
setting provides 0.5 dB more loss in each direction of transmission for
echo control).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 792 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Note: Facilities associated with the Nortel Networks Electronic

Switched Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum
transmission; so the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the
ESN setting. However, the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks
using the ESN feature. Conversely, the 2-wire setting, often called
non-ESN, can be used on certain trunks in an ESN environment.

• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis

of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user.

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of

service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss
(VNL) or not Via Net Loss (non-VNL).
The VNL class of service is assigned at the prompt CLS with the response
VNL. The non-VNL class of service is assigned at prompt CLS by selecting
either the Transmission Compensated (TRC) or Non-Transmission
Compensated (NTC) response.
Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as
TIE trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable
pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire
non-VNL facility
• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or
when impedance compensation is not provided

See Table 307 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 792) for the pad switching
control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port loss
introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card and any other
IPE or PE port designated as Port B.
Figure 257 "Pad orientation" (page 793) shows the pad switching orientation.

Table 307
Pad switching algorithm
Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Port B to E and M to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D E and M Port B
IPE line N/A N/A Out In 2.5 3.5
Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1. Transmit is from the
Meridian 1 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card). Receive is
to the Meridian 1 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E and M Trunk card).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 793

Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)

Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Port B to E and M to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D E and M Port B
Universal Out Out In In 0 0
trunk (TRC)
IPE TIE (VNL) In Out In Out 0 0
PE line N/A N/A Out In 3.0 4.0
PE CO/FX/W Out Out In In 0 0
ATS (TRC)
PE TIE Out Out In In 0 0
Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the Meridian 1. Transmit is from the
Meridian 1 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card). Receive is
to the Meridian 1 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E and M Trunk card).

Figure 257
Pad orientation

Loss parameters are selected on the E and M trunk card by a switchable

pad controlled by CODEC emulation software. The pads settings are called
"in" and "out." Pad settings are determined by the three factors listed below:
the first two are under direct user control; the third is controlled indirectly.
• Class of Service is assigned in LD 14.
• Facility termination is selected (2-wire or 4-wire) in LD 14 (the 2-wire
setting provides 0.5 dB more loss in each direction of transmission for
echo control).
Note: Facilities associated with the Nortel Networks Electronic
Switched Network (ESN) are recommended to be 4-wire for optimum
transmission so, the 4-wire setting is generally referred to as the
ESN setting. However, the 4-wire setting is not restricted to networks
using the ESN feature. Conversely, the 2-wire setting, often called
non-ESN, can be used on certain trunks in an ESN environment.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 794 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

• Port-to-port connection loss is automatically set by software on the basis

of the port type selected in LD 16; only the port type is set by the user.

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by the class of

service assigned in LD 14. Transmission properties can be Via Net Loss
(VNL) or non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL).
The VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing VNL. The
non-VNL class of service is assigned at the CLS prompt by typing TRC
(Transmission Compensated) or NTC (Non-Transmission Compensated).
Non-VNL trunks are assigned a TRC or NTC class of service to ensure
stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul trunks, such as
tie trunks. The class of service determines the operation of the switchable
pads contained in each unit. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a 2-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB, or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a 4-wire
non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a 2-wire, non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB, or
when impedance compensation is not provided.

See Table 307 "Pad switching algorithm" (page 792) for the pad switching
control for the various through connections and the actual port-to-port
loss introduced for connections between the E and M Trunk card and any
other IPE port designated as Port B. Figure 258 "Pad orientation" (page
795) shows the pad switching orientation.

Table 308
Pad switching algorithm
Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)
Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Port B to E and M to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D E and M Port B
IPE line N/A N/A Out In 2.5 3.5
Universal Out Out In In 0 0
trunk (TRC)
IPE tie (VNL) In Out In Out 0 0
PE line N/A N/A Out In 3.0 4.0
Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the CS 1000. Transmit is from the CS
1000 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card). Receive is to the
CS 1000 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E and M Trunk card).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 795

Port B pads E and M Trunk Pads Port-to-port loss (dB)

Transmit Receive Transmit Receive Port B to E and M to
Port B D to A A to D D to A A to D E and M Port B
PE CO/FX/W Out Out In In 0 0
ATS (TRC)
PE tie Out Out In In 0 0
Note: Transmit and receive designations are from and to the CS 1000. Transmit is from the CS
1000 to the external facility (digital-to-analog direction in the E and M Trunk card). Receive is to the
CS 1000 from the external facility (analog-to-digital direction in the E and M Trunk card).

Figure 258
Pad orientation

Applications
The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each
trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to
Features and Services (NN43001-106-B) for information about assigning
features and services to trunks.

The optional applications, features and signaling arrangements for each

trunk are assigned through unique route and trunk data blocks. Refer to
Features and Services (NN43001-106-B) for information about assigning
features and services to trunks.

PAD switching
The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by
class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The
assignment may be non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL) or via Net Loss (VNL). To
ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul VNL (Tie)
trunks, non-VNL trunks are assigned either Transmission Compensated
(TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 796 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable
pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-wire
non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB or
when impedance compensation is not provided.

Table 309 "Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)"
(page 796) shows the insertion loss from IPE port to IPE port.

Table 309
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

The transmission properties of each trunk are characterized by

class-of-service (COS) assignments in the trunk data block (LD 14). The
assignment may be non-Via Net Loss (non-VNL) or via Net Loss (VNL). To
ensure stability and minimize echo when connecting to long-haul VNL (Tie)
trunks, non-VNL trunks are assigned either Transmission Compensated
(TRC) or Non-Transmission Compensated (NTC) class-of-service.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 797

The TRC and NTC COS options determine the operation of the switchable
pads contained in the trunk circuits. They are assigned as follows:
• TRC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of greater than 2
dB or for which impedance compensation is provided, or for a four-wire
non-VNL facility.
• NTC for a two-wire non-VNL trunk facility with a loss of less than 2 dB or
when impedance compensation is not provided.

In Option 11C systems, Table 310 "Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE
Ports (measured in dB)" (page 797) shows the insertion loss from IPE port
to IPE port.

Table 310
Insertion Loss from IPE Ports to IPE Ports (measured in dB)

Paging trunk operation

When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided
paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed
by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 798 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

control leads PG and A. See Figure 259 "Paging trunk operation" (page
798). In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier
system to the transmission path of the trunk.

Figure 259
Paging trunk operation

When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided

paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed
by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across
control leads PG and A1. See Figure 260 "Paging trunk operation" (page
799).

In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier system
to the transmission path of the trunk.

When used in the paging mode, a trunk is connected to a customer-provided

paging amplifier system (not zone selectable). When the trunk is accessed
by dial-up or attendant-key operation, it provides a loop closure across
control leads PG and A1. See Figure 261 "Paging trunk operation" (page
800). In a typical application, this transfers the input of the paging amplifier
system to the transmission path of the trunk.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 799

When used in the Paging mode the trunk circuit is connected to a

customer-provided paging amplifier system. When the trunk is accessed by
dial up or attendant key operation, it provides a loop closure across control
leads A and B. In a typical application, it transfers the input of the paging
amplifier system to the transmission path of the Trunk.

Figure 260
Paging trunk operation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 800 NT8D15 E and M Trunk card

Figure 261
Paging trunk operation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 801

NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle

Board
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 801)

"Physical description" (page 802)

"Functional description" (page 803)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 805)

"Configuring the SDI paddle board" (page 805)

"Applications" (page 809)

Introduction
The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface (SDI) paddle board provides two
RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the
system and two external devices. The SDI paddle board is usually used to
connect the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 system to the system
administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the
system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a
modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call Detail Recording
(CDR) features.
The SDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the
backplane of the following modules:
• NT5D21 Core/Network module
• NT6D39 CPU/Network module
• NT9D11 Core/Network module

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 802 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but
can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support
20 mA current loop interface.

Physical description
The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board
measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 262 "NT8D41AA
SDI paddle board" (page 803).
Up to two paddle boards can be used in a system backplane for a total
of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging
standard serial cards into standard system slots. The two serial ports on
each card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2
and 3, up to 14 and 15).
The front edge of the card has two serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable
switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates that the card has been
disabled. It is lit when the following occurs:
• the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable
• both ports are disabled in software
• the ports are not configured in the configuration record

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 803

Figure 262
NT8D41AA SDI paddle board

Functional description
The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports.
These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf
using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the
system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.

The SDI paddle board contains two Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the
UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 263 "NT8D41AA SDI

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 804 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

paddle board block diagram" (page 804). Other logic on the card includes
two baud rate generators, two RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the
switches and logic needed to configure the UARTs.

Figure 263
NT8D41AA SDI paddle board block diagram

System considerations
In dual-processor systems, the SDI paddle board behaves differently
depending on which backplane socket it is installed in. Installing the paddle
board into a socket in the network area of the backplane allows it to work
when either of the system processors is active. Installing the paddle board
into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only when
that CPU is active.

The SDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network
area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the
system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches
automatically each night at midnight, and whenever a fault occurs on the
active CPU card.

The SDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of
the backplane. This is done when performing maintenance or an upgrade
on the system. The SDI paddle board is plugged into the CPU that is not
the active system CPU. One of the serial ports on the SDI paddle board is
then connected to a maintenance terminal and the CPU board is put into
maintenance mode. Diagnostics can then be run from the maintenance

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the SDI paddle board 805

terminal without having to stop the system. This is also used to perform a
parallel reload of the system software without affecting the operation of
the switch.

Connector pin assignments

The RS-232-C signals for port 1 are brought out on connector J1 and
the RS-232-C signals for port 2 are brought out on connector J2. The
pinouts of J1 and J2 are identical, so Table 311 "Connectors J1 and J2 pin
assignments" (page 805) can be used for both ports.

Table 311
Connectors J1 and J2 pin assignments
Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
1 CD Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier detect (Not used)
2 RD Transmitted data Received data
3 TD Received data Transmitted data
4 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)
5 GND Ground Ground
6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
7 RTS Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2)
8 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on
the SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.
Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the
SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Configuring the SDI paddle board

Configuring the SDI paddle board consists of setting these option switches
for each serial port:
• Port address
• Baud rate
• DTE/DCE/Fiber mode

The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figure 264 "SDI
paddle board option switch locations" (page 808) identifies the location of
option switches on the SDI paddle board. Instructions for setting these
switches are in the section that follows.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 806 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured
to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in "Software service
changes" (page 808)".

Option switch settings

Address
Address select switch SW4 and logic on the card always address the two
UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The
settings for this switch are shown in Table 312 "SDI paddle board address
switch settings" (page 806).

Table 312
SDI paddle board address switch settings
Address Switch SW4
Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4
0 1 off on on on
2 3 off on on off
4 5 off on off on
6 7 off on off off
8 9 off off on on
10 11 off off on off
12 13 off off off on
14 15 off off off off

Baud rate
Switches SW2 and SW3 determine the baud rate for each individual port.
The settings for these switches are shown in Table 313 "SDI paddle board
baud rate switch settings" (page 806).

Table 313
SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings

Baud Port 1 - SW2 Port 2 - SW3

rate 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
150 off off on on off off on on
300 off on off on off on off on
600 off off off on off off off on
1200 off on on off off on on off
2400 off off on off off off on off
4800 off on off off off on off off
9600 off off off off off off off off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the SDI paddle board 807

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE
equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card.
Instructions for setting the switches SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown
in Table 314 "NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings" (page 807).

Table 314
NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings
Port 1 - SW5 Port 1 - SW6
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off off off off on on on on
Port 2 – SW7 Port 2 – SW8
DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off off off off on on on on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 808 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 264
SDI paddle board option switch locations

Software service changes

Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system,
the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done
using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running
the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 809

Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the
Configuration Record program LD 17, are shown in "LD 17 - Serial port
configuration parameters." (page 809). These parameters must be set for
each port if both ports are being used.

LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change configuration
TYPE: CFN Configuration type
IOTB YES Change input/output devices
ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x
= 0 to 15.
NEW PRT x
CDNO 1–16 Use the SDI paddle board number to keep track of all ports.
DENS DDEN Double density SDI paddle board
USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on
the software being used. See the Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611) for details.
XSM (NO) YES Port is used for the system monitor.

Applications
The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the
switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals.
Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s
two serial ports.
The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to
the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is
located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.
Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a
remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is
used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command
Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem
to the asynchronous port.
The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to
adapt the paddle board to a non-standard pinout DB-9 connector (normally
located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect
the non-standard DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connector. See Figure 265 "SDI paddle board cabling"
(page 810). The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface (SDI) paddle board
provides two RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 810 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

between the Meridian 1 system and two external devices. The SDI paddle
board is usually used to connect the Meridian 1 system to the system
administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the
system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a
modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution ( ACD) or Call Detail Recording
( CDR) features.
The SDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the
backplane of the following modules:
• NT5D21 Core/Network Module for system Options 51C, 61C, and 81C
• NT6D39 CPU/Network Module for system Options 51 and 61
• NT8D11 Common/Peripheral Equipment (CE/PE) Module for system
Options 21, 21A, and 21E
• NT9D11 Core/Network Module for system Option 61C

Figure 265
SDI paddle board cabling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 811

The SDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but
can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does
not support 20 mA current loop interface.

Physical description
The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit board
measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 266 "NT8D41AA
SDI paddle board" (page 812).
Up to two paddle boards can be used in a system backplane for a total
of four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging
standard serial cards into standard system slots. The two serial ports on
each card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2
and 3, up to 14 and 15).
The front edge of the card has two serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable
switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates that the card has been
disabled. It is lit when the following occurs:
• the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable
• both ports are disabled in software
• the ports are not configured in the configuration record

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 812 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 266
NT8D41AA SDI paddle board

Functional description
The NT8D41AA SDI paddle board has two asynchronous serial ports.
These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf
using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the
Meridian 1 system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system
processor.

The SDI paddle board contains two Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the
UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 267 "NT8D41AA SDI

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 813

paddle board block diagram" (page 813). Other logic on the card includes
two baud rate generators, two RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the
switches and logic needed to configure the UARTs.

Figure 267
NT8D41AA SDI paddle board block diagram

System considerations
In dual-processor Meridian 1 systems, the SDI paddle board behaves
differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed in. Installing
the paddle board into a socket in the network area of the backplane allows
it to work when either of the system processors is active. Installing the
paddle board into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to
work only when that CPU is active.

The SDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network
area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the
system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches
automatically each night at midnight, and whenever a fault occurs on the
active CPU card.

The SDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area of
the backplane. This is done when performing maintenance or an upgrade
on the Meridian 1 system. The SDI paddle board is plugged into the CPU
that is not the active system CPU. One of the serial ports on the SDI
paddle board is then connected to a maintenance terminal and the CPU
board is put into maintenance mode. Diagnostics can then be run from

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 814 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

the maintenance terminal without having to stop the system. This is also
used to perform a parallel reload of the system software without affecting
the operation of the switch.

Connector pin assignments

The RS-232-C signals for port 1 are brought out on connector J1 and
the RS-232-C signals for port 2 are brought out on connector J2. The
pinouts of J1 and J2 are identical, so Table 315 "Connectors J1 and J2 pin
assignments" (page 814) can be used for both ports.

Table 315
Connectors J1 and J2 pin assignments
Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
1 C Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier detect (Not used)
D
2 R Transmitted data Received data
D
3 T Received data Transmitted data
D
4 D Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)
T
R
5 G Ground Ground
N
D
6 D Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
S
R
7 R Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2)
T
S
8 C Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
T
S
Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on
the SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.
Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the
SDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the SDI paddle board 815

Configuring the SDI paddle board

Configuring the SDI paddle board to work in a Meridian 1 system consists of
setting these option switches for each serial port:
• Port address
• Baud rate
• DTE/DCE/Fiber mode

The SDI paddle board has seven option switches, SW 2–8. Figure 268 "SDI
paddle board option switch locations" (page 817) identifies the location of
option switches on the SDI paddle board. Instructions for setting these
switches are in the section that follows.

Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured
to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in ""Software service
changes" (page 808)".

Option switch settings

Address
Address select switch SW4 and logic on the card always address the two
UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 15 and 16. The
settings for this switch are shown in Table 316 "SDI paddle board address
switch settings" (page 815).

Table 316
SDI paddle board address switch settings
Address Switch SW4
Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4
0 1 off on on on
2 3 off on on off
4 5 off on off on
6 7 off on off off
8 9 off off on on
10 11 off off on off
12 13 off off off on
14 15 off off off off

Baud rate
Switches SW2 and SW3 determine the baud rate for each individual port.
The settings for these switches are shown in Table 317 "SDI paddle board
baud rate switch settings" (page 816).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 816 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Table 317
SDI paddle board baud rate switch settings

Baud Port 1 – SW2 Port 2 – SW3

rate 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
150 off off on on off off on on
300 off on off on off on off on
600 off off off on off off off on
1200 off on on off off on on off
2400 off off on off off off on off
4800 off on off off off on off off
9600 off off off off off off off off

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE
equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network card.
Instructions for setting the switches SW5, SW6, SW7, and SW8 are shown
in Table 318 "NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings" (page 816).

Table 318
NT8D41AA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings
Port 1 – SW5 Port 1 – SW6
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off off off on on on on
Port 2 – SW7 Port 2 – SW8
DTE (terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on off off off off on on on on

Software service changes

Once the NT8D41 SDI paddle board has been installed in the system,
the system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done
using the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running
the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the SDI paddle board 817

Figure 268
SDI paddle board option switch locations

Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the
Configuration Record program LD 17, are shown in Table 319 "Serial port
configuration parameters" (page 818). These parameters must be set for
each port if both ports are being used.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 818 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Table 319
Serial port configuration parameters
Prompt Response Description
REQ CHG Change configuration.
TYPE CFN Configuration type.
IOTB YES Change input/output devices.
ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x
= 0 to 15.
New PRT x
CDNO 1–16 Use the SDI paddle board number to keep track of all ports.
DENS DDEN Double density SDI paddle board.
USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend on
the software being used. See the Software Input/Output Reference
— Administration (NN43001-611) for details.
XSM Yes, (No) Port is used for the system monitor.

Applications
The NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect the
Meridian 1 switch to a variety of communications devices, printers, and
peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of
the card’s two serial ports.

The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the Meridian
1 switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection
if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote
maintenance.

Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a

remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is
used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command
Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem
to the asynchronous port.

The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to
adapt the paddle board to a non-standard pinout DB-9 connector (normally
located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect the
non-standard DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C standard
DB-25 connector. See Figure 269 "SDI paddle board cabling" (page 819).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 819

Figure 269
SDI paddle board cabling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 820 NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 821

NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface

Paddle Board
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 821)

"Physical description" (page 822)

"Functional description" (page 822)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 824)

"Configuring the QSDI paddle board" (page 825)

"Applications" (page 828)

Introduction
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides
four RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between the
system and four external devices, either DTE or DCE. The QSDI paddle
board is normally used to connect the system to the system administration
and maintenance terminal. It can also be used to connect the system to a
background terminal (used in the hotel/motel environment), a modem, or
to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call Detail Recording (CDR)
features.
The QSDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the
backplane of the following modules:
• NT5D21 Core/Network module
• NT6D39 CPU/Network module
• NT9D11 Core/Network module

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 822 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but
can only be used with the system options listed above. It does not support
the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface.

Physical description
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit
board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 270
"NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board" (page 823).
The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane for a total of
four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging
standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial ports on the
card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3,
up to 14 and 15), using switches SW15 and SW16.
The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable
switch (ENB DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status. It is lit
when the following occurs:
• the ENB DIS switch is set to disable
• all four ports are disabled in software
• all four ports are not configured in the configuration record

Functional description
The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports.
These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf
using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the
system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system processor.

The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the
UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 271 "NT8D41BA QSDI
paddle board block diagram" (page 824).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 823

Figure 270
NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board

Other logic on the card includes baud rate generators, RS-232-C

driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and logic needed to configure each
UART.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 824 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 271
NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram

System considerations
For CS 1000 4.5 and 5.0, in dual-processor systems, the 2 card slots on the
back of a CoreNet shelf supporting CP PII and CP PIV function regardless
of which CPU is active. On Release 5.0 only the CP PII and CP PIV are
supported. In Options 61C and 81C, CS 1000SG, and CS 1000MG, four
NT8D41BB can be provisioned for a total of 16 SDI ports. One port is used
for power monitoring, leaving 15 for customer use.

Connector pin assignments

The RS-232-C signals for port 1 through port 4 are brought out on connector
J1 through J4 respectively. The pinouts for each port are identical to those
for each of the other three ports. Table 320 "Connectors J1, J2, J3, and
J4 pin assignments" (page 825) shows the pin assignment that applies to
each connector.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the QSDI paddle board 825

Table 320
Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments
Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
1 DCD Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Data Carrier detect (Not used)
2 RD Transmitted data Received data
3 TD Received data Transmitted data
4 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)
5 GND Signal Ground Signal Ground
6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
7 RTS Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2)
8 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on
the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect
to a terminal device (DTE).
Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the
QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect
to a modem device (DCE).

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Configuring the QSDI paddle board to work in a system consists of setting
these option switches for each serial port:
• Baud rate
• Port address
• DTE/DCE mode

The QSDI paddle board has fourteen option switches, SW2–13, SW15-16.
Figure 270 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board" (page 823) identifies the
location of option switches on the QSDI paddle board. Learn how to set
these switches in the following sections.

Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured
to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in the section titled
"Software service changes" (page 828).

Option switch settings

Baud rate
Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports
1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 321
"NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings" (page 826).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 826 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Table 321
NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings
SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2),
SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4)
Baud Clock
Baud rate (kHz) 1 2 3 4
150 2.40 on off on on
300 4.80 on on off on
600 9.60 on off off on
1,200 19.20 on on on off
2,400 38.40 on off on off
4,800 76.80 on on off off
9,600 153.60 on off off off
19,200* 307.20 on on on on
* For future use.

Table 322
NT8D41BA address switch settings
SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings
SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 E X off off off off off off
Device 2 3 E X off off off off off on
4 5 E X off off off off on off
pair 6 7 E X off off off off on on
8 9 E X off off off on off off
addresses 10 11 E X off off off on off on
12 13 E X off off off on on off
14 15 E X off off off on on on
* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1
to ON.
+ For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

Address
Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four
UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The
settings for both switches are shown in Table 323 "NT8D41BA address
switch settings" (page 827). To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and
SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 270 "NT8D41BA QSDI
paddle board" (page 823) displays SW15 and SW16.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the QSDI paddle board 827

Table 323
NT8D41BA address switch settings
SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings
SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 E X off off off off off off
Device 2 3 E X off off off off off on
4 5 E X off off off off on off
pair 6 7 E X off off off off on on
8 9 E X off off off on off off
addresses 10 11 E X off off off on off on
12 13 E X off off off on on off
14 15 E X off off off on on on
* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1
to ON.
+ For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE
equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network
card. Instructions for setting the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6,
SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in Table 324 "NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber
switch settings" (page 827). Figure 270 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board"
(page 823) shows the location of these switches on the paddleboard.

Table 324
NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings
Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 — SW 2
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on off on off
Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on off on off
Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3 — SW 6
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 828 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 — SW 2
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on off on off
Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8
DTE (terminal) on on on off on off off on off on off on
DCE (modem) off off off on off on on off on off on off
NT1P61 (Fiber) on on on on on off on on on off on off

Software service changes

Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the
system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it, using
the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running this
program are found in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611).

Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the
Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 325 "LD 17 -
Prompts to configure the NT8D841Ba paddle board." (page 828) These
parameters must be set for each port if both ports are being used.

Table 325
LD 17 - Prompts to configure the NT8D841Ba paddle board.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change configuration
TYPE: ADAN Configuration type
ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x
= 0 to 15.
NEW PRT x
CTYPE SDI4 Quad port card
DES XQSDI Quad density QSDI paddle board.
USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered depend
on the software being used. See the Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details.
XSM (NO) YES Port is used for the system monitor.

Applications
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect
the switch to a variety of communication devices, printers, and peripherals.
Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of the card’s
two serial ports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 829

The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the switch to
the system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is
located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.
Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a
remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is
used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command
Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem
to the asynchronous port.
The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to
adapt the paddle board to a non-standard pinout DB-9 connector (normally
located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect
the non-standard DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connector. See Figure 272 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle
board cabling" (page 830).
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) paddle board provides
four RS-232-C serial ports. These ports allow communication between
the Meridian 1 system and four external devices, either DTE or DCE. The
QSDI paddle board is normally used to connect the Meridian 1 system to
the system administration and maintenance terminal. It can also be used
to connect the system to a background terminal (used in the hotel/motel
environment), a modem, or to the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) or Call
Detail Recording (CDR) features.
The QSDI paddle board mounts to a special socket on the rear of the
backplane of the following modules:
• NT5D21 Core/Network Module for system Options 51C, 61C, and 81C
• NT6D39 CPU/Network Module for system Options 51 and 61
• NT9D11 Core/Network Module for system Option 61C

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 830 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 272
NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling

The QSDI paddle board is compatible with all existing system software, but
can only be used with the Meridian 1 system options listed above. It does
not support the 110 baud rate or the 20 mA current loop interface.

Physical description
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is a printed circuit
board measuring 31.12 by 12.7 cm (12.25 by 5.0 in.). See Figure 273
"NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board" (page 832).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 831

The QSDI paddle board can be used in a system backplane for a total of
four serial ports. Up to 12 other serial ports can be added by plugging
standard serial cards into standard system slots. The serial ports on the
card are addressed as a pair of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3,
up to 14 and 15), using switches SW15 and SW16.
The front edge of the card has four serial port connectors, an Enable/Disable
switch (ENB/DIS), and a red LED. The LED indicates the card status. It is lit
when the following occurs:
• the ENB/DIS switch is set to disable
• all four ports are disabled in software
• all four ports are not configured in the configuration record

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 832 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Figure 273
NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board

Functional description
The NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board has four asynchronous serial ports.
These serial ports are connected to the I/O panel in the back of the shelf
using special adapter cables. The serial ports can be used to connect the
Meridian 1 system to a terminal, a printer, a modem, or to an other system
processor.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 833

The QSDI paddle board design contains four Universal Asynchronous

Receiver/Transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to connect the
UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 274 "NT8D41BA QSDI
paddle board block diagram" (page 833). Other logic on the card includes
baud rate generators, RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the switches and
logic needed to configure each UART.

Figure 274
NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board block diagram

System considerations
In dual-processor Meridian 1 systems, the QSDI paddle board behaves
differently depending on which backplane socket it is installed. Installing the
paddle board into a socket in the network area of the backplane allows it to
work when either of the system processors is active. Installing the paddle
board into a socket in the CPU area of the backplane allows it to work only
when that CPU is active.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 834 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

The QSDI paddle board is normally installed into a socket in the network
area of the backplane. This allows it to be accessed by either of the
system processors. This is necessary because the active CPU switches
automatically each night at midnight and whenever a fault occurs on the
active CPU card.

The QSDI paddle board can also be installed into a socket in the CPU area
of the backplane (supported in NT6D39AA shelves only). This is done when
performing maintenance or an upgrade on the Meridian 1 system.

The QSDI paddle board is plugged into the CPU that is not the active system
CPU. One of the serial ports on the QSDI paddle board is then connected to
a maintenance terminal and the CPU board is put into maintenance mode.
Diagnostics can then be run from the maintenance terminal without having
to stop the system. This is also used to perform a parallel reload of the
system software without affecting the operation of the switch.

Connector pin assignments

The RS-232-C signals for port 1 through port 4 are brought out on connector
J1 through J4 respectively. The pinouts for each port are identical to those
for each of the other three ports. Table 326 "Connectors J1, J2, J3, and
J4 pin assignments" (page 834) shows the pin assignment that applies to
each connector.

Table 326
Connectors J1, J2, J3, and J4 pin assignments
Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
1 D Data Carrier detect (Note 1) Data Carrier detect (Not used)
C
D
2 R Transmitted data Received data
D
3 T Received data Transmitted data
D
4 D Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)
T
R
Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on
the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect
to a terminal device (DTE).
Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the
QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect
to a modem device (DCE).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the QSDI paddle board 835

Pin # Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode

5 G Signal Ground Signal Ground
N
D
6 D Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
S
R
7 R Request to send (Not Used) Request to send (Note 2)
T
S
8 C Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
T
S
Note 1: In DTE mode the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on
the QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect
to a terminal device (DTE).
Note 2: In DCE mode the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts to signify that the port on the
QSDI paddle board is always ready to transmit and receive data. This mode is set to connect
to a modem device (DCE).

Configuring the QSDI paddle board

Configuring the QSDI paddle board to work in a Meridian 1 system consists
of setting these option switches for each serial port:
• Baud rate
• Port address
• DTE/DCE mode

The QSDI paddle board has fourteen option switches, SW2–13, SW15-16.
Figure 273 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board" (page 832) identifies the
location of option switches on the QSDI paddle board. Learn how to set
these switches in the following sections.

Once the board has been installed, the system software must be configured
to recognize it. Instructions for doing this are found in the section titled
"Software service changes" (page 828).

Option switch settings

Baud rate
Switches SW13, SW10, SW11, and SW12 determine the baud rate for ports
1, 2, 3, and 4, respectively. See the settings for these switches in Table 327
"NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings" (page 836).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 836 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Table 327
NT8D41BA baud rate switch settings
SW13 (port 1), SW10 (port 2),
SW11 (port 3), SW12 (port 4)
Baud Baud Clock
rate (kHz) 1 2 3 4
150 2.40 on off on on
300 4.80 on on off on
600 9.60 on off off on
1,200 19.20 on on on off
2,400 38.40 on off on off
4,800 76.80 on on off off
9,600 153.60 on off off off
19,200* 307.20 on on on on
* For future use.

Address
Switch SW15 or SW16 and logic on the card always address the four
UARTs using a pair of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3 through 14 and 15. The
settings for both switches are shown in Table 328 "NT8D41BA address
switch settings" (page 836). To avoid system problems, switches SW15 and
SW16 must not be configured identically. Figure 273 "NT8D41BA QSDI
paddle board" (page 832) displays SW15 and SW16.

Table 328
NT8D41BA address switch settings
SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings
SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 E X off off off off off off
Device 2 3 E X off off off off off on
4 5 E X off off off off on off
pair
6 7 E X off off off off on on
8 9 E X off off off on off off
addresses
10 11 E X off off off on off on
* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1
to ON.
+ For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the QSDI paddle board 837

SW15 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings

SW16 Port 3 Port 4 1* 2+ 3 4 5 6 7 8
12 13 E X off off off on on off
14 15 E X off off off on on on
* To enable ports 1 and 2, set SW15 position 1 to ON. To enable ports 3 and 4, set SW16 position 1
to ON.
+ For each X, the setting for this switch makes no difference, because it is not used.

DTE/DCE/Fiber mode
Each serial port can be configured to connect to a terminal (DTE
equipment), a modem (DCE equipment), or a Fiber Superloop Network
card. Instructions for setting the switches SW2, SW3, SW4, SW5, SW6,
SW7, SW8, and SW9 are shown in Table 329 "NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber
switch settings" (page 837). Figure 273 "NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board"
(page 832) shows the location of these switches on the paddleboard.

Table 329
NT8D41BA DTE/DCE/Fiber switch settings
Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 —SW 2
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n ff n ff ff n ff n ff n
DCE (modem) o o o o o o o o o o o o
ff ff ff n ff n n ff n ff n ff
NT1P61 (Fiber) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n n n ff n n n ff n ff
Port 2 — SW 5 Port 2 — SW4
DTE (terminal) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n ff n ff ff n ff n ff n
DCE (modem) o o o o o o o o o o o o
ff ff ff n ff n n ff n ff n ff
NT1P61 (Fiber) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n n n ff n n n ff n ff
Port 3 — SW 7 Port 3— SW 6
DTE (terminal) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n ff n ff ff n ff n ff n
DCE (modem) o o o o o o o o o o o o
ff ff ff n ff n n ff n ff n ff
NT1P61 (Fiber) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n n n ff n n n ff n ff
Port 4 — SW 9 Port 4 — SW 8

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 838 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Port 1 — SW 3 Port 1 —SW 2

Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (terminal) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n ff n ff ff n ff n ff n
DCE (modem) o o o o o o o o o o o o
ff ff ff n ff n n ff n ff n ff
NT1P61 (Fiber) o o o o o o o o o o o o
n n n n n ff n n n ff n ff

Software service changes

Once the NT8D841BA QSDI paddle board has been installed in the
system, the system software needs to be configured to recognize it, using
the Configuration Record program LD 17. Instructions for running this
program are found in Software Input/Output Reference — Administration
(NN43001-611).

Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the
Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 12 "TDS tone
tests" (page 80). These parameters must be set for each port if both ports
are being used.

Applications
The NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface paddle board is used to connect
the Meridian 1 switch to a variety of communications devices, printers, and
peripherals. Any RS-232-C compatible device can be connected to either of
the card’s two serial ports.

The standard application for the paddle board is to connect the Meridian
1 switch to the system console. This can be either a direct connection
if the console is located near the switch, or through a modem for remote
maintenance.

Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a

remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is
used, configure the modem for the dumb mode of operation (Command
Recognition OFF, Command Echo OFF) before connecting the modem
to the asynchronous port.

The serial data interface connectors on the paddle board are not RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connectors. The NT8D84AA interface cable is used to
adapt the paddle board to a non-standard pinout DB-9 connector (normally
located on the I/O panel). The NT8D93 cable is then used to connect
the non-standard DB-9 connector to a peripheral that uses a RS-232-C
standard DB-25 connector. See NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 839

Figure 275
NT8D41BA QSDI paddle board cabling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 840 NT8D41BA Quad Serial Data Interface Paddle Board

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 841

NTAG26 XMFR card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 841)

"MF signaling" (page 841)

"Physical specifications" (page 844)

Introduction
The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF
digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a central office.
The XMFR card can only operate in systems using µ-law companding.

You can install this card in any IPE slot.

MF signaling
The MF feature allows the system to receive digits for 911 or feature group
D applications.

Signaling levels
MF signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits.

Table 330 "MF frequency values" (page 841) lists the frequency values used
for received signals.

Table 330
MF frequency values
Backward direction
Digit DOD-Tx, DID-Rx
1 700 Hz + 900 Hz
2 700 HZ + 1100 Hz
3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 842 NTAG26 XMFR card

Backward direction
Digit DOD-Tx, DID-Rx
4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz
5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz
6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz
7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz
8 900 Hz +1500 Hz
9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz
0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz
KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz
STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz

XMFR receiver specifications

Table 331 "XMFR receiver specifications" (page 842) provides the operating
requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.

Table 331
XMFR receiver specifications
Coding: Mu-Law
Input sensitivity: must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO
must reject: -35 to dBmO
Frequency sensitivity: must accept: f +/- (1.5% + 5Hz)
Amplitude Twist: must accept: difference of 6dB between frequencies
Signal Duration: must accept: > 30 ms
must reject: < 10 ms
KP Signal Duration: must accept: > 55 ms
may accept: > 30 ms
must reject: < 10 ms
Signal Interruption Bridge: must ignore: < 10 ms
Time Shift between 2 frequencies: must accept: < 4 ms
(Envelop for start/stop)
Coincidence between 2 frequencies: must reject: < 10 ms
Intersignal Pause: must accept: > 25 ms
Maximum Dialling Speed: must accept: 10 signals per second

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 843

Noise Rejection: Better than: < 1/2500 calls

Error Rate in White Noise Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
SNR = -20 dB
all digits
Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
SNR = -12 dBs
all digits
ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB
56201
Error Rate from Power Lines Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
60 Hz signal @ 81 dBrnc0 (-9dBm)
or
180 Hz signal @ 68 dBrnco (-22dBm)
all digits
Tolerate Intermodulation: Must tolerate @A-B and @B-A modulation products with
a power sum
28 dB below each frequency component level of the
signals.
KP: The receiver must not respond to signals prior to KP.
KP activation Remain unlocked until ST, STP, ST2P or ST3P is received.
Multiple KP’s After the initial KP, subsequent KP’s are ignored while in
unlocked mode.
Excessive Components: If more than two valid frequencies are detected, no digit is
reported to the CPU.

The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following:

• TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access
service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0,
October 1985.
• TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell
Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 844 NTAG26 XMFR card

Physical specifications
The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are
shown in Table 332 "Physical specifications" (page 844).

Introduction
Table 332
Physical specifications
Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm)
Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm)
Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm)
Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled
Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical
Environmental considerations Meets the environment of CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and
Meridian 1 systems

The XMFR (Extended Multi-frequency receiver) card is used to receive MF

digit information. Connections are made between a PBX and a CO. The
XMFR card can only operate in systems using µ-law companding.

MF signaling
The MF feature allows the Option 11C system to receive digits for 911 or
feature group D applications.

Signaling levels
MF signaling uses pairs of frequencies to represent digits.

The following table lists the frequency values used for received signals.

Table 333
MF frequency values
Backward direction
Digit DOD-Tx, DID-Rx
1 700 Hz + 900 Hz
2 700 HZ + 1100 Hz
3 900 Hz + 1100 Hz
4 700 Hz + 1300 Hz
5 900 Hz + 1300 Hz
6 1100 Hz + 1300 Hz
7 700 Hz + 1500 Hz
8 900 Hz +1500 Hz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 MF signaling 845

Backward direction
Digit DOD-Tx, DID-Rx
9 1100 Hz + 1500 Hz
0 1300 Hz + 1500 Hz
KP 1100 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST 1500 Hz + 1700 Hz
STP(ST’) 900 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST2P(ST") 1300 Hz + 1700 Hz
ST3P(ST") 700 Hz + 1700 Hz

XMFR receiver specifications

Table 334 "XMFR receiver specifications" (page 845) provides the operating
requirements for the NTAG26 circuit card.

Table 334
XMFR receiver specifications
Coding: Mu-Law
Input sensitivity: must accept: 0 to -25 dBmO
must reject: -35 to dBmO
Frequency sensitivity: must accept: f +/- (1.5% + 5Hz)
Amplitude Twist: must accept: difference of 6dB between frequencies
Signal Duration: must accept: > 30 ms
must reject: < 10 ms
KP Signal Duration: must accept: > 55 ms
may accept: > 30 ms
must reject: < 10 ms
Signal Interruption Bridge: must ignore: < 10 ms
Time Shift between 2 frequencies: must accept: < 4 ms
(Envelop for start/stop)
Coincidence between 2 frequencies: must reject: < 10 ms
Intersignal Pause: must accept: > 25 ms
Maximum Dialling Speed: must accept: 10 signals per second
Noise Rejection: Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Error Rate in White Noise Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
SNR = -20 dB
all digits

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 846 NTAG26 XMFR card

Immunity to Impulse Noise Better than: < 1/2500 calls

Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
SNR = -12 dBs
all digits ATT Digit Simulation Test, Tape #201 from PUB
56201
Error Rate from Power Lines Better than: < 1/2500 calls
Test:
10 digit calls
nominal frequency @ -23 dBmO
ON/OFF = 50 ms/50ms
KP duration 100 ms
60 Hz signal @ 81 dBrnc0 (-9dBm)
or
180 Hz signal @ 68 dBrnco (-22dBm)
all digits
Tolerate Intermodulation: Must tolerate @A-B and @B-A modulation products with
a power sum
28 dB below each frequency component level of the
signals.
KP: The receiver must not respond to signals prior to KP.
KP activation Remain unlocked until ST, STP, ST2P or ST3P is received.
Multiple KP’s After the initial KP, subsequent KP’s are ignored while in
unlocked mode.
Excessive Components: If more than two valid frequencies are detected, no digit is
reported to the SL-1 CPU.

The XMFR receiver specifications conform to the following:

• TR-NPL-000258, Compatibility Information for F.G.D. switched access
service, Bell Communication Research Technical Reference, Issue 1.0,
October 1985.
• TR-NPL-000275, Notes on the BOC Intra-LATA Networks, Bell
Communication Research Technical Reference, Chapter 6, 1986.

Physical specifications
The physical specifications required by the NTAG26 XMFR circuit card are
shown in Table 335 "Physical specifications" (page 847):

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical specifications 847

Table 335
Physical specifications
Dimensions Height:12.5 in. (320 mm)
Depth:10.0 in. (255 mm)
Thickness:7/8 in. (22.25 mm)
Faceplate LED Lit when the circuit card is disabled
Power requirements 1.1 Amps typical
Environmental Meets the environment of Meridian 1 systems
considerations

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 848 NTAG26 XMFR card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 849

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 849)

"NTAK02 SDI/DCH card" (page 849)

Introduction
The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card
is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)
D-channel.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. It is not
supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH
cards are supported in a Media Gateway.

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

The optional SDI/DCH card provides up to four serial I/O ports, which are
grouped into two pairs:
• port 0 and port 1
• port 2 and port 3

Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI
(not supported). See Table 336 "Port configurations" (page 849). Each pair
is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 337 "Switch settings" (page 850).

Table 336
Port configurations
Port 0 SDI (not supported)
Port 1 DCH
Port 2 SDI (not supported)
Port 3 DCH

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 850 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

Table 337
Switch settings
Port 0 Port 1 SW 1-1 SW 1-2
SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF
SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON
— ESDI ON ON

Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4

SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF
SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON
— ESDI ON ON

Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace

the DCH function in the U.K.

Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is
selected from a jumper on the card. Table 338 "Jumper settings" (page
850) shows the jumper settings.

Table 338
Jumper settings
Jumper Strap for Strap for Jumper
Port location DTE DCE location RS422 RS232
0 J10 C-B B-A
C-B B-A J9 C-B B-A
1 J7 J6
C-B B-A J8 C-B B-A
2 J5 C-B B-A
J4 C-B B-A J2 C-B B-A
3
J3 C-B B-A J1 C-B B-A

Connecting to the ports

External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following:
• the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. This cable does not have to be
terminated at the cross connect terminal since it is equipped with
connectors.
• the NE-A25-B cable. Terminate the NE-A25-B cable at the cross
connect terminal. Tables Table 339 "NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the
cross-connect terminal" (page 851) through Table 342 "NTAK02
connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3" (page 852) give
the pinouts for the SDI/DCH card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 851

Table 339
NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal
RS232
Designations
Cable Signal I=Input O=Output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE
1T W-BL 0 0 — —
1R BL-W DTR DCD O I
2T W-O DSR CH/CI I O
2R O-W DCD DTR I O
3T W-G RTS CTS O I
3R G-W CTS RTS I O
4T W-BR RX TX I O
4R BR-W TX RX O I
5T W-S — — — —
5R S-W SG SG — —

Table 340
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1
RS422 RS232
Designations Designations
I=Input I=Input
Cable Signal O=Output O=Output Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
5T W-S SCTEA SCTA O I O I SCT SCT
5R S-W — — — — — — — —
6T R-BL SCTEB SCTB O I — — CH/CI —
6R BL-R DTR DCD O I — — DTR DCD
7T R-O DSR CH/CI I O I O DSR CH/CI
7R O-R DCD DTR I O I O DCD DTR
8T R-G RTS CTS O I O I RTS CTS
8R G-R CTS RTS I O I O CTS RTS
9T R-BR SCRA SCTEA I O I O SCR SCT
9R BR-R SCTA RXCA I O I O SCT —
10T R-S SCRB SCTEB I O — — — —
10R S-R SCTB RXCB I O — — — —
11T BK-BL RXDA TXDA I O I O RXD TXD
11R BL-BK TXDA RXDA O I O I TXD RXD

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 852 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

RS422 RS232
Designations Designations
I=Input I=Input
Cable Signal O=Output O=Output Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
12T BK-O RXDB TXDB I O — — — —
12R O-BK TXDB RXDB O I — — — —
25T V-S SG SG — — — — SG SG
25R S-V — — — — — — — —

Table 341
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2
RS422 RS232
Designations Designations
I=Input I=Input
Cable Signal O=Output O=Output Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
13T BK-G — — — — — —
13R G-BK — — O I DTR DCD
14T BK-BR — — I O DSR CH/CI
14R BR-BK — — I O DCD DTR
15T BK-S — — O I RTS CTS
15R S-BK — — I O CTS RTS
16T Y-BL — — I O RX TXD
16R BL-Y — — O I TX RXD
17T Y-O O I O I — —
17R O-Y — — — — SG SG

Table 342
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3
RS422 RS232
Designations Designations
I=Input I=Input
Cable Signal O=Output O=Output Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
17T Y-O SCTEA SCTA O I O I SCT SCT
17R O-Y — — — — — — — —
18T Y-G SCTEB SCTB O I — — CH/CI —
18R G-Y DTR DCD O I — — DTR DCD
19T Y-BR DSR CH/CI I O I O DSR CH/CI
19R BR-Y DCD DTR I O I O DCD DTR

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 853

RS422 RS232
Designations Designations
I=Input I=Input
Cable Signal O=Output O=Output Signal
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
20T Y-S RTS CTS O I O I RTS CTS
20R S-Y CTS RTS I O I O CTS RTS
21T V-BL SCRA SCTEA I O I O SCR SCT
21R BL-V SCTA RXCA I O I O SCT —
22T V-O SCRB SCTEB I O — — — —
22R O-V SCTB RXCB I O — — — —
23T V-G RXDA TXDA I O I O RXD TXD
23R G-V TXDA RXDA O I O I TXD RXD
24T V-BR RXDB TXDB I — — — —
OI
24R BR-V TXDB RXDB O — — — —
25T V-S — — — — — — SG SG
25R S-V SG SG — — — — — —

Characteristics of the low speed port

Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to
and from the line one bit at a time.
The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows:
• Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200
Default = 1200
• Parity: Odd, even, none
Default = none
• Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2
Default = 1
• Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, non.
Default = none
• Duplex: Full
• Interface: RS-232-D
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8
Default = 8

Characteristics of the high speed port

Ports 1 and 3 are synchronous, high speed ports with the following
characteristics:
• Baud rate: 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200; 56,000; 64,000

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 854 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

• Data bit: Transparent (1)

• Duplex: Full
• Clock: Internal or external
• Interface: RS-232-D, RS-422-A

Introduction
The NTAK02 Serial Data Interface/D-channel (SDI/DCH) digital trunk card
is supported in the Media Gateway only for the ISDN Signaling Link (ISL)
D-channel.

Up to four NTAK02 SDI/DCH cards are supported in a Media Gateway.

The NTAK02 SDI/DCH card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of the
Media Gateway. The NTAK02 SDI/DCH card is not supported in the Media
Gateway Expansion.

NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

The optional SDI/DCH card provides up to four serial I/O ports, which are
grouped into two pairs:
• port 0 and port 1
• port 2 and port 3

Ports 1 and 3 are configured as DCH. Ports 0 and 2 are configured as SDI
(not supported). See Table 343 "Port configurations" (page 854). Each pair
is controlled by a switch, as shown in Table 344 "Switch settings" (page 854).

Table 343
Port configurations
Port 0 SDI (not supported)
Port 1 DCH
Port 2 SDI (not supported)
Port 3 DCH

Table 344
Switch settings
Port 0 Port 1 SW 1-1 SW 1-2
SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF
SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON
— ESDI ON ON

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 855

Port 2 Port 3 SW 1-3 SW 1-4

SDI (not supported) DCH OFF OFF
SDI (not supported) DCH OFF ON
— ESDI ON ON

Note: Digital Private Network Signaling System DPNSS can replace

the DCH function in the U.K.

Two ports offer the option for DTE/DCE configuration. This option is
selected from a jumper on the card. Table 345 "Jumper settings" (page
855) shows the jumper settings.

Table 345
Jumper settings
Strap for Strap for Jumper
Port Jumper location DTE DCE location RS422 RS232
0 J10 C-B B-A
1 J7 J6 C-BC-B B-AB-A J9 J8 C-BC-B B-AB-A
2 J5 C-B B-A
3 J4 J3 C-BC-B B-AB-A J2 J1 C-BC-B B-AB-A

Connecting to the ports

External devices are connected to the SDI/DCH card by the following:
• the NTAK19FB four-port SDI cable. This cable does not have to be
terminated at the cross connect terminal since it is equipped with
connectors.
• the NE-A25-B cable. Terminate the NE-A25-B cable at the cross
connect terminal. Tables Table 346 "NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the
cross-connect terminal" (page 855) through Table 349 "NTAK02
connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3" (page 857) give
the pinouts for the SDI/DCH card.

Table 346
NTAK02 pinouts - Port 0 at the cross-connect terminal
RS232
Cable Designations
Signal
I=Input O=Output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE
1T W-BL 0 0 — —
1R BL-W DTR DCD O I

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 856 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

RS232
Cable Designations
Signal
I=Input O=Output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE
2T W-O DSR CH/CI I O
2R O-W DCD DTR I O
3T W-G RTS CTS O I
3R G-W CTS RTS I O
4T W-BR RX TX I O
4R BR-W TX RX O I
5T W-S — — — —
5R S-W SG SG — —

Table 347
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 1
RS422 RS232
Cabl Designations
e Designations I=I
Signal I=Input O=O Signal
nput O=Output
utput
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
5T W-S SCTEA SCTA O I O I SCT SCT
5R S-W — — — — — — — —
6T R-BL SCTEB SCTB O I — — CH/CI —
6R BL-R DTR DCD O I — — DTR DCD
7T R-O DSR CH/CI I O I O DSR CH/CI
7R O-R DCD DTR I O I O DCD DTR
8T R-G RTS CTS O I O I RTS CTS
8R G-R CTS RTS I O I O CTS RTS
9T R-BR SCRA SCTEA I O I O SCR SCT
9R BR-R SCTA RXCA I O I O SCT —
10T R-S SCRB SCTEB I O — — — —
10R S-R SCTB RXCB I O — — — —
11T BK-BL RXDA TXDA I O I O RXD TXD
11R BL-BK TXDA RXDA O I O I TXD RXD
12T BK-O RXDB TXDB I O — — — —
12R O-BK TXDB RXDB O I — — — —
25T V-S SG SG — — — — SG SG
25R S-V — — — — — — — —

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card 857

Table 348
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 2
RS422 RS232
Cabl Designations
e Designations
Signal I=Input Signal
I=Input O=Output
O=Output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
13T BK-G — — — — — —
13R G-BK — — O I DTR DCD
14T BK-BR — — I O DSR CH/CI
14R BR-BK — — I O DCD DTR
15T BK-S — — O I RTS CTS
15R S-BK — — I O CTS RTS
16T Y-BL — — I O RX TXD
16R BL-Y — — O I TX RXD
17T Y-O O I O I — —
17R O-Y — — — — SG SG

Table 349
NTAK02 connections at the cross-connect terminal - Port 3
RS422 RS232
Cabl Designatio
e Designations
Signal ns I=Input Signal
I=Input O=Output
O=Output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE

17T Y-O SCTEA SCTA O I O I SCT SCT

17R O-Y — — — — — — — —
18T Y-G SCTEB SCTB O I — — CH/CI —
18R G-Y DTR DCD O I — — DTR DCD
19T Y-BR DSR CH/CI I O I O DSR CH/CI
19R BR-Y DCD DTR I O I O DCD DTR
20T Y-S RTS CTS O I O I RTS CTS
20R S-Y CTS RTS I O I O CTS RTS
21T V-BL SCRA SCTEA I O I O SCR SCT
21R BL-V SCTA RXCA I O I O SCT —
22T V-O SCRB SCTEB I O — — — —
22R O-V SCTB RXCB I O — — — —
23T V-G RXDA TXDA I O I O RXD TXD
23R G-V TXDA RXDA O I O I TXD RXD

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 858 NTAK02 SDI/DCH card

RS422 RS232
Cabl Designatio
e Designations
Signal ns I=Input Signal
I=Input O=Output
O=Output
Pair Color DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE DTE DCE
24T V-BR RXDB TXDB I O — — — —
24R BR-V TXDB RXDB O I — — — —
25T V-S — — — — — — SG SG
25R S-V SG SG — — — — — —

Characteristics of the low speed port

Ports 0 and 2 are asynchronous, low speed ports. They transfer data to
and from the line one bit at a time.
The characteristics of the low speed port are as follows:
• Baud rate: 300; 600; 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200
Default = 1200
• Parity: Odd, even, none
Default = none
• Stop bits: 1, 1.5, 2
Default = 1
• Flow control: XON/XOFF, CTS, non.
Default = none
• Duplex: Full
• Interface: RS-232-D
• Data bits: 5, 6, 7, 8
Default = 8

Characteristics of the high speed port

Ports 1 and 3 are synchronous, high speed ports with the following
characteristics:
• Baud rate: 1200; 2400; 4800; 9600; 19,200; 56,000; 64,000
• Data bit: Transparent (1)
• Duplex: Full
• Clock: Internal or external

Interface: RS-232-D, RS-422-A

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 859

NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 859)

"Physical description" (page 860)

"Functional description" (page 867)

"Architecture" (page 869)

Introduction
The NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital trunk card is a standard-size IPE circuit
card.

The NTAK09 provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk
interface capability. The NTAK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards:
the NTAK20 clock controller and the NTAK93/NTBK51 D-channel handler
interface.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card
is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk
cards are supported in each Media Gateway.

In North America, the NTAK09 can be replaced by the NTRB21 – TMDI

(DTI/PRI/DCH) card, which is described in "NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI
card" (page 1053).

Contact your system supplier or your Nortel representative to verify that

this card is supported in your area.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 860 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

The NTAK09 is a standard-size intelligent peripheral equipment circuit card

in the Option 11C main and IP expansion cabinets. It provides 1.5Mb ISDN
primary rate interface and digital trunk interface capability. The NTAK09 can
be equipped with two daughterboards: the NTAK20 clock controller and the
NTAK93/NTBK51 D-Channel handler interface.

The NTAK09 is being replaced by the NTRB21 - TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH) which

is described in "NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card" (page 1053).

The NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI digital trunk card is a standard-size IPE circuit
card.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateways that are
clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips
can degrade voice quality.

The NTAK09 provides 1.5Mb ISDN primary rate interface and digital trunk
interface capability. The NTAK09 can be equipped with two daughterboards:
the NTAK20 clock controller and the NTAK93/NTBK51 D-channel handler
interface.

Digital trunk cards are supported only in the Media Gateway but not in the
Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported in
each Media Gateway. The NTAK09 card can be installed in Slot 1, 2, 3,
and 4 of the Media Gateway.

In North America, the NTAK09 can be replaced by the NTRB21 – TMDI

(DTI/PRI/DCH) card, which is described in "NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI
card" (page 1053).

Contact your system supplier or your Nortel Networks representative to

verify that this card is supported in your area.

Physical description
The DTI/PRI card uses a 9:5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board
with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel
daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 276
"NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card" (page 861).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 861

Figure 276
NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card

The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs
are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are
associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
The first five LEDs operate as follows:
• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then
go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 350 "NTAK09 LED
states" (page 861).

Table 350
NTAK09 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist,
the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 862 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

LED State Definition

Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode.

The DTI/PRI card uses a standard IPEsized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer

printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. It is keyed
to prevent insertion in slot 10. The clock controller and D-channel
daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors.
The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five
LEDs are associated with the NTAK09 card, the remaining two LEDs are
associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:
• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,
then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 351 "NTAK09
LED states" (page 862).

Table 351
NTAK09 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist,
the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 863

The DTI/PRI card uses a 9.5" by 12.5" multilayer printed circuit board
with buried power and ground layers. The clock controller and D-channel
daughterboards are fastened by standoffs and connectors. See Figure 277
"NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card" (page 863).
The NTAK09 DTI/PRI card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs
are associated with the NTAK09 card. The remaining two LEDs are
associated with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.
The first five LEDs operate as follows:
• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash three times and then
go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 351 "NTAK09 LED
states" (page 862).

Figure 277
NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card

Table 352
NTAK09 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK09 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK09 is not in a disabled state.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 864 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

LED State Definition

ACT On (Green) The NTAK09 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states exist,
the card is not disabled, and it is not in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTAK09 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTAK09 is not in loop-back mode.

NTAK09 DTI/PRI power on self-test

When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card
performs a self-test. The LEDs directly associated with the NTAK09 circuit
card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also
included in the power on self-test. Table 353 "NTAK09 LED states during
self-test" (page 864) provides the state of the NTAK09 LEDs during the
self-test procedure.

Table 353
NTAK09 LED states during self-test
Action LED State
Power up system Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds.
Self-test in progress Top five LEDs go out for one second.
If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash
on and off three times.
If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top
five LEDs flash on and off five times.
When the self-test is completed, the LEDs are
set to their appropriate states.

When power is applied to the NTAK09 DTI/PRI circuit card, the card
performs a self-test. The LEDs directly associated with the NTAK09 circuit
card are DIS, ACT, RED, YEL, and LBK. The clock controller LED is also
included in the power on self-test. Table 354 "NTAK09 LED states during
self-test" (page 865) provides the state of the NTAK09 LEDs during the
self-test procedure.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 865

Table 354
NTAK09 LED states during self-test
Action LED State
Power up system Top five LEDs light for eleven seconds.
Self-test in progress Top five LEDs go out for one second.
If the self-test passes, the top five LEDs flash
on and off three times.
If the self-test detects a partial failure, the top
five LEDs flash on and off five times.
When the self-test is completed, the LEDs are
set to their appropriate states.

NTAK20 power on self-test

The clock controller daughterboard LED is the second LED from the bottom
on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

When power is applied to the NTAK20 clock controller, the LED is initially
off for two seconds. If the self-test passes, the LED turns red and flashes
on and off twice.

When the self-test is completed, the LED remains red until the clock
controller is enabled. When enabled, the clock controller LED either turns
green or flashes green.

The clock controller daughterboard LED is the second LED from the bottom
on the faceplate of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

When power is applied to the NTAK20 clock controller, the LED is initially
off for two seconds. If the self-test passes, the LED turns red and flashes
on and off twice.

When the self-test is completed, the LED remains red until the clock
controller is enabled. When enabled, the clock controller LED either turns
green or flashes green.

NTAK93 self-test
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate
of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power
is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit,
indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns
green and remains steadily lit.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 866 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands

in LD 96.

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard LED is the bottom LED on the faceplate
of the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card.

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard does not perform a self-test when power
is applied to it. When power is applied, it turns red and remain steadily lit,
indicating the DCH is disabled. When the DCH is enabled, the LED turns
green and remains steadily lit.

Self-tests of the NTAK93 daughterboard are invoked manually by commands

in LD 96.

DTI/PRI local self-test

The local self-test, also called a local loopback test, checks speech path
continuity, zero code suppression, remote alarm detection, and A & B bit
signalling. This test is performed manually on a per-loop or per-channel
basis. The local loopback test performs a local logical loopback and does
not require any external loopback of the T1 signal.

The local self-test, also called a local loopback test, checks speech path
continuity, zero code suppression, remote alarm detection, and A & B bit
signalling. This test is performed manually on a per-loop or per-channel
basis. The local loopback test performs a local logical loopback and does
not require any external loopback of the T-1 signal.

Restrictions and limitations

The DCHI and DTI/PRI must be disabled before performing the self-test
on the entire DTI/PRI card. Individual channels must be disabled before
performing a self test on a particular channel.

The DCHI and DTI/PRI must be disabled before performing the self-test
on the entire DTI/PRI card. Individual channels must be disabled before
performing a self test on a particular channel.

Power requirements
The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on –12 V.

The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on –12 V.

The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on -12 V.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 867

Foreign and surge voltage protection

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility
and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the
local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for
example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used.

The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility

and the Option 11C cabinet. For public T1 facilities, this protection is
provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment
(a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly may be used.

The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T-1 carrier facility

and the CS 1000 system. For public T-1 facilities, this protection is provided
by the local operating company. In a private T-1 facility environment (a
campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used.

The NTAK09 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Functional description
NTAK09 provides the following features and functions:
• configurable parameters, including A-Law and µ-Law operation, digital
pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe
formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communication
• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 868 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps

inverted.
• self-test

NTAK09 provides the following features and functions:

• configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a
per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted.
• self-test

NTAK09 provides the following features and functions:

• configurable parameters, including A-Law and Mu-Law operation, digital
pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe
formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end
• echo canceler interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 869

• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted.
• self-test

Architecture
Signaling interface
The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels
and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of
transmission are three bytes long.

The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels

and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of
transmission are three bytes long.

The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels

and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of
transmission are three bytes long.

Interconnection
The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5 Mb carrier cable.

The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension,

is also available.

The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5 Mb carrier cable

(A0394216).

The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension,

is also available if required.

The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5 Mb carrier cable. The

NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension, is also
available.

Microprocessor
The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the
following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides
orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering
constraints.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 870 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for

DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into
T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk
is originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test

The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the

following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides
orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering
constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into
T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk
is originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test

The NTAK09 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the

following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides
orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering
constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 871

• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into
T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk
is originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test

Digital pad
The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer
function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital
pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-Law coding. There are 32
combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and
A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level
plan. See Table 355 "Digital pad values and offset allocations" (page 871).

Table 355
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB –7db
1 2dB –8db
2 3dB –9db
3 4dB –10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 –1dB 10db
8 –3dB 11db
9 –4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D –2dB spare
E –5db spare
F –6db spare

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 872 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer

function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital
pad accommodates both µ255-law and A-Law coding. There are 32
combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and
A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level
plan.

Table 356
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB –7db
1 2dB –8db
2 3dB –9db
3 4dB –10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 –1dB 10db
8 –3dB 11db
9 –4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D –2dB spare
E –5db spare
F –6db spare

The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer

function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad
accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding. There are 32 combinations
each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-law, A-law to µ255, and A-law to A-law.
These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan.

Table 357
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB -7db
1 2dB -8db
2 3dB -9db

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 873

Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1

3 4dB -10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 -1dB 10db
8 -3dB 11db
9 -4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D -2dB spare
E -5db spare
F -6db spare

D-channel interface
The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output,
transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The
receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other as determined
by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:
• 56 Kbps
• 64 Kbps clear
• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as
the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot
be established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTAK09 use switch 1 and position 1 to select either the D-channel
feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
• OFF = D-channel
• ON = DPNSS (U.K.)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 874 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream

configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output,
transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The
receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rate from each
other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:
• 56 Kbps
• 64 Kbps clear
• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as
the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot
be established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTAK09 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel
feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
OFF = D-channel
ON = DPNSS (U.K.)
The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps maximum, full-duplex, serial bit-stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output,
transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The
receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each other as determined
by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes
the following:
• 56 Kbps
• 64 Kbps clear
• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as
the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot
be established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTAK09 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel
feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
• OFF = D-channel
• ON = DPNSS (U.K.)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 875

DS-1 Carrier interface

Transmitter
The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to
extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable
through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 358 "NTAK09 switch
settings" (page 875).

Table 358
NTAK09 switch settings
Switch Setting
1 2 3 4
Distance to Digital Cross-Connect DCH F/W (LEN 0) (LEN 1) (LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off

The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer allows the cabling distance to
be extended from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch
selectable through dip-switches and the settings are as shown below.

Table 359
NTAK09 switch settings
Switch Setting
1 2 3 4
Distance to Digital Cross-Connect DCH F/W (LEN 0) (LEN 1) (LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off

The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer enables the cabling distance to

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 876 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

extend from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable
through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 360 "NTAK09 switch
settings" (page 876).

Table 360
NTAK09 switch settings
Switch Setting
1 2 3 4
Distance to Digital Cross-Connect DCH F/W (LEN 0) (LEN 1) (LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off

Receiver
The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between
the card and the external DS1 signal source.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between
the card and the external DS1 signal source.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between
the card and the external DS1 signal source.

Connector pinout
The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male
D-type connector. See Table 361 "DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04
cable" (page 876).

Table 361
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin MDF
connector To DB-15 Signal name Description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 877

From 50-pin MDF

connector To DB-15 Signal name Description
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network

The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15-position male

D-type connector.

Table 362
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin MDF
connector To DB-15 Signal name Description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network

The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male D

type connector.

Table 363
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin MDF to DB-15 signal name description
connector
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from network

Clock controller interface

The clock controller interface provides the recovered clock from the external
digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard through the backplane.
Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, the clock controller
interface enables or disables the appropriate reference clock source, in
conjunction with software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 878 NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.

The purpose of the clock controller interface is to provide the recovered

clock from the external digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard
via the backplane. Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller,
the clock controller interface enables or disables the appropriate reference
clock source, in conjunction with software.

The clock controller interface provides the recovered clock from the external
digital facility to the clock controller daughterboard through the backplane.
Depending on the equipped state of the clock controller, the clock controller
interface enables or disables the appropriate reference clock source, in
conjunction with software.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

Clock rate converter

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL
synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL

synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a phase-locked loop (PLL). The PLL

synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 879

NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 879)

"Physical description" (page 880)

"Functional description" (page 883)

"Architecture" (page 885)

Introduction
The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an
IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface. This circuit card includes an on-board
clock controller that can be manually switched in or out of service.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card
is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk
cards are supported in each Media Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.

The NTAK10, which can be located in the main cabinet and IP expansion
cabinets, provides an IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface for the Option
11C system. This circuit card includes on-board clock controller circuitry
that can be manually switched in or out of service.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 880 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

The NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card is a digital trunk card that provides an
IPE-compatible 2.0 Mb DTI interface for the CS 1000 system. This circuit
card includes an on-board clock controller that can be manually switched
in or out of service.

The NTAK10 is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in

the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported
in each Media Gateway. The NTAK10 card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3,
and 4 of the Media Gateway.

Physical description
The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-layer printed circuit
board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains six LEDs.
The LEDs operate as follows:
• After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the
power-up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled
by its own microprocessor.
• After initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on, 0.5
seconds off) and then individual LEDs go into appropriate states, as
shown in Table 364 "NTAK10 LED states" (page 880).

Table 364
NTAK10 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK10 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK10 is not in a disabled state.
OOS On (Yellow) The NTAK10 is in an out-of-service state.
Off The NTAK10 is not in an out-of-service state.
NEA On (Yellow) A near end alarm state has been detected.
Off No near end alarm.
FEA On (Yellow) A far end alarm state has been detected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 881

LED State Definition

Off No far end alarm.
LBK On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled.
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference
or is in free-run mode.
Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary
reference.
Off The clock controller is switched off.
Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in this chapter for
more on tracking and free-run operation.

The 2Mb DTI pack uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer
printed circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contain six LEDs.
In general, the LEDs operate as follows:
• after the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the
power-up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled
by its own microprocessor
• after initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on,
0.5 seconds off) and then individual LEDs go into appropriate states,
as shown in Table.

Table 365
NTAK10 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK10 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK10 is not in a disabled state.
OOS On (Yellow) The NTAK10 is in an out of service state
Off The NTAK10 is not in an out of service state
NEA On (Yellow) A near end alarm state has been detected
Off No near end alarm
FEA On (Yellow) A far end alarm state has been detected
Off No far end alarm
LBK On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode
Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 882 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

LED State Definition

On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference
or is in free-run mode
Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary
reference
Off The clock controller is switched off

Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in this chapter for
more on tracking and free-run operation.

The 2 Mb DTI pack uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5", multi-layer printed circuit
board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains six LEDs.
The LEDs operate as follows:
• After the card is plugged in, the LEDs (a-e) are turned on by the
power-up circuit. The clock controller LED is independently controlled
by its own microprocessor.
• After initialization, the LEDs (a-e) flash three times (0.5 seconds on, 0.5
seconds off) and then individual LEDs go into appropriate states, as
shown in Table 366 "NTAK10 LED states" (page 882).

Table 366
NTAK10 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTAK10 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTAK10 is not in a disabled state.
OOS On (Yellow) The NTAK10 is in an out-of-service state.
Off The NTAK10 is not in an out-of-service state.
NEA On (Yellow) A near end alarm state has been detected.
Off No near end alarm.
FEA On (Yellow) A far end alarm state has been detected.
Off No far end alarm.
LBK On (Yellow) NTAK10 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTAK10 is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled.
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a reference
or is in free-run mode.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 883

LED State Definition

Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and locking onto the primary
reference.
Off The clock controller is switched off.

Note: See "Clock controller interface" (page 894) in this chapter for
more on tracking and free-run operation.

Power requirements
The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A
on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V.

The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2A
on +5V, 50mA on +15V and 50mA on -15V.

The 2MB DTI obtains its power from the backplane. It draws less than 2 A
on +5 V, 50 mA on +15 V and 50 mA on –15 V.

Environment
The NTAK10 card meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications.

The NTAK10 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications.

The NTAK10 card meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating

specifications.

Functional description
The NTAK10 provides the following features and functions:
• a clock controller that can be switched in as an option
• software-selectable A/µlaw operation
• software-selectable digital pads on a per channel basis
• frame alignment and multiframe alignment detection
• frame and multiframe pattern generation
• CRC-4 transmission and reception (software selectable)
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) counting
• outpulsing of digits on any of the ABCD bits
• Card-LAN for maintenance communication

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 884 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

• per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and

far-end
• self-test
• download of incoming ABCD validation times from software
• warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted)

The NTAK10 provides the following features and functions:

• a clock controller that can be switched in as an option
• software-selectable A/µlaw operation
• software-selectable digital pads on a per channel basis
• frame alignment and multiframe alignment detection
• frame and multiframe pattern generation
• CRC-4 transmission and reception (software selectable)
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) counting
• outpulsing of digits on any of the abcd bits
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and
far-end
• self-test
• download of incoming abcd validation times from software
• warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted)

The NTAK10 provides the following features and functions:

• a clock controller that can be switched in as an option
• software-selectable A/µlaw operation
• software-selectable digital pads on a per channel basis
• frame alignment and multiframe alignment detection
• frame and multiframe pattern generation
• CRC-4 transmission and reception (software selectable)
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LEDs
• Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) counting
• outpulsing of digits on any of the ABCD bits
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 885

• per-channel and all-channel loopback capabilities for near-end and

far-end
• self-test
• download of incoming ABCD validation times from software
• warm SYSLOAD (TS16 AS16 transmitted)

Applicability to France
Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in
firmware, and are switch-accessed. These are:
• transmission and reception of alarm indication signaling (AIS) in TS16
such as card disabled and warm SYSLOAD
• France-specific PPM counting
• decadic dialing
• France-specific alarm report and error handling

Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in

firmware, and are switch-accessed. These are as follows:
• transmission and reception of alarm indication signaling (AIS) in TS16
(card disabled, warm SYSLOAD, etc.)
• France-specific PPM counting
• decadic dialing
• France-specific alarm report and error handling

Features specific to DTI requirements for France are implemented in

firmware, and are switch-accessed. These are:
• transmission and reception of alarm indication signaling (AIS) in TS16
such as card disabled and warm SYSLOAD
• France-specific PPM counting
• decadic dialing
• France-specific alarm report and error handling

Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 card architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• signaling interface
• three microprocessors
• digital pad

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 886 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

• Card-LAN interface
• carrier interface
• clock controller interface

The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 architecture include:

• DS-30X interface
• signaling interface
• three microprocessors
• digital pad.
• Card-LAN interface.
• carrier interface.
• clock controller interface.

A description of each block follows.

The main functional blocks of the NTAK10 card architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• signaling interface
• three microprocessors
• digital pad
• Card-LAN interface
• carrier interface
• clock controller interface

DS-30X interface
The NTAK10 card interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32
byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10
bits in a 10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps),
one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

The NTAK10 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32

byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10
bits in A10 message format, 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to
signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

The NTAK10 card interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32

byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10
bits in a 10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps),
one to signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 887

Transmit data
To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the
NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits
are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry.

Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM
contains pad values, idle code, and A/µ-law conversion. They can be set
independently for incoming and outgoing voice on a per channel basis. Four
conversion formats are provided: A-law to A-law, A-law to µ-law, µ-law to
A-law, µ-law to µ-law.

Each of these four formats has up to 32 unique pad values. The NTAK10
card provides the pad values of -10, -9, -8, -7, -6,-5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 0.6, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 dB (also idle and unassigned
code). A negative pad is a positive gain.

The pad PROM output is converted from parallel to serial format and passed
on to a multiplexer, which passes PCM/data, TS0, and TS16 information.
The FAS pattern is sent in even TS0s, while in odd TS0s alarm information
is sent. The multiplexer output is fed to the carrier interface which can
forward it to the carrier or perform per channel loopback.

To transmit data on the carrier, the incoming serial bit stream from the
NTAK02 circuit card is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes. The signaling bits
are extracted by the signaling interface circuitry.

Digital Pad: The parallel data is presented to the pad PROM. The PROM
contains pad values, idle code, and A/µ-law conversion. They can be set
independently for incoming and outgoing voice on a per channel basis. Four
conversion formats are provided: A-law to A-law, A-law to µ-law, µ-law to
A-law, µ-law to µ-law.

Each of these four formats has up to 32 unique pad values. The NTAK10
card provides the pad values of -10, -9, -8, -7, -6,-5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 0.6, 1,
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, and 14 dB (also idle and unassigned
code). A negative pad is a positive gain.

The pad PROM output is converted from parallel to serial format and passed
on to a multiplexer, which passes PCM/data, TS0, and TS16 information.
The FAS pattern is sent in even TS0s, while in odd TS0s alarm information
is sent. The multiplexer output is fed to the carrier interface which can
forward it to the carrier or perform per channel loopback.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 888 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Receive data
To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial
to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the
DS-30X interface, where signaling information from the signaling interface
circuitry is multiplexed.

To receive data, PCM/Data from the carrier interface is converted from serial
to parallel, is buffered, and is fed to the pad prom. It then sent onto the
DS 30X inteface, where signaling information from the signaling interface
circuitry is multiplexed.

DS-30X microprocessor
The DS-30X is a utility processor, responsible for the following tasks:
• controlling the DS-30X interface
• receiving and decoding of messages and taking appropriate action
• transmitting TS16 messages to the TS16 microprocessor
• receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing
these messages to the A07
• providing the 19.2 Kbps serial interface to the Card-LAN
• controlling LEDs
• downloading Local Calling Areas (LCAs)
• monitoring errors and alarms
• detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data
• counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors,
and CRC-4 errors
• monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment
• detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS)
• updating of per channel loopback registers
• controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions

The DS-30X is a utility processor, responsible for the following tasks:

• controlling the DS-30X interface
• receiving and decoding of messages and taking appropriate action
• transmitting TS16 messages to the TS16 microprocessor
• receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing
these messages to the A07
• providing the 19.2 Kbps serial interface to the Card-LAN

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 889

• controlling LEDs
• downloading LCAs
• monitoring errors and alarms
• detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data
• counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors,
and CRC-4 errors
• monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment
• detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS)
• updating of per channel loopback registers
• controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions

DS-30X microprocessor
The DS-30X is a utility processor, responsible for the following tasks:
• controlling the DS-30X interface
• receiving and decoding of messages and taking appropriate action
• transmitting TS16 messages to the TS16 microprocessor
• receiving TS16 messages from the TS16 microprocessor and passing
these messages to the A07
• providing the 19.2 Kbps serial interface to the Card-LAN
• controlling LEDs
• downloading Local Calling Areas (LCAs)
• monitoring errors and alarms
• detecting the change of state in TS0, and outputting TS0 data
• counting bipolar violations, slips, PLL alarms, frame-alignment errors,
and CRC-4 errors
• monitoring the status of frame alignment and multiframe alignment
• detecting and reporting of alarm indication signals (AIS)
• updating of per channel loopback registers
• controlling the far-end loopback and digroup loopback functions

Signaling interface
Interconnections
The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the
NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 890 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

The external interconnection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with a

NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.

The external connection is through a 50-pin MDF connector with the

NTBK05 carrier cable A0394217.

CEPT interface
For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface,
the connection to the external digital carrier is through the NT5K85 DTI
cable assembly. It converts the 120 ohms D-connector to 75 ohms coaxial
cable. The impedance is switch set. The switch-settings table at the end
of this chapter describes the options. See Table 367 "2 MB DTI switch
options" (page 890).

If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the

NTBK05.

Table 367
2 MB DTI switch options
Off On
Switch (Switch Open) (Switch Closed)
S1-1 — —
S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled
S2-1 120 ohms 75 ohms
S2-2 75 ohms 120 ohms
S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware
S3-2 — —

For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface,

the connection to the external digital carrier is through NT5K85 DTI cable
assembly A0392021. It converts the 120ohm D-connector to 75ohm coax.
The impedance is switch set. See the switch-settings table at the end
of this chapter for options.

If a coax interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the NTBK05.

For the Conference of European Postal Communications (CEPT) interface,

the connection to the external digital carrier is through the NT5K85 DTI
cable assembly. It converts the 120 ohms D-connector to 75 ohms coaxial
cable. The impedance is switch set. The switch-settings table at the end of
this chapter describes the options. See Table 369 "2 MB DTI switch options"
(page 902) "Switch settings" (page 901).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 891

If a coaxial interface is required, use NT5K85 in conjunction with the

NTBK05.

Channel associated signaling

Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has
its own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is
used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address.

Channel associated signaling implies that each traffic carrying channel has
its own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is
used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address.

Channel associated signaling means that each traffic carrying channel has
its own signaling channel permanently associated with it. Timeslot 16 is
used to transmit two types of signaling: supervisory and address.

Incoming signal
Functions of the NTAK10 with regard to incoming signaling include:
• recognizing valid changes
• determining which channels made the changes
• collecting PPM
• reporting changes to software

Functions of the NTAK10 with regard to incoming signaling include:

• recognizing valid changes.
• determining which channels made the changes.
• collecting PPM.
• reporting changes to software.

Functions of the NTAK10 with regard to incoming signaling include:

• recognizing valid changes
• determining which channels made the changes
• collecting PPM
• reporting changes to software

Outgoing supervisory signals

The desired ABCD bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under
the control of the system controller card. The bit pattern to be transmitted
is held on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in
the same message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at
the far end.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 892 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as
Denmark’s Flash signal and Sweden’s Parking signal, the minimum duration
of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum
duration time that is longer than 100 ms.

The desired abcd bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under
the control of the System Core card. The bit pattern to be transmitted is held
on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in the same
message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at the far end.

With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as
Denmark’s Flash signal and Sweden’s Parking signal, the minimum duration
of any signal state is 100 msec. Some signal states may have a minimum
duration time that is longer than 100 msec.

The desired ABCD bit pattern for a channel is output by the NTAK10, under
the control of the system controller card. The bit pattern to be transmitted
is held on the line for a minimum period of time. This time is specified in
the same message and ensures that the signal is detected correctly at
the far end.

With the exception of the outpulsing signals and special signals, such as
Denmark’s Flash signal and Sweden’s Parking signal, the minimum duration
of any signal state is 100 ms. Some signal states can have a minimum
duration time that is longer than 100 ms.

Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)

Periodic Pulse Monitoring (PPM) is used to collect toll charges on outgoing
CO trunk calls.

PPM is used to collect toll charges on outgoing CO trunk calls.

Periodic Pulse Monitoring (PPM) is used to collect toll charges on outgoing

CO trunk calls.

TS16 microprocessor
The functions of this microprocessor include:
• receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor,
decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions
• transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor
• handling PPM
• updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM
• providing outpulsing
• receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 893

• transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application

The functions of this microprocessor include:

• receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor,
decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions
• transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor
• handling PPM
• updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM
• providing outpulsing
• receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor
• transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application

The functions of this microprocessor include:

• receiving signaling messages supplied by the DS-30X microprocessor,
decoding these messages, and taking subsequent actions
• transmitting messages to the DS-30X microprocessor
• handling PPM
• updating the TS16 select RAM and TS16 data RAM
• providing outpulsing
• receive data from the change-of-state microprocessor
• transmitting AIS for CNET (France) application

Change-of-state microprocessor
The functions of this processor are:
• detecting valid change of state in TS16
• when a valid change has been found, passing the new abcd bits to the
TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the associated
channel

The functions of this processor are:

• detecting valid change of state in TS16.
• when a valid change has been found, passing the new abcd bits to the
TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the associated
channel.

The processor detects a valid change of state in TS16 and passes the new
ABCD bits to the TS16 microprocessor, along with five bits to indicate the
associated channel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 894 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Carrier interface
Tx Direction
The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is sent to the output selector, which
selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data. The HDB3
is converted from digital to AMI and sent to the carrier. A transformer
provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms).

The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is fed to the output selector, which
selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data. The
HDB3 is converted from digital to AMI and fed to the carrier. A transformer
provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms).

The HDB3 encoded multiplexer output is sent to the output selector, which
selects the PCM/Data output or the looped around far end data. The HDB3
is converted from digital to AMI and sent to the carrier. A transformer
provides isolation and impedance matching (75 ohms or 120 ohms).

Rx Direction
The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the input
selector as well as the output selector for far end loopback. Clock recovery
circuitry within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock. This clock
generates the frame and multiframe count and sends them to the clock
controller as a reference.The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital
and fed to the input selector as well as the output selector for far end
loopback. Clock recovery circuitry within the receiving device extracts the
2.0 MHz clock. This clock is used to generate the frame and multiframe
count and is sent to the clock controller as a reference.

The AMI data of the carrier is converted to digital and fed to the input selector
as well as the output selector for far end loopback. Clock recovery circuitry
within the receiving device extracts the 2.0 MHz clock. This clock generates
the frame and multiframe count and sends them to the clock controller as a

Clock controller interface

The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock
controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface. Depending
upon the state of the clock controller (switched on or off), the clock controller
interface, in conjunction with software, enables or disables the appropriate
reference clock source.

The clock-controller circuitry on NTAK10 is identical to that of the NTAK20.

While several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock
controller can be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be
switched off.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 895

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.

The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock
controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface. Depending
upon the state of the clock controller (switched on or off), the clock controller
interface in conjunction with software enables or disables the appropriate
reference clock source.

The clock-controller circuitry on NTAK10 is identical to that of the NTAK20.

Note that while several DTI/PRI packs may exist in one system, only one
clock controller may be activated (all other DTI/PRI clock controllers must
be switched off).

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

The recovered clock from the external digital facility is provided to the clock
controller through the backplane-to-clock controller interface. Depending
upon the state of the clock controller (switched on or off), the clock controller
interface, in conjunction with software, enables or disables the appropriate
reference clock source.

The clock-controller circuitry on NTAK10 is identical to that of the NTAK20.

While several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock
controller can be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be
switched off.

Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or
non-tracking (also known as free-run).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 896 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or

non-tracking (also known as free-run).

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or

non-tracking (also known as free-run). See "Clocking modes" (page 906).

Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking:

• tracking a reference, and
• locked onto a reference.

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to

match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the
frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked
onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own
frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is
locked onto the reference once again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains

continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not

synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system.
This mode can be used when the , Cabinet system are used as a master
clock source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable
if the CS 1000E, Cabinet system are intended to be a slave. It can occur,
however, when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due
to hardware faults or when invoked by using software commands.

Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking:

• tracking a reference, and
• locked onto a reference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 897

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to

match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the
frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked
onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own
frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is
locked onto the reference once again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains

continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not

synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system.
This mode can be used when the Option 11C is used as a master clock
source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if
the Option 11C is intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both
the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults
or when invoked by using software commands.

Clock controller functions and features

The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include:
• phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two
references at a time can be accepted.
• providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• preventing chatter
• providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• complying with 2.0 Mb CCITT specifications
• communicating with software
• filtering jitter
• making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to
qualify clocking information

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 898 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include:
• phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two
references at a time may be accepted.
• providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• preventing chatter
• providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• complying with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications.
• communicating with software.
• providing jitter filtering.
• making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to
qualify clocking information.

The NTAK10 2MB DTI clock controller functions and features include:
• phase-locking to a reference, generating the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distributing it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two
references at a time can be accepted.
• providing primary to secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• preventing chatter
• providing error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• complying with 2.0 Mb CCITT specifications
• communicating with software
• filtering jitter
• making use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to
qualify clocking information

Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference
failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where
the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the
reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is
out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an
automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both
references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 899

Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference

failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where
the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the
reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is
out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an
automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both
references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

See "Reference switchover" (page 914).

Autorecovery and chatter

If the software command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller
tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks
to the secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary
recovers. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to
the primary.

If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller

tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to
the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary
recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks
to the secondary.

A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching

between primary and secondary reference sources.

If the software command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller

tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 900 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

to the secondary, but switches over to the primary whenever the primary
recovers. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to
the primary.

If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller

tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to
the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary
recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks
to the secondary.

A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching

between primary and secondary reference sources.

See "Autorecovery and chatter" (page 915).

Reference clock selection through software

The 2MB DTI card has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to
the appropriate line on the backplane.

Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and

ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
Software designates the 2MB DTI card as a primary reference source to the
clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2 Mbps
DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating
from other 2MB DTI packs are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable

of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external
reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic
carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing
timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary
references or the 2MB DTI references.

The 2MB DTI card has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to
the appropriate line on the backplane

Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and

ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
Software designates the 2MB DTI Card as a primary reference source to

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 901

the clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another 2

Mbps DTI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks
originating from other 2MB DTI packs are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable

of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external
reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic
carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing
timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary
references or the 2MB DTI references.

See "Reference clock selection through software" (page 951).

Reference clock interface

The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF
connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical
characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard.

The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF
connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical
characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard.

The recovered clock derived from the facility is available on the MDF
connector. The signals at these connectors conform to the electrical
characteristics of the EIA RS-422 standard.

Switch settings
Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the NTAK10. These are shown in
Table 368 "2 MB DTI switch options" (page 901).

Table 368
2 MB DTI switch options
Off On
Switch (Switch Open) (Switch Closed)
S1-1 — —
S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled
S2-1 120 ohms 75 ohms
S2-2 75 ohms 120 ohms
S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware
S3-2 — —

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 902 NTAK10 2.0 Mb DTI card

Various 2MB DTI switchable options exist on the NTAK10. These are:

Off On
Switch (Switch Open) (Switch Closed)
S1-1 - -
S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled
S2-1 120 ohm 75 ohm
S2-2 75 ohm 120 ohm
S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware
S3-2 - -

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Various 2MB DTI switch options exist on the NTAK10. These are shown in
Table 369 "2 MB DTI switch options" (page 902).

Table 369
2 MB DTI switch options
Off On
Switch (Switch Open) (Switch Closed)
S1-1 — —
S1-2 CC Enabled CC Disabled
S2-1 120 ohms 75 ohms
S2-2 75 ohms 120 ohms
S3-1 non-French Firmware French Firmware
S3-2 — —

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 903

NTAK20 Clock Controller

daughterboard
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 903)

"Physical description" (page 909)

"Functional description" (page 910)

Introduction
Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one
clock source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network.
Synchronization is accomplished with an NTAK20 clock controller
daughterboard in each Media Gateway that contains a digital trunk card.
The NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the following
cards:
• NTAK09 1.5Mb DTI/PRI
• NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI
• NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI
• NTBK22 MISP
• NT6D70 SILC
• NT6D71 UILC

Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets

(such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It does not work in slots 4
through 10 in these cabinets.

The NTAK20 clock controller card supports 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb
clock recovery rates.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 904 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.
If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is
mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main cabinet.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the system to an external

reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system.
The system can function either as a slave to an external clock or as a
clocking master. The NTAK20AD version of the clock controller meets the
AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The
NTAK20BD version meets CCITT Stratum 4 specifications.
The NTAK20 card performs the following functions:
• phase lock to a reference, generation of the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane
• accept one primary and one secondary reference
• primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• chatter prevention due to repeated switching
• error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• communication with software
• jitter filtering
• use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and qualify clocking
information

The NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the following

cards:
• "NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card" (page 859)
• "NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card" (page 967)
• "NTBK22 MISP card" (page 961)
• "NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card" (page 1053)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 905

It is consequently located in slots 1 to 9 of the main and IP expansion

cabinets and can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb clock recovery rates
Note: The card is restricted to slots 1 through 3 in EMC- type cabinets
(such as NAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx cabinets). It does not work in slots 4
through 10 in these cabinets.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is
mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main Option 11C cabinet.
A cabinet that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller.

NTAK20 provides the following features and functions:

• phase lock to a reference, generation of the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane
• accepts one primary and one secondary reference
• primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• chatter prevention due to repeated switching
• error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• communication with software
• jitter filtering
• use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify
clocking information

Digital trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock

source results in an equivalent shift in all parts of the network. In the CS
1000 system, synchronization is accomplished with an NTAK20 clock
controller daughterboard in each Media Gateway that contains a digital
trunk card.
The NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard mounts directly on the following
cards:
• NTAK09 1.5Mb DTI/PRI
• NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI
• NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI
• NT6D70 SILC
• NT6D71 UILC

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 906 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

The NTAK20 clock controller card can support 1.5 Mb, 2.0 Mb, and 2.56 Mb
clock recovery rates.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateways that are
clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips
can degrade voice quality.

The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000 system to an

external reference clock and generates and distributes the clock to the
system. The CS 1000 can function either as a slave to an external clock or
as a clocking master. The NTAK20AD version of the clock controller meets
the AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The
NTAK20BD version meets CCITT Stratum 4 specifications.
The NTAK20 card performs the following functions:
• phase lock to a reference, generation of the 10.24 Mhz system clock,
and distribution of the clock to the CPU through the backplane
• accept one primary and one secondary reference
• primary-to-secondary switchover and auto-recovery
• chatter prevention due to repeated switching
• error-burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• communication with software
• jitter filtering
• use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and qualify clocking
information

Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or
non-tracking (also known as free-run).

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or

non-tracking (also known as free-run).

The CS 1000 supports a single clock controller that can operate in one of
two modes: tracking or non-tracking (also known as free-run).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 907

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the
NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode,
one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for
clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary
Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73.
There are two stages to clock controller tracking:
• tracking a reference
• locking on to a reference

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match

its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies
are almost matched, the clock controller locks on to the reference. The
clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the
incoming and system frequencies correspond.
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller
tracks it, locks on to it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to vary.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes until the clock controller is locked on to the
reference again.
If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller
continuously tracks, and the LED continuously flashes green. This condition
does not present a problem. It shows that the clock controller is continually
attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips occur, there is a problem with the
clock controller or the incoming line.
There are two stages to clock controller tracking:
• tracking a reference
• locking on to a reference.

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to

match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the
frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked
on to the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own
frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.
If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is
locked on to the reference once again.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 908 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains

continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.
In tracking mode, one or more DTI/PRI cards supply a clock reference to the
NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard. When operating in tracking mode,
one DTI/PRI card is defined as the Primary Reference Source (PREF) for
clock synchronization. The other DTI/PRI card is defined as the Secondary
Reference Source (SREF). PREF and SREF are defined in LD 73.
There are two stages to clock controller tracking:
• tracking a reference
• locking on to a reference

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to match

its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the frequencies
are almost matched, the clock controller locks on to the reference. The
clock controller makes small adjustments to its own frequency until both the
incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller

tracks it, locks on to it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to vary.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes until the clock controller is locked on to the
reference again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller

continuously tracks, and the LED continuously flashes green. This condition
does not present a problem. It shows that the clock controller is continually
attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips occur, there is a problem with the
clock controller or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking)
In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside
source. Instead, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode
can be used when the system acts as a master clock source for other
systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the system is
intended to be a slave to an external network clock. Free-run mode can
occur when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to
hardware faults or invoked using software commands.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 909

In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any source, it
provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode can be used when
the Option 11C is used as a master clock source for other systems in the
network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the Option 11C is intended to
be a slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary
clock sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using
software commands.

In free-run mode, the clock controller does not synchronize on any outside
source. Instead, it provides its own internal clock to the system. This mode
can be used when the CS 1000 acts as a master clock source for other
systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the CS 1000 is
intended to be a slave to an external network clock. Free-run mode can
occur when both the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to
hardware faults or invoked using software commands.

Physical description
Faceplate LEDs
Each motherboard has five DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller LED.
The clock controller LED is dual-color (red and green). The clock controller
LED states are described in Table 370 "Faceplate LEDs" (page 909).

Table 370
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a
reference or is in free run mode.
Flashing NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to
(Green) a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended
period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking
this may be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related
clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is
acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off NTAK20 is not equipped.

Each of the motherboards have 5 DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller
LED. The CC LED is dual-color (red and green), with states represented as
follows:

Table 371
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 910 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

State Definition
On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a reference or is in free run
mode.
Flashing NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the
(Green) LED flashes continuously over an extended period of time, check the CC STAT in
LD60. If the CC is tracking this may be an acceptable state. Check for slips and
related clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable,
and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off NTAK20 is not equipped.

Each motherboard has five DTI/PRI LEDs and one clock controller LED.
The clock controller LED is dual-color (red and green). The clock controller
LED states are described in Table 372 "Faceplate LEDs" (page 910).

Table 372
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK20 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK20 is equipped, enabled, and is either locked to a
reference or is in free run mode.
Flashing NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to
(Green) a reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended
period of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking
this may be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related
clock controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state is
acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off NTAK20 is not equipped.

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include:
• phase difference detector circuit
• digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL)
• clock detection circuit
• digital-to-analog converter
• CPU MUX bus interface
• signal conditioning drivers and buffers
• sanity timer
• microprocessor
• CPU interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 911

• external timing interface

The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include:

• phase difference detector circuit
• digital phase-lock loop
• clock detection circuit
• digital-to-analog converter
• CPU MUX bus interface
• signal conditioning drivers and buffers
• sanity timer
• microprocessor
• CPU interface
• external timing interface

A description of each block follows.

The main functional blocks of the NTAK20 architecture include:
• phase difference detector circuit
• digital Phase Locked Loop (PLL)
• clock detection circuit
• digital-to-analog converter
• CPU MUX bus interface
• signal conditioning drivers and buffers
• sanity timer
• microprocessor
• CPU interface
• external timing interface

Phase difference detector circuit

This circuit, under firmware control, enables a phase difference
measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and
the system clock.

The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements and

evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.

This circuit, under firmware control, allows a phase difference measurement

to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and the system clock.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 912 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

The phase difference is used for making frequency measurements, and

evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.

This circuit, under firmware control, enables a phase difference

measurement to be taken between the reference entering the PLL and
the system clock. The phase difference is used for making frequency
measurements and evaluating input jitter and PLL performance.

Digital phase lock loops

The main digital PLL enables the clock controller to provide a system clock
to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known
incoming reference.

The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for Stratum 3 and + 50
ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT).

A second PLL on the clock controller provides the means for monitoring
another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed to the
phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.

The main digital PLL enables the clock controller. to provide a system clock
to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known
incoming reference.

The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for Stratum 3ND and + 50
ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT).

A second PLL on board the clock controller provides the means for
monitoring another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed
to the phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.

The main digital PLL enables the clock controller to provide a system clock
to the CPU. This clock is both phase and frequency locked to a known
incoming reference. The hardware has a locking range of + 4.6 ppm for
Stratum 3 and + 50 ppm for Stratum 4 (CCITT).

A second PLL on the clock controller provides the means for monitoring
another reference. Note that the error signal of this PLL is routed to the
phase difference detector circuit so the microprocessor can process it.

System clock specification and characteristics

Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different,
it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of
frequency tuning sensitivity. See Table 373 "System clock specification and
characteristics" (page 913).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 913

Table 373
System clock specification and characteristics
Specifications CCITT EIA
Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.48 MHz
Accuracy ±3 ppm ±1 ppm
Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm
Drift Rate (Aging) ±1 ppm per year ±4 ppm in 20 years
Tuning Range (minimum) ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min.
±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max.
Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center

Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3ND are so
different, it is necessary to have two TCVCXO which feature different values
of frequency tuning sensitivity.

Table 374
System clock specification and characteristics
Specifications CCITT EIA
Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.48 MHz
Accuracy ±3 ppm ±1 ppm
Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm
Drift Rate (Aging) ±1 ppm per year ±4 ppm in 20 years
Tuning Range (minimum) ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min.
±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max.
Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center

Since the accuracy requirements for CCITT and EIA Stratum 3 are different,
it is necessary to have two TCVCXOs which feature different values of
frequency tuning sensitivity.

Table 375
System clock specification and characteristics
Specifications CCITT EIA
Base Frequency 20.48 MHz 20.48 MHz
Accuracy ±3 ppm ±1 ppm
Operating Temperature 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm 0 to 70 C ±1 ppm
Drift Rate (Aging) ±1 ppm per year ±4 ppm in 20 years

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 914 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Specifications CCITT EIA

Tuning Range (minimum) ±60 ppm min. ±10 ppm min.
±90 ppm max. ±15 ppm max.
Input Voltage Range 0 to 10 volts, 5V center 0 to 10 volts, 5V center

EIA/CCITT compliance
The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT
or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly
affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets (2.0
Mb) while Stratum 3 conforms to North American markets (1.5 Mb).

The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT
or 2.56 basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly
affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets
(2.0Mb) while stratum 3 conforms to North American market. (1.5 Mb).

The clock controller complies with 1.5 Mb EIA Stratum 3ND, 2.0 Mb CCITT
or 2.56 Mb basic rate. The differences between these requirements mainly
affect PLL pull in range. Stratum 4 conforms to international markets (2.0
Mb) while Stratum 3 conforms to North American markets (1.5 Mb).

Monitoring references
The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously
monitored in order to provide autorecovery.

The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously

monitored in order to provide autorecovery.

The primary and secondary synchronization references are continuously

monitored in order to provide autorecovery.

Reference switchover
Switchover occurs in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal.
When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system
clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is
out of specification. If the reference is out of specification and the other
reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated
without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the
clock controller provides holdover.

Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal.

When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system
clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference
is out of specification. If the reference being used is out of specification

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 915

and the other reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover

is initiated without software intervention. If both references are out of
specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Switchover occurs in the case of reference degradation or loss of signal.

When performance of the reference degrades to a point where the system
clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the reference is
out of specification. If the reference is out of specification and the other
reference is still within specification, an automatic switchover is initiated
without software intervention. If both references are out of specification, the
clock controller provides holdover.

Autorecovery and chatter

If the command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the
primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and
secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock
controller automatically tracks to secondary when the secondary is within
specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller
enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references.
An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the
secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary,
then switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary
recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do
so even if the secondary recovers.

If the command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks

to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the
primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers.
If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary
even if the primary recovers.

To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary

and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10
seconds is implemented.

If the command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks

to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both
primary and secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification,
the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary if that is within
specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller
enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 916 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the

secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary;
however, it switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If
the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and
continues to do so even if the secondary recovers.

If the command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks

to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the
primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers.
If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary
and continues to do so even if the primary recovers.

To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary

and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10
seconds is implemented.

If the command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller tracks to the
primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of both primary and
secondary references. If the primary goes out of specification, the clock
controller automatically tracks to secondary when the secondary is within
specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the clock controller
enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors both references.
An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that recovers first. If the
secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to the secondary,
then switches over to the primary when the primary recovers. If the primary
recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the primary and continues to do
so even if the secondary recovers.

If the command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller tracks

to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the secondary goes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary provided
that is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the
primary, but switches over to the secondary when the secondary recovers.
If the secondary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the secondary
even if the primary recovers.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 917

To prevent chatter due to repeated automatic switching between primary

and secondary reference sources, a time-out mechanism of at least 10
seconds is implemented.

Digital to analog converter

The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) enables the microprocessor to track,
hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL.

The firmware uses the available memory on the clock controller to provide
error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in the
momentary absence of the reference clock.

The DAC (digital to analog converter) allows the microprocessor to track,

hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL.

The firmware uses the available memory on board the clock controller to
provide error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in
the momentary absence of the reference clock.

The Digital to Analog Converter (DAC) enables the microprocessor to track,

hold, and modify the error signal generated in the digital PLL.

The firmware uses the available memory on the clock controller to provide
error-burst detection and correction. Temporary holdover occurs in the
momentary absence of the reference clock.

Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when
sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the
clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when
the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference
clock.

If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run
mode and remains there until a new command is received. Free-run
automatically initiates after the clock controller has been enabled.

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when

sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the
clock controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated
when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming
reference clock

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 918 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run
mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note that the
free-run mode of operation automatically initiates after the clock controller
has been enabled.

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when

sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the
clock controller provides a stable holdover. Free-run mode is initiated when
the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming reference
clock.

If the command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the free-run
mode and remains there until a new command is received. Free-run
automatically initiates after the clock controller has been enabled.

CPU-MUX bus interface

A parallel I/O port on the clock controller provides a communication channel
between the clock controller and the CPU.

A parallel I/O port on the clock controller. provides a communication channel

between the clock controller and the CPU.

A parallel I/O port on the clock controller provides a communication channel

between the clock controller and the CPU.

Signal conditioning
Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.

Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.

Drivers and buffers are provided for all outgoing and incoming lines.

Sanity timer
The sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.

sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.

The sanity timer resets the microprocessor in the event of system hang-up.

Microprocessor
The microprocessor does the following:
• communicates with software
• monitors two references
• provides a self-test during initialization

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 919

• minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to

errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks

The microprocessor does the following:

• communicates with software
• monitors 2 references
• provides a self-test during initialization
• minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to
errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks

The microprocessor does the following:

• communicates with software
• monitors two references
• provides a self-test during initialization
• minimizes the propagation of impairments on the system clock due to
errors on the primary or secondary reference clocks

Reference Clock Selection

The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the
backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary
references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1
backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI motherboard as a primary
reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another
DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a technician. No other clock sources
are used.

The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the
backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary
references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1
backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI mother board as a primary
reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another
DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a craft person. No other clock sources
are used.

The DTI/PRI card routes its reference to the appropriate line on the
backplane. The clock controller distributes the primary and secondary
references and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1
backplane line. It designates the DTI/PRI motherboard as a primary
reference source. The secondary reference is obtained from another
DTI/PRI card, which is designated by a technician. No other clock sources
are used.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 920 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

External timing interface

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two
signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing
clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to
be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses
either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and can accept
two signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing
clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to
be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses
either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and accepts two
signals as timing references. An external reference is an auxiliary timing
clock which is bridged from a traffic carrying signal and is not intended to
be a dedicated non-traffic-bearing timing signal. The clock controller uses
either the external/auxiliary references or the DTI/PRI references.

Hardware integrity and regulatory environment

The clock controller complies with the following hardware integrity and
regulatory specifications: The clock controller complies with the following

Item Specification
EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J

CSA C108.8

CISPR publication 22
ESD IEC 801-2
Temperature IEC 68-2-1

IEC 68-2-2

IEC 68-2-14

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 921

Item Specification
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6

IEC 68-2-7

IEC 68-2-29

IEC 68-2-31

IEC 68-2-32

hardware integrity and regulatory specifications:

EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J

CSA C108.8
CISPR publication 22
ESD IEC 801-2
Temperature IEC 68-2-1
IEC 68-2-2
IEC 68-2-14
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6
IEC 68-2-7
IEC 68-2-29
IEC 68-2-31
IEC 68-2-32

The clock controller complies with the following hardware integrity and
regulatory specifications:

Item Specification
EMI FCC part 15 sub- part J

CSA C108.8

CISPR publication 22
ESD IEC 801-2

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 922 NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard

Item Specification
Temperature IEC 68-2-1

IEC 68-2-2

IEC 68-2-14
Humidity IEC 68-2-3
Vibration/Shock IEC 68-2-6

IEC 68-2-7

IEC 68-2-29

IEC 68-2-31

IEC 68-2-32

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 923

NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 923)

"Physical description" (page 924)

"Functional description" (page 932)

"Architecture" (page 933)

Introduction
The NTAK79 2.0 Mb Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb
interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH). The NTAK79 card
also includes an onboard clock controller (equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock
Controller) that can be manually switched into or out of service.

The NTAK79 card does not support the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel
handler daughterboard.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card
is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.

Note: Up to three four trunk cards are supported in each Media

Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 924 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

The NTAK79, which can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets,
provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH)
for the Option 11C system. This circuit card also includes onboard circuitry
equivalent to the NTAK20 Clock Controller that can be manually switched
in or out of service.

The NTAK79 2 MB Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card provides a 2.0 Mb

interface and an onboard D-channel handler (DCH) for the CS 1000 system.
The NTAK79 card also includes an onboard clock controller (equivalent to
the NTAK20 Clock Controller) that can be manually switched into or out of
service.

The NTAK79 card does not support the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel
handler daughterboard.

The NTAK79 card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported
in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to three four trunk cards are supported
in each Media Gateway. The NTAK79 card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3,
and 4 of the Media Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must have a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

Physical description
The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board.
The faceplate is 7/8" wide. The NTAK79 circuit card has a total of seven
faceplate LEDs. Five of the LEDs are directly associated with the operation
of the Primary Rate interface (PRI). The remaining two LEDs are associated
with the on-board Clock Controller and the on-board D-channel interface
(DCHI). The LEDs are described in Table 376 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page 924).

Table 376
NTAK79 LEDs
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is disabled or
out-of-service.
Off The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is not in a disabled state.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 925

LED State Definition

ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2 MB PRI circuit card is in an active state.
Off The NTAK79 2 MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS
LED turns red.
RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a
local alarm state of:
Loss of Carrier (LOS)
Loss of Frame (LFAS), or
Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a
remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm can be
either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2 MB PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2 MB PRI is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and has been disabled
by the software.
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a
reference or in free run mode.
Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and attempting to lock
on to a reference (tracking mode). If the LED flashes
continuously over an extended period of time, check the
CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be
an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock
controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state
is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the
reference.
DCH On (Red) DCH is switched on and disabled.
On (Green) DCH is switched on and enabled, but not necessarily
established.
Off DCH is switched off.

The NTAK79 uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer printed

circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs.

In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 377 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page
926).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 926 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Table 377
NTAK79 LEDs
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is either disabled or
out-of-service.
Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state.
Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state. The OOS
LED turns red.
RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a
local alarm state of:
Loss of Carrier (LOS)
Loss of Frame (LFAS), or
Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a
remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may
be either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2MB PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2MB PRI is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and disabled.
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a
reference or is in free run mode.
Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is attempting to
lock (tracking mode) to a reference. If the LED flashes
continuously over an extended period of time, check the
CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is tracking this may be
an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock
controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state
is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the
reference.
DCH On (Red) DCH is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) DCH is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily
established.
Off DCH is switched off.

The NTAK79 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board.
The faceplate is 7/8" wide. The NTAK79 circuit card has a total of seven
faceplate LEDs. Five of the LEDs are directly associated with the operation

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 927

of the Primary Rate interface (PRI). The remaining two LEDs are associated
with the on-board Clock Controller and the on-board D-channel interface
(DCHI). The LEDs are described in Table 377 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page 926).

Table 378
NTAK79 LEDs
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is disabled or
out-of-service.
Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTAK79 2MB PRI circuit card is in an active state.
Off The NTAK79 2MB PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS
LED turns red.
RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a
local alarm state of:
Loss of Carrier (LOS)
Loss of Frame (LFAS), or
Loss of CRC Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a
remote alarm indication from the far end. The alarm can be
either Alarm Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2 MB PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2 MB PRI is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is switched on and has been disabled
by the software.
On (Green) The clock controller is switched on and is either locked to a
reference or in free run mode.
Flashing (Green) The clock controller is switched on and attempting to lock
on to a reference (tracking mode). If the LED flashes
continuously over an extended period of time, check the
CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can be
an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock
controller error conditions. If none exist, then this state
is acceptable, and the flashing is identifying jitter on the
reference.
DCH On (Red) DCH is switched on and disabled.
On (Green) DCH is switched on and enabled, but not necessarily
established.
Off DCH is switched off.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 928 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

NTAK79 switches
The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The tables that
follow provide information on the various settings and related functions of
these switches.

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Figure 278
NTAK79 card with switch locations

Switch SW1 - DCHI Configuration

This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating
mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is supported on an NTAK79BC. For all
other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode.

Table 379
Switch SW1
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 1-1 enable DCHI disable DCHI
SW 1-2 DPNSS1/DASS2 Q.931

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 929

Switch SW2 - Carrier Impedance Configuration

This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms.
Twisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms. Coaxial cable is
usually associated with the 75 ohms setting.

Table 380
Switch SW2
Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2
75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On)
120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off)

Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration

This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller. Disable
the SW 3-2 if the on-board clock controller is not in use.

Table 381
Switch SW3
Switch Down (On) Up (Off) Note
SW 3-1 — — Spare
SW 3-2 Disabled Enabled

Switch SW4 - Carrier Shield Grounding

This switch enables for the selective grounding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the
carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground
(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 75 ohms unbalanced
configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.

Table 382
Switch SW4
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4-1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN
SW 4-2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN

The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive coaxial
signal.The NTAK79 card incorporates four on-board dip switches. The
tables that follow provide information on the various settings and related
functions of these switches.

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 930 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Figure 279
NTAK79 card with switch locations

Switch SW1 - DCHI Configuration

This switch enables/disables the on-board DCHI and sets the operating
mode of the DCHI. DPNSS1 mode is not supported at this time. For all
other countries that do not use DPNSS, use Q.931 mode.

Table 383
Switch SW1
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 1-1 enable DCHI disable DCHI
SW 1-2 DPNSS1/DASS2 Q.931

Switch SW2 - Carrier Impedance Configuration

This switch sets the carrier impedance to either 120 ohms or 75 ohms.
Twisted pair cable is usually associated with 120 ohms. Coaxial cable is
usually associated with the 75 ohms setting.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 931

Table 384
Switch SW2
Cable Type SW 2-1 SW 2-2
75 ohms Up (Off) Down (On)
120 ohms Down (On) Up (Off)

Switch SW3 - Clock Controller Configuration

This switch enables/disables (H/W) the on-board Clock Controller. Disable
the SW 3-2 if the on-board clock controller is not in use.

Table 385
Switch SW3
Switch Down (On) Up (Off) Note
SW 3-1 — — Spare
SW 3-2 Disabled Enabled

Switch SW4 - Carrier Shield Grounding

This switch enables for the selective grounding of the Tx / Rx pairs of the
carrier cable. Closing the switch (down position) applies Frame Ground
(FGND) to the coaxial carrier cable shield, creating a 75 ohms unbalanced
configuration. This applies only to the NTBK05CA cable.

Table 386
Switch SW4
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4-1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN
SW 4-2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coaxial signal.

Power requirements
The NTAK79 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of 2
A on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on –12 V.

The NTAK79 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on -12 V.

The NTAK79 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of 2
A on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V and 50 mA on –12 V.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 932 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Environment
The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications.

The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications.

The NTAK79 meets all applicable Nortel Network’s operating specifications.

Functional description
The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions:
• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which have been attenuated by up 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages
• supporting National and International bits in time slot 0
• on-board clock controller
• onboard D-channel interface
• 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communication

NTAK79 provides the following features and functions:

• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which have been attenuated by up 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages
• supporting National and International bits in time slot 0
• on-board clock controller

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 933

• onboard D-channel interface

• 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications

The NTAK79 card provides the following features and functions:

• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which have been attenuated by up 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages
• supporting National and International bits in time slot 0
• on-board clock controller
• onboard D-channel interface
• 32 software-selectable Tx & Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications

Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-channel support interface
• 8031 microcontroller
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 934 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include:

• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-Channel support interface
• 8031 microcontroller
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface

A description of each block follows.

The main functional blocks of the NTAK79 architecture include:
• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-channel support interface
• 8031 microcontroller
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface

DS-30X interface
The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32
byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10
bits in A10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 kbps), one
to signaling (8 kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 kbps).

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be

directed to padding control.

The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface
circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel
number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 935

The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32

byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10
bits in A10 message format; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to
signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be

directed to padding control.

The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface
circuitry. Following is the mapping of the DS-30X timeslot number to the
PCM-30 channel number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

The NTAK79 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32

byte-interleaved timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10
bits in A10 message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 kbps), one
to signaling (8 kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 kbps).

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be

directed to padding control.

The signaling bits are extracted and inserted by the A07 signaling interface
circuitry. The DS-30X timeslot number is mapped to the PCM-30 channel
number. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently unused for PCM.

Digital PAD
Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for
each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the
data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law. As the idle code
and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs
the NTAK79 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads
available are listed in Table 387 "Digital pad values and offset allocations"
(page 935). The values shown are attenuation levels; 1.0 dB is 1 dB of loss
and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain.

Table 387
Digital pad values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 –1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 –2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 –3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 –4.0 dB

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 936 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1

Offset PAD Offset PAD
5 5.0 dB 5 –5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 –6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 –7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 –8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 –9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code

Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values

for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which
the data is routed. The idle code for A-law is 54H and for Mu-law is 7FH.
The unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-law. As the idle code
and unequipped code may be country dependent, the software instructs
the NTAK79 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads
available are illustrated below. The values shown are attenuation levels, that
is 1.0dB is 1dB of loss and -1.0dB is 1db of gain.

Table 388
Digital Pad - values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 -1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 -2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 -3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 -4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 -5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 -6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 -7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 -8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 937

PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1

Offset PAD Offset PAD
10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code

Software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for
each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the
data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law. As the idle code
and unequipped code can be country dependent, the software instructs
the NTAK79 to use different codes for each direction. The 32 digital pads
available are listed in Table 389 "Digital pad values and offset allocations"
(page 937). The values shown are attenuation levels; 1.0 dB is 1 dB of loss
and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain.

Table 389
Digital pad values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 –1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 –2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 –3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 –4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 –5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 –6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 –7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 –8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 –9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 938 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1

Offset PAD Offset PAD
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code

Signaling interface
The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller.
This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot
zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

The Meridian 1 signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling

controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X
timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller.

This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link through the DS-30X timeslot
zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

Carrier interface
The E1 interface connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the
line interface chip. This chip provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the
CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on
the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit
stream.

For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided
by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping
to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery
functions on the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the
received bit stream.

The E-1 interface connection to the external digital carrier is provided by the
line interface chip. This chip provides accurate pulse shaping to meet the
CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery functions on
the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the received bit
stream.

Impedance matching
The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120
ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown
in Table 390 "Impedance matching switch selection" (page 939).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 939

Table 390
Impedance matching switch selection
Cable On Off
75 ohms S2 S1
120 ohms S1 S2

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.

The line interface provides for the use of either 75ohm coaxial or 120ohm
twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown in the
settings table below.

Table 391
Impedance matching switch selection
Cable On Off
75 Ohm S2 S1
120 Ohm S1 S2

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120
ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by a switch, as shown
in Table 392 "Impedance matching switch selection" (page 939).

Table 392
Impedance matching switch selection
Cable On Off
75 ohms S2 S1
120 ohms S1 S2

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Carrier grounding
The NTAK79 card provides the capability of selectively grounding the shield
of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch
applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are
shown in Table 393 "Carrier shield grounding switch settings" (page 940).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 940 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Table 393
Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch Carrier Pair On Off
S4-1 Rx shield Open GND
S4-2 Tx shield Open GND

NTAK79 provides for the capability of selectively grounding the shield of

the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch
applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings
are shown below.

Table 394
Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch Carrier Pair On Off
S4-1 Rx shield Open GND
S4-2 Tx shield Open GND

The NTAK79 card provides the capability of selectively grounding the shield
of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch
applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are
shown in Table 395 "Carrier shield grounding switch settings" (page 940).

Table 395
Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch Carrier Pair On Off
S4-1 Rx shield Open GND
S4-2 Tx shield Open GND

Receiver functions
The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires
no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the
jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823, and the jitter
attenuation requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This
provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency
range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires
no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the
jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 941

attenuation requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides

jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range
from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires
no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the
jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823, and the jitter
attenuation requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This
provides jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency
range from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

Transmitter functions
The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to the CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to the CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

Loopbacks
The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data
that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is also
available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit
data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is
also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.

The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same
data that it receives using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is
additionally available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes
the transmit data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs.
This data is also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.

The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same data
that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is also
available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes the transmit
data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs. This data is
also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 942 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

CEPT transceiver
The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization,
channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications
of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization,

channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications
of the CCITT recommendation G.703 & G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1KHZ framing pulse.

The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization,

channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications
of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

Slip control
Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency than the local clock.

Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local
clock.

Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency than the local clock.

D-channel support interface

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include:
• Receive data output
• transmit data input
• receive clock output
• transmit clock output

The receive and transmit clocks have slightly different bit rates from each
other, as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 943

The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the

equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for
a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and
D-channel on a single circuit card.
The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to
indicate enabled/disabled states. See Table 376 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page
924).
The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by
an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common
to most ISDN standard countries. The U.K. specific mode that uses the
DPNSS format is not supported at this time.

Table 396
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 En/Dis Enabled Disabled
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS (not DCHI
supported at
this time)

The D-channel support interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream

configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: (1) Receive data
output, (2) transmit data input, (3) receive clock output, and (4) transmit clock
output. The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates
from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
The NTAK79 has an onboard D-channel handler interface (DCHI). It is the
equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This allows for
a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and
D-channel on a single circuit card.
The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to
indicate enabled/disabled states. (See Table 377 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page
926)).
The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by
an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common
to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in an U.K. specific
mode using the DPNSS format.

Table 397
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 En/Dis Enabled Disabled
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 944 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream

configured as a DCE device. The data signals include:
• Receive data output
• transmit data input
• receive clock output
• transmit clock output

The receive and transmit clocks vary in bit rate between each other, as
determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

The NTAK79 has an onboard D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI). It is the

equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH pack. This enables for
a completely operational ISDN PRA link with clock synchronization and
D-channel on a single circuit card.

The onboard D-channel has one status LED on the NTAK79 faceplate to
indicate enabled/disabled states. See Table 377 "NTAK79 LEDs" (page
926).

The on-board DCHI can be operated in two separate modes as defined by

an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode common
to most ISDN standard countries. The U.K. specific mode that uses the
DPNSS format is not supported at this time.

Table 398
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 En/Dis Enabled Disabled
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS (not DCHI
supported at
this time)

DCHI special applications connection

The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-channel Handler
Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. Connections are
made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They can also be
used for future or special applications.

The signals conform to the EIA RS-422 standard.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 945

The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-Channel Handler
Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. The signals confirm
to the EIA RS-422 standard. Connections would not be made to these
pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They are available for future or
special applications.

The connection between the PRI2 and the on-board D-channel Handler
Interface card is also available at the MDF connector. Connections are
made to these pins for normal on-board DCHI operation. They can also be
used for future or special applications.

The signals conform to the EIA RS-422 standard.

Card-LAN interface
A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface
is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The
Card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected
to port B of the UART.

The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the

backplane/MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA
RS-232C standard.

A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface
is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The
card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected
to port B of the UART.

The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the

backplane/MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA
RS-232C.

A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link and the echo canceller/test port interface. The echo/test interface
is an asynchronous 4800 bps 8-bit connected to port A of the UART. The
Card-LAN interface is an asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected
to port B of the UART.

The connection to the echo canceler/test port is available at the

backplane/MDF connector. The signals at this port conform to the EIA
RS-232C standard.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 946 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

Clock controller interface

The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the
NTAK20 clock controller.

Though several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock
controller may be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be
switched off.

clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the NTAK20

clock controller.

Note that while several DTI/PRI packs may exist in one system, only one
clock controller may be activated (all other DTI/PRI clock controllers must
be switched off).

The clock controller circuitry on the NTAK79 is identical to that of the

NTAK20 clock controller.

Though several DTI/PRI packs can exist in one system, only one clock
controller may be activated. All other DTI/PRI clock controllers must be
switched off.

Clocking modes
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes:
• tracking
• non-tracking (also known as free-run)

The clock controller can operate in one of two modes: tracking or

non-tracking (also known as free-run).
The clock controller can operate in one of two modes:
• tracking
• non-tracking (also known as free-run)

For more information on clocking modes, see 180.

Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking:

• tracking a reference, and
• locked onto a reference.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 947

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to

match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the
frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked
onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own
frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is
locked onto the reference once again.

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains

continuously in the tracking stage, with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not

synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system.
This mode can be used when the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet are used as a master clock source for other
systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if the CS 1000E, CS
1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet are intended to be a
slave. It can occur, however, when both the primary and secondary clock
sources are lost due to hardware faults or when invoked by using software
commands.

Tracking mode There are two stages to clock controller tracking:

• tracking a reference, and
• locked onto a reference.

When tracking a reference, the clock controller uses an algorithm to

match its frequency to the frequency of the incoming clock. When the
frequencies are very near to being matched, the clock controller is locked
onto the reference. The clock controller makes small adjustments to its own
frequency until both the incoming and system frequencies correspond.

If the incoming clock reference is stable, the internal clock controller tracks
it, locks onto it, and matches frequencies exactly. Occasionally, however,
environmental circumstances cause the external or internal clocks to drift.
When this happens, the internal clock controller briefly enters the tracking
stage. The green LED flashes momentarily until the clock controller is
locked onto the reference once again.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 948 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

If the incoming reference is unstable, the internal clock controller remains

continuously in the tracking stage with the LED flashing green all the time.
This condition does not present a problem, rather, it shows that the clock
controller is continually attempting to lock onto the signal. If slips are
occurring, however, it means that there is a problem with the clock controller
or the incoming line.

Free-run (non-tracking) In free-run mode, the clock controller does not

synchronize on any source, it provides its own internal clock to the system.
This mode can be used when the Option 11C is used as a master clock
source for other systems in the network. Free-run mode is undesirable if
the Option 11C is intended to be a slave. It can occur, however, when both
the primary and secondary clock sources are lost due to hardware faults
or when invoked by using software commands.

Clock controller functions and features

The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include:
• phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and
distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at
a time are accepted
• primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided)
• prevent chatter
• error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• compliance with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications
• software communication
• jitter filtering
• use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qualify clocking
information

The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include:

• phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 Mhz system clock, and
distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at
a time may be accepted.
• provide primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided)
• prevent chatter
• provide error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• comply with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications
• communicate with software

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 949

• provide jitter filtering

• make use of an algorithm to aid in detecting crystal aging and to qualify
clocking information

The NTAK79 clock controller functions and features include:

• phase lock to a reference, generate the 10.24 MHz system clock, and
distribute it to the CPU through the backplane. Up to two references at
a time are accepted
• primary to secondary switchover (auto-recovery is provided)
• prevent chatter
• error burst detection and correction, holdover, and free running
capabilities
• compliance with 2.0Mb CCITT specifications
• software communication
• jitter filtering
• use of an algorithm to detect crystal aging and to qualify clocking
information

Reference switchover
Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference
failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where
the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the
reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is
out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an
automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both
references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

Switchover may occur in the case of reference degradation or reference

failure. When performance of the reference degrades to a point where
the system clock is no longer allowed to follow the timing signal, then the
reference is said to be out of specification. If the reference being used is
out of specification and the other reference is still within specification, an
automatic switchover is initiated without software intervention. If both
references are out of specification, the clock controller provides holdover.

See "Reference switchover" (page 914).

Autorecovery and chatter

If the software command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller
tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 950 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the

clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller
tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary
recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the
primary.

If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller

tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality
of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes
out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary
provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of spec.), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to
the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary
recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks
to the secondary.

A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching

between primary and secondary reference sources.

If the software command "track to primary" is given, the clock controller

tracks to the primary reference and continuously monitors the quality of
both primary and secondary references. If the primary becomes out of
specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to secondary provided
that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of specification), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller
tracks to the secondary, but switches over to the primary when the primary
recovers. If the primary recovers first, the clock controller tracks to the
primary.

If the software command "track to secondary" is given, the clock controller

tracks to the secondary reference and continuously monitors the quality
of both primary and secondary references. If the secondary becomes
out of specification, the clock controller automatically tracks to primary
provided that it is within specifications. On failure (both out of spec.), the
clock controller enters the HOLDOVER mode and continuously monitors
both references. An automatic switchover is initiated to the reference that
recovers first. If the primary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks to
the primary, but switches over to the secondary whenever the secondary
recovers. If the secondary recovers first, then the clock controller tracks
to the secondary.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 951

A time-out mechanism prevents chatter due to repeated automatic switching

between primary and secondary reference sources.

See "Autorecovery and chatter" (page 915).

Holdover and free-run

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when
sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the
clock controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated
when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming
reference clock.

If the software command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the
free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note
that the free-run mode of operation is automatically initiated after the clock
controller is enabled.

In the temporary absence of a synchronization reference signal, or when

sudden changes occur on the incoming reference due to error bursts, the
clock controller provides a stable holdover. The free-run mode is initiated
when the clock controller has no record of the quality of the incoming
reference clock.

If the software command "free run" is given, the clock controller enters the
free-run mode and remains there until a new command is received. Note
that the free-run mode of operation is automatically initiated after the clock
controller is enabled.

See "Holdover and free-run" (page 917).

Reference clock selection through software

The NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the
appropriate line on the backplane.

The software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references

and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
The software designates the NTAK79 as the primary reference source to the
clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another NTAK79
card, which is designated by a technician. No other clocks originating from
other NTAK79 circuit cards are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable

of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external
reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic
carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 952 NTAK79 2.0 Mb PRI card

timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary
references or the NTAK79 references. NTAK79 has the necessary hardware
for routing its reference to the appropriate line on the backplane

Software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references and

ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
Software designates the NTAK79 as a primary reference source to the clock
controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another NTAK79 card,
which is designated by a craft person. No other clocks originating from
other NTAK79 circuit cards are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable

of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external
reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic
carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing
timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary
references or the NTAK79 references.

The NTAK79 has the necessary hardware for routing its reference to the
appropriate line on the backplane.

The software is responsible for the distribution of the secondary references

and ensures that no contention is present on the REFCLK1 backplane line.
The software designates the NTAK79 as the primary reference source to the
clock controller. The secondary reference is obtained from another NTAK79
card, which is designated by a technician. No other clocks originating from
other NTAK79 circuit cards are used.

The clock controller provides an external timing interface and is capable

of accepting two signals as timing references. In this case, an external
reference refers to an auxiliary timing source which is bridged from a traffic
carrying signal. This is not intended to be a dedicated non-traffic bearing
timing signal. The clock controller uses either the two external/auxiliary
references or the NTAK79 references.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 953

NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface

daughterboard
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 953)

"Physical description" (page 955)

"Functional description" (page 956)

Introduction
The NTAK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the
ISDN PRI trunk.
The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers
Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is
mounted on the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI
card (installed in the Media Gateway) using standoff reference pins and
connectors. The NTAK93 daughterboard, when mounted on the NTBK50
PRI digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50. The
NTAK93 daughterboard can use SDI I/O addresses 1 to 15 and port 1.The
NTAK93 provides D-channel handler interfaces required by the ISDN PRI
trunk. It performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and Layer 3
preprocessing. It is a daughterboard that mounts to the NTAK09 1.5 Mb
DTI/PRI card or NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card using standoff reference pins
and connectors.
The NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface (DCHI) daughterboard, mounted
on a DTI/PRI digital trunk card, interfaces with the CS 1000 SSC. The
DTI/PRI digital trunk card is installed in the Media Gateway. Digital trunk
cards are not supported in Media Gateway Expansions.
The NTAK93 provides the D-channel handler interfaces required by the
ISDN PRI trunk.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 954 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

The DCHI performs D-channel Layer 2 message processing and transfers

Layer 3 signaling information between two adjacent network switches. It is
mounted on the NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI
card (installed in the Media Gateway) using standoff reference pins and
connectors. The NTAK93 daughterboard, when mounted on the NTBK50
PRI digital trunk card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTBK50. The
NTAK93 daughterboard can use SDI I/O addresses 1 to 15 and port 1.
The NTAK93 provides the following features and functions:
• D-channel interface or DPNSS interface
• Special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH:
— system parameters are service changeable (system parameters
are downloaded from software)
— incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented
in the D-PORT firmware
— supported message units and information elements can be service
changed
— translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a
proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation
— convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for incoming
Layer 3 messages for faster CPU operation
— self-test
— loopback

NTAK93 provides the following features and functions:

• D-channel or DPNSS interface
• special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH:
— system parameters are service changeable (system parameters
are downloaded from software)
— incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented
in the D-PORT firmware
— supported message units and information elements may be service
changed
— translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a
proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation
— convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for incoming
Layer 3 messages for faster CPU operation
— self-test
— loopback

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 955

The NTAK93 daughterboard provides the following features and functions:

• D-channel interface or DPNSS interface
• Special features included for LAPD implementation at DCH:
— system parameters are service changeable (system parameters
are downloaded from software)
— incoming Layer 3 message validation procedures are implemented
in the D-PORT firmware
— supported message units and information elements can be service
changed
— translation of the CCITT message types information elements into a
proprietary coding scheme for faster CPU operation
— convention of IA5-encoded digits to BCD-encoded digits for incoming
Layer 3 messages for faster CPU operation
— self-test
— loopback

Physical description
The DCH function can be installed in the main and IP expansion cabinets.
The DTI/PRI card which carries a DCH daughterboard resides in the main
and IP expansion cabinets.

The DCH function can be located in the main and IP expansion cabinets.
The DTI/PRI card which carries a DCH daughterboard resides in the main
and IP expansion cabinets.

Faceplate LEDs
NTAK09 1.5 Mb PRI and NTBK50 2.0 MB PRI cards
LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The
DCHI LED is dual-color (red and green). The LEDs are described in Table
399 "Faceplate LEDs" (page 955).

Table 399
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily
established.
Off NTAK93 is not equipped.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 956 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The
DCH LED is dual-color (red and green), with states represented as follows:

Table 400
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off NTAK93 is not equipped.

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09 and NTBK50 cards. The
DCHI LED is dual-color (red and green). The LEDs are described in Table
401 "Faceplate LEDs" (page 956).

Table 401
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTAK93 is equipped and disabled.
On (Green) NTAK93 is equipped and enabled, but not necessarily
established.
Off NTAK93 is not equipped.

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5 V at 750 mA; +12 V at 5 mA; and –12 V at 5 mA.

Power consumption is +5V at 750mA; +12V at 5mA; and -12V at 5mA.

Power consumption is +5 V at 750 mA; +12 V at 5 mA; and –12 V at 5 mA.

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTAK93 architecture include the following.

The main functional blocks of the NTAK93 architecture include the following.

The main functional blocks of the NTAK93 architecture include the following.

Microprocessors
One microprocessor does the following:
• handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports and software
• reports the status of each port
• takes commands from software to control the activities of the ports

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 957

The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI

mode.
One microprocessor handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports
and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from
software to control the activities of the ports. The microprocessors also do
some of D-channel data processing in DCHI mode.
One microprocessor does the following:
• handles data transfer between each pair of serial ports and software
• reports the status of each port
• takes commands from software to control the activities of the ports

The microprocessors also handle some D-channel data processing in DCHI

mode.

DMA controller
A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory
and communication ports. The DMA channels are only used in the receive
direction (from line to SSC), not in the transmit direction.

A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory
and communication ports. Note that the DMA channels are only used in the
receive direction (from line to CPU), not in the transmit direction.

A Z80A-DMA chip controls the data transfer between local RAM memory
and communication ports. The DMA channels are only used in the receive
direction (from line to SSC), not in the transmit direction.

Random Access Memory (RAM)

A total of 32 KBytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the
communication buffer and for firmware data storage.

A total of 32K bytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the
communication buffer and firmware data storage.

A total of 32 kbytes of RAM space for each pair of ports is used as the
communication buffer and for firmware data storage.

Read Only Memory (ROM)

A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a
code section of the DCH-PORT firmware.

A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a
code section of the DCH-PORT firmware.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 958 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

A total of 32K bytes of ROM space for each pair of ports is reserved as a
code section of the DCH-PORT firmware.

LAPD data link/asynchronous controller

One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It
performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions,
error detection, and frame recognition (in HDLC). The parameters of these
functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.

One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It

performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions,
error detection, frame recognition (in HDLC) function. The parameters of
these functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.

One chip controls each pair of independent communication ports. It

performs the functions of serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial conversions,
error detection, and frame recognition (in HDLC). The parameters of these
functions are supplied by the DCH-PORT firmware.

Counter/timer controller
Two chips are used as real-time timers and baud-rate generators for each
pair of communication ports.

Two chips are used as real-time timers and baud-rate generators for each
pair of communication ports.

Two chips are used as real-time timers and baud-rate generators for each
pair of communication ports.

Software interface circuit

This portion of the circuit handles address/data bus multiplexing, the
interchange of data, commands, and status between the on board
processors and software. It includes transmit buffer, receive buffer,
command register, and status register for each communication channel.

This portion of the circuit handles address/data bus multiplexing, the

interchange of data, commands, and status between the on board
processors and software. It includes transmit buffer, receive buffer,
command register, and status register for each communication channel.

This portion of the circuit handles address/data bus multiplexing, the

interchange of data, commands, and status between the on board
processors and software. It includes transmit buffer, receive buffer,
command register, and status register for each communication channel.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 959

DPNSS/DCHI Port
The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting
on the NTAK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF.
The port operates at:

Data Rate 56kbps, 64kbps

Duplex Full
Clock Internal / External
Interface RS422

The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port

characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software.
The mode of operation of the DCH-PORT is controlled by a switch setting
on the NTAK09/NTBK50. For DPNSS the switch is ON; for DCHI it is OFF.
The port operates at:

Data Rate 56kbps, 64kbps

Duplex Full
Clock Internal / External
Interface RS422

The address of ports is selected by hardwired backplane card address. Port

characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from software.
The mode of operation of the DPNSS/DCHI-PORT is controlled by a switch
setting on the NTAK09 and NTBK50 trunk cards. For DPNSS, the switch is
set to ON. For DCHI, set the switch to OFF.
The port operates with the following specifications:
• data rate of 56 kbps or 64 kbps
• full duplex
• internal/external clock
• RS422 interface

The address of a port is determined by the hardwired backplane card

address. Port characteristics and LAPD parameters are downloaded from
software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 960 NTAK93 D-channel Handler Interface daughterboard

D-Port - SDTI/PRI interface

Below is a brief description of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI,
DCHI-PORT is considered Data Terminal Equipment (DTE):
• SDA, SDB: Transmit Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RTA, RTB: Receive Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RR, CS: SPDC ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT
• TR: D-PORT ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT
• RDA, RDB: Incoming serial data bit stream, driven by SDTI/PRI
• SDA, SDB: Transmit serial data bit stream driven by DCHI-PORT

Below is a brief description of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI,

DCH-PORT is to be DTE.
• SDA, SDB: Transmit Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RTA, RTB: Receive Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RR, CS: SPDC ready signal provided by DCH-PORT
• TR: D-PORT ready signal provided by DCH-PORT
• RDA, RDB: Incoming serial data bit stream, driven by SDTI/PRI
• SDA, SDB: Transmit serial data bit stream driven by DCH-PORT

Below is a brief description of signals. When connected to SDTI/PRI,

DCHI-PORT is considered Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).
• SDA, SDB: Transmit Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RTA, RTB: Receive Clock provided by SDTI/PRI
• RR, CS: SPDC ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT
• TR: D-PORT ready signal provided by DCHI-PORT
• RDA, RDB: Incoming serial data bit stream, driven by SDTI/PRI
• SDA, SDB: Transmit serial data bit stream driven by DCHI-PORT

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 961

NTBK22 MISP card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 961)

"Physical description" (page 961)

"Functional description" (page 962)

Introduction
The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is
a microprocessor-controlled signaling processor that performs Data Link
(Layer 2) and Network (Layer 3) processing associated with ISDN BRI and
the OSI protocol.

The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) card is

specific to Option 11C system and is supported on the Main cabinet. It
performs Data Link (Layer 2) and Network (Layer3) processing associated
with ISDN BRI and the OSI protocol. A description of the ISDN BRI feature
is contained in ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718).

The NTBK22 Multi-Purpose ISDN Signaling Processor (MISP) Card is

a microprocessor-controlled signaling processor that performs Data Link
(Layer 2) and Network (Layer 3) processing associated with ISDN BRI and
the OSI protocol. For more information on ISDN BRI, see "ISDN BRI"
(page 374).

Physical description
The MISP occupies one slot in the Media Gateway. It uses one of the
network loops to interface with SILCs and UILCs and to provide 32 timeslots
for D-channel signaling and packet data transmission. The other loop
address is used to communicate with the Call Server.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card
is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 962 NTBK22 MISP card

Note: When configuring BRI trunks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be
co-located in the same Media Gateway as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC
(NT6D71) cards the MISP is supporting.

Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Installation and Configuration

(NN43001-318) and ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-580)
for additional information.

The MISP occupies one slot in the Media Gateway. It uses one of the
network loops to interface with SILCs and UILCs and to provide 32 timeslots
for D-channel signaling and packet data transmission. The other loop
address is used to communicate with the Call Server.

The MISP is supported only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in the
Media Gateway Expansion. It can be inserted into slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 of
the Media Gateway.

Note: When configuring BRI trunks, the MISP (NTBK22) card must be
co-located in the same Media Gateway as the SILC (NT6D70) and UILC
(NT6D71 cards the MISP is supporting

Refer to ISDN Basic Rate Interface: Maintenance (NN43001-718) and ISDN

Basic Rate Interface: Features (NN43001-580) for additional information.

Functional description
Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of
the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports
32 DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the
MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carrying
packet data, it must dedicate one of its D-channels to communicate with the
external packet handler. In this case the MISP supports only 31 DSLs.
The main functions of the MISP are:
• communicate with the Call Server CPU to report ISDN BRI status and
receive downloaded application software and configuration parameters
• manage Layer 2 and Layer 3 signaling that controls call connection
and terminal identification
• control terminal initialization and addressing
• assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by
communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating
to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities
• separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data
to the packet handler
• send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 963

Each MISP can support 4 line cards (UILC or SILC or any combination of
the two). Each line card supports 8 DSLs, therefore each MISP supports
32 DSLs. Since each DSL uses two B-channels and one D-channel the
MISP supports 64 B-channels and 32 D-channels. If the MISP is carrying
packet data, it must dedicate one of its D-channels to communicate with the
external packet handler. In this case the MISP supports only 31 DSLs.
The main functions of the MISP are:
• to communicate with the CPU to report ISDN BRI status and receive
downloaded application software and configuration parameters
• to manage data link layer and network layer signaling that controls call
connection and terminal identification
• to control terminal initialization and addressing
• to assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by
communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating
to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities
• to separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the
data to the packet handler
• to send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel

The MISP supports the downloading of ISDN applications from the Option
11C software daughterboard. The MISP is downloaded with the appropriate
application code:
• on the first enabling of the MISP card
• when Option 11C Software is upgraded
• when MISP Applications are added/changed

The applications for the MISP are copied from the software cartridge into
RAM on the MISP card. Only the new/different applications are downloaded.
This information is then copied into the Flash ROM on the MISP for storage.
This process requires approximately 10 minutes to complete and is carried
out while the MISP pack is operational. The next time the system or MISP
card resets, the application is loaded from the MISP Flash ROM provided
there are no new or different applications on the software cartridge.
The NTBK22 MISP Card interfaces with the S/T Interface Line Cards
(SILCs) and the U Interface Line Cards (UILCs). The main functions of the
MISP are as follows:
• communicate with the Call Server CPU to report ISDN BRI status and
receive downloaded application software and configuration parameters
• manage Layer 2 and Layer 3 signaling that controls call connection
and terminal identification

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 964 NTBK22 MISP card

• control terminal initialization and addressing

• assign B-channels for switched voice and data transmission by
communicating with the BRI terminal over the D-channel and allocating
to it an idle B-channel with appropriate bearer capabilities
• separate D-channel data from signaling information and route the data
to the packet handler
• send call control messages to ISDN BRI terminals over the D-channel

Micro Processing Unit (MPU)

The MPU coordinates and controls data transfer and addressing of the
peripheral devices and communicates with the CPU using a message
channel on the CPU bus. The tasks that the MPU performs depend on the
interrupts it receives. The interrupts are prioritized by the importance of
the tasks they control.

The MPU coordinates and controls data transfer and addressing of the
peripheral devices and communicates with the Meridian 1 CPU using a
message channel on the CPU bus. The tasks that the MPU performs
depend on the interrupts it receives. The interrupts are prioritized by the
importance of the tasks they control.

High-Level Data Link Controller (HDLC)

The HDLC is a format converter that supports up to 32 serial channels that
communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts messages into
the following two message formats:
• a serially transmitted, zero-inserted, CRC protected message that has a
starting and an ending flag
• a data structure

The HDLC is a format converter that supports up to 32 serial channels that

communicate at speeds up to 64 kbps. The HDLC converts messages into
the following two message formats:
• a serially transmitted, zero-inserted, CRC protected message that has a
starting and an ending flag
• a data structure

CPU to MISP bus interface

Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with
packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a
16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control
lines.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 965

This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) as a

communication exchange center between the CPU and the MPU. Both the
CPU and the MPU can access this memory over the transmit and receive
channels on the bus.

Information exchange between the CPU and the MISP is performed with
packetized messages transmitted over the CPU bus. This interface has a
16-bit data bus, an 18-bit address bus, and interrupt and read/write control
lines.

This interface uses shared Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) as a

communication exchange center between the CPU and the MPU. Both the
CPU and the MPU can access this memory over the transmit and receive
channels on the bus.

MISP network bus interface

The network bus interface:
• converts bit interleaved serial data received from the network bus into
byte interleaved data for transmission over the 32 time slots used by
the HDLC controller
• accepts byte interleaved data transmitted from the HDLC controller and
converts it into a bit interleaved data stream for transmission over the
network bus

The network bus interface:

• converts bit interleaved serial data received from the network bus into
byte interleaved data for transmission over the 32 time slots used by
the HDLC controller
• accepts byte interleaved data transmitted from the HDLC controller and
converts it into a bit interleaved data stream for transmission over the
network bus

Power consumption
Power consumption is +5V at 2 A; +15V at 50 mA; and -15V at 50 mA.

Power consumption is +5V at 2 A; +15V at 50 mA; and -15V at 50 mA.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 966 NTBK22 MISP card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 967

NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 967)

"Physical description" (page 968)

"Functional description" (page 973)

"Architecture" (page 975)

Introduction
The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2.0 Mb PRI interface. It supports
the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93
D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel handler.
The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard provides identical performance to the
on-board NTAK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides
support for protocols based on the MSDL platform.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card
is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must clock the clock controller to
an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different Central Offices (COs), if the COs are not synchronized. The
slips can degrade voice quality.

The NTBK50 card provides a 2Mb PRI interface and is installed in the
main and IP expansion cabinets. The NTBK50 supports the NTAK20
clock controller daughterboard and either the NTAK93 D-Channel interface
or the NTBK51 Downloadable D-Channel handler. The NTAK93 DCHI

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 968 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

daughterboard provides identical performance to the on-board NTAK79

DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH daughterboard provides support for protocols
based on the MSDL platform.

The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card provides a 2 Mb PRI interface for the CS
1000. The NTBK50 card sups the NTAK20 clock controller daughterboard
and either the NTAK93 D-channel interface or the NTBK51 Downloadable
D-channel handler. The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard provides identical
performance to the on-board NTAK79 DCHI. The NTBK51 DDCH
daughterboard provides support for protocols based on the MSDL platform.

The NTBK50 is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported in

the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunk cards are supported
in each Media Gateway. The NTBK50 card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3,
and 4 of the Media Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must clock the clock controller to
an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

Physical description
The NTBK50 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit board.
The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs. See Figure 280
"NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards" (page 969).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 969

Figure 280
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards

The LEDs are described in Table 402 "NTBK50 faceplate LEDs" (page 969).

Table 402
NTBK50 faceplate LEDs
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service.
Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and
exiting remote loopback.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED is red.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 970 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

LED State Definition

RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm
state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of
CRC Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote
alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm
Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2.0 Mb PRI is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is software disabled.
On (Green) The clock controller is enabled and is either locked to a reference or
is in free run mode.
Flashing NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a
(Green) reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period
of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can
be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller
error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the
flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off The clock controller is not equipped.
DCH On (Red) DCH is disabled.
On (Green) DCH is enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off DCH is not equipped.

The NTBK50 uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multilayer printed

circuit board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs.

In general, the LEDs operate as shown in Table 403 "NTBK50 faceplate

LEDs" (page 970).

Table 403
NTBK50 faceplate LEDs
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is either disabled or
out-of-service. Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion
of self test, and exiting remote loopback.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED is red.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 971

LED State Definition

RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm
state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS) or Loss of CRC
Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote
alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm
Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2.0 Mb PRI is not in loop-back mode
CC On (Red) The clock controller is software disabled
On (Green) The clock controller is enabled and is either locked to a reference or
is in free run mode
Flashing NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a
(Green) reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period
of time, check the CC STAT in LD60. If the CC is tracking this may
be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller
error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the
flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off The clock controller is not equipped.
DCH On (Red) DCH is disabled.
On (Green) DCH is enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off DCH is not equipped.

The NTBK50 uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed circuit

board. The faceplate is 7/8" wide and contains seven LEDs. The LEDs are
described in Table 403 "NTBK50 faceplate LEDs" (page 970).

Table 404
NTBK50 faceplate LEDs
LED State Definition
OOS On (Red) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is disabled or out-of-service.
Also, the state of the card after power-up, completion of self test, and
exiting remote loopback.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI circuit card is in an active state.
Off The NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI is in a disabled state. The OOS LED is red.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 972 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

LED State Definition

RED On (Red) A red alarm state has been detected. This represents a local alarm
state of Loss of Carrier (LOS), Loss of Frame (LFAS), or Loss of
CRC Multiframe (LMAS).
Off No red (local) alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected. This represents a remote
alarm indication from the far end. The alarm may be either Alarm
Indication (AIS) or Remote Alarm (RAI).
Off No yellow (remote) alarm.
LBK On (Green) 2.0 Mb PRI is in loop-back mode.
Off 2.0 Mb PRI is not in loop-back mode.
CC On (Red) The clock controller is software disabled.
On (Green) The clock controller is enabled and is either locked to a reference or
is in free run mode.
Flashing NTAK20 is equipped and is attempting to lock (tracking mode) to a
(Green) reference. If the LED flashes continuously over an extended period
of time, check the CC STAT in LD 60. If the CC is tracking this can
be an acceptable state. Check for slips and related clock controller
error conditions. If none exist, then this state is acceptable, and the
flashing is identifying jitter on the reference.
Off The clock controller is not equipped.
DCH On (Red) DCH is disabled.
On (Green) DCH is enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off DCH is not equipped.

Power requirements
The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5
V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA on –15 V.

The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing maximums of 2
amps on +5 V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA on -15 V.

The NTBK50 obtains its power from the backplane, drawing up to 2 A on +5

V, 35 mA on +15 V and 20 mA on –15 V.

Environment
The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel operating specifications.

The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications.

The NTBK50 meets all applicable Nortel Networks operating specifications.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 973

Figure 281
NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card with daughterboards

Functional description
NTBK50 provides the following features and components:
• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which are attenuated by up to 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 974 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

• support of National and International bits in timeslot 0

• clock controller daughterboard
• D-channel interface daughterboard
• downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard
• 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communication

NTBK50 provides the following features and functions:

• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which are attenuated by up to 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed
• slip-buffering receive messages
• support of National and International bits in time slot 0
• clock controller daughterboard
• D-channel interface daughterboard
• Downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard
• 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications

NTBK50 provides the following features and components:

• recovery of the 2.048 kbps data by the CEPT receiver, at signal levels
which are attenuated by up to 10 dB
• control of CEPT line density using HDB3 which provides 64 kbps clear
channel
• performance monitoring of the receive carrier by means of Bipolar
Violations (BPV), Slips, CRC-4 (CRC), and Frame Bit Errors (FBER)
• monitoring of receive carrier alarms including AIS, LOS, and RAI
• transmission of remote alarm when instructed

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 975

• slip-buffering receive messages

• support of National and International bits in timeslot 0
• clock controller daughterboard
• D-channel interface daughterboard
• downloadable D-channel handler daughterboard
• 32 software-selectable Tx and Rx Pad values
• conversion of PCM commanding Laws (A-A, u-u, A-u, u-A)
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications

Architecture
The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture are:
• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-channel support interface
• clock controller interface
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface
• 80C51FA Microcontroller

The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture include:

• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-channel support interface
• clock controller interface
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface
• 80C51FA Microcontroller

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 976 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

A description of each block follows.

The main functional blocks of the NTBK50 architecture are:
• DS-30X interface
• A07 signaling interface
• digital pad
• carrier interface
• CEPT transceiver
• SLIP control
• D-channel support interface
• clock controller interface
• Card-LAN / echo / test port interface
• 80C51FA Microcontroller

DS-30X interface
NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32-byte interleaved
timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10
message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to
signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be

directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted
by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently
unused for PCM.

NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32 byte-interleaved

timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10
message format; 8 are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to signaling (8
Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be

directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted
by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently
unused for PCM.

NTBK50 interfaces to one DS-30X bus which contains 32-byte interleaved

timeslots operating at 2.56 Mb. Each timeslot contains 10 bits in A10
message format; eight are assigned to voice/data (64 Kbps), one to
signaling (8 Kbps), and one is a data valid bit (8 Kbps).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 977

The incoming serial bit stream is converted to 8-bit parallel bytes to be

directed to padding control. The signaling bits are extracted and inserted
by the A07 signaling interface circuitry. Timeslots 0 and 16 are currently
unused for PCM.

Digital PAD
The software selects A-Law or µ-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values
for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the
data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for µ-Law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and µ-Law.

As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the
software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The
32 digital pads available are illustrated in Table 405 "Digital Pad - values and
offset allocations" (page 977). The values shown are attenuation levels
(1.0dB is 1 dB of loss and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain.

Table 405
Digital Pad - values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 -1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 -2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 -3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 -4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 -5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 -6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 -7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 -8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 978 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Software selects A-law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values for
each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the
data is routed. The idle code for A-law is 54H and for Mu-law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-law and Mu-law.

As the idle code and unequipped code may be country dependent, the
software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The
32 digital pads available are illustrated in Table 406 "Digital Pad - values and
offset allocations" (page 978). The values shown are attenuation levels
(1.0dB is 1dB of loss and -1.0dB is 1db of gain).

Table 406
Digital Pad - values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 -1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 -2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 -3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 -4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 -5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 -6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 -7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 -8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 -9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 -10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code

The software selects A-Law or Mu-Law and one of 32 possible PAD values
for each channel. These values are provided in a PROM through which the
data is routed. The idle code for A-Law is 54H and for Mu-Law is 7FH. The
unequipped code is FFH for both A-Law and Mu-Law.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 979

As the idle code and unequipped code can be country dependent, the
software instructs the NTBK50 to use different codes for each direction. The
32 digital pads available are illustrated in Table 407 "Digital pad values and
offset allocations" (page 979). The values shown are attenuation levels
(1.0dB is 1 dB of loss and –1.0 dB is 1 dB of gain).

Table 407
Digital pad values and offset allocations
PAD SET 0 PAD SET 1
Offset PAD Offset PAD
0 0.6 dB 0 0.0 dB
1 1.0 dB 1 –1.0 dB
2 2.0 dB 2 –2.0 dB
3 3.0 dB 3 –3.0 dB
4 4.0 dB 4 –4.0 dB
5 5.0 dB 5 –5.0 dB
6 6.1 dB 6 –6.0 dB
7 7.0 dB 7 –7.0 dB
8 8.0 dB 8 –8.0 dB
9 9.0 dB 9 –9.0 dB
10 10.0 dB 10 –10.0 dB
11 11.0 dB 11 spare
12 12.0 dB 12 spare
13 13.0 dB 13 spare
14 14.0 dB 14 Idle Code
15 spare 15 Unassigned Code

Signaling interface
The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller.
This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X timeslot
zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

The Meridian 1 signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling

controller. This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X
timeslot zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

The signaling interface consists of the A07 DS-30X signaling controller.

This interface provides an 8 Kbps signaling link via the DS-30X timeslot
zero data bit zero. Messages are 3 bytes in length.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 980 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Carrier interface
For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided
by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping
to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery
functions on the receive side, as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the
received bit stream.

For the E1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided
by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping
to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery
functions on the receive side as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the
received bit stream.

For the E-1 interface, the connection to the external digital carrier is provided
by the line interface chip. This device provides accurate pulse shaping
to meet the CCITT pulse mask requirements. It provides clock recovery
functions on the receive side, as well as tolerance to jitter and wander in the
received bit stream.

Impedance matching (Switch SW2)

The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120
ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in
Table 408 "Impedance matching switch settings" (page 980).

Table 408
Impedance matching switch settings
Cable Type SW 2-1
75 ohms Down (On)
120 ohms Up (Off)

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.

The line interface provides for the use of either 75ohm coaxial or 120ohm
twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in the
settings table below.

Table 409
Impedance matching switch settings
Cable Type SW 2-1
753/4 Down (On)
120 /4
3
Up (Off)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 981

Note: The ON position for all the switches is towards the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board adjacent to
the bottom left corner of each individual switch.

The line interface provides for the use of either 75 ohms coaxial or 120
ohms twisted pair cable. The impedance is selected by SW2, as shown in
Table 410 "Impedance matching switch settings" (page 981).

Table 410
Impedance matching switch settings
Cable Type SW 2-1
75 ohms Down (On)
120 ohms Up (Off)

Note: The ON position for all the switches is toward the bottom of the
card. This is indicated by a white dot printed on the board next to the
bottom left corner of each individual switch.

Carrier grounding
NTBK50 enables the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier to be
selectively grounded. Closing (down position) the on-board switch applies
FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown
in Table 411 "Carrier Shield grounding switch settings" (page 981).

Table 411
Carrier Shield grounding switch settings
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4 – 1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN
SW 4 – 2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN

NTBK50 provides for the capability of selectively grounding the shield of

the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier. Closing (down) the on-board switch
applies FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings
are shown below.

NTBK50 enables the shield of the Tx and/or Rx pairs of the carrier to be

selectively grounded. Closing (down position) the on-board switch applies
FGND to the appropriate carrier cable shield. The switch settings are shown
in Table 414 "Carrier Shield grounding switch settings" (page 982).

Carrier Shield grounding (Switch SW4)

Table 412 "Carrier Shield grounding switch settings" (page 982) lists the
Carrier Shield ground switch settings.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 982 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Table 412
Carrier Shield grounding switch settings
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4 – 1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN
SW 4 – 2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.

Settings are shown in the Table below.

Table 413
Carrier shield grounding switch settings
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4-1 Rx—FGND Rx—OPEN
SW 4-2 Tx—FGND Tx—OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.

Table 414 "Carrier Shield grounding switch settings" (page 982) lists the
Carrier Shield ground switch settings.

Table 414
Carrier Shield grounding switch settings
Switch Down (On) Up (Off)
SW 4 – 1 Rx – FGND Rx – OPEN
SW 4 – 2 Tx – FGND Tx – OPEN

Note: The usual method is to ground the outer conductor of the receive
coax signal.

Receiver functions
The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires
no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter
specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation
requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter
attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from
about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 983

The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires
no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the
jitter specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter
attenuation requirements of CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides
jitter attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range
from about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
coded signal and outputs clock and synchronized data. The receiver is
sensitive to signals over the entire range of cable lengths and requires
no equalization. The clock and data recovery meets or exceeds the jitter
specifications of the CCITT recommendation G.823 and the jitter attenuation
requirements of the CCITT recommendation G.742. This provides jitter
attenuation increasing from 0 dB to 60 dB over the frequency range from
about 6 Hz to 6 KHz.

Transmitter functions
The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses. This conforms to CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses which conform to CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

The transmitter takes the binary (dual unipolar) data from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses. This conforms to CCITT
recommendation G.703 pulse shape.

Loopbacks
The remote loopback function causes the far-end device to transmit the
same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data
is additionally available at the far-end receive data outputs. Local loopback
causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the near-end clock and
receive data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless an
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is transmitted instead.

The remote loopback function causes the device to transmit the same
data that it receives using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data is
additionally available at the receive data outputs. Local loopback causes
the transmit data and clock to appear at the receive clock and data outputs.
This data is also transmitted on the line unless transmit AIS is selected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 984 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

The remote loopback function causes the far-end device to transmit the
same data that it receives, using the jitter attenuated receive clock. The data
is additionally available at the far-end receive data outputs. Local loopback
causes the transmit data and clock to appear at the near-end clock and
receive data outputs. This data is also transmitted on the line unless an
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) is transmitted instead.

CEPT transceiver
The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization,
channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications
of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization,

channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications
of the CCITT recommendation G.703 & G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1KHZ framing pulse.

The transmitter and receiver functions are used for synchronization,

channel, and signal extraction. The functions meet applicable specifications
of the CCITT recommendation G.703 and G.732.

The transceiver provides transmit framing based on the 2.048 MHz clock
derived from the DS-30X system clock and 1 KHz framing pulse.

Slip control
Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local
clock.

Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local
clock.

Slip control provides organized recovery of PCM when the clock recovered
from the external facility is at a different frequency with respect to the local
clock.

D-channel support interface

The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include:
• receive data output

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 985

• transmit data input

• receive clock output
• transmit clock output

The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates from
each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
The NTBK50 supports a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI)
daughterboard. It is equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card.
The NTBK50 also supports a Downloadable D-Channel Handler interface
(DDCH) daughterboard. The DDCH brings MSDL D-channel capability to
the system.
The D-channel support interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include: (1) Receive data
output, (2) transmit data input, (3) receive clock output, and (4) transmit clock
output. The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates
from each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
The NTBK50 supports a daughterboard D-channel handler interface (DCHI).
It is the equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card. As well, the
NTBK50 supports a Downloadable D-channel handler interface (DDCH). It
brings the MSDL D-channel capability into the Option 11C system.
The D-channel support interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex serial bit stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include:
• receive data output
• transmit data input
• receive clock output
• transmit clock output

The receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rates from
each other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

The NTBK50 supports a D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI)

daughterboard. It is equivalent to a single port of an NTAK02 SDI/DCH card.
The NTBK50 also supports a Downloadable D-Channel Handler interface
(DDCH) daughterboard. The DDCH brings MSDL D-channel capability to
the CS 1000 system.

DCHI Configuration for NTAK93 only (SW1)

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes
defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode
common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in a DPNSS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 986 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a
single port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard. See Table 415
"Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)" (page 986).

Table 415
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 — — —
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes

as defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI
mode common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in a
U.K. specific mode using the DPNSS format. The DDCH supports only a
single port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard.

Table 416
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 — — —
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI

The NTAK93 DCHI daughterboard can be operated in two separate modes

defined by an on-board dip switch. It can operate in a standard DCHI mode
common to most ISDN standard countries. It can also operate in a DPNSS
mode, which is not supported at this time. The DDCH supports only a
single port which directly interfaces to the PRI motherboard. See Table 417
"Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)" (page 986).

Table 417
Settings for the DCHI dip switch (SW1)
Switch Function On Off
S1-1 — — —
S1-2 F/W Mode DPNSS DCHI

Card-LAN interface
A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800
bps 8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an
asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.

The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 987

The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.

A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800
bps 8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an
asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.

The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector.

The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.

A Dual Port UART handles the functions of the serial ports for the Card-LAN
serial link test port interface. The test interface is an asynchronous 4800
bps 8 bit connected to port A of the UART. The card-LAN interface is an
asynchronous 19.2 kbps 9 bit start/stop connected to port B of the UART.

The connection to the test port is available at the backplane/MDF connector.

The signals at this port conform to the EIA RS-232C standard.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 988 NTBK50 2.0 Mb PRI card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 989

NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel

Handler daughterboard
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Functional description" (page 1003)

"Physical description" (page 990)

"Functional description" (page 992)

"Download operation" (page 996)

Introduction
The NTBK51 daughterboard provides Downloadable D-channel Handler
(DDCH) interfaces based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL).
The DDCH provides a single purpose full-duplex serial port capable of
downloading the D-channel application and base software into the card.The
NTBK51 provides Downloadable D-channel handler (DDCH) interfaces
based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL). The DDCH provides a
single purpose full-duplex serial port capable of downloading the D-channel
application and base software into the card.
The NTBK51 daughterboard provides Downloadable D-channel Handler
(DDCH) interfaces based on the Multipurpose Serial Data Link (MSDL).
The DDCH provides a single purpose full-duplex serial port capable of
downloading the D-channel application and base software into the card.
The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions:
• ISDN D-channel related protocol
• Selftest
• Loopback
• D-channel loadware including:
— management and maintenance

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 990 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

— LAPD- software for data link layer processing

— DCH interface
— Layer 3 preprocessor
— traffic reporting including link capacity

The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions:

• ISDN D-channel related protocol
• Selftest
• Loopback
• D-channel loadware including:
— management and maintenance
— LAPD- software for data link layer processing
— Meridian 1 DCH interface
— Layer 3 preprocessor
— traffic reporting including link capacity

The NTBK51 provides the following features and functions:

• ISDN D-channel related protocol
• Selftest
• Loopback
• D-channel loadware including:
— management and maintenance
— LAPD- software for data link layer processing
— DCH interface
— Layer 3 preprocessor
— traffic reporting including link capacity

Physical description
The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces with the system CPU and is
mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI
digital trunk card.
You can install this card in:
• slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet or slots 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or
41-49 in the expansion cabinets

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 991

• slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card is not supported in the
Media Gateway Expansion.

The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk

card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09.

One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link.

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The

DCHI LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in Table 418
"Faceplate LED" (page 991).

Table 418
Faceplate LED
State Definition
On (Red) NTBK51 is disabled.
On (Green) NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off NTBK51 is not equipped.

The Downloadable D-channel (NTBK51) is a daughterboard that mounts

on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI card. The
DDCH, in conjunction with the NTAK09/NTBK50 circuit card, can reside in
any physical slot 1-9 of the main cabinet and 11-19, 21-29, 31-39, or 41-49
of an IP Expansion cabinet.

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The DCH
LED is a dual-color (red/green), with the states represented as follows:

Table 419
Faceplate LEDs
State Definition
On (Red) NTBK51 is disabled.
On (Green) NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established
Off NTBK51 is not equipped.

The NTBK51 daughterboard interfaces with the CS 1000 CPU and is

mounted on either the NTAK09 1.5 DTI/PRI card or the NTBK50 2 Mb PRI
digital trunk card. The digital trunk card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3, and
4 of the Media Gateway. Digital trunk cards are not supported in Media
Gateway Expansions.

The NTBK51 daughterboard, when installed on the NTAK09 digital trunk

card, is addressed in the same slot as the NTAK09.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 992 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

One NTBK51 daughterboard is required for each PRI link.

LEDs are located on the faceplate of the NTAK09/NTBK50 card. The

DCHI LED is a dual-color (red/green). The LED is described in Table 420
"Faceplate LED" (page 992).

Table 420
Faceplate LED
State Definition
On (Red) NTBK51 is disabled.
On (Green) NTBK51 is enabled, but not necessarily established.
Off NTBK51 is not equipped.

Functional description
The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following:
• Microprocessors
• Main memory
• Shared memory
• EPROM memory
• Flash EPROM memory
• EEPROM memory
• Serial communication controller
• Sanity timer
• Bus timer

The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following:
• Microprocessors
• Main memory
• Shared memory
• EPROM memory
• Flash EPROM memory
• EEPROM memory
• Serial communication controller
• Sanity timer
• Bus timer

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 993

The main functional blocks of the NTBK51 architecture include the following:
• Microprocessors
• Main memory
• Shared memory
• EPROM memory
• Flash EPROM memory
• EEPROM memory
• Serial communication controller
• Sanity timer
• Bus timer

Microprocessors
One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface
and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the
software to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU
supports the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications
running simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card.
The microprocessor performs the following functions:
• sanity check and self tests
• message handling between the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and
Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet and the card
• four port serial communication controller handling with Direct Memory
Access (DMA)
• program download from the Small System Controller

One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface

and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from
software to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU
supports the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications
running simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card.
The microprocessor performs the following functions:
• Sanity check and self tests
• Message handling between the Option 11C and the card
• Four port serial communication controller handling with DMA
• Program download from Option 11C CPU

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 994 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

One microprocessor handles data transfer between each serial interface

and software, reports the status of each port and takes commands from the
software to control the activities of the ports. A high performance MPU
supports the D-channel from the PRI card and other software applications
running simultaneously on other ports of the DDCH card.
The microprocessor performs the following functions:
• sanity check and self tests
• message handling between the CS 1000 and the card
• four port serial communication controller handling with Direct Memory
Access (DMA)
• program download from the CS 1000 SSC

Main memory
The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM
and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and application
reside in main RAM and is downloaded from the software through the
shared memory.

The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM

and may be accessed in either 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and
application, resides in main RAM and is downloaded from software through
the shared memory.

The main 68EC020 system memory is comprised of 1 Mbyte of SRAM

and is accessible in 8 or 16 bits. The software, base code and application
reside in main RAM and is downloaded from the software through the
shared memory.

Shared memory
The shared memory is the interface between the CPU and the 68EC020
MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 kbytes and
accessible in 8 or 16 bits.

The shared memory is the interface between the Option 11C CPU and the
68EC020 MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 Kbytes
and accessible in either 8 or 16 bits.

The shared memory is the interface between the CS 1000 CPU and the
68EC020 MPU. This memory is a 16 Kbyte RAM, expandable to 64 kbytes
and accessible in 8 or 16 bits.

EPROM memory
The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on
power up or reset.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 995

The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on

power up or reset.

The Bootstrap code resides in this 27C1000 EPROM and is executed on

power up or reset.

Flash EPROM memory

Flash EPROM provides non-volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which
minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM provides an increase
in system service with a reduced delay after a brown-out, and faster testing
of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.

Flash EPROM provides non-volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which
minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM, in reference to current
devices, provides an increase in system service with a reduced delay after a
brown-out and faster testing of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.

Flash EPROM provides non-volatile storage for the DDCH loadware which
minimizes the impact to sysload. The Flash EPROM provides an increase
in system service with a reduced delay after a brown-out, and faster testing
of a hardware pack after it is plugged in.

EEPROM memory
The DDCH uses a 1024 bit serial EEPROM for storing the Nortel product
code and a revision level. This information can be queried by the software.

The DDCH uses a 1,024 bit serial EEPROM for storing the NT product code
and a revision level. This information can be queried by software.

The DDCH uses a 1024 bit serial EEPROM for storing the Nortel Networks
product code and a revision level. This information can be queried by the
software.

Serial communication controller

The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated
Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and
transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between
local RAM and the communication ports.

The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated
Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and
transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between
local RAM and the communication ports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 996 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

The serial controller is the Zilog Z16C35 and is referenced as the Integrated
Controller (ISCC). The ISCC includes a flexible Bus Interface Unit (BIU)
and four Direct Memory Access (DMA) channels, one for each receive and
transmit. The DMA core of the ISCC controls the data transfer between
local RAM and the communication ports.

Sanity timer
A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting
tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. If the MPU encounters
a hardware or software fault and enters a continuous loop, the sanity timer
enables the DDCH to reset itself.

A sanity timer is incorporated on the DDCH to prevent the MPU from getting
tied-up as the result of a hardware or software fault. The sanity timer permits
the DDCH to reset itself should it enter into an infinite loop.

If the MPU encounters a hardware or software fault and enters a continuous

loop, the sanity timer enables the DDCH to reset itself.

Bus timer
The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access a
device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period of
120 ms.

The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access
a device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period
of 120 microseconds.

The bus timer presents an error signal to the MPU if an attempt to access a
device did not receive acknowledgment within the bus time-out period of
120 ms.

Download operation
Downloading is performed in either of two modes: background mode or
maintenance mode. Before a download takes place, a D-channel link must
be configured. The following situations lead to software downloading:
• during initialization when new software is installed
• when enabling the card or application
• during card reset (due to loss of software or corruption)
• during a background audit

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Download operation 997

Downloading may be performed in either of two modes: background or

maintenance. Before any downloading can take place, a D-channel link must
be configured. The following situations may lead to software downloading:
• during initialization when new software is installed
• when enabling the card or application
• during card reset (due to loss of software, corruption)
• during a background audit

Downloading is performed in background mode or maintenance mode.

Before a download takes place, a D-channel link must be configured. The
following situations lead to software downloading:
• during initialization when new software is installed
• when enabling the card or application
• during card reset (due to loss of software or corruption)
• during a background audit

System initialization
When new base or application software is installed on a CS 1000E, CS
1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet, the download decision is
made during system initialization. The actual MSDL base software download
is done in background mode and can take several minutes to complete,
depending on switch traffic and the size of the MSDL base software.

When new base or application software is installed on an Option 11C, the

downloading decision is made during system initialization. Actual MSDL
base software downloading is done in background mode which may take
several minutes to complete, depending on the traffic of the switch and
the size of the MSDL base software.

When new base or application software is installed on a CS 1000, the

download decision is made during system initialization. The actual MSDL
base software download is done in background mode and can take several
minutes to complete, depending on switch traffic and the size of the MSDL
base software.

Card enabling or application enabling

If a normal download enable command is executed, the MSDL base code
and application is conditionally downloaded to the DDCH card. This
conditional download depends on the result of the check made by the CPU
on the MSDL base code and application software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 998 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

If a forced download enable command is executed in LD 96, the MSDL base

code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if the base
and application software is already resident on the DDCH card. In order to
complete a forced download, the following conditions must be met:
• the DDCH card must be enabled
• the D-channel port must be disabled

If a normal download enable command is executed, the MSDL base code

and application are conditionally downloaded to the DDCH card. This
conditional download depends on the result of the check made by the
Option 11C CPU on the MSDL base code and application software.
If a forced download enable command is executed in maintenance LD 96,
the MSDL base code and application are forced down to the DDCH card,
even if the base and application software is already resident on the DDCH
card. In order to complete a forced download, the following conditions must
be met:
• The DDCH card must be enabled
• The D-channel port must be disabled

If a normal download enable command is executed, the MSDL base code

and application is conditionally downloaded to the DDCH card. This
conditional download depends on the result of the check made by the CS
1000 CPU on the MSDL base code and application software.
If a forced download enable command is executed in LD 96, the MSDL base
code and application are forced down to the DDCH card, even if the base
and application software is already resident on the DDCH card. In order to
complete a forced download, the following conditions must be met:
• the DDCH card must be enabled
• the D-channel port must be disabled

Card reset
After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application
software are validated by the CPU. The software is stored in flash EPROM
on the DDCH card and need not be downloaded. But if the software is
missing due to new installation, corruption, or loadware version mismatch,
the CPU automatically downloads the base/application into the DDCH card.

Following a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application
software are validated by the Option 11C CPU. It does not need to be
downloaded because the software is stored in flash EPROM on the
DDCH card. However, if the software is missing (due to new installation,
corruption loadware version mismatch), the CPU automatically downloads
the base/application into the DDCH card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Download operation 999

After a card reset, the MSDL base code and the D-channel application
software are validated by the CS 1000 CPU. The software is stored in flash
EPROM on the DDCH card and does not need to be downloaded. But if
the software is missing due to new installation, corruption, or loadware
version mismatch, the CPU automatically downloads the base/application
into the DDCH card.

Background audit
If a background audit of the card and associated applications finds that a
download is required, the card is queued in the PSDL tree. Downloading is
performed in background mode based on the entries in the PSDL tree.

If during background audit of the card and associated applications it is

found that downloading is required, the card is queued in the PSDL tree.
Downloading is performed in background mode based on the entries in
the PSDL tree.

If a background audit of the card and associated applications finds that a

download is required, the card is queued in the PSDL tree. Downloading is
performed in background mode based on the entries in the PSDL tree.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1000 NTBK51 Downloadable D-channel Handler daughterboard

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1001

NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk

cards
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1001)

"Physical description" (page 1002)

"Functional description" (page 1003)

"Operation" (page 1003)

"Electrical specifications" (page 1005)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 1006)

"Introduction" (page 923)

"Applications" (page 1013)

Introduction
The NTCK16 generic Central Office trunk cards support up to eight analog
Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE slot.
The cards are available with or without the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM)
feature. The cards are also available in numerous countries. Country
specific information is provided in this chapter.
The cards are identified by a two-letter suffix to the product code called the
vintage. The card vintage is based on whether PPM is equipped or not, and
the individual countries where the card is being installed.
The cards listed below are minimum vintage required to support the
following countries:
• NTCK16AA generic Central Office trunk card with PPM

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1002 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

— Ireland

• NTCK16BC generic Central Office trunk card without PPM.

— Brazil
— Ireland
— Mexico
— Tortolla
— Singapore

• NTCK16AD generic Central Office trunk card with PPM

— Turkey

• NTCK16BD generic Central Office trunk card without PPM.

— Argentina
— Turkey
— Brazil
— Chile
— Indonesia
— Korea
— Venezuela

Throughout this chapter, cards with PPM are identified by the vintage AX.
Cards without PPM are referenced by the vintage BX.

Physical description
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards uses
eight units. Each unit connects to the shelf backplane through an 80-pin
connector. The backplane is cabled to the I/O panel which is then cabled
to the cross-connect terminal. At the cross-connect terminal, each unit
connects to external apparatus by Tip and Ring leads.

Switch settings
There are no option switches on the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic
Central Office trunk cards. All settings are configured in software.

Self-test
When the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX trunk cards are installed and power
is applied to them, a self-test is performed on each card. The red LED on
the faceplate flashes three times, then remains continuously lit until the card
is enabled in software. If the self-test fails, the LED remains lit.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Operation 1003

Functional description
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support
up to eight analog Central Office trunks. They can be installed in any IPE
slot.

Both cards are exactly the same except for the Periodic Pulse Metering
(PPM) feature. The NTCK16AX card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM
but the NTCK16BX card does not.

Common features
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards:
• support the North American loss plan
• support loop start signalling
• support busy tone detection and supervision on a per unit basis.
• support battery reversal detection
• provide 4 dB dynamic attenuation pads on a per call basis
• allow individual units or the entire board to be disabled by software
• provide software selectable A-law or µ-law companding
• indicate self-test status during an automatic or manual self-test
• provide card-identification for auto configuration, and for determining the
serial number and firmware level of the card
• convert transmission signals from analog-to-digital and from
digital-to-analog
• provide termination and trans-hybrid balance impedance to match 600 .

Operation
Each NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk card
supports the following:
• Loop start operation
• Battery reversal detection
• Busy tone detection and supervision
• Loss Switching
• Trunk-to-Trunk connections
• Call Disconnect

In addition, the NTCK16AX circuit card supports internal 12/16 kHz PPM
detection.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1004 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Loop start operation

Loop start operation is configured in software and is implemented in the
card through software download messages.

Idle state
In the idle state, the ringing detector is connected across the tip and ring
wires, providing a high impedance loop toward the Central Office.

Call placed by Central Office

The Central Office initiates a call by applying ringing between the tip and
ring wires. If the call is answered, the ringing detector on the trunk card
is switched out and a low resistance dc loop is placed between the tip
and ring leads.

On trunks configured for battery supervision, the battery detector records

the polarity of the tip and ring wires and sends an answer acknowledge
signal to software.

Call placed by CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1

To initiate a call, the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 switches out the
ringing detector and places a low resistance loop across the tip and ring
leads. On trunks configured for battery supervision, the trunk card sends a
seize acknowledge signal to software.

The system sends digits in the form of Dual Tone Multifrequency (DTMF)
tones or pulse digits. When the far-end answers, the Central Office reverses
polarity. If the trunk is configured for battery supervision, it sends a polarity
reversal message to software.

Central Office disconnect

There are two ways the Central Office can disconnect the call:
• by applying busy tone toward the CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1.
If the trunk card is configured to detect busy tone, it sends a disconnect
message to software.
• by reversing battery. If the trunk card is configured to detect battery
reversal, it sends a disconnect message to software. When the unit on
the trunk card is idled, the trunk card sends a release confirm message
to software.

CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 disconnect

The CS 1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 disconnects the call by removing
the loop between the tip and ring leads and replacing the ringing detector.
Trunks configured for battery supervision send a release confirm message
to software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Electrical specifications 1005

Electrical specifications
Power requirements
Table 421 "NTCK16 circuit card power requirements" (page 1005) shows
the power requirements for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central
Office trunk cards.

Table 421
NTCK16 circuit card power requirements
Voltage Idle Current Active current
+15.0 V dc 170 ma 330 ma
(See 1)
-15.0 V dc 170 ma 249 ma
(See 1)
+8.5 V dc 101 ma 100 ma
(See 2)
+5.0 V dc 160 ma 322 ma

Note 1: Analog circuitry is powered with +/-12 V generated from +/-15

V. The maximum current imbalance between the +/-15 V rails is 100
ma per circuit pack.
Note 2: 8.5V is regulated to give 5 V.

Environmental specifications
Table 422 "NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications" (page
1005) lists the environmental specifications of the NTCK16AX and
NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards.

Table 422
NTCK16 circuit card environmental specifications
Parameter Specifications
Operating temperature 10 to 45 degrees C
Operating humidity 20 to 80% RH (non-condensing)
Storage temperature –20 to +60 degrees C
Storage humidity 5 to 95% Relative Humidity

Pad switching
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards support
the North American loss plan. Software configuration allows the selection of
4 dB loss pads on a per unit basis.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1006 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Table 423
NTCK16 pad switching
Loss Analog-to-Digital Digital-to-Analog
PAD out 0 dB –3 dB
PAD in +4 dB +1 dB

Note: The tolerance for the above nominal values is +0.3 dB, -0.7 dB.

Connector pin assignments

Cross connections
Figure 282 "NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel
connectors A, E, K, R" (page 1007), Figure 283 "NTCK16 Central Office
trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S" (page 1008),
and Figure 284 "NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O
panel connectors C, G, M, T" (page 1009) provide cross connect information
for the NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards.

Configuration
The trunk type for each unit on the card is selected by software service
change entries at the system terminal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 1007

Figure 282
NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors A, E, K, R

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1008 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Figure 283
NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors B, F, L, S

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 1009

Figure 284
NTCK16 Central Office trunk connections for NT8D37 I/O panel connectors C, G, M, T

NTCK16AX Central Office trunk card

Route Data Block
Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1010 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16AX.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW Define a new unit
TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block
CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and
Media Gateway 1000E
0-127 Range for Small System, CS 1000E system,
Media Gateway 1000B, and
Media Gateway 1000T
TKTP COT Define trunk type as Central Office
ICOG IAO Incoming and Outgoing trunk
CNTL YES Change a trunk timer
TIMER RGV 256 Set Ring Validation Timer to 128 ms.
MR (NO) PPM XLD PPM is off, buffered, or unbuffered on this route.

Trunk Data Block

Respond to the prompts in LD 14 as shown:

LD 14 - Trunk Data Block for NTCK16AX.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit
TYPE: COT Central Office Trunk
TN Terminal Number
lscu Format for Large System, Call Server
1000E, and Media Gateway 1000E,
where l = loop, s = shelf, c = card, u
= unit
XTRK XCOT Type is IPE COT
(See note on page 803.)
CDEN (8D) Card density is 8D (default)
SIGL LOP Loop start signaling
PPID Xx 04 Ireland/Turkey 12 KHz
(See page 803.) 03 Turkey 16 KHz

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuration 1011

Prompt Response Description

BTID Xx Enter the country busy tone ID:
(See page 803.)
Tortola, Brazil = 10
Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO)
Singapore = 11
Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO)
Chile, Venezuela, Thailand, Korea =
06. Argentina = 12 or 07, Turkey = 14
SUPN (NO) YES Supervision yes (no)
STYP BTS Busy tone supervision enabled
BAT Loop break supervision enabled
CLS (LOL) SHL Attenuation Pads In, (Out)
DTN, (DIP) Digitone signaling, (digipulse)
P20, P12, (P10) Make-break ratio for pulse dialing
speed.

Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on each
NTCK16AX card.
PPIDFreqMin pulse detection
0316Kz>70ms
0412Kz>70ms
CountryBTIDCadence
Brazil, Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off
Mexico10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off
Mexico 8375 ms on/off
Singapore11750 ms on/off
Ireland 3500 +/- 50 ms on/off
Ireland 9375 - 750 ms on/off
Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/off
Venezuela, Indonesia12300 ms on, 200 ms off
Thailand, Korea12300 ms on, 200 ms off
Argentina12300 ms on, 200 ms off
Argentina07250 - 500 ms on/off
Turkey1410 seconds of Tone 1:
200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off,
200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on;
200 ms off, 600 ms on; followed by
Tone 2: 200 ms off, 200 ms on.

NTCK16BX Central Office trunk card

Route Data Block
Respond to the prompts in LD 16 as shown:

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1012 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

LD 16 - Route Data Block for NTCK16BX.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW Define a new unit
TYPE: COT Define a new Route Data Block
CUST xx Customer number as defined in LD 15.
ROUT Route number
0-511 Range for Large System, Call Server 1000E, and
Media Gateway 1000E
0-127 Range for Small System, CS 1000E system,
Media Gateway 1000B, and
Media Gateway 1000T
TKTP COT Define trunk type as Central Office
ICOG IAO Incoming and Outgoing trunk
CNTL YES Change a trunk timer
TIMER RGV 256 Set Ring Validation Timer to 128 ms.
MR (NO) PPM is off on this route.

Trunk Data Block

Respond to the prompts in LD 14.

LD 14 - Trunk Data Block for NTCK16BX

Prompt Response Description
REQ: NEW Define a new trunk unit.
TYPE: COT Central Office Trunk
TN Terminal Number
lscu Format for Large System, Call Server 1000E,
and Media Gateway 1000E, where l = loop, s =
shelf, c = card, u = unit
XTRK XCOT Type is IPE COT
(See note 1.)
CDEN (8D) Card density is 8D (default).
SIGL LOP Loop start signaling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 1013

Prompt Response Description

BTID Xx Enter the country busy tone ID:
(See 807.)
Tortola, Brazil = 10
Mexico = 10 or 08 (depending on CO)
Singapore = 11
Ireland = 3 or 9 (depending on CO) Kuwait,Chile,
Venezuela, Indonesia, Thailand,Korea = 06.
Argentina = 12 or 07, Turkey = 14
SUPN (NO) YES Supervision yes (no)
STYP BTS Busy tone supervision enabled
BAT Loop break supervision enabled
CLS (LOL) SHL Attenuation Pads In, (Out)
(DIP) DTN Digitone signaling, (digipulse)
(P10) P12 P20 Make-break ratio for pulse dialing speed.

Note: These prompts are required only for the first unit defined on
each NTCK16BX card.

BTID values by country

Country BTIDCadence
Brazil Tortola10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off
Mexico10250 ms +/- 50 ms on/off
Mexico 8375 ms on/off
Singapore11750 ms on/off
Ireland 3500 +/- 50 ms on/off
Ireland 9375 - 750 ms on/off
Kuwait, Chile 6500 +/- 50 ms on/off
Venezuela, Indonesia12300 ms on, 200 ms off
Thailand, Korea12300 ms on, 200 ms off
Argentina12300 ms on, 200 ms off
Argentina07250 - 500 ms on/off
Turkey1410 seconds of Tone 1:
200 ms off, 200 ms on; 200 ms off,
200 ms on; 200 ms off, 200 ms on;
200 ms off, 600 ms on; followed by
Tone 2: 200 ms off, 200 ms on.

Applications
Periodic Pulse Metering
All trunk units on the NTCK16AX trunk card can be individually configured
to support the Periodic Pulse Metering (PPM) feature.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1014 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Note: PPM is available on the NTCK16AX trunk card. It is not

supported on the NTCK16BX trunk card.

PPM allows the user of a telephone to keep an accurate record of Central

Office calls for billing or administration purposes.

Detection limits
Pulses detected by the NTCK16AX circuit card must be within the following
limits:

Frequency 11 880 to 12 120 Hz

Level 105 to 1100 mVrms

Note: The pack should not be used to

detect levels of 1100 mVrms or greater
a Tip and Ring, as this may result in
noise.
Pulse length Dependent on PPID – see LD 14

Busy tone detect

Busy tone is sent by the Central Office to indicate the release of an
established call.

Detection limits
The NTCK16AX and NTCK16BX generic Central Office trunk cards can
detect busy tone within the following limits:

Frequency 400 to 620 Hz

Level –30 to 0 dBm
Cadence See on page 803.

Loss switching
The Generic XFCOT is based on the XFCOT design, which is using a static
pad download algorithm by default for its loss plan.
The generic XFCOT has to be set explicitly to a Dynamic Pad Switching
mode to make it compliant with the standard North American Dynamic Pad
Switching mode.
Therefore the following steps must be followed when the Generic XFCOT
is installed:
1. Define Loss Switching mode. Respond to the prompts in LD 97 as
shown.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 1015

LD 97 - Defining Loss Switching mode.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG
TYPE: SYSP IPE system parameters configuration
...
NATP YES Select North American transmission plan.

Note: The default to the NATP prompt is NO, and therefore this
prompt must always be checked during installation.

2. Define Loss Switching Class Of Service. Respond to the prompts in

LD 14 as shown.

LD 14 - Defining Loss Switching Class Of Service.

Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG
TYPE: COT
XTRK XCOT
SIGL LOP
...
CLS LOL LOL= Long Line

Note: The XFCOT uses the CLS Long Line (LOL) and Short
Line (SHL) for Loss Switching purposes and that the card and
trunk type is different from the XUT.

Equivalencies
The following equivalencies do apply:
• XFCOT COT SHL is equivalent with XUT COT TRC
• XFCOT COT LOL is equivalent with XUT COT NTC.

The entries TRC and NTC are no longer allowed for the Generic XFCOT.

Trunk to Trunk connection

When any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the
Loop Start Trunk of the Generic XFCOT is marked as having disconnect
supervision and therefore follows the same rules as a Ground Start Trunk.

There is no configuration involved for this operation.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1016 NTCK16 Generic Central Office Trunk cards

Call disconnect
If any disconnect supervision is configured (CLS = BAT, BTS), the Loop
Start Trunk is released when the disconnect signal is received. This applies
also in call states such as ringing, camp-on, and DISA.

There is no configuration involved for this operation.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1017

NTDK20 Small System Controller card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1017)

"Memory" (page 1019)

"100BaseT IP daughterboards" (page 1020)

"PC card interface" (page 1023)

"Security device" (page 1023)

"SDI ports" (page 1024)

"Conferencing" (page 1025)

"Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment" (page

1025)

Introduction
This chapter introduces the NTDK20GA Small System Controller (SSC)
Card used in the Call Server, Media Gateway, and Media Gateway 1000B
(MG 1000B). It controls call processing, stores system and customer data,
and provides various 100BaseT IP interfaces.
You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway or slots
7 through 10 in the Media Gateway Expansion
The NTDK20FA SSC card is the minimum vintage of SSC that can be used
in the Call Server and Media Gateway. See Figure 285 "NTDK20 SSC card
and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server" (page 1019).
The NTDK20GA SSC card has the following components and features:
• NTTK25 daughterboard Flash memory, NTAK19 SIMM module (16 MB)
DRAM, and Backup memory

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1018 NTDK20 Small System Controller card

Note: The NTTK13 daughterboard is still supported.

• up to two 100BaseT IP daughterboards

• two PCMCIA sockets
• three Serial Data Interface (SDI) ports
• 32 channels of Conferencing (64 if one dual-port 100BaseT IP
daughterboard is present, or 96 if two dual-port 100BaseT IP
daughterboards are present)
• one 10BaseT port
• 30 channels of Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) and a combination of eight
Digitone Receivers (DTR) or Extended Tone Detectors (XTD)
• additional tone service ports (four units of MFC/MFE/MFK5/MFK6/MFR
or eight DTR/XTD units)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Memory 1019

Figure 285
NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server

Memory
The majority of system and customer configured data is both controlled and
stored on the NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash ROM. An active and backup copy
of customer data is also kept on the Flash ROM.

In the event of data loss, the NTDK20 SSC card also retains a copy of
customer files in an area called the Backup flash drive. The NTDK20 SSC
card is equipped with 8MB of temporary memory space called DRAM.
DRAM functions much like RAM on a computer system. It stores and

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1020 NTDK20 Small System Controller card

processes temporary automated routines and user-programmed commands

while the system is running. The DRAM on the SSC card stores operating
system files, user files, overlay data, patch codes, and the active copy of the
customer database.

The NTDK20 SSC card’s Flash daughterboard is the NTTK25. It performs

most of the system software storage and data processing.

NTTK25 daughterboard
The NTTK25 is a 48 MB daughterboard comprised of Flash ROM and
Primary Flash drive. It is required in the Call Server and Media Gateway.

The Flash ROM holds 32 MB of ROM memory, comprising operating system

data and overlay programs. Flash ROM is expandable using an expansion
flash daughterboard.

The Primary Flash drive contains 16 MB of storage space. Most of the data
storage is allocated to the Primary Flash drive – the main storage area of
customer configured data.

Other system data such as the Secure Storage Area (SSA) also resides in
the Flash drive. The SSA holds data that must survive power interruptions.

The Boot ROM is a 2 MB storage device located on the NTDK20 SSC card.
The Boot ROM contains the boot code, system data, patch data, and the
backup copy of the Primary Flash drive’s customer database.

100BaseT IP daughterboards
A 100BaseT IP Daughterboard mounted on the NTDK20 SSC card enables
the connection of the Call Server to a Media Gateway. See Figure 285
"NTDK20 SSC card and expansion daughterboard in the Call Server" (page
1019).
Each daughterboard increases the number of conference channels by 32.
The maximum number of conference ports is 96. Table 424 "Expansion
daughterboards" (page 1022) provides the ports, cables, and connection
data on the IP daughterboards.
The NTDK83 (dual-port) 100BaseT IP daughterboard mounts on the
NTDK20 SSC card in the Call Server. It provides connectivity to two Media
Gateways.
Note: With a point-to-point connection, the Media Gateway must be
within 100 meters of the Call Server.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 100BaseT IP daughterboards 1021

An optional second NTDK83 daughterboard can be mounted on the

NTDK20 SSC card in the Call Server. Adding the second NTDK83
daughterboard provides support for up to four Media Gateways. See Figure
286 "NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page 1021).
The NTDK99AA (single-port) daughterboard is mounted on the NTDK20
SSC card in the Media Gateway to provide connectivity to the Call Server.
See Figure 287 "NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard" (page
1022).
Note: Third party media conversion devices can be used to extend
the range of Media Gateways from the Call Server. The IMC Networks
Ethernet Compatible Media Converter with a McLIM Tx/Fx-SM/Plus
module was tested by Nortel. It provided acceptable transmission
between the Call Server and the Media Gateway located up to 40 kms
apart.

Figure 286
NTDK83AA dual-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1022 NTDK20 Small System Controller card

Figure 287
NTDK99A single-port 100BaseT IP daughterboard

Table 424
Expansion daughterboards
Max. distance between Call
Number Server and Media Gateway
Daughterboard of ports Cable type systems
NTDK99 (used in one Use the supplied Media Gateways can be located
Media Gateway) NTTK34AA UTP up to 100 m (328 ft.) from the Call
two CAT 5 RJ-45 2 m Server if connected point-to-point,
NTDK83 (used in
cross-over cable to or up to 40 km (24 miles) from
Call Server
connect the Call Server the Call Server if a third party
and Media Gateway converter is used to convert to
using the 100BaseT fiber.
daughterboards.

The NTTK34AA
cross-over cable must
be used if connecting
point-to-point.

Note: If not connecting point-to-point, connect the Call Server and

Media Gateway using a straight-through Ethernet UTP Cat 5 cable.

Call Servers can be connected to Media Gateway in the following ways:

• Use 100BaseT to connect to the LAN for voice distribution over a data
network.
• Use 100BaseT cable if connected point-to-point (directly) to the Media
Gateway. The NTTK34AA crossover cable must be used. The Media
Gateways can be located up to 100 meters from the Call Server.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Security device 1023

• Use Media Conversion devices (third party converters) to convert

100BaseT to fiber for distances from 100 m to 40 km.

See Figure 288 "Call Server connection to Media Gateway" (page 1023).

Figure 288
Call Server connection to Media Gateway

For further information or installation instructions, refer to Communication

Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large System Installation and Configuration
(NN43021-310).

PC card interface
The NTDK20 SSC card has a PC card interface through a socket located on
its faceplate. The PC card socket can accommodate a Software Delivery
card used for software upgrading and as backup media.

Security device
The NTDK20 SSC card in each Media Gateway must contain a NTDK57DA
Security device, a remote dongle (NT_Rem) which is keyed to match
the NTDK57AA Security device on the Call Server and a standard

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1024 NTDK20 Small System Controller card

dongle (NT_STD). This maintains the requirement of a single keycode for

each system. Refer to Figure 285 "NTDK20 SSC card and expansion
daughterboard in the Call Server" (page 1019) for the location of the device.
This security scheme provides the following:
• enables the system to operate as a single system when all links are up.
• enables the Media Gateway to continue operating with its existing
configuration in the event of a failure of the Call Server, or the failure of
the link to the Call Server from the Media Gateway.
• prevents users from configuring or using unauthorized TNs or features.

The Media Gateway security device provides the following capabilities for
the Media Gateway :
• System software can be installed but no calls can be processed or
features activated until communication with the Call Server has been
established and a match between the security ID of the Call Server and
the Media Gateway has been confirmed.
• System software can be upgraded.

Note: Local data dump, LD 43 commands, and LD 143 commands

are not permitted.

SDI ports
The NTDK20 SSC card in both the Call Server and the Media Gateways
contains three SDI ports used to connect on-site terminals or remote
terminals through a modem. Table 425 "Default SDI port settings on the
NTDK20 SSC card" (page 1024) shows the port default settings.

Table 425
Default SDI port settings on the NTDK20 SSC card
TTY Port Baud rate Data bits Stop bits Parity Use
0 Set by a DIP 8 1 None MTC/SCH/
switch BUG
1 1200 8 1 None MTC/SCH/
BUG
2 1200 8 1 None MTC/SCH/
BUG

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment 1025

Conferencing
Thirty-two conference channels are provided by the NTDK20 SSC card’s
conference devices. Conference capability can be increased by mounting
expansion daughterboards on the NTDK20 SSC card. Each dual IP
daughterboard increases the total number of conference channels by 32.
The maximum number of conference ports is 96.

Each conference device provides 32 ports of conferencing capabilities (one

conference participant for each port). A conference call can involve three
to six participants. For example, there could be six 5-party conferences on
each device, or four 6-party conferences plus two 3-party conferences. It is
not possible to conference between conference devices.

10BaseT port
The Call Server provides one 10BaseT connection to a Local Area Network
(LAN) to interface with Management software applications such as OTM
and CallPilot. The Media Gateway SSC 10BaseT port, Port 1, is disabled by
default. To use the 10BaseT port, the port must be assigned a unique IP
address and the port must be enabled from the Call Server.

The Media Gateway 10BaseT port can run in Normal mode or Survival
mode. In normal mode, the Media Gateway does not provide access to
maintenance or alarm management.

External connections to the 10BaseT port are provided by a 15-pin

connector located on the backplanes of the Call Server and Media
Gateways.

Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment

The Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion contain physical card
slots, numbered 1 to 10. See Figure 289 "Media Gateway slots" (page
1026)and Figure 290 "Media Gateway Expansion slots" (page 1027).

When configuring the system, the physical card slot numbers must be
transposed to "logical" card slot numbers. For example, to configure a card
physically located in Slot 2 of the first Media Gateway, use logical Slot 12. To
configure a card physically located in Slot 2 of the second Media Gateway,
use logical Slot 22. See Table 426 "Media Gateway and Media Gateway
Expansion slot assignments" (page 1026).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1026 NTDK20 Small System Controller card

Table 426
Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion slot assignments
Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion
First Second Third Fourth
Physica Logical Physica Logical Physica Logical Physica Logical
l card card l card card l card card l card card
slot slot slot slot slot slot slot slot
1 11 1 21 1 31 1 41
2 12 2 22 2 32 2 42
Media 3 13 3 23 3 33 3 43
Gateway 4 14 4 24 4 34 4 44
5 * 5 * 5 * 5 *
6 * 6 * 6 * 6 *
7 17 7 27 7 37 7 47
Media
Gateway/ 8 18 8 28 8 38 8 48
Expans 9 19 9 29 9 39 9 49
ion
10 20 10 30 10 40 10 50
Legend
* Not supported.

Figure 289
Media Gateway slots

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Media Gateway/Media Gateway Expansion card slot assignment 1027

Figure 290
Media Gateway Expansion slots

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1028 NTDK20 Small System Controller card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1029

NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller

Card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1029)

"Processor" (page 1032)

"Ethernet ports" (page 1032)

"Expansion daughterboards" (page 1032)

"Backplane interface" (page 1032)

"Serial data interface ports" (page 1033)

"Faceplate LED display" (page 1033)

Introduction
The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card provides a gateway
controller for MG 1000E IP Media Gateways in a CS 1000E system. The
MGC only functions as a gateway controller under control of a CS 1000E
Call Server.
The MGC card has two expansion sites to accommodate Digital Signal
Processor (DSP) daughterboards (DBs). The daughterboards are described
in "NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards"
(page 1045).
The MGC card occupies the system controller slot 0 in the Media Gateway
chassis.
The MGC card, without expansion daughterboards, includes the following
components and features:
• Arm processor.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1030 NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

• 128 MB RAM.
• 4MB boot flash.
• Internal CompactFlash (CF) card mounted on the card. It appears to the
software as a standard ATA hard drive.
• Embedded Ethernet switch.
• Six 100 BaseT Ethernet ports for connection to external networking
equipment.
• Four character LED display on the faceplate.
• Two PCI Telephony Mezzanine Card form factor sites for system
expansion.
• Real time clock (RTC).
• Backplane interface.
• Three serial data interface ports.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 1031

Figure 291
MGC block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1032 NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

Processor
The processor combines RISC processors, DSP resources, SDRAM
controller, and UARTs. The processor runs the application as well as
providing tone and conference functions. It interfaces to the rest of the
system using Ethernet.

Ethernet ports
External connections
Of the six external Ethernet ports, three are reserved for ELAN subnet
connections and three for TLAN subnet connections. Two ELAN ports and
two TLAN ports are accessed via RJ-45 connectors on the faceplate. The
third ELAN and the third TLAN port are connected to the backplane.

The two ports connected to the backplane are available if an Option 11C
cabinet or a CS 1000M Cabinet is used. The Option 11C cabinet requires a
backplane adapter. The CS 1000M Cabinet does not require a backplane
adapter.

Internal connections
Four Ethernet ports provide internal connections: one to each of the
expansion daughterboards, and a TLAN subnet and an ELAN subnet
connection to the processor.

Expansion daughterboards
Both expansion sites use the same PMC form factor and pin-out. However,
one site is intended for a VoIP daughterboard only and provides Ethernet
and TDM connectivity. It is not accessible from the faceplate and a PCI
bus is not available. The other site provides a full PCI bus and faceplate
accessibility in addition to Ethernet and TDM.

Backplane interface
The FPGA features include:
• Serial data interface port
• Time slot interchanger (TSIC)
• SSD X12/A10 signaling interface
• CE-Mux bus interface
• CardLan interface
• DS30x interface
• TDM bus for tones and conference
• System clock generation and system clock reference

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Faceplate LED display 1033

Serial data interface ports

The MGC has three serial data interface (SDI) ports. The ports can be
used locally for debugging, or they can be configured in the CS 1000E Call
Sever as system terminals. Only ports SDI 0 and SDI 1 can be used to
access the installation menu during initial configuration of the MGC. SDI 2
is not available during bootup. Due to a limitation of the three port cable
used, SDI 1 and SDI 2 do not use hardware flow control. Only SDI 0 has
full modem support.

TTY default settings

The default tty settings for the SDI ports are:
• Baud rate: 9600.
• Data bit length: 8.
• Stop bit: 1.
• Parity: none.
• Flow control: none.

MGC serial port configuration change

If the serial ports are configured as SL1 terminals on the Call Server, the tty
default settings can be changed in LD 17. Any values configured in LD 17
are downloaded to the MGC and override default values. The downloaded
values persist over restarts and power outages. A system message is
output when the serial port baud rate is changed.

Faceplate LED display

The faceplate on the MGC card has a four character LED display.

The diagnostic messages summarized in the following table are displayed

on the faceplate.

Table 427
Faceplate display
Message Description
BOOT This is the first message displayed when the system becomes active.
POST Power on self test. This message is displayed when the MGC is carrying
out system tests during power up.
PASS Power on self test pass.
EXXX Error code. XXX is a numeric value. An error code is displayed if a serious
system error is detected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1034 NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller Card

LOAD Application software is loading.

LLL:S IPMG super loop and MGC shelf number. LLL is the superloop number. S
is the shelf number. For example, 032:0, 120:1

Faceplate LED display

In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages would be displayed in
the following order:
1. BOOT
2. POST
3. PASS
4. LOAD

If there is a fatal self test error during bootup, an error code appears and the
PASS and LOAD messages are not displayed.

During normal operations the LED displays the IP Media Gateway (IPMG)
superloop and MGC shelf number. If an error occurs the display cycles
between the shelf number and the error code. Each item is displayed for
20 seconds.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1035

NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common

Processor Pentium Mobile Card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1035)

"Cabinet/chassis support" (page 1038)

"Media storage" (page 1039)

"Memory" (page 1039)

"Ethernet interfaces" (page 1039)

"Serial data interface ports" (page 1040)

"USB 2.0 port" (page 1040)

"Security device" (page 1040)

"Faceplate" (page 1041)

"LED indicators" (page 1043)

Introduction
The system hardware for the Common Processor Pentium Mobile (CP
PM) consists of one new pack design with two variants: CS1000 CP
PM NTDW61 (single slot) and CS1000 CP PM NTDW66 IPE (double
slot) The NTDW61 and NTDW66 CP PM cards provide a platform for
applications including Call Server and Signaling Server, storage of system
and customer data and they provide various 10/100/1000 BaseT Ethernet
network interfaces. Gateway functionality and shelf container functionality
are delivered by the Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card and its Digital
Signal Processor (DSP) daughterboard.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1036 NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

The CP PM hardware includes the following components and features:

• Intel Pentium processor.
• Integrated Intel 855GME GMCH/Intel ICH-4 controller chipset.
• Two CompactFlash sockets: (1) a fixed media disk (FMD) on the card
and (2) a hot swappable removable media disk (RMD) accessible on
the faceplate.
• DDR RAM expandable up to 2 GB.
• Three Ethernet ports.
• Two serial data interface ports.
• One USB port.
• Security device.

When populated with different memory and disk drive options, the CP
PM hardware can be used for other purposes. For example, the CP PM
hardware can be used as a Call Server or as a platform for the CS 1000
Signaling Server.

The CP PM high level hardware block diagram is a schematic of the CP

PM hardware.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Introduction 1037

Figure 292
CP PM high level hardware block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1038 NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 293
CP PM card

Cabinet/chassis support
The CP PM NTDW61 single-slot card is supported in the following chassis:
• Option 11C cabinet (except for slot 0).
• Option 11C expansion cabinet (except for slot 0).
• Option 11C Mini chassis (except for slot 0 and slot 4).
• Option 11C Mini expander chassis.
• MG 1000E main chassis (except for slot 0).
• MG 1000E expander chassis.

The CP PM NTDW66 double-slot card is supported in the CS 1000M IPE

Universal Equipment Module (UEM).

Slot 0 in the Option 11C , Option 11C expansion, Option 11C Mini and MG
1000E main chassis are reserved for the MGC card. Slot 4 in the Option
11C Mini is reserved for the 48 DLC.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Ethernet interfaces 1039

Media storage
Fixed media drive
The fixed media drive (FMD) is a CompactFlash (CF) card that is internal
to the CP PM card. It is accessible only when the CP PM card is removed
from the system. The FMD serves as a hard drive. The Fixed Media Drive
is used when CP PM is a Call Server. It is connected directly to the ATA
controller in the chipset, which is also known as the hard drive controller.

Removable media drive

The removable media drive (RMD) is a hot swappable CF card accessible
from the CP PM faceplate. The CS 1000 software is shipped on a CF card
and is loaded onto the CP PM through the RMD. This drive is also used for
data backups.

Hard disk drive

The CP PM hardware can be used as a platform for the CS 1000 Signaling
Server. When deployed as a signaling server, the CP PM platform is
equipped with a hard disk drive.

Note: The hard drive must have its jumper set for CSEL operation
before installation.

Memory
The memory controller in the Intel 855 GME graphics memory controller hub
(GMCH) supports one channel of DDR 200/266/333 (PC1600/2100/2700)
with error correcting code (ECC). The maximum capacity of the controller is
2GB. The main memory is comprised of two 200-pin SO-DIMM modules.
This facilitates future upgrades.

Ethernet interfaces
There are three Ethernet network interfaces on a CP PM card: HSP, TLAN
and ELAN. The network interfaces are application specific.

ELAN
The ELAN network interface is a 10/100 BaseT port. By default this port
is set to autonegotiate. This network interface is used for both Call Server
and Signaling Server applications.

HSP
The HSP is a 10/100/1000 BaseT network interface that provides standby
Call Server redundancy. By default this network interface is set to
autonegotiate.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1040 NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

TLAN
The TLAN network interface is a 10/100 BaseT port. By default this network
interface is set to autonegotiate. This network interface is used for Signaling
Server applications.

Serial data interface ports

The CP PM has two serial data interface (SDI) ports: Port 0 and Port 1.
Both ports are standard RS232 DTE ports. They are routed through the
backplane of the shelf to a 50-pin main distribution frame (MDF) connector
on the back of the shelf. A cable (NTAK19ECE6) that adapts the 50-pin MDF
to a pair of 25-pin DB connectors is shipped with the CP PM. A 25-pin null
modem is required to adapt an SDI port to a typical PC serial port. Port 0 is
used for maintenance access. Port 1 is for an external modem connection.

TTY parameters
The TTY parameters are configured through the BIOS features configuration
menu. The BIOS can be accessed only through TTY Port 0. On the Call
Server, TTY parameters can be modified using LD 17. On the Signaling
Server, these parameters can be modified using the maintenance shell.
Supported parameters:
• Baud rate: 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200.
• Data bit length: 5-8.
• Stp bit: 1, 1.5, and 2.
• Parity: odd, even, and none.

Default parameters for both ports:

• Baud rate: 9600.
• Data bit length: 8.
• Stop bit: 1.
• Parity: none.
• Flow control: none.

USB 2.0 port

The USB port is not currently used by the Call Server or Signaling Server
applications.

Security device
The CS1000 provides an on-board interface for the existing security device
(dongle) using a Maxim/Dallas 1-wire to USB interface device. This is used
for the Call Server application.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Faceplate 1041

Faceplate
The CP PM faceplate is available in two sizes: NTDW61 single slot, and
NTDW66 double slot. The CP PM card faceplate is equipped with Status,
Active CPU, CF, and Ethernet LED indicators.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1042 NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Figure 294
CP PM NTDW61 and NTDW66 faceplates

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 LED indicators 1043

Faceplate buttons
Reset
Reset (RST) generates a hard reset of the card.

Init
Init (INI) generates a manual initialization of the software.

DIP switch
The DIP switch selects the media drive. CF MASTER/POSITION1 selects
the Compact Flash (CF) FMD and HD MASTER/POSITION2 selects the
Hard Drive FMD.

LED indicators
Status LED
The functionality of the Status LED is summarized in the following table.

Table 428
Status LED functionality
LED Color CP PM Status
Status Green After sysload
Flashing Green Not implemented
Yellow Not implemented
Orange Selftest error
Red During sysload phase 2
Flashing Red During sysload phase 1
Off No power

Active CPU LED

The CP PM can operate in single CPU mode or dual CPU mode. A tri-color
LED indicates the Call Server redundancy status. This LED is not used by
the Signaling Server and is OFF if it is a Signaling Server. The functionality
of the active CPU LED is summarized in the following table.

Table 429
Call server redundancy status
LED Color Status
Call server redundancy Green Redundant mode, active
Yellow Redundant mode, standby
Red Redundant mode, fault (HSP
down)
Off Standard mode

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1044 NTDW61 and NTDW66 Common Processor Pentium Mobile Card

Ethernet LEDs
ELAN and TLAN LEDs
The functionality of the ELAN and TLAN network interface LED indicators
is depicted in the following figure.

Figure 295
ELAN and TLAN port LED indicators

HSP LEDs
The functionality of the HSP port LED indicators is depicted in the following
figure.

Figure 296
HSP port LED indicators

Removable and fixed media drive LEDs

LEDs are provided to indicate the access/activity of the removable and
fixed media drives.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1045

NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway

Controller Daughterboards
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1045)

"Media Gateway Controller card" (page 1045)

"Daughterboard configurations" (page 1047)

Introduction
The NTDW60 Media Gateway Controller (MGC) card has two PCI Telephony
Mezzanine Card form factor expansion sites. Daughterboards (DB) in the
expansion sites provide Digital Signal Processor (DSP) resources for VoIP.

The DBs are slave devices controlled by the MGC processor.

Media Gateway Controller card

The MGC has two DB expansion sites. They are Expansion Daughterboard
#1 and Expansion Daughterboard #2.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1046 NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards

Figure 297
Media Gateway Controller with daughterboards

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Media Gateway Controller card 1047

Figure 298
Daughterboard

Daughterboard configurations
The DBs are available in two sizes: An NTDW62 32-port daughterboard
(DB-32) and an NTDW64 96-port daughterboard (DB-96).
There are four possible Media Gateway configurations:
• A pure TDM single Media Gateway with no DSP daughterboards or
Media Cards.
• A system with only Media Card.
• A system with only DSP daughterboards.
• A system with both DSP daughterboards and Media Cards.

The DB-96 is supported only in expansion site #1 on the MGC card. If

a DB-96 is detected in expansion site #2 during bootup, an installation
error message is displayed on the MGC faceplate. The installation error
message remains on the MGC faceplate display until the DB-96 is removed
from expansion site #2. The DB-96 installation error message can be
cycled through with other error messages. The DB-32 is supported in both
expansion sites on the MGC card.
There are five possible DSP daughterboard configurations for both Call
Server or Media Gateway configurations (3) and (4):
• A DB-32 in DB expansion site #1.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1048 NTDW62 and NTDW64 Media Gateway Controller Daughterboards

• A DB-32 in DB expansion site #2.

• A DB-32 in DB expansion site #1 and a DB-32 in DB expansion site #2.
• A DB-96 in DB expansion site #1.
• A DB-96 in DB expansion site #1 and a DB-32 in DB expansion site #2.

The following table summarizes the supported placement of the DBs in the
MGC expansion sites and the card slots represented by each DB.

Table 430
DSP daughterboard placement
DB Size DB Position #1 DB Position Card Slot Card Slot Card Slot Card Slot
#2 0 11 12 13
DB-32 Yes Yes Yes Yes No No
DB-96 Yes No No Yes Yes Yes

A DSP DB-32 installed in expansion site #1 represents card slot 11. A DSP
DB-32 installed in expansion site #2 represents card slot 0. A DSP DB-96
installed in expansion site #1 represents card slots 11, 12 and 13.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1049

NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1049)

"Ethernet ports" (page 1050)

"Backplane interfaces" (page 1050)

"Serial data interface ports" (page 1051)

"Faceplate LED display" (page 1051)

Introduction
The NTDW65 MC32S Media Card provides 32 IP-TDM gateway ports
between an IP device and a TDM device in a CS 1000 network. The MC32S
replaces the previous media card or ITG card.
The Media Card comes in an IPE form factor. The card can be used in the
MG 1000E, MG 1000B, CS 1000E, and CS 1000M systems.
The card includes a processor and a DSP. Secure Real Time Protocol
(SRTP) is used to secure the IP media path to and from the DSP channels
on the card.
The Media Card includes the following components and features:
• Processor.
• DSP.
• Memory for processor and DSP.
• 4MB boot CompactFlash.
• CompactFlash firmware storage.
• Six-port Ethernet Layer 2 switch.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1050 NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card

• 10/100 BaseT ELAN network interface for management and signalling

messages.
• 10/100BaseT TLAN network interface for telephony voice traffic.
• FPGA for backplane interfaces.
• Two TTY ports on the processor for debugging.
• 100BaseT faceplate port for debugging.

Figure 299
Voice Gateway Media card block diagram

Ethernet ports
External connections
There are TLAN and ELAN network interfaces for connection to external
networks, and a faceplate debug port.

Internal connections
There is a TLAN connection to the DSP, and ELAN and TLAN connections
to the processor.

Backplane interfaces
The FPGA features include:
• DS30X interfaces.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Faceplate LED display 1051

• A10 signalling.
• CardLan interface.
• Hardware watchdog.
• Time-switch for flexible TDM timeslot mapping.

Serial data interface ports

The Media Card has two serial data interface ports on the master MSP. The
installation menu can by accessed through either port.

TTY settings
The default tty settings for both ports are:
• Baud rate: 9600.
• Data bit length: 8.
• Stop bit: 1.
• Parity: none.
• Flow control: none.

Faceplate LED display

The faceplate on the Media Card has a four character LED display. The
diagnostic messages summarized in the following table are displayed on
the faceplate during system bootup.

Table 431
Faceplate display
Message Description
BOOT This is the first message displayed when the system becomes active.
POST Power on self test. This message is displayed when the Voice Gateway
Media card is carrying out system tests during power up.
PASS Power on self test pass.
EXXX Error code. XXX is a numeric value. An error code is displayed if a serious
system error is detected.
LOAD Application software is loading.

In a normal boot process the diagnostic messages would be displayed in

the following order:
1. BOOT
2. POST
3. PASS

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1052 NTDW65 Voice Gateway Media Card

4. LOAD

If there is a fatal self-test error during bootup, an error code appears and
the PASS and LOAD message are not displayed.

During normal operation after bootup, the faceplate displays Leader (L) or
Follower (F) and the number of registered sets. For example, ’L027’ means
Leader of 27 sets

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1053

NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1053)

"Physical description" (page 1055)

"Functional description" (page 1063)

"Software description" (page 1065)

"Hardware description" (page 1065)

"Architecture" (page 1067)

Introduction
The NTRB21 (DTI/PRI/DCH) TMDI digital trunk card is a 1.5 Mb DTI or PRI
interface to the CS 1000E, CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C
Cabinet. The NTRB21 card has a built-in downloadable D-channel.
The TMDI feature supports the software changes required for CS 1000E,
CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet to use the TDMI
pack. The software includes:
• a prompt to replace a function that was handled by a dip switch on the
NTAK09
• an extra loadware application to handle Layer 1
• a change to the existing loadware files into 32 bit format from the original
16 bit format

To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required
to create an I/O entry for the card.
You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway. The card
is not supported in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunks
are supported in each Media Gateway.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1054 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller

(NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group
cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy
any available slot 1-9.
Note 2: On non-ECM system cabinets, the NTAK20 can be placed in
slots 1-9. On cabinets NTAK11Dx and NTAK11Fx, the active NTAK20
must be placed in slots 1-3 (slots 4-10 cannot be used).

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

The NTRB21 TMDI (DTI/PRI/DCH) card is required to implement PRI on

the Meridian 1 Option 11C system. It is supported in the Main and IP
expansion cabinets.
The TMDI feature introduces the software changes required for an Option
11C system to support the new TDMI pack. These changes include the
introduction of a new prompt to replace a function that was handled by a dip
switch on the NTAK09, as well as an extra loadware application to handle
Layer 1, and changes to make the existing loadware files into 32 bit format
instead of the original 16 bit format. To provide CEMUX communication with
the card, changes are also required to create an I/O entry for the card. In
addition the NTRB21 has a built-in downloadable D-channel.
This card requires that the Option 11C be equipped with at least Release
24 software.
This card replaces the NTAK09 described in "NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI
card" (page 859). This feature does not affect the NTAK09 functionality,
configuration, or maintenance in any way. Aside from changes to the
configuration and maintenance of the pack, there are no other changes
seen by the users, and call processing is not affected.
The NTRB21 (DTI/PRI/DCH) TMDI digital trunk card is a 1.5 Mb DTI or
PRI interface to the CS 1000 system. The NTRB21 card has a built-in
downloadable D-channel.
The TMDI feature introduces the software changes required for a CS 1000
system to support the new TDMI pack. The software changes include:
• the introduction of a new prompt to replace a function that was handled
by a dip switch on the NTAK09
• an extra loadware application to handle Layer 1
• a change to the existing loadware files into 32 bit format from the original
16 bit format

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 1055

To provide CEMUX communication with the card, changes are also required
to create an I/O entry for the card.

This card replaces the NTAK09 described in "NTAK09 1.5 Mb DTI/PRI card"
(page 859). The TMDI feature does not affect the NTAK09 functionality. The
configuration and maintenance changes to the card are not apparent to the
user. Call processing is not affected.

The NTRB21 card is installed only in the Media Gateway. It is not supported
in the Media Gateway Expansion. Up to four digital trunks are supported in
each Media Gateway. The NTRB21 card can be installed in slots 1, 2, 3,
and 4 of the Media Gateway.

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between Media Gateways that are
clocked from different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips
can degrade voice quality.

Contact your system supplier or your Nortel Networks representative to

verify that the NTRB21 digital trunk card is supported in your area.

Physical description
The NTRB21 card uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed
circuit board with buried power and ground layers.The clock controller
daughterboard is fastened by standoffs and connectors.
The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are
associated with the NTRB21 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated
with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. See Figure 300
"NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller" (page 1056).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1056 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Figure 300
NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller

In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:

• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,
then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 432 "NTRB21
LED states" (page 1056).

Table 432
NTRB21 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states
exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 1057

LED State Definition

Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode.

Figure 301 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1058) shows the faceplate
of the NTRB21 TMDI card.
The NTRB21 card uses a standard IPE-sized (9.5" by 12.5"), multi-layer
printed circuit board with buried power and ground layers. It is keyed to
prevent insertion in slot 10. The clock controller daughterboard is fastened
by standoffs and connectors.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1058 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Figure 301
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are
associated with the NTRB21 card, the remaining two LEDs are associated
with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 1059

In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:

• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,
then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 433 "NTRB21
LED states" (page 1059).

Table 433
NTRB21 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTRB21 is not in a disabled state.
ACT On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states
exist, the card is not disabled, nor is it in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.
RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode.

The NTRB21 card uses a standard 9.5" by 12.5" multi-layer printed

circuit board with buried power and ground layers.The clock controller
daughterboard is fastened by standoffs and connectors.
The NTRB21 card has seven faceplate LEDs. The first five LEDs are
associated with the NTRB21 card. The remaining two LEDs are associated
with the clock controller and DCHI daughterboards. See Figure 302
"NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller" (page 1060).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1060 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Figure 302
NTRB21 TMDI card with clock controller

In general, the first five LEDs operate as follows:

• During system power up, the LEDs are on.
• When the self-test is in progress, the LEDs flash on and off three times,
then go into their appropriate states, as shown in Table 433 "NTRB21
LED states" (page 1059).

Table 434
NTRB21 LED states
LED State Definition
DIS On (Red) The NTRB21 circuit card is disabled.
Off The NTRB21 is not disabled.
ACT On (Green) The NTRB21 circuit card is in an active state. No alarm states
exist, the card is not disabled, and it is not in a loopback state.
Off An alarm state or loopback state exists, or the card has been
disabled. See the other faceplate LEDs for more information.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Physical description 1061

LED State Definition

RED On (Red) A red-alarm state has been detected.
Off No red alarm.
YEL On (Yellow) A yellow alarm state has been detected.
Off No yellow alarm.
LBK On (Green) NTRB21 is in loop-back mode.
Off NTRB21 is not in loop-back mode.

Figure 303 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1062) shows the faceplate
of the NTRB21 TMDI card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1062 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Figure 303
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

Power requirements
The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 1063

The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on -12 V.

The DTI/PRI obtains its power from the backplane, and draws less than 2
amps on +5 V, 50 mA on +12 V, and 50 mA on –12 V.

Foreign and surge voltage protection

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility
and the system. For public T1 facilities, this protection is provided by the
local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment (a campus, for
example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used.

The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T1 carrier facility

and the Option 11C cabinet. For public T1 facilities, this protection is
provided by the local operating company. In a private T1 facility environment
(a campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly may be used.

The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Lightning protectors must be installed between an external T-1 carrier facility

and the CS 1000 system. For public T-1 facilities, this protection is provided
by the local operating company. In a private T-1 facility environment (a
campus, for example), the NTAK92 protection assembly can be used.

The NTRB21 circuit card conforms to safety and performance standards for
foreign and surge voltage protection in an internal environment.

Functional description
NTRB21 provides the following features and functions:
• configurable parameters, including A-Law and µ-Law operation, digital
pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe
formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LED
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1064 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

• Card-LAN for maintenance communication

• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps
inverted
• self-test

NTRB21 provides the following features and functions:

• configurable parameters, including A/µ-Law operation, digital pads on a
per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface
• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks
• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LED
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• loopback capabilities for both near end and far end
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 Kbps, 56 Kbps or 64 Kbps
inverted.
• self-test

NTRB21 provides the following features and functions:

• configurable parameters, including A-Law and Mu-Law operation, digital
pads on a per channel basis, and Superframe or Extended Superframe
formats
• AMI or B8ZS line coding
• 1.5 Mb Digital Trunk Interface and 1.5 Mb Primary Rate Interface

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hardware description 1065

• 1.5 Mb Clock recovery and distribution of reference clocks

• DG2 or FDL yellow alarm methods
• card status and alarm indication with faceplate-mounted LED
• automatic alarm monitoring and handling
• Card-LAN for maintenance communications
• loopback capabilities for both near-end and far-end
• echo canceler interface
• integrated trunk access (both D-channel and in-band A/B signaling can
be mixed on the same PRI)
• faceplate monitor jacks for T-1 interface
• configurable D-channel data rate with 64 kbps, 56 kbps or 64 kbps
inverted
• self-test

Software description
Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and License
parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a
change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. The download of PSDL
data is also changed to handle a 32 bit download as well as existing 16 bit.

Changes from the NTAK09 are required for the new trunk card and ISM
parameters are n service change and maintenance overlays. There is a
change to CardLAN to introduce a new CardLAN ID. The download of PSDL
data is also changed to handle a 32 bit download as well as existing 16 bit.

Hardware description
NTRB21 TMDI card
The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or
Primary Rate Interface functionality. It also has a built-in downloadable
D-channel.

The NTRB21 can be used with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51
downloadable D-channel daughterboard).

Figure 304 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1066) shows a faceplate
of the NTRB21 TMDI card.

The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or
Primary Rate Interface functionality on the Option 11C. The NTRB21 has
a built-in downloadable D-channel, and may occupy card slots 1-9 on the
Option 11C main cabinet.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1066 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Figure 304
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

Note 1: For CISPR B group cabinets, the active Clock Controller

(NTAK20) can only occupy slots 1-3. For FCC and/or CISPR A group
cabinets, this limitation does not exist - the Clock Controller can occupy
any available slot 1-9.
Note 2: The NTRB21 TMDI card requires that the Option 11C be loaded
with at least Release 24 software. If an Option 11C switch is loaded
with Release 24 (or later) software, the NTRB21 can be equipped
together with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with the NTBK51 downloadable
D-channel daughterboard).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 1067

Figure 305 "NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate" (page 1068) shows a faceplate
of the NTRB21 TMDI card.

The NTRB21 TMDI card provides 1.5 MBits Digital Trunk Interface or
Primary Rate Interface functionality on the CS 1000. The NTRB21 has
a built-in downloadable D-channel.

Note: The NTRB21 can be used with the NTAK09 DTI/PRI card (with
the NTBK51 downloadable D-channel daughterboard).

Architecture
Signaling interface
The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels
and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages transmitted in both
directions are three bytes long.

The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels

and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages in both directions of
transmission are three bytes long.

The signaling interface performs an 8 Kbps signaling for all 24 channels

and interfaces directly to the DS-30X link. Messages transmitted in both
directions are three bytes long.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1068 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Figure 305
NTRB21 TMDI card faceplate

Interconnection
The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier
cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available.

The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04 1.5Mb carrier cable

(A0394216).

The NTBK04 is twenty feet long. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension,

is also available if required.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 1069

The interconnection to the carrier is by NTBK04, a 1.5 Mb 20 ft. carrier

cable. The NT8D97AX, a fifty-foot extension cable, is also available.

Microprocessor
The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the
following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler
provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task
ordering constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into
T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk
is originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to and from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test

The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the

following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive, the task handler provides
orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task ordering
constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into
T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk
is originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to/from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1070 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

The NTRB21 is equipped with bit-slice microprocessors that handle the

following major tasks:
• Task handler: also referred to as an executive. The task handler
provides orderly per-channel task execution to maintain real-time task
ordering constraints.
• Transmit voice: inserts digital pads, manipulates transmit AB bits for
DS1, and provides graceful entry into T-Link data mode when the data
module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk is answering the call.
• Receive voice: inserts digital pads and provides graceful entry into
T-Link data mode when the data module connected to the DTI/PRI trunk
is originating the call.
• T-Link data: a set of transmit and receive vectored subroutines which
provides T-Link protocol conversion to and from the DM-DM protocol.
• Receive ABCD filtering: filters and debounces the receive ABCD bits
and provides change of state information to the system.
• Diagnostics
• Self-test

Digital pad
The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer
function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital
pad accommodates both µ255-Law and A-Law coding. There are 32
combinations each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-Law, A-Law to µ255, and
A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level
plan.

Table 435
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB –7db
1 2dB –8db
2 3dB –9db
3 4dB –10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 –1dB 10db
8 –3dB 11db
9 –4dB 12db

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 1071

Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1

A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D –2dB spare
E –5db spare
F –6db spare

The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer

function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital pad
accommodates both µ255-law and A-law coding. There are 32 combinations
each for µ255 to µ255, µ255 to A-law, A-law to µ255, and A-law to A-law.
These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and level plan.

Table 436
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB -7db
1 2dB -8db
2 3dB -9db
3 4dB -10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 -1dB 10db
8 -3dB 11db
9 -4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D -2dB spare
E -5db spare
F -6db spare

The digital pad is an EPROM whose address-input to data-output transfer

function meets the characteristics of a digital attenuator. The digital
pad accommodates both Mu255-Law and A-Law coding. There are 32

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1072 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

combinations each for Mu255 to Mu255, Mu255 to A-Law, A-Law to Mu255,

and A-Law to A-Law. These values are selected to meet the EIA loss and
level plan.

Table 437
Digital pad values and offset allocations
Offset PAD set 0 PAD set 1
0 0dB –7db
1 2dB –8db
2 3dB –9db
3 4dB –10db
4 5dB 0.6db
5 6.1dB 7db
6 8dB 9db
7 –1dB 10db
8 –3dB 11db
9 –4dB 12db
A idle code, 7F 3db
B unassigned code, FF 14db
C 1dB spare
D –2dB spare
E –5db spare
F –6db spare

D-channel interface
The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream
configured as a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) device. The
data signals include:
• receive data output
• transmit data input
• receive clock output
• transmit clock output

The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each
other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:
• 56 kbps

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 1073

• 64 kbps clear
• 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as
the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot
be established unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel
feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
OFF = D-channel

The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time.

The D-channel interface is a 64 Kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream
configured as a DCE device. The data signals include receive data output,
transmit data input, receive clock output, and transmit clock output. The
receive and transmit clocks can be of slightly different bit rate from each
other as determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.
Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:
• 56 Kbps
• 64 Kbps clear
• 64 Kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as
the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot
be established however, unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel
feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
OFF = D-channel
ON = DPNSS (U.K.).

The D-channel interface is a 64 kbps, full-duplex, serial bit-stream

configured as a Data Circuit-terminating Equipment (DCE) device. The
data signals include:
• receive data output
• transmit data input
• receive clock output
• transmit clock output

The bit rate of the receive and transmit clocks can vary slightly from each
other. This is determined by the transmit and receive carrier clocks.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1074 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Feature selection through software configuration for the D-channel includes:

• 56 kbps
• 64 kbps clear
• 64 kbps inverted (64 Kbps restricted)

DCHI can be enabled and disabled independent of the PRI card, as long as
the PRI card is inserted in its cabinet slot. The D-channel data link cannot
be established unless the PRI loop is enabled.
On the NTRB21 use switch 1, position 1 to select either the D-channel
feature or the DPNSS feature, as follows:
OFF = D-channel

The ON setting for DPNSS (U.K.) is not supported at this time.

DS-1 Carrier interface

Transmitter
The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The Digital Signal – Level 1 (DS-1) transmit equalizer enables
the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the Digital Signal
Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable
through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 438 "NTRB21 switch
settings" (page 1074).

Table 438
NTRB21 switch settings
Switch Setting
Distance to Digital 1 2 3 4
Cross-Connect DCH F/W (LEN 0) (LEN 1) (LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off

The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The DS1 transmit equalizer allows the cabling distance to be
extended from the card to the DSX-1 or LD-1 configured in LD 17.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 1075

The transmitter takes the binary data (dual unipolar) from the PCM
transceiver and produces bipolar pulses for transmission to the external
digital facility. The Digital Signal – Level 1 (DS-1) transmit equalizer enables
the cabling distance to be extended from the card to the Digital Signal
Cross-connect – Level 1 (DSX-1), or LD-1. Equalizers are switch selectable
through dip-switches. The settings are shown in Table 439 "NTRB21 switch
settings" (page 1075).

Table 439
NTRB21 switch settings
Switch Setting
Distance to Digital 1 2 3 4
Cross-Connect DCH F/W (LEN 0) (LEN 1) (LEN 2)
0 - 133 feet Off Off Off On
133 - 266 feet Off On On Off
266 - 399 feet Off Off On Off
399 - 533 feet Off On Off Off
533 - 655 feet Off Off Off Off

Receiver
The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between
the card and the external DS-1 signal source.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between
the card and the external DS1 signal source.

The receiver extracts data and clock from an incoming data stream and
outputs clock and synchronized data. At worst case DSX-1 signal levels, the
line receiver operates correctly with up to 655 feet of ABAM cable between
the card and the external DS-1 signal source.

Connector pinout
The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male
D-type connector.

Table 440
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1076 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

From 50-pin
MDF connector To DB-15 Signal name Description
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from
network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from
network

The connection to the external digital carrier is via a 15 position Male D

type connector.

Table 441
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin Signal
MDF connector To DB-15 name Description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from
network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from
network

The connection to the external digital carrier is through a 15 position Male

D-type connector.

Table 442
DS-1 line interface pinout for NTBK04 cable
From 50-pin
MDF
connector To DB-15 Signal name Description
pin 48 pin 1 T transmit tip to
network
pin 23 pin 9 R transmit ring to
network
pin 25 pin 2 FGND frame ground
pin 49 pin 3 T1 receive tip from
network
pin 24 pin 11 R1 receive ring from
network

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Architecture 1077

NTAK20 Clock Controller (CC) daughterboard

Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock
source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network.

The NTAK20 clock controller circuitry synchronizes the CS 1000E, CS

1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet to an external reference
clock and generates and distributes the clock to the system. The CS 1000E,
CS 1000M Cabinet, and Meridian 1 PBX 11C Cabinet can function either as
a slave to an external clock or as a clocking master to the network.

The NTAK20AD and NTAK20AA versions of the clock controller meet

AT&T Stratum 3 and Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The
NTAK20BD and NTAK20BA versions meet CCITT stratum 4 specifications.
"NTAK20 Clock Controller daughterboard" (page 903)

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.
If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is
mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main Option 11C cabinet.
A cabinet that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock

source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all parts
of the network. On Option 11C systems, synchronization is accomplished
with the NTAK20 clock controller circuit card.The Clock Controller circuitry
synchronizes the Option 11C to an external reference clock, and generates
and distributes the clock to the system. Option 11C can function either as a
slave to an external clock or as a clocking master.

The NTAK20AA version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum 3 and
Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BA version meets
CCITT stratum 4 specifications. "Electrical specifications" (page 1005)

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
If an IP Expansion multi-cabinet system is equipped with digital trunk cards, it is
mandatory that at least one trunk card is placed in the Main Option 11C cabinet.
A cabinet that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1078 NTRB21 DTI/PRI/DCH TMDI card

Digital Trunking requires synchronized clocking so that a shift in one clock

source results in an equivalent shift of the same size and direction in all
parts of the network.

On CS 1000 systems, synchronization is accomplished with the NTAK20

clock controller circuit card. The clock controller circuitry synchronizes the
CS 1000 to an external reference clock and generates and distributes the
clock to the system. The CS 1000 can function either as a slave to an
external clock or as a clocking master to the network.

The NTAK20AD version of the clock controller meets AT&T Stratum 3 and
Bell Canada Node Category D specifications. The NTAK20BD version
meets CCITT stratum 4 specifications. "Electrical specifications" (page
1005)

ATTENTION
IMPORTANT!
Each Media Gateway that has a digital trunk must use a clock controller clocked
to an external reference clock.

Note: Clocking slips can occur between systems that are clocked from
different COs, if the COs are not synchronized. The slips can degrade
voice quality.

Clock rate converter

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL
synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a phase-locked loop (PLL). The PLL

synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

The 1.5 Mb clock is generated by a Phase-Locked Loop (PLL). The PLL

synchronizes the 1.5 Mb DS1 clock to the 2.56 Mb system clock through the
common multiple of 8 kHz by using the main frame synchronization signal.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1079

NTVQ01xx Media Card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Physical description" (page 1079)

"Hardware architecture" (page 1080)

"Functional description" (page 1083)

"Survivability" (page 1083)

Physical description
The Media Card replaces the ITG Pentium card and is available as an
8-port or 32-port card.

You can install this card in slots 1 through 4 in the Media Gateway or slots
7 through 10 in the Media Gateway Expansion.

Note: Up to four Media Cards can be installed in each Media Gateway

and Media Gateway Expansion.

An NTVQ01xx Media Card is shown in Figure 306 "NTVQ01xx Media Card"

(page 1080).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1080 NTVQ01xx Media Card

Figure 306
NTVQ01xx Media Card

The NTVQ01xx Media Card provides faceplate and backplane interfaces,

which are used to connect external LANs. This section provides information
on the faceplate connectors and indicators.

Hardware architecture
The Media Card comes in two versions: 8-port and 32-port.

Faceplate connectors and indicators

Figure 307 "NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate" (page 1082) shows the
NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate.

Reset switch
The reset switch on the faceplate manually resets the Media Card.

Status LED
The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate red LED indicates the following:
• the enabled/disabled status of the card
• the self-testing result during power up or card insertion into an
operational system

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Hardware architecture 1081

PC card slot
This slot accepts standard PC card flash cards, including ATA Flash cards
(3 Mbit/s to 170 Mbit/s). Nortel supply PCM card adaptors which enable
CompactFlash cards to be used in this slot. This slot is used for NTVQ01xx
Media Card software upgrades, backing up announcements, and additional
storage.

Ethernet activity LEDs

The NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate contains Ethernet activity LEDs for
each network.

Maintenance hex display

This is a four-digit LED-based hexadecimal display that provides the status
of the NTVQ01xx Media Card at all times. The hex display provides an
indication of fault conditions and the progress of PC card-based software
upgrades or backups. It also indicates the progress of the internal self-test
in the form of T:xx.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1082 NTVQ01xx Media Card

Figure 307
NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate

RS-232 Asynchronous Maintenance Port

An 8-pin mini-DIN socket on the NTVQ01xx Media Card faceplate provides
access to the RS-232 port. This faceplate port can provide access to the
Media Card for OA&M purposes. The maintenance port is also available
through a female DB9 connector on the 50-pin I/O Adaptor. This should be
used to make a permanent terminal connection.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Survivability 1083

Functional description
Media Cards use different types of firmware pre-installed, depending on the
application being supported. The Voice Gateway application enables Digital
Signal Processors (DSPs) for either line or trunk applications. When the
Voice Gateway application is installed on the Media Card, the card is called
the Voice Gateway Media card. Other examples of applications on a Media
Card include IP Line 3.0 and Integrated Recorded Announcer.

The NTVQ01xx Media Card connects an IP and circuit-switched device.

The DSPs perform media transcoding between IP voice packets and
circuit-switched devices. The Media Card also provides echo cancellation
and compression/decompression of voice streams.

Survivability
Refer to Communication Server 1000S: Installation and Configuration
(NN43031-310) for instructions on configuring the card for survivability.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1084 NTVQ01xx Media Card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1085

NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Physical description" (page 1085)

"Functional description" (page 1085)

Physical description
The NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium (ITG-P) card supports IP Phones by providing
a communication gateway for the IP Phone between the IP data network
and the system. The IP Phone uses the IP data network to communicate
with the ITG-P card.

You can install this card in any two consecutive IPE slots.

Note: Each Media Gateway and Media Gateway Expansion supports

up to two ITG-P cards. Each ITG-P card occupies two slots.

ITG-P cards use an ELAN management 10BaseT port and a TLAN VoIP
port (10/100BaseT) on the I/O panel. There is an RS-232 Maintenance port
connection on the ITG-P card faceplate and an alternative connection to the
same serial port on the I/O backplane.

Note: Do not connect maintenance terminals to the faceplate and I/O

panel serial maintenance port connections at the same time.

Functional description
Figure 308 "NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate" (page 1087) shows the
ITG-P card faceplate components. The information in this section describes
the components.

Faceplate components
NWK
The faceplate connector labeled NWK is a 9-pin, sub-miniature D-type
connector. The connector is not used for the ITG-P application.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1086 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card

WARNING
The NWK connector looks like a 9-pin serial connector. Do not
connect a serial cable or any other cable to it. If a cable is installed
to the NWK connector, the TLAN interface card is disabled.

ITG-P LED (Card Status)

The red status faceplate LED indicates the enabled/disabled status of the
24-card ports. The LED is on (red) during the power-up or reset sequence.
The LED remains lit until the card is enabled. If the LED remains on, this
indicates the self-test failed, the card is disabled, or the card rebooted.

Reset switch
Press the Reset switch to reset the card without having to cycle power to
the card. This switch is normally used after a software upgrade to the card,
or to clear a fault condition.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 1087

Figure 308
NTVQ55AA ITG-P card faceplate

Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management
interface.

NWK Status LED

NWK Status LEDs display the TLAN interface card Ethernet activity:
• Green – on if the carrier (link pulse) is received from the TLAN interface
card Ethernet hub.
• Yellow – flashes when there is TLAN interface card data activity. During
heavy traffic, yellow can stay continuously lit.

Note: There are no Ethernet status LEDs for the ELAN management
interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1088 NTVQ55AA ITG Pentium card

PC card slots
The ITG-P card has one faceplate PC card slot, designated drive A. The
PC card slot is used for optional maintenance (backup and restore). The
ITG-P card also has one unused inboard slot, designated drive B. The PC
card slots support PC-based hard disks (ATA interface) or high-capacity PC
flash memory cards.

Maintenance Display
A four character, LED-based, dot matrix display shows the maintenance
status fault codes and other card state information.

RS-232 Maintenance Port

The ITG-P card faceplate provides a female DIN-8 serial maintenance port
connection (labeled Maint Port). An alternative connection to the faceplate
serial maintenance port exists on the NTMF94EA I/O panel breakout cable.

Do not connect maintenance terminals or modems to the faceplate and I/O

panel DB-9 male serial maintenance port at the same time.

Backplane interfaces
The backplane connector provides connection to the following:
• ELAN interface card
• TLAN interface card
• alternate connection to the serial maintenance port DS-30X
• Card LAN interfaces

DS-30X voice/signaling
DS-30X carries Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) voice and proprietary
signaling on the backplane between the ITG-P card and the SSC.

Card LAN
Card LAN carries card polling and initialization messages on the backplane
between the ITG-P card and the SSC.

Assembly description
The ITG-P card assembly consists of a two-slot motherboard/daughterboard
combination. A PCI interconnect board connects the ITG-P motherboard
and the DSP daughterboard.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1089

QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface

card
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1089)

"Physical description" (page 1090)

"Functional description" (page 1091)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 1095)

"Configuring the ESDI card" (page 1097)

"Applications" (page 1101)

Introduction
The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI) card gives the CS
1000E, CS 1000M, and Meridian 1 switch two fully synchronous high-speed
serial ports.
These high-speed synchronous ports are used to connect the processor
to synchronous communication peripherals such as to a host computer
(for example, DEC or Tandem) using Meridian Link. This card cannot be
used as an asynchronous port or to connect to an administrative and
maintenance terminal. Use either the NT8D41 SDI paddle board or the
QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card to connect the switch to an
asynchronous serial peripheral.
Each system can accommodate up to eight ESDI cards, for a total of 16
synchronous ports per system. The ESDI cards can be housed in the
network slots of any of the following modules:
• NT5D21 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 7)
• NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slots 1 through 9 and 13)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1090 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

• NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5)

• NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13)
• NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8)

Note: When as ESDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an

NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module
in a dual-CPU system, any I/O device connected to the card does not
function when the CPU in that module is inactive.

Physical description
The ESDI card circuitry is contained on a 31.75 by 25.40 cm (12.5 by 10 in.)
printed circuit board. The front panel of the card is 2.54 cm (1 in.) wide. See
Figure 309 "CPC513 ESDI card front panel" (page 1091). The front panel
is equipped with an Enable/Disable (ENB/DIS) switch and a red LED. The
LED lights when the following occurs:
• the ENB/DIS switch is set to DIS
• both ports are disabled in software
• none of the card’s ports are configured in software
• the switch settings on the card do not match the settings programmed
in software

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 1091

Figure 309
CPC513 ESDI card front panel

Functional description
The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent, two-port synchronous serial data
interface card. See Figure 310 "ESDI card block diagram" (page 1092).
The two serial input/output data ports terminate on DB-25 connectors on
the front panel of the card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1092 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

Each port operates independently in synchronous mode, in half or full

duplex, at speeds of up to 64 kbps. Each port can be connected to either
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) or Data Communications Equipment (DCE).

The electrical interface for the ESDI card may be either EIA RS-232-C or
a proprietary high-speed interface. The high-speed interface combines
features of RS-422-A for data and timing signals with features of RS-232-C
for control signals.

Figure 310
ESDI card block diagram

The QPC513 ESDI card is an intelligent controller. The local micro-processor

performs all of the overhead associated with synchronous data transfer.
The system processor passes data to the ESDI card processor a byte
at a time using conventional memory reads and writes. The ESDI card
processor stores the data in a RAM cache on the ESDI card, and passes
it to the synchronous communication chip in blocks using Direct Memory
Access (DMA) techniques.

Synchronous communication
The ESDI cards supports LAPB, a subset of the HDLC synchronous
protocol. A description of the LAPB protocol is shown in Appendix A, LAPB
data link protocol.

The HDLC data link is a bit-oriented protocol. The information data bits
are transmitted transparently across the link in packets. The maximum
length of the information field for these packets is 128 octets, where an
octet consists of 8 bits.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 1093

The characteristics of the synchronous communication ports are shown in

Table 443 "Characteristics of synchronous ports" (page 1093).

Table 443
Characteristics of synchronous ports
Characteristics Description
Duplex mode half, (full)
Data rate (bps) 1200, 2400, (4800), 9600, 19200,
48000, 56000, 64000
Clock (internal), external
Data Link Level LAPB protocol (1), 3
SL-1 address
Data Link Level LAPB protocol remote host (3), 1
address
Modify link control system parameters* yes, (no)
Modify link performance thresholds (Note 1) yes, (no)
Note 1: * See the Configuration Record (LD 17) in Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) to modify the link control system
parameters and performance thresholds.
Note 2: The values in parentheses are the default.

Clock timing option

The ESDI card offers two timing options:
• Internal: The ESDI card uses an internal timing source to synchronize
data transfers to the external device.
• External: The ESDI card accepts a timing source from the high-speed
interface connector to synchronize data transfers to the external device.

Test and maintenance features

The ESDI card has these built-in testing and maintenance capabilities:

Self-test
The ESDI card performs a self-test of its major components immediately
after power-up. The self-test can also be initiated through the Link
Diagnostic programLD 48. The self-test tests all ESDI functions up to, but
not including, the ESDI line drivers and receivers.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1094 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

Fault detection
Firmware on the ESDI card detects hardware faults on the card and link level
LAPB protocol faults. It reports the faults to the CPU when predetermined
thresholds (downloaded at initialization) are exceeded.

Fault isolation
The ESDI/Command and Status Link (CSL) maintenance software takes the
ESDI card out of service when the out-of-service thresholds are exceeded
for the following:
• LAPB error conditions (for example, retransmission, Cyclic Redundancy
Check (CRC) errors, overrun/underrun errors)
• Physical or link errors
• Detected hardware errors

Connection characteristics
The two DB-25 connectors on the front panel of the ESDI card provide
connections to each of the two I/O ports. The electrical interface of these
connectors is a modified version of the RS-422-A standard designed to drive
high-speed data over long cable lengths (up to 100 ft). Table 444 "QPC513
interconnection specifications" (page 1094) shows the interconnection
specifications for these ports.

Table 444
QPC513 interconnection specifications
Distance Interconnection
<15.24 m (<50 ft) Regular 25-conductor cable
>15.24 m and <30.48 m Twisted pair for balanced circuits
(>50 ft and <100 ft)
>30.48 m (>100 ft) Network interface devices such as stand-alone
modems or DS-1 facilities using
Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module
(ASIM) and Data Line card (DLC)

Electrical interface options

Interface options are selected by inserting jumper plugs into the appropriate
sockets on the card:
• RS-232-C interface: The EIA RS-232-C interface can be used for
speeds up to 19.2 kbps and distances of less than 15.24 m (50 ft). The
ESDI card supports a subset of the RS-232-C signals. See Table 445
"Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - RS-232-C interface" (page
1096).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 1095

• High-speed interface: The high-speed interface combines features of

the RS-422-A standard for the data and timing signals with standard
RS-232-C control signals. It is used when the signal rate is greater than
19.2 kbps and/or when the distance between the system and host is
greater than 15.24 m (50 ft). No modems are needed if the distance is
less than 30.48 m (100 ft).
The high-speed interface uses a proprietary pin assignment, rather than
the standard 37-pin RS-449 arrangement. This pin arrangement is
compatible with the Spectron Cable #75-025 for V.35 use. See Table
446 "Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - high-speed interface"
(page 1096).
The data and timing signals on the high-speed interface use RS-422-A
type differential line drivers and receivers in a balanced configuration.
These drivers and receivers are able to drive higher data rate signals
over longer distances than standard RS-232-C drivers and receivers. A
typical connection using these drivers and receivers is shown in Figure
311 "Typical high-speed interface line driver and receiver" (page 1095).

Figure 311
Typical high-speed interface line driver and receiver

Connector pin assignments

Table 445 "Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - RS-232-C interface"
(page 1096) shows the pin assignments for J1 and J2 when the port is
configured for RS-232-C interface, and Table 446 "Connector J1 and J2 pin
assignments - high-speed interface" (page 1096) shows the pin assignments
for J1 and J2 when the port is configured for the high-speed interface.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1096 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

Table 445
Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - RS-232-C interface
Signal source
EIA
Pin number Signal functions To DCE From DCE circuit
Ground and
common return
1 Shielded n/a n/a
7 Signal ground (SG) n/a n/a AB
Data
2 Transmitted data (TX) 3 — BA
3 Received data (RX) — 3 BB
Control
4 Request to send (RTS) 3 — CA
5 Clear to send (CTS) — 3 CB
6 Data set ready (DSR) — 3 CC
8 Carrier detect (CD) — 3 CF
20 Data terminal ready (DTR) 3 — CD
Timing
15 Transmitter signal element — 3 DB
timing (DCE)
17 Receiver signal element timing (DCE) — 3 DD
24 Transmitter signal element 3 — DA
timing (DTE)
Note: Pins not used are 9 to 14, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

Table 446
Connector J1 and J2 pin assignments - high-speed interface
Signal source
EIA
From circuit
Pin number Signal functions To DCE DCE (lead)
Ground and
common return
1 Shield n/a n/a
7 Signal ground (SG) n/a n/a AB
Note: Pins not used are 9, 10, 11, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the ESDI card 1097

Signal source
EIA
From circuit
Pin number Signal functions To DCE DCE (lead)
Data
2 Transmitted data – lead A 3 — BA (A)
3 Received data – lead A — 3 BB (A)
13 Transmitted data – lead B 3 — BA (B)
16 Received data – lead B — 3 BB (B)
Control
4 Request to send (RTS) 3 — CA
5 Clear to send (CTS) — 3 CB
6 Data set ready (DSR) — 3 CC
8 Carrier detect (CD) — 3 CF
20 Data terminal ready (DTR) 3 CD
Timing Transmitter signal element
— 3 DD (B)
12 timing (DTE) – lead B
14 Transmitter signal element — 3 DB (B)
timing (DCE) – lead B
15 Transmitter signal element — 3 DB (A)
timing (DCE) – lead A
17 Transmitter signal element — 3 DD (A)
timing (DTE) – lead A
23 Receiver signal element timing 3 — DA (A)
(DCE) – lead A
24 Receiver signal element timing — DA (B)
(DCE) – lead B 3
Note: Pins not used are 9, 10, 11, 18, 19, 21, 22, 25.

Configuring the ESDI card

Configuring the ESDI card consists of setting the port addresses using the
address selection switch and setting the port interface options using the
jumper blocks. The system software must then be configured to recognize
the ESDI card. Figure 312 "ESDI card option switch locations" (page
1099)shows the location of all option switches and jumper sockets on the
ESDI card.

Address switch settings

The two ESDI ports on the card are addressed in pairs such as 0 and 1, 2
and 3, and so on). The address is set using switch S2. The switch settings
used to select the address vary depending on whether the card is Style A or
Style B. The "Style" can be read on the printed circuit board silk screen. The
address of the card is set to match the device address defined in software.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1098 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

Synchronous port address space is the same as asynchronous port address

space. When selecting an address for the ESDI card, make sure that it does
not conflict with an address currently being used by an asynchronous card.

Table 447 "ESDI card address switch settings" (page 1098) shows the ESDI
card address switch settings.

Table 447
ESDI card address switch settings
Switch S2 Switch S2
Device Number style A style B
Port 1 Port 2 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
0 1 off off off on off off off *
2 3 on off off on off off on *
4 5 off on off on off on off *
6 7 on on off on off on on *
8 9 off off on on on off off *
10 11 on off on on on off on *
12 13 off on on on on on off *
14 15 on on on on on on on *
* Switch S2, position 4 is not used on style B cards.

DTE/DCE mode jumper settings

The interface for each ESDI port is configured independently. Ports must be
configured both for electrical interface (RS-232-C or high-speed) and mode
(DTE or DCE). With the proper options set:
• An ESDI port configured as DTE appears as a terminal to the user
equipment.
• An ESDI port configured as DCE appears as a modem to the user
equipment.

Interface options are set by installing option jumper plugs into the sockets
indicated in Table 448 "ESDI card DTE/DCE mode jumper settings" (page
1099) and Table 449 "ESDI card RS-232-C/high-speed interface jumper
settings" (page 1100).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the ESDI card 1099

Figure 312
ESDI card option switch locations

Table 448
ESDI card DTE/DCE mode jumper settings
Jumper socket
Mode Port designations
Data communication equipment (DTE) 1 UA10 UA12
Data terminal equipment (DCE) 1 UA9 UA11

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1100 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

Jumper socket
Mode Port designations
Data communication equipment (DTE) 2 UA17 UA19
Data terminal equipment (DCE) 2 UA16 UA18

Table 449
ESDI card RS-232-C/high-speed interface jumper settings
Jumper socket
Mode Port designations
RS-232-C interface 1 UB9 UB11
High-speed interface 1 UB10 UB12
RS-232-C interface 2 UB16 UB18
High-speed interface 2 UB17 UB19

Software service changes

All of the other ESDI port operating parameters are defined in software and
downloaded to the assigned ESDI port. See Table 443 "Characteristics
of synchronous ports" (page 1093). These changes are made using the
Configuration Record program (LD 17). Instructions for the Configuration
Record program are found in the Software Input/Output Reference —
Administration (NN43001-611).

Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the
Configuration Record program (LD 17) are shown in Table 450 "LD 17 -
Serial port configuration parameters." (page 1100) These parameters must
be set for each ports if both ports are being used.

Table 450
LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters.
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change configuration.
TYPE: CFN Configuration type.
IOTB YES Change input/output devices.
ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x
= 0 to 15.
NEW PRT x
CDNO 1-16 Use the ESDI card number to keep track of all ports.
DENS DDEN Double density SDI paddle board.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 1101

Prompt Response Description

USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered
depend on the software being used. See Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details.
XSM (NO) YES Port is used for the system monitor.

Applications
The QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card is used any time that
a high-speed, fully synchronous serial data communication channel is
needed. The ESDI card is typically used to connect to the following:
• A host computer using Meridian Link
• An auxiliary processor

The system processor transfers data to the ESDI card in blocks consisting
of 1 to 128 eight-bit octets. Each block is processed in accordance with
the LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and is transmitted serially to the
output port.

In receive mode, the EDSI card receives data serially from the input port
packages in LAPB information frames. After determining that the block
is error-free, the ESDI card supplies the data to the system processor as
a block.

The ESDI card serial ports terminate on the card front panel. Figure 313
"QPC513 ESDI card cabling" (page 1102) shows the typical ESDI card
connections in a system.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1102 QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface card

Figure 313
QPC513 ESDI card cabling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1103

QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1103)

"Physical description" (page 1104)

"Functional description" (page 1105)

"Connector pin assignments" (page 1107)

"Configuring the QSDI card" (page 1109)

"Applications" (page 1113)

Introduction
The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card provides four
RS-232-C serial ports between the system and external devices. The QSDI
card plugs into a slot in the common equipment area of any system.
The Quad Serial Data Interface card is normally used to connect the system
to its administration and maintenance terminal. It is also used to connect the
system to a background terminal (used in the Hotel/Motel environment), a
modem, or the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) and Call Detail Recording
(CDR) features.
The QSDI card is compatible with all existing system software. It does not
support 20 mA current loop interface.
QSDI cards are housed in the following modules:
• NT5D21 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 7)
• NT6D39 CPU/Network module (slots 1 through 9, and 13)
• NT6D60 Core module (slots 0 through 5)
• NT8D35 Network module (slots 5 through 13)

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1104 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

• NT9D11 Core/Network module (slots 0 through 8)

Note: When a QSDI card is installed in an NT6D60 Core module, an

NT8D34 CPU module, or slot 13 of an NT6D39 CPU/Network module in
a dual-CPU system, any input/output I/O device connected to the card
does not function when the CPU in that module is inactive.

Physical description
The QPC841 QSDI card is a printed circuit board measuring 31.75 cm by
25.4 cm (12.5 in. by 10 in.). The front panel is 2.54 cm (1 in.) thick. See
Figure 314 "QPC841 QSDI card front panel" (page 1105).
Up to four QSDI boards can be used in a system, allowing a total of sixteen
asynchronous serial ports. The four serial ports on each card are addressed
as two pairs of consecutive addresses (0 and 1, 2 and 3, and so on up to 14
and 15). The pairs need not be consecutive. For example: pairs 0 and 1,
and 4 and 5 could be used.
The card front panel has two connectors, J1 and J2. Connector J1 is used
for port 1 while connector J2 is used for ports 2, 3, and 4. It also has an
Enable/Disable (ENB/DIS) switch and a red LED. The LED indicates that
the card has been disabled. It is lit when the following occurs:
• the ENB/DIS switch is set to DIS
• all of the ports on the card are disabled in software
• none of the card ports are configured in software

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Functional description 1105

Figure 314
QPC841 QSDI card front panel

Functional description
The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains all the logic for four
asynchronous serial ports, including the baud rate generators. These serial
ports are directly accessed by the system processor using memory reads
and writes.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1106 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

The QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card contains four universal
asynchronous receiver/transmitters (UARTs) and the logic necessary to
connect the UARTs to the system processor bus. See Figure 315 "QPC841
QSDI card block diagram" (page 1106). The other logic on the card consists
of four baud rate generators, four RS-232-C driver/receiver pairs, and the
jumpers and logic needed to configure the UARTs.

The address select switches and logic on the card always address the
UARTs using two pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, and 2 and 3 through 15
and 16. The pairs do not need to be consecutive. Other switches on the
board determine the baud rate for each individual port and whether the
port is configured to talk to a terminal (DTE equipment) or a modem (DCE
equipment). Instructions for setting the jumpers are given later in this
section.

Figure 315
QPC841 QSDI card block diagram

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Connector pin assignments 1107

Connector pin assignments

Connector J1 is connected to port one, and uses the RS-232-C standard
DB-25-pinout. Connector J2 is connected to ports two, three, and four, and
is a non-standard pinout that requires an adapter cable. An adapter cable
(NT8D96) splits the J2 signals out to three standard RS-232-C connectors.
Port 2 is connected to connector A, Port 3 is connected to connector B, and
Port 4 is connected to connector C.

Table 451 "Connector J1 pin assignments" (page 1107) shows the pinouts
for connector J1, and Table 452 "Connector J2 pin assignments" (page
1108) shows the pinouts for connector J2.

Table 451
Connector J1 pin assignments
Pin
number Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
1 FGD Frame ground Frame ground
2 TD Received data Transmitted data
3 RD Transmitted data Received data
4 RTS Request to send (not used) Request to send (Note 2)
5 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
7 GND Ground Ground
8 CD Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier detect (not used)
20 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2)
Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to
indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.
Note 2: In DCE mode, the signals DTR, and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to
indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1108 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Table 452
Connector J2 pin assignments
Pin
Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
1 FGD Frame ground Frame ground
2 TD Transmitted data Transmitted data
3 RD Received data Received data
4 RTS Request to send (not Request to send (Note 2)
used)
5 2 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
6 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
7 GND Ground Ground
8 CD Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier detect (not Used)
20 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2))
9 TD Transmitted data Transmitted data
10 RD Received data Received data
11 RTS Request to send (not Request to send (Note 2))
used)
12 3 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
13 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
25 GND Ground Ground
24 CD Carrier detect (Note 1) Carrier detect (not used)
23 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2))
14 TD Transmitted data Transmitted data
15 RD Received data Received data
16 RTS Request to send (not Request to send (Note 2))
used)
17 4 CTS Clear to send (Note 1) Clear to send
18 DSR Data set ready (Note 1) Data set ready
19 GND Ground Ground
Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to
indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.
Note 2: In DCE mode, the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate
that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the QSDI card 1109

Pin
Number Port Signal Purpose in DTE mode Purpose in DCE mode
21 CD Carrier detect (Note 1 Carrier detect (not used)
22 DTR Data terminal ready Data terminal ready (Note 2))
Note 1: In DTE mode, the signals CD, DSR, and CTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to
indicate that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.
Note 2: In DCE mode, the signals DTR and RTS are tied to +12 volts (through a resistor) to indicate
that the QSDI port is always ready to transmit and receive data.

Configuring the QSDI card

Configuring the QSDI card consists of setting these option switches for
each serial port:
• Port address
• Baud rate
• DTE/DCE mode

Figure 316 "QSDI card option switch locations" (page 1112) shows the
location of the option switches on the QSDI card. Instructions for setting
these switches are in the section that follows.

Address switch settings

Table 453 "QSDI card address switch settings" (page 1109) lists the address
switch settings for the QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card. The
address select jumpers and logic on the card address the UARTs using two
pairs of addresses: 0 and 1, 2 and 3, through 15 and 16. The pairs do
not need to be consecutive. Switch SW14 is used to select the addresses
for ports 1 and 2. Switch SW15 is used to select the addresses for ports
3 and 4.

Table 453
QSDI card address switch settings
SW14 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings
SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1 off off off off off on on on
2 3 off off off off off on on off
4 5 off off off off off on off on
Device
pair 6 7 off off off off off on off off
addresses on on
8 9 off off off off off off
10 11 off off off off off off on off
12 13 off off off off off off off on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1110 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

SW14 Port 1 Port 2 Switch settings

SW15 Port 3 Port 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 15 off off off off off off off off
Note 1: On SW16, positions 1, 2, 3, and 4 must be OFF.
Note 2: To avoid address conflicts, SW14 and SW15 can never use identical settings.
Note 3: To disable ports 1 and 2, set SW14 position 1 to ON. To disable ports 3 and 4, set SW15
position 1 to ON.

Baud rate switch settings

Table 454 "QSDI card baud rate switch settings" (page 1110) lists the switch
settings necessary to set the baud rate.

Table 454
QSDI card baud rate switch settings

Baud Port 1 – SW10 Port 2 – SW11 Port 3 – SW12 Port 4 – SW13

rate 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
150 off off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on
300 off on off on off on off on off on off on off on off on
600 off off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on
1200 off on on off off on on off off on on off off on on off
2400 off off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off
4800 off on off off off on off off off on off off off on off off
9600 off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off off

DTE/DCE mode switch settings

Table 455 "QSDI card DTE/DCE mode switch settings" (page 1110) shows
the DTE/DCE mode selection switches for the four serial ports.

Table 455
QSDI card DTE/DCE mode switch settings
Port 1 – SW8 Port1 – SW9
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
Port 2 – SW6 Port 2 – SW7
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Configuring the QSDI card 1111

Port 3 – SW4 Port 3 – SW5

Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on
Port 4 – SW2 Port 4 – SW3
Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
DTE (Terminal) on on on on on on off off off off off off
DCE (Modem) off off off off off off on on on on on on

Test switch setting

Switch SW16 is only used for factory testing; all of its switches must be set
to OFF for proper operation.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1112 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Figure 316
QSDI card option switch locations

Software service changes

Once the QPC841 QSDI card has been installed in the system, the
system software needs to be configured to recognize it. This is done
using the Configuration Record programLD 17. Instructions for running
the Configuration Record program are found in Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611).

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 1113

Some of the prompts that are commonly used when running the
Configuration Record program LD 17 are shown in Table 456 "LD 17 - Serial
port configuration parameters" (page 1113) These parameters must be
configured for each port that is being used.

Table 456
LD 17 - Serial port configuration parameters
Prompt Response Description
REQ: CHG Change configuration.
TYPE: CFN Configuration type.
IOTB YES Change input/output devices.
ADAN NEW TTY x Define a new system terminal (printer) port as device x, where x
= 0 to 15.
NEW PRT x
CDNO 1-16 Use the QSDI card number to keep track of all ports.
DENS DDEN Double density SDI paddle board.
USER xxx Enter the user of port x. The values that can be entered
depend on the software being used. See Software Input/Output
Reference — Administration (NN43001-611) for details.
XSM NO YES Port is used for the system monitor.

Applications
The QPD841 Quad Serial Data Interface (QSDI) card is used to connect the
switch to a variety of communication devices and peripherals. Any RS-232-C
compatible device can be connected to any of the four serial ports.
The standard application for the QSDI card is to connect the switch to the
system console. This can be either a direct connection if the console is
located near the switch, or through a modem for remote maintenance.
Bell 103/212 compatible dumb modems are recommended to connect a
remote data terminal. If a smart modem (such as a Hayes modem) is used,
select the dumb mode of operation (Command Recognition OFF, Command
Echo OFF) before connecting the modem to the asynchronous port.
Serial data interface connector J1 is a standard RS-232-C DB-25 connector
that connects port 1 of the QSDI card to outside peripherals. Connector J2
is non-standard in that it contains the connections for the three remaining
serial ports (ports 2, 3, and 4), on a single DB-25 connector. An adapter
cable must be used to connect to standard RS-232-C peripherals. Cables
that are applicable to the QSDI card are:
• SDI male-to-female flat cables (internal module use only)
— NT8D82

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1114 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

— QCAD290
Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to
Equipment Identification (NN43001-254) for more information

— QCAD42

• SDI male-to-male round cables (external use only)

— NT8D95

• SDI to I/O cables (system options use only)

— NT8D82

Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Equipment

Identification (NN43001-254) for more information

• SDI multiple-port cable (internal system options use only)

— NT8D90

• SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cables (system options use only)

— NT8D95

Note: This cable is available in different lengths. Refer to Equipment

Identification (NN43001-254) for more information

• SID Multiple-port cable (system options use only)

— NT8D96

Figure 317 "QPC841 QSDI card cabling" (page 1115) shows the QPC841
card and the cables listed above in a standard configuration.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Applications 1115

Figure 317
QPC841 QSDI card cabling

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1116 QPC841 Quad Serial Data Interface card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1117

The TDS/DTR card

Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1117)

"Features" (page 1117)

Introduction
The TDS/DTR card function was incorporated into the NTDK20 SSC.
However, it is still supported on the system.
The TDS/DTR functionality is also incorporated into the NTDK97 MSC card
used with Chassis system. The TDS/DTR is not required in a 2 chassis
Chassis system.
You can install this card in slots 1 through 9 in the main cabinet. The card is
not supported in the expansion cabinets.
it must be manually programmed in LD 13 (for DTR) and LD 17 (for TDS
and TTY).
The TDS/DTR card provides:
• 30 channels of Tone and Digit Switch
• Two Serial Data Interface ports
• 8 tone detection circuits configured as Digitone Receivers

Features
Tone transmitter
The TDS/DTR tone transmitter provides 30 channels of tone transmission.
Up to 256 tones are available as u-Law or A-Law and up to 256 bursts and
cadences are downloaded from the CPU.

The TDS/DTR card does not provide the Music on Hold feature as do other
TDS cards. The music source must come from a standard trunk card.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1118 The TDS/DTR card

Tone detector
The TDS/DTR card provides eight channels of DTMF (Dual Tone
Multi-Frequency) detection in A-Law or µ-Law.

In North America, pre-programmed data is configured for µ-Law tone

detection.

SDI function
The TDS/DTR card provides two SDI (Serial Data Interface) ports.

Refer to "SDI ports" in Communication Server 1000M and Meridian 1 Large

System Planning and Engineering (NN43021-220) for more information.

Tones and cadences

The following tables give the tones and cadences provided by the NTAK03
TDS/DTR card.

Table 457
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 Mu-Law tones and cadence
Precision
Frequency dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
1 350/440 -23/-23 ÷
2* (533 + 666) x 10 -23/-23 ÷
3 440 -23 ÷
4 350/440 -19/-19 ÷
5 440/480 -25/-25 ÷
6 480 -23 ÷
7 480/620 -30/-30 ÷
8 1020 -16 ÷
9 600 -23 ÷
10 600 -16 ÷
11 440/480 -22/-22 ÷
12 350/480 -23/-23 ÷
13 440/620 -24/-24 ÷
14 940/1630 -12/-10 P
15 700/1210 -12/-10 1
16 700/1340 -12/-10 2
17 700/1480 -12/-10 3
18 770/1210 -12/-10 4

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Features 1119

Precision
Frequency dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
19 770/1340 -12/-10 5
20 770/1480 -12/-10 6
21 850/1210 -12/-10 7
22 850/1340 -12/-10 8
23 850/1480 -12/-10 9
24 940/1340 -12/-10 0
25 940/1210 -12/-10 *
26 940/1480 -12/-10 #
27 700/1630 -12/-10 Fo
28 770/1630 -12/-10 F
29 850/1630 -12/-10 I
30* reserved
31 reserved
32* reserved
33 400 -19 ÷
34 [400 x (120@85%)] -19 ÷
35 940/1630 -17/-15 P
36 700/1210 -17/-15 1
37 700/1340 -17/-15 2
38 700/1480 -17/-15 3
39 770/1210 -17/-15 4
40 770/1340 -17/-15 5
41 770/1480 -17/-15 6
42 850/1210 -17/-15 7
43 850/1340 -17/-15 8
44 850/1480 -17/-15 9
45 940/1340 -17/-15 0
46 940/1210 -17/-15 *
47 940/1480 -17/-15 #
48 700/1630 -17/-15 Fo
49 770/1630 -17/-15 F
50 850/1630 -17/-15 I

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1120 The TDS/DTR card

Precision
Frequency dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
51* reserved
52* reserved
53 1300/1500 -13/-13 0
54 700/900 -13/-13 1
55 700/1100 -13/-13 2/CC
56 900/1100 -13/-13 3
57 700/1300 -13/-13 4
58 900/1300 -13/-13 5
59 1100/1300 -13/-13 6
60 700/1500 -13/-13 7
61 900/1500 -13/-13 8
62 1100/1500 -13/-13 9
63 700/1700 -13/-13 ST3P/RB/
C11
64 900/1700 -13/-13 STP/C12
65 1100/1700 -13/-13 KP/CR/KP1
66 1300/1700 -13/-13 ST2P/KP2
67 1500/1700 -13/-13 ST/CC
68 400 -11 ÷
69 400 -14 ÷
70 400 x 50 -14 ÷
71* (533 + 666) x 20 -23/-23 ÷
72* reserved
73 350/440 -15/-15 ÷
74 480/620 -15/-15 ÷
75 440/480 -15/-15 ÷
76 400 -25 ÷
77 400/450 -14/-14 ÷
78 480/620 -19/-19 ÷
79 440/480 -19/-19 ÷
80 480 -19 ÷
81 420 -9 ÷
82 440 -29 ÷

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Features 1121

Precision
Frequency dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
83* reserved
84 350/440 -17/-17 ÷
85 400/450 -17/-17 ÷
86 400 -17 ÷
87 1400 -26 ÷
88 950 -12 ÷
89 1400 -12 ÷
90 1800 -12 ÷
91 470 0 ÷
92 940 0 ÷
93 1300 0 ÷
94 1500 0 ÷
95 1880 0 ÷
96 350/440 -10/-10
97* TBD
98* TBD
99* TBD
100* TBD
101 600 -19 ÷
102 800 -19 ÷
103 1400 -23 ÷
104 820 -7

Note: Tones #1 - 16 (inclusive) and #234 - 249 (inclusive) are included

for Norwegian and Malaysian specifications.
Tones marked with * are not supported by IP sets and therefore should
not be selected in any system that has IP sets.

Table 458
NTAK03, NTDK20, and NTDK97 A-Law tones and cadences
Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
1 940 X 1630 -14/-13 P
2 700 X 1210 -14/-13 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1122 The TDS/DTR card

Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
3 700 X 1340 -14/-13 2
4 700 X 1480 -14/-13 3
5 770 X 1210 -14/-13 4
6 770 X 1340 -14/-13 5
7 770 X 1480 -14/-13 6
8 850 X 1210 -14/-13 7
9 850 X 1340 -14/-13 8
10 850 X 1480 -14/-13 9
11 940 X 1340 -14/-13 0
12 940 X 1210 -14/-13 *
13 940 X 1480 -14/-13 #
14 700 X 1630 -14/-13 F0
15 770 X 1630 -14/-13 F
16 850 X 1630 -14/-13 I
17 1400 -37
89 940/1630 -13/-12 P
90 700/1210 -13/-12 1
91 700/1340 -13/-12 2
92 700/1480 -13/-12 3
93 770/1210 -13/-12 4
94 770/1340 -13/-12 5
95 770/1480 -13/-12 6
96 850/1210 -13/-12 7
97 850/1340 -13/-12 8
98 850/1480 -13/-12 9
99 940/1210 -13/-12 0
100 940/1340 -13/-12 *
101 940/1480 -13/-12 #
102 700/1630 -13/-12 F0
103 770/1630 -13/-12 F0
104 850/1630 -13/-12 I
105 350/440 -17/-17 ÷

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Features 1123

Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
106 400/450 -17/-17 ÷
107 1400 -26 ÷
108 440 -23 ÷
109 420 -9 ÷
110 950 -12 ÷
111 1400 -12 ÷
112 1800 -12 ÷
113 940/1630 -12/-10 P
114 700/1210 -12/-10 1
115 700/1340 -12/-10 2
116 700/1480 -12/-10 3
117 770/1210 -12/-10 4
118 770/1340 -12/-10 5
119 770/1480 -12/-10 6
120 850/1210 -12/-10 7
121 850/1340 -12/-10 8
122 850/1480 -12/-10 9
123 940/1340 -12/-10 0
124 940/1210 -12/-10 *
125 940/1480 -12/-10 #
126 700/1630 -12/-10 F0
127 770/1630 -12/-10 F
128 850/1630 -12/-10 I
129 350/440 -22/-22 ÷
130 400 -19 ÷
131 400 -25 ÷
132 400/450 -22/-22 ÷
133 1400 -15 ÷
134 950 -19 ÷
135 1400 -20 ÷
136 1800 -20 ÷
137 420 -19 ÷
138 940/1630 -18/-17 P

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1124 The TDS/DTR card

Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
139 700/1210 -18/-17 1
140 700/1340 -18/-17 2
141 700/1480 -18/-17 3
142 770/1210 -18/-17 4
143 770/1340 -18/-17 5
144 770/1480 -18/-17 6
145 850/1210 -18/-17 7
146 850/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 8
147 850/1480 -18/-17 ÷ 9
148 940/1340 -18/-17 ÷ 0
149 940/1210 -18/-17 ÷ *
150 940/1480 -18/-17 ÷ #
151 700/1630 -18/-17 F0
152 770/1630 -18/-17 F
153 850/1630 -18/-17 I
154* (533 + 666) X 10 -23 ÷
155* (533 + 666) X 20 -23 ÷
156 400 -12 ÷
157 820 -14 ÷
158 420 -12 ÷
159 420 -25 ÷
160 420 X 25 -12 ÷
161* (553 + 666) X 10 -23 ÷
162* (553 + 666) X 20 -23 ÷
163 420 -22 ÷
164 480 -22 ÷
165 330 -11 ÷
166 330/440 -11/-14 ÷
167 1700 -19 ÷
168 440 -14 ÷
169 380 -8 ÷
170 1400 -32 ÷

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Features 1125

Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
171 820 -7 P
172 850 -8 1
173 420 -32 2
174* reserved 3
175 420 -6 4
176 420 -2 5
177 1020 -13 6
178 1800 -17 7
179 1400 -23 8
180 950 -29 9
181 1400 -29 0
182 1800 -29 *
183 950 -22 #
184 470 0 F0
185 940 0 F
186 1880 0 I
187 400 -22
188 420 X 25 -17
189 950 -16
190 950 -25
191 940/1630 -9/-7
192 700/1210 -9/-7
193 700/1340 -9/-7
194 700/1480 -9/-7
195 770/1210 -9/-7
196 770/1340 -9/-7
197 770/1480 -9/-7
198 850/1210 -9/-7
199 850/1340 -9/-7
200 850/1480 -9/-7
201 940/1340 -9/-7
202 940/1210 -9/-7
203 940/1480 -9/-7

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1126 The TDS/DTR card

Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
204 700/1630 -9/-7
205 770/1630 -9/-7
206 850/1630 -9/-7
207 420 -10
208 420 -8
209 420 -4
210 1400 -18
211 1400 -9
212 350/420 -9/-9
213 420 -14
214 450 -12
215 450 -22
216 820 -16
217 350/420 -14/-14
218 940/1630 -14/-12
219 700/1210 -14/-12
220 700/1340 -14/-12
221 700/1480 -14/-12
222 770/1210 -14/-12
223 770/1340 -14/-12
224 770/1480 -14/-12
225 850/1210 -14/-12
226 850/1340 -14/-12
227 850/1480 -14/-12
228 940/1340 -14/-12
229 940/1210 -14/-12
230 940/1480 -14/-12
231 700/1630 -14/-12
232 770/1630 -14/-12
233 850/1630 -14/-12
234 940 X 1630 -17/-15 p
235 700 X 1210 -17/-15 1

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Features 1127

Precision
dB below Ringing DTMF
Tone # Frequency (Hz) overload Tones Digits MF Digits
236 700 X 1340 -17/-15 2
237 700 X 1480 -17/-15 3
238 770 X 1210 -17/-15 4
239 770 X 1340 -17/-15 5
240 770 X 1480 -17/-15 6
241 850 X 1210 -17/-15 7

Note: Tones marked with * are not supported by IP sets and therefore
should not be selected in any system that has IP sets.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1128 The TDS/DTR card

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1129

Appendix A
LAPB Data Link Control protocol
Contents
This section contains information on the following topics:

"Introduction" (page 1129)

"Operation" (page 1129)

"Frame structure" (page 1130)

"LAPB balanced class of procedure" (page 1131)

"Commands and responses" (page 1131)

"Description of procedure" (page 1132)

Introduction
This chapter describes the LAPB Data Link Control protocol used with the
QPC513 ESDI card. The protocol is a subset of the HDLC procedures
which are described in International Organization for Standardization
procedures ISO 3309-1979 (E), ISO 4335-1979 (E) and appendices 1 and
2, and ISO 6256-1981 (E). Refer to these procedures for complete LAPB
details. Applications which use an ESDI port in synchronous mode must
conform to the following requirements.

Operation
Circuit Switch Equipment transfers data to the QPC513 in blocks consisting
of 1 to 128 eight-bit octets. Each block is processed in accordance with the
LAPB subset of the HDLC protocol and transmitted serially to the line at a
rate determined by the downloaded parameters.

The QPC513 card receives data serially from the line, packaged in LAPB
information frames. After determining that a block is error free, the data is
supplied to the Circuit Switch Equipment as a block.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1130 Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol

Frame structure
All transmissions are in frames and each frame conforms to the format
shown in Table 459 "LAPB frame structure" (page 1130). In particular,
frame elements for applications using a port on the QPC513 follow these
LAPB conventions:
• Zero information field is permitted.
• Inter-frame time fill is accomplished by transmitting contiguous flags.
This is compatible with AT&T Technical Requirement BX.25 and ADCCP
standards.
• Extensions for the address field or the control field are not permitted.
This requirement imposes constraints to satellite operations.
• Individual station addresses are assigned in service change for
balanced configuration. The default ESDI address is 10000000. The
far-end default address is 11000000.
• The LAPB basic control field (modules 8) format is implemented.
• Frame check sequence is implemented in accordance with LAPB
procedures.

Table 459
LAPB frame structure
Flag Address Control Information FCS Flag
01111110 8 bits 8 bits unspecified 16 bits 01111110
(no. of bits)
Legend:
Flag: Flag sequence – All frames start and end with the flag sequence. (A single flag is used as both
the closing flag for one frame and the opening flag for the next frame.)

Address: Station address field – In command frames, the address identifies the station for whom
the command is intended. In response frames, the address identifies the station from which the
response originated.

Control: Control field – This field contains commands or responses and sequence numbers.

Information: Information field – Information may be any sequence of bits, usually related to a
convenient character structure such as an octet, but may be an unspecified number (from 1 to
128) of bits unrelated to a character structure.

FCS: Frame check sequence.

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 Commands and responses 1131

LAPB balanced class of procedure

Applications which use ports on the QPC513 are automatically designated
as BAC, 2, 8 (for example, balanced operation, asynchronous balanced
mode class of procedure with optional functions 2 and 8 implemented).

Balanced configuration
A balanced configuration is one in which two combined stations share
identical responsibilities for exchanging data and control information and
for initiating error recovery functions, as shown in Figure 318 "Balanced
configuration" (page 1131).

Combined station
A combined station has balanced link control capability and transmits both
commands and responses to, and receives both commands and responses
from the other combined station.

Figure 318
Balanced configuration

Asynchronous Balanced Mode

Asynchronous Balanced Mode (ABM) is a balanced, configured operational
mode in which either combined station may send commands at any time
and may initiate certain response frame transmissions without receiving
permission from the other combined station.

Commands and responses

The elements of procedure are described in terms of actions which take
place when a command is received. The classes of procedures are a
combination of the frame structure and the set of elements that satisfy the
requirements of a specific application. The LAPB Balanced Asynchronous
Class of Procedure (BAC, 2, 8) is implemented. This is compatible with
both BX.25 and ADCCP specifications. The basic set of commands and
responses is listed in Table 460 "Commands and responses" (page 1131).

Table 460
Commands and responses
Command Response Option
I 8
RR RR

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

 1132 Appendix A LAPB Data Link Control protocol

Command Response Option

RNR RNR
REJ REJ or FRMR 2
SABM UA
DISC DM
Legend:
I: Information
RR: Receive ready
RNR: Receive not ready
REJ: Reject
SABM: Set asynchronous balanced mode
DISC: Disconnect
RSET: Reset
FRMR: Frame reject
UA: Unnumbered acknowledge
DM: Disconnect mode
Option 2: Provides ability for more timely reporting of I frame sequence errors
Option 8: Limits the procedure to allow I frames to be commands only

Description of procedure
The basic LAPB procedures must be implemented to satisfy the following:
• standard use of the poll/final bit (for more information, see
ISO-4375-1979-[E])
• exception condition reporting and recovery implemented in accordance
with BX.25 and ADCCP specifications
• link set-up and disconnect implemented according to BX.25
specifications

Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference
NN43001-311 01.04 Standard
Release 5.0 23 May 2008
Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine
 Nortel Communication Server 1000

Circuit Card Reference

Copyright © 2003-2008, Nortel Networks
All Rights Reserved.

Publication: NN43001-311
Document status: Standard
Document version: 01.04
Document date: 23 May 2008

To provide feedback or report a problem with this document, go to http://www.nortel.com/documentfeedback.

Sourced in Canada

LEGAL NOTICE

While the information in this document is believed to be accurate and reliable, except as otherwise expressly agreed to in writing
NORTEL PROVIDES THIS DOCUMENT "AS IS" WITHOUT WARRANTY OR CONDITION OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED. The information and/or products described in this document are subject to change without notice.

Nortel, the Nortel Logo, the Globemark, SL-1, Meridian1, and Succession are trademarks of Nortel Networks.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine